HomeMy WebLinkAboutSpecifications (2) RECEIVED
ors 10 1113
CITY OFTIGARD
"lo
LEDING DIVISION
FOODS
M AR K ET
85% Permit Documents
Project Specifications
WHOLE FOODS MARKET
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
Greenway Town Center
Tigard, Oregon City of Tigard
AAp roved Plans / j l�
October 4, 2013 By Date
(,)1 2 - '24S
i 2_2_ 2._0 s Sc-kOt15 fevrj 1d
OFFICE COPY
Cushing Terrell, Architects Engineers CUSHING
200 West Mercer Street, Suite 503
Seattle, Washington 98119 • TERRELL
Ph: (206) 282-6222
ARCHITECTS FNCIINF. ERS
Fax: (206) 282-7350
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD, OREGON
TABLE OF CONTENTS
LEGAL AND PROCEDURAL REQUIREMENTS PAGES
INVITATION TO BID 1
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1 - 5
SUPPLEMENTAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1 - 2
SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM 1
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGES
DIVISION 01 -GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
011000 SUMMARY 1 - 6
011200 MULTIPLE CONTRACT SUMMARY 1 -4
012300 ALTERNATES 1 -2
012600 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 1 -3
012900 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 1 -3
013100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 1 -7
013200 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 1 -5
013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 1 - 8
014000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 1 -6
014200 REFERENCES 1 - 2
015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 1 -6
015719 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AND EMERGENCY PLAN 1 -27
016000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 1 - 6
017300 EXECUTION 1 -5
017329 CUTTING AND PATCHING 1 -4
017419 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 1 - 6
017700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 1 -5
017823 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 1 -4
017839 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 1 -3
017900 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 1 - 3
018113.13 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS -GREEN GLOBES FOR NEW
CONSTRUCTION 1 -4
DIVISION 02-EXISTING CONDITIONS
024119 SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 1 - 5
DIVISION 03-CONCRETE
033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 1 - 9
033600 SPECIAL CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHES 1 - 5
DIVISION 05-METALS
055213 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 1 - 5
TABLE OF CONTENTS 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET- GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD, OREGON
DIVISION 06-WOOD,PLASTICS,AND COMPOSITES
061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY 1 -5
062023 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 1 -5
064113 WOOD-VENEER-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 1 -7
064116 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 1 - 7
066400 PLASTIC PANELING 1 -3
DIVISION 07-THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
071326 SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 1 -3
072100 THERMAL INSULATION 1 - 5
076200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 1 -6
077200 ROOF ACCESSORIES 1 -4
079200 JOINT SEALANTS 1 -9
DIVISION 08-OPENINGS
081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 1 -7
081416 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 1 -5
083819 RIGID TRAFFIC DOORS 1 -2
084113 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 1 - 8
084229 AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES 1 - 12
087100 DOOR HARDWARE 1 - 12
088000 GLAZING 1 - 6
DIVISION 09-FINISHES
092216 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 1 -6
092900 GYPSUM BOARD 1 -6
093000 TILING 1 - 5
095113 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 1 -5
096513 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 1 - 3
096723 RESINOUS FLOORING 1 - 5
099123 INTERIOR PAINTING 1 -7
099300 STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING 1 - 5
DIVISION 10-SPECIALTIES
101100 VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES 1 -4
101400 SIGNAGE 1 - 3
102113 TOILET COMPARTMENTS 1 -4
102600 WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION 1 -3
102800 TOILET,BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 1 - 5
104413 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS I - 3
104416 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 1 -3
DIVISION 12- FURNISHINGS
122413 - ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 1 -4
123661 - SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS 1 -3
DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION
21 1100 FACILITY FIRE-SUPPRESSION WATER-SERVICE PIPING 1 - 7
211313 WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 1 - 18
211316 DRY-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 1 - 16
TABLE OF CONTENTS 2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
DIVISION 22-PLUMBING
221116 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 1 -6
221119 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 1 -9
221123 DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS 1 -4
221316 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 1 -8
221319 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 1 -7
223400 FUEL-FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 1 -6
224000 PLUMBING FIXTURES 1 - 15
DIVISION 23-HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING
230500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING AND HVAC 1 - 11
230513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 1 - 6
230519 METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 1 -4
230523 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 1 -6
230529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT 1 - 8
230548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING AND
HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 1 -9
230553 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING AND HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 1 -4
230593 TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 1 -5
230700 HVAC INSULATION 1 - 11
230993 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS 1 - 5
231123 FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 1 -9
233113 METAL DUCTS 1 - 14
233300 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 1 -9
233423 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 1 - 7
233713 DIFFUSERS,REGISTERS,AND GRILLES 1 -3
233813 COMMERCIAL-KITCHEN HOODS 1 - 8
235100 BREECHINGS,CHIMNEYS,AND STACKS 1 -3
235523 GAS-FIRED RADIANT HEATERS 1 -4
235533 FUEL-FIRED UNIT HEATERS 1 -4
236395 REFRIGERATION INSTALLATION 1 -48
237400 PACKAGED OUTDOOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 1 -6
237433 DEDICATED OUTDOOR-AIR UNITS 1 - 10
238126 SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS 1 -4
238315 QUARTZ ELECTRIC INFRARED HEATERS 1 -2
DIVISION 26-ELECTRICAL
260500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 1 -3
260519 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 1 - 5
260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 1 -3
260529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 1 -5
260533 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 1 -7
260553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 1 - 7
260573 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION AND
ARC FLASH STUDY 1 - 8
260943 NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS 1 - 5
262200 LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 1 -4
262413 SWITCHBOARDS 1 -6
262416 PANELBOARDS 1 -7
262726 WIRING DEVICES 1 -6
TABLE OF CONTENTS 3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
262813 FUSES 1 -3
262816 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 1 -5
262913 ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS 1 -7
265100 INTERIOR LIGHTING 1 -7
DIVISION 28-ELECTRICAL SAFETY AND SECURITY
283111 DIGITAL,ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 1 - 8
TABLE OF CONTENTS 4
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85% PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
INVITATION TO BID
PROJECT: WHOLE FOODS MARKET
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
12220 SW Scholls Ferry Road
Tigard,OR 97223
CT Project No.: WFGNW
Date: October 4,2013
OWNER: Whole Food Markets-Pacific Northwest Region(South)
3535 NE 15th Avenue
Portland,OR 97212
GENERAL J.R.Abbott Construction
CONTRACTOR: 307 SE Hawthorne Avenue, SU 150
Portland,OR 97214
Attention: Ryan Sexton
ARCHITECT: Cushing Terrell
200 West Mercer Street, Suite 503
Seattle,WA 98119
Phone: (406)248-7455
Having received this package directly from the General Contractor(GC)named above,you are invited to
Bid on Subcontracts including Mechanical and Electrical Work, and other trades and materials for
construction of the above named Project.
All Bids must be on a lump sum basis. Project to be completed within the schedule provided by the
General Contractor. The GC will receive Bids directly at their office until a time designated by the GC.
Drawings and Project Manual may be examined at the General Contractor's and Cushing Terrell
Architects.
Drawings and Project Manual may be obtained from General Contractor.
Upon request and with the Owner's approval, Cushing Terrell will issue individual sheets of the Contract
Drawings at a cost of$4.00 per sheet and individual pages of the Project Manual at a cost of$0.50 per
page. The party requesting partial documents must state, specifically, which portions of the Contract
Documents is desired after reviewing a complete set of Contract Documents. The responsibility for
obtaining sufficient information for bidding purposes from the complete Contract Documents shall remain
with the party requesting partial Documents. The General Contractor will maintain plan holder lists for
distribution of addenda or other notices and prior approvals
No Bidder may withdraw his Bid for at least thirty(30) days after the scheduled time for receipt of Bids
except as noted in the Instruction to Bidders.
The Owner reserves the right to waive irregularities and accept or reject any or all Bids.
INVITATION TO BID 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
1. ARTICLE 1 -DEFINITIONS
Bidding Documents include the Invitation to Bid, Instructions to Bidders, the Bid Form, and the
proposed Contract Documents including any Addenda prior to receipt of Bids.
Addenda are written or graphic instruments issued by the Architect prior to the execution of the
Contract which modify or interpret the Bidding Documents by additions, deletions, clarifications, or
corrections.
A Bid is a complete and properly signed proposal to do the Work for the sums stipulated therein,
submitted in accordance with the Bidding Documents.
Base Bid is the sum stated in the Bid for which the Bidder offers to perform the Work described as
the base,to which Work may be added or deducted for sums stated in Alternate Bids.
An Alternate Bid (or Alternate) is an amount stated in the Bid to be added to or deducted from the
amount of the Base Bid-if the corresponding change in the Work, as described in the Bidding
Documents,is accepted.
A Bidder is a person or entity who submits a Bid.
A Sub-bidder is a person or entity who submits a bid to a Bidder for materials,equipment,or labor for
a portion of the Work.
2. ARTICLE 2-BIDDER'S REPRESENTATIONS
a. Each bidder by making his Bid represents that:
He has read and understands the Bidding Documents and the Bid is made in accordance
therewith;and that he also understands Documents relating to other portions of the Project,if any,
being Bid separately and concurrently or presently under construction.
He has visited the site and has familiarized himself with the local conditions under which the
Work is to be performed.
His Bid is based upon the materials,systems and equipment described in the Bidding Documents
without exception.
b. Examination of Contract Documents and Site
Bidders shall carefully examine the Contract Documents and the construction site to obtain first-
hand knowledge of existing and local conditions. Neither adjustment in subcontract price nor
subcontract time will be made for conditions which can be determined by examining the site and
Contract Documents. Bidders may examine the site at their convenience during construction
hours.
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85% PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
Submit all questions about the Drawings and Specifications in writing to J.R. Abbott
Construction of Portland at the location listed on the Invitation to Bid. Replies requiring a change
to the documents will be issued to all Bidders of record as Addenda and will become part of the
Contract Documents. J.R. Abbott Construction and the Owner will not be responsible for oral
clarification. Questions received less than seven (7) days before the Bid opening may not be
answered.
3. ARTICLE 3 -BIDDING DOCUMENTS
a. Copies
Bidding Documents may be obtained from the General Contractor J.R. Abbott Construction of
Portland.
Bidding Documents will not be issued to Sub or Third Tier bidders or others unless specifically
approved by the General Contractor.
Complete sets of Bidding Documents shall be used in preparing bids; neither the Owner,
Architect or General Contractor assumes responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting
from the use of an incomplete set of Bidding Documents. The Owner or Architect in making
copies of the Bidding Documents available on above items, do so only for the purpose of
obtaining Bids on the Work and do not confer a license or grant permission for any other use.
b. Interpretation or Correction of Bidding Documents
Bidders shall promptly notify the Architect through the General Contractor of any ambiguity,
inconsistency or error,which they may discover upon examination of the Bidding Documents or
of the site and local conditions.
Bidders requiring clarification or interpretation of the Bidding Documents shall make such a
request to the Architect prior to Bid opening.
Any interpretation,correction or change of the Bidding Documents will be made by Addendum.
Interpretations, corrections, or change of the Bidding Documents made in any other manner will
not be binding,and Bidders shall not rely upon such interpretations,corrections and changes.
c. Substitutions
Refer to Section Product Substitutions in Division 01 -of the Specifications.
_ d. Addenda
Addenda and or Plan Revisions will be distributed to all Bidders and Sub-bidders of record by the
General Contractor.
Each Bidder shall ascertain prior to submitting his Bid that he has received all Addenda issued,
and he shall acknowledge their receipt on his Bid.
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85% PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
4. ARTICLE 4-BIDDING PROCEDURE
a. Form and Style of Bids
Bids shall be submitted in duplicate on the forms provided by or approved by the General
Contractor.
It is recommended to make bids in writing, expressed in both words and figures, and in case of
discrepancy between the two, the written amount shall govern. It is also recommended that any
inter-lineation,alteration or,erasure must be initialed by the signer of the Bid.
Bidders must submit with their Bids a list of Subcontractors or Organizations proposed for the
portions of the Work not provided by the submitting Bidder.
Each copy of the Bid shall include the legal name of Bidder and a statement whether Bidder is a
sole proprietor, a partnership, a corporation, or other legal entity. Each copy shall be signed by
the person,or persons legally authorized to bind the Bidder to a contract. A Bid by a corporation
shall further give the State of Incorporation and have the corporate seal affixed.
Bids shall include the Oregon State Contractor's License number of the Bidder.
b. Bid Security
None required for invited Bidders unless otherwise noted.
c. Submission of Bids
Bids shall be deposited at the designated location prior to the time and date for receipt of Bids
provided by the General Contractor.
Bidder shall assume full responsibility for timely delivery at location designated for receipt of
Bids.
Oral,telephonic or telegraphic Bids may be considered if approved by the General Contractor.
d. Modification or Withdrawal of Bid
A Bid may not be modified, withdrawn or cancelled by the Bidder within 60 days following the
time and date designated for the receipts of Bids,and Bidder so agrees in submitting his Bid.
Prior to the time and date designated for receipt of Bids,Bids submitted early may be modified or
withdrawn by notice to the party receiving Bids at the place designated for receipt of Bids.
5. ARTICLE 5-CONSIDERATION OF BIDS
a. Rejection of Bids
The Owner and General Contractor shall have the right to reject any or all Bids, or reject a Bid
found in any way to be incomplete or irregular.
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
b. Acceptance of Bid(Award)
J.R. Abbott Construction and the Owner reserve the right in awarding Contracts to consider the
competency, responsibility and suitability of the Bidder, as well as the amounts of the various
Bids. Contracts will not necessarily be awarded to the lowest Bidders. J.R. Abbott Construction
further reserves the right to accept or reject Alternates in an order or combination, to accept or
reject any Bid, to waive any irregularities, or informalities and to award Contracts in the best
interest of the Owner and J.R.Abbott Construction.
The Owner shall have the right to accept Alternates in any order or combination and to determine
the low Bidder on the basis of the sum of the Base Bid and the Alternates accepted.
6. ARTICLE 6-CONTRACTOR'S QUALIFICATION STATEMENT
Bidders to whom award of a Contract is under consideration shall submit to the General Contractor
upon his request, a properly executed Contractor's Qualifications Statement, AIA Document A305,
unless such a statement has been previously required and submitted as a prerequisite to the issuance
of Bidding Documents.
7. ARTICLE 7-PERFORMANCE BOND,LABOR&MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND
No Performance or Material Payment Bonds are required for bidding.
8. ARTICLE 8-FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR
a. Form of Agreement
J.R. Abbott Construction will issue Subcontract Agreements and/or Purchase Order Agreements
to successful Bidders contingent upon the execution of a Contract Agreement between J.R.
Abbott Construction of and Owner. The agreement between the Owner and J.R. Abbott
Construction is AIA A117 with General Conditions. Subcontractors and Suppliers will be bound
to the conditions of this agreement.
b. Scheduling
J.R.Abbott Construction will provide and update the Project Schedule.
c. Notice to Proceed
Notice to Proceed shall be issued contingent upon the execution of a Contract for that portion of
the work between J.R.Abbott Construction and the Owner.
9. ARTICLE 9-PROPER LICENSE
a. Bidder shall hold an Oregon Public Contractor's License of the proper classification for the work
of their proposal.
Bidders shall also hold all appropriate permits and licenses required by the City of Tigard and any
other jurisdictions having authority over the Project site.
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 4
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
b. Insurance Requirements
Subcontractors must obtain the insurance listed below prior to beginning work on this Project.
Proof of insurance must be submitted on Accord Form 25.
The following minimum limits are required:
• Commercial General Liability Insurance
$1,000,000 for each occurrence
$2,000,000 aggregate
$1,000,000 Products/Completed Operations Aggregate
• Automobile Liability Insurance
$300,000 Combined Single Limit
• Employer's Liability Insurance
$500,000 Each accident,each employee,each disease
J.R.Abbott Construction,the Owner and the Landlord, (Regency Centers, Portland,Oregon)shall
be listed as additional insured with waivers of subrogation on liability policies.
Liability policies shall have a 30 day notice of cancellation.
Proof of unemployment insurance in the form of a current letter of good standing from the
Oregon Department of Unemployment is required.
Proof of workers' compensation insurance in the form of a current letter of good standing from
the Oregon Department of Workers'Compensation is required.
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 5
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SUPPLEMENTAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
The Supplemental Instructions to Bidders:
The Supplemental Instructions to Bidders provide additional direction for the delivery of proposal for the
Project named in this Project Manual.
1. EXAMINATION.Contractors will not be given extra payments for conditions that can be
determined by examining the site and documents.
2. QUESTIONS. Bidders and Sub-bidders requiring clarification or interpretation of the Bidding
Documents shall make a written request which shall reach the Architect at least ten days prior to the
date for receipt of Bids.
3. CONFLICTS IN CONTRACT DOCUMENT. Contract Documents shall consist of the following
component parts:
a. Request for Bids from General Contractor.
b. Addendum No._,dated _
c. Addendum No. ,dated
d. The Accepted Proposal.
e. General Conditions of the Contract.
f. Supplementary General Conditions.
g. Specifications.
h. Plans and Drawings(Large Scale over Small Scale).
i. This Instrument.
In the event that any provision in any of the component part of the Contract conflicts with any provision
of any other component part,the provision in the component part first enumerated herein shall govern,
except as otherwise specifically stated.
4. SUBSTITUTION. All Prior Approvals shall be acted upon only when submitted using the enclosed
Prior Approval Request Form or provision of similar information.
5. BID SECURITY.
None required of invited Bidders.
6. PERFORMANCE BOND AND LABOR AND MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND.
None required of invited Bidders.
7. SUB-SUB-CONTRACTORS. Names of principal sub-sub-Contractors must be listed and attached
to the Bid. There shall be only one subcontractor named for each classification listed.
8. TIME OF COMPLETION. The General Contractor will provide the schedule required for
completion of the Project. A proposal to complete the Work indicates an ability to meet the schedule
provided.
9. ADDENDA. Before making his Bid,the Contractor shall assure himself that he is in possession of
addenda issued.
SUPPLEMENTAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
10. SUBMITTAL. Submit proposals in accordance with the Invitation to Bid and direction of the
General Contractor.
11. CONTRACTOR'S LICENSE. Bidders shall be holder of a proper Oregon State Contractor's
License for this class of Work.
12. ELECTRONIC COPIES OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS.When the contract has been awarded
for a project,Cushing Terrell will release,upon request,electronic copies of the Contract Documents in
(2D-DWF format)to the General Contractor to administer to their various subcontractors and vendors
for the sole purpose of preparing submittals and shop drawings for the project.The Contractor and
subcontractor will be required to sign a Contractor Electronic File Release Form prior to being given the
electronic files. The electronic documents being released will be the same as those provided in the
Contract Documents but will not contain any Architectural or Engineering stamps or signatures.All
requests for electronic copies of the Contract Documents from the Contractors,subcontractors,or
vendors will need to be directed through the General Contractor.
(2D DWF,DWFx Electronic Files):Is a secure file format developed by Autodesk for the efficient
distribution and communication of design data to view,review,or print design files.The files can also
be scaled appropriately,snap to geometry and have its boundaries clipped as if it were a regular DWG
file.If the DWF file contains drawing layer information,individuals can control how the layers display.
The DWF files can also be attached to a new electronic drawing and used as a base sheet.
SUPPLEMENTAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 2
SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM CUSHING TERRELL ARCHITECTS ENGINEERS
One Specification Section per Form.(Fill in all Blanks)
Project:
We hereby submit for your review the following substitution for the following specified material for the above project:
Section Paragraph Specified Material
Proposed Substitution:
Attach all technical data,including laboratory tests,if applicable,in duplicate to allow the Architect/Engineer to review this
request.
Include complete information on changes to Drawings and/or Specifications which proposed substitution will require for its
proper installation.
A. Does the substitution affect dimensions shown on the Construction Documents? ❑ Yes ❑ No
(Explain)
B. By signature below, the undersigned agrees to pay all costs, including engineering and detailing costs, associated
with the incorporation of this product.
C. Does the substitution affect other trades? ❑ Yes ❑ No
(Explain)
D. What are the differences between the proposed substitution and specified product?
E. Manufacturer's guarantees of the proposed and specified item are same different
(Explain)
Cushing Terrell Architects Engineers shall continue our policy of recognizing acceptable substitutions by Addendum.
The undersigned states that the function,appearance and quality are equivalent or superior to the specified item.
Submitted By: For Use by Architect/Engineer:
Received Too Late Approved Except As Noted: —
Signature
Not Accepted
Firm
For bidding only. Final approval
subject to submittal data in accordance
Address with requirements of specifications.
Date Date 20_ Date 20
Phone By By
Email
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 011000- SUMMARY
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Work covered by the Contract Documents.
2. Work phases.
3. Work under other contracts.
4. Use of premises.
5. Owner's occupancy requirements.
6. Specification formats and conventions.
B. See Division 01 Section "Multiple Contract Summary" for division of responsibilities for the
Work.
1.2 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. Project Identification: Whole Foods Market-Greenway.
1. Project Location: 12220 SW Scholls Ferry Road,Tigard,Oregon 97223.
B. Owner: Whole Foods Market,Pacific Northwest Region.
1. Owner's Representative: Larry Rush, 3535 NE 15th Avenue,Portland,Oregon 97214.
C. Architect: Cushing Terrell Architects Engineers, 200 West Mercer Street, Suite 503, Seattle,
Washington 98121.
D. The Work consists of the following:
I. The Work includes tenant improvement of an existing retail space consisting of interior
construction with modifications to very limited areas of the existing building and site.
2. Work will encompass most standard construction disciplines including; concrete
foundation and slabs, metal framed walls, wood carpentry, millwork and finishes,
thermal and moisture protection, gypsum drywall, acoustic tile ceilings, plumbing,
HVAC,refrigeration and electrical systems.
E. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract.
1.3 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS
A. General:
SUMMARY 011000- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1. See the Project Plans for a description of equipment supplied by Owner and installed by
one or more trades under sub-contract to the General Contractor.
2. Separate Contracts will be issued to vendors and Contractors for Work on the Project.
3. The Owner or equipment suppliers will hire separate Contractors who will be responsible
for final details related to elements that may include; food service,refrigeration,interior
decor,and casework.
B. Contractors:
1. Major separate Contractors and the General Contractor (GC) and Sub-Contractor work
related to each include the following unless otherwise indicated:
a. Refrigeration Contractor:
1) GC and Subs Responsibility:
a) Receive all equipment.
b) Provided ME&P rough-in as described on the Drawings.
c) Set in place self-contained refrigeration equipment.
d) Complete all electrical and plumbing connections on self-contained
equipment.
e) Set in place all remote refrigeration equipment (with piped
refrigerant).
I) Observe and advise all electrical and plumbing connections.
2) Refrigeration Equipment Supplier Responsibility:
a) Coordinate receipt of all equipment supplied. —
b) Provide connection and start up assistance as described in
Specifications.
b. Refrigeration Electrical Contractor.
c. Food Service Contractor:
1) GC and Subs Responsibility:
a) Receive all equipment.
b) Provide backing for installation of equipment.
c) Provided ME&P Services or stub in as described on the Drawings.
d) Set in place all equipment.
e) Complete all electrical and plumbing connections on self-contained
equipment.
2) Food Service Contractor's Responsibility:
a) Coordinate equipment installation.
b) Trim and sealant installation of all equipment and food prep work
surfaces.
SUMMARY 011000-2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
c) Installation of stainless steel trim and other finishes,closures,etc. that
are described as or provided as part of the equipment packages.
d) Start up and operational assistance training.
d. Retail Millwork Contractor:
1) Note the Retail Millwork Contractor hired by the Owner does not provide
all millwork. See Drawing for clarification.
2) GC and Subs Responsibility:
a) Receive all materials and products.
b) Provide backing for installation of equipment.
c) Provided ME&P rough-in as described on the Drawings.
d) Complete all electrical and plumbing connections.
3) Retail Millwork Contractor's Responsibility:
a) Coordinate equipment installation.
b) Trim and sealant installation of all casework.
c) Start up and operational assistance training.
e. Information/Communication Systems.
1) GC and Subs Responsibility.
a) Receive all materials and products.
b) Provided ME&P rough-in as described on the Drawings.
2) Information/Communication Contractor's Responsibility:
a) Coordinate equipment installation.
b) Start up and operational assistance training.
c) Provide and install all communication(low voltage)conductors.
f. Interior Decor Contractors:
1) GC and Subs Responsibility:
a) Receive all materials and products.
b) Provide backing for installation of equipment and products.
c) Provided ME&P rough-in as described on the Drawings.
d) Complete all electrical and plumbing connections.
2) Interior Decor Contractor's Responsibility:
a) Install all equipment products.
b) Start up and operational assistance training.
g. Exterior Signage Contractors:
SUMMARY 011000- 3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1) GC and Subs Responsibility:
a) Receive all materials and products.
b) Provide backing for installation of signage.
c) Provided ME&P rough-in as described on the Drawings.
2) Exterior Signage Contractor's Responsibility:
a) Install all equipment products.
b) Start up and operational assistance training.
2. In addition to the specific efforts described in this Section and called for on the Drawings,
the General and Subcontractors will cooperate with and provide miscellaneous assistance
to all separate Contractors on an as needed basis.
a. The primary nature of the assistance will be schedule coordination,access to areas
of the project and joint use of delivery facilities, etc. Some technical, mechanical,
electrical and plumbing assistance will be needed as will labor assistance at times
with location of products or equipment. This work, which cannot be accurately
- described on Project Plans, is best budgeted as an allowance with the following as
an initial effort to be included in any Lump Sum or Guaranteed Maximum Price
General Contract Amounts.
1) Labor- 1 person half time for 2 weeks beginning 4 weeks prior to store turn
over.
2) Labor-2 persons full time for 2 weeks prior to store turn over.
3) Plumbing- 1 person 10 hrs per week 2 weeks prior to store turn over.
4) Electrical - 1 person 10 hrs per week 3 weeks prior to store turn over.
5) Supervisory time related to the efforts described above.
b. The above descriptions are intended to establish a joint amount of effort that may
be extended in assistance to separate Contractors, savings by one discipline or
trade will be credited toward work by other trades that exceed their description.
1.4 USE OF PREMISES
A. General: Contractor shall have full use of premises for construction operations,including use of
Project site,during construction period. Contractor's use of premises is limited only by Owner's
right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project.
1. Limits: Confine constructions operations to building interior, roof and front of building
and areas of site indicated for work.
2. Owner Occupancy: Allow for Owner occupancy of Project site and use by Owner's
representative.
3. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways,loading areas, and entrances serving
premises clear and available to Owner,Owner's employees,and emergency vehicles at all
times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials.
a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances.
SUMMARY 011000-4
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of
materials and equipment on-site.
B. Use of Existing Building: Maintain existing building in a weathertight condition throughout
construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations. Protect building and its
occupants during construction period.
1.5 OWNER'S OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS
A. Owner Occupancy of Completed Areas of Construction: Owner reserves the right to occupy
and to place and install equipment in completed areas of building, before Substantial
Completion, provided such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work. Such
placement of equipment and partial occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work.
1. Architect will work with the Contractor to prepare a Certificate of Substantial
Completion for each specific portion of the Work to be occupied before Owner
occupancy.
2. Obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from authorities having jurisdiction before Owner
occupancy.
3. Before partial Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully
operational, and required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed. On
occupancy, Owner will operate and maintain mechanical and electrical systems serving
occupied portions of building.
4. On occupancy, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service
for occupied portions of building.
1.6 WORK RESTRICTIONS
A. Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted within the building or within 100 feet of
entrances,operable windows,or outdoor air intakes.
1.7 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS
A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the
33-division format and CSI/CSC's"MasterFormat" numbering system.
1. Division 01: Sections in Division 01 govern the execution of the Work of all Sections in
the Specifications.
B. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and
the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations.
These conventions are as follows:
1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract
Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate.
Words implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words
SUMMARY 011000-5
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
shall be interpreted as plural, and plural words shall be interpreted as singular where
applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates.
2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications.
Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor.
Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for
clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by
others when so noted.
a. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context,
are implied where a colon(:)is used within a sentence or phrase.
PART 2-PRODUCTS(Not Used)
PART 3 -EXECUTION(Not Used)
END OF SECTION 011000
SUMMARY 011000-6
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 011200-MULTIPLE CONTRACT SUMMARY
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes a summary of each contract, including responsibilities for coordination
and temporary facilities and controls.
B. Specific requirements of each contract are also indicated in individual Specification Sections
and on Drawings.
C. See Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for general coordination
requirements.
D. See Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for specific requirements for
temporary facilities and controls.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Permanent Enclosure: As determined by Architect, permanent or temporary roofing is
complete, insulated, and weathertight; exterior walls are insulated and weathertight; and all
openings are closed with permanent construction or substantial temporary closures.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Project Coordinator shall be responsible for coordination between the General Construction
Contract and Other Separate Contracts for work on this Project.
I. General Construction Contractor shall act as Project Coordinator.
I.4 SUMMARY OF CONTRACTS
A. The project will include but not be limited to the following separate Contracts.
1. Food Service Contractor:
a. Supply and Install Food Service Equipment.
2. Retail Millwork Contractor:
a. Supply and Install Designated Interior Millwork.
b. Note the Retail Millwork Contractor hired by the Owner does not provide all
millwork. See Drawing for clarification.
MULTIPLE CONTRACT SUMMARY 011200- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
3. Information/Communication Systems Contractor.
a. Supply and install Information/Communication and POS systems.
4. Interior Decor Contractors:
a. Supply and install interior signage and selected finishes.
5. Exterior Signage Contractors:
a. Supply and install exterior signage.
1.5 PROJECT COORDINATOR
A. Project Coordinator: Full-time Project Coordinator shall be experienced in administration and
supervision of building construction,including mechanical and electrical work.
1. Coordination activities of Project Coordinator include, but are not limited to, the
following:
a. Provide overall coordination of the Work.
b. Coordinate shared access to workspaces.
c. Coordinate product selections for compatibility.
d. Provide overall coordination of temporary facilities and controls.
e. Coordinate, schedule, and approve interruptions of permanent and temporary
utilities,including those necessary to make connections for temporary services.
f. Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by each
contract and Owner's construction forces.
g. Prepare Coordination Drawings to coordinate work by more than one contract.
h. Coordinate sequencing and scheduling of the Work. Include the following:
1) Prepare a combined Contractor's Construction Schedule for entire Project.
Base schedule on Preliminary Construction Schedule. Secure time
commitments for performing critical construction activities from separate
contractors. Show activities of each contract on a separate sheet. Prepare a
simplified summary sheet indicating combined construction activities of
contracts.
i. Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate tests and inspections, and
coordinate schedule of tests and inspections.
j. Provide progress cleaning of common areas and coordinate progress cleaning of
areas or pieces of equipment where more than one contractor has worked.
k. Coordinate cutting and patching.
1. Coordinate protection of the Work.
m. Coordinate firestopping.
n. Coordinate completion of interrelated punch list items.
o. Coordinate preparation of Project Record Documents if information from more
than one contractor is to be integrated with information from other contractors to
form one combined record.
MULTIPLE CONTRACT SUMMARY 011200-2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
p. Coordinate preparation of operation and maintenance manuals if information from
more than one contractor is to be integrated with information from other
contractors to form one combined record.
2. Responsibilities of Project Coordinator for temporary facilities and controls include, but
are not limited to,the following:
a. Provide common-use field office for use by all personnel engaged in construction
activities.
b. Provide telephone service for common-use facilities.
1.6 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS OF CONTRACTS
A. Extent of Contract: Unless the Agreement contains a more specific description of the Work,
names and terminology on Drawings and in Specification Sections determine which contract
includes a specific element of Project.
1. Unless otherwise indicated, the Work described in this Section for each contract shall be
complete systems and assemblies, including products, components, accessories, and
installation required by the Contract Documents.
2. Local custom and trade-union jurisdictional settlements do not control the scope of the
Work of each contract. When a potential jurisdictional dispute or similar interruption of
work is first identified or threatened, affected contractors shall negotiate a reasonable
settlement to avoid or minimize interruption and delays.
3. Trenches for the Work of each contract shall be provided by the General Construction
Contract.
4. Cutting and Patching: Provided by the General Construction Contract.
5. Through-penetration firestopping for the Work of each contract shall be provided by each
contract for its own Work.
6. Within five working days after preliminary horizontal bar-chart-type construction
schedule submittal has been received from Project Coordinator, submit a matching
preliminary horizontal bar-chart schedule showing construction operations sequenced and
coordinated with overall construction.
7. Project closeout requirements.
B. Substitutions: Each contractor shall cooperate with other contractors involved to coordinate
approved substitutions with remainder of the Work.
1. The General Construction Contract shall coordinate substitutions.
C. Temporary Facilities and Controls: In addition to specific responsibilities for temporary
facilities and controls indicated in this Section and in Division 01 Section"Temporary Facilities
and Controls,"each contractor is responsible for the following:
1. Installation, operation, maintenance, and removal of each temporary facility usually
considered as its own normal construction activity, and costs and use charges associated
with each facility.
2. Plug-in electric power cords and extension cords, supplementary plug-in task lighting,
and special lighting necessary exclusively for its own activities.
MULTIPLE CONTRACT SUMMARY 011200-3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
3. Its own field office,complete with necessary furniture,utilities,and telephone service.
4. Its own storage and fabrication sheds.
5. Temporary enclosures for its own construction activities.
6. General hoisting facilities for its own construction activities,up to 2 tons.
7. Waste disposal facilities, including collection and legal disposal of its own hazardous,
dangerous,unsanitary,or other harmful waste materials.
8. Progress cleaning of its own areas on a daily basis.
9. Secure lockup of its own tools,materials,and equipment.
10. Construction aids and miscellaneous services and facilities necessary exclusively for its
own construction activities.
D. Temporary Heating, Cooling, and Ventilation: The General Construction Contract is
responsible for temporary heating, cooling, and ventilation, including utility-use charges,
temporary meters,and temporary connections.
E. Use Charges: Comply with the following:
1. Sewer Service: Include the cost for sewer service use by all parties engaged in
construction activities at Project site in the Plumbing Contract.
2. Water Service: Include the cost for water service, whether metered or otherwise, for
water used by all entities engaged in construction activities at Project site in the Plumbing
Contract.
3. Electric Power Service: Include the cost for electric power service, whether metered or
otherwise, for electricity used by all entities engaged in construction activities at Project
site in the Electrical Contract.
PART 2-PRODUCTS(Not Used)
PART 3-EXECUTION(Not Used)
END OF SECTION 011200
MULTIPLE CONTRACT SUMMARY 011200-4
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 012300-ALTERNATES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Alternates.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined
in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from the Base Bid amount if
Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be
completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described
in the Contract Documents.
1. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract
Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the
Contract Sum.
1.3 PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Modify or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate
work of the alternate into Project.
1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar
items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part
of alternate.
B. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in
writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or
deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to
alternates.
C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract.
D. Schedule: A Schedule of Alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification
Sections referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the
work described under each alternate.
ALTERNATES 012300- I
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
PART 2-PRODUCTS(Not Used)
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES
A. No Alternates identified at this time.
END OF SECTION 012300
ALTERNATES 012300-2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 012600-CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing
Contract modifications.
B. The intent of this section is to outline a procedure for significant changes in the work. The goal
in general is a teaming effort by all parties to identify opportunities and conflicts early so that
all parties can work together to expedite the delivery of the project.
1.2 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK
A. Architect's Supplemental Instructions (ASI) authorizing minor changes in the Work will be
issued by the Architect as a Supplemental Instruction.
1. These Instructions will be numbered and included and tracked in a log for future
reference by the Architect.
B. Supplemental Instructions may or may not affect the Project Schedule or cost. It is the
Contractor's responsibility to alert the Owner to the impact of any Supplemental Instructions
and to receive approval for changes that impact cost or schedule.
1.3 PROPOSAL REQUESTS
A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed
changes in the Work, in the form of an ASI that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or
the Contract Time. If necessary,the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings
and Specifications.
1. Proposal Requests/ASI's issued by Architect are for information only. Do not consider
them instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change.
2. Within 10 days after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost
adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change.
a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with
total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data
to substantiate quantities.
b. Indicate applicable taxes,delivery charges,equipment rental,and amounts of trade
discounts.
c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.
d. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of
the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting
an extension of the Contract Time.
e. Change Request shall list each item of change(and cost)as shown on ASI.
B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications to the
Contract,Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change to Architect.
1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the
Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the
proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.
2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total
amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to
substantiate quantities.
3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade
discounts.
4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.
5. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the
change,including,but not limited to, changes in activity duration,start and finish times,
and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the
Contract Time.
6. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Product Requirements" if the
proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system
specified.
C. Proposal Request Form: Use AIA Document G709 for Proposal Requests or Contractor
generated form with similar information
1.4 ALLOWANCES
A. Allowance Adjustment: To adjust allowance amounts,base each Change Order proposal on the
difference between purchase amount and the allowance, multiplied by final measurement of
work-in-place. If applicable, include reasonable allowances for cutting losses, tolerances,
mixing wastes,normal product imperfections,and similar margins.
1. Include installation costs in purchase amount only where indicated as part of the
allowance.
2. If requested, prepare explanation and documentation to substantiate distribution of
overhead costs and other margins claimed.
3. Submit substantiation of a change in scope of work, if any, claimed in Change Orders
related to unit-cost allowances.
4. Owner reserves the right to establish the quantity of work-in-place by independent
quantity survey,measure,or count.
B. Submit claims for increased costs because of a change in scope or nature of the allowance
described in the Contract Documents, whether for the Purchase Order amount or Contractor's
handling, labor, installation, overhead, and profit. Submit claims within 21 days of receipt of
the Change Order or Construction Change Directive authorizing work to proceed. Owner will
reject claims submitted later than 21 days after such authorization.
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600-2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1. Do not include Contractor's or subcontractor's indirect expense in the Change Order cost
amount unless it is clearly shown that the nature or extent of work has changed from what
could have been foreseen from information in the Contract Documents.
2. No change to Contractor's indirect expense is permitted for selection of higher-or lower-
priced materials or systems of the same scope and nature as originally indicated.
1.5 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
A. On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, General Contractor will issue a Change Order for
signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701.
1.6 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE
A. It is not anticipated that Construction Change Directives will be needed. In the event they are
required the following process will be followed.
B. Construction Change Directive: When the Owner and Contractor are not in total agreement on
the terms of a Change Order Proposal Request, the Architect may issue a Construction Change
Directive on AIA Form G714,instructing the Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work,
for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.
1. The Construction Change Directive will contain a complete description of the change in
the Work and designate the method to be followed to determine change in the Contract
Sum or Contract Time.
C. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the
Construction Change Directive.
1. After completion of the change, submit an itemized account and supporting data
necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.
PART 2-PRODUCTS(Not Used)
PART 3-EXECUTION(Not Used)
END OF SECTION 012600
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600-3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 012900-PAYMENT PROCEDURES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and
process Applications for Payment.
1.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of
Contractor's Construction Schedule.
1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms
and schedules,including Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets.
2. Submit the Schedule of Values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than
seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment.
B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items
for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.
1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values:
a. Project name and location.
b. Name of Architect.
c. Architect's project number.
d. Contractor's name and address.
e. Date of submittal.
2. Submit draft of ALA Document G703 Continuation Sheets or Contractor's form with
similar information.
3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued
evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project
Manual table of contents. Provide several line items for principal subcontract amounts,
where appropriate.
4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum.
5. Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where
Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated
and stored,but not yet installed.
6. Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values for initial cost of materials,for each
subsequent stage of completion,and for total installed value of that part of the Work.
7. Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each allowance.
Show line-item value of unit-cost allowances,as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by
measured quantity. Use information indicated in the Contract Documents to determine
quantities.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
8. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete.
Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.
a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual
work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the Schedule of
Values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option.
9. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the next
Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result
in a change in the Contract Sum.
1.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as
certified and paid for by Owner.
1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial
Completion,and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.
B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement
between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction Work covered by each Application
for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement.
C. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Execute by a person authorized to
sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor.
1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction
Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.
2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last
day of construction period covered by application.
D. Transmittal: Submit signed copies of the application to both the owner and architect, by a
method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. Include waivers of lien and similar attachments if
required.
1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate
information about application.
E. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment,submit waivers of mechanic's
lien from every entity who is lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the
Contract and related to the Work covered by the payment.
1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after
deduction for retainage,on each item.
2. When an application shows completion of an item,submit final or full waivers.
3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit
waivers.
4. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, executed in a manner acceptable to
Owner.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900-2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
F. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or
coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:
1. List of subcontractors.
2. Schedule of Values.
3. Contractor's Construction Schedule(preliminary if not final).
G. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial
Completion,submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of
the Work claimed as substantially complete.
1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a
statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.
2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued
previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.
H. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting
documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the
following:
1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements.
2. Updated final statement,accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum.
3. AIA Document G706,"Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims."
4. AIA Document G706A,"Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens."
5. AIA Document G707,"Consent of Surety to Final Payment."
6. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of
date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed
responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work.
PART 2-PRODUCTS(Not Used)
PART 3-EXECUTION(Not Used)
END OF SECTION 012900
PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900-3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85% PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 013100-PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on
Project including,but not limited to,the following:
1. Coordination Drawings.
2. Project meetings.
3. Requests for Interpretation(RFIs).
B. See Division 01 Section"Multiple Contract Summary" for a description of the division of Work
among separate contracts and responsibility for coordination activities not in this Section.
C. See Division 01 Section "Execution" for procedures for coordinating general installation and
field-engineering services,including establishment of benchmarks and control points.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. RFI: Request from Contractor seeking interpretation or clarification of the Contract
Documents.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the
Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate
construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper
installation,connection,and operation.
1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where
installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before
or after its own installation.
2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure
maximum accessibility for required maintenance,service,and repair.
3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.
4. Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different components to
ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and
repair of all components,including mechanical and electrical.
B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures
required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees
at meetings.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their
Work is required.
C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative
procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts
and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include,but are not
limited to,the following:
1. Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule.
2. Preparation of the Schedule of Values.
3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls.
4. Delivery and processing of submittals.
5. Progress meetings.
6. Preinstallation conferences.
7. Project closeout activities.
8. Startup and adjustment of systems.
9. Project closeout activities.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Prepare Coordination Drawings if limited space availability
necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components or if
coordination is required for installation of products and materials fabricated by separate entities.
1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base
Coordination Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed
data. Include the following information,as applicable:
a. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural,
structural,civil,mechanical,and electrical systems. —
b. Indicate dimensions shown on the Contract Drawings and make specific note of
dimensions that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum
clearance requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect for resolution of
such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be
considered changes to the Contract.
2. Sheet Size: At least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 30 by 40 inches.
3. Number of Copies: Submit six opaque copies of each submittal. Architect will return
five copies.
4. Refer to individual Sections for Coordination Drawing requirements for Work in those
Sections.
1.5 PROJECT MEETINGS
A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise
indicated.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100-2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is
required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled
meeting dates and times.
2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees.
3. Minutes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the
meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within three
days of the meeting.
B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting
construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after
execution of the Agreement. Hold the conference at Project site or another convenient location.
Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments.
1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants;
Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned
parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar
with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the
following:
a. Tentative construction schedule.
b. Phasing.
c. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items.
d. Designation of key personnel and their duties.
e. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders.
f. Procedures for RFIs.
g. Procedures for testing and inspecting.
h. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.
i. Distribution of the Contract Documents.
j. Submittal procedures.
k. Preparation of Record Documents.
1. Use of the premises.
m. Work restrictions.
n. Owner's occupancy requirements.
o. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls.
p. Construction waste management and recycling.
q. Parking availability.
r. Office,work,and storage areas.
s. Equipment deliveries and priorities.
t. First aid.
u. Security.
v. Progress cleaning.
w. Working hours.
3. Minutes: Record and distribute meeting minutes.
C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each
construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100-3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or
affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and
installations that have preceded or will follow,shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect
of scheduled meeting dates.
2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the
particular activity under consideration,including requirements for the following:
a. The Contract Documents.
b. Options.
c. Related RFIs.
d. Related Change Orders.
e. Purchases.
f. Deliveries.
g. Submittals.
h. Review of mockups.
i. Possible conflicts.
j. Compatibility problems.
k. Time schedules.
1. Weather limitations.
m. Manufacturer's written recommendations.
n. Warranty requirements.
o. Compatibility of materials.
p. Acceptability of substrates.
q. Temporary facilities and controls.
r. Space and access limitations.
s. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
t. Testing and inspecting requirements.
u. Installation procedures.
v. Coordination with other work.
w. Required performance results.
x. Protection of adjacent work.
y. Protection of construction and personnel.
3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including
required corrective measures and actions.
4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who
should have been present.
5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded.
Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the
Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.
D. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at regular intervals. Coordinate dates of
meetings with preparation of payment requests.
1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor,
subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in
planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these
meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized
to conclude matters relating to the Work.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100-4
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review
other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as
appropriate to status of Project.
a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting.
Determine whether each activity is on time,ahead of schedule,or behind schedule,
in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction
behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to
do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and
subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.
1) Review schedule for next period.
b. Review present and future needs of each entity present,including the following:
1) Interface requirements.
2) Sequence of operations.
3) Status of submittals.
4) Deliveries.
5) Off-site fabrication.
6) Access.
7) Site utilization.
8) Temporary facilities and controls.
9) Work hours.
10) Hazards and risks.
11) Progress cleaning.
12) Quality and work standards.
13) Status of correction of deficient items.
14) Field observations.
15) RFIs.
16) Status of proposal requests.
17) Pending changes.
18) Status of Change Orders.
19) Pending claims and disputes.
20) Documentation of information for payment requests.
3. Minutes: Record the meeting minutes.
4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who
should have been present.
a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress
meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue
revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.
1.6 REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION(RFIs)
A. Procedure: Immediately on discovery of the need for interpretation of the Contract Documents,
and if not possible to request interpretation at Project meeting,prepare and submit an RFI in the
form specified.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100-5
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1. RFIs shall originate with Contractor. RFIs submitted by entities other than Contractor
will be returned with no response.
2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's
work or work of subcontractors.
B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing interpretation and
the following:
1. Project name.
2. Date.
3. Name of Contractor.
4. Name of Architect.
5. RFI number,numbered sequentially.
6. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs,as appropriate.
7. Drawing number and detail references,as appropriate.
8. Field dimensions and conditions,as appropriate.
9. Contractor's suggested solution(s). If Contractor's solution(s) impact the Contract Time
or the Contract Sum,Contractor shall state impact in the RFI.
10. Contractor's signature.
11. Attachments: Include drawings,descriptions,measurements,photos,Product Data, Shop
Drawings,and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation.
C. Hard-Copy RFIs:
1. Identify each page of attachments with the RFI number and sequential page number.
D. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and return it.
Allow seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received after 1:00 p.m.
will be considered as received the following working day.
1. The following RFIs will be returned without action:
a. Requests for approval of submittals.
b. Requests for approval of substitutions.
c. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract
Documents.
d. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum.
e. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals.
f. Incomplete RFIs or RFIs with numerous errors.
2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case
Architect's time for response will start again.
3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the
Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to
Division 01 Section"Contract Modification Procedures."
a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or
the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI
response.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100-6
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
E. On receipt of Architect's action,update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response
to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if Contractor
disagrees with response.
F. RFI Log: Prepare,maintain,and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number.
1. Project name.
2. Name and address of Contractor.
3. Name and address of Architect.
4. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted.
5. RFI description.
6. Date the RFI was submitted.
7. Date Architect's response was received.
8. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and
Proposal Request,as appropriate.
PART 2-PRODUCTS(Not Used)
PART 3-EXECUTION(Not Used)
END OF SECTION 013100
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100-7
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 013200-CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress
of construction during performance of the Work,including the following:
1. Contractor's Construction Schedule.
2. Submittals Schedule.
3. Daily construction reports.
4. Field condition reports.
B. See Division 01 Section "Multiple Contract Summary" for preparing a combined Contractor's
Construction Schedule.
C. See Division 01 Section"Payment Procedures"for submitting the Schedule of Values.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning,scheduling,monitoring,
and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume
time and resources.
1. Critical activities are activities on the critical path. They must start and finish on the
planned early start and finish times.
2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network.
3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network.
B. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction
project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations
determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project.
C. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network
schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float.
D. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity.
1. Float time belongs to Owner.
E. Fragnet: A partial or fragmentary network that breaks down activities into smaller activities for
greater detail.
F. Major Area: A story of construction, a separate building, or a similar significant construction
element.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals Schedule: Submit three copies of schedule. Arrange the following information in a
tabular format:
1. Scheduled date for first submittal.
2. Specification Section number and title.
3. Submittal category(action or informational).
4. Name of subcontractor.
5. Description of the Work covered.
6. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval.
B. Preliminary Network Diagram: Submit two opaque copies, large enough to show entire
network for entire construction period. Show logic ties for activities.
C. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Submit two opaque copies of initial schedule, large
enough to show entire schedule for entire construction period.
1. Submit an electronic copy of schedule,using software indicated,on CD-R,and labeled to
comply with requirements for submittals. Include type of schedule (Initial or Updated)
and date on label.
D. CPM Reports: Concurrent with CPM schedule, submit three copies of each of the following
computer-generated reports. Format for each activity in reports shall contain activity number,
activity description,cost and resource loading, original duration,remaining duration, early start
date,early finish date,late start date,late finish date,and total float in calendar days.
1. Activity Report: List of all activities sorted by activity number and then early start date,
or actual start date if known.
2. Logic Report: List of preceding and succeeding activities for all activities, sorted in _
ascending order by activity number and then early start date,or actual start date if known.
3. Total Float Report: List of all activities sorted in ascending order of total float.
E. Daily Construction Reports: Submit two copies at weekly intervals.
F. Field Condition Reports: Submit two copies at time of discovery of differing conditions.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of _
construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors.
B. Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of
subcontracts, Submittals Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required
schedules and reports.
1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties
involved.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200-2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule
them in proper sequence.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE
A. Preparation: Submit a schedule of submittals,arranged in chronological order by dates required
by construction schedule. Include time required for review, resubmittal, ordering,
manufacturing,fabrication,and delivery when establishing dates.
1. Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts, the Schedule of Values, and
Contractor's Construction Schedule.
2. Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's Construction
Schedule.
- 2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE,GENERAL
A. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for commencement of the Work to date of
Final Completion.
1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an
early completion date,unless specifically authorized by Change Order.
B. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each principal
element of the Work. Comply with the following:
1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless
specifically allowed by Architect.
2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long
lead items and major items,requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities
in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals,
approvals,purchasing,fabrication,and delivery.
3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Division 01
Section "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in
Contractor's Construction Schedule with Submittals Schedule.
4. Startup and Testing Time: Include not less than 7 days for startup and testing.
5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for
Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures
necessary for certification of Substantial Completion.
C. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and
as follows in schedule,and show how the sequence of the Work is affected.
1. Work under More Than One Contract: Include a separate activity for each contract.
2. Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by
Owner.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200-3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
3. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule,
including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and Final
Completion.
D. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its
submission, prepare a time-impact analysis using fragnets to demonstrate the effect of the
proposed change on the overall project schedule.
2.3 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE(GANTT CHARD
A. Gantt-Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal Gantt-chart-type,
Contractor's Construction Schedule within 30 days of date established for commencement of the
Work. Base schedule on the Preliminary Construction Schedule and whatever updating and
feedback was received since the start of Project.
B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of
each week with a continuous vertical line.
1. For construction activities that require 3 months or longer to complete, indicate an
estimated completion percentage in 10 percent increments within time bar.
2.4 REPORTS
A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following
information concerning events at Project site:
1. List of subcontractors at Project site.
2. Equipment at Project site.
3. Material deliveries.
4. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions.
5. Accidents.
6. Stoppages,delays,shortages,and losses.
7. Meter readings and similar recordings.
8. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction.
9. Services connected and disconnected.
10. Equipment or system tests and startups.
B. Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field conditions
and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a request for
interpretation. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with
recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200-4
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals,update schedule to reflect
actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly
scheduled progress meeting.
1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have
been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each
such meeting.
2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not
limited to,changes in logic,durations,actual starts and finishes,and activity durations.
3. As the Work progresses,indicate Actual Completion percentage for each activity.
B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect Owner, separate contractors,
testing and inspecting agencies,and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know
schedule responsibility.
1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices.
2. When revisions are made,distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the
same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned
portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities.
END OF SECTION 013200
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200-5
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 013300-SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop
Drawings,Product Data,Samples,and other submittals.
B. See Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and
reports,including Contractor's Construction Schedule.
C. See Division 01 Section"Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties.
D. See Division 01 Section"Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record
Specifications,and Record Product Data.
E. See Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and
maintenance manuals.
F. See Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training" for submitting videotapes of
demonstration of equipment and training of Owner's personnel.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive action.
B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect's responsive
action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements.
1.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of
construction activities.
1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other
submittals,and related activities that require sequential activity.
2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so
processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for
coordination.
a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring
coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
B. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section"Construction Progress
Documentation" for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of
related construction activities.
C. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as
follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of
the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in
advance of the Work to permit processing,including resubmittals.
1. Initial Review: Allow two weeks for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional
time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise
Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.
2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner
as initial submittal.
3. Resubmittal Review: Allow two weeks for review of each resubmittal.
D. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification.
1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block.
2. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken:
a. Project name.
b. Date.
c. Name and address of Architect.
d. Name and address of Contractor.
e. Name and address of subcontractor.
f. Name and address of supplier.
g. Name of manufacturer.
h. Submittal number or other unique identifier,including revision identifier.
1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a
decimal point and then a sequential number(e.g.,061000.01). Resubmittals
shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g.,
061000.01.A).
i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
j. Drawing number and detail references,as appropriate.
k. Location(s)where product is to be installed,as appropriate.
1. Other necessary identification.
E. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically identify deviations from the Contract
Documents on submittals.
F. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless
Architect observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal
may serve as final submittal.
1. Additional copies submitted for maintenance manuals will not be marked with action
taken and will be returned.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300-2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
G. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and
handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will return submittals,
without review,received from sources other than Contractor.
1. Transmittal Form: Use AIA Document G810.
H. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.
1. Note date and content of previous submittal.
2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of
revision.
3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked"Approved" or"Approved as Noted."
I. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers,
fabricators,installers,authorities having jurisdiction,and others as necessary for performance of
construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.
J. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating"Approved" or"Approved
as Noted"taken by Architect.
1.4 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF ARCHITECT'S CAD FILES
A. General: At Contractor's written request, copies of Architect's CAD files may be provided to
Contractor for Contractor's use in connection with Project,subject to the following conditions:
1. Files are used for specified use only and will not be copied or electronically transferred
without Architect's/Owner's written approval.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections.
B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and
type of product or equipment.
1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are
not suitable for use,submit as Shop Drawings,not as Product Data.
2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.
3. Include the following information,as applicable:
a. Manufacturer's written recommendations.
b. Manufacturer's product specifications.
c. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
d. Manufacturer's catalog cuts.
e. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300-3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
f. Printed performance curves.
g. Operational range diagrams.
h. Compliance with specified referenced standards.
i. Testing by recognized testing agency.
4. Number of Copies: Submit 5 copies of Product Data, unless otherwise indicated.
Architect will return 3 copies. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record
Document.
5. Electronic Submittals in PDF format are acceptable in lieu of multiple hard copies.
a. Provide transmittals markings in the same manner as a hard copy submittal.
b. Include abbreviated description of submittal and date as part of the PDF file name.
C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base
Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.
1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the
following information,as applicable:
a. Dimensions.
b. Identification of products.
c. Fabrication and installation drawings.
d. Roughing-in and setting diagrams.
e. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and
control wiring.
f. Shopwork manufacturing instructions.
g. Templates and patterns.
h. Schedules.
i. Notation of coordination requirements.
j. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
k. Relationship to adjoining construction clearly indicated.
1. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.
m. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed
wiring.
2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop
Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 30 by 40 inches.
3. Number of Copies: Submit 5 opaque (bond) copies of each submittal. Architect will
return at least 3 copies.
4. Electronic Submittals in PDF format are acceptable in lieu of multiple hard copies.
a. Provide transmittals markings in the same manner as a hard copy submittal.
b. Include abbreviated description of submittal and date as part of the PDF file name.
D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these
characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between
submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300-4
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85% PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple,related components such as accessories together
in one submittal package.
2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:
a. Generic description of Sample.
b. Product name and name of manufacturer.
c. Sample source.
d. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
3. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-
control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be
used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.
4. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or
sections of units showing the full range of colors,textures,and patterns available.
a. Number of Samples: Submit two full sets of available choices where color,
pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from
manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected.
5. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared
from same material to be used for the Work,cured and finished in manner specified,and
physically identical with material or product proposed for use,and that show full range of
color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the
following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or
containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing
color,texture,and pattern;color range sets; and components used for independent testing
and inspection.
a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain two
Sample sets; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample
set as a Project Record Sample.
E. Product Schedule or List: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written
summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location.
1. Number of Copies: Submit three copies of product schedule or list, unless otherwise
indicated. Architect will return two copies.
F. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section"Construction
Progress Documentation."
G. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section
"Payment Procedures."
H. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Payment
Procedures."
I. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each
portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a
special design.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300-5
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1. Number of Copies: Submit three copies of subcontractor list, unless otherwise indicated.
Architect will return two copies.
2.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections.
1. Number of Copies: Submit two copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated.
Architect will not return copies.
2. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of
entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be
signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that
entity.
3. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section
"Quality Requirements."
B. Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Project
Management and Coordination."
C. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01
Section"Construction Progress Documentation."
D. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience
of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names
and addresses of architects and owners,and other information specified.
E. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel
comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure
Specification (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include
names of firms and personnel certified.
F. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is
authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.
G. Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying
that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of
manufacturing experience where required.
H. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
I. Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
J. Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency,on testing agency's
standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with
requirements in the Contract Documents.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300-6
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
K. Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by
manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on
evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or
on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
L. Research/Evaluation Reports: Prepare written evidence, from a model code organization
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect
for Project.
M. Preconstruction Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation
of product,for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.
N. Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed
before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate
preparation needed for adhesion.
O. Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's
standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during
installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with
requirements in the Contract Documents.
P. Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and
normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements specified in
Division 01 Section"Operation and Maintenance Data."
Q. Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to,
performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations.
Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads.
Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for
calculations. Include page numbers.
R. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents
manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a
product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of
manufacturer.
S. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory-authorized
service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following,as applicable:
1. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product.
2. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with
requirements and,if not,what corrective action was taken.
3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance
complies with requirements.
T. Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of
insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond,limits of
coverage,amounts of deductibles,if any,and term of the coverage.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300-7
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
U. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs): Submit information directly to Owner; do not submit to
Architect.
1. Architect will not review submittals that include MSDSs and will return them for
resubmittal.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW
A. Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for
compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with
approval stamp before submitting to Architect.
B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name
and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date
of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked,
and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.
3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION
A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and
will return them without action.
B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal,make marks to indicate corrections or
modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp
and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken,as follows:
C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will
return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to
appropriate party.
D. Partial submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned
without review.
E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded.
END OF SECTION 013300
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300-8
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 014000-QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and
quality control.
B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or
indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the
Contract Document requirements.
1. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-
assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document
requirements.
- 2. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required
by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of
this Section.
C. See Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during
execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed
- construction will comply with requirements.
B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after
execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and
completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract
enforcement activities performed by Architect.
C. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed specifically for the Project
before products and materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance or
compliance with specified criteria.
Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL,an NVLAP,or a testing
agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to
establish product performance and compliance with industry standards.
E. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, i.e.,
plant,mill,factory,or shop.
F. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation
of the Work and for completed Work.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
G. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing
laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.
H. Installer/Applicator/Erector.. Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an
employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation,
including installation,erection,application,and similar operations.
1. Using a term such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must
be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name,
such as "carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively
to tradespeople of the corresponding generic name.
I. Experienced: When used with an entity, "experienced"means having successfully completed a
minimum of five previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project;being familiar with
special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.3 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS
A. General: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish
different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the
most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but
apparently equal,to Architect for a decision before proceeding.
B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be
the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the
minimum quantity or quality specified,or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits.
To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as
appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision
before proceeding.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a
recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.
B. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include the following:
1. Date of issue.
2. Project title and number.
3. Name,address,and telephone number of testing agency.
4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections.
6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method.
7. Identification of product and Specification Section.
8. Complete test or inspection data.
9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000-2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and
inspecting.
11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with
the Contract Document requirements.
12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.
C. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses,
certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee
payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for
compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this Article establish the minimum qualification levels
required;individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.
B. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling
work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has
resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar
to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as
well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
D. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated
for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient
production capacity to produce required units.
E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is-legally qualified to
practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing
engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed
for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar to those indicated for this
Project in material,design,and extent.
F. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the
experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated,as documented according
to ASTM E 548; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and where
required by authorities having jurisdiction,that is acceptable to authorities.
1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CPR 1910.7.
2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary
Laboratory Accreditation Program.
G. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of
manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of
manufacturer's products that are similar in material,design,and extent to those indicated for this
Project.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000-3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1.6 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility,
Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.
1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing
agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to
perform.
2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work
that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor.
B. Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Unless
otherwise indicated,provide quality-control services specified and those required by authorities
having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by authorities
having jurisdiction,whether specified or not.
1. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing
agency to perform these quality-control services.
a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in
writing by Owner.
2. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires
testing or inspecting will be performed.
3. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a
certified written report,in duplicate,of each quality-control service.
4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract
Documents are Contractor's responsibility.
5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction,
when they so direct.
C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service
representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including
service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Division 01 Section "Submittal
Procedures."
D. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's
responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for
construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.
E. Testing Agency Responsibilities Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of
duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.
1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the
Work during performance of its services.
2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests
are conducted.
3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and
inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000-4
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar
quality-control service through Contractor.
5. Do not release,revoke,alter,or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve
or accept any portion of the Work.
6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.
F. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and
similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify
agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the
following:
1. Access to the Work.
2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.
3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and
inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples.
4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples.
5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies.
6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing
agency.
G. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance
and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and
replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.
1. Schedule times for tests,inspections,obtaining samples,and similar activities.
1.7 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
A. Special Tests and Inspections: Contractor will engage a qualified testing agency to conduct
special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of
Owner,and as follows:
B. Special Tests and Inspections: Conducted by a qualified testing agency as required by
authorities having jurisdiction,as indicated in individual Specification Sections,and as follows:
1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures
and reviewing the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work.
2. Notifying Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed
in the Work during performance of its services.
3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control
service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction.
4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion,
which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies.
5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected
work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.
6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000-5
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
PART 2-PRODUCTS(Not Used)
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 REPAIR AND PROTECTION
A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair
damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.
1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other
Specification Sections. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas
with durable seams that are as invisible as possible.
2. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for Division 01 Section "Cutting and
Patching."
B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.
C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of
responsibility for quality-control services.
END OF SECTION 014000
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000-6
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 014200-REFERENCES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 DEFINITIONS
A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.
B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications,
and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the
Conditions of the Contract.
C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested,"
"authorized,""selected,""required," and"permitted"have the same meaning as"directed."
D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on
Drawings,in Specifications,and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including"shown,"
"noted,""scheduled,"and"specified"have the same meaning as"indicated."
E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having
jurisdiction,and rules,conventions,and agreements within the construction industry that control
performance of the Work.
F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly,
installation,and similar operations.
G. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking,
assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing,
protecting,cleaning,and similar operations.
H. "Provide": Furnish and install,complete and ready for the intended use.
I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site
is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on
which Project is to be built.
1.2 INDUSTRY STANDARDS
A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent
requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if
bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards
are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.
B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless
otherwise indicated.
REFERENCES 014200- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with
industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not
bound with the Contract Documents.
1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain
copies directly from publication source.
PART 2-PRODUCTS(Not Used)
PART 3-EXECUTION(Not Used)
END OF SECTION 014200
REFERENCES 014200-2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 015000-TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and
protection facilities.
B. See Division 01 Section "Multiple Contract Summary" for division of responsibilities for
temporary facilities and controls.
C. See Division 01 Section"Execution"for progress cleaning requirements.
D. See Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for temporary heat, ventilation, and humidity
requirements for products in those Sections.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Permanent Enclosure: As determined by Architect, permanent or temporary roofing is
complete, insulated, and weathertight; exterior walls are insulated and weathertight; and all
openings are closed with permanent construction or substantial temporary closures.
1.3 USE CHARGES
A. General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum.
Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not
limited to, Owner's construction forces, Architect, testing agencies, and authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for
construction personnel.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA,NEMA,and UL standards and regulations for temporary
electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.
B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each
temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Installer of each permanent service shall assume
responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its
use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned
responsibilities.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Portable Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch, 9-gage, galvanized steel, chain-link fabric
fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- OD line
posts and 2-7/8-inch- OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch- OD top and bottom rails.
Provide galvanized steel bases for supporting posts.
2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES -
A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature
controls,and foundations adequate for normal loading.
B. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished,and equipped to accommodate
materials and equipment for construction operations.
2.3 EQUIPMENT
A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by
locations and classes of fire exposures.
B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system,provide vented,
self-contained,liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control.
1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating
units is prohibited.
2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed,by a testing agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,and marked for intended use.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION,GENERAL
A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference
with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the
Work.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000-2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities
are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.
3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION
A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service.
1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be
interrupted,if necessary,to make connections for temporary services.
B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully.
1. Connect temporary sewers to municipal system as directed by authorities having
jurisdiction.
C. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for
construction.
D. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of
construction personnel. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type,number,location,
operation,and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.
E. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities
for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from
adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a
harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed.
F. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction
activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction
from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on
completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to
produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption.
G. Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient
size,capacity,and power characteristics required for construction operations.
1. Install electric power service,unless otherwise indicated.
H. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination
for construction operations,observations,inspections,and traffic conditions.
1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements
without operating entire system.
I. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use by all
construction personnel. Install one telephone line for each field office.
1. Provide additional telephone lines for the following:
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000-3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
a. Provide a dedicated telephone line for each facsimile machine and computer in
each field office.
2. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers including police and fire
departments, Contractor's home office, Architect's office, Owner's office and Principal
subcontractors'field and home offices.
3. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio for use when
away from field office.
J. Electronic Communication Service: Provide temporary electronic communication service,
including electronic mail in field office.
3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with the following:
1. Provide incombustible construction for offices, shops, and sheds located within
construction area or within 30 feet of building lines. Comply with NFPA 241.
2. Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove before Substantial
Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use
permanent facilities,under conditions acceptable to Owner.
B. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle
waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction. Comply with Division 01 Section"Execution"for progress cleaning requirements.
C. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel.
1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and
equipment"and not temporary facilities.
D. Existing Stair Usage: Use of Owner's existing stairs will be permitted, as long as stairs are
cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion,restore
stairs to condition existing before initial use.
1. Provide protective coverings,barriers,devices,signs,or other procedures to protect stairs
and to maintain means of egress. If, despite such protection, stairs become damaged,
restore damaged areas so no evidence remains of correction work.
E. Temporary Use of Permanent Stairs: Cover finished,permanent stairs with protective covering
of plywood or similar material so finishes will be undamaged at time of acceptance.
3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct
construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations and that
minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable
effects.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000-4
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
B. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line
of trees to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations. Protect tree root
systems from damage,flooding,and erosion.
C. Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and
harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control
procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial
Completion. Obtain extended warranty for Owner. Perform control operations lawfully,using
environmentally safe materials.
D. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, furnish and install site enclosure
fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by
entrance gates.
1. Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined
sufficient to accommodate construction operations.
2. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized
personnel.
E. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure around partially
completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance,
vandalism,theft,and similar violations of security.
3.5 OPERATION,TERMINATION,AND REMOVAL
A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and
abuse,limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.
B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.
1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control,
ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated
results and to avoid possibility of damage.
C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and
protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.
D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has
ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than
Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may
have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work,
clean exposed surfaces,and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.
1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor.
Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000-5
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
2. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during
construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Division 01
Section"Closeout Procedures."
END OF SECTION 015000
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000-6
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85% PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 015719-ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AND EMERGENCY PLAN
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This Section specifies the control of environmental pollution and damage that the Contractor
must consider for air, water, and land resources. It includes management of visual aesthetics,
noise, solid waste, radiant energy, and radioactive materials, as well as other pollutants and
resources encountered or generated by the Contractor. The Contractor is obligated to consider
specified control measures with the costs included within the various contract items of work.
B. Environmental pollution and damage is defined as the presence of chemical, physical, or
biological elements or agents which:
1. Adversely affect human health or welfare;
2. Unfavorably alter ecological balances of importance to human life; -
3. Affect other species of importance to humankind,or;
4. Degrade the utility of the environment for aesthetic,cultural,and historical purposes.
C. Definitions of Pollutants:
1. Chemical Waste: Petroleum products, bituminous materials, salts, acids, alkalis,
herbicides,pesticides,organic chemicals,and inorganic wastes.
2. Debris: Combustible and noncombustible wastes, such as leaves, tree trimmings, ashes,
and waste materials resulting from construction or maintenance and repair work.
3. Sediment: Soil and other debris that has been eroded and transported by runoff water.
4. Solid Waste: Rubbish,debris, garbage,and other discarded solid materials resulting from
industrial,commercial,and agricultural operations and from community activities.
5. Surface Discharge: The term "Surface Discharge" implies that the water is discharged
with possible sheeting action and subsequent soil erosion may occur. Waters that are
surface discharged may terminate in drainage ditches,storm sewers,creeks,and/or"water
of the United States" and would require a permit to discharge water from the governing
agency.
6. Rubbish: Combustible and noncombustible wastes such as paper, boxes, glass and
crockery,metal and lumber scrap,tin cans,and bones.
7. Sanitary Wastes:
a. Sewage: Domestic sanitary sewage and human and animal waste.
b. Garbage: Refuse and scraps resulting from preparation, cooking, dispensing, and
consumption of food.
1.2 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Establish and maintain quality control for the environmental protection of all items set forth
herein.
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AND EMERGENCY PLAN 015719- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET- GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
B. Record on daily reports any problems in complying with laws, regulations, and ordinances.
Note any corrective action taken.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. In accordance with Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures," furnish the following:
1. Environmental Protection and Emergency Plan: After the contract is awarded and prior to
the commencement of the work, the Contractor shall meet with the Owner to discuss the
proposed Environmental Protection and Emergency Plan and to develop mutual
understanding relative to details of environmental protection.Not more than 20 days after
the meeting, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Architect of Record and
Owner for approval, a written and/or graphic Environmental Protection and Emergency
Plan including,but not limited to,the following:
a. Name(s) of person(s) within the Contractor's organization who is (are) responsible
for ensuring adherence to the Environmental Protection and Emergency Plan.
b. Name(s) and qualifications of person(s) responsible for manifesting hazardous
waste to be removed from the site.
c. Name(s) and qualifications of person(s) responsible for training the Contractor's
environmental protection personnel.
d. Description of the Contractor's environmental protection personnel training
program.
e. A list of Federal, State, and local laws, regulations, and permits concerning
environmental protection, pollution control, noise control and abatement that are
applicable to the Contractor's proposed operations and the requirements imposed
by those laws,regulations,and permits.
f. Methods for protection of features to be preserved within authorized work areas
including trees, shrubs, vines, grasses, ground cover, landscape features, air and
water quality, fish and wildlife, soil, historical, and archeological and cultural
resources.
g. Procedures to provide the environmental protection that comply with the
applicable laws and regulations. Describe the procedures to correct pollution of the
environment due to accident, natural causes, or failure to follow the procedures as
described in the Environmental Protection and Emergency Plan.
h. Permits, licenses,and the location of the solid waste disposal area.
i. Drawings showing locations of any proposed temporary excavations or
embankments for haul roads, stream crossings, material storage areas, structures,
sanitary facilities, and stockpiles of excess or spoil materials. Include as part of an
Erosion Control Plan approved by thelocal authority having jurisdiction.
j. Environmental Monitoring Plans for the job site including land, water, air, and
noise.
k. Work Area Plan showing the proposed activity in each portion of the area and
identifying the areas of limited use or nonuse. Plan should include measures for
marking the limits of use areas. This plan may be incorporated within the Erosion
Control Plan.
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AND EMERGENCY PLAN 015719-2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
B. Approval of the Contractor's Environmental Protection and Emergency Plan will not relieve the
Contractor of responsibility for adequate and continued control of pollutants and other
environmental protection measures.
1.4 PROTECTION OF ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES
A. Protect environmental resources within the project boundaries and those affected outside the
limits of permanent work during the entire period of this contract. Confine activities to areas
defined by the Specifications and Drawings.
B. Protection of Land Resources: Prior to construction, identify all land resources to be preserved
within the work area. Do not remove, cut, deface, injure, or destroy land resources including
trees, shrubs, vines, grasses, top soil, and land forms without permission from the Owner. Do
not fasten or attach ropes, cables, or guys to trees for anchorage unless specifically authorized,
or where special emergency use is permitted.
1. Work Area Limits: Prior to any construction, mark the areas that require work to be
performed under this contract. Mark or fence isolated areas within the general work area
that are to be saved and protected. Protect monuments, works of art, and markers before
construction operations begin. Convey to all personnel the purpose of marking and
protecting all necessary objects.
2. Protection of Landscape: Protect trees, shrubs, vines, grasses, land forms, and other
landscape features shown on the drawings to be preserved by marking, fencing,or using
any other approved techniques.
a. Box and protect from damage existing trees and shrubs to remain on the
construction site.
b. Immediately repair all damage to existing trees and shrubs by trimming, cleaning,
and painting with antiseptic tree paint.
c. Do not store building materials or perform construction activities closer to existing
trees or shrubs than the farthest extension of their limbs.
3. Reduction of Exposure of Unprotected Erodible Soils: Plan and conduct earthwork to
minimize the duration of exposure of unprotected soils. Clear areas in reasonably sized
increments only as needed to use. Form earthwork to final grade as shown. Immediately
protect side slopes and back slopes upon completion of rough grading.
4. Temporary Protection of Disturbed Areas: Construct diversion ditches, benches, and
berms to retard and divert runoff from the construction site to protected drainage areas
approved under paragraph 208 of the Clean Water Act.
5. Erosion and Sedimentation Control Devices: The erosion and sediment controls selected
and maintained by the Contractor shall be such that water quality standards are not
violated as a result of the Contractor's activities. Construct or install all temporary and
permanent erosion and sedimentation control features shown on the Environmental
Protection and Emergency Plan. Maintain temporary erosion and sediment control
measures such as berms, dikes, drains, sedimentation basins, grassing, and mulching,
until permanent drainage and erosion control facilities are completed and operative.
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AND EMERGENCY PLAN 015719-3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
6. Manage and control spoil areas on and off property to limit spoil to areas shown on the
Environmental Protection and Emergency Plan and prevent erosion of soil or sediment
from entering nearby water courses or lakes.
7. Protect adjacent areas from despoilment by temporary excavations and embankments.
8. Handle and dispose of solid wastes in such a manner that will prevent contamination of
the environment. Place solid wastes (excluding clearing debris) in containers that are
emptied on a regular schedule. Transport all solid waste off property and dispose of waste
in compliance with Federal, State,and local requirements.
9. Store chemical waste away from the work areas in corrosion resistant containers and
dispose of waste in accordance with Federal,State, and local regulations.
10. Handle discarded materials other than those included in the solid waste category as
directed by the Owner.
C. Protection of Water Resources: Keep construction activities under surveillance, management,
and control to avoid pollution of surface and ground waters and sewer systems. Implement
management techniques to control water pollution by the listed construction activities that are
included in this Contract.
1. Washing and Curing Water: Do not allow wastewater directly derived from construction
activities to enter water areas.
2. Monitor water areas affected by construction.
D. Protection of Air Resources: Keep construction activities under surveillance, management, and
control to minimize pollution of air resources. Burning is not permitted on the job site. Keep
activities, equipment, processes, and work operated or performed, in strict accordance with the
State Oregon DEQ and Federal emission and performance laws and standards. Maintain
ambient air quality standards set by the Environmental Protection Agency, for those
construction operations and activities specified.
1. Particulates: Control dust particles, aerosols, and gaseous by-products from all
construction activities, processing, and preparation of materials (such as from asphaltic
batch plants) at all times, including weekends, holidays, and hours when work is not in
progress.
2. Particulates Control: Maintain all excavations, stockpiles, haul roads, permanent and
temporary access roads, plant sites, spoil areas, borrow areas, and all other work areas
within or outside the project boundaries free from particulates which would cause a
hazard or a nuisance. Sprinklering, chemical treatment of an approved type, light
bituminous treatment, baghouse, scrubbers, electrostatic precipitators, or other methods
are permitted to control particulates in the work area.
3. Hydrocarbons and Carbon Monoxide: Control monoxide emissions from equipment to
Federal and State allowable limits.
4. Odors: Control odors of construction activities and prevent obnoxious odors from
occurring.
E. Reduction of Noise: Minimize noise using every action possible. Perform noise-producing work
in less sensitive hours of the day or week as directed by the Owner. Maintain noise-produced
work at or below the decibel levels and within the time periods specified.
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AND EMERGENCY PLAN 015719-4
WHOLE FOODS MARKET- GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1. Perform construction activities involving repetitive,high-level impact noise only between
8:00 a.m. and 6:00 p.m. unless otherwise permitted by local ordinance or the Owner.
Repetitive impact noise on the property shall not exceed the following dB limitations:
Time Duration of Impact Noise Sound Level in dB
More than 12 minutes in any hour 70
Less than 30 seconds of any hour 85
Less than three minutes of any hour 80
Less than 12 minutes of any hour 75
2. Provide sound-deadening devices on equipment and take noise abatement measures that
are necessary to comply with the requirements of this contract, consisting of, but not
limited to,the following:
a. Maintain maximum permissible construction equipment noise levels at 50 feet
(dBA):
EARTHMOVING MATERIALS HANDLING
PUMPS 75 SAWS 75
GENERATORS 75 VIBRATORS 75
COMPRESSORS 75
b. Use shields or other physical barriers to restrict noise transmission.
c. Provide soundproof housings or enclosures for noise-producing machinery.
d. Use efficient silencers on equipment air intakes.
e. Use efficient intake and exhaust mufflers on internal combustion engines that are
maintained so equipment performs below noise levels specified.
f. Line hoppers and storage bins with sound deadening material.
g. Conduct truck loading, unloading, and hauling operations so that noise is kept to a
minimum.
F. Restoration of Damaged Property: If any direct or indirect damage is done to public or private
property resulting from any act, omission, neglect, or misconduct, the Contractor shall restore
the damaged property to a condition equal to that existing before the damage at no additional
cost to the Government. Repair, rebuild, or restore property as directed or make good such
damage in an acceptable manner.
G. Final Clean-up: On completion of project and after removal of all debris, rubbish, and
temporary construction, Contractor shall leave the construction area in a clean condition
satisfactory to the Owner. Cleaning shall include disposal of all items and materials not required
to be salvaged, as well as all debris and rubbish resulting from demolition and new work
operations.
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AND EMERGENCY PLAN 015719- 5
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1.5 EXAMPLE ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AND EMERGENCY PLAN
A. See attached Environmental Protection and Emergency Plan for informational purposes only.
Plan must be project and jurisdictional specific.
PART 2-PRODUCTS(Not Used)
PART 3 -EXECUTION(Not Used)
END OF SECTION 015719
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AND EMERGENCY PLAN 015719-6
City of Lynnwood SPCC Plan
The Contractor shall prepare a project-specific spill prevention,
control, and countermeasures plan (SPCC Plan) that will be used
for the duration of the project. The Contractor shall submit the plan
to the City of Lynnwood Surface Water Division no later than the
date of the preconstruction conference. No on-site construction
activities may commence until City of Lynnwood accepts a SPCC
Plan for the project.
Instructions for use:
• The City of Lynnwood has put together this form for
contractors to use to develop Spill Prevention, Control and
Countermeasures Plans (SPCC Plans) that satisfy Lynnwood
Municipal Code 13.45.035, the current WSDOT Standard
Specification 1-07.15(1) and National Pollutant Discharge
Elimination System (NPDES) requirements:
• Replace the blue highlighted text with project-specific
information
• Yellow highlighted text describes or provides an example of
what needs to be written. Using this text as a guide, add a
description tailored to the project and then delete the yellow
highlighted text.
• Completing Table of contents: Verify that the associated
Plan sections/page numbers are consistent and complete as
these may change while form is being completed.
Spill Prevention, Control and Countermeasures Plan
Whole Foods Market - Lynnwood
Prepared by
JR Abbott Construction
3408 1st Ave
Seattle, Washington 98134
(206) 467-8500
August 18th, 2011
CONTRACTOR SHALL MAINTAIN A COMPLETE, UPDATED COPY OF
THIS PLAN IN AN ACCESSIBLE LOCATION ON THE PROJECT SITE AT
ALL TIMES.
SPCC Plan, Whole Foods Market—Lynnwood 08/15/2011
Page i
Table of Contents
SPCC Plan Implementation Requirements 1
SPCC Plan Elements 2
1. Responsible Personnel 2
2. Spill Reporting 3
3. Project and Site Information 4
4. Potential Spill Sources 5
5. Pre-Existing Contamination 7
6. Spill Prevention and Response Training 8
7. Spill Prevention 9
8. Spill Response 10
9. Project Site Map 13
10. Spill Report Form(s) 14
11. Plan Approval 15
SPCC Plan Acknowledgement Form (to be signed by all Project personnel) 16
Appendix
APPENDIX A EXAMPLE SPILL REPORT FORM A-17
SPCC Plan, Whole Foods Market—Lynnwood 08/15/2011
Page ii
SPCC Plan Implementation Requirements
WSDOT Standard Specification 1-07.15(1)and Project-specific special provisions(if applicable)
require a Spill Prevention, Control and Countermeasures Plan (SPCC Plan or Plan)to be
developed for each project. The purpose of an SPCC Plan is to protect human health and the
environment from spills and releases of"hazardous materials,"a generic term the City of
Lynnwood uses in Chapter 13.45 of its Surface Water Quality to mean any material, including
any substance,waste, or combination thereof,which because of its quantity, concentration, or
physical, chemical, or infectious characteristics may cause, or significantly contribute to, a
substantial present or potential hazard to human health, safety, property, or the environment
when improperly treated, stored, transported, disposed of, or otherwise managed .
J. R. Abbott Construction, the Prime Contractor for Whole Foods Market—Lynnwood, (Project),
has developed this SPCC Plan to satisfy WSDOT Standard Specification 1-07.15(1), Lynnwood
Municipal Code 13.45.035, and National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES)
requirements for the Project.
J. R. Abbott shall update this SPCC Plan throughout the Project so that the written Plan reflects
actual site conditions and practices. At a minimum, J. R.Abbott will update this Plan annually.
J. R.Abbott shall fully implement this SPCC Plan, as accepted and updated, at all times.
No on-site Project construction activities may commence until City of Lynnwood reviews and
accepts this Project-Specific SPCC Plan.
SPCC Plan,Whole Foods Market—Lynnwood 08/15/2011
Page 1
SPCC Plan Elements
1. Responsible Personnel
Table 1.1 identifies the name(s), title(s), and contact information for the personnel responsible
for implementing and updating the SPCC Plan, and for responding to spills. If spill response
Subcontractor(s)will be used for spill response (as described in Section 8, Spill Response,
below),the Subcontractor(s)company name(s)and contact information are also included in
Table 1.1.
Table 1 Responsible Personnel
Responsibility Name and Title Contact Information
Implementing and Updating Bret Coonrod Company:
SPCC Plan(primary Office Phone:
contact person) Cell Phone:
Implementing and Updating Bill Stewart Company:
SPCC Plan(secondary Office Phone:
contact person) Cell Phone:
_On-Site Spill Responder Bret Coonrod Company:
Office Phone:
Cell Phone:
On-Site Spill Responder Bill Stewart Company:
Office Phone:
Cell Phone:
SPCC Plan,Whole Foods Market—Lynnwood 08/15/2011
Page 2
2. Spill Reporting
In the event of a spill, J. R. Abbott shall notify the City of Lynnwood Surface Water Utility and
shall notify the Federal, State, and Local Agencies listed in Table 2. Complete Table 2 including
for each agency the agency name, the agency notification telephone number, and when the
agency shall be notified.
Table 2 Project-Specific Federal, State, and Local Agencies to be Notified in the Event of
a Spill
Type of Discharge Who to Notify Time to Notify
A spill or discharge, which could Ecology Regional Office: Immediately, but no later than 24-
constitute a threat to human health, Northwest Region: hours after obtaining the
welfare or the environment. 1-425-649-7000 knowledge.
Lynnwood Police and/or Fire:
911
A spill or discharge of oil or National Response Center: Immediately
hazardous substances which 1-800-424-8802
presents a threat to human or AND
health,welfare, or the environment. Washington Emergency
Management Division:
1-800-258-5990 OR
1-800-OILS911
AND
Ecology Regional Office:
Northwest Region:
1-425-649-7000
AND
Lynnwood Police and/or Fire:
911
A spill or discharge which might WA State Department of Immediately
cause bacterial contamination of Health:
shellfish. 1-360-236-3330
AND
Ecology Regional Office:
Northwest Region:
1-425-649-7000
All Spills City of Lynnwood Surface Water Immediately
Hotline:
425-670-KRUD(5783)
SPCC Plan, Whole Foods Market— Lynnwood 08/15/2011
Page 3
3. Project and Site Information
A. The Project work: The overall project includes the renovation of an existing -43,500 SF
building into a new grocery store(not including a -5,000 sf adjacent tenant space). The
proposed scope of work will include full interior tenant improvements, exterior
cladding/facade treatments, a new entry element, a new refrigeration center at the back of
the building, and modification of the parking at the front of the building to include a
pedestrian plaza. Minor site adjustments to parking are also described on plan. Utility
services(water, electrical, gas)will be provided to tenant space on separate metering.
B. The site location and boundaries: Refer to the sheet C1.0 of the Construction Documents
(attached).
C The drainage pathways from the site: See Table 3 below.
D. Nearby waterways and sensitive areas and their distances from the site: See Table 3
below.
Table 3 Nearby Waterways' and Sensitive Areas2
IWaterway' or Distance from Direction of Flow Runoff Drainage Pathway
Sensitive Areal Project Site from Project Site from Site
West Fork Golde Creek Approximately Northeast to south end, All paved areas are sloped to
Wetland 50' or greater of site drain into catch basins that
west of Project connect to detention pond at
Site south of site that in turn ties into
the existing storm sewer system at
the very south
•
Notes:
' Waterways include streams,creeks,sloughs,rivers, Puget Sound,etc.
2 Sensitive areas are areas that typically contain populations that could be particularly sensitive to a hazardous
materials spill or release. Such areas include wetlands,areas that provide habitat for threatened or endangered
species, nursing homes,hospitals,child care centers,etc. Sensitive areas also include areas where
groundwater is used for drinking water,such as wellhead protection zones and sole source aquifer recharge
areas.
SPCC Plan, Whole Foods Market—Lynnwood 08/15/2011
Page 4
4. Potential Spill Sources
A description of each potential fuel, petroleum product and other hazardous material brought or
generated on-site is set forth in Table 4.1. The potential fuel, petroleum product and other
hazardous materials listed on Table 4.1 include materials used for operating, refueling,
maintaining, and cleaning equipment.
SPCC Plan, Whole Foods Market—Lynnwood 08/15/2011
Page 5
Table 4 Fuel, Petroleum Product and other Hazardous Materials Brought or Generated On-Site
Est. Max. Amount of Material Staging, Use, and Storage Distance of Material Staging,
Hazardous Material Name Intended Use of Material Material On-Site at Location(s)'&Material Storage and Use, and Storage Locations
Secondary Containment Practices from Nearby Waterways
Any One Time and Structures' and Sensitive Areas'
Gasoline I Equipment 30 gal. Control Cabinet for Gas&Diesel 50'
Diesel Equipment 75 gal. Control Cabinet for Gas&Diesel 50' II
Paint Building interior/exterior 50 gal. Inside building in ventilated area 50'
Notes:
See also Section 7.D (Spill Prevention, secondary containment and structures may be described in Table 4 or under Section 7D.
2 Waterways include streams, creeks, sloughs, rivers, Puget Sound, etc.
Sensitive areas are areas that typically contain populations that could be particularly sensitive to a hazardous materials spill or
release. Such areas include wetlands, areas that provide habitat for threatened or endangered species, nursing homes,
hospitals, child care centers, etc. Sensitive areas also include areas where groundwater is used for drinking water, such as
wellhead protection zones and sole source aquifer recharge areas.
SPCC Plan, Whole Foods Market—Lynnwood 08/15/2011
Page 6
5. Pre-Existing Contamination
None are known.
SPCC Plan, Whole Foods Market—Lynnwood 08/15/2011
Page 7
6. Spill Prevention and Response Training
• During project orientation, refueling and storage of fuel will be discussed and
acknowledge by all personnel being trained.
• Refueling of large equipment shall be done in hard surface areas away from
waterways, catch basins, ect.
• Minor spills will be contained on site and cleaned up by an authorized personnel
and disposed of in accordance to ECY department requirements.
• A spill response kit will be located in the main job trailer.
SPCC Plan, Whole Foods Market—Lynnwood 08/15/2011
Page 8
7. Spill Prevention
A. Spill response kit contents and location(s) (see Table 7). Appropriately stocked spill
response kits shall be maintained in close proximity to hazardous materials and equipment
and shall be immediately accessible to all Project personnel.
Table 7 Spill Response Kit Contents and Locations
Type of Spill Kit Spill Kit Contents Spill Kit Location(s)
Vehicle Kit Dimple absorbent pads,oil socks,wiping rags, Main job trailer
disposable bags,bag ties,chemical resistant
gloves,
B. Security measures for potential spill sources.
All fuel will be stored in a fuel cabinet in a fenced enclosure by trailer. The fuel cabinet
will remain locked during non-working hours.
C. Methods used to prevent stormwater from contacting fuel, petroleum products and
hazardous materials.
Petroleum products and hazardous materials will be kept in a control cabinet. No
contaminated soils are known to be on site - if any are discovered they will be covered and
remediated as soon as practical.
D. Secondary containment for each potential spill source listed in Section 4, above.
Fuels will be kept in control cabinet.
E. Best Management Practices (BMP) Methods will be used to prevent discharges to ground or
water during mixing and transfers of hazardous materials, petroleum product and fuel, in
accordance with Ecology's Construction Stormwater General NPDES Permit.
Refueling will occur on hardscape surfaces away from bodies of water or areas of
exposed soil to help prevent and control spills.
F. Routine equipment, storage area, and structure inspection and maintenance practices to
prevent drips, leaks or failures of hoses, valves, fittings, containers, pumps, or other systems
that contain or transfer hazardous materials
Equipment will be monitored daily for any existing or potential leaks. Any leaks will be
controlled and corrected immediately.
G. Site inspection procedures and frequency.
Site inspections will occur as observed daily. Detailed inspection of site and equipment
will be performed once per week.
SPCC Plan, Whole Foods Market—Lynnwood 08/15/2011
Page 9
8. Spill Response
Tables 8A and 8B, below, outline the response procedures that J. R. Abbott shall follow for the
scenarios described in the tables below, indicating that if hazardous materials are encountered
or spilled to soil or water(including stormwater, as described in Section 7C) during construction,
J. R. Abbott shall do everything possible to control and contain the material until appropriate
measures can be taken. The response procedures include a description of the actions that J. R.
Abbott shall take to address each task shown in the tables as well as the specific on-site, spill
response equipment that shall be used to perform each task. Complete Tables 8A and 8B.
If J. R. Abbott will use a Subcontractor for spill response, provide contact information for the
Subcontractor in Table 1 and, in the appropriate table below, identify when the Subcontractor
shall be used and the actions that J. R. Abbott shall take at the site while waiting for the
Subcontractor to respond. Add Subcontractor information to Tables 8A and 8B accordingly.
If J. R. Abbott encounters unanticipated pre-existing contamination within the Project area
during Project work, Contractor shall immediately notify the Department of Ecology and the City
of Lynnwood immediately.
SPCC Plan, Whole Foods Market—Lynnwood 08/15/2011
Page 10
Table 8A Spill Response Procedures,
Including Actions to be Taken and Equipment to be Used
Spill Response Task
Hazardous Material and Clean Up Spilled Material
Location Assess the Spill Secure the Area Contain and Eliminate the Spill Decontaminate Equipment
Source Dispose of Spilled&Contaminated
Material
Gasoline All site competent persons will If a gasoline spill occurs The spill source will confined and Spills in water, soils will be cleaned up and
be notified to assist in control the area will be locked out(as applicable)to eliminate remediated by a certified hazardous waste
and capture of any product if immediately flagged or further release of any product.The contractor. Spilled product and contaminated
deemed safe to do so by the barricaded to prevent spill will be contained by use of waters will be held in container trucks, barrels
current emergency leader. entrance in to the absorbent pads, absorbent dams, or other suitable containers on site until an
JRA site personnel will contact contaminated area.A rags until additional assistance appropriate disposal site has been arranged.
our office and crisis team No Flame/Ignition zone arrives. Transfer and records for the cleanup and
members. Name and contact of appropriate size will disposal will be kept by the cleanup
information are posted in the be created until the spill contractor and provided to the agency(s)as
job office. can be contained and required.
The appropriate agencies as remediated. Danger and
listed in table 2 will be notified. caution tape as well as
additional fencing are
available on site.
Diesel Fuel All site competent persons will If a diesel spill occurs The spill source will confined and Spills in water, soils will be cleaned up and
be notified to assist in control the area will be locked out(as applicable)to eliminate remediated by a certified hazardous waste
and capture of any product if immediately flagged or further release of any product. The contractor. Spilled product and contaminated
deemed safe to do so by the barricaded to prevent spill will be contained by use of waters will be held in container trucks, barrels
current emergency leader. entrance in to the absorbent pads, absorbent dams, or other suitable containers on site until an
JRA site personnel will contact contaminated area.A rags until additional assistance appropriate disposal site has been arranged.
our office and crisis team No Flame/Ignition zone arrives. Transfer and records for the cleanup and
members. Name and contact of appropriate size will disposal will be kept by the cleanup
information are posted in the be created until the spill contractor and provided to the agency(s)as
job office. can be contained and required.
The appropriate agencies as remediated. Danger and
listed in table 2 will be notified. caution tape as well as
additional fencing are
available on site.
Solvent based Paint and On site competent persons will If a paint spill occurs the The spill source will confined and Spills in water, soils will be cleaned up and
thinners be notified to assist in control area will be immediately locked out(as applicable)to eliminate remediated by a certified hazardous waste
and capture of any product if flagged or barricaded to further release of any product.The contractor. Spilled product and contaminated
deemed safe to do so by the prevent entrance in to spill will be contained by use of waters will be held in container trucks, barrels
SPCC Plan, Whole Foods Market-Lynnwood 08/15/2011
Page 11
Spill Response Task
Hazardous Material and Clean Up Spilled Material
Location Assess the Spill Secure the Area Contain and Eliminate the Spill Decontaminate Equipment
Source Dispose of Spilled &Contaminated
Material'
current emergency leader. the contaminated area. absorbent pads,absorbent dams, or other suitable containers on site until an
JRA site personnel will contact rags until additional assistance appropriate disposal site has been arranged.
our office and crisis team arrives. Transfer and records for the cleanup and
members. Name and contact disposal will be kept by the cleanup
information are posted in the contractor and provided to the agency(s)as
job office. required.
The appropriate agencies as
listed in table 2 will be notified.
Notes:
Spilled fuel, petroleum product and hazardous materials, contaminated stormwater, contaminated soil and water, and all cleanup supplies shall
be transported off site for disposal at a facility approved by the Department of Ecology. No potentially hazardous materials, contaminated soil or
water, or cleanup supplies may be discharged to any sanitary sewer without approval of the local sewer authority. Contaminated stormwater will
not be discharged to any sanitary sewer without approval of the local sewer authority.
• Petroleum products, fuel, and hazardous material spills shall be addressed and shall be prevented from reaching storm drains or other
discharge points.
• It is acceptable to combine materials covered by the same response procedures, as long each material is clearly identified.
SPCC Plan, Whole Foods Market—Lynnwood 08/15/2011
Page 12
9. Project Site Map
A Project site map, clearly showing each of the following required or recommended items, is
attached (sheet C1.0 of the Construction Documents, attached):
A. Site location and boundaries;
B. Site access roads;
C. Drainage pathways from the site and on site storm collection;
D. Nearby waterways and sensitive areas(Waterways include streams, creeks, sloughs, rivers,
Puget Sound, etc. Sensitive areas are areas that typically contain populations that could be
particularly sensitive to a hazardous materials spill or release. Such areas include wetlands,
areas that provide habitat for threatened or endangered species, nursing homes, hospitals,
child care centers, etc. Sensitive areas also include areas where groundwater is used for
drinking water, such as wellhead protection zones and sole source aquifer recharge areas.);
E. Hazardous materials, equipment, and decontamination areas identified in Section 4
(Potential Spill Sources), above;
F. Pre-existing contamination or contaminant sources described in Section 5 (Pre-Existing
Contamination), above;
G. Spill prevention and response equipment described in Section 7 (Spill Prevention) and
Section 8(Spill Response), above;
H. Recommend using Project-specific Plan Sheets or a consistent map scale with identifiable
or readable map symbols for each Project SPCC Map;
I. Locations of storage, stockpiles and existing buildings.
z �
SPCC Plan, Whole Foods Market—Lynnwood 08/15/2011
Page 13
10. Spill Report Form(s)
A copy of the spill report form that City of Lynnwood Contractors shall use in the event of a
release or spill is attached: refer to Appendix A.
SPCC Plan, Whole Foods Market—Lynnwood 08/15/2011
Page 14
11. Plan Approval
By signing below, J. R. Abbott acknowledges this SPCC Plan is supported by the Contractor
having the authority to commit the necessary resources, including labor, equipment, and
materials, to expeditiously control and remove any harmful quantity of fuel, petroleum product or
hazardous materials spilled or released to the waters or land of the State of Washington.
Contractor further acknowledges this SPCC Plan meets all requirements of Lynnwood Municipal
Code (LMC) 13.40 Stormwater Management and 13.45 Surface Water Quality. All personnel on
project have read this SPCC Plan, understand its contents and have signed the SPCC Plan
Acknowledgement Form.
08/19/11 Jaderz Vitrwcu
Date Jaden Villnow
Project Engineer
J. R. Abbott Construction
This SPCC Plan has been reviewed and approved by the City of Lynnwood Environmental and
Surface Water Division.
Date Darlene Little
Engineering Tech Aide
Surface Water Division
City of Lynnwood
Date Jared Bond
Environmental and Surface Water Supervisor
City of Lynnwood
SPCC Plan, Whole Foods Market— Lynnwood 08/15/2011
Page 15
SPCC Plan Acknowledgement Form (to be signed by all Project personnel)
This is to certify that I have read this Project SPCC Plan and understand its contents. I have
attended a Project orientation meeting discussing the elements of this SPCC Plan and the
safety and health hazards associated with SPCC operations to be performed at this Project.
Failure to comply with the requirements contained in this SPCC Plan may result in my removal
from the Project.
PRINT NAME SIGNATURE DATE
I
I
I
SPCC Plan, Whole Foods Market- Lynnwood 08/15/2011 I
Page 16
APPENDIX A
EXAMPLE SPILL OR INCIDENT REPORT FORM
Instructions: Complete for any type of petroleum product or hazardous materials/waste spill or
incident. Provide a copy of this report to City of Lynnwood Surface Water Management.
1. Contractor:
Name and Title of Person Responsible for Spill Response:
Phone Number:
2. General Spill Information:
Common Name of Spilled Substance:
Quantity Spilled (Estimate):
Describe Concentration of Material (Estimate):
Date of Spill: / /
Time Spill Started: AM PM Time Spill Ended: AM PM
3. Spill Location and Conditions:
Project Title:
Street Address and/or Milepost, City:
Weather Conditions:
If Spill to Water,
Name of Water Body(if ditch or culvert, identify the water body that the structure discharges to):
Identify the Discharge Point:
Estimate the Depth and Width of the Water Body:
Estimate Flow Rate(i.e., slow, moderate, or fast):
Describe Environmental Damage(i.e., fish kill?):
4. Actions Taken:
To Contain Spill or Impact of Incident:
To Cleanup Spill or Recover from Incident:
To Remove Cleanup Material:
To Document Disposal:
To Prevent Reoccurrence:
SPCC Plan, Whole Foods Market—Lynnwood 08/15/2011
Page 17
5. Reporting the Spill:
Spills to water: Immediately call the National Response Center(1-800-424-8802), Emergency
Management(1-800-258-5990), and the Ecology Northwest Regional Office(1-425-649-7000).
Spills to soil that may be an immediate threat to health or the environment(i.e., explosive,
flammable,toxic vapors, shallow groundwater, nearby creek, etc.): Call the Ecology Northwest
Regional Office immediately(1-425-649-7000). If not immediately threatening, but may be a
threat to human health or the environment, report to Ecology within 24 hours.
Note: Project specific permits may have additional reporting requirements.
List all agencies contacted; include names, dates, and phone numbers for people you spoke with:
Record ERTS#, if issued by Ecology:
6. Person Responsible for Managing Termination/Closure of Incident or Spill:
Name and Phone:
Address and Fax:
7. Additional Notes/Information (if necessary):
SPCC Plan, Whole Foods Market—Lynnwood 08/15/2011
Page 18
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 016000-PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for
use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on
products; special warranties;product substitutions; and comparable products.
B. See Division 01 Section"Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties for Contract closeout.
C. See Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products and
installations specified to be warranted.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or
taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material,"
"equipment,""system,"and terms of similar intent.
1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or
model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product
literature,that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.
2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or
facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new
products.
3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal
process, or where indicated as a product substitution, to have the indicated qualities
related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties,
appearance,and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.
B. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from
those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.
C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: Where a specific manufacturer's product is named and
accompanied by the words "basis of design," including make or model number or other
designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service
performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of
evaluating comparable products of other named manufacturers.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product
or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and
title and Drawing numbers and titles.
1. Substitution Request Form: Use facsimile of form provided in this Specification booklet.
2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following,
as applicable:
a. Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided.
b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to
other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate
contractors,that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.
c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of
the Work specified. Significant qualities may include attributes such as
performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and
requirements indicated.
d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and
installation procedures.
e. Samples,where applicable or requested.
f. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and
addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners.
g. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test
results for compliance with requirements indicated.
h. Research/evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for
Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
i. Cost information,including a proposal of change,if any,in the Contract Sum.
j. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in
the Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated.
k. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently
become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated
results.
3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or
documentation for evaluation within 7 days of receipt of a request for substitution.
Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within
15 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional information or
documentation,whichever is later.
a. Form of Acceptance: Change Order.
b. Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a proposed
substitution within time allocated.
B. Comparable Product Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify
product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section
number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000-2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or
documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product
request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable
product request within 15 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional
information or documentation,whichever is later.
a. Form of Approval: As specified in Division 01 Section"Submittal Procedures."
b. Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a comparable
product request within time allocated.
C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 01
Section"Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more
products for use on Project, product selected shall be compatible with products previously
selected,even if previously selected products were also options.
1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage,
deterioration,and loss,including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Delivery and Handling:
1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent
overcrowding of construction spaces.
2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that
are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other
losses.
3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original
sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for
handling,storing,unpacking,protecting,and installing.
4. Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to
ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected.
C. Storage:
1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.
2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.
3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements,under cover in a weathertight
enclosure above ground,with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.
4. Store cementitious products and materials on elevated platforms.
5. Store foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of
installation and concealment.
6. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity,
ventilation,and weather-protection requirements for storage.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000-3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
7. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.
1.6 PRODUCT WARRANTIES
A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other
warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on
product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract
Documents.
1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual
manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to
Owner.
2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract
Documents,either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide
more rights for Owner.
B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and
identification,ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution.
1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and
properly executed.
2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a
written document using appropriate form properly executed.
3. Refer to Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific content requirements and particular
requirements for submitting special warranties.
C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section"Closeout Procedures."
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES
A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents,
that are undamaged and,unless otherwise indicated,that are new at time of installation.
1. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with
requirements of the Contract Documents.
2. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make
selection.
B. Product Selection Procedures:
1. Product: Where Specifications name a single product and manufacturer, provide the
named product that complies with requirements.
2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source,
provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000-4
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
3. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected
from manufacturer's colors, patterns, textures" or a similar phrase, select a product that
complies with other specified requirements.
a. Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "standard range of
colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern,
density,or texture from manufacturer's product line that does not include premium
items.
b. Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "full range of colors,
patterns,textures"or similar phrase,Architect will select color,pattern,density, or
texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium
items.
2.2 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Timing: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 14 days after
commencement of the Work. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at
discretion of Architect.
B. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following
conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return
requests without action,except to record noncompliance with these requirements:
1. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy
conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner
must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect
for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and
similar considerations.
2. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents.
3. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce
indicated results.
4. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
2.3 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS
A. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the
following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will
return requests without action,except to record noncompliance with these requirements:
1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require extensive revisions to the Contract
Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the
indicated results,and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.
2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the
Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size,
durability,visual effect,and specific features and requirements indicated.
3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.
4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and
names and addresses of architects and owners,if requested.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000-5
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
5. Samples,if requested.
PART 3-EXECUTION(Not Used)
END OF SECTION 016000
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000-6
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 017300-EXECUTION
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work
including,but not limited to,the following:
1. Construction layout.
2. Field engineering and surveying.
3. General installation of products.
4. Progress cleaning.
5. Starting and adjusting.
6. Protection of installed construction.
7. Correction of the Work.
B. See Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with
Project Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and
levels,and final cleaning.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other
construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and
verify the existence and location of mechanical and electrical systems and other construction
affecting the Work.
1. Before construction,verify the location and points of connection of utility services.
B. Existing Utilities: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and
construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate
and verify the existence and location of underground utilities and other construction affecting
the Work.
1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of
sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; and underground electrical
services.
2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public
utilities serving Project site.
EXECUTION 017300- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
C. Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or
Applicator present where indicated,for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances
and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations.
1. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with
existing finishes or primers.
2. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of
connections before equipment and fixture installation.
3. Examine walls,floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are
to be installed.
4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck
measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to
other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before
fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the
Work.
B. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for
clarification of the Contract Documents,submit a request for information to Architect. Include
a detailed description of problem encountered,together with recommendations for changing the
Contract Documents. Submit requests on CSI Form 13.2A,"Request for Interpretation."
3.3 FIELD ENGINEERING
A. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site,
referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having
jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark.
1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record
Documents.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and
elevation,as indicated.
1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.
2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance
and ease of removal for replacement.
3. Conceal pipes,ducts,and wiring in finished areas,unless otherwise indicated.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in
applications indicated.
EXECUTION 017300-2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results.
Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.
D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or
loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.
E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.
F. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be
factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that
adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated
requirements.
G. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component
securely in place,accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work.
1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at
heights directed by Architect.
2. Allow for building movement,including thermal expansion and contraction.
3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and
directions for installing anchorages,including sleeves,concrete inserts, anchor bolts,and
items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver
such items to Project site in time for installation.
H. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated,
arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.
I. Hazardous Materials: Use products,cleaners,and installation materials that are not considered
hazardous.
3.5 PROGRESS CLEANING
A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate
progress cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce
requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.
1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and
debris.
2. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the
temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F.
3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste.
Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally,according to regulations.
B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.
C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for
proper execution of the Work.
1. Remove liquid spills promptly.
EXECUTION 017300-3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the
entire work area,as appropriate.
D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written
instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials
specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning
materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.
E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.
F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure
freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
G. Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on-site will not be permitted. Washing
waste materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted.
H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining
materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from
damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.
I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through
the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure
operability without damaging effects.
J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the
construction,completed or in progress,is subject to harmful,dangerous,damaging,or otherwise
deleterious exposure during the construction period.
3.6 STARTING AND ADJUSTING
A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove
malfunctioning units,replace with new units,and retest.
B. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for
proper operation.
C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
D. Manufacturer's Field Service: If a factory-authorized service representative is required to _
inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, comply with qualification
requirements in Division 01 Section"Quality Requirements."
3.7 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage
or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
EXECUTION 017300-4
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.
3.8 CORRECTION OF THE WORK
A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes.
Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section"Cutting and Patching."
1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up
with matching materials,and properly adjusting operating equipment.
B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition.
C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired
without visible evidence of repair.
D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components
that cannot be repaired.
E. Remove and replace chipped,scratched,and broken glass or reflective surfaces.
END OF SECTION 017300
EXECUTION 017300-5
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 017329-CUTTING AND PATCHING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 01 Section "Selective Structure Demolition" for demolition of selected portions
of the building.
2. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to
cutting and patching individual parts of the Work.
Y 3. Division 07 Section"Penetration Firestopping"for patching fire-rated construction.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of
other Work.
B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after
installation of other Work.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit a proposal describing procedures at least 10 days before
the time cutting and patching will be performed, requesting approval to proceed. Include the
following information:
1. Extent: Describe cutting and patching, show how they will be performed, and indicate
why they cannot be avoided.
2. Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to
structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building's appearance
and other significant visual elements.
3. Products: List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform the Work.
4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed.
5. Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: List services/systems that cutting
and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services/systems that will be
CUTTING AND PATCHING 017329- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate how long
services/systems will be disrupted.
6. Structural Elements: Where cutting and patching involve adding reinforcement to
structural elements, submit details and engineering calculations showing integration of
reinforcement with original structure.
7. Architect's Approval: Obtain approval of cutting and patching proposal before cutting
and patching. Approval does not waive right to later require removal and replacement of
unsatisfactory work.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change
their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio.
B. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a
manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased
maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.
C. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch miscellaneous elements or related components
in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their
capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased
operational life or safety. —
D. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual
evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or
in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's
aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually
unsatisfactory manner.
E. Cutting and Patching Conference: Before proceeding,meet at Project site with parties involved
in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential
interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before
proceeding.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Existing Warranties: Remove,replace, patch,and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged
during cutting and patching operations,by methods and with materials so as not to void existing
warranties.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.
CUTTING AND PATCHING 017329-2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
B. In-Place Materials: Use materials identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use
materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.
1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used,use materials that,when installed,
will match the visual and functional performance of in-place materials.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to
be performed.
1. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates,
including compatibility with in-place finishes or primers.
2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut.
B. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage.
Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be
exposed during cutting and patching operations.
C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage
to adjoining areas.
D. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems
are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before
cutting to minimize interruption to occupied areas.
3.3 PERFORMANCE
A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and
patching at the earliest feasible time,and complete without delay.
1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance
of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their
original condition.
B. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing,drilling,breaking,chipping,grinding,and similar
operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or
adjoining construction. If possible,review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply
with original Installer's written recommendations.
CUTTING AND PATCHING 017329-3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not
hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size
required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover
openings when not in use.
2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces.
3. Concrete: Cut using a cutting machine,such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill.
4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 31
Sections where required by cutting and patching operations.
5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be
removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent
entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.
6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.
C. Patching: Patch construction by filling,repairing,refinishing,closing up,and similar operations
following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as
possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other
Sections.
1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to
demonstrate integrity of installation.
2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish
restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence
of patching and refmishing.
a. Clean piping, conduit,and similar features before applying paint or other finishing
materials.
b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.
3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one fmished area
into another,patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even
surface of uniform fmish,color,texture,and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall
coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and
appearance.
a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint
coats over the patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface
containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent
surfaces.
4. Ceilings: Patch,repair,or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane
surface of uniform appearance. —
5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a
weathertight condition.
D. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely
remove paint,mortar,oils,putty,and similar materials.
END OF SECTION 017329
CUTTING AND PATCHING 017329-4
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 017419-CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:
1. Salvaging nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.
2. Recycling nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.
3. Disposing of nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 024119 "Selective Demolition" for disposition of waste resulting from partial
demolition of buildings,structures,and site improvements.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting
from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes
packaging.
B. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or
selective demolition operations.
C. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale,recycling,
reuse,or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in preparation
for reuse.
E. Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another
facility.
F. Salvage and Reuse: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent incorporation
into the Work.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Achieve end-of-Project rates for salvage/recycling of 50 percent by weight of total
non-hazardous solid waste generated by the Work. Facilitate recycling and salvage of materials.
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 017419- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Waste Management Plan: Submit plan within 7 days of date established for commencement of
the Work.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Waste Reduction Calculations: Before request for Substantial Completion, submit calculated
end-of-Project rates for salvage,recycling,and disposal as a percentage of total waste generated
by the Work. Include the total quantity of waste salvaged and recycled in tons.
B. Records of Donations: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste donated to
individuals and organizations.
C. Records of Sales: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste sold to individuals and
organizations.
D. Recycling and Processing Facility Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of recyclable waste
by recycling and processing facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests,weight tickets,
receipts,and invoices.
E. Landfill and Incinerator Disposal Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of waste by landfills
and incinerator facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests,weight tickets,receipts,and
invoices.
F. Qualification Data: For waste management coordinator.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Waste Management Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with
requirements in Section 013100"Project Management and Coordination."
1.7 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN
A. General: Develop a waste management plan according to ASTM E 1609 and requirements in
this Section. Plan shall consist of waste identification and waste reduction work
plan. Distinguish between demolition and construction waste. Indicate quantities by weight.
B. Waste Identification: Indicate anticipated types and quantities of demolition and construction
waste generated by the Work.
C. Waste Reduction Work Plan: List each type of anticipated waste and whether it will be
salvaged, recycled, or disposed of in landfill or incinerator. Include points of waste generation,
total quantity of each type of waste, quantity for each means of recovery, and handling and
transportation procedures.
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 017419- 2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1. Salvaged Materials for Reuse: For materials that will be salvaged and reused in this
Project, describe methods for preparing salvaged materials before incorporation into the
Work.
2. Salvaged Materials for Sale: For materials that will be sold to individuals and
organizations,include list of their names,addresses,and telephone numbers.
3. Salvaged Materials for Donation: For materials that will be donated to individuals and
organizations,include list of their names,addresses,and telephone numbers.
4. Recycled Materials: Include list of local receivers and processors and type of recycled
materials each will accept.Include names,addresses,and telephone numbers.
5. Disposed Materials: Indicate how and where materials will be disposed of. Include name,
address,and telephone number of each landfill and incinerator facility.
6. Handling and Transportation Procedures: Include method that will be used for separating
recyclable waste including sizes of containers,container labeling,and designated location
where materials separation will be performed.
PART 2-PRODUCTS(Not Used)
PART 3 -EXECUTION -
3.1 PLAN IMPLEMENTATION
A. General: Implement approved waste management plan. Provide handling, containers, storage,
signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management plan
during the entire duration of the Contract.
B. Waste Management Coordinator: Engage a waste management coordinator to be responsible for
implementing, monitoring, and reporting status of waste management work plan. Coordinator
shall be present at Project site full time for duration of Project. -
C. Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management
procedures,as appropriate for the Work occurring at Project site.
1. Distribute waste management plan to everyone concerned within three days of submittal
return.
2. Distribute waste management plan to entities when they first begin work on-site. Review
plan procedures and locations established for salvage,recycling,and disposal.
D. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure
minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and
used facilities.
1. Designate and label specific areas on Project site necessary for separating materials that
are to be salvaged,recycled,reused,donated,and sold.
2. Comply with Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for controlling dust
and dirt,environmental protection,and noise control.
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 017419 - 3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
3.2 SALVAGING DEMOLITION WASTE
A. Salvaged Items for Reuse in the Work:
1. Clean salvaged items.
2. Pack or crate items after cleaning.Identify contents of containers.
3. Store items in a secure area until installation.
4. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
5. Install salvaged items to comply with installation requirements for new materials and
equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to
make items functional for use indicated.
B. Salvaged Items for Sale and Donation:Not permitted on Project site.
C. Salvage items per Owner's direction. Contractor is responsible for removal of salvage items if
Owner chooses not to keep items. If directed to keep items,provide the following:
1. Clean salvaged items.
2. Pack or crate items after cleaning.Identify contents of containers.
3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.
4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner.
5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
3.3 RECYCLING DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION WASTE,GENERAL
A. General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers.
B. Recycling Incentives: Revenues, savings, rebates, tax credits, and other incentives received for
recycling waste materials shall be accrued as directed by Owner.
C. Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris. Separate
recyclable waste by type at Project site to the maximum extent practical according to approved
construction waste management plan.
1. Provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable waste until
they are removed from Project site. Include list of acceptable and unacceptable materials
at each container and bin.
a. Inspect containers and bins for contamination and remove contaminated materials
if found.
2. Stockpile processed materials on-site without intermixing with other materials. Place,
grade,and shape stockpiles to drain surface water.Cover to prevent windblown dust.
3. Stockpile materials away from construction area. Do not store within drip line of
remaining trees.
4. Store components off the ground and protect from the weather.
5. Remove recyclable waste from Owner's property and transport to recycling receiver or
processor.
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 017419-4
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
3.4 RECYCLING DEMOLITION WASTE
A. Reduce the size of, separate, sort and/or stack concrete, wood, metals, piping and conduit as
required by recycling company.
3.5 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE
A. Packaging:
1. Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle and store in a dry
location.
2. Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials.
3. Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove pallets from
Project site. For pallets that remain on-site, break down pallets into component wood
pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood.
4. Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply with requirements
for recycling wood.
B. Wood Materials:
1. Clean Cut-Offs of Lumber: Grind or chip into small pieces.
2. Clean Sawdust: Bag sawdust that does not contain painted or treated wood.
C. Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets or in container and store in a dry
location.
1. Clean Gypsum Board: Grind scraps of clean gypsum board using small mobile chipper or
hammer mill. Screen out paper after grinding.
3.6 DISPOSAL OF WASTE
A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove
waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of
accumulate on-site.
2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces
and areas.
B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials.
C. Burning: Burning of waste materials is permitted only at designated areas on Owner's property,
provided required permits are obtained. Provide full-time monitoring for burning materials until
fires are extinguished.
D. Disposal: Remove waste materials and dispose of at designated spoil areas on Owner's property.
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 017419- 5
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
E. Disposal: Remove waste materials from Owner's property and legally dispose of them.
END OF SECTION 017419
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 017419-6
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 017700-CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout,
including,but not limited to,the following:
1. Inspection procedures.
2. Warranties.
3. Final cleaning.
B. See Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures" for requirements for Applications for Payment
for Substantial and Final Completion.
C. - See Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record
Specifications,and Record Product Data.
D. See Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance
manual requirements.
E. See Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training" for requirements for instructing Owner's
personnel.
F. See Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements
for the Work in those Sections.
1.2 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial
Completion,complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request.
1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on
the list,and reasons why the Work is not complete.
2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.
3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final
certifications,and similar documents.
4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to
services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar
releases.
5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, and
similar final record information.
6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by
Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's
personnel of changeover in security provisions.
8. Complete startup testing of systems.
9. Submit test/adjust/balance records.
10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,
construction tools,and similar elements.
11. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities.
12. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and
maintenance.
13. Complete final cleaning requirements,including touchup painting.
14. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual
defects.
B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of
request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled
requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection
or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by
Architect,that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
1. Re-inspection: Request re-inspection when the Work identified in previous inspections
as incomplete is completed or corrected.
2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final
Completion.
1.3 FINAL COMPLETION
A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final
Completion,complete the following:
1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 01 Section "Payment
Procedures."
2. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be
completed or corrected (punch list),endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy
of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for
acceptance.
3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance
requirements.
4. Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty.
5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,
equipment,and systems.
B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request,
Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements.
Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor
of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
1. Re-inspection: Request re-inspection when the Work identified in previous inspections
as incomplete is completed or corrected.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700-2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1.4 LIST OF INCOMPL)✓1'E ITEMS(PUNCH LIST)
A. Preparation: Submit three copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area
affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction
including,if necessary,areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.
I. Organize list of spaces in sequential order,proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor.
2. Organize items applying to each space by major element,including categories for ceiling,
individual walls,floors,equipment,and building systems.
1.5 WARRANTIES
A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of
the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is
indicated.
B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the
Project Manual.
1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders,
thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch
paper.
2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark
tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or
installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone
number of Installer.
3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title
"WARR.ANTIES,"Project name,and name of Contractor.
C. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or
fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially
hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700-3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 FINAL CLEANING
A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply
with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution
regulations.
B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each
surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and
maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification
of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project:
a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds,in areas disturbed by construction activities,
including landscape development areas,of rubbish,waste material,litter,and other
foreign substances.
b. Sweep paved areas broomclean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other
foreign deposits.
c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured
surface.
d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from
Project site.
e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building.
f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition,
free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural
weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original
condition.
g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs,
plenums,shafts,trenches,equipment vaults,manholes,attics,and similar spaces.
h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.
i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap;
shampoo if visible soil or stains remain.
j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.
Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials.
Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish
mirrors and glass,taking care not to scratch surfaces.
k. Remove labels that are not permanent.
1. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces.
Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or
that already show evidence of repair or restoration.
1) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and
electrical nameplates.
m. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment.
Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign
substances.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700-4
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
n. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions.
o. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains
resulting from water exposure.
p. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed
surfaces of diffusers,registers,and grills.
q. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.
Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and
defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply
with requirements for new fixtures.
r. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.
C. Pest Control: Engage an experienced, licensed exterminator to make a final inspection and rid
Project of rodents,insects,and other pests. Prepare a report.
D. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or
excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous
materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of
lawfully.
END OF SECTION 017700
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700-5
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 017823-OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and
maintenance manuals,including the following:
1. Operation manuals for systems,subsystems,and equipment.
2. Maintenance manuals for the care and maintenance of systems and equipment.
B. See Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual
requirements for the Work in those Sections.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Manual: Submit one copy of each manual in final form at least 15 days before final inspection.
Architect will return copy with comments within 15 days after final inspection.
1. Correct or modify each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit 4 copies of
each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's comments.
2. Provide one electronic copy of the final approved O&M Manual in pdf format that is
indexed,bookmarked and searchable.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUALS,GENERAL
A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated,organize each manual into a separate section for each
system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system.
Each manual shall contain a title page,table of contents,and manual contents.
B. Title Page: Enclose title page in transparent plastic sleeve. Include the following information:
-1. Subject matter included in manual.
2. Name and address of Project.
3. Name and address of Owner.
4. Date of submittal.
5. Name,address,and telephone number of Contractor.
6. Name and address of Architect.
7. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual,identified by product name, indexed
to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project
Manual.
D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by
system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems,
equipment,and components of one system into a single binder.
1. Binders: Heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered,loose-leaf binders,in thickness necessary to
accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper;with clear plastic sleeve on
spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded
oversize sheets.
a. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of
contents. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets.
2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section. Mark each
tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of
equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification
Section number and title of Project Manual.
3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic
software diskettes for computerized electronic equipment.
4. Drawings: Attach reinforced,punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.
a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and
use as foldouts.
b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts,fold and place drawings in labeled
envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in
manual,insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles,descriptions of contents,
and drawing locations.
2.2 OPERATION MANUALS
A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in
individual Specification Sections and equipment descriptions, operating standards, operating
procedures,operating logs,wiring and control diagrams,and license requirements.
B. Descriptions: Include the following:
1. Product name and model number.
2. Manufacturer's name.
3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component.
4. Equipment function.
5. Operating characteristics.
6. Limiting conditions.
7. Performance curves.
8. Engineering data and tests.
9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823-2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
C. Operating Procedures: Include start-up,break-in,and control procedures; stopping and normal
shutdown instructions; routine, normal, seasonal, and weekend operating instructions; and
required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation,and diagram controls as
installed.
E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for
identification.
2.3 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include
source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures,
maintenance and service schedules,spare parts list and source information,maintenance service
contracts,and warranty and bond information,as described below.
B. Source Information: List each system,subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual,
identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product,
list name,address,and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent,
and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.
C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation
including maintenance instructions, drawings and diagrams for maintenance, nomenclature of
parts and components, and recommended spare parts for each component part or piece of
equipment:
D. Maintenance Procedures: Include test and inspection instructions, troubleshooting guide,
disassembly instructions, and adjusting instructions that detail essential maintenance
procedures. -
E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of
required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine
maintenance and service with standard time allotment.
F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with
parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local
sources of maintenance materials and related services.
G. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and
conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823-3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION
A. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures
for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies
indicated.
B. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care
and maintenance of each product,material,and finish incorporated into the Work.
C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance
data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment
not part of a system.
D. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include
only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each
product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a
tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents.
Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.
E. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the
relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and
flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in Record Drawings to
ensure correct illustration of completed installation.
1. Do not use original Project Record Documents as part of operation and maintenance
manuals.
F. Comply with Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation
and maintenance documentation.
END OF SECTION 017823
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 -4
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 017839-PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project Record
Documents,including the following:
1. Record Drawings.
B. See Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance
manual requirements.
C. See Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific requirements for Project Record Documents
of the Work in those Sections.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:
I. Number of Copies: Submit one set of marked-up Record Prints.
B. Record Specifications: Submit one copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and
contract modifications.
C. Record Product Data: Submit one copy of each Product Data submittal in addition to the
materials required for O&M Manuals.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of blue- or black-line white prints of the Contract Drawings
and Shop Drawings.
1. Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies
from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data,
whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the
marked-up Record Prints.
a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be
difficult to identify or measure and record later.
b. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup
before enclosing concealed installations.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
2. Mark the Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing
actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. If Shop Drawings are marked,
show cross-reference on the Contract Drawings.
3. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish
between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.
4. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order
numbers,and similar identification,where applicable.
B. Format: Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation"PROJECT RECORD
DRAWING"in a prominent location.
1. Record Prints: Organize Record Prints and newly prepared Record Drawings into
manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification
on cover sheets.
2. Record Transparencies: Organize into unbound sets matching Record Prints. Place
transparencies in durable tube-type drawing containers with end caps. Mark end cap of
each container with identification. If container does not include a complete set, identify
Drawings included.
3. Record CAD Drawings: Organize CAD information into separate electronic files that
correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name each file with the sheet
identification. Include identification in each CAD file.
4. Identification: As follows:
a. Project name.
b. Date.
c. Designation"PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS."
d. Name of Architect.
e. Name of Contractor.
2.2 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS
A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous
record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file
miscellaneous records and identify each,ready for continued use and reference.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE
A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for Project
Record Document purposes. Post changes and modifications to Project Record Documents as
they occur;do not wait until the end of Project.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839-2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store Record Documents and Samples in the
field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use Project
Record Documents for construction purposes. Maintain Record Documents in good order and
in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to
Project Record Documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours.
END OF SECTION 017839
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839-3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 017900-DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's
personnel,including the following:
1. Training in operation and maintenance of systems,subsystems,and equipment.
B. See Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific requirements for demonstration and training
for products in those Sections.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Instruction Program: Submit two copies of outline of instructional program for demonstration
and training, including a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of instruction time, and
instructors' names for each training module. Include learning objective and outline for each
training module.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Facilitator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in training or educating
maintenance personnel in a training program similar in content and extent to that indicated for
this Project, and whose work has resulted in training or education with a record of successful
learning performance.
B. Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative, complying with
requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation and
maintenance procedures and training.
C. Preinstruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Review methods and
procedures related to demonstration and training.
D. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data
has been reviewed and approved by Architect.
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 017900- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85% PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM
A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules
for each system and equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification
Sections.
B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include
a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each
module,include instruction for the following:
1. Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include system and
equipment descriptions, operating standards, regulatory requirements, equipment
function,operating characteristics,limiting conditions,and performance curves.
2. Documentation: Review emergency, operations, and maintenance manuals; Project
Record Documents; identification systems; warranties and bonds; and maintenance
service agreements.
3. Emergencies: Include instructions on stopping; shutdown instructions; operating
instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits; instructions on meaning of
warnings, trouble indications, and error messages; and required sequences for electric or
electronic systems.
4. Operations: Include startup, break-in, control, and safety procedures; stopping and
normal shutdown instructions; routine, normal, seasonal, and weekend operating
instructions; operating procedures for emergencies and equipment failure; and required
sequences for electric or electronic systems.
5. Adjustments: Include alignments and checking, noise, vibration, economy, and
efficiency adjustments.
6. Troubleshooting: Include diagnostic instructions and test and inspection procedures.
7. Maintenance: Include inspection procedures, types of cleaning agents, methods of
cleaning, procedures for preventive and routine maintenance, and instruction on use of
special tools.
8. Repairs: Include diagnosis, repair, and disassembly instructions; instructions for
identifying parts;and review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 INSTRUCTION
A. Facilitator Engage a qualified facilitator to prepare instruction program and training modules,
to coordinate instructors, and to coordinate between Contractor and Owner for number of
participants,instruction times,and location.
B. Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain
systems,subsystems,and equipment not part of a system.
1. Owner will furnish an instructor to describe Owner's operational philosophy.
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 017900-2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85% PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
C. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires
seasonal operation,provide similar instruction at start of each season.
1. Schedule training with Owner with at least seven days'advance notice.
D. Evaluation: At conclusion of each training module, assess and document each participant's
mastery of module by use of a demonstration performance-based test.
END OF SECTION 017900
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 017900- 3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 018113.13 - SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS - GREEN GLOBES FOR NEW
CONSTRUCTION
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes general requirements and procedures for compliance with certain sustainable
design prerequisites and credits needed for Project to obtain a Green Globes for New
Construction 3 Globe Rating.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 01 through Division 28 Specification Sections for Green Globes requirements
specific to the Work of each of these Sections. Requirements may or may not include
reference to Green Globes.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Chain-of-Custody Certificates: Certificates signed by manufacturers certifying that wood used
to make products was obtained from forests certified by a Sustainable Forestry Initiative, CSA,
Forest Stewardship Council, or American Tree Farm System. Certificates shall include
evidence that manufacturer is certified for chain of custody.
B. Regional Materials: Materials that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as
manufactured, within 500 miles of Project site. If only a fraction of a product or material is
extracted/harvested/recovered and manufactured locally,then indicate percentage(by weight).
C. Recycled Content: The recycled content value of a material assembly shall be determined by
weight. The recycled fraction of the assembly is then multiplied by the cost of assembly to
determine the recycled content value.
1. "Post-consumer" material is defined as waste material generated by households or by
commercial,industrial,and institutional facilities in their role as end users of the product,
which can no longer be used for its intended purpose.
2. "Pre-consumer" material is defined as material diverted from the waste stream during the
manufacturing process. Excluded is reutilization of materials such as rework, regrind, or
scrap generated in a process and capable of being reclaimed within the same process that
generated it.
1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Respond to questions and requests from Architect and the Green Building Initiative (GBI)
regarding Green Globes credits that are the responsibility of the Contractor, that depend on
product selection or product qualities, or that depend on Contractor's procedures until the GBI
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS - GREEN GLOBES FOR NEW 018113.13 - 1
CONSTRUCTION
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
has made its determination on the project's Green Globes certification application. Document
responses as informational submittals.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Green Globes Documentation Submittals:
1. Product data and certification letter from product manufacturers indicating percentages
by weight of post-consumer and pre-consumer recycled content for products having
recycled content.
2. Product data for regional materials indicating location and distance from Project of
material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest,or recovery for each raw material.
If product is partially made of regional materials,indicate percentage by weight.
3. Product data for adhesives and sealants used inside the weatherproofing system
indicating VOC content of each product used.
4. Product data for paints and coatings used inside the weatherproofing system indicating
VOC content of each product used.
5. Product data for products containing composite wood or agrifiber products or wood glues
indicating that they do not contain urea-formaldehyde resin.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Green Globes Submittals: Provide submittals within 30 days of date established for the Notice
of Award indicating how the following requirements will be met:
1. List of proposed materials with recycled content. Indicate post-consumer recycled
content,and pre-consumer recycled content for each product having recycled content.
2. List of proposed regional materials. Identify each regional material, including its source,
and the percentage by weight that is considered regional.
3. Additional submittals as required by individual submittal sections.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 RECYCLED CONTENT OF MATERIALS
A. Building materials shall have recycled content such that post-consumer recycled content plus
one-half of pre-consumer recycled content as required by individual submittal sections.
2.2 REGIONAL MATERIALS
A. Indicate regional materials as indicated in individual Specification Sections.
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS - GREEN GLOBES FOR NEW 018113.13-2
CONSTRUCTION
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
2.3 LOW-EMITTING MATERIALS
A. For field applications that are inside the weatherproofing system, adhesives and sealants shall
comply with the following VOC content limits when calculated according to 40 CFR 59,
Subpart D(EPA Method 24):
1. Wood Glues: 30 g/L.
2. Metal-to-Metal Adhesives: 30 g/L.
3. Adhesives for Porous Materials(Except Wood): 50 g/L.
4. Subfloor Adhesives: 50 g/L.
5. Plastic Foam Adhesives: 50 g/L.
6. Carpet Adhesives: 50 g/L.
7. Carpet Pad Adhesives:50 g/L.
8. VCT and Asphalt Tile Adhesives: 50 g/L.
9. Cove Base Adhesives: 50 g/L.
10. Gypsum Board and Panel Adhesives: 50 g/L.
11. Rubber Floor Adhesives: 60 g/L.
12. Ceramic Tile Adhesives: 65 g/L.
13. Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 g/L.
14. Fiberglass Adhesives: 80 g/L.
15. Contact Adhesive: 80 g/L.
16. Structural Glazing Adhesives: 100 g/L.
17. Wood Flooring Adhesive: 100 g/L.
18. Structural Wood Member Adhesive: 140 g/L.
19. Single-Ply Roof Membrane Adhesive: 250 g/L.
20. Special-Purpose Contact Adhesive (contact adhesive that is used to bond melamine
covered board, metal, unsupported vinyl, rubber, or wood veneer 1/16 inch or less in
thickness to any surface):250 g/L.
21. Top and Trim Adhesive: 250 g/L.
22. Plastic Cement Welding Compounds: 250 g/L.
23. ABS Welding Compounds: 325 g/L.
24. CPVC Welding Compounds:490 g/L.
25. PVC Welding Compounds: 510 g/L.
26. Adhesive Primer for Plastic: 550 g/L.
27. Sheet-Applied Rubber Lining Adhesive: 850 g/L.
28. Aerosol Adhesive,General Purpose Mist Spray: 65 percent by weight.
29. Aerosol Adhesive,General Purpose Web Spray: 55 percent by weight.
30. Special Purpose Aerosol Adhesive(All Types): 70 percent by weight.
31. Other Adhesives: 250 g/L.
32. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L.
33. Nonmembrane Roof Sealants: 300 g/L.
34. Single-Ply Roof Membrane Sealants: 450 g/L.
35. Other Sealants:420 g/L.
36. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.
37. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.
38. Modified Bituminous Sealant Primers: 500 g/L.
39. Other Sealant Primers: 750 g/L.
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS - GREEN GLOBES FOR NEW 01g113.13 - 3
CONSTRUCTION
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD, OREGON
B. For field applications that are inside the weatherproofing system, paints and coatings shall
comply with the following VOC content limits when calculated according to 40 CFR 59,
Subpart D(EPA Method 24):
1. Flat Paints and Coatings: VOC not more than 50 g/L.
2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: VOC not more than 150 g/L.
3. Dry-Fog Coatings: VOC not more than 400 g/L.
4. Primers,Sealers,and Undercoaters: VOC not more than 200 g/L.
5. Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: VOC not more than
250 g/L.
6. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: VOC not more than 340 g/L.
7. Pretreatment Wash Primers: VOC not more than 420 g/L.
8. Clear Wood Finishes,Varnishes: VOC not more than 350 g/L.
9. Clear Wood Finishes,Lacquers: VOC not more than 550 g/L.
10. Floor Coatings: VOC not more than 100 g/L.
11. Shellacs,Clear: VOC not more than 730 g/L.
12. Shellacs, Pigmented: VOC not more than 550 g/L.
13. Stains: VOC not more than 250 g/L.
C. Composite wood, agri fiber products,and adhesives shall not contain urea-formaldehyde resin.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONSTRUCTION INDOOR-AIR-QUALITY MANAGEMENT
A. Comply with SMACNA's "SMACNA IAQ Guideline for Occupied Buildings under
Construction."
1. If Owner authorizes use of permanent heating, cooling, and ventilating systems during
construction period as specified in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls,"
install filter media having a MERV 8 according to ASHRAE 52.2 at each return-air inlet
for the air-handling system used during construction.
2. Replace all air filters immediately prior to occupancy.
END OF SECTION 018113.13
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS - GREEN GLOBES FOR NEW 018113.13 -4
CONSTRUCTION
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 024119- SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure.
2. Demolition and removal of selected site elements.
3. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless
indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.
B. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently removed and
that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and
reinstalled.
1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For refrigerant recovery technician.
B. Predemolition Photographs or Video: Submit before Work begins.
C. Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility
licensed to accept hazardous wastes.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an EPA-approved certification
program.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as
far as practical.
B. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding
with selective demolition.
C. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the
Work.
1. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify
Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate
contract.
D. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.
E. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them
against damage during selective demolition operations.
1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 PEFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before
beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities
having jurisdiction.
B. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.
C. Green Global Submittals:
1. Maintain existing building structure (including structural floor and roof decking) and
envelope (exterior skin and framing, excluding window assemblies and nonstructural
roofing material) not indicated to be demolished; do not demolish such existing
construction beyond indicated limits.
2. Maintain existing interior nonstructural elements (interior walls, doors, floor coverings,
and ceiling systems) not indicated to be demolished; do not demolish such existing
construction beyond indicated limits.
3. Maintain existing nonshell, nonstructural components (walls, flooring, and ceilings) not
indicated to be demolished; do not demolish such existing construction beyond indicated
limits.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119-2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition
operations.
B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of
selective demolition required.
C. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended
function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict.
Promptly submit a written report to Architect.
D. Review and survey existing conditions of building with Structural Engineer to determine
whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of
any portion of structure or adjacent structures during selective building demolition operations.
E. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of preconstruction
photographs.
1. Comply with requirements specified in Section 013233 "Photographic Documentation."
3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and
protect them against damage.
1. Comply with requirements for existing services/systems interruptions specified in
Section 011000"Summary."
B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify,
disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems
serving areas to be selectively demolished.
1. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies.
2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide
temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain
continuity of services/systems to other parts of building.
3. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC
systems,equipment, and components indicated to be removed.
a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap
or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.
b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same
or compatible piping material.
c. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119-3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD, OREGON
d. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and
remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and
make equipment operational.
e. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove
equipment and deliver to Owner.
f. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug
remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.
g. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible
ductwork material.
C. Refrigerant: Remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment to be selectively demolished
according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
3.3 PREPARATION
A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal
operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other
adjacent occupied and used facilities.
1. Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Section 015000
"Temporary Facilities and Controls."
B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent
injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.
C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required
to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes
to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction
being demolished.
3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION,GENERAL
A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new
construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of
governing regulations and as follows:
1. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use
cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction.
Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and
chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to
remain.
2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring
existing finished surfaces.
3. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At
concealed spaces,such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden
space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices
during flame-cutting operations. Also maintain fire watch if the fire sprinkler system is
disabled.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119-4
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
4. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to
impose excessive loads on supporting walls,floors,or framing.
5. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.Comply with requirements in
Section 017419"Construction Waste Management and Disposal."
B. Reuse of Building Elements: Project has been designed to result in end-of-Project rates for reuse
of building elements as follows. Do not demolish building elements beyond what is indicated on
Drawings without Architect's approval.
C. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling
during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable,
protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their
original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.
3.5 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused, or indicated to remain
Owner's property,remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in
an EPA-approved landfill.
1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.
2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces
and areas.
3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that
will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.
4. Comply with requirements specified in Section 017419 "Construction Waste
Management and Disposal."
B. Burning: Do not bum demolished materials.
C. Disposal:Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective
demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition
operations began.
END OF SECTION 024119
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119-5
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 033000- CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials,
mixture design,placement procedures,and finishes.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Green Globe Submittals:
1. Product Data: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating
percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. Include
statement indicating cost for each product having recycled content.
2. Product Data: For curing and sealing compounds, documentation including printed
statement of VOC content.
3. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture containing fly ash as a replacement for
portland cement or other portland cement replacements, and for equivalent concrete
mixtures that do not contain portland cement replacements.
C. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture.
D. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and
placement.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Material certificates.
B. Material test reports.
C. Floor surface flatness and levelness measurements.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete
products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and
equipment.
1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete
Production Facilities."
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85% PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, qualified according to ASTM C 1077
and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.
C. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract
Documents:
1. ACI 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete," Sections 1 through 5.
2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."
D. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material
evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 FORM-FACING MATERIALS
A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and
smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.
B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material.
Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.
2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of
preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.
B. Reinforcing Bars:ASTM A 615/A 615M,Grade 60,deformed.
C. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening
reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel
wire,plastic,or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice.
2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and
source,throughout Project:
1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150,Type I/II. Supplement with the following:
a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618,Class F or C.
B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33,graded.
1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch nominal.
2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000- 2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
C. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable.
2.4 ADMIXTURES
A. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.
B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with
other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those
permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium
chloride.
1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M,Type A.
2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M,Type B.
3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M,Type D.
4. High-Range,Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M,Type F.
5. High-Range,Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M,Type G.
6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture:ASTM C 1017/C 1017M,Type II.
2.5 CURING MATERIALS
A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application
to fresh concrete.
B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing
approximately 9 oz./sq.yd.when dry.
C. Moisture-Retaining Cover:ASTM C 171,polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.
D. Water: Potable.
E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B,
dissipating.
2.6 CONCRETE MIXTURES
A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of
laboratory trial mixture or field test data,or both,according to ACI 301.
B. Cementitious Materials: Use fly ash,pozzolan, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and silica
fume as needed to reduce the total amount of portland cement, which would otherwise be used,
by not less than 40 percent.
C. Admixtures:Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Use water-reducing, high-range water-reducing or plasticizing admixture in concrete, as
required,for placement and workability.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low
humidity,or other adverse placement conditions.
3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use industrial
slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a
water-cementitious materials ratio below 0.50.
D. Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:
1. Minimum Compressive Strength: As indicated on Drawings.
2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio:As indicated on Drawings.
3. Slump Limit: 8 inches for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches before adding
high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture,plus or minus 1 inch.
4. Air Content: Do not allow air content of trowel-finished floors to exceed 3 percent.
2.7 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT
A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's"Manual of Standard Practice."
2.8 CONCRETE MIXING
A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to
ASTM C 94/C 94M and ASTM C 1116/C 1116M,and furnish batch ticket information.
1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F,reduce mixing and delivery time from
1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and
delivery time to 60 minutes.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 FORMWORK
A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical,
lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure
can support such loads.
B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment,
elevation,and position indicated,within tolerance limits of ACI 117.
C. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.
3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS
A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that
is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings,templates,diagrams,
instructions,and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-4
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85% PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
3.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. General:Comply with CRSI's"Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.
1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before
placing concrete.
3.4 JOINTS
A. General:Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.
B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired,at locations
indicated or as approved by Architect.
C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning
concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-
fourth of concrete thickness as follows:
1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing
each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after
applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces.
2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof
abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch-wide joints into concrete when cutting
action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops
random contraction cracks.
3.5 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded
items is complete and that required inspections have been performed.
B. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new
concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of
weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated.
Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.
1. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301.
_ C. Cold-Weather Placement:Comply with ACI 306.1.
D. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301.
3.6 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES
A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes
and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits
on formed-surface irregularities.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-5
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.
B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in
an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and
defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface
irregularities.
1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view.
C. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls,horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces
adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent
formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent
unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
3.7 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS
A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1 R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and
finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.
B. Scratch Finish: While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and bull-
floated or darbied. Use stiff brushes,brooms,or rakes to produce a profile amplitude of 1/4 inch
in one direction.
1. Apply scratch finish to surfaces to receive mortar setting beds for bonded cementitious
floor finishes.
C. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or
inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots.
Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular
texture.
I. Apply float finish to surfaces to receive trowel finish.
D. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by
hand or power-driven trowel.Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of
trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that
would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.
1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or
quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin-film-finish coating
system. —
2. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an
unleveled, freestanding, 10-ft.- long straightedge resting on two high spots and placed
anywhere on the surface does not exceed 1/4 inch.
E. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces indicated. While concrete
is still plastic,slightly scarify surface with a fine broom.
1. Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel-finished floor surfaces.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-6
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
F. Polished Finish: Refer to Division 03 Section "Special Concrete Floor Finishes" for polished
concrete finishes.
3.8 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot-weather
protection during curing.
B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or
windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during fmishing
operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and
bull floating or darbying concrete,but before float finishing.
C. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1,by one or a combination of the following methods:
1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days.
2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover
for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at
least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven
days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and
waterproof tape.
3.9 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS
A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and
replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.
3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform
field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B. Inspections: As indicated on Drawings.
C. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to
ASTM C172 shall be performed according to the following requirements:
1. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. or fraction
thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day.
a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests
for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly
selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-7
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
2. Slump: ASTM C143; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not
less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests
when concrete consistency appears to change.
3. Air Content: ASTM C231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; one test for
each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete
mixture.
4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40
deg Fand below and when 80 deg Fand above,and one test for each composite sample.
5. Unit Weight: ASTM C567, fresh unit weight of structural lightweight concrete; one test
for each composite sample,but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete
mixture.
6. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C31.
a. Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each
composite sample.
b. Cast and field cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite
sample.
7. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one set of two laboratory-cured
specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days.
a. Test one set of two field-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens
at 28 days.
b. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of
two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated.
8. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-
cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures
for protecting and curing in-place concrete.
9. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three
consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength
and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by
more than 500 psi.
10. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and
Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain
Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete
testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive
strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking
strength,and type of break for both 7-and 28-day tests.
11. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope,or other nondestructive device may
be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of
concrete.
12. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete
when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other
requirements have not been met,as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency
may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with
— ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by Architect.
13. Additional testing and inspecting,at Contractor's expense,will be performed to determine
compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-8
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
14. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply
with the Contract Documents.
END OF SECTION 033000
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-9
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 033600- SPECIAL CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawing and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes the following.
1. Applying sealer and hardener, and polishing concrete to specified finish level.
B. Related Work:
1. Section 033000,"Cast-In-Place Concrete."
1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials:
1. ASTM-C 779, Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Horizontal Concrete
Surfaces.
2. ASTM G 23-81,Ultraviolet Light&Water Spray.
3. ASTM C 805,Impact Strength.
4. Coefficient of Friction: ASTM C 1028 - Greater than or equal to .6 in accordance with
ADAAG requirements.
B. American Concrete Institute:
1. ACI 302. 1R-89,Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction.
C. Other Test:
1. Reflectivity.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 016000, "Product Requirements."
1. Provide submittal information within 35 calendar days after the Contractor has received
the Owner's notice to proceed.
SPECIAL CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHES 033600- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
B. Product Data:
1. Submit special concrete finishes manufacturer's specifications and test data.
2. Submit special concrete finishes describing product to be provided, giving
manufacturer's name and product name for the specified material proposed to be
provided under this Section.
3. Submit special concrete finishes manufacturer's recommended installation procedures;
which when approved by the Architect, will become the basis for accepting or rejecting
actual installation procedures used on the work.
4. Submit special concrete finishes technical data sheet giving descriptive data,curing time,
and application requirements.
5. Submit special concrete finishes manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheet(MSDS) and
other safety requirements.
6. Follow all special concrete finishes published manufacturer's installation instructions.
C. Test Reports:
1. Provide certified test reports, prepared by an independent testing laboratory, confirming
compliance with specified performance criteria.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications:
1. Use an experienced installer and adequate number of skilled workmen who are
thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary craft.
2. The special concrete finish manufacturer shall certify applicator.
3. Applicator shall be familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for
proper performance of work of this Section.
B. Manufacturer's Certification:
1. Provide letter of certification from concrete finish manufacturer stating that Installer is
certified applicator of special concrete finishes, and is familiar with proper procedures
and installation requirements required by the manufacturer.
C. Mock-ups:
1. Apply mock-ups of each type finish, to demonstrate typical joints, surface finish, color
variation(if any),and standard of workmanship.
a. Build mock-ups approximately 50 square feet in the location indicated or if not
indicated,as directed by the Architect or Owner Representative.
b. Notify Architect or Owner Representative seven days in advance of dates and
times when mock-ups will be constructed.
c. Obtain from the Architect or Owner Representative approval of mock-ups before
starting construction.
SPECIAL CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHES 033600-2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85% PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
d. If the Architect or Owner Representative determines that mock-ups do not meet
requirements, demolish and remove them from the site and cast others until mock-
ups are approved.
e. Maintain mock-ups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard
for judging the completed work.
f. Approved mock-ups may become part of the completed work if undisturbed at
time of substantial completion.
D. Protection:
1. No satisfactory chemical or cleaning procedure is available to remove petroleum stains
from the concrete surface. Prevention is therefore essential.
a. All hydraulic powered equipment must be diapered to avoid staining of the
concrete.
b. No trade will park vehicles on the inside slab. If necessary to complete their scope
of work,drop cloths will be placed under vehicles at all times.
c. No pipe cutting machine will be used on the inside floor slab.
d. Steel will not be placed on interior slab to avoid rust staining.
e. Acids and acidic detergents will not come into contact with slab.
f. All trades informed that the slab must be protected at all times.
E. Pre-Installation Conference:
1. Conduct conference at project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section,
"Project Management and Coordination."
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in original containers, with seal's unbroken, bearing manufacturer labels -
indicating brand name and directions for storage.
B. Dispense special concrete finish material from factory numbered and sealed containers.
Maintain record of container numbers.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental limitations:
1. Comply with manufacturers written instructions for substrate temperature and moisture —
content, ambient temperature and humidity, ventilation, and other conditions affecting
topping performance.
a. Concrete Floor Flatness rating recommended at least 40,where possible.
b. Concrete Floor Levelness rating recommended at least 30,where possible.
c. Concrete must be cured a minimum of 45 days or as directed by the manufacturer
before application of Retro Plate can begin.
SPECIAL CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHES 033600-3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
'I'IGARD,OREGON
d. Application of Retro-Plate shall take place 10 days prior to installation of
equipment and substantial completion, thus providing a complete, uninhibited
concrete slab for application.
B. Close areas to traffic during floor application and after application, for time period
recommended in writing by manufacturer.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS AND MANUFACTURERS
A. Hardening/Sealing Agent:
1. Retro-Plate 99, manufactured by Advanced Floor Products, Inc., P.O. Box 50533, Provo,
Utah 84605,801-812-3420.
a. Performance Criteria:
I) Abrasion Resistance: ASTM C779 - Up to 400 percent increase in abrasion
resistance.
2) Impact Strength: ASTM C805-Up to 21 percent increase impact strength.
3) Ultra Violet Light and Water Spray: ASTM G23-81 - No adverse effect to
ultra violet and water spray.
4) Reflectivity: Up to 30%increase in reflectivity.
2. Certified Applicators.
3. Manufacturer's Regional Representative.
2.2 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Neutralizing Agent:
1. Tri-sodium Phosphate.
B. Water:
1. Potable.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Examine substrate, with installer present, for conditions affecting performance of finish. Correct
conditions detrimental to timely and proper work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory
conditions are corrected.
SPECIAL CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHES 033600-4
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
B. Verify that base slab meet finish and surface profile requirements in Division 3 Section "Cast-
In-Place Concrete," and Project Conditions above.
C. Prior to application,verify that floor surfaces are free of construction latents.
3.2 APPLICATION
A. Start any of the floor finish applications in presence of manufacturer's technical representative.
B. Sealing,Hardening and Polishing of Concrete Surface:
1. Concrete must be in place a minimum of 45 days or as directed by the manufacturer
before application can begin.
2. Application is to take place at least 10 days prior to racking and other in-store accessory
installation,thus providing a complete,uninhibited concrete slab for application.
3. Only a certified applicator shall apply Retro-Plate 99. Applicable procedures must be
followed as recommended by the product manufacturer and as required to match
approved test sample.
4. Achieve waterproofing, hardening, dust-proofing, and abrasion resistance of the surface
without changing the natural appearance of the concrete,except for the sheen.
5. Polish to required sheen level 3 and meet coefficient of friction specified in Part 1.
3.3 WORKMANSHIP AND CLEANING
A. The premises shall be kept clean and free of debris at all times.
B. Remove spatter from adjoining surfaces,as necessary.
C. Repair damages to surface caused by cleaning operations.
D. Remove debris from jobsite.
1. Dispose of materials in separate, closed containers in accordance with local regulations.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect finished work until fully cured in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
END OF SECTION 033600
SPECIAL CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHES 033600-5
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 055213 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Steel pipe and tube railings.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 055112"Metal Pan Stairs" for steel tube railings associated with metal pan stairs.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Grout,anchoring cement,and paint products.
B. Green Globe Submittals:
1. Product Data: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating
percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. Include
statement indicating cost for each product having recycled content.
2. For primers, documentation indicating that products are low-VOC emitting, non-toxic
and chemically inert.
C. Shop Drawings: Include plans,elevations,sections,details,and attachments to other work.
D. Samples:For each type of exposed finish required.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Railings, including attachment to building construction,shall withstand
the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under
conditions indicated:
1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards:
a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ft.applied in any direction.
b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction.
c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 - 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
2. Infill of Guards:
a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft..
b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
2.2 METALS,GENERAL
A. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as
supported rails unless otherwise indicated.
2.3 STEEL AND IRON
A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of
preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.
B. Tubing: ASTM A 500(cold formed)or ASTM A 513.
C. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight (Schedule 40), unless
another grade and weight are required by structural loads.
D. Plates, Shapes,and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
E. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30, or malleable iron,
ASTM A 47/A 47M,unless otherwise indicated.
2.4 FASTENERS
A. Provide concealed fasteners,unless unavoidable or standard for railings indicated.
B. Anchors: Provide anchors, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, capable of sustaining,
without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and 4
times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to
ASTM E 488/E 488M,conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
1. Material for Steel Railings: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with
ASTM B 633,Class Fe/Zn 5,unless otherwise indicated.
2.5 - MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy
welded.
B. Etching Cleaner for Galvanized Metal: Complying with MPI#25.
C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and
compatible with paints specified to be used over it.
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 - 2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
D. Hop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Zinc-dust, zinc-oxide primer compatible with finish paint
systems indicated,and complying with SSPC-Paint 5.
E. Grout and Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged,nonshrink,nonmetallic grout complying with
ASTM C 1107; or water-resistant,nonshrink anchoring cement;recommended by manufacturer
for exterior use.
2.6 FABRICATION
A. Cut,drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of
approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed
surfaces.
B. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces.
C. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings
designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections,including at fittings.
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion -
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness
shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces.
D. Nonwelded Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings.
Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush,smooth,rigid,hairline joints.
E. Form changes in direction by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings.
F. For changes in direction made by bending, use jigs to produce uniform curvature for each
repetitive configuration required. Maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend
without buckling,twisting,cracking,or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components.
G. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.
H. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated.
I. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings,and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings,
and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise indicated.
2.7 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
A. Galvanized Railings:
1. Hot-dip galvanize indicated railings, including hardware, after fabrication, to comply
with ASTM A 123/A 123M. Provide hot-dip galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners,
sleeves,and other ferrous components.
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 -3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85% PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
2. Shop-Primed Galvanized Railings: After galvanizing, clean railings, treat with
metallicphosphate process, and apply primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1.Preparing
Galvanized Railings for Shop Priming: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean railings of
grease,dirt,oil,flux,and other foreign matter,and treat with etching cleaner.
B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with SSPC-
SP 3,"Power Tool Cleaning."
C. Primer Application: Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of railings unless otherwise
indicated. Comply with requirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Shop,Field,and Maintenance Painting of
Steel," for shop painting. Primer need not be applied to surfaces to be embedded in concrete or
masonry.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION,GENERAL
A. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines
and levels and free of rack.
I. Perform cutting,drilling,and fitting required for installing railings.
2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet.
3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel
with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet.
B. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals
and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.
3.2 ANCHORING POSTS
A. Use metal sleeves preset and anchored into concrete for installing posts. After posts are inserted
into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout or
anchoring cement, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. Form or core-drill holes not less than 5 inches deep and 3/4 inch larger than OD of post for
installing posts in concrete. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill annular space
between post and concrete with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout or anchoring cement, mixed and
placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Anchor posts to metal surfaces with oval flanges, angle type, or floor type as required by
conditions,connected to posts and to metal supporting members.
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 -4
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
- TIGARD,OREGON
3.3 ATTACHING RAILINGS
A. Attach railings to wall with wall brackets. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at
spacing required to support structural loads.
B. Secure wall brackets and railing end flanges to building construction as follows:
1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger or
lag bolts.
2. For hollow masonry anchorage,use toggle bolts.
3. For wood stud partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into studs or wood backing between
studs. Coordinate with carpentry work to locate backing members.
4. For steel-framed partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into fire-retardant-treated wood
backing between studs. Coordinate with stud installation to locate backing members.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop
painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas, and repair
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.
END OF SECTION 055213
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 -5
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 061000-ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
I� 1. Wood blocking and nailers.
2. Synthetic woods.
3. Plywood backing panels.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Green Globe Submittals:
1. Certificates for Solid Lumber and Timber Panel Products: Chain-of-custody certificates
indicating that products specified to be made from certified wood comply with forest
certification requirements. Include documentation that manufacturer is certified for chain
of custody by a Sustainable Forestry Initiative, CSA, Forest Stewardship Council or
American Tree Farm System-accredited certification body. Include statement indicating
cost for each certified wood product.
2. For composite wood products, documentation indicating that product contains no urea
formaldehyde.
3. For composite-wood products, documentation indicating that products are low-VOC
emitting,non-toxic and chemically inert.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit
stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the
ALSC Board of Review.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS,GENERAL
A. Certified Wood: Materials shall be produced from wood obtained from forests certified by a
Sustainable Forestry Initiative, CSA, Forest Stewardship Council or American Tree Farm
System.
1. Dimension lumber framing.
2. Laminated-veneer lumber.
3. Parallel-strand lumber.
ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
4. Prefabricated wood I-joists.
5. Rim boards.
6. Miscellaneous lumber.
B. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is
indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency
certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the
ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.
1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on
end or back of each piece or omit grade stamp and provide certificates of grade 1
compliance issued by grading agency.
3. Provide dressed lumber,S4S,unless otherwise indicated.
C. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 15 percent for 2-inch nominal thickness or less, 19
percent for more than 2-inch nominal thickness unless otherwise indicated.
D. Engineered Wood Products: Provide engineered wood products acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction and for which current model code research or evaluation reports exist that show
compliance with building code in effect for Project.
1. Allowable Design Stresses: Provide engineered wood products with allowable design
stresses, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated.
Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational
engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a
qualified independent testing agency.
2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER
A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior
construction not in contact with the ground,Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in
contact with the ground,and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with the ground.
1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no
arsenic or chromium.
B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use
material that is warped or that does not comply with requirements for untreated material.
C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board
of Review.
D. Application:Treat items indicated on Drawings.
ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000-2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS
A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with
requirements in this article,that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,and with fire-
test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test
method indicated by a qualified testing agency.
B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame spread
index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant
progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes,and with the flame
front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during
the test.
1. Exterior Type:Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for fire-
retardant-treated lumber and plywood by pressure process after being subjected to
accelerated weathering according to ASTM D 2898.Use for exterior locations and where
indicated.
2. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less
when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where
exterior type is not indicated. -
C. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent.Kiln-dry
plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent.
D. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing
agency.
E. Application:Treat items indicated on Drawings.
2.4 SYNTHETIC WOOD -
A. Base and Miscellaneous Locations: Provide synthetic wood material, equal to Trex Wood -
Polymer lumber.
1. Sizes:As indicated on Drawings.
2. Color:Trex,Winchester Gray.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other -
construction,including the following:
1. Blocking.
2. Nailers.
B. For items of dimension lumber size,provide Douglas Fir-Larch No. 2 grade lumber.
ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000-3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
2.6 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS
A. Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not
indicated,not less than 1/2-inch nominal thickness.
2.7 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in
this article for material and manufacture.
1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative
treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating
complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.
B. Power-Driven Fasteners:NES NER-272.
C. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and,
where indicated,flat washers.
2.8 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products, as indicated on the
Drawings,by the following:
1. Simpson Strong-Tie Co.,Inc.
B. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by
manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be
determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by
comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency.
C. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with
ASTM A 653/A 653M,G60 coating designation.
1. Use for interior locations unless otherwise indicated.
2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Flexible Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, butyl
rubber or rubberized-asphalt compound,bonded to a high-density polyethylene film,aluminum
foil,or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch.
ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000-4
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION,GENERAL
A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and
fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit.
Locate nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other
construction.
B. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame
Construction,"unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install fire-retardant treated plywood backing panels with classification marking of testing
agency exposed to view.
D. Metal Framing Anchors: Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturer's written
instructions. Install fasteners through each fastener hole.
E. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated.
F. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated
lumber.
G. Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install
continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking.
H. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated,
complying with the following:
1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners.
2. Table 2304.9.1,"Fastening Schedule,"in ICC's International Building Code.
END OF SECTION 061000
ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000-5
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 062023-INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Interior trim.
2. Shelving and clothes rods.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product.
B. Green Globe Submittals:
1. Product Certificates: For products and materials required to comply with requirements for
regional materials, certificates indicating location of material manufacturer and point of
extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material. Include statement indicating
distance to Project,and fraction by weight or percentage that is considered regional.
2. Certificates for Solid Lumber and Timber Panel Products: Chain-of-custody certificates
indicating that composite wood products comply with forest certification requirements.
Include documentation that manufacturer is certified for chain of custody by a
Sustainable Forestry Initiative,CSA,Forest Stewardship Council or American Tree Farm
System-accredited certification body. Include statement indicating cost for each certified
wood product. -
3. For adhesives and glues used at Project site, documentation including printed statement
of VOC content. Low-VOC adhesives must be used.
4. For composite wood products, documentation indicating that product contains no urea
formaldehyde.
5. For adhesives and composite wood products, documentation indicating that products are
low-VOC emitting.
C. Samples: For each type of paneling.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE -
A. Mockups: Construct full-sized mockup of interior wainscot, and suspended wood ceiling
elements to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Build mockup complete with anchors,connections,and all accessories.
2. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undamaged at time of
Substantial Completion.
INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 062023 - 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
Documents unless such deviations are specifically approved in writing.
B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS,GENERAL
A. Regional Materials: The following wood products shall be manufactured within 500 miles of
Project site from materials that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as
manufactured,within 500 miles of Project site.
1. Interior trim.
2. Interior board paneling.
3. Shelving and clothes rods.
B. Certified Wood: The following wood products shall be produced from wood obtained from
forests certified by a Sustainable Forestry Initiative, CSA Stewardship Council, or American
Tree Farm System-accredited certification body:
1. Interior trim.
2. Interior board paneling.
3. Shelving and clothes rods.
C. Low-Emitting Materials: Composite wood products shall be low-VOC emitting.
D. Lumber: DOC PS 20.
1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of inspection agency indicating
grade,species,moisture content at time of surfacing,and mill.
a. For exposed lumber, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece,or omit grade
stamp and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by inspection agency.
E. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1.
F. Hardboard: AHA A135.4.
G. Melamine-Faced Particleboard: Particleboard complying with ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2,
finished on both faces with thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper and
complying with requirements of NEMA LD3, Grade VGL, for test methods 3.3, 3.4, 3.6, 3.8,
and 3.10.
1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 062023 - 2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
2.2 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS
A. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame-spread
index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, with no evidence of significant
progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame
front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during
the test.
1. Kiln dry lumber and plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 and
15 percent respectively.
B. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. For exposed lumber and plywood indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark
back of each piece.
C. Application:Where indicated.
2.3 INTERIOR TRIM
A. Softwood Lumber Trim:
1. Species and Grade:As indicated on Drawings.
2. Maximum Moisture Content: 15 percent.
B. Hardwood Lumber Trim:
1. Species and Grade:As indicated on Drawings.
2. Maximum Moisture Content: 13 percent.
C. Softwood Moldings for Transparent Finish (Stain or Clear Finish): WMMPA WM 4, N-grade
wood moldings. Made to patterns included in WMMPA WM 12.
1. Species:As indicated on Drawings.
2. Maximum Moisture Content: 15 percent.
D. Hardwood Moldings for Transparent Finish(Stain or Clear Finish): WMMPA HWM 2,N-grade
wood moldings made to patterns included in WMMPA HWM 1.
1. Species: As indicated on Drawings.
2. Maximum Moisture Content: 9 percent.
E. Moldings for Opaque Finish(Painted Finish): Made to patterns included in WMMPA WM 12.
1. Hardwood Moldings:WMMPA HWM 2,P-grade.
a. Species: Aspen, basswood, cottonwood, gum, magnolia, soft maple, tupelo, or
yellow poplar.
INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 062023 -3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
b. Maximum Moisture Content: 9 percent.
F. Molding Patterns:
1. Base Pattern: As indicated on Drawings.
2. Shoe-Mold Pattern: As indicated on Drawings.
3. Casing Pattern:As indicated on Drawings.
4. Chair-Rail Pattern:As indicated on Drawings.
2.4 SHELVING AND CLOTHES RODS
A. Shelving: Made from the following material,3/4 inch thick.
1. Softwood Boards: Eastern white, Idaho white, lodgepole, ponderosa, radiata, or sugar
pine;NeLMA,NLGA,or WWPA;kiln dried.
2. Softwood Boards: Douglas fir-larch, Douglas fir south, or hem-fir; NLGA, WCLIB, or
WWPA; SPIB;kiln dried.
B. Shelf Cleats:As specified for lumber trim.
C. Clothes Rods: 1-1/2-inch-diameter.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Glue:Aliphatic-resin,polyurethane, or resorcinol wood glue recommended by manufacturer for
general carpentry use.
1. Wood glue shall have a VOC content of 30 g/L or less when calculated according to
40 CFR 59,Subpart D(EPA Method 24).
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Before installing interior finish carpentry, condition materials to average prevailing humidity in
installation areas for a minimum of 24 hours unless longer conditioning is recommended by
manufacturer.
3.2 INSTALLATION,GENERAL
A. Install interior finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use
concealed shims where necessary for alignment.
1. Scribe and cut interior finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as
recommended by manufacturer.
2. Countersink fasteners, fill surface flush,and sand unless otherwise indicated.
INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 062023 -4
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD, OREGON
3. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches for level and plumb. Install adjoining interior
finish carpentry with 1/32-inch maximum offset for flush installation and 1/16-inch
maximum offset for reveal installation.
3.3 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM INSTALLATION
A. Install with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from maximum
lengths of lumber available. Cope at returns, miter at outside corners, and cope at inside corners
to produce tight-fitting joints with full-surface contact throughout length of joint. Use scarf
joints for end-to-end joints.
3.4 SHELVING AND CLOTHES ROD INSTALLATION
A. Cut shelf cleats at ends of shelves about 1/2 inch less than width of shelves and sand exposed
ends smooth.
B. Install shelf cleats by fastening to framing or backing with finish nails or trim screws, set below
face and filled. Space fasteners not more than 16 inches o.c.
C. Install shelf brackets according to manufacturer's written instructions, spaced not more than
16 inches o.c. Fasten to framing members, blocking, or metal backing, or use toggle bolts or
hollow wall anchors.
D. Cut shelves to neatly fit openings with only enough gap to allow shelves to be removed and
reinstalled. Install shelves, fully seated on cleats,brackets,and supports.
END OF SECTION 062023
INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 062023 -5
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 064113-WOOD-VENEER-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Architectural wood cabinets.
2. Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing architectural wood
cabinets unless concealed within other construction before cabinet installation.
3. Shop finishing of architectural wood cabinets.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product,including panel products, fire-retardant-treated
materials,cabinet hardware and accessories and finishing materials and processes.
B. Green Globe Submittals:
1. Certificates for Solid Lumber and Timber Panel Products: Chain-of-custody certificates
indicating that products specified to be made from certified wood comply with forest
certification and chain-of-custody requirements by Sustainable Forestry Initiative, CSA,
Forest Stewardship Council or American Tree Farm System requirements.
2. For adhesives and composite wood products, documentation indicating that products
contain no urea formaldehyde.
3. For composite wood products, documentation indicating that products are low-VOC
emitting,non-toxic and chemically inert.
C. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale
details,attachment devices,and other components.
D. Samples:
1. Lumber for transparent finish, for each species and cut, finished on one side and one
edge.
2. Veneer leaves representative of and selected from flitches to be used for transparent-
finished cabinets.
3. Lumber and panel products with shop-applied opaque finish, for each finish system and
color,with exposed surface finished.
4. Thermoset decorative panels,for each color,pattern,and surface finish.
5. Exposed cabinet hardware and accessories,one unit for each type and finish.
WOOD-VENEER-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064113- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program
certificates.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications:Certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.
B. Installer Qualifications:Certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.
1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wet
work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative
humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CABINETS,GENERAL
A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork
Standards" for grades of architectural wood cabinets indicated for construction, finishes,
installation,and other requirements.
1. Provide labels and certificates from AWI certification program indicating that
woodwork,including installation,complies with requirements of grades specified.
2.2 WOOD CABINETS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
A. Grade:Custom.
B. Regional Materials: Wood cabinets for transparent finish shall be manufactured within 500
miles of Project site from materials that have been extracted,harvested,or recovered,as well as
manufactured,within 500 miles of Project site.
C. Regional Materials: Wood cabinets for transparent finish shall be manufactured within 500
miles of Project site.
D. Certified Wood: Wood cabinets for transparent finish shall be produced from wood certified as
"FSC Mixed Credit" according to FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest
Stewardship,"and FSC STD-40-004,"FSC Standard for Chain of Custody Certification."
E. Type of Construction: Frameless.
F. Cabinet and Door and Drawer Front Interface Style:Flush overlay.
WOOD-VENEER-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064113 -2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
G. Reveal Dimension: 1/2 inch.
H. Wood for Exposed Surfaces:
1. Species:As selected from Architect's samples.
I. Semiexposed Surfaces:Provide surface materials indicated below:
1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies:Thermoset decorative panels.
2. Drawer Subfronts, Backs, and Sides: Thermoset decorative panels with natural veneer
edge banding.
3. Drawer Bottoms:Thermoset decorative panels.
J. Dust Panels: 1/4-inch plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments and drawers unless
located directly under tops.
2.3 WOOD MATERIALS
A. Wood Products:Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard
for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated.
1. Wood Moisture Content: 8 to 13 percent.
B. Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of
referenced quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless
otherwise indicated.
1. Recycled Content of Medium-Density Fiberboard and Particleboard: Postconsumer
recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.
2. Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Products shall comply with the testing and
product requirements of the California Department of Health Services'"Standard Practice
for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale
Environmental Chambers."
3. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130,made with binder containing no
urea formaldehyde.
4. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2,made with binder containing no urea
formaldehyde.
5. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1,medium-density overlay.
6. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1,made with adhesive
containing no urea formaldehyde.
7. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard finished with
thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper and complying with
requirements of NEMA LD 3,Grade VGL,for test methods 3.3,3.4,3.6,3.8,and 3.10.
2.4 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS
A. Fire-Retardant-Treated Materials, General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated,
use materials complying with requirements in this article that are acceptable to authorities
WOOD-VENEER-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064113-3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
having jurisdiction and with fire-test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing
identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency.
1. Identify fire-retardant-treated materials with appropriate classification marking of
qualified testing agency in the form of removable paper label or imprint on surfaces that
will be concealed from view after installation.
B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood: Products with a flame-spread index of 25 or less
when tested according to ASTM E 84, with no evidence of significant progressive combustion
when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes,and with the flame front not extending more
than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test.
1. Kiln dry lumber and plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 and
15 percent,respectively.
2.5 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES
A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural
cabinets except for items specified in Section 087111 "Door Hardware (Descriptive
Specification)."
B. Butt Hinges: 2-3/4-inch, five-knuckle steel hinges made from 0.095-inch- thick metal, and as
follows:
1. Semiconcealed Hinges for Flush Doors: BHMA A156.9,B01361.
2. Semiconcealed Hinges for Overlay Doors:BHMA A156.9,B01521.
C. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 170 degrees of
opening,self-closing.
D. Back-Mounted Pulls: BHMA A156.9,B02011.
E. Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid metal, 5 inches long, 2-1/2 inches deep, and 5/16 inch in
diameter.
F. Catches:Magnetic catches,BHMA A156.9,B03141.
G. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: BHMA A156.9,B04071;with shelf rests,B04081.
H. Shelf Rests:BHMA A156.9,B0401;metal,two-pin type with shelf hold-down clip.
I. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9.
1. Grade 1 and Grade 2: Side mounted and extending under bottom edge of drawer; full-
extension type;zinc-plated steel with polymer rollers.
J. Aluminum Slides for Sliding Glass Doors: BHMA A156.9,B07063.
K. Door Locks:BHMA A156.11,E07121.
WOOD-VENEER-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064113 -4
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
L. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11,E07041.
M. Door and Drawer Silencers:BHMA A156.16,L03011.
N. Tempered Float Glass for Cabinet Doors: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I,
Class 1 (clear),Quality-Q3,6 mm thick unless otherwise indicated.
O. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with
BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated.
1. Satin Stainless Steel:BHMA 630.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Furring,Blocking, Shims,and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber,kiln dried to less
than 15 percent moisture content.
B. Anchors: Select material,type,size,and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage.
Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed anchors. Use nonferrous-
metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at floors.
C. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.
D. Adhesives: Use adhesives that meet the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
2.7 FABRICATION
A. Complete fabrication, including assembly,finishing, and hardware application, to maximum
extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for
shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for
scribing,trimming,and fitting.
B. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware,appliances,electrical work,
and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to
produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and
burrs.
C. Install glass to comply with applicable requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing" and in
GANA's"Glazing Manual."For glass in wood frames,secure glass with removable stops.
2.8 SHOP FINISHING
A. General: Finish architectural wood cabinets at fabrication shop as specified in this Section.
Defer only final touchup,cleaning,and polishing until after installation.
WOOD-VENEER-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064113-5
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
B. Finish Materials: Use fmish materials that meet the testing and product requirements of the
California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile
Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
C. Preparation for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling
countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing
architectural wood cabinets,as applicable to each unit of work.
1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to
concealed surfaces of cabinets.
D. Transparent Finish:
1. Grade: Premium.
2. Finish: System- 12,water-based polyurethane.
3. Wash Coat for Closed-Grain Woods: Apply wash-coat sealer to cabinets made from
closed-grain wood before staining and finishing.
4. Staining: Match approved sample for color.
5. Open Finish for Open-Grain Woods:Do not apply filler to open-grain woods.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Before installation, condition cabinets to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation
areas.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Grade: Install cabinets to comply with same grade as item to be installed.
B. Install cabinets level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install
level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches.
C. Scribe and cut cabinets to fit adjoining work,refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at
cuts.
D. Anchor cabinets to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with
countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails for exposed
fastening,countersunk and filled flush with woodwork.
E. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are
accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide
unencumbered operation.Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.
1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag,bow,or other variation from a
straight line.
WOOD-VENEER-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064113-6
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
2. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, and at ends not more than 16
inches o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for not less than 1-1/2-inch penetration
into wood framing,blocking,or hanging strips, or No. 10 wafer-head sheet metal screws
through metal backing or metal framing behind wall finish,or toggle bolts through metal
backing or metal framing behind wall finish.
F. Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of woodwork. Fill nail holes
with matching filler where exposed.
END OF SECTION 064113
WOOD-VENEER-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064113 -7
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 064116-PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Plastic-laminate-faced architectural cabinets.
2. Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing plastic-laminate-faced
architectural cabinets unless concealed within other construction before cabinet
installation.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 123623.13 "Plastic-Laminate-Clad Countertops."
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product,including panel products, high-pressure decorative
laminate, adhesive for bonding plastic laminate, fire-retardant-treated materials and cabinet
hardware and accessories.
B. Green Globes Submittals:
1. Product Data: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating
percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. Include
statement indicating cost for each product having recycled content.
2. Product Certificates: For products and materials required to comply with requirements for
regionally manufactured materials. Include statement indicating cost for each regionally
manufactured material.
a. Include statement indicating location of manufacturer and distance to Project for
each regionally manufactured material.
3. Certificates for Solid Lumber and Timber Panel Products: Chain-of-custody certificates
indicating that products specified to be made from certified wood comply with forest
certification and chain-of-custody requirements by Sustainable Forestry Initiative, CSA,
Forest Stewardship Council or American Tree Farm System requirements.
4. For adhesives and composite wood products, documentation indicating that products
contain no urea formaldehyde.
5. For composite wood products, documentation indicating that products are low-VOC
emitting,non-toxic and chemically inert.
C. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale
details,attachment devices,and other components.
PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064116- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85% PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
D. Samples:
1. Plastic laminates,for each color,pattern,and surface finish.
2. Thermoset decorative panels,for each color,pattern,and surface finish.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program
certificates.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications:Certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.
B. Installer Qualifications: Certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.
1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wet
work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative
humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 ARCHITECTURAL CABINET FABRICATORS
A. Fabricators: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following:
1. Invited subcontractors.
2.2 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS
A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork
Standards" for grades of architectural plastic-laminate cabinets indicated for construction,
finishes,installation,and other requirements.
1. Provide labels and certificates from AWI certification program indicating that
woodwork,including installation,complies with requirements of grades specified.
B. Grade:Custom.
C. Type of Construction: Frameless.
D. Cabinet,Door,and Drawer Front Interface Style: Flush overlay.
PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064116-2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
E. Reveal Dimension: 1/2 inch.
F. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or if not indicated, as
required by woodwork quality standard.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Abet Laminati,Inc.
b. Formica Corporation.
c. Lamin-Art,Inc.
d. Panolam Industries International,Inc.
e. Wilsonart International;Div.of Premark International,Inc.
G. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces:
1. Horizontal Surfaces: Grade HGS.
2. Postformed Surfaces: Grade HGP.
3. Vertical Surfaces:Grade HGS.
4. Pattern Direction:Vertically for drawer fronts,doors,and fixed panels.
H. Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces:
1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies:Thermoset decorative panels.
2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Thermoset decorative panels with PVC or polyester edge
banding.
3. Drawer Bottoms:Thermoset decorative panels.
I. Dust Panels: 1/4-inch plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments and drawers unless
located directly under tops.
J. Colors, Patterns,and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures
of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:
1. Match Architect's sample.
2. As selected by Architect from laminate manufacturer's full range in the following
categories:
a. Solid colors,matte finish.
b. Solid colors with core same color as surface,matte finish.
c. Wood grains,matte finish.
d. Patterns,matte finish.
2.3 WOOD MATERIALS
A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard
for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated.
PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064116-3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1. Wood Moisture Content: 8 to 13 percent.
B. Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of
referenced quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless
otherwise indicated.
1. Recycled Content of Medium-Density Fiberboard and Particleboard: Postconsumer
recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 35 percent.
2. Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Products shall comply with the testing and
product requirements of the California Department of Health Services'"Standard Practice
for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale
Environmental Chambers."
3. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2,Grade 130,made with binder containing no
urea formaldehyde.
4. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2,made with binder containing no urea
formaldehyde.
5. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1,medium-density overlay.
6. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1,made with adhesive
containing no urea formaldehyde.
7. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard fmished with
thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper and complying with
requirements of NEMA LD 3,Grade VGL,for test methods 3.3,3.4,3.6,3.8,and 3.10.
2.4 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS
A. Fire-Retardant-Treated Materials, General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated,
use materials complying with requirements in this article that are acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction and with fire-test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing
identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency.
1. Identify fire-retardant-treated materials with appropriate classification marking of
qualified testing agency in the form of removable paper label or imprint on surfaces that
will be concealed from view after installation.
B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood: Products with a flame-spread index of 25 or less
when tested according to ASTM E 84, with no evidence of significant progressive combustion
when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes,and with the flame front not extending more
than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test.
1. Kiln dry lumber and plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 and
15 percent,respectively.
2.5 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES
A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural
cabinets except for items specified in Section 087111 "Door Hardware (Descriptive
Specification)."
PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064116-4
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
B. Grade:Custom.
C. Regional Materials: Wood cabinets for transparent finish shall be manufactured within 500
miles of Project site from materials that have been extracted,harvested,or recovered,as well as
manufactured,within 500 miles of Project site.
D. Regional Materials: Wood cabinets for transparent finish shall be manufactured within 500
miles of Project site.
E. Certified Wood: Wood cabinets for transparent finish shall be produced from wood certified as
"FSC Mixed Credit" according to FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest
Stewardship,"and FSC STD-40-004,"FSC Standard for Chain of Custody Certification."
F. Type of Construction: Frameless.
G. Cabinet and Door and Drawer Front Interface Style:Flush overlay.
H. Reveal Dimension: 1/2 inch.
I. Wood for Exposed Surfaces: -
1. Species:As selected from Architect's samples.
J. Semiexposed Surfaces: Provide surface materials indicated below:
1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies:Thermoset decorative panels.
2. Drawer Subfronts, Backs, and Sides: Thermoset decorative panels with natural veneer
edge banding.
3. Drawer Bottoms:Thermoset decorative panels.
K. Dust Panels: 1/4-inch plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments and drawers unless
located directly under tops.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Furring,Blocking, Shims,and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber,kiln dried to less
than 15 percent moisture content.
B. Anchors: Select material,type, size,and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage.
Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed anchors. Use nonferrous-
metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at floors.
C. Adhesives:Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.
D. Adhesives: Use adhesives that meet the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
E. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Unpigmented contact cement.
PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064116-5
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1. Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot-melt adhesive or adhesive specified above for faces.
2.7 FABRICATION
A. Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to maximum extent
possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for
shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for
scribing,trimming,and fitting.
B. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware,appliances,electrical work,
and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to
produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and
burrs.
C. Install glass to comply with applicable requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing" and in
GANA's "Glazing Manual." For glass in wood frames,secure glass with removable stops.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Before installation, condition cabinets to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation
areas.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Grade: Install cabinets to comply with same grade as item to be installed.
B. Install cabinets level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install
level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches.
C. Scribe and cut cabinets to fit adjoining work,refinish cut surfaces,and repair damaged finish at
cuts.
D. Anchor cabinets to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with
countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails for exposed
fastening,countersunk and filled flush with woodwork.
E. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are
accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide
unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.
1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag,bow, or other variation from a
straight line.
2. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, and at ends not more than 16
inches o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for not less than 1-1/2-inch penetration
PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064116-6
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
into wood framing,blocking, or hanging strips,or No. 10 wafer-head sheet metal screws
through metal backing or metal framing behind wall finish,or toggle bolts through metal
backing or metal framing behind wall finish.
F. Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of woodwork. Fill nail holes
with matching filler where exposed.
END OF SECTION 064116
PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064116-7
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 066400-PLASTIC PANELING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes glass-fiber reinforced plastic(FRP)wall paneling and trim accessories.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Samples: For plastic paneling and trim accessories.
C. Green Globe Submittals:
1. Product: For adhesives and sealants, documentation including printed statement of VOC
content.
2. Product Data: For laminating adhesive and composite wood products used in factory-
laminated plastic panels, documentation indicating that product contains no urea
formaldehyde.
3. For composite wood products, documentation indicating that products are low-VOC
emitting,non-toxic and chemically inert.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to
ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of
applicable testing agency.
1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.
2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 PLASTIC SHEET PANELING
A. General: Gelcoat-finished,glass-fiber reinforced plastic panels complying with ASTM D 5319.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Kemlite
Company,Inc.,Glasbord PSI or comparable product by one of the following:
a. Marlite or approved equal.
PLASTIC PANELING 066400- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.075 inch.
3. Surface Finish: Smooth.
4. Color: White.
B. Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Plastic Paneling: Gelcoat-finished, glass-fiber-reinforced plastic panels
complying with ASTM D 5319.
1. Low-Emitting Materials:Paneling is low-VOC emitting,non-toxic and chemically inert.
C. Biobased Plastic Paneling: Solid paneling made from biobased modified polyactide resin with
flame retardant and integral color.
1. Low-Emitting Materials:Paneling is low-VOC emitting,non-toxic and chemically inert.
2.2 FACTORY-LAMINATED PLASTIC SHEET PANELING
A. Factory-Laminated Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Plastic Paneling: Gelcoat-finished, glass-fiber-
reinforced plastic panels complying with ASTM D 5319.
1. Low-Emitting Materials: Paneling is low-VOC emitting,non-toxic and chemically inert.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Trim Accessories: Manufacturer's standard one-piece vinyl extrusions designed to retain and
cover edges of panels. Provide division bars, inside corners, outside corners, and caps as
needed to conceal edges.
1. Color: White.
B. Adhesive: As recommended by plastic paneling manufacturer and that is low-VOC emitting,
non-toxic and chemically inert.
C. Sealant: Single-component, mildew-resistant, neutral-curing silicone sealant recommended by
plastic paneling manufacturer and complying with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint
Sealants."
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of adhesive, including oil, grease, dirt,
and dust.
B. Condition panels by unpacking and placing in installation space before installation according to
manufacturer's written recommendations.
PLASTIC PANELING 066400-2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
C. Lay out paneling before installing. Locate panel joints so that trimmed panels at corners are not
less than 12 inches wide.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install plastic paneling according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install panels in a full spread of adhesive.
C. Install trim accessories with adhesive.
D. Fill grooves in trim accessories with sealant before installing panels and bed inside corner trim
in a bead of sealant.
E. Remove excess sealant and smears as paneling is installed. Clean with solvent recommended
by sealant manufacturer and then wipe with clean dry cloths until no residue remains.
END OF SECTION 066400 -
l
PLASTIC PANELING 066400-3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85% PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 071326-SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes self-adhering modified bituminous sheet waterproofing, for use in freezer pit
recesses and other areas indicated on Plans.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and extent of waterproofing and details of substrate joints and
cracks, sheet flashings, penetrations, inside and outside corners, tie-ins with adjoining
waterproofing,and other termination conditions.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Sample warranties.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and
approved by waterproofing manufacturer.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard materials-only warranty in which
manufacturer agrees to furnish replacement waterproofing material for waterproofing that does
not comply with requirements or that fails to remain watertight within specified warranty
period.
1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET WATERPROOFING
A. Modified Bituminous Sheet: Minimum 60-mil nominal thickness, self-adhering sheet
consisting of 56 mils of rubberized asphalt laminated on one side to a 4-mil- thick,
polyethylene-film reinforcement,and with release liner on adhesive side.
SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 071326- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following:
a. Carlisle Coatings&Waterproofing Inc.;CCW MiraDRI 860/861.
b. CETCO Building Materials Group, a subsidiary of AMCOL International Corp.;
Envirosheet.
c. Grace,W.R.,&Co.-Conn.;Bituthene 4000.
d. Henry Company;Blueskin WP 100/200.
e. Meadows,W.R.,Inc.; SealTight Mel-Rol.
f. Polyguard Products,Inc.;Polyguard 650.
g. Protecto Wrap Company;PW 100/60.
h. Tamko Building Products,Inc.;TW-60.
i. York Manufacturing,Inc.;HydroGard.
2. Physical Properties:
a. Tensile Strength,Membrane: 250 psi minimum;ASTM D 412,Die C,modified.
b. Ultimate Elongation: 300 percent minimum;ASTM D 412,Die C,modified.
c. Low-Temperature Flexibility: Pass at minus 20 deg F;ASTM D 1970. _
d. Crack Cycling: Unaffected after 100 cycles of 1/8-inch movement;ASTM C 836.
e. Puncture Resistance: 40 lbf minimum;ASTM E 154.
f. Water Absorption: 0.2 percent weight-gain maximum after 48-hour immersion at
70 deg F;ASTM D 570.
g. Water Vapor Permeance: 0.05 perms maximum; ASTM E 96/E 96M, Water
Method.
h. Hydrostatic-Head Resistance: 200 feet minimum;ASTM D 5385.
3. Sheet Strips: Self-adhering, rubberized-asphalt strips of same material and thickness as
sheet waterproofing.
2.2 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Furnish auxiliary materials recommended by waterproofing manufacturer for intended
use and compatible with sheet waterproofing.
B. Primer: Liquid primer recommended for substrate by sheet-waterproofing material
manufacturer.
C. Surface Conditioner: Liquid, waterborne surface conditioner recommended for substrate by
sheet-waterproofing material manufacturer.
D. Liquid Membrane: Elastomeric, two-component liquid, cold fluid applied, of trowel grade or
low viscosity.
E. Substrate Patching Membrane: Low-viscosity,two-component,modified asphalt coating.
F. Metal Termination Bars: Aluminum bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch thick, predrilled at 9-
inch centers.
SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 071326-2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET-WATERPROOFING APPLICATION
A. Prepare surfaces and install modified bituminous sheets according to waterproofing
manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in ASTM D 6135.
B. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow it to dry. Limit priming to areas that will
be covered by sheet waterproofing in same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours.
C. Apply and firmly adhere sheets over area to receive waterproofing. Accurately align sheets and
maintain uniform 2-1/2-inch-minimum lap widths and end laps. Overlap and seal seams, and
stagger end laps to ensure watertight installation.
1. When ambient and substrate temperatures range between 25 and 40 deg F, install self-
adhering,modified bituminous sheets produced for low-temperature application. Do not
use low-temperature sheets if ambient or substrate temperature is higher than 60 deg F.
D.- Horizontal Application: Apply sheets from low to high points of decks to ensure that laps shed
water.
E. Apply continuous sheets over already-installed sheet strips, bridging substrate cracks,
construction,and contraction joints.
F. Seal edges of sheet-waterproofing terminations with mastic.
G. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in waterproofing not complying with requirements. Slit
and flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with sheet waterproofing extending 6 inches beyond
repaired areas in all directions.
3.2 PROTECTION,REPAIR,AND CLEANING
A. Do not permit foot or vehicular traffic on unprotected membrane.
B. Protect installed insulation drainage panels from damage due to UV light, harmful weather
exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings where insulation is
subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately
after installation.
C.— Correct deficiencies in or remove waterproofing that does not comply with requirements; repair
substrates,reapply waterproofing,and repair sheet flashings.
D. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures
recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.
END OF SECTION 071326
SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 071326-3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 072100-THERMAL INSULATION
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Foam-plastic board insulation.
2. Mineral-wool board insulation.
3. Glass-fiber blanket insulation.
4. Vapor retarders.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:For each type of product indicated.
B. Green Globe Submittals:
1. Product Data: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating
percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency,for each product.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to
ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of
applicable testing agency.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION
A. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation:ASTM C 578,with maximum flame-spread and smoke-
developed indexes of 75 and 450,respectively,per ASTM E 84.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,
the following:
THERMAL INSULATION 072100- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
a. DiversiFoam Products.
b. Dow Chemical Company(The).
c. Owens Corning.
d. Pactiv Building Products.
2. Type VII,60 psi.
2.2 MINERAL-WOOL BOARD INSULATION
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following:
1. Fibrex Insulations Inc.
2. Isolatek International.
3. Owens Corning.
4. Roxul Inc.
5. Thenmafiber.
B. Recycled Content: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half-of preconsumer recycled
content not less than 10 percent.
C. Unfaced, Mineral-Wool Board Insulation: ASTM C 612; with maximum flame-spread and
smoke-developed indexes of 15 and zero,respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136
for combustion characteristics.
1. Nominal density of 4 lb/cu. ft., Types IA and IB, thermal resistivity of 4 deg F x h x sq.
ft./Btu x in.at 75 deg F.
2.3 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following:
1. CertainTeed Corporation.
2. Guardian Building Products, Inc.
3. Johns Manville.
4. Knauf Insulation.
5. Owens Corning.
B. Recycled Content: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half-of preconsumer recycled
content not less than 10 percent.
C. Sound Attenuation Batts:
1. Type: Unfaced glass fiber acoustical insulation complying with ASTM C 665,Type I.
2. Size: Fit between metal studs. See partition types on the Drawings.
3. Surface Burning Characteristics:
THERMAL INSULATION 072100-2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
a. Maximum flame spread: 10.
b. Maximum smoke developed: 10,when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
4. Combustion Characteristics: Passes ASTM E 136.
5. Fire Resistance Ratings: Passes ASTM E 119 as part of a complete fire tested wall
assembly.
6. Sound Transmission Class:50 percent or higher.
7. Dimensional Stability: Linear Shrinkage less than 0.1 percent.
2.4 VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: ASTM D 4397, 6 mils thick, with maximum permeance rating
of 0.13 perm.
B. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-retarder
manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder.
PART 3-EXECUTION -
3.1 INSTALLATION,GENERAL
A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and
applications indicated.
B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice,
rain,or snow at any time.
C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions
and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.
D. Provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard
thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness
indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF BELOW-GRADE INSULATION
A. On horizontal surfaces, loosely lay insulation units according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation units.
1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 24 inches in from exterior
walls.
THERMAL INSULATION 072100-3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
3.3 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR FRAMED CONSTRUCTION
A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated,complying with manufacturer's written
instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use
mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.
B. Mineral-Wool Board Insulation: Seal joints between units by applying adhesive, mastic, or
sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in
completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation
manufacturer.
C. Glass-Fiber or Mineral-Wool Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members
according to the following requirements:
1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If
more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a
snug fit between ends.
2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between
edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.
3. Maintain 3-inch clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated for or
protected from contact with insulation.
4. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches, support unfaced
blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of insulation to
flanges of metal studs.
D. Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where required
to prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials:
1. Loose-Fill Insulation: Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume
equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu.ft.
2. Spray Polyurethane Insulation:Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR CONCRETE SUBSTRATES
A. Install board insulation on concrete substrates by adhesively attached, spindle-type insulation
anchors as follows:
1. Fasten insulation anchors to concrete substrates with insulation anchor adhesive
according to anchor manufacturer's written instructions. Space anchors according to
insulation manufacturer's written instructions for insulation type, thickness, and
application indicated.
2. Apply insulation standoffs to each spindle to create cavity width indicated between
concrete substrate and insulation.
3. After adhesive has dried,install board insulation by pressing insulation into position over
spindles and securing it tightly in place with insulation-retaining washers,taking care not
to compress insulation below indicated thickness.
4. Where insulation will not be covered by other building materials, apply capped washers
to tips of spindles.
THERMAL INSULATION 072100-4
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
3.5 INSTALLATION OF CURTAIN-WALL INSULATION
A. Install board insulation in curtain-wall construction where indicated on Drawings according to
curtain-wall manufacturer's written instructions.
I. Hold insulation in place by securing metal clips and straps or integral pockets within
window frames, spaced at intervals recommended in writing by insulation manufacturer
to hold insulation securely in place without touching spandrel glass. Maintain cavity
width of dimension indicated between insulation and glass.
2. Install insulation where it contacts perimeter fire-containment system to prevent
insulation from bowing under pressure from perimeter fire-containment system.
3.6 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Place vapor retarders on side of construction indicated on Drawings. Extend vapor retarders to
extremities of areas to protect from vapor transmission. Secure vapor retarders in place with
adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Extend vapor retarders to cover
miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates,including those filled with loose-fiber insulation.
B. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping no fewer than two studs.
1. Fasten vapor retarders to wood framing at top, end, and bottom edges; at perimeter of
wall openings;and at lap joints. Space fasteners 16 inches o.c.
2. Before installing vapor retarders, apply urethane sealant to flanges of metal framing
including runner tracks, metal studs, and framing around door and window openings.
Seal overlapping joints in vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape according to vapor-
retarder manufacturer's written instructions. Seal butt joints with vapor-retarder tape.
Locate all joints over framing members or other solid substrates.
3. Firmly attach vapor retarders to metal framing and solid substrates with vapor-retarder
fasteners as recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer.
C. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor
retarders with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and
vapor retarders.
D. Repair tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work.
Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarders.
END OF SECTION 072100
THERMAL INSULATION 072100-5
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 076200- SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Formed roof drainage sheet metal fabrications.
2. Formed wall sheet metal fabrications.
3. Formed stainless steel interior and exterior covers,closures and trim.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Green Globe Submittals:
I. Product Data: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating
percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content.
C. Shop Drawings: Show installation layouts of sheet metal flashing and trim, including plans,
elevations, expansion joint locations, and keyed details. Distinguish between shop- and field-
assembled work.
1. Include details for forming,joining, supporting, and securing sheet metal flashing and
trim, including pattern of seams, termination points, fixed points, expansion joints,
expansion joint covers, edge conditions, special conditions, and connections to adjoining
work.
D. Samples: For each exposed product and for each finish specified.
E. Maintenance data.
F. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal
Manual"unless more stringent requirements are specified or shown on Drawings.
B. Copper Sheet Metal Standard: Comply with CDA's "Copper in Architecture Handbook."
Conform to dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
C. Mockups: Build mockups as needed to verify construction techniques and details, and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to
repair finish or replace sheet metal flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of
factory-applied finishes within 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Recycled Content of Copper-Sheet Flashing and Trim:Postconsumer recycled content plus one-
half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 40 percent.
B. Recycled Content of Steel-Sheet Flashing and Trim: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-
half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.
C. Recycled Content of Zinc-Sheet Flashing and Trim: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-
half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 15 percent.
2.2 SHEET METALS
A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a
strippable,temporary protective film before shipping.
B. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304, dead soft, fully
annealed;2B(bright,cold rolled)finish.
C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Restricted flatness steel sheet, metallic coated by the hot-dip
process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M.
1. Zinc-Coated(Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M,G90 coating designation;
structural quality.
2. Surface: Manufacturer's standard clear acrylic coating on both sides.
3. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish:
a. Three-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not
less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat.
4. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings,
separators,sealants,and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200-2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
and trim installation and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured
item unless otherwise indicated.
B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and
bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by
manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item.
1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws,gasketed,with hex-washer head.
a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or
factory-applied coating.
b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for
metal being fastened.
c. Spikes and Ferrules: Same material as gutter; with spike with ferrule matching
internal gutter width.
2. Fasteners for Stainless-Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel.
3. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Sheet: Hot-dip galvanized steel according to
ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 or Series 300 stainless steel.
C. Solder:
1. For Stainless Steel: ASTM B 32,Grade Sn60,with an acid flux of type recommended by
stainless-steel sheet manufacturer.
2. For Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50, 50 percent tin and 50
percent lead or Grade Sn60,60 percent tin and 40 percent lead.
D. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant
tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining
tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick.
E. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polymer sealant; low modulus; of type, grade,
class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain
watertight.
F. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant;
polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited
movement.
G. Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam-cementing compound,
recommended by aluminum manufacturer for exterior nonmoving joints, including riveted
joints.
H. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
2.4 FABRICATION,GENERAL
A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in
SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, geometry,
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200-3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
metal thickness, and other characteristics of item indicated. Fabricate items at the shop to
greatest extent possible.
1. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication.
2. Form sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool
marks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form
hems.
3. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not
allowed on faces exposed to view.
B. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric
sealant.
C. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used, form expansion
joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with butyl sealant
concealed within joints.
D. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or
from compatible,noncorrosive metal.
E. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with
elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended
use. Rivet joints where necessary for strength.
2.5 ROOF DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Hanging Gutters: Fabricate to cross section indicated, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes,
and other accessories as required. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- long sections. Furnish flat-
stock gutter spacers and gutter brackets fabricated from same metal as gutters, of size
recommended by SMACNA but not less than twice the gutter thickness. Fabricate expansion
joints, expansion joint covers,gutter bead reinforcing bars, and gutter accessories from same
metal as gutters.
B. Downspouts: Fabricate round downspouts complete with mitered elbows. Furnish with metal
hangers,from same material as downspouts,and anchors.
1. Hanger Style: Strap half round
2. Fabricate from the following materials:
a. Galvanized Steel: 0.022 inch thick.
C. Conductor Heads: Fabricate conductor heads with flanged back and stiffened top edge and of
dimensions and shape indicated complete with outlet tubes exterior flange built-in overflows.
Fabricate from the following materials:
1. Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch thick.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200-4
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION,GENERAL
A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in
place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement so that completed sheet metal
flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight. Use fasteners,
solder,welding rods, protective coatings, separators,sealants, and other miscellaneous items as
required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system.
1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform,
neat seams with minimum exposure of solder,welds,and sealant.
2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight
performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating
sheet metal.
3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Anchor each cleat with two fasteners. Bend
tabs over fasteners.
4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning,buckling,and
tool marks.
5. Install sealant tape where indicated.
6. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted.
B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates,
protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other
permanent separation as recommended by SMACNA.
1. Coat back side of uncoated aluminum and stainless-steel sheet metal flashing and trim
with bituminous coating where flashing and trim will contact wood, ferrous metal, or
cementitious construction.
2. Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood
substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet or install a
course of polyethylene sheet.
C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space
movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or
intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently
watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep,
filled with sealant concealed within joints.
D. Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate wood sheathing not less than 1-1/4
inches for nails and not less than 3/4 inch for wood screws metal decking not less than
recommended by fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance
E. Seal joints as shown and as required for watertight construction.
F. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered,removing oils and foreign matter. Pre-tin edges
of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches, except reduce pre-tinning where pre-tinned
surface would show in completed Work.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200-5
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1. Do not solder metallic-coated steel sheet.
2. Do not use torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder and flow solder into
joint. Fill joint completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces.
3. Stainless-Steel Soldering: Tin edges of uncoated sheets using solder recommended for
stainless steel and acid flux. Promptly remove acid flux residue from metal after tinning
and soldering. Comply with solder manufacturer's recommended methods for cleaning
and neutralization.
3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and
weathering.
B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants.
C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim
are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.
END OF SECTION 076200
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200-6
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85% PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 077200-ROOF ACCESSORIES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Roof curbs.
2. Equipment supports.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of roof accessory indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For roof accessories.
C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Roof plans, drawn to scale, and coordinating penetrations and roof-
mounted items.
B. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and maintenance data.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty on Painted Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer
agrees to repair finishes or replace roof accessories that show evidence of deterioration of
_ factory-applied finishes within 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL MATERIALS
A. Zinc-Coated(Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M,G90 coating designation.
ROOF ACCESSORIES 077200- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1. Mill-Phosphatized Finish:Manufacturer's standard for field painting.
2. Factory Prime Coating: Where field painting is indicated, apply pretreatment and white
or light-colored, factory-applied, baked-on epoxy primer coat, with a minimum dry film
thickness of 0.2 mil.
3. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer finish; AAMA 621; system
consisting of primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent
PVDF resin by weight.
4. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard two-coat,baked-on finish
consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat,with a minimum dry film thickness of
1 mil for topcoat.
B. Aluminum Extrusions and Tubes: ASTM B 221, manufacturer's standard alloy and temper for
type of use,finished to match assembly where used,otherwise mill finished.
C. Stainless-Steel Sheet and Shapes:ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666,Type 304.
D. Steel Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 123/A 123M
unless otherwise indicated.
2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and other
miscellaneous items required by manufacturer for a complete installation.
B. Wood Nailers: Softwood lumber, pressure treated with waterborne preservatives for
aboveground use, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,containing no arsenic or
chromium,and complying with AWPA C2;not less than 1-1/2 inches thick.
C. Fasteners: Roof accessory manufacturer's recommended fasteners suitable for application and
metals being fastened.Match finish of exposed fasteners with finish of material being fastened.
Provide nonremovable fastener heads to exterior exposed fasteners.
D. Sealants: As recommended by roof accessory manufacturer for installation indicated.
2.3 ROOF CURBS
A. Roof Curbs: Internally reinforced roof-curb units with integral spring-type vibration isolators
and capable of supporting superimposed live and dead loads, including equipment loads and
other construction indicated on Drawings; with welded or mechanically fastened and sealed
corner joints,integral metal cant and integrally formed deck-mounting flange at perimeter
bottom.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product
indicated on Drawings or comparable product by the following:
a. Curbs Plus,Inc.
B. Material:Zinc-coated(galvanized)steel sheet,0.052 inch thick.
ROOF ACCESSORIES 077200-2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1. Finish:Two-coat fluoropolymer.
2. Color:As indicated by manufacturer's designations.
C. Construction:
1. Insulation: Factory insulated with 1-1/2-inch thick cellulosic or glass-fiber board
insulation.
2. Liner: Same material as curb,of manufacturer's standard thickness and finish.
3. Factory-installed wood nailer at top of curb,continuous around curb perimeter.
4. On ribbed or fluted metal roofs, form deck-mounting flange at perimeter bottom to
conform to roof profile.
5. Fabricate curbs to minimum height of 12 inches unless otherwise indicated.
6. Top Surface: Level around perimeter with roof slope accommodated by sloping the deck-
mounting flange.
7. Sloping Roofs: Where roof slope exceeds 1:48,fabricate curb with perimeter curb height
tapered to accommodate roof slope so that top surface of perimeter curb is level. Equip
unit with water diverter or cricket on side that obstructs water flow.
8. Security Grille: Provide where indicated.
2.4 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Equipment Supports: Internally reinforced metal equipment supports capable of supporting
superimposed live and dead loads, including equipment loads and other construction indicated
on Drawings;with welded or mechanically fastened and sealed corner joints,integral metal cant
or stepped integral metal cant raised the thickness of roof insulation, and integrally formed
deck-mounting flange at perimeter bottom.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product
indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
a. AES Industries,Inc.
b. Curbs Plus,Inc.
c. Custom Solution Roof and Metal Products.
d. Greenheck Fan Corporation.
e. LM Curbs.
f. Milcor Inc.;Commercial Products Group of Hart&Cooley,Inc.
B. Material:Zinc-coated(galvanized thick.
1. Finish:Two-coat fluoropolymer.
2. Color.As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
ROOF ACCESSORIES 077200-3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Verify dimensions of roof openings for roof accessories. Install roof accessories
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Install roof accessories level,plumb,true to line and elevation,and without warping,jogs
in alignment,excessive oil canning,buckling,or tool marks.
2. Anchor roof accessories securely in place so they are capable of resisting indicated loads.
3. Use fasteners, separators,sealants,and other miscellaneous items as required to complete
installation of roof accessories and fit them to substrates.
4. Install roof accessories to resist exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, or
loosening of fasteners and seals.
B. Metal Protection: Protect metals against galvanic action by separating dissimilar metals from
contact with each other or with corrosive substrates by painting contact surfaces with
bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.
1. Coat concealed side of uncoated aluminum roof accessories with bituminous coating
where in contact with wood, ferrous metal,or cementitious construction.
2. Underlayment: Where installing roof accessories directly on cementitious or wood
substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet, or install a
course of polyethylene sheet.
C. Seal joints with sealant as required by roof accessory manufacturer.
3.2 REPAIR AND CLEANING
A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair
galvanizing according to ASTM A 780.
B. Touch up factory-primed surfaces with compatible primer ready for field painting according to
Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting."
C. Replace roof accessories that have been damaged or that cannot be successfully repaired by
finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION 077200
ROOF ACCESSORIES 077200-4
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 079200-JOINT SEALANTS
PART I -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Silicone joint sealants.
2. Urethane joint sealants.
3. Polysulfide joint sealants.
4. Latex joint sealants.
5. Acoustical joint sealants.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 09 Section"Gypsum Board"for sealing perimeter joints.
2. Division 09 Section"Tiling"for sealing tile joints.
3. Division 09 Section "Acoustical Tile Ceilings" for sealing edge moldings at perimeters
with acoustical sealant.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants
showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.
C. Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples
with joint sealants in 1/2-inch- wide joints formed between two 6-inch- long strips of material
matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.
D. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:
1. Joint-sealant application,joint location,and designation.
2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name.
3. Joint-sealant formulation.
4. Joint-sealant color.
E. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
F. Product Certificates: For each kind of joint sealant and accessory, from manufacturer.
G. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency,indicating that sealants comply with requirements.
H. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer,
indicating the following:
1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for
compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants.
2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate
preparation needed for adhesion.
I. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved
for installation of units required for this Project.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each kind of joint sealant from single source from single
manufacturer.
C. Product Testing: Test joint sealants using a qualified testing agency.
1. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to
ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:
1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-
sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F.
2. When joint substrates are wet.
3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for
applications indicated.
4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed
from joint substrates.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which joint-sealant
manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with
performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.
JOINT SEALANTS 079200-2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
B. Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from
the following:
1. Movement of the structure caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design
or construction resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's
written specifications for sealant elongation and compression.
2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications.
3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals,tools,or other outside agents.
4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric
contaminants.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS,GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants,backings, and other related materials that are compatible
with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer,based on testing and field experience.
B. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous
substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have
•
not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.
C. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where sealants are indicated for joints that will come in
repeated contact with food,provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600.
D. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS
MIT
A. Single-Component, Nonsag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S,
Grade NS,Class 25,for Use NT.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following:
a. Dow Corning Corporation;799.
b. GE Advanced Materials-Silicones;UltraGlaze SSG4000
UltraGlaze SSG4000AC.
c. May National Associates,Inc.; Bondaflex Sil 200 GPN Bondaflex Sil 201 FC.
d. Polymeric Systems,Inc.;PSI-631.
e. Schnee-Morehead,Inc.; SM5731 Poly-Glaze Plus.
f. Tremco Incorporated;Proglaze SSG Tremsil 600.
B. Mildew-Resistant, Single-Component, Nonsag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant:
ASTM C 920,Type S,Grade NS,Class 25,for Use NT.
JOINT SEALANTS 079200-3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following:
a. Pecora Corporation; 898.
2.3 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS
A. Single-Component, Nonsag, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS,
Class 25,for Use NT.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following:
a. BASF Building Systems; Sonolastic NP1 Sonalastic TX1 Sonolastic Ultra.
b. Bostik,Inc.;Chem-Calk 900 915 916 Textured.
c. May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex PUR 25 Bondaflex PUR 25 Textured
Bondaflex PUR 40 FC.
d. Pacific Polymers International,Inc.;Elasto-Thane 230 Type II.
e. Pecora Corporation;Dynatrol I-XL.
f. Polymeric Systems,Inc.;Flexiprene 1000.
g. Schnee-Morehead, Inc.; Permathane SM7100 Permathane SM7108
Permathane SM7110.
h. Sika Corporation,Construction Products Division; Sikaflex- la.
i. Tremco Incorporated;Dymonic Vulkem 116.
2.4 POLYSULFIDE JOINT SEALANTS
A. Single-Component, Nonsag, Polysulfide Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS,
Class 25,for Use NT.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be y�
incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following:
a. Pacific Polymers International,Inc.;Elastoseal 230 Type I.
b. W.R.Meadows,Inc.;Deck-O-Seal One Step.
2.5 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS
A. Latex Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP,
Grade NF.
I. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following:
a. BASF Building Systems; Sonolac.
b. Bostik,Inc.;Chem-Calk 600.
c. May National Associates,Inc.;Bondaflex 600 Bondaflex Sil-A 700.
JOINT SEALANTS 079200-4
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
d. Pecora Corporation;AC-20+.
e. Schnee-Morehead,Inc.; SM 8200.
f. Tremco Incorporated;Tremflex 834.
2.6 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS
A. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant
complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through
perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative
assemblies according to ASTM E 90.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following:
a. Pecora Corporation;AC-20 FTR or AIS-919.
b. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.
2.7 JOINT SEALANT BACKING -
A. General: Provide sealant backings of material that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint
substrates, sealants,primers,and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated
by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.
B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330,Type C(closed-cell material with a surface skin)
or any of the preceding types, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint
application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute
to producing optimum sealant performance.
C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended-by sealant
manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or
joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of
sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate
tests and field tests.
B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers-of sealants
and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or
harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to
promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.
C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining,nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces
adjacent to joints.
JOINT SEALANTS 079200- 5
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for joint configuration,installation tolerances,and other conditions affecting joint-
sealant performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to
comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:
1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of
joint sealant, including dust, paints(except for permanent, protective coatings tested and
approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint
sealants,oil,grease,waterproofing,water repellents,water,surface dirt,and frost.
2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a
combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing
optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning
operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air.
Porous joint substrates include the following:
a. Concrete.
b. Masonry.
c. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do
not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint
sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following:
a. Metal.
b. Glass.
c. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as
indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to
comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-
sealant bond;do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with
adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or
by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling
without disturbing joint seal.
JOINT SEALANTS 079200-6
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products
and applications indicated,unless more stringent requirements apply.
B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint
sealants as applicable to materials,applications,and conditions indicated.
C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position
required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint
widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.
2. Do not stretch,twist,puncture,or tear sealant backings.
3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and
replace them with dry materials.
D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants
and backs of joints.
E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time
backings are installed:
1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.
3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow
optimum sealant movement capability.
F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or
curing begins,tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form
smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure
contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.
1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.
2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not
discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise
indicated.
G. Acoustical Sealant Installation: At sound-rated assemblies and elsewhere as indicated, seal
construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a
continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at
perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's
written recommendations.
JOINT SEALANTS 079200-7
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods
and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of
products in which joints occur.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances
and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without
deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage
or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately
so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.
3.6 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE
A. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces.
1. Joint Locations:
a. Isolation and contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.
b. Joints in stone paving units.
c. Tile control and expansion joints.
d. Joints between different materials listed above.
e. Other joints as indicated.
2. Urethane Joint Sealant: Single component,nonsag,traffic grade.
3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.
B. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.
1. Joint Locations:
a. Construction joints in cast-in-place concrete.
b. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry.
c. Joints between metal panels.
d. Joints between different materials listed above.
e. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors windows.
f. Other joints as indicated.
2. Urethane Joint Sealant: Single component,nonsag,Class 25.
3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.
C. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces.
1. Joint Locations:
a. Isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.
JOINT SEALANTS 079200-8
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
b. Control and expansion joints in tile flooring.
c. Other joints as indicated.
2. Urethane Joint Sealant: Single component,nonsag,traffic grade.
3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.
D. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.
1. Joint Locations:
a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls.
b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated.
c. Tile control and expansion joints.
d. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of walls and partitions.
e. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors
windows.
f. Other joints as indicated.
2. Joint Sealant: Latex.
3. - Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.
E. Joint-Sealant Application: Mildew-resistant interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal
nontraffic surfaces.
1. Joint Sealant Location:
a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls,floors,and counters.
b. Tile control and expansion joints where indicated.
c. Other joints as indicated.
2. - Joint Sealant: Mildew resistant,single component,nonsag,neutral curing,Silicone.
3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.
F. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior acoustical joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal
nontraffic surfaces.
1. Joint Location:
a. Acoustical joints where indicated.
b. Other joints as indicated.
2. — Joint Sealant: Acoustical.
3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
END OF SECTION 079200
JOINT SEALANTS 079200-9
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 081113-HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART I -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Standard hollow metal doors and frames.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Green Globe Submittals:
1. Product Data: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating
percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content.
C. Shop Drawings: Include elevations, door edge details, frame profiles, metal thicknesses,
preparations for hardware,and other details.
D. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.
E. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required.
F. Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for
details and openings as those on Drawings.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow metal work from single source from single manufacturer.
B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following:
1. Amweld Building Products,LLC.
2. Ceco Door Products;an Assa Abloy Group company.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
3. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company.
4. Kewanee Corporation(The).
5. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company.
6. Windsor Republic Doors.
7. Or prior approved equal.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, CS, Type B; suitable for exposed
applications.
B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M,CS,Type B.
C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with
minimum A40 metallic coating.
D. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS),40Z coating designation;mill
phosphatized.
1. For anchors built into exterior walls,steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M
or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M,
Class B.
E. Inserts,Bolts,and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.
F. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches, as measured according to
ASTM C 143/C 143M.
G. Glazing: Division 08 Section "Glazing."
2.3 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL DOORS
A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8.
1. Design: As indicated.
2. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene,
polyurethane,polyisocyanurate,mineral-board,or vertical steel-stiffener core.
a. Fire Door Core: As required to provide fire-protection ratings indicated.
b. Thermal-Rated (Insulated) Doors: R-value of not less than 6.0 deg F x h x sq.
ft./Btu when tested according to ASTM C 1363.
3. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Beveled edge, 1/8 inch in 2 inches..
4. Top and Bottom Edges: Closed with flush or inverted 0.042-inch-thick,end closures or
channels of same material as face sheets.
5. Tolerances: SDI 117,"Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113-2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
B. Exterior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet. Comply with
ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level:
1. Level 3 and Physical Performance Level A(Extra Heavy Duty),Model 2(Seamless).
C. Interior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet unless metallic-coated sheet
is indicated. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing
ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level:
1. Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B(Heavy Duty),Model 2(Seamless).
D. Hardware Reinforcement: ANSI/SDI A250.6.
2.4 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8.
B. Exterior Frames: Fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet.
1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners.
2. Fabricate frames as face welded unless otherwise indicated.
C. Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet unless metallic-coated sheet is
indicated.
1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners.
2. Fabricate frames as face welded unless otherwise indicated.
3. Frames for Wood Doors: 0.053-inch-thick steel sheet.
4. Frames for Borrowed Lights: 0.042-inch-thick steel sheet.
D. Hardware Reinforcement: ANSI/SDI A250.6.
2.5 FRAME ANCHORS
A. Jamb Anchors:
1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not
less than 0.042 inch thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches
wide by 10 inches long;or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch thick.
2. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud,welded to back of frames;not less than 0.042
inch thick.
3. Compression Type for Drywall Slip-on Frames: Adjustable compression anchors.
4. Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8-inch-
diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall,
with throat reinforcement plate,welded to frame at each anchor location.
B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames,not less than 0.042 inch thick.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 -3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
2.6 STOPS AND MOLDINGS
A. Moldings for Glazed Lites in Doors: Minimum 0.032 inch thick, same material as door face
sheet.
B. Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with hollow metal frames,a minimum of 5/8 inch high
unless otherwise indicated.
C. Loose Stops for Glazed Lites in Frames: Minimum 0.032 inch thick, same material as frames.
2.7 LOUVERS
A. Provide louvers for interior doors, where indicated, that comply with SDI 111C, with blades or
baffles formed of 0.020-inch-thick,cold-rolled steel sheet set into 0.032-inch-thick steel frame.
2.8 ACCESSORIES
A. Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid mechanical anchors.
B. Ceiling Struts: Minimum 1/4-inch-thick by 1-inch-wide steel.
2.9 FABRICATION
A. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in SDI 117.
B. Hollow Metal Doors:
1. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottom of exterior doors. Seal joints in
top edges of doors against water penetration.
2. Glazed Lites: Factory cut openings in doors.
C. Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections, provide alignment plates or
angles at each joint,fabricated of same thickness metal as frames.
1. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill,dress,and make smooth,
flush,and invisible.
2. Sidelight Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints,
fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs
by butt welding.
3. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners
unless otherwise indicated.
4. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot
welds per anchor.
5. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:
a. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of
frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 -4
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
b. Compression Type: Not less than two anchors in each jamb.
c. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches from top
and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches o.c.
6. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors,drill stops to receive door silencers.
a. Single-Door Frames: Three door silencers.
D. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated mortised
hardware according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in
Division 08 Section"Door Hardware."
1. Locate hardware as indicated,or if not indicated,according to ANSUSDI A250.8.
2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated,mortised and surface-mounted door
hardware.
3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSUDHI A115 Series
specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware.
I 4. Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with
Division 26 electrical Sections.
E. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed liter where indicated. Form
I
corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints.
1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow
I metal work.
2. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each
glazed lite is capable of being removed independently.
I 3. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors
and frames.
4. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow metal work.
5. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with type of glazing and
Itype of installation indicated.
I2.10 STEEL FINISHES
A. Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating.
1. Shop Primer: ANSI/SDI A250.10.
IPART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
IA. Hollow Metal Frames: Comply with ANSUSDI A250.11.
I
IHOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 -5
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1. Set frames accurately in position,plumbed, aligned,and braced securely until permanent
anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving
surfaces smooth and undamaged.
a. At fire-protection-rated openings,install frames according to NFPA 80.
b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling
limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously;
grind,fill,dress,and make splice smooth,flush,and invisible on exposed faces.
c. Install frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of opening.
d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting.
e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been
properly set and secured.
f. Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim
as necessary to comply with installation tolerances.
g. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that are filled with grout
containing antifreezing agents.
2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor,
and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.
a. Floor anchors may be set with powder-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled
expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.
3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation behind frames.
4. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space
between frames and masonry with grout.
5. Ceiling Struts: Extend struts vertically from top of frame at each jamb to overhead
structural supports or substrates above frame unless frame is anchored to masonry or to
other structural support at each jamb. Bend top of struts to provide flush contact for
securing to supporting construction. Provide adjustable wedged or bolted anchorage to
frame jamb members.
6. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment,
twist,and plumb to the following tolerances:
a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch,measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees
from jamb perpendicular to frame head.
b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line
parallel to plane of wall.
c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on
parallel lines,and perpendicular to plane of wall.
d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch,measured at jambs at floor.
B. Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified
below. Shim as necessary.
1. Non-Fire-Rated Standard Steel Doors:
a. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch.
b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch.
c. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113-6
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
d. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor(No Threshold): Maximum 3/4
inch.
2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80.
3. Smoke-Control Doors: Install doors according to NFPA 105.
C. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing" and with
hollow metal manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not
more than 9 inches o.c. and not more than 2 inches o.c.from each corner.
3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final
inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace
i defective work,including hollow metal work that is warped,bowed,or otherwise unacceptable.
B. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of
prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying,rust-inhibitive primer.
END OF SECTION 081113
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 -7
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 081416-FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Solid-core doors with wood-veneer faces.
2. Factory finishing flush wood doors.
3. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 08 Section"Glazing"for glass view panels in flush wood doors.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of door indicated.
B. Green Globe Submittals:
1. Certificates for Solid Lumber and Timber Panel Products: Chain-of-custody certificates
indicating that flush wood doors comply with forest certification requirements by
Sustainable Forestry Initiative,CSA,Forest Stewardship Council or American Tree Farm
System requirements.
2. For adhesives and composite wood products, documentation indicating that product
contains no urea formaldehyde.
3. For adhesives, documentation indicating that products are low-VOC emitting, non-toxic
and chemically inert.
4. For paints and coatings, documentation indicating that products are low-VOC emitting,
non-toxic and chemically inert.
5. For composite wood products, documentation indicating that products are low-VOC
emitting,non-toxic and chemically inert.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate location,size, and hand of each door;elevation of each kind of door;
construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and
other pertinent data.
1. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.
2. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts.
3. Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements.
4. Indicate fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors.
D. Samples: For factory-finished doors.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is certified for chain of custody by
Sustainable Forestry Initiative, CSA, Forest Stewardship Council or American Tree Farm
System requirements.
B. Vendor Qualifications: A vendor that is certified for chain of custody by Sustainable Forestry
Initiative,CSA,Forest Stewardship Council or American Tree Farm System requirements.
C. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with AWI's "Architectural
Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated."
D. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a
qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at as close to
neutral pressure as possible according to NFPA 252.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following:
1. Algoma Hardwoods,Inc.
2. Eggers Industries.
3. Graham;an Assa Abloy Group company.
4. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc.;a Masonite company.
5. Vancouver Door Company.
6. VT Industries Inc.
7. Or approved equal.
2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL
A. WDMA I.S.I-A Performance Grade:
1. Heavy Duty unless otherwise indicated.
2. Extra Heavy Duty: Public toilets and janitor's closets.
B. Particleboard-Core Doors:
1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1,Grade LD-2.
2. Provide doors with either glued-wood-stave or structural-composite-lumber cores instead
of particleboard cores for doors indicated to receive exit devices.
C. Fire-Protection-Rated Doors: Provide core specified or mineral core as needed to provide fire-
protection rating indicated.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416-2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
D. Mineral-Core Doors:
1. Core: Noncombustible mineral product complying with requirements of referenced
quality standard and testing and inspecting agency for fire-protection rating indicated.
2. Blocking: Provide composite blocking with improved screw-holding capability approved
for use in doors of fire-protection ratings indicated as needed to eliminate through-bolting
hardware.
3. Edge Construction: At hinge stiles,provide laminated-edge construction with improved
screw-holding capability and split resistance. Comply with specified requirements for
exposed edges.
2.3 VENEERED-FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
A. Interior Solid-Core Doors:
1. Grade: Premium,with Grade A faces.
2. Species: Select white birch.
3. Cut: Rotary cut.
4. Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match.
5. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Balance match.
6. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening or separated only by
mullions.
7. Core: Particleboard.
8. Construction: Five plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive
planed before veneering.
2.4 LOUVERS AND LIGHT FRAMES
A. Metal Louvers:
1. Metal and Finish: Hot-dip galvanized steel, 0.040 inch thick, factory primed for paint
finish.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied.
B. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors in factory.
1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated.
2. Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply with
applicable requirements in Division 08 Section"Glazing."
3. Louvers: Factory install louvers in prepared openings.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416-3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
2.6 FACTORY FINISHING
A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication,
including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied,
before finishing.
1. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be
omitted on bottom edges,edges of cutouts,and mortises.
B. Finish doors at factory that are indicated to receive transparent finish.
C. Transparent Finish:
1. Grade: Premium.
2. Finish: AWI catalyzed polyurethane system.
3. Staining: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
4. Effect: Open-grain finish and semifilled finish,produced by applying an additional finish
coat to partially fill the wood pores.
5. Sheen: Satin and semigloss.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Hardware: For installation,see Division 08 Section"Door Hardware."
B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and
the referenced quality standard,and as indicated.
1. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80.
C. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels;do not trim
stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire-rated doors.
Machine doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises after fitting
and machining.
1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch at heads,jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8
inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering unless otherwise
indicated. Where threshold is shown or scheduled,provide 1/4 inch from bottom of door
to top of threshold unless otherwise indicated.
a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.
D. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416-4
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
E. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at
Project site.
END OF SECTION 081416
1 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416-5
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 083819-RIGID TRAFFIC DOORS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Double action,self-closing,lightweight,impact resistant doors.
2. Flexible vertical strip barrier doors
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data
1. Manufacturer's product description, installation and maintenance instructions for each
type and size of traffic door.
1.3 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Protect doors during transit,storage and handling to prevent damage,soiling and deterioration.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 DOOR TYPES AND ACCESSORIES
A. Traffic Doors Type: DA-S and DA-D.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide basis-of-
design product: Eliason Easy Swing Door Division, (www.eliasoncorp.com), Model
HCG-10 or comparable product by following manufactures.
a. Mueller Door Corp www.muellerdoor.com.
b. Chase Doors/www.chasedoors.com.
2. Door body: Fire retardant exterior surface of 0.125 thick high impact thermoplastic
material, bonded to a high strength urethane foam core with a high strength structural
PVC frame; 1-1/2 inch total door thickness.
3. Standard design clearances.
4. Windows: Clear acrylic; double glazed; set in black rubber molding; 14 inches by 16
inches unless otherwise indicated.
5. Provide the following as indicated on Drawings.
RIGID TRAFFIC DOORS 083819- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
a. Spring Bumpers: Flexible,impact resistant '/ inch thick thermoplastic material; 18
inches high; in manufacturer's standard black finish front and back.
b. Scuff Plates: 0.090 inch thick thermoplastic, 48 inches high; in manufacturer's
standard black finish.
6. Jamb Guards: Welded assembly of 1/4 inch stainless steel; 18 inches high by 5 inches
deep. Provide with floor and wall anchors. Secure bottom pin assembly to top of jamb
guard.
7. Color: As selected by architect from manufactures full range to match adjacent wall
colors.
8. Full perimeter gasket seal,adjustable at bottom unless otherwise noted.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Verify openings are prepared with headers level,jambs plumb, floor level, without projections,
and are correctly dimensioned to receive traffic doors. Begin installation of doors only when
conditions are satisfactory.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Install doors, complete with accessories and hardware, in strict accordance with shop
drawings and manufacturer's installation instructions.
3.3 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. General:
1. Follow traffic door manufacturer's instructions as required to:
a. Clean and lubricate operating parts.
b. Adjust to open and close smoothly and freely without binding.
c. Check seals for proper fit.
B. Repair and Clean:
1. Repair damage to doors to match manufacturer's original finish; if unable to repair
damage,replace doors.
2. Clean surfaces soiled by work as recommended by manufacturer.
3. Leave work area clean and free of debris.
END OF SECTION 083819
RIGID TRAFFIC DOORS 083819-2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 084113-ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Exterior and interior storefront framing.
2. Storefront framing for window walls.
3. Exterior and interior manual-swing entrance doors and door frame units.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General Performance: Aluminum-framed systems shall withstand the effects of the following
performance requirements without exceeding performance criteria or failure due to defective
manufacture,fabrication,installation,or other defects in construction:
1. Movements of supporting structure indicated on Drawings including, but not limited to,
story drift and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.
2. Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction.
3. Failure includes the following:
a. Deflection exceeding specified limits.
b. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure.
c. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and
- structural movements to glazing.
d. Noise or vibration created by wind and by thermal and structural movements.
e. Loosening or weakening of fasteners,attachments,and other components.
f. Failure of operating units.
B. Delegated Design: Design aluminum-framed systems, including comprehensive engineering
analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design
criteria indicated.
C. Wind/Seismic Loads: ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures,"
Section 9,"Earthquake Loads;"and Oregon Structural Specialty Code,current edition.
D. Deflection of Framing Members:
1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to edge of glass in a direction perpendicular to
glass plane shall not exceed L/175 of the glass edge length for each individual glazing lite
or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch,
whichever is less.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
E. Structural-Test Performance: Provide aluminum-framed systems tested according to
ASTM E 330 as follows:
1. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures,systems,
including anchorage,do not evidence material failures,structural distress,and permanent
deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span.
2. Test Durations: 10 seconds.
F. Air Infiltration: Provide aluminum-framed systems with maximum air leakage through fixed
glazing and framing areas of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. of fixed wall area when tested according to
ASTM E 283 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 1.57 lbf/sq.ft.
G. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Provide aluminum-framed systems that do not
evidence water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to
ASTM E 331 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 20 percent of positive wind-load
design pressure,but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq.ft.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Green Globe Submittals:
1. Product Data: For glazing sealants used inside the weatherproofing system,
documentation including printed statement of VOC content.
2. For glazing sealants used inside the weatherproofing system, documentation indicating
that products are low-VOC emitting,non-toxic and chemically inert.
C. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details,
and attachments to other work.
1. Include details of provisions for system expansion and contraction and for drainage of
moisture in the system to the exterior.
D. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required.
E. Other Action Submittals:
1. Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier,
detailing fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and
diagrams.
F. Delegated-Design Submittal: For aluminum-framed systems indicated to comply with
performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the
qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
G. Product test reports.
H. Field quality-control reports.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 -2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
I. Maintenance data.
J. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved
for installation of units required for this Project.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 699 for testing indicated.
C. Engineering Responsibility: Prepare data for aluminum-framed systems, including Shop
Drawings,based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in systems
similar to those indicated for this Project.
D. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for
systems' aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by
dimensions,arrangements,alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate
to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are
indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction
testing,field testing,and in-service performance.
E. Accessible Entrances: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural &
Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and
ICC/ANSI A117.1.
F. Source Limitations for Aluminum-Framed Systems: Obtain from single source from single
manufacturer.
G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. -
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or.
replace components of aluminum-framed systems that do not comply with requirements or that
fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair
or replace components on which finishes do not comply with requirements or that fail in
materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include normal
weathering.
1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113-3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products or comparable
approved product by one of the following:
1. Kawneer North America;an Alcoa company.
2. Tubelite.
3. United States Aluminum.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish
indicated.
1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209.
2. Extruded Bars,Rods, Profiles,and Tubes: ASTM B 221.
3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429.
4. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M.
5. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10/A5.10M.
2.3 FRAMING SYSTEMS
A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum framing members of thickness
required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.
1. Construction: Thermally broken.
2. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides.
3. Glazing Plane: Center.
B. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with
nonstaining,nonferrous shims for aligning system components.
C. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining,
nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.
1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from
thermal and structural movements,wind loads,or vibration.
2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.
3. Use exposed fasteners with countersunk Phillips screw heads,finished to match framing
system.
D. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding
flashing compatible with adjacent materials.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 -4
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
E. Framing System Gaskets and Sealants:Manufacturer's standard,recommended by manufacturer
for joint type.
2.4 GLAZING SYSTEMS
A. Glazing: As specified in Division 08 Section"Glazing."
B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types;replaceable,molded or extruded,
of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal.
C. Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric type.
2.5 ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS
A. Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual-swing operation.
1. Door Construction: 1-3/4-inch overall thickness, with minimum 0.125-inch thick,
extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with
reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate
concealed tie rods.
a. Thermal Construction: High-performance plastic connectors separate aluminum
members exposed to the exterior from members exposed to the interior.
2. Door Design: Narrow stile;2-1/8 inch nominal width.
a. Accessible Doors: Smooth surfaced for width of door in area within 10 inches
above floor or ground plane.
3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Beveled, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed
gaskets.
a. Provide nonremovable glazing stops on outside of door.
B. Entrance Door Hardware: As specified in Division 08 Section"Door Hardware."
2.6 ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE
A. General: Provide entrance door hardware for each entrance door to comply with requirements
in this Section.
1. Opening-Force Requirements:
a. Egress Doors: Not more than 15 lbf to release the latch and not more than 30 lbf to
set the door in motion and not more than 15 lbf to open the door to its minimum
required width.
b. Accessible Interior Doors: Not more than 5 lbf to fully open door.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113-5
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
B. Opening-Force Requirements:
1. Latches and Exit Devices: Not more than 15 lbf required to release latch.
C. Pivot Hinges: BHMA A 156.4,Grade 1.
1. Offset-Pivot Hinges: Provide top, bottom, and intermediate offset pivots at each door
leaf.
D. Mortise Auxiliary Locks: BHMA A156.5,Grade 1.
E. Cylinders: BHMA A156.5,Grade 1.
1. Keying: Master key system. Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control
number and include notation"DO NOT DUPLICATE" to be furnished by Owner.
F. Strikes: Provide strike with black-plastic dust box for each latch or lock bolt; fabricated for
aluminum framing.
G. Operating Trim: BHMA A156.6.
H. Closers: BHMA A156.4, Grade I, with accessories required for a complete installation, sized
as required by door size, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use; adjustable to
meet field conditions and requirements for opening force.
I. Surface-Mounted Holders: BHMA A156.16,Grade 1.
J. Door Stops: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1, floor or wall mounted, as appropriate for door location
indicated,with integral rubber bumper.
K. Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable components.
L. Weather Sweeps: Manufacturer's standard exterior-door bottom sweep with concealed fasteners
on mounting strip.
M. Silencers: BHMA A156.16,Grade 1.
N. Thresholds: BHMA A156.21,raised thresholds beveled with a slope of not more than 1:2,with
maximum height of 1/2 inch.
O. Finger Guards: Manufacturer's standard collapsible neoprene or PVC gasket anchored to frame
hinge jamb at center-pivoted doors.
2.7 FABRICATION
A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.
B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration
of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or
grinding.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113-6
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
C. Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following
characteristics:
1. Profiles that are sharp,straight,and free of defects or deformations.
2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered.
3. Means to drain water passing joints,condensation within framing members,and moisture
migrating within the system to exterior.
4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members.
5. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to
maintain required glazing edge clearances.
6. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from interior for vision glass and exterior for
spandrel glazing or metal panels.
7. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest
extent possible.
D. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops.
E. Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and
for installing entrance door hardware.
F. Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware.
G. Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the greatest
extent possible. Cut,drill,and tap for factory-installed entrance door hardware before applying
finishes.
H. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to
Shop Drawings.
2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Clear Anodic Finish: Conforming to NAAMM Metal Finishes Manual and AAMA 605.2.
B. Color: As selected from manufacturer's full range of available colors, not limited to standard
colors.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Do not install damaged components.
3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.
4. Rigidly secure non-movement joints.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113-7
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic
deterioration.
6. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.
B. Metal Protection:
1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by
painting contact surfaces with primer or applying sealant or tape, or by installing
nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.
2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry,protect against corrosion by painting
contact surfaces with bituminous paint.
C. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing
members,and moisture migrating within the system to exterior.
D. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Division 07 Section
"Joint Sealants"to produce weather tight installation.
E. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades, and without
warp or rack.
F. Install glazing as specified in Division 08 Section"Glazing."
G. Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points.
1. Exterior Doors: Install to produce weather-tight enclosure and tight fit at weather
stripping.
2. Field-Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface-mounted entrance door
hardware according to entrance door hardware manufacturers' written instructions using
concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible.
END OF SECTION 084113
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113-8
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 084229-AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Interior,sliding,power-operated automatic entrances.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 26 and 28 Sections for electrical connections including conduit and wiring for
automatic entrance operators and access-control devices.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. AAADM: American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers.
B. Activation Device: Device that,when actuated,sends an electrical signal to the door operator to
open the door. _
C. IBC: International Building Code.
D. Safety Device: Device that,to avoid injury,prevents a door from opening or closing.
E. For automatic door terminology,refer to BHMA A156.10 for definitions of terms.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Operating Temperature Range: Provide automatic entrances that operate within minus 20 to
plus 122 deg F.
B. Air Infiltration: Maximum air leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas of 1.25 cfin/sq.
ft.of fixed entrance system area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a minimum static-air-
pressure difference of 6.24 lbf/sq.ft.
C. Opening-Force Requirements:
AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES 084229- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1. Power-Operated Doors: Not more than 50 lbf required to manually set door in motion if
power fails,and not more than 15 lbf required to open door to minimum required width.
2. Breakaway Device for Power-Operated Doors: Not more than 50 lbf required for a
breakaway door or panel to open.
3. Accessible Interior Doors: Not more than 5 lbf to fully open door.
D. Entrapment Force Requirements:
1. Power-Operated Sliding Doors: Not more than 30 lbf required to prevent stopped door
from closing.
E. Wind/Seismic Loads: : ASCE 7,"Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures,"
Section 9,"Earthquake Loads;"and Oregon Structural Specialty Code,current edition.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for automatic
entrances. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and
furnished specialties and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: For automatic entrances. Include plans,elevations, sections, details,hardware
mounting heights,and attachments to other work.
1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis
data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their
preparation.
2. Wiring Diagrams: For power,signal,and control wiring.
3. Activation and safety devices.
4. Include hardware schedule and indicate hardware types, functions, quantities, and
locations.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied metal-cladding finishes.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required,in manufacturer's standard
sizes.
E. Qualification Data: For Installer.
F. Product Certificates: For each type of emergency-exit automatic entrance,from manufacturer.
G. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency,for automatic entrances.
H. Maintenance Data: For automatic entrances, safety devices, and control systems to include in
maintenance manuals.
I. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.
AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES 084229-2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer with company certificate issued by AAADM.
B. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved
for installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.
C. Source Limitations for Automatic Entrances: Obtain automatic entrances from single source
from single manufacturer.
D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency,and marked for intended location and application.
E. Power-Operated Door Standard: BHMA A156.10.
F. Emergency-Exit Door Requirements: Comply with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction for automatic entrances serving as a required means of egress.
G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1. Review methods and procedures related to automatic entrances including,but not limited
to,the following:
a. Structural load limitations.
b. Construction schedule. Verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel,
equipment,and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.
c. Coordination with electrical,glazing,and other trades.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings to receive automatic entrances by
field measurements before fabrication.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Templates: Obtain templates for doors,frames,and other work specified to be factory prepared
for installing automatic entrances, and distribute to parties involved. Check Shop Drawings of
other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing automatic
entrances to comply with indicated requirements.
B. Coordinate hardware with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness,
hand, function, and finish. Coordinate hardware for automatic entrances with hardware
required for rest of Project.
C. Electrical System Roughing-in: Coordinate layout and installation of automatic entrances with
connections to power supplies and access-control system.
AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES 084229-3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of automatic entrances that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
1. Failures include,but are not limited to,the following:
a. Structural failures including,but not limited to,excessive deflection.
b. Faulty operation of operators,controls,and hardware.
c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
weathering and use.
2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
1.10 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide 12 months' full
maintenance by skilled employees of automatic entrance Installer. Include quarterly preventive
maintenance,repair or replacement of worn or defective components,lubrication,cleaning,and
adjusting as required for proper automatic entrance operation at rated speed and capacity.
Provide parts and supplies the same as those used in the manufacture and installation of original
equipment.
1. Engage a certified inspector to perform safety inspection after each adjustment or repair
and at end of maintenance period. Furnish completed inspection reports to Owner.
2. Perform maintenance, including emergency callback service, during normal working
hours.
3. Include 24-hour-per-day,7-day-per-week,emergency callback service.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish
indicated.
1. Extruded Bars,Rods,Profiles,and Tubes: ASTM B 221.
2. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209.
B. Steel Reinforcement: With manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant primer complying with
SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00 applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment.
Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC-SP COM and
prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard.
1. Structural Shapes,Plates,and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
2. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M.
AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES 084229-4
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
3. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.
C. Stainless-Steel Bars: ASTM A 276 or ASTM A 666,Type 304.
D. Stainless-Steel Tubing: ASTM A 554,Grade MT 304.
E. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304, stretcher-leveled
standard of flatness,in entrance manufacturer's standard thickness.
F. Glazing: As specified in Division 08 Section"Glazing."
G. Sealants and Joint Fillers: As specified in Division 07 Section"Joint Sealants."
H. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining
grout;complying with ASTM C 1107;of consistency suitable for application.
I. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied, asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12
requirements,except containing no asbestos;formulated for 30-mil thickness per coat.
J. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining,
nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.
2.2 SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard automatic entrances including doors,sidelites,
framing,headers,carrier assemblies,roller tracks, door operators, activation and safety devices,
and accessories required for a complete installation.
B. Sliding Automatic Entrance:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the
following:
a. Single-and Bi-parting-Sliding Units:
1) Gildor,Inc.
2) Horton Automatics; Div.of Overhead Door Corporation.
2. Configuration: Single-sliding door,with one sliding leaf,transom,and sidelite.
3. Operator Features:
a. Power opening and closing.
b. Drive System: Chain or belt.
c. Adjustable opening and closing speeds.
d. Adjustable hold-open time between 0 and 30 seconds.
e. Obstruction recycle.
f. On-off/hold-open switch to control electric power to operator,key operated.
g. Energy-conservation switch that reduces door-opening width.
AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES 084229-5
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
4. Sliding Door Carrier Assemblies and Overhead Roller Tracks: Manufacturer's standard
carrier assembly that allows vertical adjustment; consisting of nylon- or delrin-covered,
ball-bearing-center steel wheels operating on a continuous roller track, or ball-bearing-
center steel wheels operating on a nylon- or delrin-covered, continuous roller track.
Support doors from carrier assembly by cantilever and pivot assembly.
a. Rollers: Minimum of two ball-bearing roller wheels and two anti-rise rollers for
each active leaf.
5. Sliding Door Threshold: Manufacturer's standard threshold members and bottom-guide
track system,with stainless-steel,ball-bearing-center roller wheels.
a. Configuration: No threshold across door opening and surface-mounted guide track
system at sidelites.
6. Combination Activation and Safety Device: Combination motion/presence sensor.
7. Finish: Finish framing,door(s),sidelite(s),and header with Class II,clear anodic finish.
2.3 ENTRANCE COMPONENTS
A. Framing and Transom Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded aluminum,minimum 0.125
inch thick and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.
1. Nominal Size: 1-3/4 by 4-1/2 inches.
2. Extruded Glazing Stops and Applied Trim: Minimum 0.062-inch wall thickness.
B. Stile and Rail Doors: Manufacturer's standard 1-3/4-inch- thick, glazed doors with minimum
0.125-inch- thick, extruded-aluminum tubular stile and rail members. Mechanically fasten
corners with reinforcing brackets that are welded, or incorporate concealed tie-rods that span
full length of top and bottom rails.
1. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Square, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and
manufacturer's standard preformed gaskets.
2. Stile Design: Basis-of-Design is medium stile, 3-1/2-inch nominal width. Coordinate
final stile with Core and Shell specifications.
3. Rail Design: 6-1/2-inch nominal height at head and 10-inch nominal height at sill.
C. Transom: Manufacturer's standard 1-3/4-inch- deep transom with minimum 0.125-inch- thick,
extruded-aluminum tubular stile and rail members matching door design and finish.
1. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Same materials and design as for stile and rail door.
D. Headers: Fabricated from minimum 0.125-inch- thick, extruded aluminum and extending full
width of automatic entrance units to conceal door operators and controls. Provide hinged or
removable access panels for service and adjustment of door operators and controls. Secure
panels to prevent unauthorized access.
1. Mounting: Concealed,with one side of header flush with framing.
AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES 084229-6
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
2. Capacity: Capable of supporting doors up to 175 lb per leaf over spans up to 14 feet
without intermediate supports.
a. Provide sag rods for spans exceeding 14 feet.
E. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with
nonstaining,nonferrous shims for aligning system components.
F. Signage: Affixed to both sides of each door as required by BHMA A156.10 and
BHMA A156.19 for type of door and its operation.
1. Application Process: Decals.
2. Provide sign materials with instructions for field application after glazing is installed.
2.4 DOOR OPERATORS AND ACTIVATION AND SAFETY DEVICES
A. Door Operators: Provide door operators of size recommended by manufacturer for door size,
weight, and movement; for condition of exposure; and for long-term, maintenance-free
operation under normal traffic load for type of occupancy indicated. -
1. Door Operator Performance: Provide door operators that will open and close doors and
maintain them in fully closed position when subjected to Project's design wind loads.
2. Electromechanical Operators: Concealed, self-contained, overhead unit powered by
fractional-horsepower, permanent-magnet dc motor; with closing speed controlled
mechanically by gear train and dynamically by braking action of electric motor; with
solid-state microprocessor controller;UL 325;and with manual operation with power off.
B. Combination Motion/Presence Sensors: Self-contained units; consisting of both motion and
presence sensors in a single metal or plastic housing; adjustable to provide detection field sizes
and functions required by BHMA A156.10. -
1. Motion Sensor: K-band-frequency,microwave-scanner units; with relay hold time of not
less than 2 to 10 seconds.
a. Provide capability for switching between bidirectional and unidirectional
detection.
b. For one-way-traffic entrances,sensor on egress side shall not be active when doors
are fully closed.
2. Presence Sensor: Infrared-scanner units; with relay hold time of not less than 2 to 10
seconds. Sensors shall remain active at all times.
C. Opening-Width Control: Two-position switch that in the normal position allows sliding doors
to travel to full opening width and in the alternate position reduces opening to a selected partial
opening width.
AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES 084229-7
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85% PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
2.5 HARDWARE
A. General: Provide units in sizes and types recommended by automatic entrance and hardware
manufacturers for entrances and uses indicated. Finish exposed parts to match door
finish unless otherwise indicated.
B. Breakaway Device for Power-Operated Doors: Provide breakaway device that allows door to
swing out in direction of egress to full 90 degrees from any operating position. Maximum force
to open door shall be 50 lbf according to BHMA A156.10. Interrupt powered operation of door
operator while in breakaway mode.
C. Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable components.
1. Sliding Type: AAMA 701, made of wool, polypropylene, or nylon woven pile with
nylon-fabric or aluminum-strip backing.
2. Weather Sweeps: Manufacturer's standard nylon brush sweep mounted to underside of
door bottom.
2.6 FABRICATION
A. General: Factory fabricate automatic entrance components to designs, sizes, and thicknesses
indicated and to comply with indicated standards.
1. Form aluminum shapes before finishing.
2. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or
discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces
by descaling or grinding.
3. Use concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. Where exposed fasteners are
required,use countersunk Phillips flat-head machine screws,finished to match framing.
a. Where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural
movements,wind loads,or vibration,use self-locking devices.
b. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.
4. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by
painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by
manufacturer for this purpose.
B. Framing: Provide automatic entrances as prefabricated assemblies. Complete fabrication,
assembly,finishing,hardware application,and other work before shipment to Project site.
1. Fabricate tubular and channel frame assemblies with manufacturer's standard welded or
mechanical joints. Provide subframes and reinforcement as required for a complete
system to support required loads.
2. Perform fabrication operations in manner that prevents damage to exposed finish
surfaces.
3. Form profiles that are sharp,straight,and free of defects or deformations.
4. Provide components with concealed fasteners and anchor and connection devices.
AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES 084229-8
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
5. Fabricate components with accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered to produce
hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.
6. Fabricate exterior components to drain water passing joints and condensation and
moisture occurring or migrating within system to the exterior.
7. Provide anchorage and alignment brackets for concealed support of assembly from
building structure.
8. Allow for thermal expansion of exterior units.
C. Doors: Factory fabricated and assembled in profiles indicated. Reinforce as required to support
imposed loads and for installing hardware.
D. Door Operators: Factory fabricated and installed in headers,including adjusting and testing.
E. Glazing: Fabricate framing with minimum glazing edge clearances for thickness and type of
glazing indicated,according to GANA's"Glazing Manual."
F. Hardware: Factory install hardware to greatest extent possible; remove only as required for
final finishing operation and for delivery to and installation at Project site. Cut,drill,and tap for
factory-installed hardware before applying finishes.
1. Provide sliding-type weather stripping, mortised into door, at perimeter of doors and
breakaway sidelites.
2. Provide weather sweeps mounted to underside of door bottoms of exterior doors.
G. Activation and Safety Devices:
1. General: Factory install devices in doors and headers as required by BHMA A156.10 for
type of door and direction of travel.
2. Install photoelectric beams in vertical jambs of sidelites,with dimension above finished
floor as follows:
a. Top Beam: 48 inches.
b. Bottom Beam: 24 inches.
3. Install photoelectric beams in sides of guide rails, with dimension above finished floor
not less than 24 inches.
2.7 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,
temporary protective covering before shipping.
C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of
approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES 084229-9
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611,AA-M12C22A31,Class II,0.010 mm or thicker.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances,header support,and other conditions affecting performance of automatic entrances.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Do not install damaged components. Fit frame joints to produce hairline joints free of
burrs and distortion. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. Seal joints watertight.
1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by
painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by
manufacturer for this purpose.
2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting
contact surfaces with bituminous paint.
B. Entrances: Install automatic entrances plumb and true in alignment with established lines and
grades without warp or rack of framing members and doors. Anchor securely in place.
1. Install surface-mounted hardware using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible.
2. Set headers,carrier assemblies, tracks, operating brackets, and guides level and true to
location with anchorage for permanent support.
3. Install components to drain water passing joints,condensation occurring within framing
members,and moisture migrating within system to exterior.
4. Level recesses for recessed thresholds using nonshrink grout.
C. Door Operators: Connect door operators to electrical power distribution system as specified in
Division 26 Sections.
D. Access-Control Devices: Connect access-control devices to access-control system as specified
in Division 28 Sections.
E. Activation and Safety Devices: Install and adjust devices to provide detection field and
functions indicated.
F. Glazing: Install glazing as specified in Division 08 Section"Glazing."
G. Sealants: Comply with requirements specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" to
provide weathertight installation.
AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES 084229- 10
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1. Set bottom-guide track system,framing members and flashings in full sealant bed.
2. Seal perimeter of framing members with sealant.
H. Signage: Apply signage on both sides of each door and breakaway sidelight as required by
referenced door standards.
I. Wiring within Automatic Entrance Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal
points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's written limitations on bending
radii. Provide and use lacing bars and distribution spools.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspection: Engage Installer's certified inspector to test and inspect automatic entrances and
prepare test and inspection reports.
1. Certified inspector shall test and inspect each automatic entrance to determine
compliance of installed systems with applicable BHMA standards.
2. Inspection Report: Certified inspector shall submit report in writing to Architect and
Contractor within 24 hours after inspection.
B. Work will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust door operators, controls, and hardware for smooth and safe operation and for
weathertight closure;comply with requirements in BHMA A156.10 and BHMA A156.19.
B. Lubricate operating hardware and other moving parts as recommended by manufacturer.
C. Readjust door operators and controls after repeated operation of completed installation
equivalent to 3 days'use by normal traffic (100 to 300 cycles). Lubricate hardware,operating
equipment,and other moving parts.
D. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion,
provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to
two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean glass and metal surfaces promptly after installation. Remove excess glazing and sealant
compounds,dirt,and other substances. Repair damaged finish to match original finish.
1. Comply with requirements in Division 08 Section"Glazing" for cleaning and maintaining
glass.
AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES 084229- 11
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a certified inspector to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and
maintain automatic entrances.
END OF SECTION 084229
AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES 084229- 12
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 087100-DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Commercial door hardware.
2. Cylinders for doors specified in other Sections.
B. See Division 08 door sections for astragals and door silencers.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Samples: For each exposed finish.
C. Product certificates.
D. Other Action Submittals:
1. Door Hardware Sets: Prepared by or under the supervision of Architectural Hardware
Consultant, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures
and diagrams.
a. Format: Use same scheduling sequence and format and use same door numbers as
in the Contract Documents.
b. Content: Include the following information:
1) Identification number, location, hand, fire rating, and material of each door
and frame.
2) Type, style, function, size, quantity, and finish of each door hardware item.
Include description and function of each lockset and exit device.
3) Complete designations of every item required for each door or opening
including name and manufacturer.
4) Description of each electrified door hardware function, including location;
sequence of operation,and interface with other building control systems.
2. Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Architectural Hardware
Consultant,detailing Owner's final keying instructions for locks.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by lock manufacturer.
DOOR HARDWARE 087100- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1. Installer's responsibilities include supplying and installing door hardware and providing a
qualified Architectural Hardware Consultant available during the course of the Work to
consult with Contractor,Architect,and Owner about door hardware and keying.
B. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is currently certified by DHI
as an Architectural Hardware Consultant and who is experienced in providing consulting
services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and extent to
that indicated for this Project.
C. Source Limitations: Provide electrified door hardware from same manufacturer as mechanical
door hardware,unless otherwise indicated. Manufacturers that perform electrical modifications
and that are listed by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction are acceptable.
D. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled
by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings
indicated,based on testing according to NFPA 252.
E. Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Incorporate keying conference
decisions into final keying schedule after reviewing door hardware keying system.
F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Deliver keys to manufacturer of key control system for subsequent delivery to Owner.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Templates: Distribute door hardware templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to
be factory prepared for installing door hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to
confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply
with indicated requirements.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion,except as follows:
a. Exit Devices: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
b. Manual Closers: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
DOOR HARDWARE 087100-2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish full-size units of door hardware described below,before installation begins, that match
products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with
labels describing contents.
1. Door Hardware: One replacement set for each type of hardware specified;i.e. 1-1/2 pair,
butts,etc.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE
A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in this Section and
as scheduled on Drawings.
1. Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, fmish or color indicated, and named
manufacturers'products.
B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive
qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated on Drawings. Products are identified by
using door hardware designations,as follows:
1. Named Manufacturers' Products: Manufacturer and product designation are listed for
each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements.
Manufacturers'names are abbreviated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Sets"Article.
2.2 HINGES,GENERAL
A. Template Requirements: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely(both leaves)into
wood doors and frames,provide only template-produced units.
B. Hinge Base Metal: Unless otherwise indicated,provide the following:
1. Exterior Hinges: Brass,with stainless-steel pin body and brass protruding heads.
2. Interior Hinges: Brass,with stainless-steel pin body and brass protruding heads.
3. Hinges for Fire-Rated Assemblies: Stainless steel,with stainless-steel pin.
C. Nonremovable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove in
hinge pin,prevents removal of pin while door is closed;for outswinging exterior doors.
D. Fasteners: Comply with the following:
1. Machine Screws: For metal doors and frames. Install into drilled and tapped holes.
2. Wood Screws: For wood doors and frames.
3. Threaded-to-the-Head Wood Screws: For fire-rated wood doors.
DOOR HARDWARE 087100-3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
4. Screws: Phillips flat-head; machine screws (drilled and tapped holes) for metal doors.
Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges.
2.3 HINGES
A. Butts and Hinges: BHMA A156.1.
B. Template Hinge Dimensions: BHMA A156.7.
C. Available Manufacturers:
1. Baldwin Hardware Corporation(BH).
2. Bommer Industries, Inc. (BI).
3. Cal-Royal Products,Inc. (CRP).
4. Hager Companies(HAG).
5. Lawrence Brothers, Inc. (LB).
6. McKinney Products Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company(MCK).
7. PBB, Inc. (PBB).
8. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div.of The Stanley Works(STH).
2.4 LOCKS AND LATCHES,GENERAL
A. Accessibility Requirements: Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping,
pinching,or twisting of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf.
B. Latches and Locks for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Latches shall not
require more than 15 lbf to release the latch. Locks shall not require use of a key, tool, or
special knowledge for operation.
C. Lock Trim:
1. Levers: Schlage"Jupiter."
2. Dummy Trim: Match lever lock trim and escutcheons.
D. Lock Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts required for labeled fire
doors.
E. Backset: 2-3/4 inches,unless otherwise indicated.
F. Strikes: Manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latchbolt or lock bolt, with
curved lip extended to protect frame,finished to match door hardware set.
2.5 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES
A. Lock Functions: Function numbers and descriptions indicated in door hardware sets comply
with the following:
1. Bored Locks: BHMA A156.2.
DOOR HARDWARE 087100-4
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
B. Bored Locks: BHMA A156.2,Grade 1; Series 4000.
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. Best Access Systems; Div. of The Stanley Works(BAS).
b. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company
(CR).
c. Schlage Commercial Lock Division;an Ingersoll-Rand Company(SCH).
d. Yale Commercial Locks and Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company
(YAL).
2.6 EXIT LOCKS AND EXIT ALARMS
A. Exit Locks: BHMA A156.29, Grade 1, surface mounted, battery powered, housed in metal
case; with red-and-white lettering reading "EMERGENCY EXIT PUSH TO OPEN--ALARM
WILL SOUND."
B. Stand-Alone Exit Alarms: BHMA A156.29,Grade 1,surface mounted on door.
C. Available Manufacturers:
1. Detex Corporation(DTX).
2. SARGENT Manufacturing Company;an ASSA ABLOY Group company(SGT).
2.7 DOOR BOLTS
A. Bolt Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts required for labeled fire
doors.
B. Dustproof Strikes: BHMA A156.16,Grade 1.
C. Surface Bolts: BHMA A156.16,Grade 1.
1. Flush Bolt Heads: Minimum of 1/2-inch- diameter rods of brass, bronze, or stainless
steel with minimum 12-inch-long rod for doors up to 84 inches in height. Provide longer
rods as necessary for doors exceeding 84 inches.
2. Available Manufacturers:
a. Glynn-Johnson;an Ingersoll-Rand Company(GJ).
b. Hager Companies(HAG).
c. IVES Hardware;an Ingersoll-Rand Company(IVS).
D. Manual Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.16,Grade 1; designed for mortising into door edge.
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. Glynn-Johnson;an Ingersoll-Rand Company(GJ).
b. Hager Companies(HAG).
DOOR HARDWARE 087100-5
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
c. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company(IVS).
2.8 EXIT DEVICES
A. Exit Devices: BHMA A 156.3,Grade 1.
B. Accessibility Requirements: Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping,
pinching,or twisting of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf.
C. Exit Devices for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Exit devices shall not
require more than 15 lbf to release the latch. Locks shall not require use of a key, tool, or
special knowledge for operation.
D. Panic Exit Devices: Listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, for panic protection,based on testing according to UL 305.
E. Fire Exit Devices: Devices complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing
and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,for fire and panic protection,
based on testing according to UL 305 and NFPA 252.
F. Outside Trim: Lever with cylinder; material and finish to match locksets, unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Match design for locksets and latchsets,unless otherwise indicated.
G. Through Bolts: For exit devices and trim on metal doors.
H. Available Manufacturers:
1. DORMA Architectural Hardware; Member of The DORMA Group North America
(DAH).
2. Dor-O-Matic; an Ingersoll-Rand Company(DOR).
3. Von Duprin;an Ingersoll-Rand Company(VD).
2.9 LOCK CYLINDERS
A. Standard Lock Cylinders: BHMA A 156.5,Grade 1.
B. Cylinders: Manufacturer's standard tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless
steel,or nickel silver,and complying with the following:
1. Number of Pins: Six.
C. Permanent Cores: Manufacturer's standard; finish face to match lockset; with interchangeable
cores.
D. Construction Keying: Comply with the following:
DOOR HARDWARE 087100-6
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1. Construction Master Keys: Provide cylinders with feature that permits voiding of
construction keys without cylinder removal. Provide 10 construction master keys.
2. Construction Cores: Provide construction cores that are replaceable by permanent cores.
Provide 10 construction master keys.
a. Furnish permanent cores to Owner for installation.
E. Manufacturer: Same manufacturer as for locks and latches.
F. Available Manufacturers:
I1. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware;an ASSA ABLOY Group company(CR).
2. SARGENT Manufacturing Company;an ASSA ABLOY Group company(SGT).
3. Schlage Commercial Lock Division;an Ingersoll-Rand Company(SCH).
4. Yale Commercial Locks and Hardware;an ASSA ABLOY Group company(YAL).
I2.10 KEYING
A. Keying System: Factory registered, complying with guidelines in BHMA A156.28, -
Appendix A. Incorporate decisions made in keying conference into grand master key system.
I
B. Keys: Nickel silver,permanently inscribed with a visual key control number and including the
notation"DO NOT DUPLICATE."
1. Quantity: In addition to one extra key blank for each lock,provide three cylinder change
keys and five grand master keys.
2.11 KEY CONTROL SYSTEM
A. Key Control Cabinet: BHMA A156.5,Grade 1 wall-mounted metal cabinet with baked-enamel
finish; containing key-holding hooks, labels, 2 sets of key tags with self-locking key holders,
key-gathering envelopes, and temporary and permanent markers; with key capacity of 150
percent of the number of locks.
B. Cross-Index System: Single-index system for recording key information. Include three receipt
forms for each key-holding hook. Set up by Installer.
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. Key Control Systems,Inc.(KCS). —
b. Lund Equipment Co., Inc.(LUN).
c. MMF Industries(MMF).
d. Sunroc Corporation(SUN).
C. Key Control System Software: BHMA A156.5, Grade 1; multiple-index system for recording
and reporting key-holder listings, tracking keys and lock and key history, and printing receipts
for transactions. Include instruction manual.
DOOR HARDWARE 087100-7
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. Best Access Systems; Div.of The Stanley Works(BAS).
b. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company
(CR).
2.12 OPERATING TRIM
A. Standard: BHMA A 156.6.
B. Materials: Fabricate from brass,unless otherwise indicated.
C. Available Manufacturers:
1. Hager Companies(HAG).
2. IVES Hardware;an Ingersoll-Rand Company(IVS).
3. Rockwood Manufacturing Company(RM).
2.13 ACCESSORIES FOR PAIRS OF DOORS
A. Carry-Open Bars: Provide carry-open bars for inactive leaves of pairs of doors unless automatic
or self-latching bolts are used.
1. Material: Polished brass or bronze,with strike plate.
2.14 CLOSERS
A. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements:
1. Interior,Non-Fire-Rated Hinged Doors: 5 lbf applied perpendicular to door.
2. Sliding or Folding Doors: 5 lbf applied parallel to door at latch.
3. Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Door Closers for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Door closers shall not
require more than 30 lbf to set door in motion and not more than 15 lbf to open door to
minimum required width.
C. Hold-Open Closers/Detectors: Coordinate and interface integral smoke detector and closer
device with fire alarm system.
D. Flush Floor Plates: Provide finish cover plates for floor closers unless thresholds are indicated.
Match door hardware finish,unless otherwise indicated.
E. Recessed Floor Plates: Provide recessed floor plates with insert of floor finish material for floor
closers unless thresholds are indicated. Provide extended closer spindle to accommodate
thickness of floor finish.
DOOR HARDWARE 087100-8
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
F. Size of Units: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's written
recommendations for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and
anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions
and requirements for opening force.
G. Surface Closets: BHMA A156.4,Grade 1. Provide type of arm required for closer to be
located on non-public side of door,unless otherwise indicated.
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. Dor-O-Matic;an Ingersoll-Rand Company(DOR).
b. LCN Closers;an Ingersoll-Rand Company(LCN).
c. Norton Door Controls;an ASSA ABLOY Group company(NDC).
H. Coordinators: BHMA A156.3.
2.15 STOPS AND HOLDERS
A. Stops and Bumpers: BHMA A156.16,Grade 1.
1. Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are scheduled or indicated.
Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. Where floor or wall stops are
not appropriate,provide overhead holders.
B. Silencers for Door Frames: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1; neoprene or rubber; fabricated for
drilled-in application to frame.
C. Available Manufacturers:
1. Glynn-Johnson;an Ingersoll-Rand Company(GJ).
2. Hager Companies(HAG).
3. IVES Hardware;an Ingersoll-Rand Company(IVS).
4. Rockwood Manufacturing Company(RM).
5. SARGENT Manufacturing Company;an ASSA ABLOY Group company(SGT).
6. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div.of The Stanley Works(STH).
2.16 DOOR GASKETING
A. Standard: BHMA A156.22.
B. General: Provide continuous weather-strip gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke,
light,or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated or scheduled. Provide noncorrosive
fasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated.
1. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb,forming seal between door and frame.
2. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles,forming seal when doors are closed.
3. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is
closed.
DOOR HARDWARE 087100-9
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
C. Smoke-Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 105 that are listed and labeled
by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for smoke-
control ratings indicated,based on testing according to UL 1784.
1. Provide smoke-labeled gasketing on 20-minute-rated doors and on smoke-labeled doors.
D. Sound-Rated Gasketing: Assemblies that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting
agency,for sound ratings indicated,based on testing according to ASTM E 1408.
E. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strips are
easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.
F. Gasketing Materials: ASTM D 2000 and AAMA 701/702.
G. Available Manufacturers:
1. National Guard Products(NGP).
2. Pemko Manufacturing Co.(PEM).
3. Reese Enterprises(RE).
2.17 THRESHOLDS
A. Standard: BHMA A156.21.
B. Accessibility Requirements: Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. Provide
thresholds not more than 1/2 inch high.
C. Thresholds for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Maximum 1/2 inch high.
D. Available Manufacturers:
1. National Guard Products(NGP).
2. Pemko Manufacturing Co. (PEM).
3. Reese Enterprises(RE).
2.18 FABRICATION
A. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal, fabricated by forming method
indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness.
Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and
BHMA A156.18. Do not furnish manufacturer's standard materials or forming methods if
different from specified standard.
B. Fasteners: Provide screws according to commercially recognized industry standards for
application intended, except aluminum fasteners are not permitted. Provide Phillips flat-head
screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware,unless otherwise indicated.
1. Comply with NFPA 80 for fasteners of door hardware in fire-rated applications.
DOOR HARDWARE 087100- 10
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
C. Finishes: BHMA A156.18,as indicated in door hardware sets.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Steel Doors and Frames: Comply with DHI A115 Series. Drill and tap doors and frames for
surface-applied door hardware according to ANSI A250.6.
B. Wood Doors: Comply with DHI Al 1 5-W Series.
C. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated as follows unless otherwise
indicated or required to comply with governing regulations.
1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural
Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."
2. Custom Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Builders'
Hardware for Custom Steel Doors and Frames."
3. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for
Wood Flush Doors."
D. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where
cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be
painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface
protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 09 Sections. Do not install
surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved.
E. Key Control System: Tag keys and place them on markers and hooks in key control system
cabinet,as determined by final keying schedule.
F. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying
with requirements specified in Division 07 Section"Joint Sealants."
G. Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure
proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as
intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and
ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.
1. Door Closers: Unless otherwise required by authorities having jurisdiction,adjust sweep
period so that,from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 3 seconds
to move to a point 3 inches from the latch,measured to the leading edge of the door.
DOOR HARDWARE 087100- 11
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant: Owner will engage a qualified independent
Architectural Hardware Consultant to perform inspections and to prepare inspection reports.
END OF SECTION 087100
DOOR HARDWARE 087100- 12
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 088000-GLAZING
PART l - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those
specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this
Section:
1. Windows.
2. Doors.
3. Storefront framing.
4. Interior borrowed lites.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit that contains dehydrated air or a
specified gas.
B. Deterioration of Coated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the
manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining
and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include
peeling,cracking,and other indications of deterioration in metallic coating.
C. Deterioration of Insulating Glass: Failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is attributed to
the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for-
maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions.
Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of
glass.
D. Deterioration of Laminated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the
manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining
and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include
edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes
exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated-glass standard.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wind
and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage
attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of
sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other
defects in construction.
GLAZING 088000- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.
B. Green Globe Submittals:
1. Product Data: For field-applied glazing sealants, documentation including printed
statement of VOC content.
2. For glazing sealants, documentation indicating that products are low-VOC emitting, non-
toxic and chemically inert.
C. Samples: 12-inch- square, for each type of glass product indicated, other than monolithic clear
float glass.
D. Glazing Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Safety Glazing Products: Comply with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer's standard form,
made out to Owner and signed by coated-glass manufacturer agreeing to replace coated-glass
units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to
Project site,within specified warranty period indicated below.
1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products
specified or a prior approved equal.
2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS
A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036,Type I,Quality-Q3,Class I (clear)unless otherwise indicated.
1. Manufactures: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide materials from one of
the following manufactures:
GLAZING 088000- 2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
a. AFG Industries,Inc.; Krystal Klear.
b. Guardian Industries Corp.;Ultrawhite.
c. Pilkington North America; Optiwhite.
d. PPG Industries,Inc.; Starphire.
B. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I (transparent flat glass); Quality-Q3; of class,
kind,and condition indicated.
1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion
parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed,unless otherwise indicated.
2. Provide Kind HS (heat-strengthened) float glass in place of annealed float glass where
needed to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass lites
and to comply with glass design requirements specified in Part 1 "Performance
Requirements"Article.
3. For uncoated glass,comply with requirements for Condition A.
4. For coated vision glass, comply with requirements for Condition C (other uncoated
glass).
2.3 GLAZING GASKETS
A. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of material indicated below,
complying with standards referenced with name of elastomer indicated below, and of profile
and hardness required to maintain watertight seal:
1. Neoprene,ASTM C 864.
2. EPDM,ASTM C 864.
3. Silicone,ASTM C 1115.
4. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber,ASTM C 1115.
5. Any material indicated above.
B. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed-cell, integral-skinned gaskets of
material indicated below; complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, black; and of profile and
hardness required to maintain watertight seal:
1. Neoprene.
2. EPDM.
3. Silicone.
4. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber.
5. Any material indicated above.
2.4 GLAZING SEALANTS
A. General: Provide products of type indicated,complying with the following requirements:
1. Compatibility: Select glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with
other materials they will contact, including glass products and glazing channel substrates,
under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer
based on testing and field experience.
GLAZING 088000-3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for
selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at
time of installation.
B. Elastomeric Glazing Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for
each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing
ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint
substrates.
1. Single-component neutral-curing silicone glazing sealants.
C. Glazing Sealants for Fire-Resistive Glazing Products: Identical to products used in test
assemblies to obtain fire-protection rating.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS
A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing
standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application
indicated,and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.
B. Cleaners,Primers,and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.
C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or
minus 5.
D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore,Type A durometer hardness
required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass liter in place for installation indicated.
E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side
walking).
F. Smoke baffle shoe C. R. Laurence Co.; CRL brushed stainless smoke baffle shoe for 1-1/2 inch
tempered glass. See Drawings for soffit detail and locations.
2.6 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS
A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and
face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of
product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance
requirements.
2.7 MONOLITHIC-GLASS TYPES
A. Glass Type Clear float glass
I. Thickness: 1/4 inch thick.
2. Provide safety glazing labeling.
GLAZING 088000-4
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
B. Glass Type Clear fully tempered float glass.
1. Thickness: 1/4 inch thick.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 GLAZING
A. General: Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants,
gaskets,and other glazing materials,unless more stringent requirements are indicated,including
those in referenced glazing publications.
1. Glazing channel dimensions, as indicated on Drawings,provide necessary bite on glass,
minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable
tolerances. Adjust as required by Project conditions during installation.
2. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged
glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass
with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and
impair performance and appearance.
3. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by
preconstruction sealant-substrate testing.
4. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing
publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course
of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.
5. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.
6. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches.
7. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving
sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and
according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.
B. Tape Glazing: Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed
edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops. Install tapes continuously,but
not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening.
1. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs.
Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills.
2. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not
lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.
3. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant.
4. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting
dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of
removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of
openings.
5. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.
C. Gasket Glazing (Dry): Fabricate compression gaskets in lengths recommended by gasket
manufacturer to fit openings exactly,with allowance for stretch during installation.
GLAZING 088000-5
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in
place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.
2. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression
gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place
against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward
centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing
bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket
manufacturer.
3. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.
3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers
to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove
nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces. Protect glass from contact with contaminating
substances resulting from construction operations, including weld splatter. If, despite such
protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances
immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer.
B. Remove and replace glass that is broken,chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from
natural causes,accidents,and vandalism,during construction period.
END OF SECTION 088000
GLAZING 088000- 6
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 092216-NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes non-load-bearing steel framing members for the following applications:
1. Interior framing systems(e.g.,supports for partition walls, framed soffits, furring,etc.).
2. Interior suspension systems(e.g.,supports for ceilings,suspended soffits,etc.).
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Green Globe Submittals:
1. Product Data: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating
percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. Include
statement indicating cost for each product having recycled content.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate non-
load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in
assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.
B. Sound Transmission Characteristics: For STC-rated assemblies that incorporate non-load-
bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly
indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent
testing agency.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING,GENERAL
A. Framing Members,General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.
1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, unless
otherwise indicated.
2. Protective Coating: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant zinc coating, unless
otherwise indicated.
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS
A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of
preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.
2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEM COMPONENTS
A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch- diameter
wire,or double strand of 0.0475-inch-diameter wire.
B. Hanger Attachments to Concrete:
1. Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with holes or loops for attaching
wire hangers and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 5 times that
imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 by an
independent testing agency.
a. Type: Post-installed,expansion anchor.
2. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Suitable for application indicated, fabricated from
corrosion-resistant materials with clips or other devices for attaching hangers of type
indicated, and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that
imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190 by an
independent testing agency.
C. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M,Class 1 zinc coating,soft temper,0.162-inch diameter.
D. Flat Hangers: Steel sheet, 1 by 3/16 inch by length indicated.
E. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of 0.0538
inch and minimum 1/2-inch-wide flanges.
1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
F. Furring Channels(Furring Members):
1. Cold-Rolled Channels: 0.0538-inch bare-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- wide
flanges,3/4 inch deep.
2. Steel Studs: ASTM C 645.
a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch or as noted-on Drawings.
b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
3. Hat-Shaped,Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645,7/8 inch deep.
a. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch or as noted on Drawings.
4. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- deep members designed to reduce sound
transmission.
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216-2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
a. Configuration: Hat shaped.
G. Grid Suspension System for Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system composed of main
beams and cross-furring members that interlock.
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following:
a. Armstrong World Industries,Inc.;Drywall Grid Systems.
b. Chicago Metallic Corporation;640-C Drywall Furring System.
c. USG Corporation;Drywall Suspension System.
2.4 STEEL FRAMING FOR FRAMED ASSEMBLIES
A. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.
1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch or as indicated on Drawings.
B. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated,provide the following:
1. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes
applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in
thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.
a. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may
be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following:
1) Steel Network Inc.(The);VertiTrack VTD Series.
2) Superior Metal Trim;Superior Flex Track System(SFT).
C. Firestop Track: As specified in Division 07 Section"Fire-Resistive Joint Systems."
D. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width
indicated.
1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.027 inch.
E. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: 0.0538-inch bare-steel thickness,with minimum 1/2-inch-wide
flanges.
1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches.
2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches,0.068-inch-thick,galvanized steel.
F. Hat-Shaped,Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.
1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch.
2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
G. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch-deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound
transmission.
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216-3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1. Configuration: Hat shaped.
H. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.0538-inch bare-steel thickness,with minimum 1/2-inch-wide
flanges.
1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum bare-
steel thickness of 0.0312 inch.
3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch-
diameter wire,or double strand of 0.0475-inch-diameter wire.
I. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web,face flange of 1-1/4 inches,wall attachment
flange of 7/8 inch, minimum bare-metal thickness of 0.0179 inch, and depth required to fit
insulation thickness indicated.
2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and
other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.
B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide the following:
1. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener
penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch thick,in width to suit steel stud size.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION,GENERAL
A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754.
1. Gypsum Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 841 that apply
to framing installation.
2. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply
to framing installation.
3.2 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by
building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.
B. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:
1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling
plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system.
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216-4
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting
horizontal forces by bracing,countersplaying,or other equally effective means.
2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger
spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension
system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of
trapezes or equivalent devices.
a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within
performance limits established by referenced installation standards.
3. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck.
4. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts
that extend through forms.
5. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck.
6. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts,pipes,or conduit.
C. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports.
D. Seismic Bracing: Sway-brace-suspension systems with hangers used for support.
E. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems
meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other
and butt-cut to fit into wall track.
F. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet
measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between
parallel members that will receive finishes.
3.3 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES
A. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior
walls,install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.
B. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural
supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to
terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above
Iceiling.
1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports,install to
Iproduce joints at tops- of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished
assemblies.
2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames;
install runner track section(for cripple studs)at head and secure to jamb studs.
a. Install two studs at each jamb,unless otherwise indicated.
b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch
clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished
assembly.
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216-5
I
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead
structure.
3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required
for door openings,unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to
match framing required above door heads.
4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated
assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to
underside of solid structure.
a. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistance-
rated assembly indicated.
5. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated.
6. Curved Partitions:
a. Bend track to uniform curve and locate straight lengths so they are tangent to arcs.
b. Begin and end each arc with a stud, and space intermediate studs equally along
arcs. On straight lengths of not less than 2 studs at ends of arcs, place studs 6
inches o.c.
C. Direct Furring:
1. Screw to wood framing.
2. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment,
or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c.
D. Z-Furring Members:
1. Erect insulation (specified in Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation") vertically and
hold in place with Z-furring members spaced 24 inches o.c.
2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall
with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven
fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c.
3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange
extending beyond corner, on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short flange of furring
channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more
than 12 inches from corner and cut insulation to fit.
E. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than
1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.
END OF SECTION 092216
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216-6
I
I WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS
85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD, OREGON
1 SECTION 092900-GYPSUM BOARD
IPART 1 -GENERAL
I1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1 1. Interior gypsum board.
2. Tile backing panels.
I1.2 SUBMITTALS
IA. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Green Globe Submittals:
I 1. Product Data: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating
percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content.
2. Product Data: For adhesives used to laminate gypsum board panels to substrates,
documentation including printed statement of VOC content.
3. For adhesives used to laminate gypsum board panels to substrates, documentation
indicating that products are low-VOC emitting,non-toxic and chemically inert.
IC. Samples: For the following products:
1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch- long length for each trim accessory
Iindicated.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
IA. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and
construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an
independent testing agency.
B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies,provide materials and construction identical
to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to -
ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.
I
1 GYPSUM BOARD 092900- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. General: Complying with ASTM C 36/C 36M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, as applicable to
type of gypsum board indicated and whichever is more stringent.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the
following:
a. National Gypsum Company.
b. USG Corporation.
B. Regular Type:
1. Thickness: 5/8 inch or as indicated on Wall Types Schedule on Drawings.
2. Long Edges: Tapered.
C. Type X: -
1. Thickness: 5/8 inch.
2. Long Edges: Tapered.
D. Flexible Type: Manufactured to bend to fit radii and to be more flexible than standard regular-
type gypsum board of same thickness.
1. Thickness: 1/4 inch.
2. Long Edges: Tapered.
E. Ceiling Type: Manufactured to have more sag resistance than regular-type gypsum board.
1. Thickness: 1/2 inch.
2. Long Edges: Tapered.
F. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type: With moisture-and mold-resistant core and surfaces.
1. Core: Type X. 5/8 inch or as indicated on Wall Types Schedule on Drawings.
2. Long Edges: Tapered.
2.2 TILE BACKING PANELS
A. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 630/C 630M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. G-P Gypsum.
b. National Gypsum Company.
c. USG Corporation.
GYPSUM BOARD 092900-2
-- WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
2. Core: 5/8 inch,Type X.
B. Glass-Mat,Water-Resistant Backing Board:
1. Complying with ASTM C 1178/C 1178M.
2. Dens-Glass Gold by G-P Gypsum.
C. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A108.1.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following:
a. Custom Building Products;Wonderboard.
b. USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board.
2. Thickness: As indicated on Drawings.
2.3 TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
I. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc,plastic, or paper-faced
galvanized steel sheet.
2. Shapes:
a. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners.
b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
c. Expansion(control)joint.
d. 1/2-inch Radius Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges.
1) Gordon, Inc.,Ph: (800)747-8954.
B. Aluminum Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated.
2.4 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.
B. Joint Tape:
1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper.
2. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-10 glass mesh.
3. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.
C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is
compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.
1. Prefilling: At open joints or beveled panel edges,and damaged surface areas, use setting-
type taping compound.
GYPSUM BOARD 092900-3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET- GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and
trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound.
3. Fill Coat: For second coat,use setting-type, sandable topping compound.
4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type,sandable topping compound.
D. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels:
1. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Use setting-type taping compound and setting-
type,sandable topping compound.
2. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: As recommended by backing panel
manufacturer.
3. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by backer unit manufacturer.
2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and
manufacturer's written recommendations.
B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002,unless otherwise indicated.
1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from
0.033 to 0.112 inch thick.
2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by
panel manufacturer.
C. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Division 07 Section"Joint Sealants."
D. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Division 07 Section"Thermal Insulation."
E. Vapor Retarder: As specified in Division 07 Section"Thermal Insulation."
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS,GENERAL
A. Comply with ASTM C 840.
B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold
damaged.
C. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural
abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations, and trim
edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and
abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.
GYPSUM BOARD 092900-4
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
3.2 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:
1. Regular Type: Vertical surfaces,unless otherwise indicated.
2. Type X: Where required for fire-resistance-rated assembly.
3. Flexible Type: Apply in double layer at curved assemblies.
4. Ceiling Type: Ceiling surfaces.
5. Moisture-and Mold-Resistant Type: As indicated on Drawings.
3.3 APPLYING EXTERIOR GYPSUM PANELS FOR CEILINGS AND SOFFITS
A. Apply panels perpendicular to supports,with end joints staggered and located over supports.
1. Fasten with corrosion-resistant screws.
3.4 APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS
A. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Install at showers,tubs,and where indicated. Install
with 1/4-inch gap where panels abut other construction or penetrations.
B. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: Comply with manufacturer's written installation
instructions and install at locations indicated to receive tile. Install with 1/4-inch gap where
panels abut other construction or penetrations.
C. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A108.1,at where indicated.
D. Areas Not Subject to Wetting: Install regular-type gypsum wallboard panels to produce a flat
surface except at showers,tubs,and other locations indicated to receive water-resistant panels.
E. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to produce a
uniform plane across panel surfaces.
3.5 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same
fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations
approved by Architect for visual effect.
C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:
1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners,unless otherwise indicated.
2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.
3. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: Use at curved openings.
4. Radius corner bead at rounded corners
GYPSUM BOARD 092900-5
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD, OREGON
3.6 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD
A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations,
fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for
decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.
B. Prefill open joints or beveled edges,and damaged surface areas.
C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended
for tape.
D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below:
1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas,concealed areas,and where indicated.
2. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view,unless otherwise indicated.
a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 09 Sections.
E. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panels: Finish according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
F. Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight,
construction,and other causes during remainder of the construction period.
B. Remove and replace panels that are wet,moisture damaged,and mold damaged.
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration,sagging,or irregular shape.
2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
END OF SECTION 092900
GYPSUM BOARD 092900-6
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 093000-TILING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Ceramic mosaic tile.
2. Quarry tile.
3. Glazed wall tile.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for monolithic slab finishes specified for
tile substrates.
2. Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board" for cementitious backer units, glass-mat, water-
resistant backer board.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of tile and tile pattern. Show widths, details,and
locations of expansion,contraction,control,and isolation joints.
C. Samples:
1. Each type,composition,color,and finish of tile.
2. Assembled samples with grouted joints for each type, composition, color, and finish of
tile.
3. Stone thresholds in 6-inch lengths.
D. Green Globe Submittals:
1. Product Certificate: Indicate that the tile is a regional material, show location of material
manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest or recovery for raw material. Include
statement of distance to the Project and percentage by weight that is considered regional.
1.3 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount
installed, for each type,composition,color,pattern,and size indicated.
TILING 093000- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 01 Section"Project Management and Coordination."
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for
product selection:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the products specified on
Drawings.
2.2 TILE PRODUCTS
A. Tile shall be purchased and installed by Contractor. All setting and grouting materials shall be
furnished and installed by Contractor.
2.3 SETTING AND GROUTING MATERIALS
A. Available Manufacturers:
1. DAP,Inc.
2. MAPEI Corporation.
3. TEC Specialty Products Inc. -
B. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar(Thin Set): ANSI Al 18.4.
I. For wall applications,provide nonsagging mortar.
C. Standard Epoxy(for floors)Sanded Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6,color as indicated.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Elastomeric Sealants: Elastomeric sealants of base polymer and characteristics indicated that
comply with applicable requirements in Division 07 Section"Joint Sealants."
1. One-Part, Mildew-Resistant Silicone: ASTM C 920; Type S; Grade NS; Class 25;
Uses NT, G, A, and, as applicable to nonporous joint substrates indicated, 0; formulated
with fungicide, intended for in-service exposures of high humidity and extreme
temperatures.
a. Available Products:
TILING 093000-2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1) Dow Corning Corporation;Dow Corning 786.
2) GE Silicones; Sanitary 1700.
3) Pecora Corporation;Pecora 898 Sanitary Silicone Sealant.
4) Tremco,Inc.;Tremsil 600 White.
2. Multipart, Pourable Urethane Sealant for Use T: ASTM C 920; Type M; Grade P;
Class 25;Uses T,M,A,and,as applicable to joint substrates indicated,O.
a. Available Products:
1) Bostik;Chem-Calk 550.
2) Mameco International,Inc.;Vulkem 245.
3) Pecora Corporation;NR-200 Urexpan.
4) Tremco,Inc.;THC-900.
B. Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L-shape, stainless steel; ASTM A 666, 300 Series exposed-edge
material.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Remove coatings,including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap,wax, oil,
or silicone,that are incompatible with tile-setting materials.
B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions with trowelable leveling and patching compound according
to tile-setting material manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Remove protrusions,bumps,and ridges by sanding or grinding.
D. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, use factory blended tile or blend tiles at Project
site before installing.
E. Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type or needed to
prevent grout from staining or adhering to exposed tile surfaces, precoat them with continuous
film of temporary protective coating,taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces.
3.2 INSTALLATION,GENERAL
A. ANSI Tile Installation Standards: Comply with parts of ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for
Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to types of setting and grouting materials and to
methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules.
B. TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation." Comply with
TCA installation methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules.
TILING 093000-3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
C. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete
covering without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at
obstructions,edges,and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.
D. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring
visible surfaces. Grind cut edges of tile abutting trim,fmish,or built-in items. Fit tile closely to
electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap
tile.
E. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints when
adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are same size. Lay out tile work and center tile
fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting.
Provide uniform joint widths,unless otherwise indicated.
F. Lay out tile wainscots to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated.
G. Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints during installation of
setting materials,mortar beds,and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles.
1. Locate joints in tile surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates.
2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 07 Section
"Joint Sealants."
H. Grout tile to comply with requirements of ANSI A108.10,unless otherwise indicated.
1. For chemical-resistant epoxy grouts,comply with ANSI A108.6.
I. Where indicated, install cementitious backer units and treat joints to comply with
ANSI A108.11.
J. For installations indicated below, follow procedures in ANSI A108 Series tile installation
standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage.
1. Tile floors in wet areas.
2. Tile floors composed of tiles 8 by 8 inches or larger.
3. Tile floors composed of rib-backed tiles.
K. Install tile on floors with the following joint widths:
1. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: 1/16 inch.
2. Quarry Tile: 1/4 inch.
L. Metal Edge Strips: Install at locations indicated or where exposed edge of tile flooring meets
carpet,wood,or other flooring that finishes flush with top of tile.
M. Install metal lath and scratch coat for walls to comply with ANSI A108.1A,Section 4.1.
N. Install tile on walls with the following joint widths:
1. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: 1/16 inch.
TILING 093000-4
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD, OREGON
2. Glazed Wall Tile: 1/16 inch.
3. Quarry Tile: 1/4 inch.
O. Apply grout sealer to cementitious grout joints in tile floors according to grout-sealer
manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as grout sealer has penetrated grout joints,remove
excess sealer and sealer that has gotten on tile faces by wiping with soft cloth.
3.3 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE
A. Interior floor installation on concrete;thin-set mortar; TCA F113.
1. Thin-Set Mortar: Dry-set portland cement mortar.
2. Grout: Standard sanded epoxy cement grout.
3.4 WALL TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE
A. Interior wall installation; thin-set mortar;over gypsum board;TCA W243.
1. Thin-Set Mortar: Dry-set portland cement mortar.
2. Grout: Standard unsanded cement grout.
B. Interior wall installation over glass-mat, water-resistant backer board; thin-set mortar;
TCA W245.
1. Thin-Set Mortar: Dry-set portland cement mortar.
2. Grout: Standard unsanded cement grout.
END OF SECTION 093000 -
TILING 093000-5
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 095113-ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes:
1. Acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Green Globe Submittals:
1. Product Data for Credit MR 4: For products having recycled content, documentation
indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content.
2. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For sealants,documentation including printed statement
of VOC content.
3. For ceiling systems and sealants, documentation indicating that products are low-VOC
emitting,non-toxic and chemically inert.
C. Samples: For each exposed finish.
D. Maintenance data.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics:
1. Fire-Resistance Characteristics: Where indicated, provide acoustical panel ceilings
identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by UL or
another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
a. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting
agency.
2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Acoustical panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for
Class B materials,when tested per ASTM E 84.
a. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
B. Seismic Standard: Comply with the following:
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1. Standard for Ceiling Suspension Systems Requiring Seismic Restraint: Comply with
ASTM E 580.
2. CISCA's Recommendations for Acoustical Ceilings: Comply with CISCA's
"Recommendations for Direct-Hung Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings--Seismic
Zones 0-2."
3. CISCA's Guidelines for Systems Requiring Seismic Restraint: Comply with CISCA's
"Guidelines for Seismic Restraint of Direct-Hung Suspended Ceiling Assemblies--
Seismic Zones 3&4."
4. UBC Standard 25-2, "Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and for Lay-in Panel
Ceilings."
5. ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures": Section 9,
"Earthquake Loads."
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 01 Section"Project Management And Coordination."
1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to 5 percent of quantity installed.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS,GENERAL
A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Comply with ASTM E 1264.
B. Metal Suspension System Standard: Comply with ASTM C 635.
C. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1,
"Direct Hung,"unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements.
D. Wire Hangers, Braces,and Ties: Zinc-coated carbon-steel wire;ASTM A 641/A 641M,Class 1
zinc coating,soft temper.
1. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at 3 times hanger design load (ASTM C 635,
Table I, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than
0.106-inch-diameter wire.
E. Seismic perimeter stabilizer bars,seismic struts,and seismic clips.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 -2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
F. Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated,manufacturer's
standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with seismic design requirements;
formed from sheet metal of same material, finish,and color as that used for exposed flanges of
suspension system runners.
2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING - (VIN) FOOD SERVICE
AREAS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide USG "Sheetrock
ClimaPlus"(VIN)ceiling panels as indicated on Drawings.
B. Classification: Provide panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for type and form as follows:
1. Type and Form: Type XX,other types;described as high-density,ceramic-and mineral-
base panels with scrubbable fmish,resistant to heat,moisture,and corrosive fumes.
C. Color: White.
D. LR: Not less than 077.
E. CAC: Not less than 35.
F. Edge/Joint Detail: Square.
G. Thickness: 1/2 inch.
H. Modular Size: 24 by 24 inches and 24 by 48 inches as indicated on Drawings.
2.3 ACOUSTICAL PANELS FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING - (ACT) - NON FOOD
SERVICE AREAS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide USGS "F"
Fissured or a comparable product by one of the following:
1. Armstrong World Industries,Inc.
2. Chicago Metallic Corporation.
3. Tectum Inc.
B. Classification: Provide panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for type and form as follows:
1. Type and Form: Type III,mineral base with painted finish;Form 4,cast or molded.
C. Color: White.
D. LR: Not less than.79
E. NRC: Not less than.7,Type E-400 mounting per ASTM E 795.
F. CAC: Not less than 35.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113-3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
G. Edge/Joint Detail: Shadow line.
H. Thickness: 3/4 inch.
I. Modular Size: 24 by 48 inches.
2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following:
1. Chicago Metallic Corporation.
2. USG Interiors, Inc.
3. Or prior approved equal.
B. Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet,
prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip galvanized according to
ASTM A 653/A 653M,not less than G30 coating designation,with prefinished 15/16-inch-wide
metal caps on flanges.
1. Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty system.
2. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override(stepped)type.
3. Cap Material: Steel or aluminum cold-rolled sheet.
a. At ACT Ceilings: Steel.
b. At VIN Ceilings: Aluminum wrapped steel.
4. Cap Finish: Painted white.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with ASTM C 636 and seismic design requirements indicated, per manufacturer's
written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook."
B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at
opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders.
C. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members, plumb and free from contact with
insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum. Splay hangers only where required and, if
permitted with fire-resistance-rated ceilings, to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal
forces by bracing,countersplaying, or other equally effective means. Where width of ducts and
other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location
of hangers, use trapezes or equivalent devices. When steel framing does not permit installation
of hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for
attachment of hanger wires.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 -4
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck; anchor into
concrete slabs.
2. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs or to steel roof deck.
D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and
where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. Screw attach moldings to substrate at
intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not more than 3 inches from ends, leveling with
ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet. Miter corners accurately and
connect securely.
E. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another.
Remove and replace dented,bent,or kinked members.
F. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system
runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat,
precise fit.
END OF SECTION 095113
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 5
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 096513 -RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Resilient base.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Green Globe Submittals:
1. Product Data: For adhesives,documentation including printed statement of VOC content.
2. For adhesives, documentation indicating that products are low-VOC emitting, non-toxic
and chemically inert.
3. Product Data: For adhesives,documentation including printed statement of VOC content.
C. Samples: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer's standard-size Samples but not
less than 12 inches long,of each resilient product color,texture,and pattern required.
1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer in spaces to receive
resilient products.
B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by
manufacturer.
C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been
completed.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 RESILIENT BASE-VB1 AND VB2
A. Resilient Base:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the
following:
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
a. Burke Mercer Flooring Products; Division of Burke Industries, Inc.
b. Johnsonite.
c. Roppe Corporation,USA.
d. Or approved equal.
B. Resilient Base Standard: ASTM F 1861.
1. Material Requirement: Type TP(rubber,thermoplastic).
2. Manufacturing Method: Group I(solid,homogeneous)or Group II(layered).
3. Style: Cove(base with toe).
C. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch.
D. VB1 Height: 6 inches.
E. VB2 Height: 4 inches.
F. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length.
G. Outside Corners: Job formed.
H. Inside Corners: Job formed.
I. Finish: As indicated on the Drawings.
J. Colors and Patterns: As indicated on Drawings.
2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or
blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for
applications indicated.
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and
substrate conditions indicated.
1. Rubber Floor Adhesives: Not more than 60 g/L.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of
resilient products.
B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching
compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 -2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
• C. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where they are to
be installed.
1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed
at least 48 hours in advance of installation.
D. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before
installation.
3.2 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.
B. Apply resilient base to walls,columns,pilasters,casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other
permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.
C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of
adjacent pieces aligned.
D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in
continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.
E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation.
3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient
products.
END OF SECTION 096513
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 -3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET- GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD, OREGON
SECTION 096723 - RESINOUS FLOORING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes resinous flooring systems with epoxy body coat(s).
1. Application Method: Troweled or screeded.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealants installed at joints in resinous flooring
systems.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer's technical data,
application instructions,and recommendations for each resinous flooring component required.
B. Green Globe Submittals:
1. Product Data: For liquid-applied flooring components, documentation including printed
statement of VOC content.
2. For resinous flooring systems, documentation indicating that products are low-VOC
emitting, non-toxic and chemically inert.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of exposed finish required.
D. Samples for Verification: For each resinous flooring system required, 6 inches square, applied
to a rigid backing by Installer for this Project.
E. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that installers comply with specified
requirements.
F. Material Certificates: For each resinous flooring component, signed by manufacturer.
G. Maintenance Data: For resinous flooring to include in maintenance manuals.
RESINOUS FLOORING 096723 - 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer (applicator) who is experienced in
applying resinous flooring systems similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for
this Project, whose work has resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service
performance,and who is acceptable to resinous flooring manufacturer.
1. Engage an installer who employs only persons trained and approved by resinous flooring
manufacturer for applying resinous flooring systems indicated.
2. Engage an installer who is certified in writing by resinous flooring manufacturer as
qualified to apply resinous flooring systems indicated.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain primary resinous flooring materials, including primers, resins,
hardening agents, grouting coats, and topcoats, through one source from a single manufacturer.
Provide secondary materials, including patching and fill material, joint sealant, and repair
materials,of type and from source recommended by manufacturer of primary materials.
1 5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in original packages and containers, with seals unbroken, bearing
manufacturer's labels indicating brand name and directions for storage and mixing with other
components.
B. Store materials to prevent deterioration from moisture, heat, cold, direct sunlight, or other
detrimental effects.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions
for substrate temperature, ambient temperature, moisture, ventilation, and other conditions
affecting resinous flooring application.
B. Lighting: Provide permanent lighting or, if permanent lighting is not in place, simulate
permanent lighting conditions during resinous flooring application.
C. Close spaces to traffic during resinous flooring application and for not less than 24 hours after
application,unless manufacturer recommends a longer period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RESINOUS FLOORING
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following:
1. Stonhard, Inc.; Stone Shield HR1.
2. Or prior approved equal.
RESINOUS FLOORING 096723 -2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
B. System Characteristics:
1. Color and Pattern: 3M Colorquartz Aggregate as indicated on the drawings.
2. Integral Cove Base: 6 inches high.
3. Overall System Thickness: 1/4 inch to 3/16 inch.
4. Anti-bacterial Agent: System shall have integral anti-bacterial agent.
C. System Components: Manufacturer's standard components that are compatible with each other
and as follows:
1. Body Coat(s):
a. Resin: Epoxy.
b. Application Method: Troweled or screeded.
1) Thickness of Coats: 1/8 inch.
2) Number of Coats: Three.
c. Aggregates: Manufacturer's standard.
2. Primer: Type recommended by manufacturer for substrate and body coat(s)indicated.
3. Reinforcing Membrane: Flexible resin formulation that is recommended by manufacturer
for substrate and primer and body coat(s) indicated and that prevents substrate cracks
from reflecting through resinous flooring.
2.2 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Patching and Fill Material: Resinous product of or approved by resinous flooring manufacturer
and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated.
B. Joint Sealant: Type recommended or produced by resinous flooring manufacturer for type of
service and joint condition indicated.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. General: Prepare and clean substrates according to resinous flooring manufacturer's written
instructions for substrate indicated. Provide clean, dry, and neutral Ph substrate for resinous
flooring application.
B. Concrete Substrates: Provide sound concrete surfaces free of laitance, glaze, efflorescence,
curing compounds, form-release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil, and other contaminants
incompatible with resinous flooring.
1. Repair damaged and deteriorated concrete according to resinous flooring manufacturer's
written recommendations.
RESINOUS FLOORING 096723 -3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD, OREGON
2. Verify that concrete substrates are dry.
C. Resinous Materials: Mix components and prepare materials according to resinous flooring
manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Use patching and fill material to fill holes and depressions in substrates according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Treat control joints and other nonmoving substrate cracks to prevent cracks from reflecting
through resinous flooring according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
3.2 APPLICATION
A. General: Apply components of resinous flooring system according to manufacturer's written
instructions to produce a uniform, monolithic wearing surface of thickness indicated.
1. Coordinate application of components to provide optimum adhesion of resinous flooring
system to substrate,and optimum intercoat adhesion.
2. Cure resinous flooring components according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Prevent contamination during application and curing processes.
3. At substrate expansion and isolation joints, provide joint in resinous flooring to comply
with resinous flooring manufacturer's written recommendations.
a. Apply joint sealant to comply with manufacturer's written recommendations.
B. Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturer's recommended spreading rate.
C. Apply reinforcing membrane to substrate cracks.
D. Integral Cove Base: Apply cove base mix to wall surfaces before applying flooring. Apply
according to manufacturer's written instructions and details including those for taping, mixing,
priming, troweling,sanding,and topcoating of cove base. Round internal and external corners.
E. Apply troweled or screeded body coat(s) in thickness indicated for flooring system. Hand or
power trowel and grout to fill voids. When cured,sand to remove trowel marks and roughness.
F. Apply grout coat, of type recommended by resinous flooring manufacturer to fill voids in
surface of final body coat and to produce wearing surface indicated.
G. Apply topcoat(s) in number of coats indicated for flooring system and at spreading rates
recommended in writing by manufacturer.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Material Sampling: Owner may at any time and any number of times during resinous flooring
application require material samples for testing for compliance with requirements.
RESINOUS FLOORING 096723 -4
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1. If test results show applied materials do not comply with specified requirements,pay for
testing, remove noncomplying materials, prepare surfaces coated with unacceptable
materials, and reapply flooring materials to comply with requirements.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A. Protect resinous flooring from damage and wear during the remainder of construction period.
Use protective methods and materials, including temporary covering, recommended in writing
by resinous flooring manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 096723
RESINOUS FLOORING 096723 - 5
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 099123 -INTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on interior substrates.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing" for shop_priming of metal substrates with
primers specified in this Section.
2. Core and Shell Specifications for surface preparation and the application of paint systems
on exterior substrates.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application
instructions.
B. Green Globe Submittals:
1. Product Data: For paints and coatings,including printed statement of VOC content.
2. For paints and coatings, documentation indicating that they are low-VOC emitting, non-
toxic and chemically inert.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat.
1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square.
2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system.
3. Label each coat of each Sample. —
4. Label each Sample for location and application area.
E. Product List: For each product indicated,include the following:
1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same
designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.
2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in
Part 2,with the proposed product highlighted.
INTERIOR PAINTING 099123- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Paint: 5 percent,but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 01 Section"Project Management and Coordination."
B. Mockups: Construct full-sized mockup to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality
standards for materials and execution.
1. Build mockup complete with anchors,connections,and all accessories.
2. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undamaged at time of
Substantial Completion.
3. Approval of mockupi does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
Documents unless such deviations are specifically approved in writing.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient
temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.
1. Maintain containers in clean condition,free of foreign materials and residue.
2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.
1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are
between 50 and 95 deg F.
B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5
deg F above the dew point;or to damp or wet surfaces.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Benjamin Moore&Co.
2. ICI Paints.
INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 -2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
3. PPG Architectural Finishes,Inc.
4. Pratt&Lambert.
5. Sherwin-Williams Company(The).
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to products listed in other Part 2 articles
for the paint category indicated.
2.2 PAINT,GENERAL
A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed
in its"MPI Approved Products List."
B. Material Compatibility:
1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another
and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by
manufacturer,based on testing and field experience.
2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by
manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
C. Low-Emitting Materials: Interior paints and coatings are low-VOC emitting and non-toxic.
D. Colors: As indicated in the Drawings.
2.3 PRIMERS/SEALERS
A. Primer Sealer,Latex,Interior: MPI#50.
B. Primer,Alkali Resistant,Water Based: MPI#3.
C. Primer,Latex,for Interior Wood: MPI#39.
2.4 METAL PRIMERS
A. Primer,Rust-Inhibitive,Water Based: MPI#107.
B. Primer,Alkyd,Anti-Corrosive,for Metal: MPI#79.
2.5 WATER-BASED PAINTS
A. Latex,Interior,(Gloss Level 3-Egg Shell): MPI#52.
B. Latex,Interior,Semi-Gloss,(Gloss Level 5-semigloss): MPI#54.
INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 -3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
2.6 DRY FOG/FALL COATINGS
A. Latex Dry Fog/Fall: MPI#118.
1. VOC Content: E Range of El.
2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR I.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements
for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter
as follows:
1. Wood: 15 percent.
2. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.
C. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth.
D. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing
finishes and primers.
E. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual"
applicable to substrates indicated.
B. Remove hardware, covers,plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are
not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item,
provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.
1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to
reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.
C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust,dirt, oil, grease,
and incompatible paints and encapsulants.
1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie
coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.
INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 -4
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
D. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale,and shop primer, if any. Clean using methods
recommended in writing by paint manufacturer.
1. SSPC-SP 2,"Hand Tool Cleaning."
E. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds,bolted connections,and abraded areas of shop
paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with
SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.
F. Wood Substrates:
1. Scrape and clean knots,and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer.
2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view,and dust off
3. Prime edges,ends,faces,undersides,and backsides of wood.
4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic
wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI
Manual."
1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.
2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces.
Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture
with prime coat only.
3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar
hinged items to match exposed surfaces.
4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,
identification,performance rating,or nomenclature plates.
5. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed
or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.
B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of
same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide
sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.
C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film
has a uniform paint finish,color,and appearance.
D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness,spotting,holidays, laps,brush marks,
roller tracking,runs,sags,ropiness,or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color
breaks.
3.4 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE
A. Concrete Substrates,Nontraffic Surfaces:
INTERIOR PAINTING 099123-5
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1. Latex System: MPI INT 3.1E.
a. Prime Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat.
b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Interior latex(eggshell).
B. CMU Substrates:
1. Latex System: MPI INT 4.2A.
a. Prime Coat: Interior/exterior latex block filler.
b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Interior latex(eggshell).
C. Steel Substrates:
1. Quick-Drying Enamel System: MPI INT 5.1A.
a. Prime Coat: Quick-drying alkyd metal primer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Quick-drying enamel matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Quick-drying enamel semigloss.
2. Water-Based Dry-Fall System: MPI INT 5.1C.
a. Prime Coat: -drying alkyd metal primer.
b. Topcoat: Latex dry fog/fall.
D. Galvanized-Metal Substrates:
I. Water-Based Dry-Fall System: MPI INT 5.3H.
a. Prime Coat: Latex dry fall.
b. Topcoat: Latex dry fall.
E. Dressed Lumber Substrates:
1. Latex System: MPI INT 6.3T.
a. Prime Coat: Interior latex-based wood primer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Interior latex(eggshell).
F. Dimension Lumber Substrates,Nontraffic Surfaces:
1. Latex System: MPI INT 6.2D.
a. Prime Coat: Interior latex-based wood primer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Interior latex(eggshell).
G. Gypsum Board Substrates:
INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 -6
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1. Latex System: MPI INT 9.2A.
a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer
b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Interior latex flat(eggshell).
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. At end of each workday,remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from
Project site.
B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by
washing,scraping,or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.
C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of
other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and
leave in an undamaged condition.
D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or
defaced painted surfaces.
END OF SECTION 099123
INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 -7
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 099300- STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of wood finishes on the following
substrates:
1. Exterior Substrates:
a. Exposed dimension lumber(rough carpentry).
b. Dressed lumber(finish carpentry).
2. Interior Substrates:
a. Exposed dimension lumber(rough carpentry).
b. Dressed lumber(finish carpentry).
c. Exposed wood panel products.
d. Recovered wood products.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Green Globe Submittals:
1. Product Data: For interior stains and coatings,documentation including printed statement
of VOC content.
2. For interior stains and coatings, documentation indicating that products are low-VOC
emitting,non-toxic and chemically inert.
C. Samples: For each finish and for each color and texture required.
D. Product List: Printout of MPI's current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product
category specified in Part 2,with the product proposed for use highlighted.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. MPI Standards:
1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in its "MPI Approved
Products List."
2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural
Painting Specification Manual" for products and finish systems indicated.
STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING 099300- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 01 Section"Project Management and Coordination."
C. Mockups: Apply benchmark samples of each finish system indicated and each color selected to
verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects
and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of
each type of finish system and substrate.
a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft.
b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.
2. Final approval of stain color selections will be based on benchmark samples.
a. If preliminary stain color selections are not approved, apply additional benchmark
samples of additional stain colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.
1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix) as
materials applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1. Quantity: Furnish an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and
color applied.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS,GENERAL
A. Material Compatibility:
1. Provide materials for use within each finish system that are compatible with one another
and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by
manufacturer,based on testing and field experience.
2. For each coat in a finish system, provide products recommended in writing by
manufacturers of topcoat for use in finish system and on substrate indicated.
B. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction and, for
interior stains and finishes applied at Project site, the following VOC limits, exclusive of
colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA
Method 24); these requirements do not apply to primers, stains, and transparent finishes that are
applied in a fabrication or finishing shop:
1. Flat Primers: VOC content of not more than 50 g/L.
2. Nonflat Primers: VOC content of not more than 150 g/L.
STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING 099300-2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
3. Primers, Sealers,and Undercoaters: VOC content of not more than 200 g/L.
4. Clear Wood Finishes,Varnishes: VOC not more than 350 g/L.
5. Clear Wood Finishes, Lacquers: VOC not more than 550 g/L.
6. Shellacs,Clear: VOC not more than 730 g/L.
7. Stains: VOC not more than 250 g/L.
8. Floor Coatings: VOC not more than 100 g/L.
C. Low-Emitting Materials: Interior stains and finishes shall comply with the testing and product
are low-VOC emitting.
D. Stain Colors: Match Architect's samples and as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full
range.
2.2 WOOD FILLERS
A. Wood Filler Paste: MPI #91.
1. VOC Content: E Range of E2.
B. Exterior Latex Wood Primer: MPI#6.
1. VOC Content: E Range of E2.
C. Lacquer Sanding Sealer: MPI#84.
1. VOC Content: E Range of E2.
2.3 STAINS
A. Exterior Semitransparent Stain(Solvent Based): MPI #13.
1. VOC Content: E Range of E2.
B. Interior Wood Stain(Semitransparent): MPI #90.
1. VOC Content: E Range of E2.
2.4 POLYURETHANE FINISHES
A. Moisture-Cured Clear Polyurethane(Flat): MPI #71,Gloss Level 1.
1. VOC Content: E Range of E2.
B. Moisture-Cured Clear Polyurethane(Gloss): MPI #31.
1. VOC Content: E Range of E2.
STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING 099300- 3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET- GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
2.5 WATERBORNE ACRYLIC FINISHES
A. Waterborne Clear Acrylic(Satin): MPI#128,Gloss Level 4.
1. VOC Content: E Range of E2.
2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 2.
B. Waterborne Clear Acrylic(Semigloss): MPI#129,Gloss Level 5.
1. VOC Content: E Range of E2.
2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 2.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements
for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work.
1. Maximum Moisture Content of Wood Substrates: 15 percent when measured with an
electronic moisture meter.
2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with
existing finishes.
3. Begin finish application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and
surfaces are dry.
4. Beginning application of finish system constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrate
and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION AND APPLICATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural
Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.
B. Apply wood filler paste to open-grain woods, as defined in "MPI Architectural Painting
Specification Manual,"to produce smooth, glasslike finish.
C. Protect work of other trades against damage from finish application. Correct damage by
cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an
undamaged condition.
D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or
defaced finished wood surfaces.
3.3 EXTERIOR WOOD-FINISH-SYSTEM SCHEDULE
A. Scope will be based on final mockups of exterior wainscot and planters but is pictured as a very
light spray or brush application to provide some"weather"and patina to any new materials.
STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING 099300-4
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
B. Exposed Rough Carpentry Substrates:
1. Semitransparent Stain System: MPI EXT 6.2L.
a. Two Stain Coats: Exterior semitransparent stain(solvent based).
C. Finish Carpentry Substrates:
1. Semitransparent Stain System: MPI EXT 6.3D.
a. Two Stain Coats: Exterior semitransparent stain(solvent based).
2. Clear,Two-Component Polyurethane System: MPI EXT 6.3G.
a. Three Finish Coats: Two-component aliphatic polyurethane(clear).
3.4 INTERIOR WOOD-FINISH-SYSTEM SCHEDULE
A. Exposed Rough Carpentry Substrates: _
1. Polyurethane Varnish Over Stain System: MPI INT 6.2J.
a. Stain Coat: Interior wood stain(semitransparent).
b. Two Finish Coats: Interior,oil-modified,clear urethane satin).
B. Finish Carpentry Substrates:
1. Moisture-Cured Clear Polyurethane Over Stain System: MPI INT 6.3Y.
a. Stain Coat: Interior wood stain(semitransparent). _
b. Two Finish Coats: Moisture-cured clear polyurethane flat.
2. Clear,Two-Component Polyurethane System: MPI INT 6.3Z.
a. Two Finish Coats: Two-component aliphatic polyurethane(clear).
3. Semitransparent Stain System: MPI INT 6.3C.
a. Two Stain Coats: Exterior semitransparent stain(solvent based).
C. Exposed Wood Panel-Product Substrates:
1. Semitransparent Stain System: MPI INT 6.4C.
a. Two Stain Coats: Exterior semitransparent stain(solvent based).
END OF SECTION 099300
STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING 099300-5
1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 101100-VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Section Includes:
1. Porcelain enamel steel markerboards and chalkboards.
2. Field-applied trim.
1.2 REFERENCED STANDARDS
A. American Society for Testing Materials:
1. ASTM E84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics for Building
Materials
2. ASTM B221 Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Extruded Bars,
Rods,Wires,Profiles and Tubes
B. Porcelain Enamel Institute:
1. PEI-1002 Manual and Performance Specifications for Porcelain Enamel Writing
Surfaces.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings for each type of visual display board required.
B. Product Data: Provide technical data for materials specified. Include Material Safety Data
Sheets,when applicable.
C. Green Globe Submittals:
1. Product Data: For adhesives,documentation including printed statement of VOC content.
2. For adhesives, documentation indicating that products are low-VOC emitting, non-toxic
and chemically inert.
3. For composite wood products,documentation indicating that the product contains no urea
formaldehyde.
4. For composite wood products used in visual display units, documentation indicating that
products are low-VOC emitting,non-toxic and chemically inert.
D. Samples and color charts: Provide Manufacturer's color charts and composition samples of
face,core,backing and trim to illustrate finish,color and texture,where required.
E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Provide Manufacturer's installation instructions.
VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES 101100- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications:
1. Manufacturer shall be a firm engaged in the manufacture of visual display boards in the
United States.
2. Manufacturer shall have a minimum of 5 years experience in the manufacture of visual
display boards.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Conforms to applicable code for flame/smoke rating in tackboards in
accordance with ASTM E84.
C. Product Certifications: Provide GREENGUARD Indoor Air Quality Certifiedd' and
GREENGUARD Children and Schools sM certificates for markerboards, as applicable.
D. Operation and Maintenance: Include data on regular cleaning, stain removal, and precautions.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field measure prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication to ensure proper fit.
B. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for acclimating area for interior moisture and
temperature to approximate normal conditions.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Schedule delivery of visual boards with spaces sufficiently complete so that visual display
boards can be installed upon delivery.
B. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.
C. Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions and at temperatures and
humidity conditions recommended by manufacturer.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Submit a "Life of the Building" warranty, stating that under normal usage and maintenance, and
when installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, Claridge
porcelain enamel steel markerboard and chalkboard writing surfaces are guaranteed for the Life
of the Building. Guarantee covers replacement of defective boards but does not include cost of
removal or reinstallation.
B. Writing Surface Warranty Period: 6 years commencing on Date of Substantial Completion.
VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES 101100-2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Visual Display Board Manufacturer: Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc., Harrison,
Arkansas 72601; Toll Free: 800-434-4610; Telephone: 870-743-2200; Fax: 870-743-1908;
Email: claridge @claridgeproducts.com;website: www.claridgeproducts.com.
2.2 MATERIALS FOR MARKERBOARD AND CHALKBOARD PANELS
A. Write Surface Face Sheet: Manufactured in accordance with Porcelain Enamel Institute's
specification.
1. Shall be enameling grade cold rolled steel manufactured from a minimum of 30 percent
post-consumer and post-industrial waste.
2. Enameling grade steel shall be coated with LCS-II Porcelain Enamel by Claridge
Products and Equipment.
a. 3-Coat process shall include:
1) Bottom Ground Coat: 1.5 to 2.2 mils.
2) Top Ground Coat: 2.0 to 2.8 mils.
3) Top Cover(Color)Coat: 3.0 to 4.0 mils.
3. Firing Temperature: Enamel shall be fired at lowest possible temperatures to reduce steel
and porcelain stresses and achieve superior enamel and hardness.
4. Color: As selected by architect from manufacturer's standards. Color charts furnished
on request.
B. Writing Surface Core:
1. 7/16 inch Duracore manufactured from 100 percent reclaimed or recycled wood fiber,
including 3 percent post-consumer wood fiber. Duracore does not contain added urea-
formaldehyde resins.
C. Writing Surface Backing:
1. Aluminum sheet back.
2. Steel back.
D. Factory Framed Markerboards and Chalkboards:
1. Face Sheet: Vitracite porcelain enamel steel chalkboard.
2. Core Material: 7/16 inch Curacore.
3. Backing: Aluminum sheet back; or steel back.
4. Typical Arrangement: Type A for markerboard or chalkboard.
5. Panel Size: As indicated on Drawings and decor documentation.
6. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES 101100-3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD, OREGON
2.3 ALUMINUM TRIM
A. Trim shall be 6063 alloy grade aluminum with T5 tempering in accordance with ASTM B221,
and shall have 201-R1 satin anodize finish. (color anodize and powder coat finishes optional).
1. Field-Applied Trim:
a. Slip-on aluminum trim.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Field assembly: Field assembled,chalkboard.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Verify before installation that interior moisture and temperature approximate normal occupied
conditions.
B. Verify that wall surfaces are true and plumb and are prepared and ready to receive boards.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Deliver factory built units completely assembled and of dimensions shown in details and in
accordance with manufacturer's Shop Drawings as approved by the Architect.
B. Follow manufacturer's instructions for storage and handling of units before installation.
C. Do not install boards on damp walls or in damp and humid weather without heat in the building.
D. Install level and plumb, keeping perimeter trim straight in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
3.3 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Verify that all accessories are installed as required for each unit.
B. At completion of work, clean surfaces and trim in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations, leaving all materials ready for use.
END OF SECTION 101100
VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES 101100-4
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 101400-SIGNAGE
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Panel signs.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S.Architectural&Transportation Barriers Compliance
Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and
Facilities;Architectural Barriers Act(ABA)Accessibility Guidelines."
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for signs.
1. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by
others,and accessories.
2. Provide message list, typestyles, graphic elements,including tactile characters and
Braille,and layout for each sign. _
C. Samples: For each sign type and for each color and texture required.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in ADA-ABA Accessibility
Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Polycarbonate Sheet: Of thickness indicated, manufactured by extrusion process, coated on
both surfaces with abrasion-resistant coating:
1. Impact Resistance: 16 ft-lbf/in.per ASTM D 256,Method A.
2. Tensile Strength: 9000 lbf/sq.in.per ASTM D 638.
SIGNAGE 101400- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
3. Flexural Modulus of Elasticity: 340,000 lbf/sq.in.per ASTM D 790.
4. Heat Deflection: 265 deg F at 264 lbf/sq. in.per ASTM D 648.
5. Abrasion Resistance: 1.5 percent maximum haze increase for 100 revolutions of a Taber
abraser with a load of 500 g per ASTM D 1044.
2.2 PANEL SIGNS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following:
1. Allen Industries Architectural Signage
2. APCO Graphics,Inc.
3. Best Sign Systems Inc.
4. Gemini Incorporated.
5. Innerface Sign Systems, Inc.
6. Seton Identification Products.
B. Interior Panel Signs: Provide smooth sign panel surfaces constructed to remain flat under
installed conditions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch measured diagonally from
corner to corner,complying with the following requirements:
1. Laminated, Polycarbonate Faced Sheet: 0.060-inch-thick, polycarbonate face sheet
laminated to each side of 0.197-inch-thick phenolic backing.
2. Edge Condition: Square cut.
3. Corner Condition: Square.
4. Mounting:
a. Wall mounted with two-face tape.
5. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
6. Tactile Characters: Characters and Grade 2 Braille raised 1/32 inch above surface with
contrasting colors.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Anchors and Inserts: Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts for
exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or
lead expansion-bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, to be set
into concrete or masonry work.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard signs of configurations indicated.
1. Welded Connections: Comply with AWS standards for recommended practices in shop
welding. Provide welds behind finished surfaces without distortion or discoloration of
SIGNAGE 101400-2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
exposed side. Clean exposed welded surfaces of welding flux and dress exposed and
contact surfaces.
2. Mill joints to tight, hairline fit. Form joints exposed to weather to exclude water
penetration.
3. Conceal fasteners if possible; otherwise, locate fasteners where they will be
inconspicuous.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Locate signs and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of types described and
complying with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Install signs level, plumb, and at heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion
and other defects in appearance.
2. Interior Wall Signs: Install signs on walls adjacent to latch side of door where applicable.
Where not indicated or possible, such as double doors, install signs on nearest adjacent
walls. Locate to allow approach within 3 inches of sign without encountering protruding
objects or standing within swing of door.
B. Wall-Mounted Signs: Comply with sign manufacturer's written instructions except where more
stringent requirements apply.
1. Two-Face Tape: Mount signs to smooth,nonporous surfaces. Do not use this method for
vinyl-covered or rough surfaces.
C. Schedule:
1. Provide men's,women's and unisex restroom signs for rooms labeled as such on Plans.
2. Provide signage for all mechanical, electrical, plumbing, sprinkler and
data/communication rooms labeled as such on Plans.
END OF SECTION 101400
SIGNAGE 101400-3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 102113 -TOILET COMPARTMENTS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes painted-steel units as follows:
1. Toilet Enclosures: Overhead braced and floor anchored.
2. Urinal Screens: Floor anchored and overhead braced.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Green Globe Submittals:
1. Product Data: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating
percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content.
C. Shop Drawings: Include plans,elevations,sections,details,and attachments to other work.
D. Samples: For each exposed finish.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Recycled Content of Metal Components: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of
preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.
2.2 METAL UNITS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Accurate Partitions Corporation.
2. Bradley Corporation; Mills Partitions.
3. Flush Metal Partition Corp.
4. Global Steel Products Corp.
5. Knickerbocker Partitions Corp.
6. Sanymetal; a Crane Plumbing Company.
TOILET COMPARTMENTS 102113- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
B. Steel Sheet: Commercial steel sheet for exposed applications; mill phosphatized and selected
for smoothness.
1. Electrolytically Zinc Coated: ASTM A 879/A 879M,01Z.
2. Hot-Dip Galvanized: ASTM A 653/A 653M,either hot-dip galvanized or galvannealed.
C. Door, Panel,and Pilaster Construction: Seamless,metal facing sheets are pressure laminated to
core material. Units have continuous, interlocking molding strip or lapped and formed edge
closures. Exposed surfaces are free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations,
telegraphing of core material, or other imperfections. Corners are sealed by welding or clips.
Exposed welds are ground smooth.
1. Core Material: Manufacturer's standard sound-deadening honeycomb of resin-
impregnated kraft paper in thickness required to provide finished thickness of 1 inch for
doors and panels and 1-1/4 inches for pilasters.
2. Grab-Bar Reinforcement: Provide concealed internal reinforcement for grab bars
mounted on units.
3. Tapping Reinforcement: Provide concealed reinforcement for tapping (threading) at
locations where machine screws are used for attaching items to units.
4. Urinal-Screen Construction: Matching panels.
D. Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves(Caps): Stainless steel,ASTM A 666,Type 302 or 304.
E. Brackets(Fittings):
1. Stirrup Type: Ear or U-brackets,stainless steel.
F. Urinal-Screen Construction:
1. Flat-Panel Urinal Screen: Matching panel construction.
2. Integral-Flange, Wall-Hung Urinal Screen: Similar to panel construction, with integral
full-height flanges for wall attachment,and maximum 1-1/4 inches thick.
G. Steel-Sheet Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked-on finish,with one color in each room.
1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy-duty operating hardware
and accessories.
I. Material: Stainless steel.
B. Overhead Bracing: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum head rail with
antigrip profile and in manufacturer's standard finish.
C. Support Posts for Urinal Screens: Manufacturer's standard aluminum post with floor shoe for
anchoring to floor construction.
TOILET COMPARTMENTS 102113 -2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
D. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel or
chrome-plated steel or brass, finished to match hardware, with theft-resistant-type heads.
Provide sex-type bolts for through-bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use hot-dip
galvanized or other rust-resistant,protective-coated steel.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Floor-Anchored Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant anchoring
assemblies complete with threaded rods,lock washers, and leveling adjustment nuts at pilasters
for structural connection to floor. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal anchorage.
B. Doors: Unless otherwise indicated,provide 24-inch-wide in-swinging doors for standard toilet
compartments and 36-inch- wide out-swinging doors with a minimum 32-inch- wide clear
opening for compartments indicated to be accessible to people with disabilities.
1. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard self-closing type that can be adjusted to hold doors
open at any angle up to 90 degrees.
2. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard surface-mounted latch unit designed for
emergency access and with combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper. Provide
units that comply with accessibility requirements of authorities having jurisdiction at
compartments indicated to be accessible to people with disabilities.
3. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber-tipped bumper, sized
to prevent door from hitting compartment-mounted accessories.
4. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard rubber-tipped bumper at out-swinging doors.
5. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit at out-swinging doors that complies with
accessibility requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide units on both sides
of doors at compartments indicated to be accessible to people with disabilities.
PART 3-EXECUTION -
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid,
straight, level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended
anchoring devices.
1. Maximum Clearances:
a. Pilasters and Panels: 1/2 inch.
b. Panels and Walls: 1 inch.
2. Stirrup Brackets: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with not less than three brackets
attached at midpoint and near top and bottom of panel.
a. Locate wall brackets so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints.
b. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls.
TOILET COMPARTMENTS 102113-3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
3.2 ADJUSTING
A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to manufacturer's written
instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold doors open
approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging
doors to return doors to fully closed position.
END OF SECTION 102113
TOILET COMPARTMENTS 102113 -4
-- WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85% PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD, OREGON
SECTION 102600- WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Corner guards.
B. See Division 08 Section"Door Hardware" for metal armor,kick,mop,and push plates.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Green Globe Submittals:
1. Certificates for Solid Lumber and Timber Panel Products: Chain-of-custody certificates
certifying that wood rails comply with forest certification requirements. Include evidence
that manufacturer is certified for chain of custody by Sustainable Forestry Initiative,
CSA, Forest Stewardship Council or American Tree Farm System-accredited certification
body.
2. Product Data: For adhesives,documentation including printed statement of VOC content.
3. Product Data: For particleboard, documentation indicating that products contain no urea
formaldehyde.
4. For adhesives and composite wood products, documentation indicating that products are
low-VOC emitting,non-toxic and chemically inert.
C. Shop Drawings: Include sections,details,and attachments to other work.
D. Samples: For each type of unit and for each color and texture required.
E. Maintenance data.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide impact-resistant, plastic wall-protection units with
surface-burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84,
NFPA 255, or UL 723 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.
1
WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION 102600- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1.4 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Store plastic wall-protection components for a minimum of 72 hours, or until plastic material
attains a minimum room temperature of 70 deg F.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of impact-resistant wall-protection units that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M.
B. Fasteners: Nonmagnetic stainless steel; security-type where exposed to view.
2.3 CORNER GUARDS
A. Surface-Mounted, Metal Corner Guards: Fabricated from 1-piece, formed or extruded metal
with formed edges;with 90-or 135-degree turn to match wall condition.
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. ARDEN Architectural Specialties,Inc.
b. Balco,Inc.
c. Construction Specialties,Inc.
2. Material: Stainless steel,Type 304.
a. Thickness: Minimum 0.0625 inch.
b. Finish: Directional satin,No.4.
3. Wing Size: Nominal 3-1/2 by 3-1/2 inches.
WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION 102600-2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
4. Corner Radius: 1/8 inch.
5. Mounting: Flat-head,countersunk screws through factory-drilled mounting holes.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Complete finishing operations, including painting, before installing impact-resistant wall-
protection system components.
B. Install impact-resistant wall-protection units level, plumb, and true to line without distortions.
Do not use materials with chips, cracks, voids, stains, or other defects that might be visible in
the finished Work.
1. Provide splices, mounting hardware, anchors, and other accessories required for a
complete installation.
C. Immediately after completion of installation, clean plastic covers and accessories using a
standard,ammonia-based,household cleaning agent.
END OF SECTION 102600
WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION 102600- 3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 102800-TOILET,BATH,AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Public-use washroom accessories.
2. Childcare accessories.
3. Underlavatory guards.
4. Custodial accessories.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Product Schedule:
1. Identify products using designations indicated on Drawings.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 PUBLIC-USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following:
1. American Specialties,Inc.
2. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
3. Bradley Corporation.
B. Toilet Tissue(Roll)Dispenser:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-4288"Contura"Series.
2. Description: Double-roll dispenser.
3. Mounting: Surface mounted.
4. Operation: Noncontrol delivery with theft-resistant spindle.
5. Capacity: Designed for 4-1/2-or 5-inch-diameter tissue rolls.
6. Material and Finish: Stainless steel,No.4 finish(satin).
C. Combination Towel(Folded)Dispenser/Waste Receptacle:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-43944"Contura" Series.
TOILET,BATH,AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
2. Description: Combination unit for dispensing C-fold or multifold towels,with removable
waste receptacle.
3. Mounting: Recessed with projecting receptacle.
a. Designed for nominal 4-inch wall depth.
4. Minimum Towel-Dispenser Capacity: 600 C-fold or 800 multifold paper towels.
5. Minimum Waste-Receptacle Capacity: 14.2 gal.
6. Material and Finish: Stainless steel,No.4 finish(satin).
7. Liner: Reusable,vinyl waste-receptacle liner.
8. Lockset: Tumbler type for towel-dispenser compartment.
D. Electric Hand Dryer: One per restroom.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Dyson BZB, Inc. "Airblade."
2. Mounting: Surface mounted.
3. Color: Silver.
4. Electrical: 115V,60 Hz, 1 PH; 1500 W.
E. Grab Bar:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-6800 Series.
2. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners.
3. Material: Stainless steel,0.05 inch thick.
a. Finish: Smooth,No.4,satin finish on ends and slip-resistant texture in grip area.
4. Outside Diameter: 1-1/2 inches.
5. Configuration and Length: As indicated on Drawings.
F. Vendor: One per women's restroom.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-43500 "Contura" Series.
2. Type: Sanitary napkin and tampon.
3. Mounting: Fully recessed,designed for 4-inch wall depth.
4. Capacity: 31 (napkins)and 22 (tampons).
5. Operation: Single coin(25 cents).
6. Exposed Material and Finish: Stainless steel,No.4 finish(satin).
7. Lockset: Tumbler type with separate lock and key for coin box.
G. Sanitary-Napkin Disposal Unit: One per women's stall. _
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-270"Contura" Series.
2. Mounting: Surface mounted.
3. Door or Cover: Self-closing disposal-opening cover and hinged face panel with tumbler
lockset.
4. Receptacle: Removable.
5. Material and Finish: Stainless steel,No.4 finish(satin).
H. Seat-Cover Dispenser: One per restroom stall.
TOILET,BATH,AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800-2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-4221 "Contura" Series.
2. Mounting: Surface mounted.
3. Minimum Capacity: 250 seat covers.
4. Exposed Material and Finish: Stainless steel,No.4 finish(satin).
5. Lockset: Tumbler type.
I. Mirror Unit:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-165 Series.
2. Frame: Stainless-steel channel.
a. Corners: Welded and ground smooth.
3. Hangers: Produce rigid, tamper- and theft-resistant installation, using method indicated
below.
a. One-piece, galvanized steel, wall-hanger device with spring-action locking
mechanism to hold mirror unit in position with no exposed screws or bolts.
4. Size: As indicated on Drawings or 24 inches by 36 inches above each sink, if not
indicated.
J. Washroom Booster Step: One(1)per public restroom.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Step-N-Wash, Inc. Model SNW-SS-1075. Phone: (770) 677-
4000.
2. Mounting: Surface.
3. Capacity: 600 lbs. static load.
4. Material:
a. Legs: 14 ga. 304 stainless-steel.
b. Step: 16 ga. 304 stainless-steel.
2.2 CHILDCARE ACCESSORIES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Koala Corporation.
B. Diaper-Changing Station:
1. Description: Horizontal unit that opens by folding down from stored position and with
child-protection strap.
a. Engineered to support a minimum of 250-lb static load when opened.
2. Mounting: Surface mounted, with unit projecting not more than 4 inches from wall when
closed.
TOILET, BATH,AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800-3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
3. Operation: By pneumatic shock-absorbing mechanism.
4. Material and Finish: High-density polyethylene in manufacturer's standard color.
5. Liner Dispenser: Built in.
2.3 UNDERLAVATORY GUARDS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Plumberex Specialty Products,Inc.
2. TCI Products.
3. Truebro, Inc.
B. Underlavatory Guard:
1. Description: Insulating pipe covering for supply and drain piping assemblies, that
prevent direct contact with and burns from piping, and allow service access without
removing coverings.
2. Material and Finish: Antimicrobial,molded-plastic,white.
2.4 CUSTODIAL ACCESSORIES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. A&J Washroom Accessories, Inc.
2. American Specialties,Inc.
3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
4. Bradley Corporation.
B. Mop and Broom Holder:
1. Description: Unit with shelf,hooks,holders,and rod suspended beneath shelf.
2. Length: 36 inches.
3. Hooks: Three.
4. Mop/Broom Holders: Four,spring-loaded,rubber hat,cam type.
5. Material and Finish: Stainless steel,No.4 finish(satin).
a. Shelf: Not less than nominal 0.05-inch-thick stainless steel.
b. Rod: Approximately 1/4-inch-diameter stainless steel.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying.
Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative.
TOILET,BATH,AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800-4
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate
to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and
firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.
END OF SECTION 102800
TOILET, BATH,AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800-5
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 104413-FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes fire protection cabinets for fire extinguishers.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For fire protection cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
attachments to other work.
C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.
D. Maintenance data.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire-Rated, Fire Protection Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements in
ASTM E 814 for fire-resistance rating of walls where they are installed.
B. Coordinate size of fire protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers
indicated are accommodated.
C. Coordinate sizes and locations of fire protection cabinets with wall depths.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M,Commercial Steel(CS),Type B.
1. Sheet: ASTM B 209.
2. Extruded Shapes: ASTM B 221.
B. Acrylic Bubble: One piece.
2.2 FIRE PROTECTION CABINET
A. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher.
FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 104413- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following:
a. J.L.Industries,Inc.,a division of Activar Construction Products Group.
b. Kidde Residential and Commercial Division,Subsidiary of Kidde plc.
c. Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
B. Cabinet Construction: Nonrated.
C. Cabinet Material: Steel sheet.
D. Semirecessed Cabinet: Cabinet box partially recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit style of
trim indicated; with one-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping
surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend).
Provide where walls are of insufficient depth for recessed cabinets but are of sufficient depth to
accommodate semirecessed cabinet installation.
1. Square-Edge Trim: 1-1/4-to 1-1/2-inch backbend depth.
2. Rolled-Edge Trim: 4-inch backbend depth.
E. Cabinet Trim Material: Steel sheet.
F. Door Material: Steel sheet.
G. Door Style: Full bubble with frame.
H. Door Glazing: Molded acrylic bubble.
1. Acrylic Bubble Color: Clear,transparent.
I. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet -
type,trim style,and door material and style indicated. -
J. Accessories:
1. Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to
fire protection cabinet, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers
indicated,with plated or baked-enamel finish.
2. Door Lock: Cam lock that allows door to be opened during emergency by pulling
sharply on door handle.
3. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style,
size,spacing,and location. Locate as indicated.
a. Identify fire extinguisher in fire protection cabinet with the words "FIRE
EXTINGUISHER."
1) Location: Applied to cabinet glazing.
2) Application Process: Pressure-sensitive vinyl letters.
3) Lettering Color: Red.
4) Orientation: Vertical.
FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 104413-2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
K. Finishes:
1. Manufacturer's standard baked-enamel paint for the following:
a. Exterior of cabinet,door, and trim, except for those surfaces indicated to receive
another finish.
b. Interior of cabinet and door.
2. Steel: Baked enamel or powder coat.
a. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Fire Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub), with trim, frame, door,
and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. Miter and weld joints
and grind smooth.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where semirecessed
cabinets will be installed and prepare recesses as required by type and size of cabinet and trim
style.
B. Install fire protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated or,if not indicated,
at heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Fire Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure,square and plumb.
D. Identification: Apply vinyl lettering at locations indicated.
E. Adjust fire protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral
locking devices operate properly.
F. Replace fire protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful
repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION 104413
FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 104413-3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 104416-FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers and mounting brackets for fire
extinguishers.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Operation and maintenance data.
C. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable
Fire Extinguishers."
B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent
testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire protection cabinets to ensure fit and
function.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty
period.
1. Failures include,but are not limited to,the following:
a. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10.
b. Faulty operation of valves or release levers.
2. Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion.
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104416- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 PORTABLE,HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire protection cabinet and mounting
bracket indicated.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the
following:
a. Ansul Incorporated;Tyco International Ltd.
b. Badger Fire Protection;a Kidde company.
c. J.L. Industries,Inc.;a division of Activar Construction Products Group.
d. Kidde Residential and Commercial Division; Subsidiary of Kidde plc.
e. Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
2. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10,
Appendix B and bar coding for documenting fire extinguisher location, inspections,
maintenance,and recharging.
B. Wet-Chemical Type: UL-rated 5A:10 B:C:,Type K,2.5-gal. nominal capacity,with potassium
carbonate-based chemical in stainless-steel container,with pressure-indicating gage.
C. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type: UL-rated 5A:10 B:C, 10 lb. nominal capacity, with
monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in manufacturer's standard enameled container.
2.2 MOUNTING BRACKETS
A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall
or structure,of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated,with plated
or red baked-enamel finish.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the
following:
a. Ansul Incorporated;Tyco International Ltd.
b. Badger Fire Protection;a Kidde company.
c. J.L.Industries,Inc.;a division of Activar Construction Products Group.
d. Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
B. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size,
spacing,and location. Locate as indicated by Architect.
1. Identify bracket-mounted fire extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in
red letter decals applied to mounting surface.
a. Orientation: Vertical.
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104416-2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.
1. Remove and replace damaged,defective,or undercharged fire extinguishers.
B. Install fire extinguishers and mounting brackets in locations indicated and in compliance with
requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Mounting Brackets: 54 inches above finished floor to top of fire extinguisher.
C. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations
indicated.
END OF SECTION 104416
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104416-3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 122413-ROLLER WINDOW SHADES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes manually-operated roller shades.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include styles, material descriptions, construction details, dimensions of individual
components and profiles, features,finishes,and operating instructions for roller shades.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for roller shades,including shadeband
materials,their orientation to rollers,and their seam and batten locations.
1. Motor-Operated Shades: Include details of installation and diagrams for power, signal,
and control wiring.
C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.
D. Roller-Shade Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product certificates.
B. Product test reports.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance data.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.
ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 122413 - 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following:
1. Hunter Douglas Contract.
2. Lutron Electronics Co.,Inc.
3. MechoShade Systems, Inc.
2.2 ROLLER SHADES
A. Chain-and-Clutch Operating Mechanisms: With continuous-loop bead chain and clutch that
stops shade movement when bead chain is released;permanently adjusted and lubricated.
1. Bead Chains: Manufacturer's standard,nickel-plated metal.
a. Loop Length: Full length of roller shade.
b. Limit Stops: Provide upper and lower ball stops.
c. Chain-Retainer Type: Chain tensioner, jamb mounted or chain tensioner, sill
mounted.
B. Rollers: Corrosion-resistant steel or extruded-aluminum tubes of diameters and wall thicknesses
required to accommodate operating mechanisms and weights and widths of shadebands
indicated without deflection. Provide with permanently lubricated drive-end assemblies and
idle-end assemblies designed to facilitate removal of shadebands for service.
1. Roller Mounting Configuration: Single roller.
2. Roller Drive-End Location: Based on approved Shop Drawings and site conditions.
3. Direction of Shadeband Roll: Regular, from back of roller.
4. Shadeband-to-Roller Attachment: Manufacturer's standard method.
C. Mounting Hardware: Brackets or endcaps, corrosion resistant and compatible with roller
assembly, operating mechanism, installation accessories, and mounting location and conditions
indicated.
D. Roller-Coupling Assemblies: Coordinated with operating mechanism and designed to join up to
three inline rollers into a multiband shade that is operated by one roller drive-end assembly.
E. Shadebands:
1. Shadeband Material: Light-filtering fabric.
2. Shadeband Bottom(Hem)Bar: Steel or extruded aluminum.
a. Type: Exposed with endcaps.
b. Color and Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 122413 -2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
F. Installation Accessories:
1. Exposed Headbox: Rectangular, extruded-aluminum enclosure including front fascia, top
and back covers,endcaps,and removable bottom closure.
a. Height: Manufacturer's standard height required to enclose roller and shadeband
when shade is fully open,but not less than 4 inches.
2. Endcap Covers:To cover exposed endcaps.
3. Installation Accessories Color and Finish: As selected from manufacturer's full range.
2.3 SHADEBAND MATERIALS
A. Shadeband Material Flame-Resistance Rating: Comply with NFPA 701. Testing by a qualified
testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
B. Light-Filtering Fabric: Woven fabric,stain and fade resistant.
1. Source: Roller-shade manufacturer.
2. Type: Woven PVC-coated fiberglass or PVC-coated polyester or woven polyester and
PVC-coated polyester.
3. Weave: Mesh or basketweave.
4. Thickness: Match Architect's sample.
5. Weight: Match Architect's sample.
6. Roll Width: Based on approved Shop Drawings.
7. Openness Factor: 15 percent or match Architect's sample.
8. Color: Match Architect's sample.
2.4 ROLLER-SHADE FABRICATION
A. Product Safety Standard: Fabricate roller shades to comply with WCMA A 100.1, including
requirements for flexible,chain-loop devices;lead content of components; and warning labels.
B. Unit Sizes: Fabricate units in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows,measured at 74
deg F:
1. Outside of Jamb Installation: Width and length as indicated, with terminations between
shades of end-to-end installations at centerlines of mullion or other defined vertical
separations between openings.
C. Shadeband Fabrication: Fabricate shadebands without battens or seams to extent possible except
as follows:
1. Vertical Shades: Where width-to-length ratio of shadeband is equal to or greater than 1:4,
provide battens and seams at uniform spacings along shadeband length to ensure
shadeband tracking and alignment through its full range of movement without distortion
of the material.
ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 122413 -3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON -
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 ROLLER-SHADE INSTALLATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, accurate locations, and other
conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
C. Install roller shades level, plumb, and aligned with adjacent units, according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
D. Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or
malfunction throughout entire operational range.
E. Clean roller-shade surfaces after installation,according to manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION 122413
ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 122413 -4
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD, OREGON
SECTION 123661 - SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Solid-surface-material countertops and backsplashes.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For countertop materials.
B. Green Globe Submittals:
1. Certificates: Chain-of-custody certificates indicating that wood products comply with
forest certification requirements. Include documentation that manufacturer is certified for
chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body. Include statement indicating
cost for each certified wood product.
2. Product Data: For adhesives and composite wood products,documentation indicating that
product contains no urea formaldehyde.
3. For adhesives, sealants and composite wood and agrifiber products, documentation
indicating that products are low-VOC emitting,non-toxic and chemically inert.
C. Shop Drawings: For countertops. Show materials, finishes, edge and backsplash profiles,
methods of joining, and cutouts for plumbing fixtures.
D. Samples: For each type of material exposed to view.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CULTURED MARBLE COUNTERTOPS
A. Configuration: Provide countertops with the following front and backsplash style:
B. Fabrication: Fabricate tops in one piece with integral sink bowls and backsplashes.
2.2 SOLID-SURFACE-MATERIAL COUNTERTOPS
A. Configuration: Provide countertops with the following front and backsplash style:
1. Front: Straight, slightly eased at top.
2. Backsplash: Straight,slightly eased at corner.
SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS 123661 - 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85% PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
3. Endsplash:Matching backsplash.
B. Countertops: 3/4-inch-thick,solid surface material with front edge built up with same material.
C. Countertops: 1/4-inch- thick, solid surface material laminated to 3/4-inch- thick particleboard
with exposed edges built up with 3/4-inch-thick,solid surface material.
D. Backsplashes: 3/4-inch-thick,solid surface material.
2.3 COUNTERTOP MATERIALS
A. Certified Wood Materials: Fabricate countertops with wood and wood-based products produced
from wood obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply
with FSC STD-01-001,"FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship."
B. Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Provide products that comply with the testing and
product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for
the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale
- Environmental Chambers," including 2004 Addenda.
C. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2-Exterior Glue,made with binder containing no urea
formaldehyde.
D. Plywood: Exterior softwood plywood complying with DOC PS 1, Grade C-C Plugged, touch
sanded.
E. Adhesives: Adhesives shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
F. Solid Surface Material: Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with
ANSI SSl.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Avonite Surfaces.
b. E.I.du Pont de Nemours and Company.
c. Formica Corporation.
d. LG Chemical,Ltd.
e. Meganite Inc.
f. Samsung Chemical USA,Inc.
g. Swan Corporation(The).
h. Transolid,Inc.
i. Wilsonart International.
2. Type: Provide Standard Type unless Special Purpose Type is indicated.
3. Colors and Patterns: Match Architect's samples.
SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS 123661 -2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD, OREGON
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Fasten countertops by screwing through corner blocks of base units into underside of
countertop. Align adjacent surfaces and, using adhesive in color to match countertop, form
seams to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Carefully dress joints smooth,
remove surface scratches,and clean entire surface.
END OF SECTION 123661
SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS 123661 -3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 211100-FACILITY FIRE-SUPPRESSION WATER-SERVICE PIPING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes fire-suppression water-service piping and related components beginning at the
service entrance piping through floor into building to the outlet of the double check detector
assembly back flow preventer.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 211313"Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems"for wet-pipe sprinkler piping.
2. Section 211316"Dry-Pipe Sprinkler Systems"for dry-pipe sprinkler piping.
3. Section 283111 "Digital Addressable Fire-Alarm."
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Coordination Drawings: For piping and specialties including relation to other services in same
area,drawn to scale. Show piping and specialty sizes and valves, meter and specialty locations,
and elevations.
C. Field quality-control reports.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements:
1. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction for fire-suppression water-
service piping,including materials,hose threads,installation,and testing.
B. Piping materials shall bear label,stamp,or other markings of specified testing agency.
C. Comply with FM Global's "Approval Guide" or UL's"Fire Protection Equipment Directory"for
fire-service-main products.
FACILITY FIRE-SUPPRESSION WATER-SERVICE PIPING 211100- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
D. NFPA Compliance:Comply with NFPA 24 for materials,installations,tests,flushing,and valve
and hydrant supervision for fire-suppression water-service piping.
1.5 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Preparation for Transport:Prepare valves,including fire hydrants,according to the following:
1. Ensure that valves are dry and internally protected against rust and corrosion.
2. Protect valves against damage to threaded ends and flange faces.
3. Set valves in best position for handling. Set valves closed to prevent rattling.
B. During Storage:Use precautions for valves,including fire hydrants,according to the following:
1. Do not remove end protectors unless necessary for inspection;then reinstall for storage.
2. Protect from weather. Store indoors and maintain temperature higher than ambient dew
point temperature. Support off the ground or pavement in watertight enclosures when
outdoor storage is necessary.
C. Handling: Use sling to handle valves and fire hydrants if size requires handling by crane or lift.
Rig valves to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or
rigging points.
D. Deliver piping with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping,storage,and
handling to prevent pipe-end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt,debris,and moisture.
E. Protect stored piping from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. Do not exceed structural
capacity of floor when storing inside.
F. Protect flanges,fittings,and specialties from moisture and dirt.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Interruption of Existing Fire-Suppression Water-Service Piping: Do not interrupt service to
facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then
only after arranging to provide temporary water-distribution service according to requirements
indicated:
1. Notify Owner and Local Fire Department no fewer than two days in advance of proposed
interruption of service.
2. Do not proceed with interruption of service without written permission.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, and
fitting materials,and for joining methods for specific services,service locations,and pipe sizes.
FACILITY FIRE-SUPPRESSION WATER-SERVICE PIPING 211100-2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
2.2 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Standard Weight, Galvanized-Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B. Pipe ends
may be factory or field formed to match joining method.
B. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5,Class 150.
C. Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M and ASME B16.9.
D. Grooved-Joint,Steel-Pipe Appurtenances:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the
following:
a. Anvil International,Inc.
b. Tyco Fire&Building Products LP.
c. Victaulic Company.
2. Pressure Rating: 250 psig minimum.
3. Grooved-End-Pipe Couplings for Steel Piping: AWWA C606 and UL 213,rigid pattern,
hot dip galvanized,unless otherwise indicated, for steel-pipe dimensions. Include hot dip
galvanized ferrous housing sections,EPDM-rubber gasket and bolts and nuts.
2.3 DUCTILE-IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Mechanical-Joint,Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151,with mechanical joint bell and plain spigot
end.
B. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA Cl 10, ductile-or gray-iron standard pattern or
AWWA C153,ductile-iron compact pattern.
1. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111, ductile- or gray-iron glands, rubber gaskets,
and steel bolts.
C. Flanges: ASME B16.1,Class 125,cast iron.
2.4 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Gaskets for Ferrous Piping: ASME B16.21,asbestos free.
2.5 PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Transition Fittings: Manufactured fitting or coupling same size as, with pressure rating at least
equal to and ends compatible with,piping to be joined.
FACILITY FIRE-SUPPRESSION WATER-SERVICE PIPING 211100-3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
2.6 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
A. Double-Check,Detector-Assembly Backflow Preventers:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
following:
a. Ames Fire&Waterworks;a division of Watts Water Technologies,Inc.
b. FEBCO; SPX Valves&Controls.
c. Watts Water Technologies,Inc.
d. Zurn Plumbing Products Group;Wilkins Water Control Products Division.
2. Standards: ASSE 1048 and UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing or FM
Global's"Approval Guide."
3. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications.
4. Pressure Loss:5 psig maximum,through middle one-third of flow range.
5. Body Material: Stainless steel.
6. End Connections:Flanged.
7. Configuration: Designed for horizontal,straight through flow.
8. Accessories:
a. Valves: UL 262 and FM Global's "Approval Guide" listing; OS&Y gate type with
flanged ends on inlet and outlet.
b. Bypass: With displacement-type water meter,shutoff valves,and reduced-pressure
backflow preventer. Water meter shall be replaced to match water utility meter
requirements as necessary.
2.7 ALARM DEVICES
A. General: UL 753 and FM Global's "Approval Guide" listing, of types and sizes to mate and
match piping and equipment.
B. Supervisory Switches: Single pole, double throw; designed to signal valve in other than fully
open position.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Connect piping to existing water entrance in basement.
B. Comply with NFPA 24 for fire-service-main piping materials and installation.
C. Extend fire-suppression water-service piping and connect to water-supply source and building
fire-suppression water-service piping systems at locations and pipe sizes indicated.
FACILITY FIRE-SUPPRESSION WATER-SERVICE PIPING 211100-4
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1. Make connections to building's fire-suppression water-service piping systems when those
systems are installed.
D. Comply with requirements in Section 211313 "Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems" for fire-
suppression-water piping inside the building.
3.2 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Install couplings, flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and special fittings
that have finish and pressure rating same as or higher than systems pressure rating for
aboveground applications unless otherwise indicated.
B. Install flanges, flange adaptors, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves, apparatus, and
equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and larger end connections.
C. Ream ends of tubes and remove burrs.
D. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from outside and inside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before
assembly.
E. Ductile-Iron Piping,Gasketed Joints for Fire-Service-Main Piping: UL 194.
F. Ductile-Iron Piping, Grooved Joints: Cut-groove pipe. Assemble joints with grooved-end,
ductile-iron-piping couplings,gaskets,lubricant,and bolts.
G. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material in size,type,and thickness suitable for water
service.Join flanges with bolts according to ASME B31.9.
H. Dissimilar Materials Piping Joints: Use adapters compatible with both piping materials, with
OD,and with system working pressure.
I. Do not use flanges or unions for underground piping.
3.3 ANCHORAGE INSTALLATION
A. Anchorage, General: Install water-distribution piping with restrained joints. Anchorages and
restrained joint types that may be used include the following:
1. Set-screw mechanical retainer glands.
B. Install anchorages for tees,plugs and caps,bends,crosses,valves, and hydrant branches in fire-
suppression water-service piping according to NFPA 24 and the following:
1. Gasketed-Joint,Ductile-Iron,Water-Service Piping: According to AWWA C600.
3.4 VALVE INSTALLATION
A. UL-Listed or FM Global-Approved Valves Other Than Gate Valves: Comply with NFPA 24.
FACILITY FIRE-SUPPRESSION WATER-SERVICE PIPING 211100-5
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
3.5 BACKFLOW PREVENTER INSTALLATION
A. Install backflow preventers of type, size, and capacity indicated. Include valves and test cocks.
Install according to requirements of plumbing and health department and authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. Do not install backflow preventers that have relief drain in vault or in other spaces subject to
flooding.
C. Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers.
D. Support NPS 2-1/2 and larger backflow preventers and piping on pipe saddles with floor plate.
Include steel yoke and nuts.
3.6 ALARM DEVICE INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with NFPA 24 for devices and methods of valve supervision. Underground
valves with valve box do not require supervision.
B. Supervisory Switches: Supervise valves in open position.
C. Connect alarm devices to building's fire-alarm system. Wiring and fire-alarm devices are
specified in Section 283111 "Digital,Addressable Fire-Alarm System."
3.7 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect fire-suppression water-service piping to interior fire-suppression piping.
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Use test procedure prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if method is not prescribed
by authorities having jurisdiction,use procedure described below.
B. Hydrostatic Tests: Test as 200 psig, measured at the system low point and hold for two hours.
Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.
C. Flush incoming water service piping as required by NFPA 24. Achieve the minimum water
velocity,verify by measuring flow.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.9 CLEANING
A. Clean and disinfect fire-suppression water-service piping.
B. Water used for testing shall be chlorinated for sterilization purposes.
FACILITY FIRE-SUPPRESSION WATER-SERVICE PIPING 211100-6
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1. Provide necessary connections throughout the piping system to inject chlorine solution
for sterilization.
2. Sterilization shall not occur until all piping systems have been flushed.
3. Measure incoming water pH and adjust as necessary using an alkali(caustic soda or soda
ash)or an acid(hydrochloric acid)to maintain pH in the range of 7.4 to 7.6.
4. Inject chlorine disinfectant (free chlorine in liquid, powder, or tablet form) into the
system until residual chlorine of 50 to 80 mg/L occurs in each branch line.
5. Bleed water from system to ensure chlorine distribution in each branch, and obtain test
samples from 15 percent of sprinkler locations for each zone.
6. Maintain chlorine solution in system for 24 hours.
7. Measure chlorine content at end of 24 hour period. Redose and bleed water from each
branch if residual chlorine content is less than 25 mg/L.Repeat 24 hours holding period.
8. Once system residual meets or exceeds 25 mg/L after 24 hours, flush all system piping
until residual chlorine level is 1 mg/L, or equal to the chlorine content in the incoming
water.
9. Take water samples from two percent of the sprinkler locations for each zone and at the
water entry point, and analyze in accordance with AWWA C651 and report results to
Owner.
C. Report test results promptly and in writing to Architect and Authority Having Jurisdiction,using
Contractor's Material and Test Certificate.
3.10 PIPING SCHEDULE
A. Aboveground fire-suppression water-service piping NPS 4 to NPS 12 shall be cut grooved,
Schedule 40 steel pipe;grooved end,ductile iron pipe appurtenances;and grooved joints.
END OF SECTION 211100
FACILITY FIRE-SUPPRESSION WATER-SERVICE PIPING 211100-7
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 211313 -WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
L2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Pipes,fittings,and specialties.
2. Fire-protection valves.
3. Sprinklers. _
4. Alarm devices.
5. Manual control stations.
6. Control panels.
7. Pressure gages.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 211100"Facility Fire-Suppression Water-Service Piping."
2. Section 211313 "Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems"for wet-pipe sprinkler piping.
3. Section 283111 "Digital Addressable Fire-Alarm."
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Standard-Pressure Sprinkler Piping: Wet-pipe sprinkler system piping designed to operate at
working pressure of 175 psig maximum.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS
A. Wet-Pipe Sprinkler System: Automatic sprinklers are attached to piping containing water and
that is connected to water supply through alarm valve. Water discharges immediately from
sprinklers when they are opened. Sprinklers open when heat melts fusible link or destroys
frangible device.Hose connections are included if indicated.
1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Standard-Pressure Piping System Component:Listed for 175-psig minimum working pressure.
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211313- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
B. Delegated Design: Design sprinkler system(s), including comprehensive engineering analysis
by a qualified professional engineer or NICET Level IV Technician, using performance
requirements and design criteria indicated.
1. Available fire-hydrant flow test records indicate the following conditions:
a. Date: September 17,2013.
b. Performed by:Tigard Public Works-Water Division.
c. Location of Residual Fire Hydrant R: South Center of Building.
d. Location of Flow Fire Hydrant F: SE Corner of Building.
e. Static Pressure at Residual Fire Hydrant R: 72 psig.
f. Measured Flow at Flow Fire Hydrant F: 1300 gpm.
g. Residual Pressure at Residual Fire Hydrant R: 64 psig.
C. Sprinkler system design shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Margin of Safety for Available Water Flow and Pressure: 10 percent, including losses
through water-service piping,valves,and backflow preventers.
2. Sprinkler Occupancy Hazard Classifications:
a. Retail Sales Areas:Ordinary Hazard,Group 2.
b. Electrical Equipment Rooms:Ordinary Hazard,Group 1.
c. Miscellaneous Storage of Group A Plastics with height greater than 5ft. and less
than 10 ft,ceiling at 20 ft.:Extra Hazard,Group 2.
d. Mechanical Equipment Rooms:Ordinary Hazard,Group 1.
e. Office and Public Areas:Light Hazard.
f. Restaurant Service Areas:Ordinary Hazard,Group 1.
3. Minimum Density for Automatic-Sprinkler Piping Design:
-
a. Light-Hazard Occupancy:0.10 gpm over 1500-sq. ft.area.
b. Ordinary-Hazard,Group 1 Occupancy:0.15 gpm over 1500-sq.ft.area.
c. Ordinary-Hazard,Group 2 Occupancy:0.20 gpm over 1500-sq.ft.area.
d. Miscellaneous Storage of Group A Plastics:0.40 gpm over 2500-sq.ft.area.
4. Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler: Per UL listing.
5. Total Combined Hose-Stream Demand Requirement: According to NFPA 13 unless
otherwise indicated:
a. Light-Hazard Occupancies: 100 gpm for 30 minutes.
_ b. Ordinary-Hazard Occupancies:250 gpm for 60 to 90 minutes.
c. Miscellaneous Storage of Group A Plastics: 500 gpm for 120 minutes.
D. Seismic Performance: Sprinkler piping shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions
determined according to NFPA 13 and ASCEJSEI 7.
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211313-2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating
characteristics,electrical characteristics,and furnished specialties and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: For wet-pipe sprinkler systems. Include plans,elevations, sections, details,and
attachments to other work.
1. Wiring Diagrams: For power,signal,and control wiring.
C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For sprinkler systems indicated to comply with performance
requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified
professional engineer or NICET Level IV Technician responsible for their preparation.
D. Coordination Drawings: Sprinkler systems, drawn to scale, on which the following items are
shown and coordinated with each other,using input from installers of the items involved:
1. Ceilings.
2. Domestic water piping.
3. HVAC ductwork. -
4. Items penetrating finished ceiling include the following:
a. Lighting fixtures.
b. Air outlets and inlets.
c. Cooler/Freezer evaporators and light fixtures.
E. Qualification Data:For qualified Installer and professional engineer.
F. Approved Sprinkler Piping Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 13, that
have been approved by authorities having jurisdiction, including hydraulic calculations if
applicable.
G. Welding certificates.
H. Fire-hydrant flow test report.
I. Field Test Reports and Certificates: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with
performance requirements and as described in NFPA 13. Include "Contractor's Material and
Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping."
J. Field quality-control reports.
K. Operation and Maintenance Data: For sprinkler specialties to include in emergency, operation,
and maintenance manuals.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications:
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211313-3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1. Installer's responsibilities include designing, fabricating, and installing sprinkler systems
and providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering
responsibility.Base calculations on results of fire-hydrant flow test.
a. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of working plans, calculations, and field
test reports by a qualified professional engineer or NICET Level IV Technician.
B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code.
C. Electrical Components,Devices,and Accessories:Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,by
a qualified testing agency,and marked for intended location and application.
D. NFPA Standards: Sprinkler system equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and testing
shall comply with the following:
1. NFPA 13,"Installation of Sprinkler Systems."
2. NFPA 24,"Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances."
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Interruption of Existing Sprinkler Service: Do not interrupt sprinkler service to facilities
occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only
after arranging to provide temporary sprinkler service according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Architect,Construction Manager and Owner no fewer than two days in advance of
proposed interruption of sprinkler service.
2. Do not proceed with interruption of sprinkler service without Architect's, Construction
Manager's and Owner's written permission.
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of sprinklers with other construction that penetrates ceilings,
including light fixtures,HVAC equipment,and partition assemblies.
1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Sprinkler Cabinets: Finished, wall-mounted, steel cabinet with hinged cover, and with
space for minimum of six spare sprinklers plus sprinkler wrench. Include number of
sprinklers required by NFPA 13 and sprinkler wrench. Include separate cabinet with
sprinklers and wrench for each type of sprinkler used on Project.
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211313-4
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, and
fitting materials,and for joining methods for specific services,service locations,and pipe sizes.
2.2 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Schedule 40, Galvanized and Black-Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135; ASTM A 795/A 795M, Type E;
or ASME B36.10M,wrought steel; with wall thickness not less than Schedule 30 and not more
than Schedule 40.Pipe ends may be factory or field formed to match joining method.
B. Schedule 10, Black-Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135 or ASTM A 795/A 795M, Schedule 10 in NPS 5
and smaller;and NFPA 13-specified wall thickness in NPS 6 to NPS 10 plain end.
C. Galvanized- and Black-Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M,
standard-weight,seamless steel pipe with threaded ends.
D. Galvanized and Uncoated,Steel Couplings:ASTM A 865,threaded.
E. Galvanized and Uncoated, Gray-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125, standard
pattern.
F. Malleable-or Ductile-Iron Unions:UL 860.
G. Cast-Iron Flanges:ASME 16.1,Class 125.
H. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings:ASME B 16.5,Class 150.
I. Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M and ASME B16.9.
J. Grooved-Joint,Steel-Pipe Appurtenances:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the
following:
a. Anvil International,Inc.
b. Tyco Fire&Building Products LP.
c. Victaulic Company.
2. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum.
3. Galvanized and Painted, Grooved-End Fittings for Steel Piping: ASTM A 47/A 47M,
malleable-iron casting or ASTM A 536, ductile-iron casting; with dimensions matching
steel pipe.
4. Grooved-End-Pipe Couplings for Steel Piping: AWWA C606 and UL 213,rigid pattern,
unless otherwise indicated, for steel-pipe dimensions. Include ferrous housing sections,
EPDM-rubber gasket,and bolts and nuts.
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211313-5
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
5. Grooved-end fittings and couplings for galvanized steel piping: Hot dipped galvanized
for galvanized piping.
2.3 LISTED FIRE-PROTECTION VALVES
A. General Requirements:
1. Valves shall be UL listed or FM approved.
2. Minimum Pressure Rating for Standard-Pressure Piping: 175 psig.
B. Check Valves:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. AFAC Inc.
b. Anvil International,Inc.
c. Clow Valve Company;a division of McWane,Inc.
d. Crane Co.;Crane Valve Group;Crane Valves.
e. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation.
f. Kennedy Valve;a division of McWane,Inc.
g. Milwaukee Valve Company.
h. NIBCO INC.
i. Potter Roemer.
j. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co.,Inc.
k. Tyco Fire&Building Products LP.
I. Victaulic Company.
m. Viking Corporation.
n. Watts Water Technologies,Inc.
2. Standard: UL 312.
3. Pressure Rating:250 psig minimum.
4. Type: Swing check.
5. Body Material:Cast iron.
6. End Connections: Flanged or grooved.
C. Iron OS&Y Gate Valves:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Clow Valve Company;a division of McWane,Inc.
b. Crane Co.;Crane Valve Group;Crane Valves.
c. Milwaukee Valve Company.
d. Mueller Co.;Water Products Division.
e. NIBCO INC.
f. Tyco Fire&Building Products LP.
g. United Brass Works,Inc.
h. Watts Water Technologies,Inc.
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211313-6
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
2. Standard: UL 262.
3. Pressure Rating: 250 psig minimum.
4. Body Material: Cast or ductile iron.
5. End Connections: Flanged or grooved.
D. Indicating-Type Butterfly Valves:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Anvil International, Inc.
b. Global Safety Products,Inc.
c. Kennedy Valve;a division of McWane,Inc.
d. Milwaukee Valve Company.
e. NIBCO INC.
f. Tyco Fire&Building Products LP.
g. Victaulic Company.
2. Standard: UL 1091.
3. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum.
4. Valves NPS 2 and Smaller:
a. Valve Type: Ball or butterfly.
b. Body Material: Bronze.
c. End Connections:Threaded.
5. Valves NPS 2-1/2 and Larger:
a. Valve Type: Butterfly.
b. Body Material: Cast or ductile iron.
c. End Connections: Flanged,grooved,or wafer.
6. Valve Operation: Integral electrical, 115-V ac, prewired, two-circuit, supervisory switch
visual indicating device.
E. Indicator Posts:
I. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Clow Valve Company;a division of McWane, Inc.
b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve-Group; Stockham Division.
c. Kennedy Valve;a division of McWane, Inc.
d. Mueller Co.;Water Products Division.
e. NIBCO INC.
f. Tyco Fire&Building Products LP.
2. Standard: UL 789.
3. Type: Horizontal for wall mounting.
4. Body Material:Cast iron with extension rod and locking device.
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211313-7
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
5. Operation: Wrench.
2.4 TRIM AND DRAIN VALVES
A. General Requirements:
1. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing or "Approval Guide,"
published by FM Global,listing.
2. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum.
B. Angle Valves:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the
following:
a. Fire Protection Products, Inc.
b. United Brass Works, Inc.
C. Ball Valves:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Anvil International, Inc.
b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.;Apollo Valves.
c. Kennedy Valve; a division of McWane,Inc.
d. Kitz Corporation.
e. Legend Valve.
f. Milwaukee Valve Company.
g. NIBCO INC.
h. Potter Roemer.
i. Tyco Fire&Building Products LP.
j. Victaulic Company.
k. Watts Water Technologies,Inc.
2.5 SPECIALTY VALVES
A. General Requirements:
1. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing or "Approval Guide,"
published by FM Global,listing.
2. Pressure Rating:
a. Standard-Pressure Piping Specialty Valves: 175 psig minimum.
3. Body Material:Cast or ductile iron.
4. Size: Same as connected piping.
5. End Connections: Flanged or grooved.
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211313-8
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
B. Automatic(Ball Drip)Drain Valves:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the
following:
a. AFAC Inc.
b. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co.,Inc.
c. Tyco Fire&Building Products LP.
2. Standard:UL 1726.
3. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum.
4. Type:Automatic draining,ball check.
5. Size:NPS 3/4.
6. End Connections:Threaded.
C. Pressure Relief Valves:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the
following:
a. Anvil International.
b. Cla-Val;a division of Cla-Val Corporation.
c. Conbraco Industries.
d. Tyco Fire&Building Products LP.
e. Watts ACV;a division of Watts Industries,Inc.
2. Standard: UL Listed.
3. Pressure Rating: 175 psig,minimum.
4. Type: Forged stainless steel spring, factory set to 175 psig, to relieve excess system
pressure,guided stem,manual test lever.
5. Body Material: Bronze.
6. End Connections: Threaded.
2.6 SPRINKLER SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS
A. Branch Outlet Fittings:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the
following:
a. Anvil International,Inc.
b. Tyco Fire&Building Products LP.
c. Victaulic Company.
2. Standard:UL 213.
3. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum.
4. Body Material:Ductile-iron housing with EPDM seals and bolts and nuts.
5. Type:Mechanical-T and-cross fittings.
6. Configurations: Snap-on and strapless,ductile-iron housing with branch outlets.
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211313-9
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
7. Size: Of dimension to fit onto sprinkler main and with outlet connections as required to
match connected branch piping.
8. Branch Outlets: Grooved or threaded.
B. Flow Detection and Test Assemblies:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co.,Inc.
b. Tyco Fire&Building Products LP.
c. Victaulic Company.
2. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing or "Approval Guide,"
published by FM Global,listing.
3. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum.
4. Body Material: Cast- or ductile-iron housing with orifice, sight glass, and integral test
valve.
5. Size: Same as connected piping.
6. Inlet and Outlet:Threaded.
C. Sprinkler Inspector's Test Fittings:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. AGF Manufacturing Inc.
b. Triple R Specialty.
c. Tyco Fire&Building Products LP.
d. Victaulic Company. _
e. Viking Corporation.
2. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing or "Approval Guide,"
published by FM Global,listing.
3. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum.
4. Body Material:Cast-or ductile-iron housing with sight glass.
5. Size: Same as connected piping.
6. Inlet and Outlet:Threaded.
2.7 SPRINKLERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. AFAC Inc.
2. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation.
3. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co.,Inc.
4. Tyco Fire&Building Products LP.
5. Victaulic Company.
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211313- 10
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
6. Viking Corporation.
B. General Requirements:
1. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing or "Approval Guide,"
published by FM Global,listing.
2. Pressure Rating for Automatic Sprinklers: 175 prig minimum.
C. Automatic Sprinklers with Heat-Responsive Element:
1. Characteristics: Nominal 1/2-inch orifice with Discharge Coefficient K of 5.6, and for
"Ordinary" temperature classification rating unless otherwise indicated or required by
application.
D. Sprinkler Finishes:
1. Chrome plated.
2. Bronze.
3. Painted.
E. Sprinkler Escutcheons: Materials, types, and finishes for the following sprinkler mounting
applications. Escutcheons for concealed, flush, and recessed-type sprinklers are specified with
sprinklers.
1. Ceiling Mounting:Chrome-plated steel,one piece,flat.
2. Sidewall Mounting: Chrome-plated steel,one piece,flat.
3. Cooler/Freezer Ceiling: Chrome-plated steel,two piece.
F. Sprinkler Guards:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the
following:
a. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.
b. Tyco Fire&Building Products LP.
c. Victaulic Company.
d. Viking Corporation.
2. Standard: UL 199.
3. Type: Wire cage with fastening device for attaching to sprinkler.
2.8 ALARM DEVICES
A. Alarm-device types shall match piping and equipment connections.
B. Electrically Operated Horn Strobe:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211313 - 11
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
a. ADT Security Services,Inc.
b. System Sensor;a Honeywell Company.
c. Wheelock;a Cooper Company.
2. Standard:UL 464.
3. Type: Combination horn-strobe.
4. Finish: Red-enamel factory finish,suitable for outdoor use.
5. Number: Provide one for each FDC location.
C. Water-Flow Indicators:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the
following:
a. ADT Security Services,Inc.
b. McDonnell&Miller;ITT Industries.
c. Potter Electric Signal Company.
d. System Sensor;a Honeywell company.
e. Viking Corporation.
2. Standard:UL 346.
3. Water-Flow Detector: Electrically supervised.
4. Components: Two single-pole, double-throw circuit switches for isolated alarm and
auxiliary contacts, 7 A, 125-V ac and 0.25 A, 24-V dc; complete with factory-set, field-
adjustable retard element to prevent false signals and tamperproof cover that sends signal
if removed.
5. Type: Paddle operated.
6. Pressure Rating:250 psig.
7. Design Installation: Horizontal or vertical.
D. Valve Supervisory Switches:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the
following:
a. Fire-Lite Alarms,Inc.;a Honeywell company.
b. Kennedy Valve;a division of McWane,Inc.
c. Potter Electric Signal Company.
d. System Sensor;a Honeywell company.
2. Standard:UL 346.
3. Type:Electrically supervised.
4. Components: Single-pole,double-throw switch with normally closed contacts.
5. Design: Signals that controlled valve is in other than fully open position.
E. Indicator-Post Supervisory Switches:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the
following:
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211313- 12
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
a. Potter Electric Signal Company.
b. System Sensor;a Honeywell company.
2. Standard: UL 346.
3. Type: Electrically supervised.
4. Components: Single-pole,double-throw switch with normally closed contacts.
5. Design: Signals that controlled indicator-post valve is in other than fully open position.
2.9 PRESSURE GAGES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. AMETEK;U.S.Gauge Division.
2. Ashcroft,Inc.
3. Brecco Corporation.
4. WIKA Instrument Corporation.
B. Standard:UL 393. -
C. Dial Size:3-1/2-to 4-1/2-inch diameter.
D. Pressure Gage Range: 0 to 250 psig minimum.
E. Water System Piping Gage: Include"WATER"or"AIR/WATER"label on dial face.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Perform fire-hydrant flow test according to NFPA 13 and NFPA 291. Use results for system
design calculations required in"Quality Assurance"Article.
B. Report test results promptly and in writing.
3.2 SERVICE-ENTRANCE PIPING
A. Connect sprinkler piping to water-service piping for service entrance to building. Comply with
requirements for exterior piping in Section 211100 "Facility Fire-Suppression Water-Service
Piping."
B. Install shutoff valve,double check detector backflow assembly,pressure gage, drain, and other
accessories indicated at connection to water-service piping.
C. Install shutoff valve,check valve,pressure gage,and drain at connection to water service.
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211313- 13
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general
location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated,as far as practical.
1. Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval from
authorities having jurisdiction. File written approval with Architect before deviating from
approved working plans.
B. Piping Standard: Comply with requirements for installation of sprinkler piping in NFPA 13.
C. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint device
materials and installation in NFPA 13.
D. Use listed fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions in
pipe sizes.
E. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 and smaller.
F. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves, apparatus, and
equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and larger end connections.
G. Install "Inspector's Test Connections" in sprinkler system piping, complete with shutoff valve,
and sized and located according to NFPA 13.
H. Install sprinkler piping with drains for complete system drainage.
I. Install automatic (ball drip) drain valve at each check valve for fire-department connection, to
drain piping between fire-department connection and check valve. Install drain piping to and
spill over floor drain or to outside building.
J. Install alarm devices in piping systems.
K. Install hangers and supports for sprinkler system piping according to NFPA 13. Comply with
requirements for hanger materials in NFPA 13.
L. Install pressure gages on riser or feed main, and at each sprinkler test connection. Include
pressure gages with connection not less than NPS 1/4and with soft metal seated globe valve,
arranged for draining pipe between gage and valve. Install gages to permit removal, and install
where they will not be subject to freezing.
M. Fill sprinkler system piping with water.
N. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls,ceilings,and floors.
O. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs.
P. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls,ceilings,and floors.
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211313- 14
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
Q. Connect new fire sprinkler system to existing fire sprinkler system in adjacent tenant area of
building.
3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Install couplings, flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and special fittings
that have finish and pressure ratings same as or higher than system's pressure rating for
aboveground applications unless otherwise indicated.
B. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2and smaller.
C. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves, apparatus, and
equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and larger end connections.
D. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs.Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
E. Remove scale, slag, dirt,and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before
assembly.
F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material in size, type,and thickness suitable for water
service.Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9.
G. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut
threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore
full ID.Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.
2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged.
H. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12M/D10.12, using qualified processes
and welding operators according to"Quality Assurance"Article.
1. Shop weld pipe joints where welded piping is indicated. Do not use welded joints for
galvanized-steel pipe.
I. Steel-Piping, Cut-Grooved Joints: Cut square-edge groove in end of pipe according to
AWWA C606.Assemble coupling with housing,gasket,lubricant,and bolts.Join steel pipe and
grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel-pipe joints.
J. Steel-Piping, Roll-Grooved Joints: Roll rounded-edge groove in end of pipe according to
AWWA C606.Assemble coupling with housing,gasket,lubricant,and bolts.Join steel pipe and
grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel-pipe grooved joints.
3.5 VALVE AND SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION
A. Install listed fire-protection valves, trim and drain valves, specialty valves and trim, controls,
and specialties according to NFPA 13 and authorities having jurisdiction.
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211313- 15
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
B. Install listed fire-protection shutoff valves supervised open, located to control sources of water
supply except from fire-department connections. Install permanent identification signs
indicating portion of system controlled by each valve.
C. Install check valve in each water-supply connection. Install backflow preventers instead of
check valves in potable-water-supply sources.
D. Specialty Valves:
1. General Requirements: Install in vertical position for proper direction of flow, in main
supply to system.
3.6 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION
A. Install sprinklers in suspended ceilings in center of narrow dimension of acoustical ceiling
panels.
B. Install dry-type sprinklers with water supply from heated space. Do not install pendent or
sidewall,wet-type sprinklers in areas subject to freezing. -
3.7 IDENTIFICATION
A. Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirements in
NFPA 13.
B. Identify system components,wiring,cabling,and terminals.
C. Install sprinkler guards on all sprinklers in storage areas where sprinkler height above floor is
less than 8 ft.
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. Leak Test: After installation, charge systems and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest
until no leaks exist.
2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
3. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler systems according to NFPA 13, "Systems Acceptance"
Chapter.
4. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices.
5. Coordinate with fire-alarm tests. Operate as required.
6. Verify that equipment hose threads are same as local fire-department equipment.
C. Sprinkler piping system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211313- 16
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.9 CLEANING
A. Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers.
B. Remove and replace sprinklers with paint other than factory finish.
3.10 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train. Train Owner's maintenance
personnel to adjust,operate,and maintain specialty valves.
3.11 PIPING SCHEDULE
A. Piping between Fire-Department Connections and Check Valves: Galvanized, standard-weight
steel pipe with grooved ends; grooved-end fittings; grooved-end-pipe couplings; and grooved
joints.
B. Sprinkler specialty fittings may be used, downstream of control valves, instead of specified
fittings.
C. Standard-pressure,wet-pipe sprinlder system,NPS 2and smaller,shall be of the following:
1. Schedule 40, black-steel pipe with threaded ends; uncoated, gray-iron threaded fittings;
and threaded joints.
2. Schedule 40, galvanized-steel pipe with threaded ends; galvanized, gray-iron threaded
fittings;and threaded joints.
D. Standard-pressure,wet-pipe sprinkler system,NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4,shall be of the following:
1. Schedule 10, black-steel pipe with roll-grooved ends; uncoated, grooved-end fittings for
steel piping;grooved-end-pipe couplings for steel piping;and grooved joints.
E. Standard-pressure,wet-pipe sprinkler system,NPS Sand larger,shall be of the following:
1. Schedule 40, black-steel pipe with cut-grooved ends; uncoated, grooved-end fittings for
steel piping;grooved-end-pipe couplings for steel piping;and grooved joints.
3.12 SPRINKLER SCHEDULE
A. Use sprinkler types in subparagraphs below for the following applications:
I. Rooms without Ceilings: Upright sprinklers.
2. Rooms with Suspended Ceilings: Recessed sprinklers.
3. Wall Mounting: Sidewall sprinklers.
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211313- 17
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
4. Spaces Subject to Freezing: Dry sprinklers as indicated.
B. Provide sprinkler types in subparagraphs below with finishes indicated.
1. Recessed Sprinklers: Bright chrome,with bright chrome escutcheon.
2. Upright, Pendent and Sidewall Sprinklers: Chrome plated in finished spaces exposed to
view;rough bronze in unfinished spaces not exposed to view.
END OF SECTION 211313
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211313- 18
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 211316-DRY-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Pipes,fittings,and specialties.
2. Fire-protection valves.
3. Sprinkler specialty pipe fittings.
4. Sprinklers.
5. Alarm devices.
6. Manual control stations.
7. Control panels.
8. Pressure gages.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 211100"Facility Fire-Suppression Water-Service Piping."
2. Section 211313"Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems"for wet-pipe sprinkler piping.
3. Section 283111 "Digital Addressable Fire-Alarm."
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Standard-Pressure Sprinkler Piping: Dry-pipe sprinkler system piping designed to operate at
working pressure 175 psi maximum.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS
A. Dry-Pipe Sprinkler System: Automatic sprinklers are attached to piping containing compressed
air. Opening of sprinklers releases compressed air and permits water pressure to open dry-pipe
valve.Water then flows into piping and discharges from sprinklers that are open.
1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Standard-Pressure Piping System Component:Listed for 175-psig minimum working pressure.
DRY-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211316- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85% PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
B. Delegated Design: Design sprinkler system(s), including comprehensive engineering analysis
by a qualified professional engineer or NICET Level N Technician, using performance
requirements and design criteria indicated.
1. Available fire-hydrant flow test records indicate the following conditions:
a. Date: September 17,2013.
b. Performed by: Tigard Public Works-Water Division.
c. Location of Residual Fire Hydrant R: South Center of Building.
d. Location of Flow Fire Hydrant F: SE Corner of Building.
e. Static Pressure at Residual Fire Hydrant R: 72 psig.
f. Measured Flow at Flow Fire Hydrant F: 1300 gpm.
g. Residual Pressure at Residual Fire Hydrant R: 64 psig.
C. Sprinkler system design shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Sprinkler Occupancy Hazard Classifications:
a. Outdoor Seating: Light hazard.
b. Canopy/Overhang: Light hazard.
2. Minimum Density for Automatic-Sprinkler Piping Design:
a. Light-Hazard Occupancy:0.10 gpm over 1500-sq.ft.area.
3. Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler:Per UL listing.
4. Total Combined Hose-Stream Demand Requirement: According to NFPA 13 unless
otherwise indicated:
a. Light-Hazard Occupancies: 100 gpm or 30 minutes.
D. Seismic Performance: Sprinkler piping shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions
determined according to NFPA 13,Authority having jurisdiction and Owner's insurer.
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating
characteristics,electrical characteristics,and furnished specialties and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: For thy-pipe sprinkler systems. Include plans,elevations,sections,details, and
attachments to other work.
1. Wiring Diagrams: For power,signal,and control wiring.
C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For sprinkler systems indicated to comply with performance
requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified
professional engineer or NICET Level IV Technician responsible for their preparation.
DRY-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211316-2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Sprinkler systems, drawn to scale, on which the following items are
shown and coordinated with each other,using input from installers of the items involved:
1. Domestic water piping.
2. HVAC hydronic piping.
3. Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following:
a. Lighting fixtures.
b. Air outlets and inlets.
B. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and professional engineer.
C. Approved Sprinkler Piping Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 13, that
have been approved by authorities having jurisdiction, including hydraulic calculations if
applicable.
D. Fire-hydrant flow test report.
E. Field Test Reports and Certificates: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with
performance requirements and as described in NFPA 13. Include "Contractor's Material and
Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping."
F. Field quality-control reports.
1.8 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For sprinkler specialties to include in emergency, operation,
and maintenance manuals.
1.9 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Sprinkler Cabinets: Finished, wall-mounted, steel cabinet with hinged cover, and with
space for minimum of six spare sprinklers plus sprinkler wrench. Include number of
sprinklers required by NFPA 13 and sprinkler wrench. Include separate cabinet with
sprinklers and wrench for each type of sprinkler used on Project.
1.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications:
1. Installer's responsibilities include designing, fabricating, and installing sprinkler systems
and providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering
responsibility.Base calculations on results of fire-hydrant flow test.
DRY-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211316-3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
a. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of working plans, calculations, and field
test reports by a qualified professional engineer.
B. Electrical Components,Devices,and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,by
a qualified testing agency,and marked for intended location and application.
C. NFPA Standards: Sprinkler system equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and testing
shall comply with the following:
1. NFPA 13, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems."
2. NFPA 24, "Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances."
1.11 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Interruption of Existing Sprinkler Service: Do not interrupt sprinkler service to facilities
occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only
after arranging to provide temporary sprinkler service according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Architect,Construction Manager, Owner and local Fire Department no fewer than
two days in advance of proposed interruption of sprinkler service.
2. Do not proceed with interruption of sprinkler service without Architect's, Construction
Manager's and Owner's written permission.
1.12 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of sprinklers with other construction that penetrates ceilings,
including light fixtures, HVAC equipment,and partition assemblies.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, and
fitting materials,and joining methods for specific services,service locations,and pipe sizes.
2.2 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Standard Weight, Galvanized-Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M,Type E, Grade B. Pipe ends may
be factory or field formed to match joining method.
B. Galvanized-Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard-weight,
seamless steel pipe with threaded ends.
C. Galvanized, Steel Couplings: ASTM A 865,threaded.
D. Galvanized,Gray-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4,Class 125,standard pattern.
DRY-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211316-4
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
E. Malleable-or Ductile-Iron Unions:UL 860.
F. Cast-Iron Flanges:ASME B16.1,Class 125.
G. Grooved-Joint,Steel-Pipe Appurtenances:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the
following:
a. Anvil International,Inc.
b. Tyco Fire&Building Products LP.
c. Victaulic Company.
2. Pressure Rating: 175 psigminimum.
3. Galvanized, Grooved-End Fittings for Steel Piping: ASTM A 47/A 47M, malleable-iron
casting or ASTM A 536,ductile-iron casting;with dimensions matching steel pipe.
4. Galvanized Grooved-End-Pipe Couplings for Steel Piping: AWWA C606 and UL 213,
rigid pattern, unless otherwise indicated, for steel-pipe dimensions. Include ferrous
housing sections,EPDM-rubber gasket,and bolts and nuts.
2.3 LISTED FIRE-PROTECTION VALVES
A. General Requirements:
1. Valves shall be UL listed or FM approved.
2. Minimum Pressure Rating for Standard-Pressure Piping: 175 psig.
B. Check Valves:
_ - 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the
following:
a. AFAC Inc.
b. American Cast Iron Pipe Company;Waterous Company Subsidiary.
c. Anvil International,Inc.
d. Clow Valve Company;a division of McWane,Inc.
e. Crane Co.;Crane Valve Group;Crane Valves.
f. Crane Co.;Crane Valve Group;Jenkins Valves.
g. Crane Co.;Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division.
h. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation.
i. Kennedy Valve;a division of McWane,Inc.
j. Milwaukee Valve Company.
k. Mueller Co.;Water Products Division.
1. NIBCOINC.
m. Potter Roemer.
n. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co.,Inc.
o. Tyco Fire&Building Products LP.
p. United Brass Works,Inc.
q. Victaulic Company.
DRY-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211316-5
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
r. Viking Corporation.
s. Watts Water Technologies,Inc.
2. Standard:UL 312.
3. Pressure Rating:250 psig minimum.
4. Type: Swing check.
5. Body Material:Cast iron.
6. End Connections: Flanged or grooved.
C. Indicating-Type Butterfly Valves:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the
following:
a. Anvil International,Inc.
b. Global Safety Products,Inc.
c. Kennedy Valve;a division of McWane,Inc.
d. Milwaukee Valve Company.
e. NIBCO INC.
f. Tyco Fire&Building Products LP.
g. Victaulic Company.
2. Standard: UL 1091.
3. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum.
4. Valves NPS 2 and Smaller:
a. Valve Type: Ball or butterfly.
b. Body Material:Bronze.
c. End Connections:Threaded.
5. Valves NPS 2-1/2 and Larger:
a. Valve Type:Butterfly.
b. Body Material:Cast or ductile iron.
c. End Connections: Flanged,grooved,or wafer.
6. Valve Operation: Integral electrical, 115-V ac, prewired, two-circuit, supervisory switch
and visual indicating device.
2.4 TRIM AND DRAIN VALVES
A. General Requirements:
1. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing or "Approval Guide,"
published by FM Global,listing.
2. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum.
B. Angle Valves:
DRY-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211316-6
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the
following:
a. Fire Protection Products,Inc.
IJ b. United Brass Works,Inc.
C. Ball Valves:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the
following:
a. Anvil International,Inc.
b. Conbraco Industries,Inc.;Apollo Valves.
c. Milwaukee Valve Company.
d. NIBCO INC.
e. Potter Roemer.
f. Tyco Fire&Building Products LP.
g. Victaulic Company.
h. Watts Water Technologies,Inc.
D. Globe Valves:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the
following:
a. Fire Protection Products,Inc.
b. United Brass Works, Inc.
2.5 SPECIALTY VALVES
A. General Requirements:
1. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing or "Approval Guide,"
published by FM Global,listing.
2. Pressure Rating:
a. Standard-Pressure Piping Specialty Valves: 175 psig minimum.
3. Body Material:Cast or ductile iron.
4. Size: Same as connected piping.
5. End Connections:Flanged or grooved.
B. Dry-Pipe Valves:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the
following:
a. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation.
b. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co.,Inc.
DRY-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211316-7
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
c. Tyco Fire&Building Products LP.
d. Victaulic Company.
e. Viking Corporation.
2. Standard:UL 260.
3. Design:Differential-pressure type.
4. Include UL 1486, quick-opening devices, trim sets for air supply, drain, priming level,
alarm connections, ball drip valves, pressure gages, priming chamber attachment, and
fill-line attachment.
5. Air-Pressure Maintenance Device:
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one
of the following:
1) Globe Fire Sprinlder Corporation.
2) Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co.,Inc.
3) Tyco Fire&Building Products LP.
4) Victaulic Company.
5) Viking Corporation.
b. Standard:UL 260.
c. Type:Automatic device to maintain minimum air pressure in piping.
d. Include shutoff valves to permit servicing without shutting down sprinkler piping,
bypass valve for quick filling, pressure regulator or switch to maintain pressure,
strainer, pressure ratings with 14- to 60-psigadjustable range, and 175-psig outlet
pressure.
6. Air Compressor:
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one
of the following:
1) Gast Manufacturing Inc.
2) General Air Products,Inc.
3) Viking Corporation.
b. Standard:UL's"Fire Protection Equipment Directory"listing or"Approval Guide,"
published by FM Global,listing.
c. Motor Horsepower: Fractional.
d. Power: 120-V ac,60 Hz,single phase.
2.6 SPRINKLER SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS
A. General Requirements for Dry-Pipe-System Fittings: UL listed for dry-pipe service.
B. Branch Outlet Fittings:
I. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
DRY-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211316-8
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
a. Anvil International,Inc.
b. Tyco Fire&Building Products LP.
c. Victaulic Company.
2. Standard:UL 213.
3. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum.
4. Body Material:Ductile-iron housing with EPDM seals and bolts and nuts.
5. Type: Mechanical-T and-cross fittings.
6. Configurations: Snap-on and strapless,ductile-iron housing with branch outlets.
7. Size: Of dimension to fit onto sprinkler main and with outlet connections as required to
match connected branch piping.
8. Branch Outlets:Grooved,plain-end pipe,or threaded.
C. Flow Detection and Test Assemblies:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the
following:
a. AGF Manufacturing Inc.
b. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co.,Inc.
c. Tyco Fire&Building Products LP.
d. Victaulic Company.
2. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing or "Approval Guide,"
published by FM Global,listing.
3. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum.
4. Body Material: Cast- or ductile-iron housing with orifice, sight glass, and integral test
valve.
5. Size: Same as connected piping.
6. Inlet and Outlet:Threaded.
D. Sprinkler Inspector's Test Fittings:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the
following:
a. Tyco Fire&Building Products LP.
b. Victaulic Company.
c. Viking Corporation.
2. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing or "Approval Guide,"
published by FM Global,listing.
3. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum.
4. Body Material:Cast-or ductile-iron housing with sight glass.
5. Size: Same as connected piping.
6. Inlet and Outlet:Threaded.
DRY-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211316-9
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
2.7 SPRINKLERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation.
2. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co.,Inc.
3. Tyco Fire&Building Products LP.
4. Victaulic Company.
5. Viking Corporation.
B. General Requirements:
1. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing or "Approval Guide,"
published by FM Global,listing.
2. Pressure Rating for Automatic Sprinklers: 175 psig minimum.
C. Automatic Sprinklers with Heat-Responsive Element:
1. Nonresidential Applications:UL 199.
2. Characteristics: Nominal 1/2-inchorifice with discharge coefficient K of 5.6, and for
"Ordinary" temperature classification rating unless otherwise indicated or required by
application.
D. Sprinkler Finishes:
1. Chrome plated.
2. Bronze.
3. Painted.
2.8 ALARM DEVICES
A. Alarm-device types shall match piping and equipment connections.
B. Pressure Switches:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the
following:
a. Potter Electric Signal Company. _
b. System Sensor;a Honeywell company.
c. Tyco Fire&Building Products LP.
d. United Electric Controls Co.
e. Viking Corporation.
2. Standard:UL 346.
3. Type: Electrically supervised water-flow switch with retard feature.
4. Components: Single-pole,double-throw switch with normally closed contacts.
5. Design Operation: Rising pressure signals water flow.
DRY-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211316- 10
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
6. Design Operation:Decrease in air pressure signals trouble.
C. Valve Supervisory Switches:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the
following:
a. Kennedy Valve;a division of McWane,Inc.
b. Potter Electric Signal Company.
2. Standard: UL 346.
3. Type: Electrically supervised.
4. Components: Single-pole,double-throw switch with normally closed contacts.
5. Design: Signals that controlled valve is in other than fully open position.
2.9 PRESSURE GAGES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. AMETEK,Inc.;U.S.Gauge Division.
2. Ashcroft,Inc.
3. Brecco Corporation.
4. WIKA Instrument Corporation.
B. Standard:UL 393.
C. Dial Size: 3-1/2-to 4-1/2-inch diameter.
D. Pressure Gage Range:0 to 250 psig minimum.
E. Water System Piping Gage: Include"WATER" or"AIR/WATER"label on dial face.
F. Air System Piping Gage: Include retard feature and"AIR"or"AIR/WATER"label on dial face.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Perform fire-hydrant flow test according to NFPA 13 and NFPA 291. Use results for system
design calculations required in"Quality Assurance"Article.
B. Report test results promptly and in writing.
3.2 WATER-SUPPLY CONNECTIONS
A. Connect sprinkler piping to building's interior fire protection piping.
DRY-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211316- 11
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
B. Install shutoff valve,check valve,pressure gage,and drain at connection to water supply.
3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general
location and arrangement of piping.Install piping as indicated,as far as practical.
1. Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval from
authorities having jurisdiction. File written approval with Architect before deviating from
approved working plans.
B. Piping Standard: Comply with requirements in NFPA 13 for installation of sprinkler piping.
C. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements in NFPA 13 for seismic-restraint
device materials and installation.
D. Use listed fittings to make changes in direction,branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions in
pipe sizes.
E. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 and smaller.
F. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves, apparatus, and
equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and larger end connections.
G. Install "Inspector's Test Connections" in sprinkler system piping, complete with shutoff valve,
and sized and located according to NFPA 13.
H. Install sprinkler piping with drains for complete system drainage.
I. Install automatic (ball drip) drain valves to drain piping between fire-department connections
and check valves.Drain to floor drain or to outside building.
J. Connect compressed-air supply to dry-pipe sprinkler piping.
K. Connect air compressor to the following piping and wiring:
1. Pressure gages and controls.
2. Electrical power system.
3. Fire-alarm devices,including low-pressure alarm.
L. Install alarm devices in piping systems. Contractor shall determine minimum air pressure
required to keep dry pipe valve closed, and adjust supervisory and alarm pressure switches
accordingly.
M. Install hangers and supports for sprinkler system piping according to NFPA 13. Comply with
requirements in NFPA 13 for hanger materials.
N. Install pressure gages on riser or feed main, and at each sprinkler test connection. Include
pressure gages with connection not less than NPS 1/4 and with soft metal seated globe valve,
DRY-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211316- 12
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
arranged for draining pipe between gage and valve. Install gages to permit removal, and install
where they will not be subject to freezing.
O. Drain dry-pipe sprinkler piping.
P. Pressurize and check dry-pipe sprinkler system piping,air-pressure maintenance devices and air
compressors.
Q. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls,ceilings,and floors.
R. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs.
S. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls,ceilings,and floors.
3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Install couplings, flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and special fittings
that have finish and pressure ratings same as or higher than system's pressure rating for
aboveground applications unless otherwise indicated. -
B. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 and smaller.
C. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves, apparatus, and
equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and larger end connections.
D. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs.Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
E. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before
assembly.
F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material in size,type,and thickness suitable for water
service.Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9.
G. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut
threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore
full ID.Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.
2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged.
H. Steel-Piping, Cut-Grooved Joints: Cut square-edge groove in end of pipe according to
AWWA C606.Assemble coupling with housing,gasket,lubricant,and bolts.Join steel pipe and
grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel-pipe joints.
I. Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both
piping systems.
DRY-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211316- 13
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
3.5 VALVE AND SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION
A. Install listed fire-protection valves, trim and drain valves, specialty valves and trim, controls,
and specialties according to NFPA 13 and authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Install listed fire-protection shutoff valves supervised open, located to control sources of water
supply except from fire-department connections. Install permanent identification signs
indicating portion of system controlled by each valve.
C. Install check valve in each water-supply connection. Install backflow preventers instead of
check valves in potable-water-supply sources.
D. Specialty Valves:
1. General Requirements: Install in vertical position for proper direction of flow, in main
supply to system.
2. Dry-Pipe Valves: Install trim sets for air supply, drain,priming level, alarm connections,
ball drip valves,pressure gages,priming chamber attachment,and fill-line attachment.
a. Install air compressor and compressed-air supply piping.
b. Air-Pressure Maintenance Device: Install shutoff valves to permit servicing
without shutting down sprinkler system; bypass valve for quick system filling;
pressure regulator or switch to maintain system pressure; strainer; pressure ratings
with 14-to 60-psig adjustable range;and 175-psig maximum inlet pressure.
c. Install compressed-air supply piping from building's compressed-air piping system.
3.6 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION
A. Install dry-type sprinklers with water supply from heated space. Do not install pendent or
sidewall,wet-type sprinklers in areas subject to freezing.
3.7 IDENTIFICATION
A. Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirements in
NFPA 13.
B. Identify system components,wiring,cabling,and terminals.
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. Leak Test: After installation, charge systems and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest
until no leaks exist.
DRY-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211316- 14
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
3. Flush, test,and inspect sprinkler systems according to NFPA 13, "Systems Acceptance"
Chapter.
4. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices.
5. Start and run air compressors.
6. Coordinate with fire-alarm tests.Operate as required.
C. Sprinkler piping system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.9 CLEANING
A. Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers.
B. Remove and replace sprinklers with paint other than factory finish.
3.10 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train. Train Owner's maintenance
personnel to adjust,operate,and maintain specialty valves.
3.11 PIPING SCHEDULE
A. Sprinkler specialty fittings may be used, downstream of control valves, instead of specified
fittings.
B. Standard-pressure,dry-pipe sprinkler system,NPS 2 and smaller,shall be one of the following:
1. Standard-weight, galvanized-steel pipe with threaded ends; galvanized, gray-iron
threaded fittings;and threaded joints.
2. Standard-weight, galvanized-steel pipe with cut-grooved ends; galvanized, grooved-end
fittings for steel piping;grooved-end-pipe couplings for steel piping;and grooved joints.
C. Standard-pressure,dry-pipe sprinkler system,NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4,shall be of the following:
1. Standard-weight, galvanized-steel pipe with cut-grooved ends; galvanized, grooved-end
fittings for steel piping;grooved-end-pipe couplings for steel piping;and grooved joints.
D. Standard-pressure,dry-pipe sprinkler system,NPS 5 and NPS 6,shall be of the following:
1. Standard-weight, galvanized-steel pipe with cut-grooved ends; galvanized, grooved-end
fittings for steel piping;grooved-end-pipe couplings for steel piping;and grooved joints.
DRY-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211316- 15
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
3.12 SPRINKLER SCHEDULE
A. Use sprinkler types in subparagraphs below for the following applications:
1. Rooms without Ceilings: Upright sprinklers.
B. Provide sprinkler types in subparagraphs below with finishes indicated.
1. Upright Sprinklers: Chrome plated in finished spaces exposed to view; rough bronze in
unfinished spaces not exposed to view.
END OF SECTION 211316
DRY-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211316- 16
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 221116-DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes domestic water piping inside the building.
B. Water meters will be furnished and installed by utility company.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For pipe,tube,fittings,and couplings.
B. Field quality-control test reports.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Piping materials shall bear label,stamp,or other markings of specified testing agency.
B. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1
through 9," for potable domestic water piping and components.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Refer to Part 3 "Pipe and Fitting Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting,and
joining materials.
B. Transition Couplings for Aboveground Pressure Piping: Coupling or other manufactured fitting
the same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to and ends compatible with, piping to be
joined.
2.2 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
A. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88,Types K,water tube,annealed temper.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought-
copper,solder joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated.
2. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder joint ends. Furnish Class 300
flanges if required to match piping.
3. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-and-
socket,metal-to-metal seating surfaces,and solder joint or threaded ends.
B. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88,Types L,water tube,drawn temper.
1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought-
copper,solder joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated.
2. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder joint ends. Furnish Class 300
flanges if required to match piping.
3. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-and-
socket,metal-to-metal seating surfaces,and solder joint or threaded ends.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 EXCAVATION
A. Excavating,trenching,and backfilling are specified in Division 02 Section"Earthwork."
3.2 PIPE AND FITTING APPLICATIONS
A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used
in applications below,unless otherwise indicated.
B. Flanges may be used on aboveground piping,unless otherwise indicated.
C. Under-Building-Slab, Water-Service Piping on Service Side of Water Meter: Refer to
Division 02 Section "Water Distribution."
D. Under-Building-Slab, Domestic Water Piping on House Side of Water Meter, NPS 6 and
Smaller: Soft copper tube,Type K; copper pressure fittings;and brazed joints.
E. Aboveground Domestic Water Piping: Use the following piping materials:
1. NPS 6 and Smaller: Hard copper tube, Type L; copper pressure fittings; and soldered
joints.
3.3 VALVE APPLICATIONS
A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the
following requirements apply:
1. Shutoff Duty: Use bronze ball valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use cast-iron
butterfly valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116-2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
2. Throttling Duty: Use bronze ball or globe valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use
cast-iron butterfly valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
3. Hot-Water-Piping,Balancing Duty: Calibrated balancing valves.
4. Drain Duty: Hose-end drain valves.
B. Install shutoff valve close to water main on each branch and riser serving plumbing fixtures or
equipment, on each water supply to equipment, and on each water supply to plumbing fixtures
that do not have supply stops. Use ball valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use butterfly
valves for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
C. Install drain valves for equipment at base of each water riser,at low points in horizontal piping,
and where required to drain water piping.
1. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water mains,risers,and branches.
2. Install stop-and-waste drain valves where indicated.
D. Install calibrated balancing valves in each hot-water circulation return branch and discharge side
of each pump and circulator. Set calibrated balancing valves partly open to restrict but not stop
flow.
3.4 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Install under-building-slab copper tubing according to CDA's"Copper Tube Handbook."
B. Install sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe penetration
through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to make
installation watertight.
C. Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve,
inside the building at each domestic water service entrance. -
D. Install domestic water piping level and plumb.
E. Rough-in domestic water piping for water-meter installation according to utility company's
requirements.
3.5 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-free-
alloy solder;and ASTM B 828 procedure,unless otherwise indicated.-
3.6 WATER METER INSTALLATION
A. Rough-in domestic water piping for water meter installation according to utility company's
requirements.
B. Water meters will be furnished and installed by utility company.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116-3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
3.7 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum
rod diameters:
1. NPS 3/4 and Smaller. 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
2. NPS 1 and NPS 1-1/4: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
4. NPS 2-1/2: 108 inches with 1/2-inch rod.
5. NPS 3 to NPS 5: 10 feet with 1/2-inch rod.
B. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet.
C. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written
instructions.
3.8 CONNECTIONS
A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping,fittings,and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance.
C. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use transition fitting to join
dissimilar piping materials.
D. Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve, and extend and
connect to the following:
1. Water Heaters: Cold-water supply and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated,but not
smaller than sizes of water heater connections.
2. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold-and hot-water supply piping in sizes indicated,but not smaller
than required by plumbing code.
3. Equipment: Cold- and hot-water supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than
equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use
flanges instead of unions for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect domestic water piping as follows:
1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and
approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
2. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before
inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having
jurisdiction:
a. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or
closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116-4
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
b. Final Inspection: Arrange fmal inspection for authorities having jurisdiction to
observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
3. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or
inspection,make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. Test domestic water piping as follows:
1. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound
and that piping is full of water.
2. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been
altered, extended,or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report
for each test,complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
3. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and
unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or
concealed before it was tested.
4. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure,
without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and
allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must
be repaired.
5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until
_ satisfactory results are obtained.
6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
3.10 ADJUSTING
A. Perform the following adjustments before operation:
1. Close drain valves,hydrants,and hose bibbs.
2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position.
3. Open throttling valves to proper setting.
4. Adjust balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide adequate flow.
a. Adjust calibrated balancing valves to flows indicated.
5. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and plugs used for temporary sealing of
piping during installation.
6. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs.
7. Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified for
application where used and are clean and ready for use.
8. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings,adjustments,and operation.
3.11 CLEANING
A. Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows:
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116-5
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1. Purge new piping and parts of existing domestic water piping that have been altered,
extended,or repaired before using.
2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or,
if methods are not prescribed, procedures described in either AWWA C651 or AWWA
C652 or as described below:
a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at
outlets.
b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:
1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm
of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.
2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200
ppm of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.
c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from
system after the standing time.
d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat
procedures if biological examination shows contamination.
B. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities.
C. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
END OF SECTION 221116
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116-6
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 221119-DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following domestic water piping specialties:
1. Vacuum breakers.
2. Backflow preventers.
_ 3. Water pressure-reducing valves.
4. Balancing valves.
5. Temperature-actuated water mixing valves.
6. Strainers.
7. Hose stations.
8. Hose bibbs.
9. Wall hydrants.
10. Water hammer arresters.
11. Trap-seal primer valves.
1.3 - PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Minimum Working Pressure for Domestic Water Piping Specialties: 125 psig,unless otherwise
indicated.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power,signal,and control wiring.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For domestic water piping specialties to include in
emergency,operation,and maintenance manuals.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. NSF Compliance:
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1
through 9."
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 VACUUM BREAKERS
A. Pipe-Applied,Atmospheric-Type Vacuum Breakers:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. Ames Co.
b. Cash Acme.
c. Conbraco Industries, Inc.
d. FEBCO; SPX Valves&Controls.
e. Rain Bird Corporation.
f. Toro Company(The); Irrigation Div.
g. Watts Industries, Inc.;Water Products Div.
h. Zurn Plumbing Products Group;Wilkins Div.
2. Standard: ASSE 1001.
3. Size: NPS 1/4 to NPS 3,as required to match connected piping.
4. Body: Bronze.
5. Inlet and Outlet Connections: Threaded.
6. Finish: Chrome plated.
B. Pressure Vacuum Breakers:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. Ames Co.
b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.
c. FEBCO; SPX Valves&Controls.
d. Flomatic Corporation.
e. Toro Company(The); Irrigation Div.
f. Watts Industries,Inc.; Water Products Div.
g. Zurn Plumbing Products Group;Wilkins Div.
2. Standard: ASSE 1020.
3. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications.
4. Pressure Loss: 5 psig maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range.
5. Accessories:
a. Valves: Ball type,on inlet and outlet.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119-2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
2.2 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
A. Reduced-Pressure-Principle Backflow Preventers:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by
one of the following:
a. Ames Co.
b. Conbraco Industries,Inc.
c. FEBCO; SPX Valves&Controls.
d. Flomatic Corporation.
e. Watts Industries,Inc.;Water Products Div.
f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group;Wilkins Div.
B. Double-Check Backflow-Prevention Assemblies:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by
one of the following:
a. Ames Co. -
b. Conbraco Industries,Inc.
c. FEBCO; SPX Valves&Controls.
d. Flomatic Corporation.
e. Watts Industries,Inc.;Water Products Div.
f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group;Wilkins Div.
2. Accessories:
a. Valves: Ball type with threaded ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 2 and smaller;
outside screw and yoke gate-type with flanged ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 2-
1/2 and larger. -
C. Beverage-Dispensing-Equipment Backflow Preventers:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by
one of the following:
a. Conbraco Industries,Inc.
b. Watts Industries,Inc.;Water Products Div.
c. Zurn Plumbing Products Group;Wilkins Div.
2.3 BALANCING VALVES
A. Automatic Flow-Control Balancing Valves: Factory set to maintain constant flow with plus or
minus 5 percent over system pressure fluctuations. Each valve shall have an identification tag
attached by chain,and be factory marked with the zone identification, valve number, and flow
rate. Valve shall be line size with the following design:
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119-3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1. Brass or ferrous-metal body,designed for 150 psig at 250 deg F with corrosion-resistant,
tamperproof, self-cleaning, piston-spring assembly easily removable for inspection or
replacement.
B. Accessories: Meter hoses,fittings,valves,differential pressure meter,and carrying case.
2.4 TEMPERATURE-ACTUATED WATER MIXING VALVES
A. Water-Temperature Limiting Devices:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by
one of the following:
a. Armstrong International,Inc.
b. Bradley Corporation.
c. Cash Acme.
d. Conbraco Industries,Inc.
e. Honeywell Water Controls.
f. Legend Valve.
g. Leonard Valve Company.
h. Powers; a Watts Industries Co.
i. Symmons Industries, Inc.
j. Taco, Inc.
k. Watts Industries,Inc.;Water Products Div.
1. Zurn Plumbing Products Group;Wilkins Div.
B. Primary,Thermostatic,Water Mixing Valves:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by
one of the following:
a. Armstrong International, Inc.
b. Bradley Corporation.
c. Lawler Manufacturing Company, Inc.
d. Leonard Valve Company.
e. Powers; a Watts Industries Co.
f. Symmons Industries, Inc.
C. Individual-Fixture,Water Tempering Valves:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by
the following:
a. Honeywell Water Controls.
D. Primary Water Tempering Valves:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119-4
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
a. Heat-Timer Corporation.
b. Holby Valve Co.,Inc.
2.5 STRAINERS FOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
A. Y-Pattern Strainers:
1. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum,unless otherwise indicated.
2. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller;cast iron for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
3. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller;flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
4. Screen: Stainless steel with round perforations,unless otherwise indicated.
5. Drain: Factory-installed,hose-end drain valve.
2.6 HOSE BIBBS
A. Hose Bibbs:
1. Standard: ASME A112.18.1 for sediment faucets.
2. Body Material: Bronze.
3. Seat: Bronze,replaceable.
4. Supply Connections: NPS 1/2 or NPS 3/4 threaded or solder joint inlet.
5. Outlet Connection: Garden-hose thread complying with ASME B 1.20.7.
6. Pressure Rating: 125 psig.
7. Vacuum Breaker: Integral nonremovable, drainable, hose-connection vacuum breaker
complying with ASSE 1011.
8. Finish for Equipment Rooms: Rough bronze,or chrome or nickel plated.
9. Finish for Service Areas: Chrome or nickel plated.
10. Finish for Finished Rooms: Chrome or nickel plated.
11. Operation for Equipment Rooms: Wheel handle or operating key.
12. Operation for Service Areas: Wheel handle.
13. Operation for Finished Rooms: Wheel handle.
14. Include wall flange with each chrome-or nickel-plated hose bibb.
2.7 WALL HYDRANTS
A. Nonfreeze Wall Hydrants:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by
one of the following:
a. Josam Company.
b. MIFAB,Inc.
c. Prier Products,Inc.
d. Smith,Jay R.Mfg.Co.;Division of Smith Industries,Inc.
e. Tyler Pipe;Wade Div.
f. Watts Drainage Products Inc.
g. Woodford Manufacturing Company.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119-5
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
h. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation.
i. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
2. Inlet: NPS 3/4 or NPS 1.
3. Outlet: Concealed,with integral vacuum breaker and garden-hose thread complying with
ASME B1.20.7.
4. Box: Deep,flush mounting with cover.
5. Box and Cover Finish: Polished nickel bronze or chrome plated.
6. Outlet: Exposed, with integral vacuum breaker and garden-hose thread complying with
ASME B1.20.7.
7. Nozzle and Wall-Plate Finish: Polished nickel bronze.
8. Operating Keys: Two with each wall hydrant.
B. Nonfreeze,Hot-and Cold-Water Wall Hydrants:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by
one of the following:
a. Josam Company.
b. Prier Products, Inc.
c. Smith,Jay R. Mfg.Co.; Division of Smith Industries,Inc.
d. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
e. Watts Drainage Products Inc.
f. Woodford Manufacturing Company.
g. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
C. Vacuum Breaker Wall Hydrants:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by
one of the following:
a. Arrowhead Brass Products,Inc.
b. Mansfield Plumbing Products LLC.
c. McDonald,A. Y. Mfg.Co.
d. Prier Products, Inc.
e. Smith,Jay. R.Mfg.Co.;Division of Smith Industries,Inc.
f. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
g. Woodford Manufacturing Company.
h. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation.
2.8 WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS
A. Water Hammer Arresters:
I. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. AMTROL, Inc.
b. Josam Company.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119-6
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
c. MIFAB,Inc.
d. PPP Inc.
e. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company,Inc.
f. Smith,Jay R.Mfg.Co.;Division of Smith Industries,Inc.
g. Tyler Pipe;Wade Div.
h. Watts Drainage Products Inc.
i. Zurn Plumbing Products Group;Specification Drainage Operation.
2.9 TRAP-SEAL PRIMER VALVES
A. Supply-Type,Trap-Seal Primer Valves:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by
one of the following:
a. MIFAB,Inc.
b. PPP Inc.
c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company,Inc.
d. Smith,Jay R.Mfg.Co.;Division of Smith Industries,Inc.
e. Watts Industries,Inc.;Water Products Div.
2. Standard: ASSE 1018.
3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum.
4. Body: Bronze.
5. Inlet and Outlet Connections: NPS 1/2 threaded,union,or solder joint.
6. Gravity Drain Outlet Connection: NPS 1/2 threaded or solder joint.
7. Finish: Chrome plated, or rough bronze for units used with pipe or tube that is not
chrome finished.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Section 230500"Common Work Results for HVAC" for piping joining materials,joint
construction,and basic installation requirements.
B. Install backflow preventers in each water supply to mechanical equipment and systems and to
other equipment and water systems that may be sources of contamination. Comply with
authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Locate backflow preventers in same room as connected equipment or system.
2. Install drain for backflow preventers with atmospheric-vent drain connection with air-gap
fitting, fixed air-gap fitting, or equivalent positive pipe separation of at least two pipe
diameters in drain piping and pipe to floor drain. Locate air-gap device attached to or
under backflow preventer. Simple air breaks are not acceptable for this application.
3. Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119-7
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
C. Install balancing valves in locations where they can easily be adjusted.
D. Install temperature-actuated water mixing valves with check stops or shutoff valves on inlets
and with shutoff valve on outlet.
1. Install thermometers and water regulators if specified.
2. Install cabinet-type units recessed in or surface mounted on wall as specified.
E. Install Y-pattern strainers for water on supply side of each control valve and pump.
F. Install hose stations with check stops or shutoff valves on inlets and with thermometer on outlet.
1. Install shutoff valve on outlet if specified.
2. Install cabinet-type units recessed in or surface mounted on wall as specified. Install 2-
by-4-inch fire-retardant-treated-wood blocking wall reinforcement between studs. Fire-
retardant-treated-wood blocking is specified in Division 06 Section"Rough Carpentry."
G. Install water hammer arresters in water piping according to PDI-WH 201.
H. Install air vents at high points of water piping.
I. Install supply-type, trap-seal primer valves with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a
minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust valve for
proper flow.
J. Install trap-seal primer systems with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a minimum of
1 percent,and connect to floor-drain body,trap,or inlet fitting. Adjust system for proper flow.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Mechanical Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping and specialties.
B. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
C. Connect wiring according to Section 280513 "Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety."
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following tests and prepare test reports:
1. Test each pressure vacuum breaker, reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventer, and
double-check backflow-prevention assembly according to authorities having jurisdiction
and the device's reference standard.
B. Remove and replace malfunctioning domestic water piping specialties and retest as specified
above.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119-8
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Set field-adjustable flow set points of balancing valves.
B. Set field-adjustable temperature set points of temperature-actuated water mixing valves.
END OF SECTION 221119
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119-9
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 221123-DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following all-bronze and bronze-fitted centrifugal pumps for domestic
cold-and hot-water circulation:
1. High velocity cartridge circulator.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type and size of domestic water pump specified. Include certified
performance curves with operating points plotted on curves; and rated capacities of selected
models,furnished specialties,and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power,signal,and control wiring.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For domestic water pumps to include in emergency,
operation,and maintenance manuals.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 778 for motor-operated water pumps.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1
DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS 221123- 1
■
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,
manufacturers specified.
2.2 HIGH VELOCITY CARTRIDGE CIRCULATOR
A. Available Manufacturers:
I. Armstrong Pumps Inc.
2. Bell&Gossett Domestic Pump; ITT Industries.
3. Grundfos Pumps Corp.
4. Taco, Inc.
B. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, single-stage, close-coupled, in-line, sealless
centrifugal pumps.
1. Pump and Motor Assembly: Hermetically sealed, replaceable-cartridge-type unit with
motor and impeller on common shaft and designed for installation with pump and motor
shaft mounted horizontally.
2. Casing: Bronze,with threaded companion-flange connections.
3. Impeller: Corrosion-resistant material.
4. Motor: Single speed,unless otherwise indicated.
2.3 CONTROLS
A. Thermostats: Electric;adjustable for control of hot-water circulation pump.
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. Honeywell International, Inc.
b. Square D.
c. White-Rodgers Div.; Emerson Electric Co.
2. Type: Water-immersion sensor,for installation in hot-water circulation piping.
3. Range: 100 to 240 deg F.
4. Operation of Pump: On or off.
5. Transformer: Provide if required.
6. Power Requirement: 120 V,ac.
7. Settings: Start pump at 125 deg F and stop pump at 140 deg F.
B. Strap-on aquastat.
C. Timer.
DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS 221123-2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in of domestic-water-piping system to verify actual locations of connections
before pump installation.
3.2 PUMP INSTALLATION
A. Comply with HI 1.4.
B. Install pumps with access for periodic maintenance including removal of motors, impellers,
couplings,and accessories.
C. Independently support pumps and piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps and
weight of pumps is not supported by piping.
D. Install in-line,sealless centrifugal pumps with motor and pump shafts horizontal.
3.3 CONTROL INSTALLATION
A. Install immersion-type thermostats in hot-water return piping.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping,fittings,and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to pumps to allow service and maintenance.
C. Connect domestic water piping to pumps. Install suction and discharge piping equal to or
greater than size of pump nozzles.
1. Install shutoff valve and strainer on suction side of pumps,and check valve and throttling
valve on discharge side of pumps. Install valves same size as connected piping.
2. Install pressure gages at suction and discharge of pumps. Install at integral pressure-gage
tappings where provided or install pressure-gage connectors in suction and discharge
piping around pumps.
D. Ground equipment according to Section 260526"Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
E. Connect wiring according to Section 280513"Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety."
F. Connect thermostats to pumps that they control.
DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS 221123-3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
3.5 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Engage a service representative to perform startup service.
1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Check piping connections for tightness.
3. Clean strainers on suction piping.
4. Set thermostats for automatic starting and stopping operation of pumps.
5. Perform the following startup checks for each pump before starting:
a. Verify bearing lubrication.
b. Verify that pump is free to rotate by hand and that pump for handling hot liquid is
free to rotate with pump hot and cold. If pump is bound or drags, do not operate
until cause of trouble is determined and corrected.
c. Verify that pump is rotating in the correct direction.
6. Prime pump by opening suction valves and closing drains, and prepare pump for
operation.
7. Start motor.
8. Open discharge valve slowly.
9. Adjust temperature settings on thermostats.
10. Adjust timer settings.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and
maintain controls and pumps.
END OF SECTION 221123
DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS 221123 -4
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 221316-SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following for soil,waste,and vent piping inside the building:
1. Pipe,tube,and fittings.
2. Special pipe fittings.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
B. LLDPE: Linear,low-density polyethylene plastic.
C. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.
D. PE: Polyethylene plastic.
E. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working
pressure,unless otherwise indicated:
1. Soil,Waste,and Vent Piping: 10 foot head of water.
B. Seismic Performance: Soil,waste,and vent piping and support and installation shall be capable
of withstanding the effects of seismic events determined according to ASCE 7, "Minimum
Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures."
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For pipe,tube,fittings,and couplings.
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85% PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Piping materials shall bear label,stamp,or other markings of specified testing agency.
B. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic
piping components. Include marking with"NSF-dwv" for plastic drain,waste,and vent piping;
"NSF-drain" for plastic drain piping; "NSF-tubular" for plastic continuous waste piping; and
"NSF-sewer"for plastic sewer piping.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining
materials.
2.2 HUBLESS CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301.
B. Shielded Couplings: ASTM C 1277 assembly of metal shield or housing, corrosion-resistant
fasteners,and rubber sleeve with integral,center pipe stop.
1. Standard,Shielded, Stainless-Steel Couplings: CISPI 310,with stainless-steel corrugated
shield;stainless-steel bands and tightening devices;and ASTM C 564,rubber sleeve.
a. Available Manufacturers:
1) ANACO.
2) Fernco,Inc.
3) Ideal Div.; Stant Corp.
4) Mission Rubber Co.
5) Tyler Pipe; Soil Pipe Div.
2. Heavy-Duty, Shielded, Stainless-Steel Couplings: With stainless-steel shield, stainless-
steel bands and tightening devices,and ASTM C 564,rubber sleeve.
a. Available Manufacturers:
1) ANACO.
2) Clamp-All Corp.
3) Ideal Div.; Stant Corp.
4) Mission Rubber Co.
5) Tyler Pipe;Soil Pipe Div.
3. Heavy-Duty, Shielded, Cast-Iron Couplings: ASTM A 48/A 48M, two-piece, cast-iron
housing;stainless-steel bolts and nuts;and ASTM C 564,rubber sleeve.
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316-2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
a. Available Manufacturers:
1) MG Piping Products Co.
2.3 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Solid-Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665,drain,waste,and vent.
1. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, socket type,made to ASTM D 3311,drain, waste,
and vent patterns.
2.4 SPECIAL PIPE FITTINGS
A. Pressure Pipe Couplings: AWWA C219 metal,sleeve-type same size as,with pressure rating at
least equal to,and ends compatible with,pipes to be joined.
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg.Co.
I b. Dresser,Inc.;DMD Div.
c. EBAA Iron Sales,Inc.
d. Ford Meter Box Company,Inc. (The);Pipe Products Div.
e. JCM Industries,Inc.
f. Romac Industries,Inc.
g. Smith-Blair,Inc.
I h. Viking Johnson.
2. Center-Sleeve Material: Manufacturer's standard.
3. Gasket Material: Natural or synthetic rubber.
I4. Metal Component Finish: Corrosion-resistant coating or material.
B. Expansion Joints: Two or three-piece,ductile-iron assembly consisting of telescoping sleeve(s)
I with gaskets and restrained-type, ductile-iron, bell-and-spigot end sections complying with
AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Select and assemble components for expansion indicated.
Include AWWA C111,ductile-iron glands,rubber gaskets,and steel bolts.
I1. Available Manufacturers:
a. EBAA Iron Sales,Inc.
I b. Romac Industries,Inc.
c. Star Pipe Products; Star Fittings Div.
C. Wall-Penetration Fittings: Compound, ductile-iron coupling fitting with sleeve and flexing
I sections for up to 20-degree deflection, gaskets, and restrained joint ends complying with
AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Include AWWA C111, ductile-iron glands, rubber gaskets,
and steel bolts.
1. Available Manufacturers:
1 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316-3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
a. SIGMA Corp.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 EXCAVATION
A. Refer to Division 31 Section"Earthwork" for excavating, trenching,and backfilling.
3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping,unless otherwise indicated.
B. Aboveground,soil and waste piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be any of the following:
1. Service class,cast-iron soil pipe and fittings;gaskets;and compression joints.
2. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; heavy-duty shielded couplings; and hubless-
coupling joints.
3. Solid-wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings,and solvent-cemented joints.
C. Aboveground,vent piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be any of the following:
1. Service class,cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets;and compression joints.
2. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; heavy-duty shielded couplings; and hubless-
coupling joints.
3. Solid-wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings,and solvent-cemented joints.
D. Underground,soil,waste,and vent piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be any of the following:
1. Service class,cast-iron soil piping; gaskets;and gasketed joints.
2. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; heavy-duty shielded couplings; and hubless-
coupling joints.
3. Solid wall PVC pipe,PVC socket fittings,and solvent-cemented joints.
E. Underground,soil and waste piping NPS 5 and larger shall be any of the following:
1. Service class,cast-iron soil piping;gaskets; and compression joints.
2. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; heavy-duty shielded couplings; and hubless-
coupling joints.
3. Solid-wall, Schedule 40,PVC pipe; PVC socket fittings; and solvent-cemented joints.
3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Sanitary sewer piping outside the building is specified in Division 22 Section "Facility Sanitary
Sewerage."
B. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 22 Sections.
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316-4
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
C. Install seismic restraints on piping. Seismic-restraint devices are specified in Division 22
Section"Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls."
D. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building
sanitary sewers.
E. Install wall-penetration fitting at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Make
installation watertight.
F. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook,"
Chapter IV,"Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."
1. Install encasement on underground piping according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105.
G. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate
branches,bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used
on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn,
double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if 2 fixtures are installed back to back or side by side
with common drain pipe. Straight tees,elbows,and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not
change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and
reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction
of flow is prohibited.
H. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to
grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping
upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of
lubricants,cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past
each joint as completed.
I. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, unless
otherwise indicated:
1. Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and
smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and larger.
2. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow.
3. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.
J. Install engineered soil and waste drainage and vent piping systems as follows:
1. Combination Waste and Vent: Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Reduced-Size Venting: Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction.
' K. Sleeves are not required for cast-iron soil piping passing through concrete slabs-on-grade if slab
is without membrane waterproofing.
L. Install PVC soil and waste drainage and vent piping according to ASTM D 2665.
M. Install underground PVC soil and waste drainage piping according to ASTM D 2321.
I
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316-5
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
N. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by
authorities having jurisdiction.
3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Division 23 Section "Basic
Mechanical Materials and Methods."
B. Join hubless cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and
Fittings Handbook" for hubless-coupling joints.
C. PVC Nonpressure Piping Joints: Join piping according to ASTM D 2665.
3.5 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Seismic-restraint devices are specified in Division 23 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls
and Seismic Restraints."
B. Pipe hangers and supports are specified in Division 23 Section"Hangers and Supports." Install
the following:
1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42,clamps.
2. Install individual,straight,horizontal piping runs according to the following:
a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1,adjustable,steel clevis hangers.
b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43,adjustable roller hangers.
c. Longer Than 100 Feet,if Indicated: MSS Type 49,spring cushion rolls.
3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44,pipe rolls.
Support pipe rolls on trapeze.
4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52,spring hangers.
C. Install supports according to Division 23 Section"Hangers and Supports."
D. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
E. Install hangers for PVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum
rod diameters:
1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 48 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
2. NPS 3: 48 inches with 1/2-inch rod.
3. NPS 4 and 5: 48 inches with 5/8-inch rod.
F. Install supports for vertical PVC piping every 48 inches.
G. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written
instructions.
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316-6
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
3.6 CONNECTIONS
A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping,fittings,and specialties.
B. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join
dissimilar piping materials.
C. Connect drainage and vent piping to the following:
1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than
required by plumbing code.
2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated,
but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not
smaller than required by plumbing code.
4. Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve, if indicated,
and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connections NPS 2-1/2
and larger.
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection
must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in
after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.
2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to
observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection,
make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction
or,in absence of published procedures,as follows:
1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been
altered,extended,or repaired. If testing is performed in segments,submit separate report
for each test,complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended,or replaced drainage and vent
piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed
before it was tested.
3. Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping, except outside
leaders, on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with
water to point of overflow, but not less than 10 foot head of water. From 15 minutes
before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect
joints for leaks.
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316-7
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps
filled with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug vent-
stack openings on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into
piping system equal to pressure of 1 inch wg. Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap
of water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without
introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture
connections for gas and water leaks.
5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until
satisfactory results are obtained.
6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
3.8 CLEANING
A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris
and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day-and when work stops.
3.9 PROTECTION
A. Exposed PVC Piping: Protect plumbing vents exposed to sunlight with two coats of water-
based latex paint.
END OF SECTION 221316
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316-8
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 221319- SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following drainage piping specialties:
1. Cleanouts.
2. Floor drains.
3. Trench drains.
4. Miscellaneous drainage piping specialties.
5. Flashing materials.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.
B. FOG: Fats,oils,and greases.
C. FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic.
jD. HDPE: High-density polyethylene plastic.
E. PE: Polyethylene plastic.
F. PP: Polypropylene plastic.
G. PUR: Polyurethane plastic.
H. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating
characteristics, and accessories.
B. Field quality-control test reports.
SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For drainage piping specialties to include in operation and
maintenance manuals.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing
agency.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
C. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic sanitary
and storm piping specialty components.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,
reinforcement,and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.
B. Coordinate size and location of roof penetrations.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 CLEANOUTS
A. Exposed Metal Cleanouts:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Josam Company;Josam Div.
b. MIFAB, Inc.
c. Smith,Jay R. Mfg. Co.;Division of Smith Industries,Inc.
d. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
e. Watts Drainage Products Inc.
f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
2. Closure: Stainless steel plug with seal.
B. Metal Floor Cleanouts:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,
the following:
SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319-2
P,� 4
S tt
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
a. Josam Company;Josam Div.
b. Oatey.
c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company,Inc.
d. Smith,Jay R.Mfg.Co.;Division of Smith Industries,Inc.
e. Tyler Pipe;Wade Div.
f. Watts Drainage Products Inc.
g. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
C. Cast-Iron Wall Cleanouts:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Josam Company,Josam Div.
b. MIFAB,Inc.
c. Smith,Jay R.Mfg.Co.;Division of Smith Industries,Inc.
d. Tyler Pipe;Wade Div.
e. Watts Drainage Products Inc.
f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
2.2 FLOOR DRAINS
A. Cast-Iron Floor Drains:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Commercial Enameling Co.
b. Josam Company;Josam Div.
c. MIFAB,Inc.
d. Prier Products,Inc.
e. Smith,Jay R.Mfg.Co.;Division of Smith Industries,Inc.
f. Tyler Pipe;Wade Div.
g. Watts Drainage Products Inc.
h. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
2.3 TRENCH DRAINS
A. Trench Drains:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Josam Company;Josam Div.
b. MIFAB,Inc.
SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319-3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
c. Smith,Jay R.Mfg.Co.;Division of Smith Industries,Inc.
d. Tyler Pipe;Wade Div.
e. Watts Drainage Products Inc.
f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Deep-Seal Traps:
1. Description: Cast-iron or bronze casting,with inlet and outlet matching connected piping
and cleanout trap-seal primer valve connection.
2. Size: Same as connected waste piping.
a. NPS 2: 4 inch minimum water seal.
b. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: 5 inch minimum water seal.
B. Floor-Drain,Trap-Seal Primer Fittings:
1. Description: Cast iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and trap-seal
primer valve connection.
2. Size: Same as floor drain outlet with NPS 1/2 side inlet.
C. Air-Gap Fittings:
1. Standard: ASME A112.1.2,for fitting designed to ensure fixed,positive air gap between
installed inlet and outlet piping.
2. Body: Bronze or cast iron.
3. Inlet: Opening in top of body.
4. Outlet: Larger than inlet.
5. Size: Same as connected waste piping and with inlet large enough for associated indirect
waste piping.
2.5 FLASHING MATERIALS
A. Lead Sheet: ASTM B 749,Type L51121,copper bearing,with the following minimum weights
and thicknesses,unless otherwise indicated:
1. General Use: 4.0 lb/sq.ft.,0.0625-inch thickness.
2. Vent Pipe Flashing: 3.0 lb/sq. ft.,0.0469-inch thickness.
3. Burning: 6-lb/sq. ft.,0.0938-inch thickness.
B. Copper Sheet: ASTM B 152/B 152M, of the following minimum weights and thicknesses,
unless otherwise indicated:
1. General Applications: 12 oz./sq.ft.
2. Vent Pipe Flashing: 8 oz./sq. ft.
SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319-4
7
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
C. Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with 0.20 percent copper content and 0.04-
inch minimum thickness, unless otherwise indicated. Include G90 hot-dip galvanized, mill-
phosphatized finish for painting if indicated.
D. Elastic Membrane Sheet: ASTM D 4068, flexible, chlorinated polyethylene, 40 mil minimum
thickness.
E. Fasteners: Metal compatible with material and substrate being fastened.
F. Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units
required for installation;matching or compatible with material being installed.
G. Solder: ASTM B 32,lead-free alloy.
H. Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12,solvent-type,bituminous mastic.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Section 230500 "Common Work Results for HVAC" for piping joining materials,joint
construction,and basic installation requirements.
B. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following,
unless otherwise indicated:
1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless
larger cleanout is indicated.
2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees. -
3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet for
larger piping.
4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.
C. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with
finished floor.
D. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types
indicated,with frame and cover flush with finished wall.
E. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with
finished floor,unless otherwise indicated.
1. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance.
2. Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor drainage.
Set with grates depressed according to the following drainage area radii:
a. Radius,30 Inches or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope,but not less than 1/4-inch
total depression.
SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319-5
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
b. Radius,30 to 60 Inches: Equivalent to 1 percent slope.
3. Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and
adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.
4. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless
otherwise indicated.
F. Install trench drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with
finished surface,unless otherwise indicated.
G. Install roof flashing assemblies on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend through roof.
H. Install through-penetration firestop assemblies in plastic conductors and stacks at floor
penetrations.
I. Install deep-seal traps on floor drains and other waste outlets,if indicated.
J. Install floor-drain, trap-seal primer fittings on inlet to floor drains that require trap-seal primer
connection.
K. Install air-gap fittings on draining-type backflow preventers and on indirect-waste piping
discharge into sanitary drainage system.
L. Install sleeve flashing device with each riser and stack passing through floors with waterproof
membrane.
M. Install frost-resistant vent terminals on each vent pipe passing through roof. Maintain 1-inch
clearance between vent pipe and roof substrate.
N. Install expansion joints on vertical stacks and conductors. Position expansion joints for easy
access and maintenance.
O. Install frost-proof vent caps on each vent pipe passing through roof. Maintain 1-inch clearance
between vent pipe and roof substrate.
P. Install wood-blocking reinforcement for wall-mounting-type specialties.
Q. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is
indicated.
R. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locations and
within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding
pipe fittings.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Plumbing Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping,fittings,and specialties.
SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319-6
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.
C. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
D. Connect wiring according to Section 280513 "Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety."
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tests and Inspections:
I. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest
until no leaks exist.
2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and
to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.
B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.
END OF SECTION 221319
■
SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319-7
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 223400-FUEL-FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following fuel-fired water heaters:
1. Commercial,high-efficiency,gas water heaters.
2. Water heater accessories.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. LP Gas: Liquefied-petroleum fuel gas.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type and size of water heater indicated. Include rated capacities,
operating characteristics,furnished specialties,and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power,signal,and control wiring.
C. Product Certificates: For each type of commercial water heater, signed by product
manufacturer.
D. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that commercial water
heaters, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 23
Section "Seismic Controls for Plumbing and HVAC." Include the following:
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of
assembled components or on calculation.
a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of
any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."
2. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based
and their installation requirements.
E. Source quality-control test reports.
FUEL-FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 223400- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
F. Field quality-control test reports.
G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For water heaters to include in emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals.
H. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain same type of water heaters through one source from a single
manufacturer.
B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of water
heaters and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product
Requirements."
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
D. ASME Compliance:
1. Where ASME-code construction is indicated,fabricate and label commercial water heater
storage tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII,
Division 1.
2. Where ASME-code construction is indicated,fabricate and label commercial,finned-tube
water heaters to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IV.
E. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1
through 9" for all components that will be in contact with potable water.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with Architectural and Structural Drawings.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of fuel-fired water heaters that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
1. Failures include,but are not limited to,the following:
a. Structural failures including storage tank and supports.
b. Faulty operation of controls.
c. Deterioration of metals,metal finishes,and other materials beyond normal use.
2. Warranty Period(s): From date of Substantial Completion:
FUEL-FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 223400-2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
a. Commercial,Gas Water Heaters:
1) Storage Tank: Three years.
2) Controls and Other Components: Three years.
b. Compression Tanks: One year.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements. Provide products by one of
the manufacturers specified.
2.2 COMMERCIAL, GAS WATER HEATERS
A. Commercial, High-Efficiency,Gas Water Heaters: Comply with ANSI Z21.10.3/CSA 4.3.
1. Manufacturer:
a. EVO.
2. Description: Manufacturer's proprietary design to provide at least 95 percent combustion
efficiency at optimum operating conditions. Following features and attributes may be
modified or omitted if water heater otherwise complies with requirements for
performance.
3. Storage-Tank Construction: ASME-code steel with 150-psig minimum working-pressure
rating.
a. Tappings: Factory fabricated of materials compatible with tank. Attach tappings
to tank before testing.
1) NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1.
2) NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged ends according to ASME B16.5 for steel
and stainless-steel flanges, and according to ASME B16.24 for copper and
copper-alloy flanges.
b. Interior Finish: Comply with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable-water tank
linings,including extending finish into and through tank fittings and outlets.
c. Lining: Glass complying with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable-water tank
linings,including extending lining into and through tank fittings and outlets.
4. Factory-Installed,Storage-Tank Appurtenances:
a. Anode Rod: Replaceable magnesium.
FUEL-FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 223400- 3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
b. Dip Tube: Provide unless cold-water inlet is near bottom of tank.
c. Drain Valve: Corrosion-resistant metal complying with ASSE 1005.
d. Insulation: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1. Surround entire storage tank
except connections and controls.
e. Jacket: Steel with enameled finish.
f. Combination Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves: ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4.
Include one or more relief valves with total relieving capacity at least as great as
heat input, and include pressure setting less than water heater working-pressure
rating. Select one relief valve with sensing element that extends into storage tank.
5. Burner or Heat Exchanger: Comply with UL 795 or approved testing agency
requirements for high-efficiency water heaters and for natural-gas fuel.
6. Temperature Control: Adjustable thermostat.
7. Safety Controls: Automatic, high-temperature-limit and low-water cutoff devices or
systems.
2.3 WATER HEATER ACCESSORIES
A. Gas Shutoff Valves: ANSI Z21.15/CGA 9.1, manually operated. Furnish for installation in
piping.
B. Gas Automatic Valves: ANSI Z21.21,appliance,electrically operated,on-off automatic valve.
C. Combination Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves: Include relieving capacity at least as
great as heat input, and include pressure setting less than water heater working-pressure rating.
Select each relief valve with sensing element that extends into storage tank.
1. Gas Water Heaters: ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4.
D. Pressure Relief Valves: Include pressure setting less than working-pressure rating of water
heater.
1. Gas Water Heaters: ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4.
E. Drain Pans: Corrosion-resistant metal with raised edge. Provide dimensions not less than base
of water heater and include drain outlet not less than NPS 3/4.
F. Piping Manifold Kits: Water heater manufacturer's factory-fabricated inlet and outlet piping
arrangement for multiple-unit installation. Include piping and valves for field assembly that is
capable of isolating each water heater and of providing balanced flow through each water
heater.
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test and inspect water heater storage tanks, specified to be ASME-code construction,according
to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
FUEL-FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 223400-4
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
B. Hydrostatically test commercial water heater storage tanks before shipment to minimum of one
and one-half times pressure rating.
C. Prepare test reports.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 WATER HEATER INSTALLATION
A. Install commercial water heaters on concrete bases.
1. Exception: Omit concrete bases for commercial water heaters if installation on stand,
bracket,suspended platform,or direct on floor is indicated.
2. Concrete base construction requirements are specified in Division 23 Section "Common
Work Results for HVAC."
B. Install water heaters level and plumb, according to layout drawings, original design, and
referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units so
controls and devices needing service are accessible.
C. Install seismic restraints for commercial water heaters. Anchor to substrate.
D. Install gas water heaters according to NFPA 54.
E. Install gas shutoff valves on gas supplies to gas water heaters without shutoff valves.
F. Install gas pressure regulators on gas supplies to gas water heaters without gas pressure
regulators if gas pressure regulators are required to reduce gas pressure at burner.
I G. Install automatic gas valves on gas supplies to gas water heaters, if required for operation of
safety control.
H. Install combination temperature and pressure relief valves in top portion of storage tanks. Use
relief valves with sensing elements that extend into tanks. Extend commercial-water-heater,
relief-valve outlet, with drain piping same as domestic water piping in continuous downward
pitch,and discharge by positive air gap onto closest floor drain.
I. Install combination temperature and pressure relief valves in water piping for water heaters
without storage. Extend commercial-water-heater relief-valve outlet, with drain piping same as
domestic water piping in continuous downward pitch, and discharge by positive air gap onto
closest floor drain.
J. Install water heater drain piping as indirect waste to spill by positive air gap into open drains or
over floor drains. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water piping for water heaters
that do not have tank drains.
K. Install thermometer on outlet piping of water heaters. Refer to Division 23 Section"Meters and
Gages for HVAC Piping"for thermometers.
FUEL-FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 223400-5
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
L. Install pressure gage on outlet piping of commercial, fuel-fired water heater piping. Refer to
Division 23 Section"Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping"for pressure gages.
M. Assemble and install inlet and outlet piping manifold kits for multiple water heaters. Fabricate,
modify, or arrange manifolds for balanced water flow through each water heater. Include
shutoff valve and thermometer in each water heater inlet and outlet,and throttling valve in each
water heater outlet. Refer to Division 23 Section "General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping" for
general-duty valves and to Division 23 Section "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping" for
thermometers.
N. Fill water heaters with water.
O. Charge compression tanks with air.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other related Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping,fittings,and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to water heaters to allow service and maintenance. Arrange piping for
easy removal of water heaters.
C. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
D. Connect wiring according to Division 28 Section"Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety
and Security."
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Leak Test: After installation,test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.
2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized,confirm proper operation.
3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
B. Remove and replace water heaters that do not pass tests and inspections and retest as specified
above.
END OF SECTION 223400
FUEL-FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 223400-6
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 224000-PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following conventional plumbing fixtures and related components:
1. Faucets for lavatories and sinks.
2. Laminar-flow faucet-spout outlets.
3. Flushometers. _
4. Toilet seats.
5. Protective shielding guards.
6. Fixture supports.
7. Dishwasher air-gap fittings.
8. Water closets.
9. Urinals.
10. Lavatories.
11. Commercial sinks.
12. Kitchen sinks.
13. Service sinks.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of plumbing fixture indicated. Include selected fixture and trim,
fittings, accessories, appliances, appurtenances, equipment, and supports. Indicate materials
and finishes,dimensions,construction details,and flow-control rates.
B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power,signal,and control wiring.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For plumbing fixtures to include in emergency, operation,
and maintenance manuals.
D. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other components of each category
through one source from a single manufacturer.
PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1. Exception: If fixtures, faucets, or other components are not available from a single
manufacturer, obtain similar products from other manufacturers specified for that
category.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC A117.1, "Accessible and Usable
Buildings and Facilities";Public Law 90-480, "Architectural Barriers Act"; and Public
Law 101-336, "Americans with Disabilities Act"; for plumbing fixtures for people with
disabilities.
D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in Public Law 102-486, "Energy Policy
Act,"about water flow and consumption rates for plumbing fixtures.
E. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects,"
for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water.
F. Select combinations of fixtures and trim, faucets, fittings, and other components that are
compatible.
G. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for plumbing
fixtures:
1. Enameled,Cast-Iron Fixtures: ASME Al 12.19.1M.
2. Plastic Mop-Service Basins: ANSI Z124.6.
3. Porcelain-Enameled,Formed-Steel Fixtures: ASME Al 12.19.4M.
4. Solid-Surface-Material Lavatories and Sinks: ANSI/ICPA SS-1.
5. Stainless-Steel Commercial,Handwash Sinks: NSF 2 construction.
6. Stainless-Steel Residential Sinks: ASME A112.19.3.
7. Vitreous-China Fixtures: ASME A112.19.2M.
8. Water-Closet,Flush Valve,Tank Trim: ASME A112.19.5.
9. Whirlpool Bathtub Fittings: ASME Al 12.19.8M.
H. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for lavatory
and sink faucets:
1. Backflow Protection Devices for Faucets with Side Spray: ASME A112.18.3M.
2. Backflow Protection Devices for Faucets with Hose-Thread Outlet: ASME A112.18.3M.
3. Diverter Valves for Faucets with Hose Spray: ASSE 1025.
4. Faucets: ASME A112.18.1.
5. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1011.
6. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B 1.20.7.
7. Integral,Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001.
8. NSF Potable-Water Materials: NSF 61.
9. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1.
10. Sensor-Actuated Faucets and Electrical Devices: UL 1951.
11. Supply Fittings: ASME A112.18.1.
12. Brass Waste Fittings: ASME A112.18.2.
PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000-2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
I. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for
miscellaneous fittings:
1. Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001.
2. Brass and Copper Supplies: ASME A112.18.1.
3. Dishwasher Air-Gap Fittings: ASSE 1021.
4. Manual-Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037.
5. Plastic Tubular Fittings: ASTM F 409.
6. Brass Waste Fittings: ASME A112.18.2.
7. Sensor-Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037 and UL 1951.
J. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for
miscellaneous components:
1. Disposers: ASSE 1008 and UL 430.
2. Dishwasher Air-Gap Fittings: ASSE 1021.
3. Flexible Water Connectors: ASME A112.18.6.
4. Floor Drains: ASME A112.6.3.
5. Grab Bars: ASTM F 446.
6. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7.
7. Hot-Water Dispensers: ASSE 1023 and UL 499.
8. Off-Floor Fixture Supports: ASME Al 12.6.1 M.
9. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1.
10. Plastic Shower Receptors: ANSI Z124.2.
11. Plastic Toilet Seats: ANSI Z124.5.
12. Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1.
13. Whirlpool Bathtub Equipment: UL 1795.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranties: Manufacturer's standard foam in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of whirlpools that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.
1. Failures include,but are not limited to,the following:
a. Structural failures of unit shell.
b. Faulty operation of controls,blowers,pumps,heaters,and timers.
c. Deterioration of metals,metal finishes,and other materials beyond normal use.
2. Warranty Period for Commercial Applications: One year from date of Substantial
Completion.
PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000-3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85% PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 LAVATORY FAUCETS
A. Lavatory Faucets:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,
the following:
a. American Standard Companies,Inc.
b. Bradley Corporation.
c. Chicago Faucets.
d. Delta Faucet Company.
e. Eljer.
f. Elkay Manufacturing Co.
g. Fisher Manufacturing Co.
h. Geberit Manufacturing,Inc.
i. Grohe America,Inc.
j. Just Manufacturing Company.
k. Kohler Co.
1. Moen, Inc.
m. Royal Brass Mfg.Co.
n. Sayco;a Briggs Plumbing Products,Inc.Company.
o. Speakman Company.
p. T&S Brass and Bronze Works,Inc.
q. TOTO USA,Inc.
r. Zurn Plumbing Products Group;Commercial Brass Operation.
2. Description: Single-control mixing valve. Include hot- and cold-water indicators;
coordinate faucet inlets with supplies and fixture holes; coordinate outlet with spout and
fixture receptor.
2.2 SINK FAUCETS
A. Sink Faucets:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,
the following:
a. American Standard Companies,Inc.
b. Bradley Corporation.
c. Broadway Collection.
d. Chicago Faucets.
e. Delta Faucet Company.
f. Dormont Manufacturing Company.
g. Eljer.
PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000-4
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
h. Elkay Manufacturing Co.
i. Fisher Manufacturing Co.
j. Geberit Manufacturing,Inc.
k. Grohe America,Inc.
1. Just Manufacturing Company.
m. Kohler Co.
n. Moen,Inc.
o. Royal Brass Mfg.Co.
p. Sayco;a Briggs Plumbing Products,Inc.Company.
q. Speakman Company.
r. T& S Brass and Bronze Works,Inc.
s. Zurn Plumbing Products Group;Commercial Brass Operation.
2. Description: Kitchen faucet with spray, four-hole fixture. Include hot- and cold-water
indicators; coordinate faucet inlets with supplies and fixture holes; coordinate outlet with
spout and fixture receptor.
2.3 FLUSHOMETERS
A. Flushometers:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Coyne&Delany Co.
b. Delta Faucet Company.
c. Geberit Manufacturing,Inc.
d. Sloan Valve Company.
e. Zurn Plumbing Products Group;Commercial Brass Operation.
2. Description: Flushometer for urinal and water-closet-type fixture. Include brass body
with corrosion-resistant internal components, non-hold-open feature, control stop with
check valve, vacuum breaker, copper or brass tubing, and polished chrome-plated finish
on exposed parts.
2.4 TOILET SEATS
A. Toilet Seats:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Bemis Manufacturing Company.
b. Centoco Manufacturing Corp.
c. Church Seats.
d. Kohler Co.
PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000-5
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
e. Olsonite Corp.
f. Pressalit A/S.
g. Sanderson Plumbing Products,Inc.;Beneke Div.
h. Sperzel.
2.5 PROTECTIVE SHIELDING GUARDS
A. Protective Shielding Pipe Covers:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Engineered Brass Co.
b. Insul-Tect Products Co.;a Subsidiary of MVG Molded Products.
c. McGuire Manufacturing Co.,Inc.
d. Plumberex Specialty Products Inc.
e. TCI Products.
f. TRUEBRO, Inc.
g. Zurn Plumbing Products Group;Tubular Brass Plumbing Products Operation.
B. Protective Shielding Piping Enclosures:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,
the following:
a. McGuire Manufacturing Co.,Inc.
b. Plumberex Specialty Products,Inc.
c. TRUEBRO,Inc.
2. Description: Manufactured plastic enclosure for covering plumbing fixture hot- and
cold-water supplies and trap and drain piping. Comply with ADA requirements.
2.6 FIXTURE SUPPORTS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following:
1. Josam Company.
2. MIFAB Manufacturing Inc.
3. Smith,Jay R. Mfg.Co.
4. Tyler Pipe;Wade Div.
5. Watts Drainage Products Inc.;a div.of Watts Industries,Inc.
6. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
B. Water-Closet Supports:
PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000-6
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1. Description: Combination carrier designed for accessible and standard mounting height
of wall-mounting, water-closet-type fixture. Include single or double, vertical or
horizontal, hub-and-spigot or hubless waste fitting as required for piping arrangement;
faceplates; couplings with gaskets; feet; and fixture bolts and hardware matching fixture.
Include additional extension coupling, faceplate, and feet for installation in wide pipe
space.
C. Urinal Supports:
1. Description: Type I,urinal carrier with fixture support plates and coupling with seal and
fixture bolts and hardware matching fixture for wall-mounting, urinal-type fixture.
Include steel uprights with feet.
2. Accessible-Fixture Support: Include rectangular steel uprights.
D. Lavatory Supports:
1. Description: Type II,lavatory carrier with concealed arms and tie rod for wall-mounting,
lavatory-type fixture. Include steel uprights with feet.
2. Accessible-Fixture Support: Include rectangular steel uprights.
2.7 DISHWASHER AIR-GAP FITTINGS
A. Dishwasher Air-Gap Fittings:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,
the following:
a. B&K Industries,Inc.
b. Brass Craft-Mfg.Co.;a Subsidiary of Masco Corporation.
c. Brasstech Inc.;Newport Brass Div.
d. Dearborn Brass;a div.of Moen,Inc.
e. Geberit Manufacturing,Inc.
f. JB Products;a Federal Process Corporation Company.
g. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company,Inc.
h. Watts Brass&Tubular,a division of Watts Regulator Co.
2. Description: Fitting suitable for use with domestic dishwashers and for deck mounting;
with plastic body, chrome-plated brass cover; and capacity of at least 5 gpm; and inlet
pressure of at least 5 psig at a temperature of at least 140 deg F. Include 5/8-inch ID inlet
and 7/8-inch ID outlet hose connections.
3. Hoses: Rubber and suitable for temperature of at least 140 deg F.
a. Inlet Hose: 5/8-inch ID and 48 inches long.
b. Outlet Hose: 7/8-inch ID and 48 inches long.
PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000- 7
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
2.8 WATER CLOSETS
A. Water Closets:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,
the following:
a. American Standard Companies,Inc.
b. Briggs Plumbing Products,Inc.
c. Capizzi.
d. Crane Plumbing,L.L.C./Fiat Products.
e. Eljer.
f. Kohler Co.
g. St.Thomas Creations.
h. TOTO USA,Inc.
i. Zurn Plumbing Products Group;Commercial Brass Operation.
2. Description Accessible, wall and wall-mounting, back-outlet, vitreous-china fixture
designed for flushometer valve operation.
2.9 URINALS
A. Urinals:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,
the following:
a. American Standard Companies,Inc.
b. Briggs Plumbing Products,Inc.
c. Capizzi.
d. Crane Plumbing,L.L.C./Fiat Products.
e. Duravit USA,Inc.
f. Eljer.
g. Kohler Co.
h. Mansfield Plumbing Products,Inc.
i. Peerless Pottery,Inc.
j. Sanitarios Azteca, S.A.de C.V.
_ k. St.Thomas Creations.
1. TOTO USA,Inc.
m. Zurn Plumbing Products Group;Commercial Brass Operation.
2. Description: Accessible, wall and wall-mounting, back-outlet, vitreous-china fixture
designed for flushometer valve operation.
PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000-8
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
2.10 LAVATORIES
A. Lavatories:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,
the following:
a. American Standard Companies,Inc.
b. Barclay Products,Ltd.
c. Briggs Plumbing Products,Inc.
d. Crane Plumbing,L.L.C./Fiat Products.
e. Eljer.
f. Gerber Plumbing Fixtures LLC.
g. Kohler Co.
h. Mansfield Plumbing Products,Inc.
i. Peerless Pottery,Inc.
j. Sterling Plumbing Group,Inc.
k. St.Thomas Creations.
1. TOTO USA,Inc.
2. Description: Accessible,wall and wall-mounting,vitreous-china fixture.
B. Lavatories:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Acorn Engineering Company.
b. American Standard Companies,Inc.
c. Barclay Products,Ltd.
d. Briggs Plumbing Products,Inc.
e. Crane Plumbing,L.L.C./Fiat Products.
f. Eljer.
g. Elkay Manufacturing Co.
h. Gerber Plumbing Fixtures LLC.
i. Intersan Manufacturing Company.
j. Just Manufacturing Company.
k. Kohler Co.
1. Mansfield Plumbing Products,Inc.
m. Peerless Pottery,Inc.
n. Sterling Plumbing Group,Inc.
o. St.Thomas Creations.
p. TOTO USA,Inc.
q. Zurn Plumbing Products Group;Commercial Brass Operation.
2. Description: Accessible, counter-mounting and undercounter-mounting stainless-steel,
vitreous-china fixture.
PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000-9
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
•
TIGARD,OREGON
C. Lavatories:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,
the following:
a. American Standard Companies,Inc.
b. Briggs Plumbing Products,Inc.
c. Crane Plumbing,L.L.C./Fiat Products.
d. Eljer.
e. Kohler Co.
f. Mansfield Plumbing Products,Inc.
g. Peerless Pottery,Inc.
h. St.Thomas Creations.
2. Description: Accessible, wall-mounting, vitreous-china fixture designed for people in
wheelchairs.
2.11 COMMERCIAL SINKS
A. Commercial Sinks:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Advance Tabco.
b. Elkay Manufacturing Co.
c. Just Manufacturing Company.
d. Metal Masters Foodservice Equipment Co.,Inc.
2. Description: Two-compartment, counter-mounting, stainless-steel commercial sink with
backsplash.
2.12 KITCHEN SINKS
A. Kitchen Sinks:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Dayton Products,Inc.
b. Elkay Manufacturing Co.
c. Franke Consumer Products,Inc.,Kitchen Systems Div.
d. Just Manufacturing Company.
e. Kohler Co.
f. Moen,Inc.
PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000- 10
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
g. Revere Sink.
h. Sterling Plumbing Group,Inc.
i. Teka USA.
j. WhiteRock Corp.
2. Description: Two-bowl,residential,counter-mounting,stainless-steel kitchen sink.
2.13 SERVICE SINKS
A. Service Sinks:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,
the following:
a. American Standard Companies,Inc.
b. Commercial Enameling Company.
c. Eljer.
d. Kohler Co.
e. Zurn Plumbing Products Group;Commercial Brass Operation.
2. Description: Trap-standard- and wall-mounting, vitreous-china fixture with two faucet
holes in back and rim guard on front and sides.
2.14 SERVICE BASINS
A. Service Basins:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Acorn Engineering Company.
b. Crane Plumbing,L.L.C./Fiat Products.
c. Florestone Products Co.,Inc.
d. Mustee,E.L. & Sons,Inc.
e. Precast Terrazzo Enterprises,Inc.
f. Stem-Williams Co.,Inc.
g. Swan Corporation(The).
h. Zurn Plumbing Products Group;Light Commercial Operation.
2. Description: Flush-to-wall, floor-mounting,precast terrazzo or cast-polymer fixture with
rim guard.
PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000- 11
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in of water supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify
actual locations of piping connections before plumbing fixture installation.
B. Examine cabinets, counters, floors, and walls for suitable conditions where fixtures will be
installed.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Assemble plumbing fixtures, trim, fittings, and other components according to manufacturers'
written instructions.
B. Install off-floor supports,affixed to building substrate,for wall-mounting fixtures.
1. Use carrier supports with waste fitting and seal for back-outlet fixtures.
2. Use carrier supports without waste fitting for fixtures with tubular waste piping.
3. Use chair-type carrier supports with rectangular steel uprights for accessible fixtures.
C. Install back-outlet,wall-mounting fixtures onto waste fitting seals and attach to supports.
D. Install floor-mounting fixtures on closet flanges or other attachments to piping or building
substrate.
E. Install wall-mounting fixtures with tubular waste piping attached to supports.
F. Install counter-mounting fixtures in and attached to casework.
G. Install fixtures level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.
H. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each fixture to be connected to water
distribution piping. Attach supplies to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures.
Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation.
I. Exception: Use ball, gate,or globe valves if supply stops are not specified with fixture.
Valves are specified in Section 230523"General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping."
I. Install trap and tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be directly connected to
sanitary drainage system.
J. Install tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be indirectly connected to drainage
system.
PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000- 12
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
K. Install flushometer valves for accessible water closets and urinals with handle mounted on wide
side of compartment. Install other actuators in locations that are easy for people with
disabilities to reach.
L. Install toilet seats on water closets.
M. Install faucet-spout fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if faucets are
not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.
N. Install water-supply flow-control fittings with specified flow rates in fixture supplies at stop
valves.
O. Install faucet flow-control fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if
faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.
P. Install traps on fixture outlets.
1. Exception: Omit trap on fixtures with integral traps.
2. Exception: Omit trap on indirect wastes,unless otherwise indicated.
Q. Install dishwasher air-gap fitting at each sink indicated to have air-gap fitting. Install in sink
deck. Connect inlet hose to dishwasher and outlet hose to disposer.
R. Install escutcheons at piping wall ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations and within
cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings.
Escutcheons are specified in Section 230500"Common Work Results for HVAC."
S. Set service basins in leveling bed of cement grout. Grout is specified in Section 230500
"Common Work Results for HVAC."
T. Seal joints between fixtures and walls, floors, and countertops using sanitary-type, one-part,
mildew-resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Sealants are specified in
Division 07 Section"Joint Sealants."
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other related Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping,fittings,and specialties.
B. Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent
piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.
C. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
D. Connect wiring according to Section 280513 "Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and
Security."
PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000- 13
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Verify that installed plumbing fixtures are categories and types specified for locations where
installed.
B. Check that plumbing fixtures are complete with trim, faucets, fittings, and other specified
components.
C. Inspect installed plumbing fixtures for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.
D. Test installed fixtures after water systems are pressurized for proper operation. Replace j
malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until units operate f
properly.
E. Install fresh batteries in sensor-operated mechanisms.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Operate and adjust faucets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning fixtures,fittings,
and controls.
B. Operate and adjust controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning units and controls.
C. Adjust water pressure at faucets and flushometer valves to produce proper flow and stream.
D. Replace washers and seals of leaking and dripping faucets and stops.
E. Install fresh batteries in sensor-operated mechanisms.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Clean fixtures, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods
and materials. Do the following:
1. Remove faucet spouts and strainers, remove sediment and debris, and reinstall strainers
and spouts.
2. Remove sediment and debris from drains.
B. After completing installation of exposed, factory-finished fixtures, faucets, and fittings, inspect
exposed finishes and repair damaged finishes.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings.
PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000- 14
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
B. Do not allow use of plumbing fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by
Owner.
END OF SECTION 224000
PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000- 15
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 230500-COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING AND HVAC
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Record Documents,Maintenance Manuals,and General Provisions for mechanical work.
2. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.
3. Transition fittings.
4. Dielectric fittings.
5. Mechanical sleeve seals.
6. Sleeves.
7. Escutcheons.
8. Mechanical demolition.
9. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections.
10. Painting and finishing.
11. Concrete bases.
12. Supports and anchorages.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Dielectric fittings.
2. Mechanical sleeve seals.
3. Escutcheons.
B. Welding certificates.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural
Welding Code--Steel."
B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series,"Code for Pressure Piping."
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING AND HVAC 230500- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes
involved and that certification is current.
C. Electrical Characteristics for Mechanical Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical
characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing by
the engineer and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are
appropriately modified without added cost to Project. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies
are specified,equipment shall comply with requirements.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of
construction,to allow for mechanical installations.
B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place
concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.
C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for mechanical items requiring access that
are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 08
Section"Access Doors and Frames."
1.6 FEES AND PERMITS
A. Contractor shall apply and pay for all permits, inspections, reviews, etc. required by the
authorities having jurisdiction.
1. This shall include the cost of extending the natural gas service from the utility company
main line to the building meter, setting the meter and regulator and all related utility
company costs.
2. The Contractor shall include in his/her Bid all system development or similarly named
fee imposed by the serving utility company or governing entity(City,County,etc.).
1.7 RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Prepare Record Documents in accordance with the requirements in Division 01 Section"Project
Closeout." In addition to the requirements specified in Division 01, indicate the following
installed conditions:
1. Ductwork mains and branches,size and location,for both exterior and interior; locations
of dampers and other control devices;filters,boxes,and terminal units requiring periodic
maintenance or repair.
2. Mains and branches of piping systems, with valves and control devices located and
numbered, concealed unions located, and with items requiring maintenance located (ie.
traps, strainers, tanks, etc.). Refer to Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping
and Equipment". Indicate actual inverts and horizontal locations of underground piping.
3. Equipment locations (exposed and concealed) dimensioned from prominent building
lines.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING AND HVAC 230500-2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
4. Approved substitutions, Contract Modifications, and actual equipment and materials
installed. Revise equipment schedules.
5. Contract Modifications,actual equipment and materials installed.
1.8 MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Prepare maintenance manuals in accordance with Division 01 Section "Project Closeout." In
addition to the requirements specified in Division 01. Assemble 0&M Manuals as follows:
1. Compile three copies of Operating and Maintenance Manuals for the mechanical systems
and equipment. The manuals shall be provided to the Architect for approval complete
and at one time, prior to requesting final payment. Partial or separate data will be
returned for completion.
2. Manuals shall be assembled in three-ring binders. Binders shall be 3 inches thick or less
and more than one binder shall be used for each set of data if required to prevent
overfilling of one binder. Binders shall have plastic coating with correct name of the
Project permanently attached to the spine. Binders shall be Sparco, #68031. All
information shall be arranged in sections and each section shall have a blank buff
colored, heavy paper divider with a protruding tab clearly labeled. Sections shall be
arranged in the same order that the equipment is listed in the Specification and each
Specification Section shall have a separate tab. Shop Drawings which are larger than
8-1/2 inches x 11 inches shall be individually folded so they are 8-1/2 inches x 11 inches
or less and inserted behind the appropriate tab.
3. Tabs shall be labeled and arranged as follows:
a. Index: Furnish under the first tab an index of sections listing name of Section and
Specification numbers.
b. Equipment Manufacturers: Furnish under the second tab a complete typed list of
equipment suppliers and manufacturers representative including type of
equipment, name,addre"ss and phone number. The company listed here should be
the one which could furnish replacement parts and offer technical information
about the equipment.
c. Valve Directory: Furnish under this tab a typed copy of the valve chart required.
d. Product Literature: Each tab, starting with the fourth shall contain the name of a
Specification Section. Behind each tab shall be the previously submitted and
approved Shop Drawing,factory published operation and maintenance instructions
and parts lists.
4. Upon completion and approval of the booklets, one copy shall be given to the Architect,
and two to the Owner. Using the booklet, the Mechanical Contractor shall explain in
detail and instruct the Owner's operating personnel in the correct operation and
maintenance of the equipment.
1.9 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL WORK
A. Interferences: Project design took into account potential interferences between trades (e.g.
mechanical ductwork with piping or with electrical light fixtures), however, not every
interference has been eliminated. It shall be the responsibility of the Bidder and potential
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING AND HVAC 230500-3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
Contractor to field verify all mechanical piping and duct routing, making allowances for
existing beams,pipes, ducts,hangers, and other obstructions. Provide HVAC duct offsets and
transitions as required maintaining duct aspect ratios within 10 percent of design. The cost
associated with interferences shall be included in the Base Bid.
B. Examination of Project Drawings:
1. The Drawings (Plans, elevations, flow schematics, etc.) for the mechanical work are
intended to convey Scope of Work and to indicate the general arrangements and locations
of end-use equipment,systems,etc.,and the approximate sizes thereof.
2. The Contractor shall determine the exact location and mounting heights of equipment,
rough-ins, and the exact routing and positioning of piping/ductwork equipment so as to
best fit the layout of the job. Scaling of the Drawings will not be sufficient for
determining these locations. Where job conditions require reasonable changes in
indicated arrangements and locations, such changes shall be made, by the Contractor, at
no additional cost to the Client.
3. Because of the scale of the Drawings,certain basic items/materials and quantities thereof,
(e.g. fittings,connectors,flanges,unions,pipe wells,couplings,hangers,sleeves,clamps,
screws, hooks, inserts, pipe/duct mounted - meters, gauges, sensors, etc.) may not be
shown,but where such items are required by other sections of the Specifications or where
they are required for proper installation of the Work, such items shall be furnished and
installed and the cost thereof,reflected in the Base Bid.
4. The determination of quantities of HVAC and plumbing end-use systems and equipment
required shall be made by the Contractor from the Drawings. Interferences and quantities
and locations of basic items/materials may not be indicated on the Drawings and will
require field verification and determination by the Contractor.
5. The Contractor shall coordinate the location and method of support of the piping/duct
systems with that of all installations under other Divisions and Sections of the
Specifications.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply for product selection:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,
the manufacturers specified.
2.2 PIPE,TUBE,AND FITTINGS
A. Refer to individual Division 23 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining
methods.
B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING AND HVAC 230500-4
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
2.3 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Refer to individual Division 23 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.
B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system
contents.
1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless
thickness or specific material is indicated.
a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face,Class 125,cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges.
b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face,Class 250,cast-iron and steel flanges.
2. AWWA C110,rubber, flat face, 1/8-inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-face
or ring type,unless otherwise indicated.
C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1,carbon steel,unless otherwise indicated.
D. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping
system manufacturer,unless otherwise indicated.
E. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to
ASTM B 813.
F. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BcuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty
brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping,
unless otherwise indicated.
G. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall
thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
H. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping:
1. ABS Piping: ASTM D 2235.
2. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493.
3. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656.
4. PVC to ABS Piping Transition: ASTM D 3138.
I. Fiberglass Pipe Adhesive: As furnished or recommended by pipe manufacturer.
2.4 TRANSITION FITTINGS
A. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Fittings: PVC one-piece fitting with manufacturer's Schedule 80
equivalent dimensions;one end with threaded brass insert,and one solvent-cement-joint end.
B. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Adaptors: One-piece fitting with manufacturer's SDR 11 equivalent
dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert,and one solvent-cement-joint end.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING AND HVAC 230500-5
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
C. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Unions: MSS SP-107, PVC four-part union. Include brass end,
solvent-cement-joint end,rubber 0-ring,and union nut.
2.5 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder-
joint,plain,or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.
B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid,pressure,and temperature.
C. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250 psig minimum working
pressure at 180 deg F.
D. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150 or 300 psig
minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.
E. Dielectric-Flange Kits: Companion-flange assembly for field assembly. Include flanges, full-
face- or ring-type neoprene or phenolic gasket,phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves,phenolic
washers,and steel backing washers.
1. Separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts shall have 150 or 300 psig minimum
working pressure where required to suit system pressures.
F. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic
lining;threaded ends;and 300 psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.
G. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive,thermoplastic lining;
plain,threaded,or grooved ends;and 300 psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.
2.6 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS
A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space
between pipe and sleeve.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Advance Products&Systems,Inc.
b. Calpico,Inc.
c. Metraflex Co.
d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator,Inc.
2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type
and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
3. Pressure Plates: Plastic or carbon steel. Include two for each sealing element.
4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length
required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing
element.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING AND HVAC 230500-6
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
2.7 SLEEVES
A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded
longitudinal joint.
B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53,Type E,Grade B,Schedule 40,galvanized,plain ends.
C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain
ends and integral waterstop,unless otherwise indicated.
D. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include
clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.
1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.
2.8 ESCUTCHEONS
A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely
fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers
opening.
B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-plated
finish.
1. One-Piece,Cast-Brass Type: With set screw and polished chrome-plated.
C. Split-Plate,Cast-Brass or Stamped-Steel Type: With concealed hinge, spring clips and chrome-
plated finish.
D. Split-Casting, Floor-Plate Type: Cast brass with concealed hinge and set screw.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING SYSTEMS-COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Drawing Plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping
systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction
loss,expansion,pump sizing,and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless
deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
B. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms
and service areas.
C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING AND HVAC 230500-7
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
E. Install piping to permit valve servicing.
F. Install piping at indicated slopes.
G. Install piping free of sags and bends.
H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
1. Install piping to allow application of insulation.
J. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating
pressure.
K. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls,ceilings,and floors according to the following:
1. New Piping:
a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece,deep-pattern type.
b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated
finish.
c. Insulated Piping: One-piece,stamped-steel type with spring clips.
d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-
brass type with polished chrome-plated finish.
e. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece cast-brass type
with polished chrome-plated finish.
f. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: Split plate, cast-brass or stamped steel
type with polished chrome-plated finish.
2. Existing Piping: Use the following:
a. Chrome-Plated Piping: Split-plate,cast-brass type with chrome-plated finish.
b. Insulated Piping: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge and spring
clips.
c. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-plate, cast
brass or stamped-steel type with concealed hinge and spring clips.
d. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished or Unfinished Spaces: Split-plate,
cast-brass or stamped-steel type with concealed hinge and set screw.
L. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.
M. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor and roof
slabs.
1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or
other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings
below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.
2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING AND HVAC 230500-8
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
3. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between
sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials:
a. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6.
b. Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 and larger.
c. Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing.
Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to
extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished floor level. Refer to Division 07 Section
"Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim"for flashing.
4. Except for underground wall penetrations,seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or
pipe insulation,using joint sealants appropriate for size,depth,and location of joint.
N. Aboveground,Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical
sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1 inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve
for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter.
2. Install cast-iron"wall pipes"for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter.
3. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements
required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble
mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten
bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight
seal.
O. Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal
pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1 inch annular
clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
1. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements
required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble
mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten
bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight
seal.
P. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls,partitions,ceilings,and floors
at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials.
3.2 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements.
B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING AND HVAC 230500-9
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813,water-flushable flux,unless otherwise indicated, to tube
end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using
lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.
E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube"
Chapter,using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.
F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut
threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore
full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal
threading is specified.
2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and
welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance"Article.
H. Flanged-Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service
application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.
I. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings
according to the following:
1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent
cements.
2. ABS Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661 Appendixes.
3. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix.
4. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket
fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number PVC pipe and
socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855.
5. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.
6. PVC to ABS Nonpressure Transition Fittings: Join according to ASTM D 3138
Appendix.
3.3 PIPING CONNECTIONS
A. Make connections according to the following,unless otherwise indicated:
1. Install unions,in piping NPS 2 and smaller,adjacent to each valve and at final connection
to each piece of equipment.
2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final
connection to each piece of equipment.
3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of
dissimilar metals.
4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping
materials of dissimilar metals.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING AND HVAC 230500- 10
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
3.4 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION-COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are
not indicated.
B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and
components in exposed interior spaces,unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of
components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting,with minimum interference to other
installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.
D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.
3.5 PAINTING
A. Painting of mechanical systems,equipment,and components is specified in Division 09.
B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and
procedures to match original factory finish.
END OF SECTION 230500
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING AND HVAC 230500- 11
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 230513-COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes basic requirements for factory-installed and field-installed motors.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Factory-Installed Motor: A motor installed by motorized-equipment manufacturer as a
component of equipment.
B. Field-Installed Motor: A motor installed at Project site and not factory installed as an integral
component of motorized equipment.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data for Field-Installed Motors: For each type and size of motor, provide nameplate
data and ratings; shipping, installed, and operating weights; mounting arrangements; size, type,
and location of winding terminations; conduit entry and ground lug locations; and information
on coatings or finishes.
B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For field-installed motors to be included in operation and
maintenance manuals.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain field-installed motors of a single type through one source from a
single manufacturer.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
C. Comply with NFPA 70.
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 230513- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate features of motors,installed units,and accessory devices. Provide motors that are:
1. Compatible with the following:
a. Magnetic controllers.
b. Multispeed controllers.
c. Reduced-voltage controllers.
2. Designed and labeled for use with variable frequency controllers, and suitable for use
throughout speed range without overheating.
3. Matched to torque and horsepower requirements of the load.
4. Matched to ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence.
B. Coordinate motor support with requirements for driven load; access for maintenance and motor
replacement; installation of accessories, belts, belt guards; and adjustment of sliding rails for
belt tensioning.
C. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,
reinforcement,and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03 Section.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MOTOR REQUIREMENTS
A. Motor requirements apply to factory-installed and field-installed motors except as follows:
1. Different ratings, performance, or characteristics for a motor are specified in another
Section.
2. Manufacturer for a factory-installed motor requires ratings, performance, or
characteristics, other than those specified in this Section,to meet performance specified.
2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS
A. Motors 3/4 HP and Larger: Three phase.
B. Motors Smaller Than 3/4 HP: Single phase.
C. Frequency Rating: 60 Hz.
D. Voltage Rating: NEMA standard voltage selected to operate on nominal circuit voltage to
which motor is connected.
E. Service Factor: 1.15 for open drip proof motors; 1.0 for totally enclosed motors.
F. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 105 deg F and at altitude of 3300 feet above
sea level.
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 230513 -2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
G. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start,accelerate,and operate connected loads
at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence,
and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.
H. Enclosure: Open drip proof or totally enclosed fan cooled(TEFC).
2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS
A. Description: NEMA MG 1,Design B,medium induction motor.
B. Efficiency: AC polyphase induction motors NEMA Nominal Efficiency shall meet or exceed
the efficiency standards listed. The NEMA Nominal Rating is identified on the motor
nameplate.
Motors(full load)
HP 1200 RPM 1800 3600
5 87.5 87.5 87.5
7.5 89.5 89.5 88.5
10 89.5 89.5 89.5
15 90.2 91.0 90.2
20 90.2 91.0 90.2
25 91.7 92.4 91.0
30 91.7 92.4 91.0
40 93.0 93.0 91.7
50 93.0 93.0 92.4
60 93.6 93.6 93.0
75 93.6 94.1 93.0
100 94.1 94.5 93.6
125 94.1 94.5 94.5
150 95.0 95.0 94.5
200 95.0 95.0 95.0
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 230513-3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
C. Stator: Copper windings,unless otherwise indicated.
1. Multispeed motors shall have separate winding for each speed.
D. Rotor: Squirrel cage,unless otherwise indicated.
E. Bearings: Double-shielded,prelubricated ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.
F. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating,unless otherwise indicated.
G. Insulation: Class F,unless otherwise indicated.
H. Code Letter Designation:
1. Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or G.
2. Motors Smaller Than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.
I. Enclosure: Cast iron for motors 7.5 hp and larger;rolled steel for motors smaller than 7.5 hp.
1. Finish: Gray enamel.
2.4 POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Motors Used with Reduced-Inrush Controllers: Match wiring connection requirements for
controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box,suited to control
method.
B. Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features
coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer.
1. Designed with critical vibration frequencies outside operating range of controller output.
2. Temperature Rise: Matched to rating for Class B insulation.
3. Insulation: Class H.
4. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected
motors.
C. Rugged-Duty Motors: Totally enclosed, with 1.25 minimum service factor, greased bearings,
integral condensate drains, and capped relief vents. Windings insulated with nonhygroscopic
material.
1. Finish: Chemical-resistant paint over corrosion-resistant primer.
D. Source Quality Control: Perform the following tests on each motor according to NEMA MG 1:
1. Measure winding resistance.
2. Read no-load current and speed at rated voltage and frequency.
3. Measure locked rotor current at rated frequency.
4. Perform high-potential test.
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 230513 -4
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
2.5 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS
A. Type: One of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific motor
application:
1. Permanent-split capacitor.
2. Split-phase start,capacitor run.
3. Capacitor start,capacitor run.
B. Shaded-Pole Motors: For motors 1/20 hp and smaller only.
C. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor
when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor
insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns
to normal range.
D. Bearings: Ball type for belt-connected motors and other motors with high radial forces on
motor shaft; sealed,prelubricated-sleeve type for other single-phase motors.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 FIELD-INSTALLED MOTOR INSTALLATION
A. Anchor each motor assembly to base, adjustable rails, or other support, arranged and sized
according to manufacturer's written instructions. Attach by bolting. Level and align with load
transfer link.
B. Install motors on concrete bases complying with Division 03.
C. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Section 230548 "Vibration and
Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL FOR FIELD-INSTALLED MOTORS
A. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:
1. Align motors,bases,shafts,pulleys,and belts. Tension belts according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
2. Verify beating lubrication.
3. Run each motor with its controller. Demonstrate correct rotation,alignment,and speed at
motor design load.
4. Test interlocks and control features for proper operation.
5. Verify that current and voltage for each phase is within nameplate rating and NEMA MG
1 tolerances.
B. Perform the following field tests and prepare test reports:
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 230513 -5
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1. Perform electrical tests and visual and mechanical inspections including tests and
inspections stated in NETA ATS on field-installed motors. Certify compliance with test
parameters.
2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance;otherwise,replace with new units and retest.
END OF SECTION 230513
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 230513 -6
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 230519-METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following meters and gages for mechanical systems:
1. Thermometers.
2. Gages.
3. Test plugs.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated; include performance curves, Shop Drawings,
product certification,operation and maintenance data.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
manufacturers specified.
2.2 SOLAR DIGITAL THERMOMETERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Ashcroft.
2. MILJOCO Corporation.
3. Trerice,H. O. Co.
4. Weiss Instruments, Inc.
5. Weksler Instruments.
METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING 230519- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
B. Case: High Impact ABS Plastic.
C. Resolution: 0.10 deg F between-50 deg F to 199.9 deg F.
D. Recalibration: Internal potentiometer.
E. Display: LCD,black.
F. Connector: Adjustable type, 180 degrees in vertical plane, 360 degrees in horizontal plane,with
locking device.
G. Stem: Aluminum.
H. Sensor: Glass passivated thermistor.
I. Accuracy: Greater valve of 1 deg F,or 1 percent of reading.
J. Range: -58 deg F to 302 deg F,field switchable to deg C.
2.3 THERMOWELLS
A. Manufacturers: Same as manufacturer of thermometer being used.
B. Description: Pressure-tight, socket-type metal fitting made for insertion into piping and of type,
diameter,and length required to hold thermometer.
2.4 PRESSURE GAGES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Ashcroft Commercial Instrument Operations; Dresser Industries; Instrument Div.
2. Ernst Gage Co.
3. Eugene Ernst Products Co.
4. Marsh Bellofram.
5. MILJOCO Corporation
6. Palmer-Wahl Instruments Inc.
7. Trerice, H.O. Co.
8. Weiss Instruments, Inc.
9. Weksler Instruments Operating Unit; Dresser Industries; Instrument Div.
B. Direct-Mounting, Dial-Type Pressure Gages: Indicating-dial type complying with ASME
B40.100.
1. Case: Liquid-filled type,drawn steel or cast aluminum,4-1/2 inch diameter.
2. Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube,unless otherwise indicated.
3. Pressure Connection: Brass, NPS 1/4, bottom-outlet type unless back-outlet type is
indicated.
4. Movement: Mechanical,with link to pressure element and connection to pointer.
METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING 230519-2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
5. Dial: Satin-faced,nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings.
6. Pointer: Red or other dark-color metal.
7. Window: Glass.
8. Ring: Metal.
9. Accuracy: Grade A,plus or minus 1 percent of middle half scale.
10. Vacuum-Pressure Range: 30-in. Hg of vacuum to 15 psig of pressure.
11. Range for Fluids under Pressure: Two times operating pressure.
C. Pressure-Gage Fittings:
1. Valves: NPS 1/4 brass or stainless-steel needle type.
2. Syphons: NPS 1/4 coil of brass tubing with threaded ends.
3. Snubbers: ASME B40.5, NPS 1/4 brass bushing with corrosion-resistant, porous-metal
disc of material suitable for system fluid and working pressure.
2.5 TEST PLUGS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Flow Design, Inc.
2. Peterson Equipment Co., Inc.
3. Sisco Manufacturing Co.
4. Trerice,H.O.Co.
5. Watts Industries,Inc.;Water Products Div.
B. Description: Corrosion-resistant brass or stainless steel body with core inserts and gasketed and
threaded cap,with extended stem for units to be installed in insulated piping.
C. Minimum Pressure and Temperature Rating: 500 psig at 200 deg F.
D. Core Inserts: One or two self-sealing rubber valves.
1. Insert material for air,water,oil,or gas service at 20 to 200 deg F shall be CR.
2. Insert material for air or water service at minus 30 to plus 275 deg F shall be EPDM.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATIONS
A. Install meters and gages as indicated.
B. Provide the following temperature ranges for thermometers:
1. Domestic Hot Water: 30 to 180 deg F,with 2-degree scale divisions.
METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING 230519-3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
3.2 GAGE APPLICATIONS
A. Install dry-case-type pressure gages for discharge of each pressure-reducing valve.
B. Install liquid-filled-case-type pressure gages at suction and discharge of each pump.
3.3 INSTALLATIONS
A. Install direct-mounting thermometers and adjust vertical and tilted positions.
B. Install thermowells with socket extending one-third of diameter of pipe and in vertical position
in piping tees where thermometers are indicated.
C. Install direct-mounting pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located on pipe at most
readable position.
D. Install ball-valve and snubber fitting in piping for each pressure gage for fluids(except steam).
E. Install test plugs in tees in piping.
F. Assemble and install connections, tubing, and accessories between flow-measuring elements
and flowmeters as prescribed by manufacturer's written instructions.
G. Install connection fittings for attachment to portable indicators in accessible locations.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Calibrate meters according to manufacturer's written instructions,after installation.
B. Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.
END OF SECTION 230519
METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING 230519-4
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 230523 -GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING AND HVAC PIPING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes general duty valves common to several mechanical piping systems.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and
Division 01 Specification Sections.
B. Product Data for each valve type. Include body material, valve design, pressure and
temperature classification, end connection details, seating materials, trim material and
arrangement, dimensions and required clearances, and installation instructions. Include list
indicating valve and its application.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single-Source Responsibility: Comply with the requirements specified in Division 01 Section
"Materials and Equipment,"under"Source Limitations"Paragraph.
B. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9 for building services piping and ASME B31.1
for power piping.
C. MSS Compliance: Comply with the various MSS Standard Practice documents referenced.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Gate Valves:
a. Crane Company;Valves and Fitting Division.
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING AND HVAC PIPING 230523- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85% PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
b. Hammond Valve.
c. Kitz Corporation of America.
d. Milwaukee Valve Company,Inc.
e. NIBCO Inc.
f. Powell: Wm.Powell Company(The).
g. Watt Industries,Inc.
2. Ball Valves:
a. Conbraco Industries,Inc.;Apollo Division.
b. Hammond Valve.
c. Kitz Corporation of America.
d. Milwaukee Valve Company,Inc.
e. NIBCO,Inc.
f. Victaulic Company of America.
g. Watts Industries,Inc.
3. Globe Valves:
a. Crane Company;Valves and Fitting Division.
b. Hammond Valve.
c. Kitz Corporation of America.
d. Milwaukee Valve Company,Inc.
e. NIBCO Inc.
f. Powell: Wm.Powell Company(The).
4. Butterfly Valves:
a. Crane Company;Valves and Fitting Division.
b. General Signal;DeZurik Unit.
c. Grinnell Corp.
d. Hammond Valve.
e. Keystone Valve USA,Inc.
f. Kitz Corporation of America.
g. Line,Mark Controls Corporation.
h. Milwaukee Valve Company, Inc.
i. NIBCO Inc.
j. Victaulic Company of America.
5. Swing Check Valves:
a. Crane Company;Valves and Fitting Division.
b. Hammond Valve.
c. Kitz Corporation of America.
d. Milwaukee Valve Company,Inc.
e. NIBCO,Inc.
f. Powell: Wm.Powell Company(The).
g. Victaulic Company of America.
h. Watts Industries,Inc.
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING AND HVAC PIPING 230523-2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
6. Silent Check Valves:
a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.;Apollo Division.
b. Hammond Valve.
c. Keystone Valve USA, Inc.
d. Metraflex Company.
e. Milwaukee Valve Company, Inc.
f. NIBCO Inc.
g. Victaulic Company of America.
7. Ball Check Valves:
a. Flomatic Corp.
b. Goulds Pumps Inc.
2.2 BASIC,COMMON FEATURES
A. Design: Rising stem or rising outside screw and yoke stems,except as specified below.
1. Nonrising stem valves may be used only where headroom prevents full extension of
rising stems.
B. Pressure and Temperature Ratings: As indicated in the "Application Schedule" of Part 3 of this
Section and as required to suit system pressures and temperatures.
C. Sizes: Same size as upstream pipe,unless otherwise indicated.
D. Operators: Use specified operators and handwheels, except provide the following special
operator features:
1. Handwheels: For valves other than quarter turn.
2. Lever Handles: For quarter-turn valves 6 inches and smaller, except for plug valves,
which shall have square heads.
3. Chain-Wheel Operators: For valves 4 inches and larger, installed 96 inches or higher
above finished floor elevation.
4. Gear-Drive Operators: For quarter-turn valves 8 inches and larger.
E. Extended Stems: Where insulation is indicated or specified,provide extended stems arranged to
receive insulation.
F. Bypass and Drain Connections: Comply with MSS SP-45 bypass and drain connections.
G. Threads: ASME B1.20.1.
H. Flanges: ASME B16.1 for cast iron, ASME B16.5 for steel, and ASME B16.24 for bronze
valves.
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING AND HVAC PIPING 230523-3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
2.3 GATE VALVES
A. Gate Valves, 2-1/2 Inches and Larger: MSS SP-70, Class 125, 200 psi CWP, ASTM A 126
cast-iron body and bonnet, solid cast-iron wedge, brass-alloy stem, outside screw and yoke,
Teflon-impregnated packing with 2-piece packing gland assembly, flanged end connections;
and with cast-iron handwheel.
2.4 BALL VALVES
A. Ball Valves, 2 Inches and Smaller: MSS SP-110, Class 150, 600 psi CWP, ASTM B 584
bronze body and bonnet, 2-piece construction; chrome-plated brass ball, standard port for 1/2-
inch valves and smaller and conventional port for 3/4-inch valves and larger; blowout proof;
bronze or brass stem; Teflon seats and seals. Ball valves shall be full-port type for steam
condensate applications as indicated.
1. Operator: Vinyl-covered steel lever handle.
2. Stem Extension: For valves installed in insulated piping.
B. End Connection: Threaded.
2.5 GLOBE VALVES
A. Globe Valves, 2 Inches and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125, 200 psi CWP, or Class 150, 300
psi CWP; ASTM B 62 cast-bronze body and screwed bonnet, rubber, bronze, or Teflon disc,
silicon bronze-alloy stem, Teflon-impregnated packing with bronze nut, and with aluminum or
malleable-iron handwheel.
B. End Connection: Threaded.
C. Globe Valves, 3 Inchesand Larger: MSS SP-85, Class 125, 200 psi CWP, ASTM A 126 cast-
iron body and bolted bonnet with bronze fittings, renewable bronze seat and disc, brass-alloy
stem, outside screw and yoke, Teflon-impregnated packing with cast-iron follower, flanged end
connections; and with cast-iron handwheel.
2.6 BUTTERFLY VALVES
A. Butterfly Valves: MSS SP-67, 200 psi CWP, 150 psi maximum pressure differential, ASTM A
126 cast-iron body and bonnet, extended neck, stainless-steel stem, EPDM sleeve and stem
seals,wafer,lug,or grooved style:
1. Disc Type: Nickel-plated ductile iron for HVAC and plumbing.
2. Operator for Sizes 2 Inches to 6 Inches: Lever handle with latch lock.
3. Operator for Sizes 8 Inches to 24 Inches: Gear operator with position indicator.
B. Valves shall be capable of bubble-tight dead-end shut-off at full rated pressure without the need
of a downstream blind flange.
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING AND HVAC PIPING 230523 -4
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
2.7 CHECK VALVES
A. Swing Check Valves, 2 Inches and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125, 200 psi CWP, or Class
150,300 psi CWP;horizontal swing,Y-pattern,ASTM B 62 cast-bronze body and cap,rotating
bronze disc with rubber seat or composition seat.
B. End Connection: Threaded.
C. Swing Check Valves,2-1/2 Inches and Larger: MSS SP-71,Class 125,200 psi CWP,ASTM A
126 cast-iron body and bolted cap, horizontal-swing bronze disc, flanged or grooved end
connections.
D. Silent Check Valves: Class 125, 200 psi CWP, ASTM A 126 cast-iron body, bronze
disc/plates,stainless steel pins and springs,Buna N seals,wafer or flanged style.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION -
A. Examine piping system for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance of valves. Do not proceed with installation until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove
special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and
handling.
C. Operate valves from fully open to fully closed positions. Examine guides and seats made
accessible by such operation. -
D. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.
E. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper
size, length, and material. Check gasket material for proper size, material composition suitable
for service,and freedom from defects and damage.
F. Do not attempt to repair defective valves;replace with new valves.
3.2 INSTALLATION —
A. Install valves as indicated,according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow servicing,
maintenance,and equipment removal without system shutdown.
C. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.
D. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above the center of the pipe.
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING AND HVAC PIPING 230523-5
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
E. Install valves in a position to allow full stem movement.
F. For chain-wheel operators,extend chains to 60 inches above finished floor elevation.
G. Installation of Check Valves: Install for proper direction of flow as follows:
1. Swing Check Valves: Horizontal position with hinge pin level.
2. Silent Check Valves: Horizontal or vertical position.
3. Lift Check Valve: With stem upright and plumb.
3.3 VALVE END SELECTION
A. Select valves with the following ends or types of pipe/tube connections:
1. Copper Tube Size,2 Inches and Smaller: Threaded ends.
2. Steel Pipe Sizes,2 Inches and Smaller: Threaded or grooved end.
3. Steel Pipe Sizes,2-1/2 Inches and Larger: Grooved end or flanged.
3.4 APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A. General Application: Use gate, ball, and butterfly valves for shutoff duty; globe, ball, and
butterfly for throttling duty. Refer to piping system Specification Sections for specific valve
applications and arrangements. Select trim to suit piping systems:
B. Domestic Water Systems: Use the following valve types.
1. Gate Valves: Class 125,bronze or cast-iron body to suit piping system.
2. Ball Valves: Class 150,600 psi CWP,with stem extension.
3. Globe Valves: Class 125, bronze or cast-iron body to suit piping system, and bronze or
Teflon disc.
4. Butterfly Valves: Nickel-plated ductile iron, aluminum bronze, or elastomer-coated
ductile iron disc; EPDM or Buna N sleeve and stem seals.
5. Bronze Swing Check: Class 125,with rubber seat.
6. Check Valves: Class 125,swing or wafer type as indicated.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust or replace packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service,but before
final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if leak persists.
END OF SECTION 230523
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING AND HVAC PIPING 230523 -6
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 230529-HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Metal pipe hangers and supports.
2. Trapeze pipe hangers.
3. Thermal-hanger shield inserts.
4. Fastener systems.
5. Equipment supports.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For multiple piping supports and trapeze hangers, show fabrication and
installation details and include calculations. Details shall indicate connections to equipment,
piping and structure.
C. Welding certificates.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230529- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:
1. Description: MSS SP-58,Types 1 through 58,factory-fabricated components.
2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped.
3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating,jacket,or liner.
4. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to
support bearing surface of piping.
5. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod,nuts,and washer made of carbon steel.
2.2 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS
A. Description: MSS SP-69,Type 59, shop-or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from
structural carbon-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-
bolts. -
2.3 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following:
1. Carpenter&Paterson, Inc.
2. ERICO International Corporation.
3. Mechanical Pipe Shields"SNAP-ITZ."
4. National Pipe Hanger Corporation.
5. PHS Industries,Inc.
6. Pipe Shields,Inc.;a subsidiary of Piping Technology&Products,Inc.
7. Piping Technology&Products,Inc.
8. Rilco Manufacturing Co.,Inc.
9. TOLCO a brand of Nibco.
10. Value Engineered Products,Inc.
B. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate
with 125-psig or water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate, minimum
compressive strength and vapor barrier.
C. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.
D. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.
E. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient
air temperature.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230529-2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
2.4 FASTENER SYSTEMS
A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud,for use in hardened portland cement concrete
with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building
materials where used.
B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel anchors, for use in
hardened portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for
supported loads and building materials where used.
2.5 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Description: Welded,shop-or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural carbon-
steel shapes.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and
galvanized.
B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and
nonmetallic grout;suitable for interior and exterior applications.
1. Properties: Nonstaining,noncorrosive,and nongaseous.
2. Design Mix: 5000-psi,28-day compressive strength.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers,
supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from the building
structure.
B. Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange
for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field-fabricated
trapeze pipe hangers.
1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or
install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe
hangers.
2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel shapes selected for loads being
supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
C. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Installed by Mechanical Contractor at time of hanger
installation. Inserts are required on all cold piping 2 inch and larger.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230529-3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85% PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
D. Fastener System Installation:
1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less
than 4 inches thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use
operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners
according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.
2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely
cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts,
washers,and other accessories.
F. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.
G. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping
systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of
expansion joints,expansion loops,expansion bends,and similar units.
H. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.
I. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional
attachments at concentrated loads,including valves,flanges,and strainers,NPS 2-1/2 and larger
and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten
inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.
J. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses
from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
K. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed
maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.
L. Insulated Piping:
1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.
a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through
insulation.
b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield
insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert for pipes 2 inches and larger. Run
insulation continuously through hanger and install a galvanized Type 40 insulation
shield between hanger and insulation for pipes smaller than 2 inches.
c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services
piping.
2. Where indicated, install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without
vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining
insulation.
3. Install MSS SP-58,Type 40,protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier smaller
than 2 inches. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230529-4
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:
a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick.
b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.
c. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.
d. NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick.
e. NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick.
5. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.
3.2 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support
equipment above floor.
B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make bearing surface smooth.
C. Provide lateral bracing,to prevent swaying,for equipment supports.
3.3 METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Cut,drill,and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for equipment supports.
B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be
shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/DI.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding;
appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the
following: -
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and so
contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve
indicated slope of pipe.
B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230529-5
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
3.5 PAINTING
A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately
after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply
with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.
1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
B. Touchup: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds,bolted connections,and abraded areas
of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 09 painting Sections.
C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply
galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE
A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and
equipment.
B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in
piping system Sections.
C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will
not have field-applied finish.
D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in
direct contact with copper tubing.
E. Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports and attachments for general service applications.
F. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.
G. Use thermal-hanger shield inserts for cold insulated piping and tubing.
H. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in
piping system Sections,install the following types:
Pipe Size Pipe Material MSS Manufacturer/Model Notes
Hanger
Type
1/2" -4" Bare Steel Type l ANVIL Fig. 65
5" - 14" Bare Steel Type I ANVIL Fig.260
1/2" -4" Bare Copper Type 9 ANVIL Fig. CT-99
or CT-65
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230529-6
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
Pipe Size Pipe Material MSS Manufacturer/Model Notes
Hanger
Type
1/2" -4" Insulated Copper(Hot) Type 9 ANVIL Fig. CT-99
or CT-65
1/2" - 12" Insulated Steel(Hot) Type 1 ANVIL Fig.300 Hanger may contact
pipe.
1/2" - 1-1-2" Insulated Copper and Type 1 ANVIL Fig. 300 No pipe contact
Steel(Cold) with shield allowed.
2" - 12" Insulated Copper and Type 1 ANVIL Fig. 300 No pipe contact
Steel(Cold) with shield and allowed.
insert
2"-8" Cast Iron Sewer Type 1 ANVIL Fig.260
1/2"-4" Bare PVC Type I ANVIL Fig. 65
Epoxy Coated
5"- 18" Bare PVC Type 1 ANVIL Fib. 260
(Epoxy Coated)
I. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections,install the following types:
1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to
NPS 24.
2. Carbon-or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps(MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4
to NPS 24 if longer ends are required for riser clamps.
J. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections,install the following types:
1. Steel Turnbuckles(MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads.
2. Steel Clevises(MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.
3. Swivel Turnbuckles(MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11,split pipe rings.
4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of
building attachments.
5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts(MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.
K. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections,install the following types:
1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend
pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230529-7
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar joist
construction,to attach to top flange of structural shape.
3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps(MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams,
channels,or angles.
4. Center-Beam Clamps(MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.
5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads
are considerable and rod sizes are large.
6. C-Clamps(MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.
7. Top-Beam Clamps(MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to
flange edge.
8. Side-Beam Clamps(MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams.
9. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel I-
beams for heavy loads.
10. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts(MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel I-
beams for heavy loads,with link extensions.
11. Malleable-Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to
structural steel.
12. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from above
by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:
a. Light(MSS Type 31): 750 lb.
b. Medium(MSS Type 32): 1500 lb.
c. Heavy(MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.
13. Side-Beam Brackets(MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.
14. Plate Lugs(MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required.
15. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear
horizontal movement where headroom is limited.
L. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system _
Sections,install the following types:
1. Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with
insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer
to prevent crushing insulation.
3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.
M. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not
specified in piping system Sections.
N. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building
attachments where required in concrete construction.
END OF SECTION 230529
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230529-8
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 230548 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING AND HVAC
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Freestanding and restrained spring isolators.
2. Spring hangers.
3. Seismic snubbers.
4. Restraining braces and cables.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. IBC: International Building Code.
B. ICC-ES: ICC-Evaluation Service.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Wind-Restraint Loading:
1. Basic Wind Speed: 95 MPH.
2. Occupancy Classification Category: II.
3. Minimum 10 lb/sq. ft. multiplied by the maximum area of the HVAC component
projected on a vertical plane that is normal to the wind direction, and 45 degrees either
side of normal.
B. Seismic-Restraint Loading:
1. Site Class as Defined in the IBC: D.
2. Occupancy Classification Category as Defined in the IBC: II.
a. Component Importance Factor: ASCE Chapter 13,based on application.
b. Component Response Modification Factor: ASCE Chapter 13, based on
application.
c. Component Amplification Factor: ASCE Chapter 13,based on application.
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING AND HVAC 230548 - 1
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
3. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at Short Periods(0.2 Second): SDS=70.1.
4. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at 1-Second Period: SDI =38.8.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration isolation
device.
2. Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each
type and size of seismic-restraint component used.
a. Tabulate types and sizes of seismic restraints, complete with report numbers and
rated strength in tension and shear as evaluated by an evaluation service member
of ICC-ES,OSHPD or an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction].
b. Annotate to indicate application of each product submitted and compliance with
requirements.
3. Interlocking Snubbers: Include ratings for horizontal,vertical,and combined loads.
B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For vibration isolation and seismic-restraint details indicated to
comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and
sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1. Design Calculations: Calculate static and dynamic loading due to equipment weight and
operation,seismic and wind forces required to select vibration isolators,seismic and wind
restraints,and for designing vibration isolation bases.
a. Coordinate design calculations with wind load calculations required for equipment
mounted outdoors. Comply with requirements in other Division 22 Sections for
equipment mounted outdoors.
2. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail overall dimensions, including anchorages and
attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides and
rails,base weights,equipment static loads,power transmission,component misalignment,
and cantilever loads.
3. Seismic and Wind-Restraint Details:
a. Design Analysis: To support selection and arrangement of seismic and wind
restraints. Include calculations of combined tensile and shear loads.
b. Details: Indicate fabrication and arrangement. Detail attachments of restraints to
the restrained items and to the structure. Show attachment locations,methods, and
spacings. Identify components, list their strengths, and indicate directions and
values of forces transmitted to the structure during seismic events. Indicate
association with vibration isolation devices.
c. Coordinate seismic-restraint and vibration isolation details with wind-restraint
details required for equipment mounted outdoors. Comply with requirements in
other Division 22 Sections for equipment mounted outdoors.
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING AND HVAC 230548 -2
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
d. Preapproval and Evaluation Documentation: By an evaluation service member of
ICC-ES, OSHPD or an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
showing maximum ratings of restraint items and the basis for approval (tests or
calculations).
C. Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of seismic bracing for HVAC piping and
equipment with other systems and equipment in the vicinity, including other supports and
seismic restraints.
D. Welding certificates.
E. Field quality-control test reports.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to
conduct the testing indicated, that is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as
defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7,and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the IBC unless requirements in this Section are
more stringent.
C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural
Welding Code-Steel."
D. Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis and shall
bear anchorage preapproval OPA number from OSHPD, preapproval by ICC-ES, or
preapproval by another agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,showing maximum
seismic-restraint ratings. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to ratings based on
calculations. If preapproved ratings are not available, submittals based on independent testing
are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear and tensile loads) to support seismic-
restraint designs must be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATORS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following:
1. Ace Mountings Co.,Inc.
2. Amber/Booth Company,Inc.
3. California Dynamics Corporation.
4. Isolation Technology,Inc.
5. Kinetics Noise Control.
6. Mason Industries.
7. Vibration Eliminator Co.,Inc.
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING AND HVAC 230548-3
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
8. Vibration Isolation.
9. Vibration Mountings&Controls,Inc.
B. Spring Isolators: Freestanding,laterally stable,open-spring isolators.
1. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the
spring at rated load.
2. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
3. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
4. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
deformation or failure.
5. Baseplates: Factory drilled for bolting to structure and bonded to 1/4-inch-thick, rubber
isolator pad attached to baseplate underside. Baseplates shall limit floor load to 500 psig.
6. Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and cap screw
to fasten and level equipment.
C. Restrained Spring Isolators: Freestanding,steel,open-spring isolators with seismic or limit-stop
restraint.
1. Housing: Steel with resilient vertical-limit stops to prevent spring extension due to
weight being removed; factory-drilled baseplate bonded to 1/4-inch- thick, neoprene or
rubber isolator pad attached to baseplate underside; and adjustable equipment mounting
and leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation.
2. Restraint: Seismic or limit stop as required for equipment and authorities having
jurisdiction.
3. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the
spring at rated load.
4. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
5. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
6. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
deformation or failure.
D. Spring Hangers: Combination coil-spring and elastomeric-insert hanger with spring and insert
in compression.
1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a
maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing
isolation efficiency.
2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the
spring at rated load.
3. Minimum Additional_Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
deformation or failure.
6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel-washer-reinforced
cup to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame.
7. Self-centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and support
spring coil.
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING AND HVAC 230548-4
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
E. Spring Hangers with Vertical-Limit Stop: Combination coil-spring and elastomeric-insert
hanger with spring and insert in compression and with a vertical-limit stop.
1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a
maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing
isolation efficiency.
2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the
spring at rated load.
3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
deformation or failure.
6. Elastomeric Element: Molded,oil-resistant rubber or neoprene.
7. Adjustable Vertical Stop: Steel washer with neoprene washer "up-stop" on lower
threaded rod.
8. Self-centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and support
spring coil.
F. Pipe Riser Resilient Support: All-directional,acoustical pipe anchor consisting of 2 steel tubes
separated by a minimum of 1/2-inch-thick neoprene. Include steel and neoprene vertical-limit
stops arranged to prevent vertical travel in both directions. Design support for a maximum load
on the isolation material of 500 psig and for equal resistance in all directions.
G. Resilient Pipe Guides: Telescopic arrangement of two steel tubes or post and sleeve
arrangement separated by a minimum of 1/2-inch- thick neoprene. Where clearances are not
readily visible, a factory-set guide height with a shear pin to allow vertical motion due to pipe
expansion and contraction shall be fitted. Shear pin shall be removable and reinsertable to
allow for selection of pipe movement. Guides shall be capable of motion to meet location
requirements.
2.2 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICES
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following:
1. Amber/Booth Company,Inc.
2. California Dynamics Corporation.
3. Cooper B-Line,Inc.;a division of Cooper Industries.
4. Hilti,Inc.
5. Kinetics Noise Control.
6. Loos&Co.;Cableware Division.
7. Mason Industries.
8. TOLCO Incorporated;a brand of NIBCO INC.
9. Unistrut;Tyco International,Ltd.
B. General Requirements for Restraint Components: Rated strengths, features, and applications
shall be as defined in reports by an evaluation service member of ICC-ES,OSHPD or an agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING AND HVAC 230548-5
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1. Structural Safety Factor: Allowable strength in tension, shear, and pullout force of
components shall be at least four times the maximum seismic forces to which they will be
subjected.
C. Snubbers: Factory fabricated using welded structural-steel shapes and plates, anchor bolts,and
replaceable resilient isolation washers and bushings.
1. Anchor bolts for attaching to concrete shall be seismic-rated, drill-in, and stud-wedge or
female-wedge type.
2. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: Oil-and water-resistant neoprene.
3. Maximum 1/4-inch air gap,and minimum 1/4-inch-thick resilient cushion.
D. Channel Support System: MFMA-3,shop-or field-fabricated support assembly made of slotted
steel channels with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building
structure at the other end and other matching components and with corrosion-resistant coating;
and rated in tension,compression,and torsion forces.
E. Restraint Cables: ASTM A 603 galvanized or ASTM A 492 stainless]-steel cables with end
connections made of steel assemblies with thimbles, brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for
restraining cable service;and with a minimum of two clamping bolts for cable engagement.
F. Hanger Rod Stiffener: Steel tube or steel slotted-support-system sleeve with internally bolted
connections or reinforcing steel angle clamped to hanger rod.
G. Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchor Bolts: Neoprene bushings designed for rigid
equipment mountings,and matched to type and size of anchor bolts and studs.
H. Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene
elements and steel sleeves designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and
size of attachment devices used.
I. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: One-piece, molded, oil- and water-resistant
neoprene,with a flat washer face.
J. Mechanical Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type in zinc-coated steel
for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with
strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488. Minimum length of eight
times diameter.
K. Adhesive Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and capsule anchor system containing polyvinyl or urethane
methacrylate-based resin and accelerator, or injected polymer or hybrid mortar adhesive.
Provide anchor bolts and hardware with zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless
steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as
tested according to ASTM E 488.
2.3 FACTORY FINISHES
A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting.
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING AND HVAC 230548-6
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
B. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested equipment
before shipping.
1. Powder coating on springs and housings.
2. All hardware shall be galvanized. Hot-dip galvanize metal components for exterior use.
3. Baked enamel or powder coat for metal components on isolators for interior use.
4. Color-code or otherwise mark vibration isolation and seismic-and wind-control devices
to indicate capacity range.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic-and wind-control
devices for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance.
B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations
before installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 APPLICATIONS
A. Multiple Pipe Supports: Secure pipes to trapeze member with clamps approved for application
by an evaluation service member of ICC-ES OSHPD or an agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.
B. Hanger Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger rod stiffeners where indicated or scheduled on Drawings
to receive them and where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods due to seismic forces.
C. Strength of Support and Seismic-Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of
components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads
within specified loading limits.
3.3 VIBRATION-CONTROL AND SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION
A. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories" for installation of roof
curbs, equipment supports,and roof penetrations.
B. Equipment Restraints:
1. Install seismic snubbers on HVAC equipment mounted on vibration isolators. Locate
snubbers as close as possible to vibration isolators and bolt to equipment base and
supporting structure.
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING AND HVAC 230548 -7
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
2. Install resilient bolt isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance
between anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inch.
3. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an evaluation service
member of ICC-ES, OSHPD or an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction
providing required submittals for component.
C. Piping Restraints:
1. Comply with requirements in MSS SP-127.
2. Space lateral supports a maximum of 40 feet o.c., and longitudinal supports a maximum
of 80 feet o.c.
3. Brace a change of direction longer than 12 feet.
D. Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure.
E. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an evaluation service member of
ICC-ES,OSHPD or an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction] providing required
submittals for component.
F. Install bushing assemblies for anchor bolts for floor-mounted equipment, arranged to provide
resilient media between anchor bolt and mounting hole in concrete base.
G. Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged to provide
resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached to wall.
H. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at
flanges of beams,at upper truss chords of bar joists,or at concrete members.
I. Drilled-in Anchors:
1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for
anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or
drilling. Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are
encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and
telecommunications conduit,and gas lines.
2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved
full design strength.
3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-duty
sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to
which anchor is to be fastened.
4. Adhesive Anchors: Clean holes to remove loose material and drilling dust prior to
installation of adhesive. Place adhesive in holes proceeding from the bottom of the hole
and progressing toward the surface in such a manner as to avoid introduction of air
pockets in the adhesive.
5. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque,using a torque wrench.
6. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless-steel anchors for exterior
applications.
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING AND HVAC 230548-8
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
3.4 ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION
A. Install flexible connections in piping where they cross seismic joints,where adjacent sections or
branches are supported by different structural elements, and where the connections terminate
with connection to equipment that is anchored to a different structural element from the one
supporting the connections as they approach equipment. Comply with requirements in
Division 22 Section"Hydronic Piping"for piping flexible connections.
END OF SECTION 230548
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING AND HVAC 230548-9
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 230553-IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING AND HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following mechanical identification materials and their installation:
1. Equipment markers.
2. Pipe markers.
3. Stencils.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME A13.1, "Scheme for the Identification of Piping
Systems," for letter size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification
devices for piping.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of
surfaces where devices are to be applied.
B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.
C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
A. Equipment Markers: Engraved,color-coded laminated plastic. Include contact-type,permanent
adhesive.
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING AND HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230553- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1. Terminology: Match schedules as closely as possible.
2. Data:
a. Name and plan number.
b. Equipment service.
c. Design capacity.
d. Other design parameters such as pressure drop, entering and leaving conditions,
and speed.
3. Size: 2-1/2 by 4 inchesfor control devices, dampers, and valves; 4-1/2 by 6 inchesfor
equipment.
2.2 PIPING IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
A. Manufactured Pipe Markers,General: Preprinted,color-coded,with lettering indicating service,
and showing direction of flow.
1. Colors: Comply with ASME A13.1,unless otherwise indicated.
2. Lettering: Use piping system terms indicated and abbreviate only as necessary for each
application length.
3. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 inches: Full-band pipe markers
extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location.
4. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 inches and Larger: Either full-band or strip-type
pipe markers at least three times letter height and of length required for label.
5. Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions;or
as separate unit on each pipe marker to indicate direction of flow.
B. Pretensioned Pipe Markers: Precoiled semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of
pipe and to attach to pipe without adhesive.
C. Shaped Pipe Markers: Preformed semirigid plastic formed to partially cover circumference of
pipe and to attach to pipe with mechanical fasteners that do not penetrate insulation vapor
barrier.
D. Self-Adhesive Pipe Markers: Plastic with pressure-sensitive, permanent-type, self-adhesive
back.
E. Plastic Tape: Continuously printed, vinyl tape at least 3 mils thick with pressure-sensitive,
permanent-type,self-adhesive back.
1. Width for Markers on Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 inches: 3/4-
inchminimum.
2. Width for Markers on Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 inches or Larger: 1-1/2
inchesminimum.
2.3 STENCILS
A. Stencils: Prepared with letter sizes according to ASME A13.1 for piping.
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING AND HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230553-2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1. Stencil Material: Metal or fiberboard.
2. Stencil Paint: Exterior,gloss,alkyd enamel or acrylic enamel black,in pressurized spray-
can form.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATIONS,GENERAL
A. Products specified are for applications referenced in other related Sections. If more than single-
type material,device,or label is specified for listed applications,selection is Installer's option.
3.2 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
A. Install equipment markers with permanent adhesive on or near each major item of mechanical
equipment.
_ 1. Letter Size: Minimum 1/4-inchfor name of units if viewing distance is less than 24
inches, 1/2-inchfor viewing distances up to 72 inches,and proportionately larger lettering
for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the
size of principal lettering.
2. Data: Distinguish among multiple units, indicate operational requirements, indicate
safety and emergency precautions,warn of hazards and improper operations,and identify
units.
3. Locate markers where accessible and visible. Include markers for the following general
categories of equipment:
a. Fire department hose valves and hose stations.
b. Fuel-burning units,including boilers,furnaces,heaters,and rooftop units.
c. Pumps,compressors,chillers,condensers,and similar motor-driven units.
d. Heat exchangers,cooling towers,heat recovery units,and similar equipment.
e. Fans,blowers,mixing boxes and VAV boxes.
f. Packaged HVAC central-station air handling units.
g. Tanks and pressure vessels.
B. Stenciled Equipment Marker Option: Stenciled markers may be provided instead of laminated-
plastic equipment markers,at Installer's option, if lettering larger than 1 inch high is needed for
proper identification because of distance from normal location of required identification.
3.3 PIPING IDENTIFICATION
A. Install manufactured pipe markers indicating service on each piping system. Install with flow
indication arrows showing direction of flow.
1. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 inches: Self-adhesive pipe markers.
Use color-coded, self-adhesive plastic tape, at least 3/4-inch wide, lapped at least 1-1/2
inches at both ends of pipe marker,and covering full circumference of pipe.
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING AND HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230553-3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW i
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
2. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 inches and Larger: Self-adhesive pipe markers.
Use color-coded, self-adhesive plastic tape, at least 1-1/2 inches wide, lapped at least 3
inches at both ends of pipe marker,and covering full circumference of pipe.
B. Stenciled Pipe Marker Option: Stenciled markers may be provided instead of manufactured
pipe markers,at Installer's option. Install stenciled pipe markers complying with ASME A13.1
on each piping system.
C. Locate pipe markers where piping is exposed in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible
maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; exterior nonconcealed locations and
concealed ceiling spaces as follows:
1. Near each valve and control device.
2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.
Where flow pattern is not obvious,mark each pipe at branch.
3. Near penetrations through walls,floors,ceilings,and nonaccessible enclosures.
4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed
piping.
5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in
areas of congested piping and equipment.
7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings at intervals of 50 feet.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean faces of mechanical identification devices and glass frames of valve schedules.
END OF SECTION 230553
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING AND HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230553-4
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 230593-TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes TAB to produce design objectives for all air and water systems.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: Within 30 days from Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit 2 copies of
evidence that TAB firm and this Project's TAB team members meet the qualifications specified
in"Quality Assurance"Article.
B. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 45 days from Contractor's Notice to Proceed,
submit 2 copies of the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3.
C. Sample Report Forms: Submit two sets of sample TAB report forms.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. TAB Firm Qualifications: Engage a TAB firm certified by either AABC or NEBB.
B. The Test and Balance Contractor shall be an independent consultant. The firm shall be
independent of all Contractors including the Mechanical and Temperature Controls Contractor.
C. Certification of TAB Reports: Certify TAB field data reports. This certification includes the
following:
1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB
reports.
2. Certify that TAB team complied with approved TAB plan and the procedures specified
and referenced in this Specification.
D. TAB Report Forms: Use standard forms from NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing,
Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems." Or from SMACNA's "HVAC Systems -
Testing,Adjusting,and Balancing."
E. Instrumentation Calibration: Calibrate instruments at least every six months or more frequently
if required by instrument manufacturer.
TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593- 1
1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1. Keep an updated record of instrument calibration that indicates date of calibration and the
name of party performing instrument calibration.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for systems and equipment,
HVAC controls installers, and other mechanics to operate HVAC systems and equipment to
support and assist TAB activities.
B. Notice: Provide seven days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and
times.
C. Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems have been
satisfactorily completed.
PART 2-PRODUCTS(Not Used)
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover
conditions in systems'designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.
1. Verify that balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-
control devices,balancing valves and fittings,and manual volume dampers, are required
by the Contract Documents. Verify that quantities and locations of these balancing
devices are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and
equipment operation.
B. Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that testing,
cleaning,adjusting,and commissioning specified in individual Sections have been performed.
C. Examine HVAC system and equipment installations to verify that indicated balancing devices,
such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and
fittings, and manual volume dampers, are properly installed, and that their locations are
accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment
operation.
D. Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting and
balancing.
E. Examine HVAC equipment to ensure that clean filters have been installed,bearings are greased,
belts are aligned and tight,and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.
F. Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks and controls.
TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593-2
I-
I WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
85%PERMIT DOC
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
I G. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe
and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from
indicated values.
I3.2 PREPARATION
I3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING
I A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained
in NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental
Systems" or SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" and this
Section.
B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the
minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing and
I balancing,close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to those removed.
Restore vapor barrier and finish according to insulation Specifications for this Project.
C. Mark equipment and balancing device settings with paint or other suitable, permanent
I
identification material,including damper-control positions,valve position indicators,fan-speed-
control levers,and similar controls and devices,to show final settings.
3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS
A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and
recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with
required fan volumes.
1 B. For variable-air-volume systems,develop a plan to simulate diversity.
C. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow measurements.
D. Check airflow patterns from the outside-air louvers and dampers and the return-and exhaust-air
dampers,through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.
E. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.
F. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.
G. Check for airflow blockages.
H. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.
I. Check for proper sealing of air-handling unit components.
J. Check for proper sealing of air duct system.
K. Manually adjust deflectors in slot diffusers to achieve horizontal airflow.
TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593-3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
3.5 TOLERANCES
A. Set HVAC system airflow and water flow rates within the following tolerances:
1. Supply,Return,and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus 5 to plus 10 percent.
2. Air Outlets and Inlets: 0 to minus 10 percent.
3. Heating-Water Flow Rate: 0 to minus 10 percent.
4. Cooling-Water Flow Rate: 0 to minus 5 percent.
3.6 FINAL REPORT
A. General: Typewritten, or computer printout in letter-quality font, on standard bond paper, in
three-ring binder,tabulated and divided into sections by tested and balanced systems.
B. Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed by the testing and balancing engineer.
1. Include a list of instruments used for procedures,along with proof of calibration.
C. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data in the -
final report,as applicable:
1. Title page.
2. Name and address of TAB firm.
3. Project name.
4. Project location.
5. Architect's/Engineer's name and address.
6. Contractor's name and address.
7. Report date.
8. Signature of TAB firm who certifies the report.
9. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report.
Number each page in the report.
10. Summary of contents including the following:
a. Indicated versus final performance.
b. Notable characteristics of systems.
c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract
Documents.
11. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports varies from indicated
values.
12. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following:
a. Settings for outside-,return-,and exhaust-air dampers.
b. Conditions of filters.
c. Cooling coil,wet-and dry-bulb conditions.
d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils.
e. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter.
f. Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems.
g. Settings for supply-air,static-pressure controller.
TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593-4
— WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.
3.7 ADDITIONAL TESTS
A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional testing and balancing to verify that
balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.
B. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and
winter conditions, perform additional testing, inspecting, and adjusting during near-peak
summer and winter conditions.
END OF SECTION 230593
TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593-5
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 230700-HVAC INSULATION
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes pipe,duct,and equipment insulation.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data for each type of mechanical insulation identifying k-value, thickness, jackets
(factory and field applied)and accessories.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire Performance Characteristics: Conform to the following characteristics for insulation
including facings, cements, and adhesives, when tested according to ASTM E 84, by UL or
other testing or inspecting organization acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. Label
insulation with appropriate markings of testing laboratory.
1. Interior Insulation: Flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50
or less.
2. Exterior Insulation: Flame spread rating of 75 or less and a smoke developed rating of
150 or less.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Section
230529"Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application, duct
Installer for duct installation application, and equipment Installer for equipment insulation
application. Before preparing piping and ductwork Shop Drawings, establish and maintain
clearance requirements for installation of insulation.
1.5 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing of piping and duct systems.
B. Schedule insulation application after installation and testing of heat trace tape.
C. Thermal-hanger shield inserts are specified in"Hangers and Supports." Inserts shall be installed
at the time of hanger installation.
HVAC INSULATION 230700- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Glass Fiber:
a. CertainTeed Corporation.
b. Knauf Fiberglass.
c. Manville/Schuller.
d. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corporation.
e. E-Insulation.
2. Flexible Elastomeric Cellular:
a. Armacell LLC.
b. IMCOA Corporation.
c. Rubatex Corporation.
3. Calcium Silicate:
a. Industrial Insulation Group(The).
b. Johns Manville.
c. Owens-Corning Corporation.
4. Fire Protection System:
a. Certainteed Corporation.
b. Johns Manville.
c. Thermal Ceramics.
d. 3M Fire Barrier.
2.2 GLASS FIBER
A. Material: Inorganic glass fibers,bonded with a thermosetting resin.
B. Jacket: All-service, factory-applied, laminated glass-fiber-reinforced, flame-retardant kraft
paper and aluminum foil skrim backing having pressure sensitive self-sealing lap.
C. Board: ASTM C 612,Class 2,semi-rigid jacketed board.
1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.23 average maximum,at 75 deg F mean temperature.
2. Density: 3.0 pcf average maximum.
D. Blanket: ASTM C 553,Type I,Class B-2,jacketed flexible blankets.
I. Thermal Conductivity: 0.27 at compressed thickness,at 75 deg F mean temperature.
HVAC INSULATION 230700-2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
2. Density: 0.751b/cu. ft.
E. Preformed Pipe Insulation: ASTM C 547, Class 1, rigid pipe insulation, factory applied all-
Iservice jacket with self seal lap.
1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.26 average maximum at 75 deg F mean temperature.
2. Density: 5 lb/cu. ft average maximum.
I F. Vapor Barrier Coating: Waterproof coating recommended by insulation manufacturer for
outside service.
1 2.3 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC CELLULAR
IA. Material: Flexible expanded closed-cell structure with smooth skin on both sides.
1. Tubular Materials: ASTM C 534,Type I.
2. Sheet Materials: ASTM C 534,Type II.
B. Thermal Conductivity: 0.25 average maximum at 75 deg F.
C. Coating: Water based latex enamel coating recommended by insulation manufacturer.
2.4 CALCIUM SILICATE
A. Material: ASTM C 533, Type I; inorganic, hydrous calcium silicate, non-asbestos fibrous
reinforcement;incombustible.
B. Form: Molded flat block,curved block,and grooved block as appropriate for surface.
C. Thermal Conductivity: 0.60 at 500 deg F.
D. Dry Density: 15.0 pcf maximum.
E. Compressive Strength: 60 psi minimum at 5 percent deformation.
F. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide materials identical to those whose fire performance
characteristics have been determined, per test method indicated below, by UL or other testing
and inspecting organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Test Method: ASTM E 84.
2. Flame Spread: 0.
3. Smoke Developed: 0.
G. Minimum Temperature Rating: 1,200 deg F.
HVAC INSULATION 230700-3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
2.5 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM
A. Fire-Rated Blanket: High-temperature, flexible,blanket insulation with foil, scrim, kraft paper
jacket that is tested and certified to provide a 1-hour fire rating.
I. General: UL classified filler material, flame spread 5, smoke developed 5, R value per
ASTM C 518 -4.5 at 70 deg F.
2. Physical Properties: Service range to 2300 deg F, melting point of 3200 deg F, color
white.
3. Foil Physical Properties: Puncture resistance - Beach 100 units minimum, tensile
strength M.D. 40 lbs/in2 width average, C.D. 40 lb/in2 width average, light reflectance
90.5percent.
4. System Components: Carbon steel banding, insulation pins and speed clips.
2.6 ADHESIVES
A. Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation Adhesive: Solvent-based, contact adhesive
recommended by insulation manufacturer. Comply with MIL-A-24179A,Type II,Class 1.
B. Calcium Silicate Adhesive: Fibrous, sodium-silicate-based adhesive with a service temperature
range equal to material being bonded.
2.7 FIELD APPLIED JACKETS
A. PVC Jacketing: High-impact, ultra-violet-resistant PVC, 30-mils thick, roll stock ready for
shop or field cutting and forming to indicated sizes.
1. Mastic/Adhesive: As recommended by insulation manufacturer.
B. PVC Fitting Covers: Factory-fabricated fitting covers manufactured from 30-mil-thick, high-
impact,ultra-violet-resistant PVC.
1. Mastic around fitting to pipe insulation.
2.8 ACCESSORIES AND ATTACHMENTS
A. Bands: 3/4-inch wide,in one of the following materials compatible with jacket:
1. Aluminum: 0.007-inch thick.
2. 1/8-inch by 1/8-inch rapid penetrating point screws for non-vapor barrier application.
B. Wire: 14 gauge nickel copper alloy, 16 gauge, soft-annealed stainless steel,or 160 gauge, soft-
annealed galvanized steel.
C. Cupped Head Weld Pins- 1-1/2 inch diameter cupped head, mild, annealed steel with zinc
plating.
D. Corner Angles: 28 gauge, 1 inch by 1 inch aluminum, adhered to 2 inch by 2 inch kraft paper.
HVAC INSULATION 230700-4
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
E. Anchor Pins: Capable of supporting 20 pounds each. Provide anchor pins and speed washers
of sizes and diameters as recommended by the manufacturer for insulation type and thickness.
F. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive,
complying with ASTM C 1136 and UL listed.
1. Width: 3 inches.
2. Thickness: 11.5 mils.
3. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.
4. Elongation: 2 percent.
5. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.
6. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.
G. Foil/Skrim/Kraft Tape: Vapor barrier tape with rubber adhesive and UL listed and 25/20 rated.
1. Width: 2 inches.
2. Thickness: 3.7 mils.
3. Adhesion: 85 ounces force/inch in width.
4. Elongation: 5 percent.
-5. Tensile Strength: 45 lbf/inch in width.
2.9 SEALING COMPOUNDS-MASTIC
A. Vapor Barrier Compound: Water-based,fire-resistive composition.
1. Water Vapor Permeance: 0.08 perm maximum.
2. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to 180 deg F.
B. Weatherproof Sealant: Flexible-elastomer-based, vapor-barrier sealant designed to seal metal
-joints.
1. Water Vapor Permeance: 0.02 perm maximum.
2. Temperature Range: Minus 50 to 250 deg F.
3. Color: Aluminum.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean,dry,and remove foreign materials such as rust,scale,and dirt.
3.2 INSTALLATION,GENERAL
A. Refer to schedules at the end of this Section for materials, forms, jackets, and thicknesses
required for each mechanical system.
HVAC INSULATION 230700-5
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
B. Select accessories compatible with materials suitable for the service. Select accessories that do
not corrode, soften,or otherwise attack the insulation or jacket in either the wet or dry state.
C. Install vapor barriers on insulated pipes, ducts, and equipment where indicated and defined in
insulation service chart.
D. Apply insulation material, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturer's printed
instructions.
E. Seal joints and seams to maintain vapor barrier on insulation requiring a vapor barrier.
F. Seal penetrations for hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections in insulation requiring a
vapor barrier.
G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
H. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated do not apply insulation to the following
systems,materials,and equipment:
1. Metal ducts with duct liner.
2. Flexible connectors for ducts and pipes.
3. Testing laboratory labels and stamps.
4. Nameplates and data plates.
5. Access panels and doors in air distribution systems.
6. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings,except for plumbing fixtures for the disabled.
7. Backflow prevention device.
3.3 PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION,GENERAL
A. Tightly butt longitudinal seams and end joints.
B. Apply insulation continuously over fittings,valves,and specialties.
C. Apply insulation with a minimum number of joints.
D. Apply insulation with all service jackets as follows:
1. Pull jacket tight and smooth.
2. Cover circumferential joints with butt strips,at least 3 inches wide, and of same material
as insulation jacket.
3. Longitudinal Seams: Overlap seams at least 1-1/2-inches. Apply insulation with
longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap.
4. At penetrations in jackets for thermometers and pressure gauges, fill and seal voids with
mastic.
5. Repair damaged insulation jackets, except metal jackets, by applying jacket material
around damaged jacket. Extend patch at least 2 inches in both directions beyond
damaged insulation jacket and around the entire circumference of the pipe.
HVAC INSULATION 230700-6
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
E. Roof Penetrations: Apply insulation for interior applications to a point even with the top of the
roof flashing. Seal with vapor barrier coating. Apply insulation for exterior applications butted
tightly to interior insulation ends. Extend metal jacket for exterior insulation outside roof
flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof flashing. Seal metal jacket to roof flashing with
vapor barrier coating.
F. Exterior Wall Penetrations: For penetrations of below grade exterior walls,terminate insulation
flush with mechanical sleeve seal. Seal terminations with vapor barrier coating.
G. Interior Walls and Partitions Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through walls and
partitions,except fire-rated walls and partitions.
H. Fire-Rated Walls and Partitions Penetrations: Terminate insulation at penetrations through fire-
rated walls and partitions. Seal insulation ends with vapor barrier coating. Seal around
penetration with firestopping or fire-resistant joint sealer.
I. Floor Penetrations: Terminate insulation underside of floor assembly and at floor support at top
of floor.
J. Flanges,Fittings, and Valves- Interior Exposed and Concealed: Coat pipe insulation ends with
mastic. Apply premolded, precut, or field-fabricated segments of insulation around flanges,
unions,valves,and fittings. Make joints tight.
1. Use same material and thickness as adjacent pipe insulation.
2. Overlap nesting insulation by 2 inches or 1-pipe diameter,which ever is greater.
3. Insulate elbows with blanket insulation inserts.
4. Cover insulation, except for metal jacketed insulation, with PVC fitting covers and seal
circumferential joints with butt strips.
K. Hangers and Anchors: Apply insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor
attachments. For vapor barrier application piping, extend insulation on anchor-legs a minimum
of 12 inches and taper and seal insulation ends.
1. Install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with
adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer. Refer
to"Hangers and Supports"for thermal-hanger shield inserts.
2. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over
jacket,arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger,support,and shield.
3.4 BELOW GROUND PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. General: The following are additional requirements for insulation applied to piping installed
below ground.
1 B. Terminate insulation at anchor blocks.
C. Apply insulation continuously through sleeves and manholes, except as specified above for
exterior wall penetrations.
HVAC INSULATION 230700-7
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
3.5 GLASS FIBER PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Seal exposed seams and joint ends,with mastic.
3.6 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Slip insulation on the pipe before making connections wherever possible. Seal joints with
adhesive. Where the slip-on technique is not possible,use longitudinally precut insulation and
apply to the pipe. Seal seams and joints with adhesive.
B. Valves, Fittings, and Flanges: Cut insulation segments from pipe or sheet insulation. Bond to
valve,fitting,and flange and seal joints with adhesive. Use prefabricated fittings if available.
1. Miter cut materials to cover soldered elbows and tees.
2. Fabricate sleeve fitting covers from flexible elastomeric cellular insulation for screwed
valves,fittings,and specialties. Miter cut materials. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation.
3.7 EQUIPMENT INSULATION INSTALLATION,GENERAL
A. Install board materials with a minimum number of joints.
B. Ensure insulation materials to fit as closely as possible to the equipment and to fit contours of
equipment. Stagger end joints.
C. Insulation Thicknesses Greater than 2 inches: Install insulation in multiple layers with
staggered joints.
D. Secure sections of insulation in place with bands spaced at 12 inch centers, except for flexible
elastomeric cellular insulation.
E. Protect exposed corners with corner angles under bands.
F. Manholes,Handholes,and Information Plates: Bevel and seal insulation ends around manholes,
handholes,ASME stamps,and nameplates.
G. Removable Insulation: Install insulation on components that require periodic inspecting,
cleaning, and repairing for easy removal and replacement without damage to adjacent
insulation.
H. Finishing: Except for flexible elastomeric cellular insulation, see Insulation schedule for
jacketing.
3.8 GLASS FIBER EQUIPMENT INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Secure insulation with anchor pins and speed washers.
B. Space anchors at maximum intervals of 18 inches in both directions and not more than 3 inches
from edges and joints.
HVAC INSULATION 230700-8
I
I WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
I3.9 DUCT INSULATION
A. Install block and board insulation as follows:
I1. Adhesive and Band Attachment: Secure block and board insulation tight and smooth
with at least 50 percent coverage of adhesive. Install bands spaced 12 inches apart.
Protect insulation under bands and at exterior corners with metal corner angles. Fill
I joints, seams, and chipped edges with vapor barrier compound. Install metal corner
angles on all outside corners to provide a neat finished appearance.
2. Speed Washers or Weld Pins Attachment: Secure insulation tight and smooth with speed
washers or welded pin attachments. Space anchor pins 18 inches apart each way and 3
inches from insulation joints. Apply mastic to insulation in contact, open joints,breaks,
punctures,and voids in insulation.
I B. Blanket Insulation: Install tight and smooth. Secure to ducts having long sides or diameters as
follows:
1. 24 Inches and Larger: Anchor pins spaced 12 inches apart each way.
2. Overlap joints 3 inches.
3. Seal joints,breaks,and punctures with vapor barrier tape,matching jacket material.
3.10 CALCIUM SILICATE INSULATION INSTALLATION
IA. Insulation Installation on Boiler Breechings,and Generator Exhaust Pipe:
1. Secure single-layer insulation with stainless-steel bands at 12 inch intervals and tighten
bands without deforming insulation material.
2. Install 2-layer insulation with joints tightly butted and staggered at least 3 inches. Secure
inner layer with wire spaced at 12 inch intervals. Secure outer layer with stainless-steel
bands at 12 inch intervals.
B. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:
I 1. Secure single-layer insulation with stainless-steel bands at 12 inch intervals and tighten
bands without deforming insulation materials.
2. Install 2-layer insulation with joints tightly butted and staggered at least 3 inches. Secure
1 inner layer with wire spaced at 12 inch intervals. Secure outer layer with stainless-steel
bands at 12 inch intervals.
l3.11 FIELD APPLIED JACKETS
A. Install metal jacket with 2 inch overlap at longitudinal and butt joints. Overlap longitudinal
joints to shed water. Seal butt joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation
manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel draw bands 12 inches on center and at butt
joints.
B. Install the PVC jacket with 1 inch overlap at longitudinal and butt joints and seal with adhesive.
HVAC INSULATION 230700-9
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85% PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
3.12 FINISHES
A. Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply 2 coats of
manufacturer's recommended protective coating to exposed insulation.
B. Exterior insulated ductwork and equipment shall have a weatherproof coating applied over the
insulation.
3.13 FIRE-RATED INSULATION SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. Where fire-rated insulation system is indicated, secure system to ducts and duct hangers and
supports to maintain a continuous UL-listed fire rating.
B. Insulate duct access panels and doors to achieve same fire rating as duct.
3.14 INSULATION SCHEDULES
A. General: Abbreviations used in the following schedules include:
1. Field-Applied Jackets: PVC-PVC,A-Aluminum,SS-Stainless Steel,Glass Cloth.
2. Pipe Sizes: NPS-Nominal Pipe Size.
3. Materials: GF - Glass Fiber, FE - Flexible Elastomeric, CG - Cellular Glass, CS -
Calcium Silicate,FPS-Fire Protection System.
B. Pipe Insulation:
APPLICATION NOMINAL INSULATION THICKNESS INSERTS VAPOR FIELD
PIPE SIZE MATERIAL (INCHES) OR BARRIER APPLIED
SHIELDS JACKET
NOTE 1
DOMESTIC ALL GF or FE 1 NO YES NONE
COLD WATER
RAIN WATER ALL GF or FE 1 NO NO NONE
AND
OVERFLOW
DOMESTIC ALL GF or FE 1 NO NO NONE
HOT WATER
DOMESTIC HW ALL GF or FE 1 NO NO NONE
RECIRC.
HVAC INSULATION 230700- 10
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
APPLICATION NOMINAL INSULATION THICKNESS INSERTS VAPOR FIELD
PIPE SIZE MATERIAL (INCHES) OR BARRIER APPLIED
SHIELDS JACKET
NOTE 1
A,SS
MUFFLER / 1 TO 10 CS 4 NO YES OR
SILENCER NONE
PLUMBING ALL GF 1 NO NO NONE
VENTS WITHIN
6 FT OF ROOF
OUTLET
REFRIGERANT ALL FE 3/4 NO NO NONE
SUCTION AND
HOT GAS
NOTE 1: INSERTS AND SHIELDS ARE IN SECTION 230529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
FOR PLUMBING AND HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT AND SHALL BE PROVIDED BY
THE INSULATION CONTRACTOR.
C. Equipment Insulation:
APPLICATION TYPE INSULATION THICKNESS VAPOR FIELD
MATERIAL (INCHES) BARRIER APPLIED
JACKET
ROOF DRAIN BOWLS AND BLANKET GF 1-1/2 YES NONE
PANS _
HOT EQUIPMENT,TANKS BOARD GF 2 NO GC
D. Duct Systems:
APPLICATION TYPE INSULATION THICKNESS VAPOR FIELD
MATERIAL (INCHES) BARRIER APPLIED
JACKET
LOW VELOCITY DUCTS BLANKET GF 1-1'2 NO NONE
DOWNSTREAM OF VAV
TERMINALS, HEAT
PUMPS,FAN COIL-UNITS
TYPE I HOOD BLANKET/ FPS 1-HR FIRE NO INTEGRAL
(GREASE)EXHAUST BOARD RATING
NOTE 1: INSERTS AND SHIELDS ARE IN SECTION 230529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
FOR PLUMBING AND HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT AND SHALL BE PROVIDED BY
THE INSULATION CONTRACTOR.
END OF SECTION 230700
HVAC INSULATION 230700- 11
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 230993 -SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Sequence of operation is hereby defined as the manner and method by which controls function.
Requirements for each type of control system operation are specified in this Section.
PART 2-PRODUCTS(Not Used)
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 PACKAGED ROOFTOP AIR HANDLING UNITS
A. Each unit is to be controlled from the buildings energy management system via temperature and
humidity sensors. Temperature Control Contractor shall install, wire, and program energy
management system to control as indicated below,all points shall be adjustable.
General Occupied
Unit Area Served Time Heat Cool Dehumid Fan Time Heat Cool Dehumid Fan
RTU-1 Main Sales 7:00 72 74 52 Deg F On 10:00 68 76 52 Deg F Cycle on
AM Deg F Deg F Dewpoint PM Deg F Deg F Dewpoint Call
RTU-2 Main Sales 7:00 72 74 52 Deg F On 10:00 68 76 52 Deg F Cycle on
AM Deg F Deg F Dewpoint PM Deg F Deg F Dewpoint Call
RTU-3 Main Sales 7:00 72 74 52 Deg F On 10:00 68 76 52 Deg F Cycle on
AM Deg F Deg F Dewpoint PM Deg F Deg F Dewpoint Call
RTU-4 Main Sales 7:00 72 74 52 Deg F On 10:00 68 76 52 Deg F Cycle on
AM Deg F Deg F Dewpoint PM Deg F Deg F Dewpoint Call
RTU-5 Entry 7:00 70 74 52 Deg F On 10:00 68 80 52 Deg F Cycle on
Vestibule AM Deg F Deg F Dewpoint PM Deg F Deg F Dewpoint Call
RTU-6 Checkstands 7:00 72 74 52 Deg F On 10:00 65 80 52 Deg F Cycle on
AM Deg F Deg F Dewpoint PM Deg F Deg F Dewpoint Call
RTU-7 Employee 6:00 70 75 N/A On 10:00 65 80 N/A Cycle on
Lounge AM Deg F Deg F PM Deg F Deg F Call
RTU-8 Conference 6:00 70 75 N/A On 10:00 65 80 N/A Cycle on
/Signmakers AM Deg F Deg F PM Deg F Deg F Call
RTU-9 Seating 7:00 72 74 N/A On 10:00 65 80 N/A Cycle on
AM Deg F Deg F PM Deg F Deg F Call
RTU-10 Mezzanine 7:00 70 75 N/A On 10:00 65 80 N/A Cycle on
Offices AM Deg F Deg F PM Deg F Deg F Call
SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS 230993- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
General Occupied Un-Occupied
RTU-I I Kitchen 6:00 70 75 N/A On 10:00 65 80 N/A Cycle on
AM Deg F Deg F PM Deg F Deg F Call
RTU-12 Bakery 6:00 70 75 N/A On 10:00 65 80 N/A Cycle on
Serv./Prep AM Deg F Deg F PM Deg F Deg F Call
B. Supply Fan Start/Stop: During occupied mode,operate supply fan continuously. Upon loss of
supply fan status,the outdoor air damper shall close, the return air damper shall open, and the
heating and cooling shall be disabled.
C. Fan Discharge Low Limit: De-energize the supply fan when the discharge temperature drops
below 35 deg F.
D. Smoke Detector: A smoke detector shall be located in the return plenum. Upon activation of
the smoke detector,the supply fan is de-energized.
E. Motorized Outdoor Air Damper Control: When the space is in the occupied mode,the outdoor
air damper shall be open. While the space is in Un-occupied mode,the outdoor air damper shall
be open. Maintain scheduled minimum outdoor air during occupied times as indicated in the
Packaged Rooftop Unit Schedule.
F. Space Temperature Control: Control the heating gas valve, mechanical cooling and reheat
capabilities in sequence to satisfy room temperature set point.
G. Space Humidity Control: Where shown in Rooftop Package Unit Schedule, activate the
dehumidification control sequence installed in the packaged in the rooftop package unit to
satisfy room humidity set point. Setpoint shall be 52 deg F wet bulb.
H. Unoccupied Mode: During unoccupied mode, close the outside air damper. On a call for
heating, cooling, or dehumidification, cycle the fan and cooling/heating/dehumidification as
required to maintain set back space temperature or humidity level.
3.2 UNIT HEATER CONTROL
A. Each unit is to be controlled from the buildings energy management system via temperature
sensor. Temperature Control Contractor shall install, wire, and program energy management
system to control as indicated below.
General Occupied Unoccupied_
Unit Area Served Time Heat Fan Time Heat Fan
UH-1 Receiving 7:00 70 Cycle on Call 10:00 65 Cycle on Call
AM Deg F PM Deg F
UH-2 Receiving 7:00 70 Cycle on Call 10:00 65 Cycle on Call
AM Deg F PM Deg F
SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS 230993-2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
General Occu ied Unoccupied
UH-3 Receiving 7:00 70 Cycle on Call 10:00 65 Cycle on Call
AM Deg F PM Deg F
B. Unit Heater Control: Provide single-temperature room thermostat to cycle fan motor to
maintain constant space temperature.
3.3 ELECTRIC RADIANT HEATER
A. Radiant Heater Control: Radiant heater to be controlled via a vendor provided smart occupancy
sensor with temperature lock out. The controller shall activate heater when an occupant is
present. The lock out temperature shall be set at 65 deg F to inhibit unit operation above this set
point. The timer shall be set for 10 minute minimum on time per activation.
3.4 GAS-FIRED RADIANT HEATER
A. Radiant Heater Control: Each heater is to be controlled from the building's energy management
system via outdoor air temperature. In addition to outside air temperature,the heater's control
power shall be interlocked with an occupancy sensor,by electrical contractor,to enable heaters
only in the presence of people. Temperature Control Contractor shall install,wire,and program
energy management system to control as indicated below,all points shall be adjustable.
1. Occupied Mode (7:00AM-10:00PM): The energy management system shall enable
heaters to run when temperature is below 65 deg F. When outside air temperature is
above 65 deg F,the heater shall be off.
2. Unoccupied Mode(l 0:00PM-7:OOAM):The heaters shall be off.
3.5 EXHAUST FAN CONTROL
EF-1 Employee E.C. to interlock to both Men's and Women's restroom light
Restroom switch with 0 to 10 minute time delay switch, initially set at
5 minutes.
EF-2 Signmaker E.C.to provide wall-mounted timer switch and wire to fan.
EF-3 Office E.C. to interlock to both Men's and Women's restroom light
restrooms switch with 0 to 10 minute time delay switch, initially set at
5 minutes.
EF-4 Customer E.C. to interlock to both Men's and Women's restroom light
Restrooms switch with 0 to 10 minute time delay switch, initially set at
5 minutes.
SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS 230993-3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
EF-5 Pizza Oven E.C. to interlock exhaust fan operation to pizza oven per
manufacturer's recommended installation instructions.
EF-6 Kitchen E.C. to wire exhaust fan to a hood mounted control panel. A
Hood#2A factory-mounted heat sensor will override the fan switch and
automatically start the exhaust fan and reduce/increase fan
capacity based on level of heat sensed.
EF-7 Kitchen E.C. to wire exhaust fan to a hood mounted control panel. A
Hood#2B factory-mounted heat sensor will override the fan switch and
automatically start the exhaust fan and reduce/increase fan
capacity based on level of heat sensed.
EF-8 Kitchen E.C. to wire exhaust fan to a hood mounted control panel. A
Hood#2C factory-mounted heat sensor will override the fan switch and
automatically start the exhaust fan and reduce/increase fan
capacity based on level of heat sensed.
EF-9 Kitchen E.C. to wire exhaust fan to a hood mounted control panel. A
Hood#2D factory-mounted heat sensor will override the fan switch and
automatically start the exhaust fan and reduce/increase fan
capacity based on level of heat sensed.
EF-l0 Bakery Oven E.C. to interlock exhaust fan operation to oven per
manufacturer's recommended installation instructions.
EF-11 Dishwasher E.C. to interlock exhaust fan to dishwasher per manufacturer's
Hood recommended installation instructions.
EF-12 Smoker E.C. to wire exhaust fan to a hood mounted control panel. A
Hood factory-mounted heat sensor will override the fan switch and
automatically start the exhaust fan exhaust fan and
reduce/increase fan capacity based on level of heat sensed.
EF-13 Compressor E.C. to wire exhaust fan to a close on rise thermostat set at
Room 85 deg F.
3.6 INLINE FAN CONTROL
A. E.C. to provide relay switch to allow on/off control via occupied/unoccupied schedule. Fan
shall run continuously during occupied hours and shall be off during unoccupied hours.
3.7 MAKE-UP AIR UNIT CONTROL
MAU-1 Unit is provided with packaged controls including discharge air temperature
sensor,discharge air humidity and room humidity sensor. Temperature Control
Contractor shall install and wire room humidity sensor and program controls as
SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS 230993-4
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
follows:
• Occupied Mode (7:OOAM-10:O0PM): Enable unit to operate. Supply
fan runs continuously with inlet air damper full open.
• Unoccupied Mode (10:OOPM-7:00AM): Disable the unit. Supply fan
is off with inlet air damper full closed.
MAU-2 Unit shall be interlocked to hood control panel for automatic activation. Unit
shall have integral controls to maintain supply air temperature of 65 deg F.
MAU-3 Unit shall be interlocked to hood control panel for automatic activation. Unit
shall have integral controls to maintain supply air temperature of 60 deg F.
END OF SECTION 230993
SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS 230993-5
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 231123 -FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes fuel gas piping,specialties,and accessories within the building.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 23 Section"Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping" for pressure gages.
2. Pipe,tube,fittings and joining materials.
3. Piping specialties and pressure regulators.
1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Gas System Pressures: Two pressure ranges. Primary pressure is more than 2.0 psig but not
more than 5.0 psig, and is reduced to secondary pressure of more than 0.5-psig but not more
than 2.0 psig.
B. Design values of fuel gas supplied for these systems are as follows:
1. Nominal Heating Value: 1000 Btu/cu. ft.
2. Nominal Specific Gravity: 0.6.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Pressure regulators. Include pressure rating,capacity,and settings of selected models.
2. Operation and Maintenance Data: For natural gas specialties to include in 0 and M
manuals.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. ANSI Standard: Comply with ANSI Z223.1,"National Fuel Gas Code."
B. IAS Standard: Provide components listed in IAS's "Directory of A. G. A. and C. G. A Certified
Appliances and Accessories"if specified to be IAS listed.
FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING 231123 - 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
C. UL Standard: Provide components listed in UL's "Gas and Oil Equipment Directory" if
specified to be UL listed.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Handling Flammable Liquids: Remove and legally dispose of liquids from drips in existing gas
piping. Handle cautiously to avoid spillage and ignition. Notify fuel gas supplier. Handle
flammable liquids used by Installer with proper precautions and do not leave on premises from
end of one day to beginning of next day.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others
unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide
temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:
B. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following:
1. Appliance Connector Valves:
a. American Valve.
b. B&K Industries,Inc.
c. Brass Craft Manufacturing Co.
d. Cimberio Valves, S.P.A.
e. Conbraco Industries, Inc.;Apollo Div.
f. E. M. Plastic and Electric Products,Ltd.;Neo Valve Div.
g. Frey: John M. Frey Co.
h. Jomar International,Ltd.
i. Key Gas Components, Inc.
j. Legend Valve and Fitting, Inc.
k. McDonald: A.Y. McDonald Mfg.Co.
1. Mueller Co.; Mueller Gas Products Div.
m. Newman Hattersley, Ltd.; Specialty Valve Div.
n. Robert Manufacturing Co.
o. State Metals, Inc.
p. Watts Industries, Inc.;Water Products Div.
2. Gas Valves,NPS 2 and Smaller:
FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING 231123 -2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
a. BMI Canada,Inc.
b. Crane Valves.
c. Dungs: Karl Dungs,Inc.
d. Flow Control Equipment,Inc.
e. Grinnell Corp.
f. Honeywell,Inc.
g. Jomar International,Ltd.
h. Kitz Corp.of America.
i. Legend Valve and Fitting,Inc.
j. Lyall: R.W. Lyall&Co.,Inc.
k. McDonald: A.Y. McDonald Mfg.Co.
1. Milwaukee Valve Co.,Inc.
m. Mueller Co.;Mueller Gas Products Div.
n. Nibco,Inc.
o. Red-White Valve Corp.
p. Velan Valve Corp.
q. Watts Industries,Inc.;Water Products Div.
3. Electrically Operated Automatic Gas Valves with operator for activation by Appliance
Automatic shut-off device: -
a. ASCO General Controls.
b. ASCOLECTRIC,Ltd.
c. Automatic Switch Co.
d. Dungs: Karl Dungs,Inc.
e. Eaton Corp.;Controls Div.
f. Eclipse Combustion,Inc.
g. GPS Gas Protection Systems,Inc.
h. Honeywell,Inc.
i. Johnson Controls,Inc.
j. Red Hat.
4. Line Pressure Regulators:
a. American Meter Co.
b. Donkin: Bryan Donkin RMG Canada,Ltd.
c. Eclipse Combustion,Inc.
d. Equimeter,Inc.
e. Fisher Controls International,Inc.
f. Maxitrol Co.
g. National Meter. _
h. Richards Industries,Inc.;Jordan Valve Div.
i. Schlumberger Industries;Gas Div.
5. Appliance Pressure Regulators:
a. Canadian Meter Co.,Inc.
b. Eaton Corp.;Controls Div.
c. Harper Wyman Co.
d. Maxitrol Co.
FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING 231123-3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
e. SCP,Inc.
2.2 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining
materials.
2.3 PIPES,TUBES,FITTINGS,AND JOINING MATERIALS
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53;Type E or S;Grade B; Schedule 40;black.
1. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern, with
threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1.
2. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat, ground joint,
and threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1.
3. Cast-Iron Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1,Class 125.
4. Steel Welding Fittings: ASME B16.9,wrought steel or ASME B16.11, forged steel.
5. Steel Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.11, forged steel with threaded ends according to
ASME B1.20.1.
6. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for natural gas.
7. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5.
8. Gasket Material: Thickness,material,and type suitable for natural gas.
B. Transition Fittings: Type,material,and end connections to match piping being joined.
C. Common Joining Materials: Refer to Division 23 Section "Common Work Results for
Plumbing and HVAC"for joining materials not in this Section.
2.4 PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Flexible Connectors: ANSI Z21.24,copper alloy.
B. Quick-Disconnect Devices: ANSI Z21.41, convenience outlets and matching plug connector.
2.5 SPECIALTY VALVES
A. Valves,NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1 for pipe threads.
B. Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged ends according to ASME B16.5 for steel flanges and
according to ASME B16.24 for copper and copper-alloy flanges.
C. Appliance Connector Valves: ANSI Z21.15 and IAS listed.
D. Gas Stops: Bronze body with AGA stamp, plug type with bronze plug and flat or square head,
ball type with chrome-plated brass ball and lever handle, or butterfly valve with stainless-steel
disc and fluorocarbon elastomer seal and lever handle;2 prig minimum pressure rating.
FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING 231123 -4
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
E. Gas Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: ASME B 16.33 and IAS-listed bronze body and 125 psig
pressure rating.
F. General-Duty Valves,NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: ASME B16.38, cast-iron body, suitable for fuel
gas service,with"WOG"indicated on valve body,and 125 psig pressure rating.
1. Gate Valves: MSS SP-70,OS&Y type with solid wedge.
2. Butterfly Valves: MSS SP-67,lug type with lever handle.
G. Automatic Gas Valves: ANSI Z21.21, with electrical operator for actuation by appliance
automatic shutoff device.
H. Electrically Operated Gas Valves: UL 429, bronze, aluminum, or cast-iron body solenoid
valve; 120-V ac, 60 Hz,Class B, continuous-duty molded coil. Include NEMA ISC 6,Type 4,
coil enclosure and electrically opened and closed dual coils. Valve position shall normally be
closed.
2.6 PRESSURE REGULATORS
A. Description: Single stage and suitable for fuel gas service. Include steel jacket and corrosion-
resistant components,elevation compensator,and atmospheric vent.
1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1 for pipe threads.
2. Service Pressure Regulators: ANSI Z21.80. Include 100 psig minimum inlet pressure
rating.
3. Line Pressure Regulators: ANSI Z21.80 with 5 psig minimum inlet pressure rating.
4. Appliance Pressure Regulators: ANSI Z21.18. Regulator may include vent limiting
device,instead of vent connection,if approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Pressure Regulator Vents: Factory or field-installed,corrosion-resistant screen in opening if not
connected to vent piping.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Close equipment shutoff valves before turning off fuel gas to premises or section of piping.
Perform leakage test as specified in "Field Quality Control" Article to determine that all
equipment is turned off in affected piping section.
B. Comply with ANSI 223.1, "Prevention of Accidental Ignition" Paragraph.
3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. Flanges, unions, transition, and special fittings with pressure ratings same as or higher than
system pressure rating may be used in applications below,unless otherwise indicated.
FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING 231123-5
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
B. Fuel Gas Piping,0.5-psig or Less: Use the following: I
1. NPS 1/2 and Smaller: NPS 3/4 steel pipe,malleable-iron threaded fittings, and threaded
joints.
2. NPS 3/4 and NPS 1: Steel pipe,malleable-iron threaded fittings,and threaded joints.
3. NPS 1-1/4 to NPS 2: Steel pipe,malleable-iron threaded fittings,and threaded joints.
4. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Steel pipe,steel welding fittings,and welded joints.
5. Larger Than NPS 4: Steel pipe,steel welding fittings,and welded joints.
C. Fuel Gas Piping 2 to 5 psig: Use the following:
1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Steel pipe,malleable-iron threaded fittings,and threaded joints.
2. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Steel pipe,steel welding fittings and welded joints.
3.3 VALVE APPLICATIONS
A. Appliance Shutoff Valves for Pressure 0.5-psig or Less: Appliance connector valve or gas stop.
B. Piping Line Valves,NPS 2 and Smaller: Gas valve.
C. Piping Line Valves,NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Plug valve or general-duty valve. I
3.4 SERVICE ENTRANCE PIPING
A. Extend fuel gas piping and connect to fuel gas distribution for service entrance to building.
1. Exterior fuel gas distribution system piping,service pressure regulator,and service meter
will be provided by gas utility.
B. Install dielectric fitting downstream from and adjacent to each service meter unless meter is
supported from service-meter bar with integral dielectric fitting. Install shutoff valve
downstream from adjacent to dielectric fitting. Dielectric fittings are specified in Division 23
Section"Common Work Results for Plumbing and HVAC."
3.5 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Division 23 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing and HVAC" for basic
piping installation requirements.
B. Concealed Locations: Except as specified below,install concealed gas piping in airtight conduit
constructed of Schedule 40, seamless, black steel pipe with welded joints. Vent conduit to
outside and terminate with screened vent cap.
1. Above-Ceiling Locations: Gas piping may be installed in accessible spaces, subject to
approval of authorities having jurisdiction, whether or not such spaces are used as
plenums. Do not locate valves above ceilings.
FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING 231123-6
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
2. In Floors: Gas piping with welded joints and protective wrapping specified in"Protective
Coating" Article in Part 2 may be installed in floors, subject to approval of authorities
having jurisdiction. Surround piping cast in concrete slabs with minimum of 1-1/2 inches
of concrete. Piping may not be in physical contact with other metallic structures such as
reinforcing rods or electrically neutral conductors. Do not embed piping in concrete slabs
containing quick-set additives or cinder aggregate.
3. In Floor Channels: Gas piping may be installed in floor channels, subject to approval of
authorities having jurisdiction. Channels must have cover and be open to space above
cover for ventilation.
4. In Partitions: Do not install concealed piping in solid partitions. Protect tubing from
physical damage when installed inside partitions or hollow walls.
a. Exception: Tubing passing through partitions or walls.
5. In Walls: Gas piping with welded joints and protective wrapping specified in"Protective
Coating" Article in Part 2 may be installed in masonry walls, subject to approval of
authorities having jurisdiction.
6. Prohibited Locations: Do not install gas piping in or through circulating air ducts,clothes
or trash chutes, chimneys or gas vents (flues), ventilating ducts, or dumbwaiter or
elevator shafts.
a. Exception: Accessible above-ceiling space specified above.
C. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect. Include outlets
of service meters. Locate where readily accessible for cleaning and emptying. Do not install
where condensate would be subject to freezing.
1. Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped.
Use minimum-length nipple of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3 inches long, and
same size as connected pipe. Install with space between bottom of drip and floor for
removal of plug or cap.
D. Conceal pipe installations in walls, pipe spaces, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or
floors,and in floor channels,unless indicated to be exposed to view.
E. Install fuel gas piping at uniform grade of 0.1 percent slope upward toward risers.
F. Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level side
down.
G. Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping.
H. Install unions in pipes NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection to each
piece of equipment,and elsewhere as indicated. Unions are not required on flanged devices.
I. Install strainer on inlet of each line pressure regulator and automatic and electrically operated
valve.
J. Install pressure gage downstream from each line pressure regulator.
FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING 231123-7
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
K. Install flanges on valves,specialties,and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and larger connections. 1
L. Install vent piping for gas pressure regulators and gas trains, extend outside building, and vent
to atmosphere. Terminate vents with turned-down, reducing-elbow fittings with corrosion-
resistant insect screens in large end.
M. Install containment conduits for gas piping below slabs, within building, in gas tight conduits
extending minimum of 4 inches outside building, and vented to atmosphere. Terminate vents
with turned-down, reducing-elbow fittings with corrosion-resistant insect screens in large end.
Prepare and paint outside of conduits with coal-tar,epoxy-polyamide paint according to SSPC-
Paint 16. 1
3.6 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Refer to Division 23 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing and HVAC" for basic
piping joint construction.
B. Use materials suitable for fuel gas.
1. Brazed Joints: Make with brazing alloy with melting point greater than 1000 deg F.
Brazing alloys containing phosphorus are prohibited.
3.7 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Division 23 Section"Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for pipe
hanger and support devices.
B. Install hangers for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum
rod sizes:
1. NPS 1 and Smaller: Maximum span,96 inches;minimum rod size,3/8-inch.
2. NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 108 inches;minimum rod size,3/8-inch.
3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: Maximum span, 108 inches;minimum rod size,3/8-inch.
4. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2: Maximum span, 10 feet;minimum rod size, 1/2-inch.
3.8 CONNECTIONS
A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of fuel gas piping,fittings,and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to appliances to allow service and maintenance.
C. Connect piping to appliances using gas with shutoff valves and unions. Install valve upstream
from and within 72 inches of each appliance. Install union downstream from valve.
D. Sediment Traps: Install tee fitting with capped nipple in bottom to form drip, as close as
practical to inlet of each appliance using gas.
E. Ground equipment.
FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING 231123-8
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-
tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified
in UL 486A and UL 486B.
2. Do not use gas pipe as grounding electrode.
3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect, test, and purge piping according to ANSI Z223.1, Part 4 "Inspection, Testing, and
Purging,"and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest system until satisfactory results are
obtained.
C. Report test results promptly and in writing to Architect and authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Verify capacities and pressure ratings of service meters, pressure regulators, valves, and
specialties.
E. Verify correct pressure settings for pressure regulators. -
F. Verify that specified piping tests are complete.
3.10 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and safety
devices.
END OF SECTION 231123
FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING 231123 -9
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 233113-METAL DUCTS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Rectangular ducts and fittings.
2. Single-wall round ducts and fittings.
3. Duct liner.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. NUSIG: National Uniform Seismic Installation Guidelines.
1.4 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide an installed duct system which will supply the air quantities indicated by the Drawings
and have the lowest possible friction loss with the least possible leakage loss. System static
pressure loss for each system shall not exceed that which is indicated in the equipment schedule
as external static pressure or in the fan schedule as static pressure and shall include the losses of
all accessories. Friction losses shall be minimized by reduction in the number of offsets and
elbows by pre-planning the duct system installation and coordination with other trades to
prevent interferences. Maintain access to accessories requiring maintenance, service, and
inspection. Radius elbows are preferred for turns to minimize friction, noise, and vibrations,
and especially for sections having large volume or higher velocities and sections which may
have turbulence.
B. Provide and/or construct materials, ductwork,joints, transformations, splitters, dampers, and
access doors as specified herein for the sheet metal ductwork as shown on Drawings.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. Ductwork fabrication shop standards.
2. Fittings.
3. Reinforcement and spacing.
METAL DUCTS 233113 - 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85% PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
4. Seam and joint construction.
5. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions.
6. Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project.
7. Duct accessories,including access doors and panels.
8. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment, vibration
isolation,and seismic restraints.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,
"Structural Welding Code- Steel," for hangers and supports, AWS D9.IM/D9.1, "Sheet Metal
Welding Code,"for duct joint and seam welding.
B. NFPA Compliance:
1. NFPA 90A,"Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."
2. NFPA 90B,"Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."
3. Comply with NFPA 96,"Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking
Operations,"Ch. 3,"Duct System,"for range hood ducts,unless otherwise indicated.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,
manufacturers specified.
2.2 SHEET METAL MATERIALS
A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for
acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods, unless otherwise
indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains,
discolorations,and other imperfections.
B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.
1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G60.
2. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized.
C. Carbon-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, with oiled, matte finish for
exposed ducts.
METAL DUCTS 233113-2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
D. Stainless-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 304 or 316, as indicated in
the "Duct Schedule" Article; cold rolled, annealed, sheet. Exposed surface finish shall be
No.2B,No.2D,No.3,or No.4 as indicated in the"Duct Schedule"Article.
E. Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B 209Alloy 3003, H14 temper; with mill finish for
concealed ducts,and standard,one-side bright finish for duct surfaces exposed to view.
F. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M,steel plates,shapes,and bars;black and
galvanized.
1. Where black- and galvanized-steel shapes and plates are used to reinforce aluminum
ducts,isolate the different metals with butyl rubber,neoprene,or EPDM gasket materials.
G. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inchesor less; 3/8-
inchminimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.
2.3 DUCT LINER
A. Fibrous-Glass Liner. Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with NAIMA AH124.
1. Manufacturers:
a. CertainTeed Corporation;Insulation Group.
b. Johns Manville.
c. Knauf Insulation.
d. Owens Corning.
2. Materials: ASTM C 1071; surfaces exposed to airstream shall be coated to prevent
erosion of glass fibers.
a. Thickness: 1/2 inch.
b. Thermal Conductivity(k-Value): 0.26 at 75 deg Fmean temperature.
c. Fire-Hazard Classification: Maximum flame-spread index of 25 and smoke-
developed index of 50 when tested according to ASTM E 84.
d. Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with ASTM C 916.
e. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel suitable for adhesive attachment,
mechanical attachment, or welding attachment to duct without damaging liner
when applied as recommended by manufacturer and without causing leakage in
duct.
1) —Tensile Strength: Indefinitely sustain a 50-lbtensile, dead-load test
perpendicular to duct wall.
2) Fastener Pin Length: As required for thickness of insulation and without
projecting more than 1/8-inchinto airstream.
3) Adhesive for Attaching Mechanical Fasteners: Comply with fire-hazard
classification of duct liner system.
METAL DUCTS 233113-3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
2.4 SEALANT MATERIALS
A. Joint and Seam Sealants, General: The term "sealant is not limited to materials of adhesive or
mastic nature but includes tapes and combinations of open-weave fabric strips and mastics.
B. Joint and Seam Tape: Not acceptable.
C. Tape Sealing System: Woven-fiber tape impregnated with gypsum mineral compound and
modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable,
airtight seal.
D. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: One-part flexible, adhesive sealant,resistant to UV light
when cured,UL 723 listed,and complying with NFPA requirements for Class 1 ducts.
E. Solvent-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: One-part, nonsag, solvent-release-curing, polymerized
butyl sealant formulated with a minimum of 75 percent solids.
F. Flanged Joint Mastic: One-part, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric joint sealant complying with
ASTM C 920,Type S,Grade NS,Class 25,Use O.
G. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.
2.5 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Hanger Materials: Galvanized sheet steel or threaded steel rod.
1. Hangers Installed in Corrosive Atmospheres: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or
galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation.
2. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--
Metal and Flexible"for steel sheet width and thickness and for steel rod diameters.
3. Galvanized-steel straps attached to aluminum ducts shall have contact surfaces painted
with zinc-chromate primer.
B. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible
with duct materials.
C. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M.
1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates.
2. Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel support materials.
3. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum support materials unless materials are
electrolytically separated from ducts.
2.6 RECTANGULAR DUCT FABRICATION
A. Fabricate ducts, elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other construction
according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" and
METAL DUCTS 233113 -4
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
complying with requirements for metal thickness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie-rod
applications,and joint types and intervals.
1. Lengths: Fabricate rectangular ducts in lengths appropriate to reinforcement and rigidity
class required for pressure class.
2. Deflection: Duct systems shall not exceed deflection limits according to SMACNA's
"HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."
B. Transverse Joints: Prefabricated slide-on joints and components constructed using
manufacturer's guidelines for material thickness, reinforcement size and spacing, and joint
reinforcement.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Ductmate Industries,Inc.
b. Nexus Inc.
c. Ward Industries,Inc.
C. Formed-On Flanges: Construct according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards--Metal and Flexible,"Figure 1-4,using corner,bolt,cleat,and gasket details. -
1. Manufacturers:
a. Ductmate Industries,Inc.
b. Lockformer.
2. Duct Size: Maximum 30 inches wide and up to 2 inch wg pressure class.
3. Longitudinal Seams: Pittsburgh lock sealed with noncuring polymer sealant(only on all
medium and high pressure ductwork).
D. Cross Breaking or Cross Beading: Cross break or cross bead duct sides 12 inches and larger -
and 20 gage or less,with more than 10 sq.ft.of nonbraced panel area.
E. Transitions:
1. Do not exceed 1 inch in 7 inches of slope for increase-in-area transitions.
2. Do not exceed 1 inch in 4 inches of slope for decrease-in-area transitions, 1 inch in
7 inches is preferable.
3. Do not exceed 45 degrees on the entering or leaving side for angle of transitions at
connections to equipment without the use of approved vanes.
F. Elbows:
1. Fabricate ells using one of the following Specifications: The fabrication methods are
listed in order of preference. Use radius elbows wherever possible. Use square elbows
only when available space prevents the use of radius elbows.
a. Unvaned, long radius elbow with the throat radius equal to 3/4 of the width of the
duct and with a full heel radius.
b. Six inch throat radius with full radius,single thickness vanes and full heel radius.
METAL DUCTS 233113-5
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON -
c. Square elbows with airfoil,double thickness turning vanes.
d. Maximum unsupported length of vanes shall be 36 inches. Securely fasten vanes
to runners. Secure vanes in stable position. Construct vane edges to project
tangents parallel to duct sides.
2. Turning Vanes:
a. True airfoil design; smoothly-rounded entry nose with extended trailing edge.
Generated sound power level shall not exceed 54 decibels in band 4 at 2000 FPM
in a 24 inch x 24 inch duct.
b. Manufacturer: Equal to Aero/Dyne Co., High Efficiency Profile, HEP. Contact
Aero/Dyne Co. at 1215 High Street, Suite 103, Auburn, CA 95603. (Telephone
#800-522-2423).
c. Fabricate assemblies with side rails; install vanes on design centers of 2.4 inches
across the full diagonal dimension of the elbow.
d. Submit manufacturer's product data for review.
G. Branch Connections:
1. Pressure Classification 2 Inches and Less:
a. Rectangular Branch from Rectangular Main: 45 degree entry with all corners
closed as shown in Figure 4-6.
b. Round Branches: High-efficiency take-offs if shown on Drawings, otherwise use
spin-in fitting without scoop.
c. Parallel Flow Branches: See Figure 4-5.
d. Space duct joints to avoid cutting them for branch take offs and outlet collars.
2. Pressure Classification Above 2 Inches:
a. Round Branches: Conical round fittings only.
b. Rectangular Branch from Rectangular Main: 45 degree entry with all corners
closed as shown in Figure 4-6.
c. Parallel Flow Branches: See Figure 4-5.
d. Space duct joints to avoid cutting them for branch take offs and outlet collars.
2.7 APPLICATION OF LINER IN RECTANGULAR DUCTS
A. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with at least 90 percent adhesive
coverage at liner contact surface area. _
B. Apply adhesive to transverse edges of liner facing upstream that do not receive metal nosing.
C. Butt transverse joints without gaps and coat joint with adhesive.
D. Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure butted-edge
overlapping.
METAL DUCTS 233113-6
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
E. Do not apply liner in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners of ducts,
unless duct size and standard liner product dimensions make longitudinal joints necessary.
F. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches from corners and at intervals not exceeding
12 inches transversely; at 3 inches from transverse joints and at intervals not exceeding
18 inches longitudinally.
G. Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings that have either
channel or "Z" profiles or are integrally formed from duct wall. Fabricate edge facings at the
following locations:
1. Fan discharges.
2. Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct.
3. Upstream edges of transverse joints in ducts where air velocities are greater than 2500
fpm or where indicated.
H. Secure insulation between perforated sheet metal inner duct of same thickness as specified for
outer shell. Use mechanical fasteners that maintain inner duct at uniform distance from outer
shell without compressing insulation.
1. Sheet Metal Inner Duct Perforations: 3/32-inch diameter, with an overall open area of
23 percent.
I. Terminate inner ducts with buildouts attached to fire-damper sleeves, dampers, turning vane
assemblies,or other devices. Fabricated buildouts(metal hat sections)or other buildout means
are optional;when used,secure buildouts to duct walls with bolts,screws,rivets,or welds.
2.8 ROUND DUCT AND FITTING FABRICATION
A. Diameter as applied to flat-oval ducts in this Article is the diameter of a round duct with a
circumference equal to the perimeter of a given size of flat-oval duct.
B. Round, Spiral Lock Seam Ducts: Fabricate supply ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards—Metal and Flexible."
1. Manufacturers:
a. Accu-Duct.
b. McGill AirFlow Corporation.
c. Norlock.
d. Nor-Pac Sheetmetal; Billings,Montana.
e. Omniduct.
f. SEMCO Incorporated.
g. Team Mechanical Inc.
h. Ventline.
i. Sheet Metal Contractors,Inc.
C. Duct Joints:
METAL DUCTS 233113-7
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1. Ducts up to 20 Inches in Diameter: Interior, center-beaded slip coupling, sealed before
and after fastening,attached with sheet metal screws.
2. Ducts 21 to 72 Inches in Diameter: Three-piece,gasketed,flanged joint consisting of two
internal flanges with sealant and one external closure band with gasket.
3. Ducts Larger than 72 Inches in Diameter: Companion angle flanged joints per SMACNA
"HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible,"Figure 3-2.
D. 90 Degree Tees and Laterals and Conical Tees: Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible," with metal thicknesses specified for
longitudinal-seam straight ducts. Tees shall be conical. Saddle taps or straight tees shall not be
used.
E. Diverging-Flow Fittings: Fabricate with reduced entrance to branch taps and with no excess
material projecting from fitting onto branch tap entrance.
F. Two piece mitered elbows shall not be used.
G. The leading edge of all vanes in ducts over 20 inch diameter is to be hemmed with 1/2 inch
foldback. Turning vanes in ducts over 24 inches are to be reinforced by stays or sectional
construction to limit unsupported length to 24 inches. Vanes shall be minimum of 20 gauge.
H. Reduction of divided flow fittings to conical span section in the 36 common reductions in sizes
4 inch through 22 inch.
I. Galvanized areas damaged by welding to be coated with corrosion resistant aluminum paint.
J. Fabricate elbows using die-formed,gored,pleated,or mitered construction. Bend radius of die-
formed, gored, and pleated elbows shall be 1-1/2 times duct diameter. Unless elbow
construction type is indicated,fabricate elbows as follows:
1. Mitered-Elbow Radius and Number of Pieces: Welded construction complying with
SMACNA's"HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible,"unless otherwise
indicated.
2. Round Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with the following metal thickness for
pressure classes from minus 2 to plus 2 inch wg:
a. Ducts 3 to 36 Inchesin Diameter: 22 gage.
b. Ducts 37 to 50 Inchesin Diameter: 20 gage.
c. Ducts 52 to 60 Inchesin Diameter: 18 gage.
d. Ducts 62 to 84 Inchesin Diameter: 16 gage.
3. Round Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with the following metal thickness for
pressure classes from 2 to 10 inch wg:
a. Ducts 3 to 26 Inchesin Diameter: 22 gage.
b. Ducts 27 to 50 Inchesin Diameter: 20 gage.
c. Ducts 52 to 60 Inchesin Diameter: 18 gage.
d. Ducts 62 to 84 Inchesin Diameter: 16 gage.
METAL DUCTS 233113-8
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
4. 90 Degree, 2-Piece, Mitered Elbows: Use only for supply systems or for material-
handling Class A or B exhaust systems and only where space restrictions do not permit
using radius elbows. Fabricate with single-thickness turning vanes.
5. Round Elbows 8 Inches and Less in Diameter Fabricate die-formed elbows for 45 and
90 degree elbows and pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees only. Fabricate
nonstandard bend-angle configurations or nonstandard diameter elbows with gored
construction.
6. Round Elbows 9 through 14 Inches in Diameter: Fabricate gored or pleated elbows for
30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees unless space restrictions require mitered elbows. Fabricate
nonstandard bend-angle configurations or nonstandard diameter elbows with gored
construction.
7. Round Elbows Larger Than 14 Inches in Diameter and All Flat-Oval Elbows: Fabricate
gored elbows unless space restrictions require mitered elbows.
8. Die-Formed Elbows for Sizes through 8 Inches in Diameter and All Pressures 20 gage
thick with 2-piece welded construction.
9. Round Gored-Elbow Metal Thickness: Same as non-elbow fittings specified above.
10. Flat-Oval Elbow Metal Thickness: Same as longitudinal-seam flat-oval duct specified
above.
11. Pleated Elbows for Sizes through 14 Inches in Diameter and Pressures through 10 Inch
wg:-26 gage.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 DUCT APPLICATIONS
A. Static-Pressure Classes: Unless otherwise indicated,construct ducts according to the following:
1. Supply Ducts: 2 inch wg.
2. Return Ducts(Negative Pressure): 1 inch wg.
3. Exhaust Ducts(Negative Pressure): 1 inch wg.
B. All ducts shall be galvanized steel except as follows:
1. Range Hood Exhaust Ducts: Comply with NFPA 96.
a. Concealed: Carbon-steel sheet(16 gage minimum).
b. Exposed: Type 304, stainless steel with finish to match kitchen equipment and
range hood(18 gage minimum).
c. Weld and flange seams and joints.
2. Dishwasher Hood Exhaust Ducts:
a. Aluminum,with seams and laps arranged on top of duct.
3. Shower Room Exhaust and Return Ducts: Exhaust and return ducts from rooms
containing showers shall use aluminum sheets in accordance with SMACNA "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards," Tables 1-14 through 1-16, including associated details.
METAL DUCTS 233113-9
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
Conform to the requirements in the referenced standard for metal thickness, reinforcing
types and intervals,tie rod applications and joint types and intervals.
3.2 DUCT INSTALLATION
A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct
system. Indicated duct locations,configurations,and arrangements were used to size ducts and
calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations.
Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and
Coordination Drawings.
B. Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible"unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install round ducts in maximum practical lengths.
D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.
E. Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for
branch connections. Secure fittings with screws. Install screws at intervals of 10 inches,with a
minimum of(3)screws per fitting. Seal all joints and seams.
F. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and
perpendicular to building lines.
G. Install ducts close to walls,overhead construction,columns,and other structural and permanent
enclosure elements of building.
H. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch,plus allowance for insulation thickness.
I. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and
enclosures.
J. Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to
view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal
flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2
inches.
K. Protect duct interiors with sheet metal or plastic sheet covers from moisture,construction debris
and dust,and other foreign materials until system is energized. Comply with SMACNA's"Duct
Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines,"Intermediate Level.
L. Intermediate duct reinforcement to be same as duct material.
M. Do not exceed 45 degrees for easement transition angle.
N. Insulation: Where Drawings and Specifications require ducts to be insulated, make provisions
for neat insulation finish around damper operating quadrants, splitter adjusting clamps, access
doors, and similar operating devices. Metal collar equivalent in depth to insulation thickness
METAL DUCTS 233113- 10
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
and of suitable size to which insulation may be finished used for this purpose shall be attached
to the duct. Linings in air ducts shall meet the Erosion Test Method described in UL
Publication no. 181.
O. Counterflashing: Counterflash ductwork penetrating roof.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED DUCTWORK
A. Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented,scratched,or damaged.
B. Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and uniform exposed bead. Do not use
two-part tape sealing system.
C. Grind welds to provide smooth surface free of burrs, sharp edges, and weld splatter. When
welding stainless steel with a No.3 or 4 finish,grind the welds flush,polish the exposed welds,
and treat the welds to remove discoloration caused by welding.
D. Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in the arrangement and fabrication of fittings,
hangers and supports,duct accessories,and air outlets. -
E. Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply with these
requirements.
3.4 ADDITIONAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMERCIAL KITCHEN
HOOD EXHAUST DUCT
A. Install commercial kitchen hood exhaust ducts without dips and traps that may hold grease,and
sloped a minimum of 2 percent to drain grease back to the hood.
B. Install fire-rated access panel assemblies at each change in direction and at maximum intervals
of 20 feet in horizontal ducts,and at every floor for vertical ducts, or as indicated on Drawings.
Locate access panel on top or sides of duct a minimum of 1-1/2 inches from bottom of duct.
C. Do not penetrate fire-rated assemblies except as allowed by applicable building codes and
authorities having jurisdiction.
3.5 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,"
Chapter 4,"Hangers and Supports."
B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, anchors, or structural-steel fasteners appropriate for
construction materials to which hangers are being attached.
1. Where practical,install concrete inserts before placing concrete.
2. Powder-actuated fasteners not acceptable for ductwork installation.
METAL DUCTS 233113- 11
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
C. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible," Table 4-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 4-2, "Minimum
Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports
within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection.
D. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.
E. Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds,
bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum intervals of
16 feet.
F. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out,tension,
and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
G. Support round ducts from building structure with galvanized steel hangers as recommended in
SMACNA manual. Secure hangers to masonry portion of building by means of inserts or other
acceptable anchors.
3.6 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT-DEVICE INSTALLATION
A. Install ducts with hangers and braces designed to support the duct and to restrain against seismic
forces required by applicable building codes. Comply with SMACNA's "Seismic Restraint
Manual: Guidelines for Mechanical Systems,"and ASCE/SEI 7.
1. Space lateral supports a maximum of 40 feet o.c., and longitudinal supports a maximum
of 80 feet o.c.
2. Brace a change of direction longer than 12 feet.
B. Select seismic-restraint devices with capacities adequate to carry present and future static and
seismic loads.
C. Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure.
D. Install cable restraints on ducts that are suspended with vibration isolators.
E. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.
F. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated,anchor bracing and restraints to
structure,to flanges of beams,to upper truss chords of bar joists,or to concrete members.
G. Drilling for and Setting Anchors:
I. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for
anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcement or embedded items during drilling.
Notify the Architect if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during
drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications
conduit,and gas lines.
METAL DUCTS 233113- 12
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved
full design strength.
3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-duty
sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to
which anchor is to be fastened.
4. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque,using a torque wrench.
5. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior applications and stainless-steel anchors for
applications exposed to weather.
3.7 CONNECTIONS
A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Division 23 Section
"Air Duct Accessories."
B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for
branch,outlet and inlet,and terminal unit connections.
3.8 PAINTING
A. Paint interior of metal ducts that are visible through registers and grilles and that do not have
duct liner. Apply one coat of flat,black,latex paint over a compatible galvanized-steel primer.
Paint materials and application requirements are per paint manufacturer's recommendations.
3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.
B. Leakage Tests:
1. Test 100 percent of installed ductwork for leakage in accordance with "System Pressure
Testing for Leaks," published by United Sheet Metal Division of United McGill
Corporation. Use prescribed test kit containing test blower,two U-tube manometers and
calibrated curve attached to the orifice tube assembly.
2. Pressurize installed duct system in 2 inch water gauge over design operating pressure.
Total allowable leakage shall not exceed one percent of air handling capacity of system.
If system is tested in sections, add leakage rates for individual sections to determine
leakage for the whole system.
3. Correct leaks found in excess of allowable limits. Retest.
4. Have test results available for review on a progressive and final basis. Include test results
in project closing file.
5. For Bidding purposes, assume all leakage tests will be witnessed by Engineer. Notify
Engineer of testing schedule a minimum of(7)days in advance.
6. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems to accommodate leakage testing
and for compliance with test requirements.
7. Test for leaks before applying external insulation.
C. Duct system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
METAL DUCTS 233113- 13
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.10 AIR TEST AND BALANCE
A. Prepare the system for tests as specified in Section 230593 and correct deficiencies found by the
Test and Balance firm.
B. Duct dimensions shown on Drawings indicate inside clear dimensions. Make allowances for
duct requiring internal sound lining,or insulation to provide"inside clear"(IC)dimensions.
C. In addition to the requirements above,add supplemental bracing as necessary to prevent sagging
and drumming,and/or vibration.
END OF SECTION 233113
METAL DUCTS 233113- 14
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 233300-AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Backdraft dampers.
2. Manual volume dampers.
3. Turning vanes.
4. Duct-mounted access doors.
5. Grease duct access panel assemblies.
6. Flexible connectors.
7. Flexible ducts.
8. Duct accessory hardware.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1. For duct silencers, include pressure drop and dynamic insertion loss data. Include
breakout noise calculations for high transmission loss casings.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with
NFPA 90B,"Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."
PART 2-PRODUCTS —
2.1 BACKDRAFT RELIEF DAMPERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Air Balance Inc.;a division of Mestek,Inc.
2. American Warming and Ventilating;a division of Mestek,Inc.
3. Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc.
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
4. Duro Dyne Inc.
5. Greenheck Fan Corporation.
6. McGill Airflow Corporation.
7. Nailor Industries Inc.
8. Penn Ventilation.
9. Ruskin Company.
10. SEMCO Incorporated.
11. Vent Products Company,Inc.
B. Description: Gravity balanced.
C. Maximum Air Velocity: 3000 fpm.
D. Maximum System Pressure: 2-inch wg.
E. Frame: 0.052-inch-thick,galvanized sheet steel,with welded corners and mounting flange.
F. Blades: Multiple single-piece blades, maximum 6-inchwidth, 0.025-inch-thick, roll-formed
aluminum.
G. Blade Action: Parallel.
H. Blade Seals: Vinyl.
I. Blade Axles:
1. Material:Nonferrous metal or galvanized steel.
2. Diameter: 0.20 inch.
J. Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum or Galvanized steel.
K. Return Spring: Adjustable tension.
L. Bearings: Steel ball or synthetic pivot bushings.
2.2 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS
A. Standard,Steel,Manual Volume Dampers:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek,Inc.
b. American Warming and Ventilating;a division of Mestek, Inc.
c. Cesco Products.
d. Flexmaster U.S.A.,Inc.
e. Greenheck Fan Corporation.
f. McGill AirFlow LLC.
g. METALAIRE, Inc.
h. Nailor Industries Inc.
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300-2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
i. Penn Ventilation.
j. Ruskin Company.
k. Vent Products Company,Inc.
2. Standard leakage rating,with linkage outside airstream.
3. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.
4. Frames:
a. Hat-shaped,galvanized or stainless steel channels,0.064-inch minimum thickness.
b. Mitered and welded corners.
c. Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts.
5. Blades:
a. Multiple or single blade.
b. Parallel-or opposed-blade design.
c. Stiffen damper blades for stability.
d. Galvanized or Stainless steel,0.064 inch thick.
6. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel or Stainless steel. -
7. Bearings:
a. Oil-impregnated bronze,Molded synthetic or Stainless steel sleeve.
b. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axles full
length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.
8. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
B. Standard,Aluminum,Manual Volume Dampers:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers -
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Air Balance Inc.;a division of Mestek,Inc.
b. American Warming and Ventilating;a division of Mestek,Inc.
c. Cesco Products.
d. Flexmaster U.S.A.,Inc.
e. McGill AirFlow LLC.
f. METALAIRE,Inc.
g. Penn Ventilation Company.
h. Nailor Industries Inc.
i. Ruskin Company.
j. Vent Products Company,Inc.
2. Standard leakage rating,with linkage outside airstream.
3. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.
4. Frames: Hat-shaped,0.10-inch-thick, aluminum sheet channels; frames with flanges for
attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts.
5. Blades:
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300-3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
a. Multiple or single blade.
b. Parallel-or opposed-blade design.
c. Stiffen damper blades for stability.
d. Roll-Formed Aluminum Blades: 0.10-inch-thick aluminum sheet.
e. Extruded-Aluminum Blades: 0.050-inch-thick extruded aluminum.
6. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel, Stainless steel or nonferrous metal.
7. Bearings:
a. Oil-impregnated bronze,Molded synthetic or stainless steel sleeve.
b. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axles full
length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.
8. Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum.
C. Low-Leakage, Steel,Manual Volume Dampers:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Air Balance Inc.;a division of Mestek,Inc. -
b. American Warming and Ventilating;a division of Mestek, Inc.
c. Cesco Products.
d. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.
e. McGill AirFlow LLC.
f. METALAIRE, Inc.
g. Nailor Industries Inc.
h. Penn Ventilation Company.
i. Pottorff;a division of PCI Industries,Inc.
J. Ruskin Company.
k. Trox USA Inc.
1. Vent Products Company, Inc.
2. Low-leakage rating,with linkage outside airstream, and bearing AMCA's Certified
Ratings Seal for both air performance and air leakage.
3. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.
4. Frames:
a. Hat,U or angle shaped.
b. Galvanized or stainless steel channels,0.064 inch thick.
c. Mitered and welded corners.
d. Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts.
5. Blades:
a. Multiple or single blade.
b. Parallel-or opposed-blade design.
c. Stiffen damper blades for stability.
d. Galvanized or stainless,roll-formed steel,0.064 inch thick.
6. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel, Stainless steel or nonferrous metal.
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300-4
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON -
7. Bearings:
a. Oil-impregnated bronze,Molded synthetic or stainless steel sleeve.
b. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axles full
length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.
8. Blade Seals: Vinyl.
9. Jamb Seals: Cambered stainless steel or aluminum.
10. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel or aluminum.
11. Accessories:
a. Include locking device to hold single-blade dampers in a fixed position without
vibration.
D. Low-Leakage,Aluminum,Manual Volume Dampers:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Air Balance Inc.;a division of Mestek,Inc.
b. American Warming and Ventilating;a division of Mestek,Inc.
c. Cesco Products.
d. Flexmaster U.S.A.,Inc.
e. McGill AirFlow LLC.
f. METALAIRE,Inc.
g. Nailor Industries Inc.
h. Penn Ventilation Company.
i. Pottorff;a division of PCI Industries,Inc.
j. Ruskin Company.
k. Trox USA Inc.
1. Vent Products Company,Inc.
2. Low-leakage rating,with linkage outside airstream, and bearing AMCA's Certified
Ratings Seal for both air performance and air leakage.
3. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.
4. Frames: Hat,U or angle-shaped,0.10-inch-thick,aluminum sheet channels; frames with
flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts.
5. Blades:
a. Multiple or single blade.
b. Parallel-or opposed-blade design.
c. Roll-Formed Aluminum Blades: 0.10-inch-thick aluminum sheet.
d. Extruded-Aluminum Blades: 0.050-inch-thick extruded aluminum.
6. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel,stainless steel or nonferrous metal.
7. Bearings:
a. Oil-impregnated bronze,molded synthetic or stainless steel sleeve.
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300-5
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
b. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axles full
length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.
8. Blade Seals: Vinyl.
9. Jamb Seals: Cambered stainless steel or aluminum.
10. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel or aluminum.
11. Accessories:
a. Include locking device to hold single-blade dampers in a fixed position without
vibration.
E. Damper Hardware:
1. Zinc-plated,die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32-inch- thick zinc-plated steel,
and a 3/4-inch hexagon locking nut.
2. Include center hole to suit damper operating-rod size.
3. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting.
2.3 TURNING VANES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Aerodyne,Inc.
2. Ductmate Industries,Inc.
3. Duro Dyne Inc.
4. METALAIRE,Inc.
5. SEMCO Incorporated.
6. Ward Industries,Inc.;a division of Hart&Cooley,Inc.
B. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts: Curved blades of galvanized sheet steel;support
with bars perpendicular to blades set for ducts over 36 inches; set into vane runners suitable for
duct mounting.
1. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated
faces and fibrous-glass fill.
C. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Nonmetal Ducts: Fabricate curved blades of resin-bonded
fiberglass with acrylic polymer coating; support with bars perpendicular to blades set for ducts
over 36 inches; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.
D. General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's"HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metal
and Flexible;"Figures 2-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners,"and 2-4,"Vane Support in Elbows."
E. Vane Construction: Single and Double wall.
F. Vane Construction: Single wall for ducts up to 36 inches wide and double wall for larger
dimensions.
G. Install turning vanes in all square and rectangular elbows.
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300-6
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
2.4 GREASE DUCT ACCESS PANEL ASSEMBLIES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Ductmate Industries,Inc.
2. Flame Gard,Inc.
3. 3M.
B. Labeled according to UL 1978 by an NRTL.
C. Panel and Frame: Minimum thickness 0.0528-inch carbon steel.
D. Fasteners: Carbon steel. Panel fasteners shall not penetrate duct wall.
E. Gasket: Comply with NFPA 96; grease-tight, high-temperature ceramic fiber, rated for
minimum 2000 deg F.
F. Minimum Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg,positive or negative.
2.5 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Ductmate Industries,Inc.
2. Duro Dyne Inc.
3. Ventfabrics,Inc.
4. Ward Industries,Inc.;a division of Hart&Cooley,Inc.
B. Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics.
C. Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181,Class 1.
D. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 3-1/2 inches wide attached to 2
strips of 2-3/4-inch-wide, 24 gage thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032-inch-thick aluminum
sheets. Provide metal compatible with connected ducts.
E. Indoor System,Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.
1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq.yd.
2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 Ibf/inch in the filling.
3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.
2.6 FLEXIBLE DUCTS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Flexmaster U.S.A.,Inc.
2. Hart and Cooley,Inc.
3. JP Lampbom.
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300-7
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
4. McGill AirFlow LLC.
5. Ward Industries,Inc.;a division of Hart&Cooley,Inc.
B. Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, 2-ply vinyl film supported by helically wound,
spring-steel wire;fibrous-glass insulation;polyethylene or aluminized vapor-barrier film.
1. Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg positive and 1.0-inch wg negative.
2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm.
3. Temperature Range: Minus 10 to plus 160 deg F.
C. Flexible Duct Connectors:
1. Clamps: Nylon strap in sizes 3 through 18 inches,to suit duct size.
2.7 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE
A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap
and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to
suit duct-insulation thickness.
B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline
and grease.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous
Glass Duct Construction Standards,"for fibrous-glass ducts.
B. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials;use galvanized steel accessories in
galvanized steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless steel accessories in stainless steel ducts, and
aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.
C. Install backdraft dampers at inlet of exhaust fans or exhaust ducts as close as possible to exhaust
fan unless otherwise indicated.
D. Install volume dampers at points on supply,return,and exhaust systems where branches extend
from larger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install dampers with
hat channels of same depth as liner,and terminate liner with nosing at hat channel.
1. Install aluminum volume dampers in aluminum ducts.
E. Set dampers to fully open position before testing,adjusting,and balancing.
F. Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated.
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300-8
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
G. Install duct access doors on sides of ducts to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining
accessories and equipment at the following locations:
1. Horizontal Type I grease ducts to allow for proper cleaning. Clean outs shall not be
spaced greater than 20 feet apart.
2. Elsewhere as indicated.
H. Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure.
I. Access Door Sizes:
1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches.
2. Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches.
3. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches.
4. Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches.
5. Body Access: 25 by 14 inches.
6. Body plus Ladder Access: 25 by 17 inches.
J. Label access doors according to Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and
Equipment"to indicate the purpose of access door. -
K. Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment.
L. Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to ducts directly or with maximum 60-inch lengths of
flexible duct clamped or strapped in place.
M. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with nylon draw bands.
N. Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes.
O. Install thrust limits at centerline of thrust, symmetrical on both sides of equipment. Attach
thrust limits at centerline of thrust and adjust to a maximum of 1/4-inch movement during start
and stop of fans.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tests and Inspections:
1. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement.
2. Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be
performed.
3. Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation.
END OF SECTION 233300
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300-9
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 233423-HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Centrifugal roof ventilators.
2. Upblast propeller roof exhaust fans.
3. In-line centrifugal fans.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Project Altitude: Base fan-performance ratings on actual Project site elevations.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each type of
product indicated and include the following:
1. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.
2. Certified fan sound-power ratings.
3. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics,plus motor and electrical accessories.
4. Material thickness and finishes,including color charts.
5. Dampers,including housings,linkages,and operators.
6. Roof curbs.
7. Fan speed controllers.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions,weights,loads,required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Power,signal,and control wiring.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For power ventilators to include in emergency, operation,
and maintenance manuals.
HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 233423- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B. AMCA Compliance: Products shall comply with performance requirements and shall be
licensed to use the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.
C. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA standards.
D. UL Standard: Power ventilators shall comply with UL 705.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Deliver fans as factory-assembled unit, to the extent allowable by shipping limitations, with
protective crating and covering.
B. Disassemble and reassemble units, as required for moving to final location, according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Lift and support units with manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of structural-steel support members.
B. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,
reinforcement,and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.
C. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items
are specified in Division 07 Section"Roof Accessories."
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 CENTRIFUGAL ROOF VENTILATORS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Acme Engineering and Manufacturing Company.
2. Carnes Company HVAC.
3. Greenheck Fan Corp.
4. Loren Cook Company.
5. New York Blower Company(The).
6. Penn Ventilation.
HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 233423-2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
B. Description: Direct- or belt-driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft,
bearings,motor and disconnect switch,drive assembly,curb base,and accessories.
C. Housing: Removable, spun-aluminum, dome top and outlet baffle; square, one-piece,
aluminum base with venturi inlet cone.
1. Upblast Units: Provide spun-aluminum discharge baffle to direct discharge air upward,
with rain and snow drains and grease cup(where specified).
2. Hinged Subbase: Galvanized-steel hinged arrangement permitting service and
maintenance,(where specified).
D. Fan Wheels: Aluminum hub and wheel with backward-inclined blades.
E. Belt-Driven Drive Assembly: Resiliently mounted to housing,with the following features:
1. Fan Shaft: Turned,ground,and polished steel;keyed to wheel hub.
2. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated,permanently sealed,self-aligning ball bearings.
3. Pulleys: Cast-iron,adjustable-pitch motor pulley.
4. Fan and motor isolated from exhaust airstream.
F. Accessories:
1. Variable-Speed Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100 to less than 50
percent.
2. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal-overload protection mounted inside
fan housing,factory wired through an internal aluminum conduit.
3. Bird Screens: Removable, 1/2-inch mesh,aluminum or brass wire.
4. Dampers: Counterbalanced, parallel-blade, backdraft dampers mounted in curb base;
factory set to close when fan stops.
G. Curb Adapter (Provide if alternate manufacturer, than what is scheduled, is supplied): Steel
with corrosion-protection coating, gasketing, internally insulated, built to match both
manufacturers'specifications.
2.2 UPBLAST PROPELLER ROOF EXHAUST FANS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. ACME Engineering and Manufacturing Co.
2. Carnes Company HVAC.
3. Greenheck Fan Corp.
4. Loren Cook Company.
5. New York Blower Company(The).
6. Penn Ventilation.
B. Description: Direct- or belt-driven propeller fans consisting of housing, wheel, butterfly-type
discharge damper,fan shaft,bearings,motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly, curb base,
and accessories.
HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 233423-3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
C. Wind Band, Fan Housing, and Base: Reinforced and braced aluminum, containing aluminum
butterfly dampers and rain trough,motor and drive assembly,and fan wheel.
1. Damper Rods: Steel with bronze or nylon bearings.
2. Hinged Subbase: Galvanized-steel hinged arrangement permitting service and
maintenance.
D. Fan Wheel: Replaceable, extruded-aluminum, airfoil blades fastened to cast-aluminum hub;
factory set pitch angle of blades.
E. Belt-Driven Drive Assembly: Resiliently mounted to housing; weatherproof housing of same
material as fan housing with the following features:
1. Fan Shaft: Turned,ground,and polished steel;keyed to wheel hub.
2. Shaft Bearings: Prelubricated and sealed,self-aligning,pillow-block-type ball bearings.
3. Pulleys: Cast-iron,adjustable-pitch motor pulley.
4. Motor Mount: On outside of fan cabinet,adjustable base for belt tensioning.
F. Curb Adapter (Provide if alternate manufacturer, than what is scheduled, is supplied): Steel
with corrosion-protection coating, gasketing, internally insulated, built to match both
manufacturers'specifications.
2.3 IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL FANS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. ACME Engineering and Manufacturing Company.
2. Carnes Company HVAC.
3. Greenheck Fan Corp.
4. Loren Cook Company.
5. New York Blower Company(The).
6. Penn Ventilation.
B. Description: In-line, direct-driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, outlet guide
vanes, fan shaft,bearings,motor and disconnect switch,drive assembly,mounting brackets,and
accessories.
C. Housing: Split, spun aluminum with aluminum straightening vanes, inlet and outlet flanges,
and support bracket adaptable to floor, side wall,or ceiling mounting.
D. Belt-Driven Units: Motor mounted on adjustable base, with adjustable sheaves, enclosure
around belts within fan housing, and lubricating tubes from fan bearings extended to outside of
fan housing.
E. Fan Wheels: Aluminum,airfoil blades welded to aluminum hub.
F. Accessories:
HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 233423 -4
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1. Volume-Control Damper: Manually operated with quadrant lock,located in fan outlet.
2. Companion Flanges: For inlet and outlet duct connections.
3. Vibration Isolators:
a. Type: Spring hanging.
2.4 MOTORS
A. Enclosure Type: Open dripproof.
2.5 SOURCE Q UALITY CONTROL
A. Sound-Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound
Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Factory test fans according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant
Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.
B. Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of rotation,
and efficiency by factory tests and ratings according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of -
Testing Fans for Rating."
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install power ventilators level and plumb.
B. Support units using spring isolators having a static deflection of 1 inch. Vibration-and seismic- _
control devices are specified in Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC
Piping and Equipment."
1. Secure vibration and seismic controls to concrete bases using anchor bolts cast in
concrete base.
C. Secure roof-mounting fans to roof curbs with cadmium-plated hardware. Refer to Division 7
Section"Roof Accessories"for installation of roof curbs.
D. Support suspended units from structure using threaded steel rods and spring hangers having a
static deflection of 1 inch. Vibration-control devices are specified in Section 230548 "Vibration —
and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
E. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.
F. Label units according to requirements specified in Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC
Piping and Equipment."
HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 233423-5
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other related Sections. Drawings
indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct connections with
flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Section 233300 "Air Duct
Accessories."
B. Install ducts adjacent to power ventilators to allow service and maintenance.
C. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
D. Connect wiring according to Section 280513 "Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety."
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Verify that shipping,blocking,and bracing are removed.
2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to
ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload
protection is installed in motors,starters,and disconnect switches.
3. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete.
4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan
wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system,align and
adjust belts,and install belt guards.
5. Adjust belt tension.
6. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.
7. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts.
8. Verify that volume control dampers in connected ductwork systems are in fully open
position.
9. Disable automatic temperature-control operators, energize motor and adjust fan to
indicated rpm,and measure and record motor voltage and amperage.
10. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature-control operators.
11. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
B. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.
B. Adjust belt tension.
C. Refer to Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting,
and balancing procedures.
HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 233423 -6
I
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
I
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS
85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
ID. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design airflow.
E. Lubricate bearings.
IEND OF SECTION 233423
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 233423 -7
1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS
85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1 SECTION 233713-DIFFUSERS,REGISTERS,AND GRILLES
IPART 1 -GENERAL
1 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes diffusers,registers,and grilles for all HVAC systems.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Diffuser: Circular, square, or rectangular air distribution outlet, generally located in the ceiling
' and comprised of deflecting members discharging supply air in various directions and planes
and arranged to promote mixing of primary air with secondary room air.
B. Grille: A louvered or perforated covering for an opening in an air passage, which can be
located in a sidewall,ceiling,or floor.
C. Register: A combination grille and damper assembly over an air opening.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each model indicated,include the following:
1. Data Sheet: For each type of air outlet and inlet, and accessory furnished; indicate
' construction, finish, color and mounting details. Include materials and methods of
assembly.
2. Performance Data: Include throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings for
each type of air outlet and inlet.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Product Options: Drawings and schedules indicate specific requirements of diffusers,registers,
and grilles and are based on the specific requirements of the systems indicated. Other
manufacturers' products with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to
Division 1 Section"Substitutions."
DIFFUSERS,REGISTERS,AND GRILLES 233713- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Anemostat.
2. Hart&Coolie.
3. Krueger.
4. METALAIRE,Inc.
5. Nailor Industries.
6. Price Industries.
7. Titus.
2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: Test performance according to ASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing for Rating the
Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets."
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
equipment. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written
instructions,Coordination Drawings,original design,and referenced standards.
B. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings,
and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design
requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make
final locations where indicated, as much as practicable. For units installed in lay-in ceiling
panels, locate units in the center of the panel. Where architectural features or other items
conflict with installation,notify Architect for a determination of final location.
C. Install diffusers,registers, and grilles with airtight connection to ducts and to allow service and
maintenance of dampers,air extractors,and fire dampers.
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS,AND GRILLES 233713-2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed,
before starting air balancing.
3.4 CLEANING
A. After installation of diffusers, registers, and grilles, inspect exposed finish. Clean exposed
surfaces to remove burrs, dirt, and smudges. Replace diffusers, registers, and grilles that have
damaged finishes.
END OF SECTION 233713
DIFFUSERS,REGISTERS,AND GRILLES 233713-3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 233813 -COMMERCIAL-KITCHEN HOODS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes Types I and II commercial kitchen hoods.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Listed Hood: A hood tested according to UL 710 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.
B. Standard Hood: A hood that complies with design, construction, and performance criteria of
applicable national and local codes.
C. Type I Hood: A hood designed for grease exhaust applications.
D. Type II Hood: A hood designed for heat and steam removal and other nongrease applications.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Hoods.
2. Grease removal devices.
3. Fire-suppression systems.
4. Lighting fixtures.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Show plan view, elevation view,sections,roughing-in dimensions,service requirements,
duct connection sizes,and attachments to other work.
2. Show cooking equipment plan and elevation to confirm minimum code-required
overhang.
3. Indicate performance,exhaust and makeup air airflow and pressure loss,at actual Project-
site elevation.
4. Indicate method of attaching hangers to building structure.
5. Show exhaust and makeup air ducts,and fittings connecting to hoods.
6. Show water-supply and drain piping.
COMMERCIAL-KITCHEN HOODS 233813- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
7. Show control cabinets.
8. Show fire-protection piping,actuation devices,and manual control devices.
9. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.
10. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting seismic restraints.
11. Wiring Diagrams: Power,signal,and control wiring.
C. Piping Diagrams: Detail fire-suppression piping and components and differentiate between
manufacturer-installed and field-installed piping. Include roughing-in requirements for drain
connections. Show cooking equipment plan and elevation to illustrate fire-suppression nozzle
locations.
D. Field test reports.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B. NSF Compliance: Fabricate hoods according to NSF 2, "Food Equipment."
C. SMACNA Compliance:
1. Comply with SMACNA's "Kitchen Equipment Fabrication Guidelines," Appendix 1,
"Guidelines for Seismic Restraints of Kitchen Equipment."
2. Fabricate hoods to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards:
Metal and Flexible,"second edition.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate equipment layout and installation with other Work, including light fixtures, HVAC
equipment,and fire-suppression system components.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Commercial Kitchen Hoods:
a. Captive-Aire Systems.
b. Duo-Aire, Inc.
COMMERCIAL-KITCHEN HOODS 233813 -2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
c. Gaylord Industries,Inc.
d. Greenheck.
e. Halton Company.
2. Wet-Chemical Fire-Suppression Systems:
a. Ansul Incorporated;a Tyco International Ltd.Company.
b. Badger Fire Protection,Inc.
c. Fenwall Safety Systems,Inc.;Div.of Kidde Technologies,Inc.
d. Pyro Chem,Inc.
2.2 HOOD MATERIALS
A. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666,Type 304 or Type 430 SS.
1. Minimum Thickness: 0.03-inch.
2. General: Comply with SSINA's "Finishes for Stainless Steel" for recommendations for
applying and designating fmishes.
3. Remove tool and-die marks and stretch lines or blend into finish. Grind and polish
surfaces to produce uniform, directionally textured, polished finish indicated, free of
cross scratches. Run grain with long dimension of each piece.
4. Concealed Stainless-Steel Surfaces: ASTM A 480/A 480M,No. 2B finish (bright, cold-
rolled,unpolished finish).
5. Exposed Surfaces: ASTM A 480/A 480M,No. 3 finish(intermediate polished surface).
6. Exposed Surfaces: ASTM A 480/A 480M,No.4 finish(bright,directional polish).
7. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign
matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.
B. Carbon-Steel Sheets: ASTM A 366/A 366M, cold-rolled sheets; commercial quality; with
oiled,exposed matte finish.
C. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Lock-forming quality; ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating
designation;mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces of ducts exposed to view.
1. Minimum Thickness: 0.03-inch.
D. Zinc-Coated Steel Shapes: ASTM 36/A 36M, zinc coated according to ASTM A 123/A 123M
requirements.
E. Sealant: ASTM C 920;Type S,Grade NS,Class 25,Use NT. Elastomeric sealant shall be NSF
certified for commercial kitchen hood application. Sealants, when cured and washed, shall
comply with requirements in 21 CFR, Section 177.2600, for use in areas that come in contact
with food.
1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2. Backer Rod: Closed-cell polyethylene,in diameter larger than joint width.
F. Sound Dampening: NSF-certified, nonabsorbent, hard-drying, sound-deadening compound for
permanent adhesion to metal in minimum 1/8-inch thickness that does not chip,flake,or blister.
COMMERCIAL-KITCHEN HOODS 233813-3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
G. Gaskets: NSF certified for end-use application indicated; of resilient rubber, neoprene, or PVC
that is nontoxic, stable, odorless, nonabsorbent, and unaffected by exposure to foods and
cleaning compounds,and passes testing according to UL 710.
2.3 HOOD FABRICATION,GENERAL
A. Welding: Use welding rod of same composition as metal being welded. Use methods that
minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metal. Make ductile
welds free of mechanical imperfections such as gas holes,pits,or cracks.
1. Welded Butt Joints: Full-penetration welds for full joint length. Make joints flat,
continuous, and homogenous with sheet metal without relying on straps under seams,
filling in with solder,or spot welding.
2. Grind exposed welded joints flush with adjoining material and polish to match adjoining
surfaces.
3. Where fasteners are welded to underside of equipment, finish reverse side of weld
smooth and flush.
4. Coat concealed stainless-steel welded joints with metallic-based paint to prevent
corrosion.
5. After zinc-coated steel is welded, clean welds and abraded areas and apply SSPC-Paint
20, high-zinc-dust-content, galvanizing repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780/A
780M.
B. For metal butt joints,comply with SMACNA's"Kitchen Equipment Fabrication Guidelines."
C. Where stainless steel is joined to a dissimilar metal, use stainless-steel welding material or
fastening devices.
D. Form metal with break bends that are not flaky, scaly, or cracked in appearance; where breaks
mar uniform surface appearance of material, remove marks by grinding, polishing, and
finishing.
E. Sheared Metal Edges: Finish free of burrs,fins,and irregular projections.
F. In food zones,as defined in NSF, fabricate surfaces free from exposed fasteners.
G. Cap exposed fastener threads, including those inside cabinets, with stainless-steel lock washers
and stainless-steel cap(acorn)nuts.
H. Fabricate pipe slots on equipment with turned-up edges sized to accommodate service and
utility lines and mechanical connections.
I. Fabricate enclosures, including panels, housings, and skirts, to conceal service lines, operating
components, and mechanical and electrical devices including those inside cabinets, unless
otherwise indicated.
J. Fabricate seismic restraints according to SMACNA's "Kitchen Equipment Fabrication
Guidelines,"Appendix 1, "Guidelines for Seismic Restraints of Kitchen Equipment."
COMMERCIAL-KITCHEN HOODS 233813 -4
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
K. Fabricate equipment edges and backsplashes according to SMACNA's "Kitchen Equipment
Fabrication Guidelines."
L. Fabricate enclosure panels to ceiling and wall as follows:
1. Fabricate panels on all exposed sides with same material as hood, and extend from
ceiling to top of hood canopy and from canopy to wall.
2. Wall Offset Spacer: Minimum of 3 inches.
3. Wall Shelves and Overshelves: Fabricate according to SMACNA's "Kitchen Equipment
Fabrication Guidelines,"with minimum 0.0625-inch thick,stainless-steel shelf tops.
2.4 TYPE I EXHAUST HOOD FABRICATION
A. Weld all joints exposed to grease with continuous welds and make grease removal devices and
makeup air diffusers easily accessible for cleaning.
1. Hoods shall be listed and labeled,according to UL 710,by a testing agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Exhaust-Duct Collars: Minimum 0.0625-inch thick stainless steel at least 3 inches long, -
continuously welded to top of hood and at corners.
B. Hood Configuration: Exhaust only, Exhaust with makeup air, Exhaust with makeup and air-
conditioning air.
1. Makeup and air-conditioning air shall be introduced through laminar-flow-type
perforated metal panels on front of hood canopy.
C. Hood Style: Wall-mounted canopy.
D. Grease Removal Devices: Removable,stainless-steel,filter/baffle grease filters. Fabricate with
minimum 0.0781-inch thick stainless steel for filter frame and removable collection cup and
trough. Exposed surfaces shall be pitched to drain to collection cup. Filters/baffles shall
comply with UL 1046,"Grease Filters for Exhaust Ducts."
E. Light Fixtures: UL-listed,surface-mounted,incandescent fixtures and lamps with lenses sealed
vaportight. Wiring shall be installed in stainless-steel conduit on hood exterior. Number and
location of fixtures shall provide a minimum of 70 fc on cooking surface below hood.
1. Switches shall be mounted on front panel of hood canopy.
2. Fluorescent Lighting Fixtures: Comply with UL 1570.
3. Incandescent Lighting Fixtures: Comply with UL 1571. —
F. Wet-Chemical Fire-Suppression System: Preengineered distribution piping designed for
automatic detection and release or manual release of fire-suppression agent by hood operator.
Fire-suppression system shall be listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.
1. Steel Pipe, NPS 2 and Smaller: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type S, Grade A, Schedule 40,
plain ends.
COMMERCIAL-KITCHEN HOODS 233813-5
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
2. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3,Classes 150 and 300.
3. Pipe Covers: Chrome-plated aluminum tubing.
4. Piping, fusible links and release mechanism, tank containing the suppression agent, and
controls shall be factory installed. Controls shall be in stainless-steel control cabinet
mounted on hood or wall. Furnish manual pull station for wall mounting adjacent to
hood. Exposed piping shall be covered with stainless-steel sleeves. Exposed fittings
shall be chrome plated.
5. Liquid Extinguishing Agent: Noncorrosive,low-pH liquid.
6. Furnish an electric-operated, gas shutoff valve with clearly marked open and closed
indicator for field installation.
7. Fire-suppression system controls shall be integrated with controls for fans, lights, and
fuel supply and located in a single cabinet for each group of hoods immediately adjacent.
8. Wiring shall have color-coded, numbered terminal blocks and grounding bar. Spare
terminals for fire alarm, optional wiring to start fan with fire alarm, red pilot light to
indicate fan operation, and control switches shall all be factory wired in control cabinet
with relays or starters.
G. Hood Controls: Single,hood or wall-mounting control cabinet shall control groups of adjacent
hoods and shall be fabricated of stainless steel.
1. Exhaust Fan: On-off switches shall start and stop the exhaust fan. Interlock exhaust fan
with makeup air supply fan to operate simultaneously. Interlock exhaust fan with fire-
suppression system to operate fan(s) during fire-suppression-agent release and to remain
in operation until manually stopped. Motor starters shall comply with Division Section
262913 "Enclosed Controllers."
2. Photocell and Temperature Control: Vary speed of exhaust and makeup air fans with
variable frequency controllers, based on temperature at hood discharge and opacity of
smoke in hood. Interlock fan control with fire-suppression system to operate at high
speed during fire-suppression-agent release and to remain in high-speed operation until
manually stopped. Provide air-purge fan and conduit to photocell and reflector to avoid
grease accumulation that will negatively affect performance of system.
3. High-Temperature Control: Alarm shall sound and cooking equipment shall shut down
before hood discharge temperature rises to actuation temperature of fire-suppression
system.
2.5 TYPE II EXHAUST HOOD FABRICATION
A. SMACNA Compliance: Fabricate hoods to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards: Metal and Flexible,"second edition.
B. Fabricate hoods with stainless steel.
C. Hood Configuration: Exhaust only.
D. Hood Type: Heat and vapor removal.
E. Hood Style: Single-island canopy.
COMMERCIAL-KITCHEN HOODS 233813-6
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions,with Installer present,for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting installation.
B. Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before
equipment installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install hoods level and plumb.
B. Complete field assembly of hoods where required.
1. Make closed butt and contact joints that do not require filler.
2. Grind field welds on stainless-steel equipment smooth, and polish to match adjacent
finish. Comply with welding requirements in Part 2"General Hood Fabrication"Article.
C. Install hoods and associated services with clearances and access for maintaining, cleaning, and
servicing hoods, grease removal devices, and fire-suppression systems according to
manufacturer's written instructions and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Make cutouts in hoods where required to run service lines and to make final connections.
E. Securely anchor and attach items and accessories to walls, floors, or bases with stainless-steel
fasteners,unless otherwise indicated.
F. Install hoods to operate free from vibration.
G. Install seismic restraints according to SMACNA's "Kitchen Equipment Fabrication Guidelines,"
Appendix 1,"Guidelines for Seismic Restraints for Kitchen Equipment."
H. Install trim strips and similar items requiring fasteners in a bed of sealant. Fasten with stainless-
steel fasteners at 48 inches o.c.maximum.
I. Install sealant in joints between equipment and abutting surfaces with continuous joint backing,
unless otherwise indicated. Provide airtight,watertight,vermin-proof,sanitary joints.
J. Install lamps,with maximum recommended wattage,in equipment with integral lighting.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Install piping adjacent to machine with clearance to allow service and maintenance.
COMMERCIAL-KITCHEN HOODS 233813-7
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
B. Install reduced-pressure backflow preventer on washer-water supply.
C. Install washer-water drain piping full size of hood connection to an adjacent floor drain or floor
sink.
D. Duct Connections: Comply with applicable requirements in Section 233300 "Air Duct
Accessories" for flexible connectors on makeup air supply duct. Weld exhaust-duct
connections.
E. Fire-Suppression Piping: Install piping connections for remote-mounted suppression systems
according to NFPA 17,"Wet Chemical Extinguishing Systems."
F. Ground equipment.
G. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-
tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL
486A and UL 486B.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: See Section 230593 "Testing,Adjusting and Balancing."
B. Remove malfunctioning units,replace with new units,and retest as specified above.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Set initial temperatures,and calibrate sensors.
B. Set field-adjustable switches.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Remove protective coverings and clean and sanitize hoods and associated services, both inside
and out,according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match
original finish.
END OF SECTION 233813
COMMERCIAL-KITCHEN HOODS 233813-8
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 235100-BREECHINGS,CHIMNEYS.AND STACKS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Listed condensing-gas appliance vents.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturers literature with material gages, product listing and furnished
accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: For vents, breechings, chimneys, and stacks. Include plans, elevations,
sections,details,and attachments to other work.
1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, methods of field assembly, components, hangers and seismic restraints, and
location and size of each field connection.
C. Welding certificates.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain listed system components through one source from a single
manufacturer.
B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural
Welding Code--Steel," for hangers and supports and AWS D9.1/D9.IM, "Sheet Metal Welding
Code,"for shop and field welding of joints and seams in vents,breechings,and stacks.
C. Certified Sizing Calculations: Manufacturer shall certify venting system sizing calculations.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 LISTED CONDENSING-GAS APPLIANCE VENTS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Metal-Fab,Inc.
2. Protech Systems,Inc.
3. Schebler,Inc.
BREECHINGS,CHIMNEYS,AND STACKS 235100- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
B. Description: Double-wall metal vents tested according to UL 1738 and rated for 480 deg F
continuously,with positive or negative flue pressure complying with NFPA 211 and suitable for
condensing-gas appliances.
C. Construction: Inner shell and outer jacket separated by at least a 1/2-inch airspace.
D. Inner Shell: ASTM A 959,Type 29-4C stainless steel.
E. Outer Jacket: Aluminized steel.
F. Accessories: Tees, elbows, increasers, draft-hood connectors, terminations, adjustable roof
flashings,storm collars,support assemblies,thimbles,firestop spacers,and fasteners; fabricated
from similar materials and designs as vent-pipe straight sections;all listed for same assembly.
1. Termination: Manufacturers standard wall or any roof termination as indicated.
2.2 GUYING AND BRACING MATERIALS
A. Cable: Three galvanized,stranded wires of a size determined by the manufacturer.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF LISTED VENTS AND CHIMNEYS
A. Locate to comply with minimum clearances from combustibles and minimum termination
heights according to product listing or NFPA 211,whichever is most stringent.
B.- Seal between sections of positive-pressure vents and grease exhaust ducts according to
manufacturer's written installation instructions,using sealants recommended by manufacturer.
C. Support vents at intervals recommended by manufacturer to support weight of vents and all
accessories,without exceeding appliance loading.
D. Slope breechings down in direction of appliance, with condensate drain connection at lowest
point piped to nearest drain.
E. Join sections with acid-resistant joint cement to provide continuous joint and smooth interior
finish.
F. Erect stacks plumb to finished tolerance of no more than 1 inch out of plumb from top to
bottom.
3.2 CLEANING
A. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed
finish. Remove burrs,dirt,and construction debris and repair damaged finishes.
BREECHINGS,CHIMNEYS,AND STACKS 235100-2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
B. Clean breechings internally, during and after installation, to remove dust and debris. Clean
external surfaces to remove welding slag and mill film. Grind welds smooth and apply touchup
finish to match factory or shop finish.
C. Provide temporary closures at ends of breechings, chimneys, and stacks that are not completed
or connected to equipment.
END OF SECTION 235100
BREECHINGS,CHIMNEYS,AND STACKS 235100-3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 235523-GAS-FIRED RADIANT HEATERS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes gas-fired,tubular infrared and high-intensity infrared radiant heaters.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of gas-fired radiant heater indicated. Include rated capacities,
operating characteristics,and accessories.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of gas-fired radiant heater that fails in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 TUBULAR INFRARED HEATERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Arabi-Rad.
2. Perfection-Schwank,Inc.
3. Reflect-O-Ray,Combustion Research Corporation.
GAS-FIRED RADIANT HEATERS 235523- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
4. Re-Verber-Ray,Detroit Radiant Products Company.
5. Reznor/Thomas and Betts.
6. Roberts-Gordon,Inc.
7. Solaronics Inc.
B. Description: Factory assembled, piped, and wired, and complying with
ANSI Z83.20/CSA 2.34.
1. Fuel Type: Design burner for natural gas having characteristics same as those of gas
available at Project site.
2. AGA Approval: Designed and certified by and bearing label of American Gas
Association.
C. Combustion Tubing: 4-inch-diameter stainless or aluminized steel with high-emissivity,high-
temperature,corrosion-resistant external finish.
D. Tubing Connections: Stainless-steel couplings or flared joints with stainless-steel draw bolts.
E. Reflector: 0.024 Stainless Steel Type 304, with end caps. Shape to control radiation from
tubing for uniform intensity at floor level with 100 percent cutoff above centerline of tubing.
Provide for rotating reflector or heater around a horizontal axis for minimum 30-degree tilt from
vertical.
1. Reflector Extension Shields: Same material as reflectors, arranged for fixed connection
to lower reflector lip and rigid support to provide 100 percent cutoff of direct radiation
from tubing at angles greater than 30 degrees from vertical.
2. Include hanger kit.
F. Burner Safety Controls:
1. Gas Control Valve: Single-stage,regulated redundant 24-V ac gas valve containing pilot
solenoid valve, electric gas valve, pilot filter, pressure regulator, pilot shutoff, and
manual shutoff all in one body.
2. Blocked Vent Safety: Differential pressure switch in burner safety circuit to stop burner
operation with high discharge or suction pressure.
3. Control Panel Interlock: Stops burner if panel is open.
4. Indicator Lights: Burner-on indicator light.
G. Burner and Emitter Type: Gravity-vented power burner,with the following features:
1. Emitter Tube: 4-inch- diameter, aluminized-steel tubing with sight glass for burner and
pilot flame observation.
2. Venting: Rain cap at exit end of emitter tubing.
a. Vent Terminal: Horizontal.
3. Burner/Ignition: Stainless-steel burner cup and head with balanced-rotor draft fan and
direct-sensing,hot-surface ignition.
4. Combustion-Air Connection: Duct connection for combustion air to be drawn directly
from outdoors by burner fan.
GAS-FIRED RADIANT HEATERS 235523-2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
2.2 CONTROLS
A. Building energy management system: The building's energy management system shall control
operation of heater.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install and connect gas-fired radiant heaters and associated fuel and vent features and systems
according to NFPA 54, applicable local codes and regulations, and manufacturer's written
installation instructions.
B. Suspended Units: Suspend from substrate using chain hanger kits and building attachments.
C. Maintain manufacturers'recommended clearances to combustibles.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping,fittings,and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to gas-fired radiant heaters to allow service and maintenance.
C. Gas Piping: Comply with Division 23 Section "Facility Natural-Gas Piping." Connect gas
piping to gas train inlet;provide union with enough clearance for burner removal and service.
D. Electrical Connections: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 26 Sections.
1. Install electrical devices furnished with heaters but not specified to be factory mounted.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tests and Inspections:
1. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
2. Verify bearing lubrication. —
3. Verify proper motor rotation.
4. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:
a. Test procedures used.
b. Test results that comply with requirements.
c. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to
achieve compliance with requirements.
B. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
GAS-FIRED RADIANT HEATERS 235523-3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust initial temperature set points.
B. Adjust burner and other unit components for optimum heating performance and efficiency.
END OF SECTION 235523
GAS-FIRED RADIANT HEATERS 235523-4
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 235533-FUEL-FIRED UNIT HEATERS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes gas-fired unit heaters.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of fuel-fired unit heater indicated. Include rated capacities,
operating characteristics,and accessories.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-
2004,Section 6-"Heating,Ventilating,and Air-Conditioning."
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace heat exchanger of fuel-fired unit heater that fails in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Nine years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 GAS-FIRED UNIT HEATERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
FUEL-FIRED UNIT HEATERS 235533- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1. Lennox Industries,Inc.
2. Modine Manufacturing Company.
3. Reznor/Thomas&Betts Corporation.
4. Sterling HVAC Products;Div.of Mestek Technology Inc.
5. Trane Company(The).
B. Description: Factory assembled,piped,and wired,and complying with ANSI Z83.8/CSA 2.6.
1. Fuel Type: Design burner for natural gas having characteristics same as those of gas
available at Project site.
2. AGA Approval: Designed and certified by and bearing label of American Gas
Association.
C. Type of Venting: Separated combustion,power vented.
D. Housing: Steel,with integral draft hood and inserts for suspension mounting rods.
1. External Casings and Cabinets: Powder coating over corrosion-resistant-treated surface.
2. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and tested, fuel-fired
unit heater before shipping.
E. Heat Exchanger: Aluminized steel.
F. Burner Material: Stainless steel.
G. Unit Fan: Formed-steel propeller blades riveted to heavy-gage steel spider bolted to cast-iron
hub,dynamically balanced,and resiliently mounted.
1. Fan-Blade Guard: Galvanized steel,complying with OSHA specifications,removable for
maintenance.
2. Motors: Open drip proof and complying with Division 23 Section "Common Motor
Requirements for HVAC Equipment."
3. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load
will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.
4. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Electrical devices and connections are
specified in Division 26 Sections.
H. Controls: Regulated redundant gas valve containing pilot solenoid valve, electric gas valve,
pilot filter,pressure regulator,pilot shutoff,and manual shutoff all in one body.
1. Gas Control Valve: Single stage.
2. Ignition: Electronically controlled electric spark with flame sensor.
3. Fan Thermal Switch: Operates fan on heat-exchanger temperature.
4. Vent Flow Verification: Flame rollout switch.
5. Control transformer.
6. High Limit: Thermal switch or fuse to stop burner.
I. Discharge Louvers: Independently adjustable horizontal blades.
J. Accessories:
FUEL-FIRED UNIT HEATERS 235533-2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1. Four-point suspension kit.
2. Summer fan switch.
3. Concentric, Terminal Vent Assembly: Combined combustion-air inlet and power-vent
outlet with wall or roof caps. Include adapter assembly for connection to inlet and outlet
pipes,and flashing for wall or roof penetration.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install and connect gas-fired unit heaters and associated fuel and vent features and systems
according to NFPA 54, applicable local codes and regulations, and manufacturer's written
installation instructions.
B. Suspended Units: Suspend from substrate using threaded rods, spring hangers, and building
attachments. Secure rods to unit hanger attachments. Adjust hangers so unit is level and
plumb.
1. Restrain the unit to resist code-required horizontal acceleration.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping,fittings,and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to fuel-fired unit heater to allow service and maintenance.
C. Gas Piping: Comply with applicable Division 23 Section for fuel gas piping requirements.
Connect gas piping to gas train inlet; provide union with enough clearance for burner removal
and service.
D. Electrical Connections: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 26 Sections.
1. Install electrical devices furnished with heaters but not specified to be factory mounted.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tests and Inspections:
1. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
2. Verify bearing lubrication.
3. Verify proper motor rotation.
4. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:
a. Test procedures used.
b. Test results that comply with requirements.
FUEL-FIRED UNIT HEATERS 235533-3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
c. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to
achieve compliance with requirements.
B. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust initial temperature set points.
B. Adjust burner and other unit components for optimum heating performance and efficiency.
END OF SECTION 235533
I
FUEL-FIRED UNIT HEATERS 235533 -4
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 236395-REFRIGERATION INSTALLATION
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Work required under this Section includes all labor, materials, tools, and equipment necessary
for installation of all refrigeration systems, leak detection system and energy management
system on this project as detailed on the design project drawings and as herein specified,and as
required by good installation practice to make the refrigeration systems fully operational.
B. The Contractor shall commission all of the refrigeration equipment to a fully operational state,
make all required adjustments and calibrations,perform and make all initial and follow up tests
to ensure compliance with these specifications and their intent.
C. Any omissions from these specifications or from the refrigeration plans and schedules with
reference to any parts and/or labor necessary for the complete installation must not be construed
as releasing the Contractor from responsibility for furnishing such parts and/or labor.
1. For specific details of the installation, refer to the fixture plan, refrigeration schedule,
refrigeration plans, manufacturer's installation instructions, and to the applicable codes
and ordinances.
D. Obtain all necessary approvals in writing from all governing bodies having jurisdiction over this
work to ensure compliance with all laws and ordinances in effect. All technicians performing
this installation, maintenance, service, repair or disposal must be EPA (US Environmental
Protection Agency) certified for the type of equipment on which they are working. The
Contractor must have a copy of their-certification with them at all times and be prepared to
produce it. The Refrigeration Installation procedures and equipment used shall comply with
EPA regulations.
E. The Contractor is responsible for unloading, assembling, and installing all coils, compressor
systems, condensers, refrigerated walk-in boxes, and other refrigeration equipment unless
otherwise specified. The Contractor shall also arrange for the removal of crating and packing
materials and shall leave the uncrating area and the compressor room in a clean and orderly
condition.
F. The Contractor shall familiarize himself with the project, and shall cooperate with other
Contractors doing work in the building If any conflict, interference, or discrepancies come to
the attention of the Contractor, he shall notify Whole Foods immediately before proceeding
further with the installation. Absolute compliance with the schedule as submitted by the client is
essential.
G. In all instances, the installation shall include, but not be limited to, the furnishing and
installation of all refrigerants, suction, liquid, discharge and condensate piping, insulation, hot
water reclaim systems, walk-in box control temperature sensors, charging, start-up, final
programming, system commissioning, calibration, testing and control optimization. Contractor
REFRIGERATION INSTALLATION 236395- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
is also responsible for installation of ship-loose compressor oil and ship-loose field mounted
EEPR,solenoid,and ball valves.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Refrigeration Contractor and Contractor: Shall mean the Refrigeration Installation and Service
Company.
B. Equipment Manufacturer: Shall be defined as the company or companies who are supplying
various fixtures,equipment,etc.for this Project.
C. Provide: Where this word appears, Contractor shall furnish and install and connect complete
item unless otherwise indicated.
D. Materials: Include items such as piping and fittings, structural steel, pipe hangers, pipe
insulation,welding rods,etc.,which are purchased from a materials supplier and installed by the
workmen during construction.
E. Equipment: Items such as pressure vessels,air handling units,compressors,condensers,electric
motors,valves,etc.,which are purchased from an Equipment Manufacturer and installed by the
workman during construction.
F. Workmanship: Quality of performance of the workman during the construction phase of the
project. The Refrigeration Contractor is responsible for furnishing installation technicians that
have experience and a thorough working knowledge of refrigeration system installation.
G. Engineer: Whole Foods engineer selected for designing of the refrigeration equipment.
1.3 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,applicable to this Section, include but are not
limited to:
1. Section 00201 Instruction to Refrigeration Bidders.
2. Section 236390 Pre-Purchased Equipment.
3. Architectural Drawings:All "A"series drawings. I
4. Refrigeration Drawings:All"R"series drawings.
5. HVAC Drawings: All"M"series drawings.
6. Electrical Drawings: All"E"series drawings.
7. Plumbing Drawings:All "P"series drawings.
8. Energy Management Drawings: All"EMS"series drawings.
9. Division 23 Specifications.
10. Section 230900 instrumentation and control for HVAC.
B. Reference Standards
l
REFRIGERATION INSTALLATION 236395-2 I
—
1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1. Applicability of Standards: Except where the Contract Documents include more
stringent requirements,applicable industry standards have the same force and effect as if
bound or copied into Contract Documents. Such standards are part of the Contract
Documents by reference. Refer uncertainties, conflicting requirements, and standards
that are different but equal to the Project Manager for a decision prior to proceeding with
the Work.
2. Refrigeration Contractor shall be familiar with industry standards applicable to the work.
3. Where copies of standards are needed for performance of a required construction activity,
Refrigeration Contractor shall obtain copies directly from the publication source and
make them available to the Project Manager upon request.
4. The entire Refrigeration system, including work and materials, shall be in strict
accordance with applicable codes,regulations and/or authorities having jurisdiction.
5. It is the sole responsibility of the Refrigeration Contractor to assure compliance with all
codes,regulations,ordinances, and requirements of Inspection authorities, and figure bid
and work on these requirements.
6. The entire Refrigeration Installation including piping and equipment must comply with
the current codes as noted in Code Compliance item of this section.
7. All electrical equipment shall be UL listed or equivalent,where applicable.
8. All refrigeration equipment and installation thereof shall comply with applicable codes
pertaining to building location and jurisdiction.
9. Where the specific date or issue of the standard is not included with the reference to the
standard in the Specification Sections or elsewhere in the Contract Documents, the
edition and amendments adopted, published, and available to the public on the date of
this Project Manual shall apply.
10. Where two or more standards are specified to establish quality, the product and
workmanship shall conform to or surpass the requirements of both. In case of conflict
between referenced standards,the more stringent shall apply.
1.4 SCOPE OF WORK REQUIREMENTS
A. Bidding:
1. Prior to bidding, all bidders shall make a field inspection of job site and carefully
appraise all field conditions.
2. Bidders shall confer with the Architect,prior to bidding if there are any items shown on
the plans or described herein that are not clearly understood.
3. No allowance will be made for Contractor's lack of obtaining information after the bid is
submitted and the contract signed.
4. Bidder will be responsible for his own review and familiarization with the Bidding
Documents,the Site, the areas adjacent to the site, as well as the existing construction in
as much as it will affect his work. Neither Engineer,Achitect, nor Whole Foods will be
responsible for oral instructions or interpretations given before award of Contract.
5. Should Bidder find discrepancies, ambiguities or omissions in the Bidding Documents,
he shall immediately notify the Engineer, Architect and Whole Foods in writing at least
ten (10) days prior to the bid opening date. Prompt clarifications will be supplied to
Bidders of record by addendum. Failure to request clarification will not relieve the
Bidder of responsibility to perform the work in accordance with the intent of the Bidding
Documents.
REFRIGERATION INSTALLATION 236395-3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
6. The Refrigeration Contractor will be required to attend project inspections with Whole
Foods representatives at intervals as requested.
7. Submission of bid will constitute Bidder's acknowledgement, and complete
comprehension of the intent and scope of Bidding Documents.
8. Reference data made available to Contractor are given for Contractor's information only,
and neither Whole Foods, nor the Engineer and Architect assume any responsibility for
conclusions Contractor may draw from them.
9. Failure by Contractor to acquaint himself with all available information concerning these
conditions will not relieve him from responsibility for estimating cost or difficulty of
successfully performing work.
10. Refrigeration Contractor is responsible for all low and high voltage conduit, wiring and
terminations. High voltage wiring will be installed from breaker panel or switch gear to
the refrigeration equipment. Refer to"R"drawings.
B. Labor:
1. Refrigeration Contractor shall provide qualified supervision and qualified personnel at
the project site. Personnel to be fully trained in all aspects of refrigerant management
including but not limited to EPA and Greenchill requirements. Refrigeration Contractor
shall replace any staff the General Contractor or Whole Foods deems unacceptable.
Refrigeration Contractor is to pay all governmental mandated labor burden,etc.
C. Shop Drawings,Submittals.
PART 2-MATERIALS AND INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Refrigeration Contractor shall furnish and install all necessary refrigerant piping(including
glycol), fittings, vibration eliminators, line valves, solenoid valves, thermostatic expansion
valves (re-used equipment), dehydrators, strainers, sight glasses, moisture indicators,
refrigerant, oil,glycol,filters, insulation and all fittings and accessories necessary to perform a
complete installation unless otherwise specified,together with all labor required to complete the
installation and perform the service covered by this Specification.
B. Materials that are not satisfactory to the General Contractor,Whole Foods,or Engineer shall be
removed from the premises.
C. It shall be understood the plans cannot indicate every specialty or detail; however, the
Contractor shall furnish and install all such specialties and equipment necessary for the
complete installation in accordance with the normal interpretation of the plans and
specifications for a fully operational system, good practice, and to the satisfaction of Whole
Foods and Engineer.
2.2 MATERIALS AND COMPLIANCE
A. Refrigerants and Fluids:
REFRIGERATION INSTALLATION 236395 -4
1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1. Only EPA approved HFC refrigerants are permitted. The refrigerant shall be delivered to
the job in original sealed containers.
2. Under no circumstances shall there be any mixing of refrigerants.
3. Additional refrigerant may be required for systems after proper superheat has been set on
all expansion valves. Since compressor systems may be operated with flooded
condensers during winter,sufficient refrigerant must be charged into each system for this
purpose. If necessary, the Contractor shall return during cooler ambient conditions, in
order to provide the optimum refrigerant charge.The estimated minimum receiver charge
level is 1/3 mark for winter,2/3 mark for summer. The charge amounts noted here are to
be used as a guide and only after the entire system has been balanced. Do not overcharge
system.
a. Contractor shall take extreme caution to prevent the loss of any refrigerant to the
atmosphere. Absolutely,no planned refrigerant venting is permitted.
4. All glycol to be added to the system is to be of pre-mixed solutions only as obtained from
the manufacturer. Glycol to be Dowfrost 35% propylene glycol unless specifically
indicated otherwise. Supplier information to be included as part of submittal process.
Alternate manufacturers may be allowed if pre-approved. . Subsequent additions if less
than 50 gallons total may be field-mixed, with total system glycol concentration verified
with a manufacturer-approved refractometer.
5. Contractor shall obtain, read and understand all warnings and instructions listed on the
refrigerant and fluid container labels, packaging and in the safety and handling
instructions as provided by the manufacturer.
6. For specific refrigerants and fluids used in each situation,the Contractor must refer to the
refrigeration schedule to ascertain the actual material to be utilized. Use only the material
in any equipment for which that equipment was designed by the Manufacturer.
7. Refrigerant and fluids shall be introduced into the system from factory filled containers.
8. If applicable surplus used refrigerant generated through refrigerant retrofits or through
other means is to remain the property of Whole Foods. Whole Foods has an account set-
up through National Refrigerants and United Refrigeration. Bottles will be supplied by
Whole Foods through this program for the contractors use. Contact Whole Foods or
Refrigeration Engineer for coordination information.
B. Piping:
I. The Refrigeration Contractor must carefully review the piping and trenching plans.
These documents may indicate the piping schedules, routing and other requirements
which will be necessary for the refrigeration installation.
2. Piping should be located so the access to the system components is not hindered and that
all components that could possibly require fixture maintenance are easily accessible.
Further, the Refrigeration Contractor shall review and strategically locate all control
valves and isolation valves prior to the installation of any piping.The coordination of the
piping installation shall be in agreement with the overall construction schedule and shall
have all piping path and accessories locations confirmed by the Refrigeration Contractor
prior to closing of any wall, floor or ceiling where refrigerant and fluid piping may be
passing through or installed in.
3. Temporary protection shall be provided until the job is in satisfactory condition, and
permanent protection shall be provided by the building contractor as required to protect
REFRIGERATION INSTALLATION 236395 -5
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
the piping,fittings, etc.from damage. This Contractor is to supervise the construction of
permanent guards and to see that future access will not be barred by its design.
4. Unless otherwise specified,all DX refrigeration piping shall be Mueller"Nitrogenized"®
refrigeration grade Type L hard drawn, cleaned, dehydrated and capped to avoid
contamination prior to installation.Minimize inaccessible refrigerant pipe joints wherever
possible.
5. Overhead Glycol piping may be any of the following:
a. Copper Tube:ASTM B 88,Type M.
b. Steel.
6. Glycol Piping within the cases and for Refrigeration Case Connections shall be Copper
Tube:ASTM B 88,Type M.
7. Piping installed underground shall be located in separate conduits for each circuit,except
where noted otherwise. All piping under slab will be installed in 6" PVC schedule 40.
No direct bury piping is allowed. All underground circuits are to be installed prior to the
installation of the concrete slab. PVC sleeves furnished by refrigeration contractor.
Trenching,compaction,and backfill provided by general contractor.
8. Copper fittings shall be wrought copper or forged brass. No bending of copper tubing is
approved by Whole Foods. All couplings and reducers should be welded around the
rolled stop,or staked stop
9. Only long radius elbows shall be used. .All field changes in the line size and direction
shall be accomplished with fittings only.
10. Do Not Use:
a. Short radius 90 degree elbows.
b. 45 degree elbows.
c. Plastic caps.
d. Schraeder valves on condenser or reclaim discharge lines.
e. Drilled tees in fixtures.
f. Capillary tubes.
11. Whole Foods retains the right to have the Contractor cut out three(3)welded joints from
the system for examination. Should these joints be found dirty with oxidation etc., the
Refrigeration Contractor will be responsible for removing and replacing all copper and
fittings with new or providing oil changes as required by Whole Foods. A Whole Foods
Representative will review joints for compliance.
12. Tubing shall be installed in a neat, workmanlike manner. DX refrigeration piping
horizontal runs shall be sloped toward the compressor at a rate of one inch (1") per
twenty feet(20'). Glycol piping shall be installed to facilitate air removal. Branch glycol
lines are to come off the bottoms of the mains.
13. All vertical risers in a DX suction line shall be trapped at the bottom (inverted P trap).
Install an intermediate trap for each riser that is more than twenty feet(20')tall,and each
20' thereafter.
14. Where a branch DX suction line enters a main suction line it shall enter at the top. Piping
shall be arranged so refrigerant or oil cannot drain from the suction line into the
evaporator.
15. Vertical discharge risers on parallel rack systems need not be trapped at the bottom unless
the riser is greater than fifteen (15) feet tall. Discharge risers on single compressor
systems shall be trapped. Hangers or straps shall be installed so as to adequately prevent
REFRIGERATION INSTALLATION 236395-6
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
vibration or undue strain on any pipe or fitting. Clamp lines with 1 5/8" coated
"Unistrut" or equivalent at least every ten (10) feet. See Plans for additional saddle
requirements.
16. Cushion all pipes with curved sheet metal sections glued around the Armaflex or
approved equal on the intermediate supports where pipe is not clamped. Where the
clamps are applied directly onto copper lines,Hydrazorb cushion clamp assemblies shall
be used with 1-5/8 inch width steel channel. Steel clamp parts must not touch or rub the
copper pipe.
17. Contractor to coordinate with the General Contractor to ensure protection from the
elements,damage and any possibility of moisture ingress.
18. Each circuit must be pressure tested,and left under pressure prior to the slab installation.
It is this Contractor's responsibility to coordinate the installation schedule with the
General Contractor, and to ensure security and protection of the refrigeration piping
systems.
19. Galvanized nuts and bolts with nylon-insert self locking type nuts shall be used on all
pipe clamps.
20. All piping to be installed in such a manner as to completely prevent any type of rubbing
against any other objects/surfaces.
21. Case lines must be routed adequately to clear fans,motors,service panels and expansion
and control valves. Do not run tubing from one system through a case connected to
another system. Protect lines with tape or insulation where running through case
openings.
22. All piping shall be installed so that normal servicing of the compressor and related
equipment is not hindered. Do not obstruct the view of the crankcase oil sight glass or
run piping so it interferes with removal of compressor, cylinder heads, end bells, access
plates,fans,fan motors,coil,filters,condensers,etc.
23. Refrigeration and fluid piping must not be installed above any electrical distribution
panel(s), transformers or other electrical components. Extreme care shall be applied to
satisfy this requirement.
24. The Refrigeration Contractor is required to install full port brass ball valves furnished by
OEM as indicated on the piping plans for system isolation. Any additional valves which
may be necessary (and which are not indicated on the plans), to isolate both liquid and
suction (supply and return) branch circuits. off loop piping shall be furnished by the
Refrigeration Contractor. Suction ball valves must only be installed in horizontal pipe
runs, and should never be located in a vertical suction riser. Valves installed in glycol
piping shall be installed with the stems facing up. Valves shall incorporate a dual seal
Teflon ball. Each valve must be selected to introduce a maximum of 0.25 psig pressure
drop. Design working pressure of 500 psig. (Approved manufacturer: Superior,Mueller).
25. Where indicated as part of project design documents,the Refrigeration Contractor will be
required to supply and install all of piping to the condensers using split circuits. A
discharge solenoid valve in each of the discharge lines, together with appropriate check
valves and bleed system will allow one side of the condenser coil to become inactive on
command from the control system.
26. The Refrigeration Contractor shall support all stop valves independently of the
refrigeration and fluid tubing for piping of 3/4 inch or less outside diameter.
27. The Refrigeration Contractor shall tag all stop valves in accordance with the Mechanical
Code and display:
REFRIGERATION INSTALLATION 236395-7
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85% PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
28. The planning of the refrigeration and fluid pipe locations shall include accessible
locations and adequate space for installation, maintenance, replacement and adjustment
of valves and all other components of the system.
29. All joints in the compressor discharge suction and liquid lines shall be brazed with a
suitable high temperature silver solder alloy containing not less than 15 percent (15%)
silver. At any copper to brass joint where damage could occur from excess heat use 35%
silver,but must utilize a heat wrap in brazing process.
30. Use a solder with at least forty—five percent(45%) silver content on all copper to steel,
brass to steel,or steel-to-steel joints.
31. During all of the brazing operations,dry nitrogen must be bled through the piping at very
low pressure to prevent oxidation and scaling.
32. In order to avoid damage to the internal Silfos joints in vibration eliminators, line
connections to vibration eliminators are to be made with silver solder alloy, to 1,200
DEG.F(well below the 1,300 DEG.F melting point of Silfos).
33. To prevent contamination of the line internally, limit the soldering paste or flux to the
minimum required. Flux only the male portion of the connection,never the female.
34. Protection of the piping system shall be this Contractor's responsibility.
35. Install Schrader type valves at each evaporator outlet to facilitate adjustments of the
superheat settings and to establish pressure drop. Additional Schrader valves must be
installed in all of the long branch suction lines, to facilitate liquid pump-out of excess
refrigerant during periods when the system must be pumped down.
36. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting,NPS3/4 ball valve, and short NPS3/4 threaded
nipple with cap, at low points in glycol piping system mains and elsewhere as required
for system drainage.
37. Install manual air vents at all high points in piping, at heat-transfer coils, and elsewhere
as required for system air venting.
38. The Refrigeration Contractor shall verify that all equipment installed has proper pressure
relief protection, and that relief parts are directed downward or piped to relieve
downward. All pressure relief piping shall be piped to the outdoor environment and be
installed as per codes.
a. All receiver pressure relief lines shall be vented to the roof, and will terminate a
minimum of 10' away from any building openings.
b. Receiver common vent lines shall be ran with a minimum 7/8 inch OD copper.
c. One common vent line per receiver.
39. All openings in the refrigerated fixtures and coolers for piping access shall be completely
sealed with"Silicone"sealant or Insta-Foam products.
40. Line Sizing-Refer to drawings for refrigeration line sizes.
C. Insulation:
1. Insulation for below ambient service shall be Anmacell Armaflex II or Rubatex R-180FS. I
All suction lines and supply and return fluid piping shall be insulated per Sheet R4.1
notes.per the latest Energy Code. Sub-cooled liquid refrigeration lines shall be insulated
with per Sheet R4.1 notes and non-sub-cooled liquid lines shall be insulated with''V2"wall
insulation.
2. All refrigerant and fluid lines shall be insulated the entire length of the run. This includes +�
lines operating in conduit"under the slab". I
REFRIGERATION INSTALLATION 236395-8 I�
II
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
3. All openings for refrigerant and fluid lines into the building shall be closed-off properly
and sealed using "Silicone" sealant or Insta-Foam Products "Froth-Pak" (non-
combustible)or equal.
4. Insulation joints shall be sealed with rubber cement to ensure a"drip-tight"seal.
5. Insulation shall be slipped on the tubing prior to joint formation where possible, in
preference to splitting,and then sealing the joint.
6. All of the isolation ball valves, fittings, elbows and T connections must be properly
insulated with preformed insulation material,designed for this purpose,securely fastened
to each component. Wrapping with insulated tape is unacceptable as the only method of
component insulation.
7. Insulation with wall thickness with 1 inch and over shall be mitered,pre-adhered(except
for reclaim piping, whereby pre-adhered is not permitted) and longitudinally slit to fit
over p-traps,tees and elbows or bends over 90 degrees.
8. All heat reclaim refrigerant piping shall be completely insulated with 3/4" thickness
fiberglass insulation with jacket for the entire length from compressor rack diverting
valve to reclaim equipment.
9. Insulation which is located outdoors, must incorporate a weather resistant protective
finish,such as Annacell Armaflex Finish. Refer to the architectural specifications for fire
stopping materials required for sealing of penetrations.
D. Accessories:
1. If liquid line driers are not otherwise specified, they shall be of the filter-drier type, and
of the size recommended by the Manufacturer. Drier cartridges shall not be installed
until the second evacuation has been completed.
2. A replaceable core suction line filter with high water removal capacity feature(Sporlan
RCW 48)is provided by Equipment Manufacturer in each compressor suction line. If the
pressure drop across the filter is in excess of 1.0 psig after the initial twenty-four (24)
hours of operation, the suction line filter cartridge shall be replaced. During start-up
contractor to label suction filters with the date of change-out for inspection by Whole
Foods Construction Department.
3. All controls, components, and valves shall be located in serviceable locations and
positions.
4. The Refrigeration Contractor shall furnish and install condensate drain pans to be located
below the insulated suction and fluid lines where four or more risers are located together
and under valves located in the sales area or as detailed on the plans. Drain pan must be
piped to nearest available drain by refrigeration contractor.
5. All walk-in freezer areas each require a door switch (supplied and installed by the
Refrigeration Contractor),which will turn off the evaporator fans and close the liquid line
solenoid valves whenever the door is opened. Programming to re-initiate refrigeration
after 15 minutes. All walk-in coolers to have door switch for monitoring of door
openings. No door alarms are generated through the BMS system. The solenoid valves
must be supplied and installed by the Refrigeration Contractor.
6. Solenoid valves shall be sweat type valves.
7. Evaporator Pressure Regulator(EPR) valves shall be sweat type and factory installed at
the rack where appropriate and as indicated on"Refrigeration Schedule".
8. Where field installed controls valves are required, (i.e. EPR, liquid solenoids, suction
solenoids,balancing valves,control valves,etc.) the Refrigeration Contractor shall install
the valves. (Equipment Manufacturer will provide EPRs and solenoids, and motorized
REFRIGERATION INSTALLATION 236395-9
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
ball valves. Voltage of valves shall be coordinated with Energy Management drawings
and contractor.
9. The Refrigeration Contractor shall supply fuse cabinet and one full set of each type of
fuses required for operation of refrigeration equipment. Install the spare fuse cabinet in
readily identified location.
10. Refrigeration Contractor shall supply miscellaneous components as required for the
installation of Whole Foods supplied equipment.
E. Substitutions:
1. All materials and equipment shall be new and the product of a reputable manufacturer.
Materials and equipment shall fully conform to the applicable specifications and
standards, and shall comply with size, make type and quality specified or as otherwise
specifically approved in writing by Whole Foods and Engineer.
2. Do not use material or equipment for any purpose other than that for which it is designed.
3. Where manufacturer's names, catalog numbers, or trade names appear in the
specifications, it is not the intent to restrict or eliminate competition, but merely to
establish quality of material required. Where the words "or approved equal" appear,the
"equal" item must conform to the requirements of the specifications and must be
submitted,with complete information,to the Engineer for written approval prior to use.
4. All costs associated with additional work that may be required by other trades as a result
of a substitution of equipment and/or materials,shall be borne by the Contractor.
F. Code Compliance:
1. The Contractor shall comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules and regulations
relative to this project.
2. If the Contractor performs any work not in compliance, and does so without written
authorization from Whole Foods,the Refrigeration Contractor shall bear all costs relative
to correcting the installation to comply with the original specification requirements.
3. All refrigeration equipment and installation thereof, including piping and equipment,
shall comply with the project locality's current Mechanical Code, current Energy Code,
current Fire Code and all respective addenda and current Building Code for Seismic
Restraints of Mechanical Systems,based on the specific store seismic zone classification.
4. The Refrigeration Installation procedures and equipment used shall comply with all EPA
regulations.
G. Compliance Form Completion Requirements:
1. Upon completion of the refrigeration installation and the energy management systems
installation, the Refrigeration Contractor shall complete the project's Refrigeration
Compliance forms. The Refrigeration Contractor shall be responsible to ensure the forms
are posted on USGN as follows:
a. Copy forms from these specifications.
b. Complete and sign the forms.
c. Scan completed forms into.pdf files.
d. Post in USGN as follows:
1) From the project's home page,click on"Document Center"
REFRIGERATION INSTALLATION 236395- 10
1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
2) Go to"Files"and click on "Public Files"
3) Click on"Form"
4) Click on"Post New"
5) Complete the information on the form including:
6) Category is"Facilities and Maintenance"
7) Document Type is"Refrigeration Installation Compliance Form"
8) Notify as per Specification Section 01110
e. All the information must be completed as pertaining to this particular project. All
time required for acquisition and provision of this data shall be included as part of
the Refrigeration Contractor's Contract.
f. The Refrigeration Contractor will provide two additional hard copies of
compliance forms as follows:
1) Store Team Leader Manual.
2) Whole Food's Project Manager.
H. Schedule Requirements:
1. It is imperative that the work covered by this specification shall be completed in
conformance with the schedule established the General Contractor.The Refrigeration
Contractor shall maintain cooperation among his staff and all other trades. Some work
on the project is covered by separate contracts;cooperation with these other contractors is
required.
2. Schedule considerations shall include the need of the store operations,which includes
both the store customers and team members. Work on the sales floor shall not occur
during peak business hours,and authorized hours for sales floor work shall be pre-
arranged through Whole Foods Project Manager.
2.3 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Receiving,Rigging and Setting Requirements:
1. The Refrigeration Contractor shall receive all Whole Foods furnished items identified in
this Specification Section.
2. The Refrigeration Contractor shall receive and be responsible for the rigging, locating
and installing of the compressor systems and condensers. A professionally licensed and
insured Rigging Contractor must be utilized for this purpose.
3. Remove tags,wires and blocking for shipping from compressors and condensers.
B. Installation of Refrigeration System Compressor Rack:
1. The Refrigeration Contractor shall be fully responsible for the complete commissioning
of all compressor and condenser controls.
2. The Refrigeration Contractor shall be responsible for the final programming of all
compressor rack set points, condenser fan settings, alarm settings, etc. for full and
satisfactory operation of the entire refrigeration system.
3. The Equipment Manufacturer shall be responsible for initial programming of systems
with circuit information and factory set points for control, defrost and all alarming
requirements per the EMS schedules and input/output connections as listed on drawings.
REFRIGERATION INSTALLATION 236395- 11
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
Any programming changes, which may be required after shipment, shall be the
responsibility of the Refrigeration Contractor. All installation labor is the responsibility
of the Refrigeration Contractor.
4. As a minimum, the following monitoring point requirements shall be installed and
programmed for alarming:
a. Network(Complete Network Communications)
b. High Head(Discharge)pressure
c. High Suction pressure
d. Low Suction pressure
e. Drop Leg Temperature
f. Compressor Run Proof, one per compressor via current sensing relay (auxiliary
contact method is not acceptable)
g. Receiver Level
h. Oil Failure
i. Compressor Discharge Temperature
j. Rupture Disk,two(2)per Compressor Rack
k. Phase Loss,one per Compressor Rack
I. Refrigerated Circuit High Temperature
m. Refrigerated Circuit Low Temperature
n. Sensor Fail(All circuits)
o. Refrigerant Leak Detection
p. HVAC Air Flow Switch,one per HVAC Unit
q. Main fluid supply flow switch,one per fluid main
r. Generator Alarm
s. Cooler&Freezer Door monitor only.
t. Compressor Enclosure High Temperature Alarm(as appropriate)
5. The Refrigeration Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that all compressors are 1
operating with the correct quantity and type of refrigerant oil. This applies prior to
startup,and following initial operation to ensure that the oil quantities have stabilized. 1
C. Installation of Condenser(s):
1. Refer to refrigeration legends and plans for specific condensers,models and locations.
2. Refrigeration Contractor is responsible for the installation of all condensers and
associated piping.
3. Each Air cooled condenser shall be controlled by a VFD installed by the refrigeration
contractor. VFD to be shipped loose with rack and be controlled in response to ambient
temperature and head pressure. Outdoor ambient sensor shall be factory furnished and
field installed by Refrigeration Contractor at the condenser. ECMs may be employed in
lieu of VFDs for certain applications. Refer to job schedule.
I
a. All Air-cooled condenser fans should be controlled by a VFD based on TD
(condensing temperature calculated from drop leg pressure minus ambient
temperature)
l) Individual fan contactors to be controlled by Loop Sequencer based on
liquid drop leg pressure that will cycle the fans off in low condensing
events.
REFRIGERATION INSTALLATION 236395- 12 I
1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
a) Pressure setpoint of Loop Sequencer control to be equal to minimum
condensing temperature converted to pressure.
b) Low Temp 407A=95 PSIG Setpoint
c) Med Temp 134A=71 PSIG Setpoint
d) TR is to be 10.
e) PID Out at SP is to be 100
f) P.I.D.isP=1;I=1;D=0
g) PID Min=0; PID Max= 100.
b. Suction and head pressure settings will be set per Whole Foods Pressure Setpoint
Matrix.
4. The condensers may be of the split circuit design. The control strategy must incorporate
liquid pump-out of the idle condenser sections when in split condenser mode. Program
split temperatures according to Rack Pressure Setpoint Matrix.
a. Whenever the refrigeration systems operate in the reclaim mode, the specific
condenser shall automatically be placed in the split mode until the reclaim event
ends.
b. When a split condenser is utilized, the individual condenser fans shall be
controlled via digital outputs.
1) Full time condenser fans shall be controlled in a digital sensor control via
the loop sequencer.
2) Split fans shall be controlled with a digital sensor control using an "AND"
combiner with:
a) Associated Loop Sequencer stage.
b) Split Condenser Command. (split condenser command will have to be
from a sensor control digital reading the split command that has been
inverted). -
5. Refrigeration Contractor shall install the condensers on roof structural support provided
by the General Contractor. The steel supports will be constructed to raise the condenser
sufficiently above the receiver flooding valve. It shall be the Refrigeration Contractor's
responsibility to ensure the selected condensers can be properly accommodated by this
structure,and as necessary,to bear the cost of any required modifications and/or bridging
steel members.
6. Supports and roof penetration locations indicated on the drawings shall be verified by the
"M Refrigeration Contractor prior to construction by the General Contractor.
7. Control of the discharge pressures shall be via variable condenser fan speed and
adjustable condenser flooding valves.
8. Each of the parallel compressor systems shall utilize a standard adjustable inlet pressure
regulating valve (IPR) to be located in the primary condensate return line from the
condensers and a receiver pressure control valve. The Refrigeration Contractor shall be
responsible for setting both the IPR and OPR valves, to maintain the specified discharge
pressures during low ambient operation.
9. Each IPR valve shall incorporate a parallel bypass line with an in-line liquid line solenoid
valve. When the valve is open, liquid condensate will bypass the IPR control allowing
the discharge pressure to be controlled by ambient temperature,and condenser fans.
REFRIGERATION INSTALLATION 236395- 13
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
10. The solenoid valve should remain open at all times until the ambient temperature drops
below 40° (F). The valve must close and remain closed until the ambient temperature
exceeds 45°(F). This function shall be performed by the CPC controller.
11. Evaporative Condensers require the following method of control w
a. RH sensor is required to measure relative humidity; obtaining the dry bulb
temperature through a temperature sensor and the RH sensor will provide wet bulb
temperatures through control parameters within the controller design
1) A conversion application is required to calculate the wet bulb temperature
2) Wetbulb output is programmed as Condenser Ambient Input
3) A TD stragtegy will be used to control evap condenser.
4) TD to match design TD as per the schedule.
D. Piping pressure testing and evacuation:
1. Whole Foods is a member of EPA's Greenchill program. As such, Whole Foods has
committed to following Greenchill's Installation Leak Tightness Testing Guidelines. The
more stringent conditions of those guideline and the specification below shall be utilized.
The contractor will be asked to sign an affidavit the Greenchill Guidelines were followed
and applied as part of Whole Foods partnership. The contractor shall take the necessary
steps to enable this to occur.
2. After completion of all connections, the DX and CO2 refrigeration piping testing
procedure shall be completed in the following manner. Prior to commencement of
pressure testing or evacuation, remove and cap all pressure transducers. Introduce dry
nitrogen through a pressure regulator into piping being tested to 150 psi gauge. These
pressure readings will hold for a 24-hour timeframe, then the General Contractor will
make a sign-off and the verification sheet will be given to Whole Foods before start-up.
Failure to do this will require the contractor to go back to this stage of the work to
perform as required by Whole Foods. Valve off all compressors if any testing is done
over 175 psi gauge.
3. Piping must hold pressure with nitrogen valved off. If pressure does not hold given
pressure for(12)hours add the proper refrigerant to the system and use an electronic leak
detector to find the leaks. Repair all systems leaks.
4. Pressurized systems may be vented to other systems undergoing pressure testing to
conserve nitrogen. Maintain at least one pound gauge pressure on all systems containing
refrigerant mixed with nitrogen.
5. The Refrigeration Contractor must utilize the following equipment to complete the
evacuation test:Two(2)two-stage vacuum pumps,(or equipment equal to or superior to)
each with a capacity of 2CFM (minimum requirement); Evacuate systems from two (2)
independent locations using the manufacturer's recommended connection points to reach
all portions of the system. Use multiple 3/8"or'A" copper tubing only(no gauge hoses).
Open all valves with manual stems and add bypass loops as necessary. An electronic
micron instrument such as manufactured by Robinair must be installed to sense piping
pressure with the vacuum pump valved off.An authorized Representative shall be present
at the scheduled time of any and all evacuation tests, so they may witness the vacuums
obtained. A minimum of forty-eight(48)hours notice is required.
6. Evacuate each system and associated connected piping to 1,500 microns. Break the
vacuum to 2.0 psig, with nitrogen. Repeat the initial evacuation process, again, breaking
the vacuum with nitrogen and evacuate to 1,000 microns. Install a drier of the required
REFRIGERATION INSTALLATION 236395- 14
_ 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
size in the liquid line, open the compressor suction and discharge valves, and evacuate to
500 microns. Leave the vacuums pump running for a minimum of two hours without
interruption. Raise the system pressure to 2.0 psig with refrigerant used in the system,
and remove the vacuum pump.
7. Contractors shall maintain records of test pressures and vacuum readings on each portion
of piping tested and shall record length of time test pressure and vacuums that were held
(attachments at end of Section 3). Two(2)signed copies of this record of testing shall be
submitted toEngineer and Whole Foods. Any system placed in operation without final
evacuation being witnessed by Engineer or Whole Foods shall at Whole Foods' request
be purged and re-evacuated. The advance notice requirement is intended to arrange
Whole Foods or his Representative to be present to witness the vacuum readings.Further,
when requested by authorities having jurisdiction, a dated declaration of test shall be
provided for all systems containing 55#or more of refrigerant.
8. The Refrigeration Contractor shall protect all system components (float balls, TXV's,
transducers,etc.)from damage due to excess pressure during the test procedure.
9. The Refrigeration Contractor is to provide a written record of required testing to be
maintained on the premises.
10. Refer to Section 01400 Quality Control for additional information and requirements.
E. Testing and Preparation of Glycol Piping:
1. Leave joints,including welds,uninsulated and exposed for examination during test.
2. Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water; then remove and clean or replace
strainer screens.
3. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment,its closure shall be
capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install blinds in flanged
joints to isolate equipment.
4. Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test pressure, to
protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure during test.
5. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the
system's working pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any
vessel,pump,valve,or other component in system under test.
6. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping,
joints,and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening,repairing,or replacing
components,and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.
F. Installation of Walk-In Box Evaporator and Hydronic Coils:
1. Refer to refrigeration legends available from USGN for specific coil types and locations.
2. Coils should be mounted in walk-in boxes as shown on the Manufacturers shop drawings
or as directed by Whole Foods.
3. Walk-in cooler/freezer coils shall be suspended with 3/8" zinc plated all-thread rod. A
piece of unistrut run lengthwise the length of the coil on top of the box shall be provided
through which the rod terminates. Use nylon locking nuts on all thread ends to prevent
vibration from loosening. Minimum side/wall clearances shall be twelve(12)inches. All
equipment shall be mounted in locations shown on the drawings.
4. Coils should be mounted to provide sufficient space for maintenance and cleaning
without hindering refrigeration performance.
5. Installation of the coil condensate piping from the coil drains to the appropriate hub
drains or floor sinks shall be performed by the Refrigeration Contractor.
REFRIGERATION INSTALLATION 236395 - 15
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85% PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
6. The Refrigeration Contractor shall furnish and install "Frostex" electric heater tape
around these condensate lines and insulate all meat cooler, seafood cooler and freezer
condensate drains with 'h"Armaflex. Power to be provided by the Electrical Contractor.
Walk-in condensate lines shall exit the refrigerated space as soon as practical. The drip
lines shall have a threaded brass or copper union connected to the coil pan. A "P" trap
shall be installed near curb drain outside of the refrigerated area. Walk-in coil
condensate drip lines shall incorporate a minimum number of fittings and employ long
radius elbows. The Refrigeration Contractor shall seal all openings cut in cooler and
freezer panels. Use butyl rubber caulk on both sides of the panel at the penetration.
7. Refer to the Refrigeration Equipment Specifications for accessories and controls.
8. Contractor to provide filter bonnets for low velocity coils. Manufacturer to be Permatron
or similar.
G. Installation of Refrigerated Cases:
1. Metal shims are to be used on all cases at a maximum of 48-inch increments.
2. Butyl rubber caulk shall be used in the joints of all cases and under the screeds of the
walk-in boxes.
3. Silicone to match the interior of the equipment will be used to "finish off' the joints of
the equipment and to ensure the water/air tight seal. This is to be installed before the
piping is installed, as it is impossible to get the caulking under piping once installed in
cases. Failure to install in this sequence will result in the Contractor in removing all
piping and sealing the cases properly.
4. After the delivery of the refrigerated case fixtures, the Refrigeration Contractor shall
provide and utilize plastic covers for each refrigerated case fixture. To shield the case
fixtures from dust, etc. these covers shall remain on the cases during general project
construction. As the overall project proceeds, the Refrigeration Contractor shall remove
the plastic covers and clean the cases before placing the cases in operation.
5. Installation of the condensate piping from the case drains to the appropriate hub drains
shall be performed by the Refrigeration Contractor. _
6. The Refrigeration Contractor shall install 1/2" Armaflex on any condensate drain line
using an ice bed to merchandise. This includes but is not limited to, all produce and
seafood cases.
H. Installation of Ice Machine:
I. Absolute compliance with the manufacturer's installation specifications and instructions
must be fully adhered to.
I. Installation of Hot Water Heat Reclaim:
1. The Equipment Manufacturer will ship loose Therma-Stor Model II-1 hot water heat
exchanger/ tank(s) and drip pan(s) as per the drawings. Refer to the design documents
for location. Installation of the entire hot water reclaim equipment shall be by the
Refrigeration Contractor with the exception of the water piping and water-associated
valves,which shall be provided by the Plumbing Contractor.
2. The Equipment Manufacturer shall provide a`failsafe' immersion aquastat,which will be
field wired to the controller by the Refrigeration Contractor to control the diverting valve
on the compressor rack serving the hot water reclaim system. The installation of the hot
REFRIGERATION INSTALLATION 236395- 16 I
I
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
water reclaim tank(s), refrigeration piping, pressure-limiting valves shall be by the
Refrigeration Contractor.
J. Installation of Air Heat Reclaim:
1. If applicable the Refrigeration Contractor shall provide and install all necessary fittings
and piping as required to ensure that the Air Heat Reclaim coil (as per the drawings) is
connected to the appropriate compressor system.The installation must comply with these
specifications, and the contractor is obligated to commission all of the Air Heat Reclaim
systems in conjunction with the compressor systems.
K. Refrigerant Management Requirements:
1. The Refrigeration Contractor must take extreme caution to ensure that no
HCFC/HFC/CFC products are discharged or otherwise released into the atmosphere.
2. The compressor systems will be shipped with an initial holding charge and each rack
should be conspicuously tagged as to the refrigerant, lubricant and pressure holding
charge with which the system was shipped. Immediately upon delivery, this Contractor
shall verify that the systems have maintained this charge by checking the pressure gauges
- that have been factory installed for this purpose. If any system has not maintained the
initial charge,this Contractor shall notify Whole Foods and the Equipment Manufacturer
immediately. The Equipment Manufacturer shall be required to visit the site to leak
check the system and repair any leaks identified on the system. This Contractor shall
wrench tighten all fittings prior to startup and in accordance with Equipment
Manufacturer's startup procedures.
L. Installation of Building Management System(BMS):
1. The refrigeration systems will utilize controllers to monitor and control the compressors,
condensers, hot water reclaim, air heat reclaim, electrical power and individual case
temperature and defrost functions. Refer to the refrigeration plans for specific fixture
temperature control methods. The Refrigeration Contractor shall be responsible for, but
not limited to,the following:
a. Furnish and install all equipment,materials,wiring(as specified and appropriately
labeled and grounded) and qualified labor necessary for the check-out,
programming, start-up and commissioning of the entire refrigeration, lighting and
HVAC control system. System Controller, I/O Boards, and Status Display panel
will be provided by Rack Manufacturer. Provide all necessary coordination and
assistance to the Refrigeration Electrical Contractor during the installation and
startup of the control system. For this purpose, the Contractor shall solicit and
include in the price,the services of a Refrigeration Electrical Contractor.
1) All control-wiring types shall be as indicated on EMS documents and
Manufacturer's Installation Manuals.No substitutions are permitted.
2) All EMS cable is to be permanently numbered at both ends with standard
numbered wire markers.
3) Analog sensor wiring within conduit containing line voltage or other control
wiring is forbidden. Further, the sensor wiring shall not be installed
anywhere the signal can be disturbed by other sources.
REFRIGERATION INSTALLATION 236395 - 17
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
4) All communication wiring shall be run from board to board without splices
and installed in a logical daisy chain fashion.
5) Cables for input sensors shall be run with no breaks or splices from the
respective I/O board to the sensor wires.
6) Use 3M-connector part number UR2 or Dolphin gel connectors. Wire nuts
or butt splices are not permitted.
b. The Refrigeration Contractor shall coordinate with the Refrigeration Electrical
Contractor as to the overall building management system conduit requirements,
quantities and locations. Building management system conduit is to be provided by
the Refrigeration Electrical Contractor.
c. Temperature probes shall be factory installed by Case Manufacturer for all
refrigerated cases. Exception is on refurbished cases and other specialty fixtures
where the Case Manufacturer shall supply probes for these line-ups and the
Refrigeration Contractor shall install these sensors. Design documents will
indicate number of sensors per line-up are to be wired and programmed.
d. Temperature sensors for each walk-in box are supplied by the Refrigeration
Contractor. If a probe is shipped loose, it will be the responsibility of the
Refrigeration Contractor to install the probe.
e. Sensor locations shall be per design document requirements and installed in such a
manner and location to preclude damage from normal facility operations such as
the movement of product inventory.
f. All cables must be of sufficient length as to avoid the need for splicing, and be
installed in a neat and workmanship manner.
g. Each cable is to be labeled at the respective I/O board. For further details of
labeling,refer to EMS Equipment Identification Section.
h. Refrigeration Contractor to provide all necessary cables for each input to I/O board
and point designated on schedules.
i. Refrigeration Contractor must carefully review the refrigeration design and
Building Management plans and fully adhere to the requirements as specified and
detailed therein.
j. The Refrigeration Contractor shall, upon entire completion of all the
aforementioned operational settings, download the programmed settings to two
computer disks. One disk shall be placed in a hard protective case and placed with
the RX control panel.The second is to be placed in the maintenance manual.
k. The refrigeration contractor shall provide a 5-port Ethernet hub for CPC controller
to controller communication. Manufacturer to be Belkin 5-Port Gigabit Switch
model#F5D5141-5 or manufacturer and model of equivalent capability.
1. Refrigeration contractor shall mount the CPC status panel in location identified on
plans.
2. Energy Management Relay Power:
a. The Equipment Manufacturer is to provide all necessary transformers, equipment
and wiring requirements from within the rack control panel for all control points
associated with the relay boards installed in the rack control panel.The power for
these relay points shall also include all output power requirements for equipment to
be installed and controlled outside the rack, yet wired to the output board at the
rack control panel. Relay control voltage is 24 volt. All necessary transformers are
to be factory installed and wired within the control panel for these relays.
REFRIGERATION INSTALLATION 236395- 18
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1) Where relay board points are not powered from the compressor rack, or
remote header panel, the Refrigeration Contractor shall provide all power
requirements,transformers and wiring for relay control points.
2) The Refrigeration Contractor shall provide all necessary relays, contactors,
ice cube relays, etc. for the control interface between the EMS equipment
and the equipment being controlled.
3. Controller Watchdog Circuitry Requirements:
a. It is a specific requirement the conventional mechanical controls remain ineffective
during operation of the automated control system.However,upon failure or bypass
of this automated control equipment, these conventional controls including
protective time delay circuits, must be operational. The protective time delay
relays are to be factory installed.
b. Compressors are wired to normally-closed output connections on the factory
installed control output boards, thus enabling the compressors to be "ON" upon a
controller failure.
c. Each suction group is to be configured for a possible transducer failure. This is
accomplished by assigning a "failed value" for a suction transducer that may have
become "short", or one that has become "open". The "failed value" will be
configured for each suction group, such that, it is approximately I Opsig above the
highest set point of the floating suction control setting.
d. By assigning this value higher than the floating suction set point, a transducer
failure will result in the CPC E2 controller calling for the compressors of any
particular suction group to be"ON".
e. Factory installed fully adjustable compressor low-pressure controls (Johnson
Controls Microset) are utilized. These low-pressure controls will be active in each
compressor control circuit, and thus will need to be set at a lower value than the
suction pressure control ranges, so-as-to not interfere with the CPC controller
controls.
f. Factory installed time-delay relays for each compressor control circuit so that their
wiring placement in the circuit is after the low-pressure switch and before the CPC
output control point. This means that only a loss of power or an opening of the
low-pressure switch will cause the time delay relay to become active. Normal
compressor cycling via the CPC compressor output is to have no effect on
initiating the time-delay relays.
M. Installation of Refrigeration Leak Detection System:
1. The refrigeration MRLDS leak detection system shall be furnished by Whole Foods and
installed by the Refrigeration Contractor. _
2. The leak detector must incorporate multiple HFC gas detection sensors, and provide a
digital signal to the automated control system for the purpose of generating an outgoing
signal to the central alarm receiving computer. The detector must provide a discrete
analog signal to the automated control system for each individual leak detector sensor.
3. The CO2 and refrigerant leak detection equipment shall be powered by a secondary
power source supplied by others. This is to be an uninterrupted power source capable of
operating equipment for a minimum of 15 minutes and processing a refrigerant leak
alarm following a power failure.
REFRIGERATION INSTALLATION 236395- 19
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
4. The CO2 and refrigerant leak detection alarms shall be supervised by the fire alarm
system. All required provisions necessary to achieve this supervision shall be furnished
and installed by others.
5. The monitor shall be as manufactured by CPC. Lights and buzzers are to be provided and
installed by refrigeration contractor.
6. Refrigeration Manufacturer will provide one sensor per refrigeration rack, in addition to
shipped loose sensors for the freezers walk-in boxes per plans.
N. Parasense Monitoring Transducers:
1. Whole Foods to supply transducers.Rack OEM to install transducers.
2. Controls contractor to wire all Parasense Rack sensors and transducers.
O. Installation of System Identification and labeling requirements:
1. The Refrigeration Contractor shall provide signage on each refrigeration system to
display:
a. Name of contractor installing equipment.
b. Name and number designation of refrigerant in system.
c. Pounds and type of refrigerant in system.
d. Type and Brand of Oil in system.
2. Identification and Labeling at the Rack:
a. The Refrigeration Contractor shall install Brother P-Touch(or equivalent) labeling
tape displaying the operating system set points for each compressor unit. The
labels shall include the refrigerant name, the suction and discharge pressures and
their respective temperatures. The labels shall be placed on the outside of the
compressor system control panel,next to the system identification labeling.
b. The Refrigeration Contractor shall install Brother P-Touch(or equivalent) labeling
tape displaying each circuit number and the name of the specified connected
refrigeration device and its defrost requirements. The labels shall be placed on the
outside of the compressor system control panel, next to the system identification
labeling.
c. After all final adjustments have been made, the Refrigeration Contractor shall
mark in permanent marker and on the valve coil cover plate, the suction pressure
set points for each suction control valve.
3. Identification and Labeling at the Cases:
a. Refrigeration Contractor is responsible for all specified labeling
b. All cases which incorporate any type of control or thermostat shall be identified.
c. Equipment Tags (Markers): Engraved, color-coded laminated plastic, mounted
with either screws or rivets.
d. Case letters shall be assigned in addition to the unit and system numbers, to
identify the location of each case in the line-up. Add a hyphenated alphabetical
letter assigned from left to right when viewed from the front of the case line-up:
1) Line up of Six(6)Cases on Two Systems.
REFRIGERATION INSTALLATION 236395 -20
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
2) C5-A C5-B C5-C C6-A C6-B C6-C.
e. No case letter shall be assigned where there is only one case evaporator on a
system. Complete identification can be made in that instance using only the unit
and system numbers.
f. Each case shall be marked with Brother P-touch labeling tape (or equal) bearing
the unit, system, and case numbers. Tag location to be either beside the discharge
thermometer or adjacent to the fixture nameplate, whichever is the most
conspicuous.
4. Identification and Labeling at the Walk-in Boxes and Coils:
a. Prep rooms,Coolers and Freezers shall be identified on each doorjamb on the latch
side at+ 60" above finished floor. Each location shall be marked using Brother P-
touch labelling bearing the unit and system number, t-stat location, defrost
requirements and be attached by screws or rivets to an integral part of the fixture.
Using existing screws where possible.
5. Identification and Labeling at the Energy Management System(EMS)Equipment:
a. All wiring and cable runs shall be permanently tagged at each cable end with the
corresponding system identification as indicated on the design schedules, legends
and plans.
b. All EMS junction boxes shall be clearly identified as to the EMS cables and wiring
system identified within.
c. Equipment labeling shall display the proper equipment identification tag,affixed to
the exterior cabinet of each controller, EMS enclosure and on each control board.
The proper EMS equipment tag name shall display the name and identification as
indicated on the design plans.
P. As-Builts Drawing Requirements:
1. The Refrigeration Contractor shall provide two (2) sets of"as-built" documents at final
completion of the installation. Use the most current issued project specific drawings as
the base for as-built drawings. Provide (1) set of as-built drawings to the General
Contractor for incorporation of these drawings to the master set of as-built drawings.
Provide as-built drawings per General Contractor's schedule for proper project close out.
The Refrigeration Contractor shall mount one(1)set on the wall of the compressor room
or at the base of the ladder. Refer to Division 1,Section 01770.
2. At final completion of refrigeration piping installation,the Refrigeration Contractor shall
provide"as-built"refrigeration piping diagrams to Whole Foods detailing all tubing sizes,
piping paths and valve locations. The Refrigeration Contractor shall provide two(2)"as-
built" sets, one (1) copy to be mounted as per above and one (1) set provided to the
director of maintenance at Whole Foods. Refer to Division 1,Section 01770.
3. Permanent Fixture Plan:
a. The Refrigeration Contractor will be required to develop, supply and install a
permanent store fixture plan indicating all refrigeration circuits, location of all ball
valves and solenoid valves,and their interface with the compressor systems. This
REFRIGERATION INSTALLATION 236395-21
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
plan shall be framed in clear glass and permanently located in the above approved
location.
Q. System Start Up Requirements:
1. The temperature controls and controller equipment shall be set to maintain the following
temperatures. These conditions must be read in the primary discharge air stream, except
for all walk-in boxes, which are read in return air stream. Full compliance with
manufacturers installation, setup recommendations and operating temperatures must be
adhered to.
a. No deviation from these temperatures will be allowed, Contractor shall be held
responsible should he accept instructions, either verbally or otherwise from any
source other than in writing from Whole Foods. Should there be any question as to
the capabilities of a Manufacturer's equipment to produce temperatures herein
specified, Contractor will notify Whole Foods in writing of said questions,
otherwise it will be Contractor's responsibility to ensure said equipment shall
perform as specified below. The temperatures are to be maintained with fixture
loaded or unloaded. Case temperatures listed below are actual fixture discharge
temperatures.The walk-in box temperatures listed are room temperatures.
REFRIGERATION INSTALLATION 236395-22
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
2. WHOLE FOODS' FIXTURE TEMPERATURE / ALARM SETPOINT
REQUIREMENTS
* listed for E2,for RMCC controllers, use 90 minutes
FIXTURE TEMPERATURE CONTROL CONTROLLE
RANGE DEG.F ALARM
HIGH TEMP CIRCUIT
,_ � ; ' Y >Y ,' TIME ACRONYM
r
. �, .r N. .: ;. (Min.)INTERVAL
BAKERY CASES +34 ° 50°/60 min. BKCS
BAKERY COOLER WALK-IN +36° 50°/60 min. BKBX
BAKERY FREEZER WALK-IN -8 ° 15 °/60 min. BKFZ
BEER CASES(M/D) +36° 50°/60 min. BEER
BEVERAGE(DRINKS)CASE(M/D) +36° 50°/60 min. BVCS
CHEESE CASES(S/D) +32 ° 50°/60 min. ISCH
CHEESE CASES(M/D) +32 ° 50°/60 min. MDCH
DAIRY CASES(M/D REAR LOAD) +32 ° 50°/60 min. RLDY
DAIRY CASES(M/D) +32° 50°/60 min. DYCS
DAIRY COOLER WALK-IN +35 ° 50°/60 min. DYBX
DELI CASES(M/D) +32° 50°/60 min. MDDL
DELI COOLER WALK-IN + 34° 50°/60 min. DLBX
DELI FREEZER WALK-IN 0° 15 °/60 min. DLFZ
DUAL TEMP CASES(M/D) - 8°/+25 ° 15 °/50°/60 min. DTMD
FLORAL COOLER WALK-IN/CASES +38 °to+40° 60°/60 min. FLBX
FRESH MEAT CASE(S/D) +26° 50°/60 min. SDMT
FRESH MEAT CASES(M/D) +29° 50°/60 min. MDMT
FROZEN FOOD CASE(M/D) -8° 15 °/60 min. MDFF
FROZEN FOOD CASES(REACH-IN) -5 ° 15 °/60 min. RIFF
FROZEN FOOD CASES(S/D) - 10° 15 °/60 min. SDFF
FROZEN JUICE CASES(REACH-IN) - 10° 15 °/60 min. RIFJ
FROZEN MEAT CASES(M/D) -8° 15 °/60 min. MDFM
FROZEN SEAFOOD CASES(M/D) -8 0 15 °/60 min. MDFS
GROCERY FROZEN FOODS FREEZER - 10° 15 °/60 min. FFFZ
WALK-IN
ICE CREAM CASES(REACH-IN) - 10° 15 °/60 min. RIIC
ICE CREAM CASES(S/D) -25 ° -5 °/60 min. SDIC
ISLAND TAKE-OUT(FRESH EATS) +26° 50°/60 min. GRAB
MEAT COOLER WALK-IN +30° 50°/60 min. MTBX
MEAT FREEZER WALK-IN 0° 15°/60 min. MTFZ
MEAT PREPARATION +55 0 75 °/60 min. MTPR
OLIVE BAR +32 ° 50°/60 min. OLIV
PIZZA CASE +28 ° 50°/60 min. PZZA
PRODUCE CASES(4 DECK) +35 0 50°/60 min. MDPR
PRODUCE CASES(5 DECK) +35 ° 50°/60 min. MDPR
REFRIGERATION INSTALLATION 236395 -23
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85% PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
PRODUCE CASES(M/D) +35 ° 50°/60 min. MDPR
PRODUCE CASES(S/D) +38° 50°/60 min. SDPR
PRODUCE COOLER WALK-IN +40° 75 °/60 min. PRBX
PRODUCE ISLAND +38 0 50°/60 min. ISPR
PRODUCE PREPARATION +60 0 75 °/60 min. PRPR
SALAD BAR +33 0 50°/60 min. SALD
SEAFOOD CASES(M/D) +28° 50°/60 min. MDSF
SEAFOOD COOLER WALK-IN +32° 500/60 min. SFBX
SEAFOOD FREEZER WALK-IN 0° 15°/60 min. SFFZ
SEAFOOD PREPARATION +55 0 75 °/60 min. SFPR
SERVICE CHEESE CASES +32° 50°/60 min. SVCH
SERVICE DELI CASES +25° 500/60 min. SVDL
SERVICE MEAT CASES +25 ° 50°/60 min. SVMT
SERVICE MEAT PREPARATION +55° 75°/60 min. SMPR
SERVICE SEAFOOD CASES +32° 50°/60 min. SVSF
SUSHI CASE +28° 50°/60 min. SUSH
3. The Refrigeration Contractor is to use 1 deg F graduation thermometers to set the
temperature as specified above. Thermometers furnished with cases are not satisfactory
for this purpose.
4. Set the compressor controls in accordance with manufacturer's application data for initial
system start-up. Observe case temperature performance. Check each expansion valve
and adjust as needed to equalize performance between cases on the same compressor and
to obtain required superheat temperature. Each TXV superheat to be set and verified.
5. After expansion valve stabilization has occurred, additional refrigerant may be required
to bring the system to full capacity. All systems must be fully charged.
6. It is the Refrigeration Contractor's responsibility to check all refrigeration components,
flare fittings,cases and controls,including all electrical connections at the compressor,to
ensure tight and operative connections.
7. The Refrigeration Contractor shall make all necessary adjustments to the controls during
the time that the fixtures are being stocked.
8. The Refrigeration Contractor's mechanic shall remain at the store at least eight(8)hours
during the first day the store is open for business,beginning one (1)hour before opening
time.
9. After all of the refrigerating systems have been operational for a period of seven(7)days
and all work is complete,the Refrigeration Contractor is required to investigate and leak
check each and every refrigerant circuit starting at the fixture expansion valve and
working back to the compressor system. Any sign of a refrigerant leak must be
immediately,permanently,and properly rectified.At this time,the Contractor must check
every field located ball and solenoid valve for integrity and ensure that the ball valves are
firmly capped and the cap Teflon gaskets are securely in-place.
10. Change all suction and liquid filters including oil lines after 48 hours of run time and last
system has been brought on-line. Filter changes done in conjunction with refrigerant
retrofits may be applied to this requirement as long as all system cut-in has been
completed.
a. Filters to be left on site for WF Representative to see.
REFRIGERATION INSTALLATION 236395-24
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
11. After 48 hours and ninety(90)days of running,acid test the oil in all systems. Provide a
copy of the results to the WF Representative.
12. The Contractor shall give every Department Manager and Store Director a copy of the
defrost schedule. Review these times with each person,making sure they understand and
agree with the times that were set-up.
13. The Contractor shall give detailed information to the Store Director on the response times
for service personnel. Contractor will have a maximum response time of 2 hours.
Should Contractor not respond in that timeframe, Whole Foods reserves the right to call
out another company and withholding payment from Refrigeration Contractor for
reimbursement.
14. The Refrigeration Contractor shall provide all information to the person in charge of the
premises for the purpose of maintaining a written record of refrigerant quantities brought
onto and removed from the premises to be made available to the Fire Department.
15. The Refrigeration Contractor shall provide signage on equipment room door as
designated below
a. Instructions for suspending operation of the system in the event of an emergency,
b. The name,address and emergency telephone numbers to obtain emergency service,
c. The name, address and telephone number of the fire department with instructions
to notify the fire department in the event of an emergency.
16. Final testing and start-up of the parallel compressors shall be carried out in conjunction
with an authorized factory representative.
17. The Refrigeration Contractor shall schedule the final inspection with a Whole Foods
Representative once all systems are on line and operating normally. During this walk
through, Whole Foods will review log books (1 per system), verify that the Contractor
has a binder which includes literature from every piece of equipment,and if not,it will be
the Contractors responsibility to gather this information to be presented to the Store Team
Leader during turnover date.
18. Absolute compliance with the manufacturer's specifications must be fully adhered to.
Refer to the Manufacturer's Installation Instructions for all applicable equipment.
19. Compressors will be delivered to the job with ship-loose oil. The Refrigeration
Contractor shall be responsible for the furnishing and charging of each system with the
correct oil type and amount to bring the level of each reservoir up to the center of the
upper sight glass. This procedure must be continued until the oil level stabilizes,
following at least (21) days of operation. Use only oil that is approved by Compressor
Manufacturer.All oil must be delivered to the job in factory sealed,unopened containers.
The Contractor must use extreme caution during oil handling to prevent the ingress of
moisture laden air.
a. Before operating any motor or other moving parts, the parts are to be lubricated
with the proper oil or grease as necessary.
b. Remove or loosen all shipping retainers under motor compressors. Make sure hold
down nuts on spring-mounted compressors are not touching the compressor feet,
and are not more than 1/16"above the mounting foot.
c. Check high and low pressure control cut- in and cut-out points. Adjust if
necessary.
d. After the compressor is started, continue charging until system has sufficient
refrigerant for proper operation. Do not over charge. During start-up, no
REFRIGERATION INSTALLATION 236395-25
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
compressor is to be left operating unattended and unwatched, until the system is
properly charged with refrigerant and oil.
e. Do not add refrigeration oil while the system is short of refrigerant unless oil level
is dangerously low. Where oil has been added during charging,carefully check the
compressor crankcase sight glass after reaching a normal operating condition to be
sure the system does not contain an excessive amount of oil, which can cause
slugging or loss of refrigerating capacity.
R. Balancing Procedures for Glycol Systems:
1. Measure water flow at pumps. Use the following procedures, except for positive-
displacement pumps:
a. Verify impeller size by operating the pump with the discharge valve closed. Read
pressure differential across the pump. Convert pressure to head and correct for
differences in gage heights. Note the point on manufacturer's pump curve at zero
flow and verify that the pump has the intended impeller size.
b. Check system resistance. With all valves open, read pressure differential across
the pump and mark pump manufacturer's head-capacity curve. Adjust pump
discharge valve until indicated water flow is achieved.
c. Report flow rates that are not within plus or minus 5 percent of design.
2. Open all balance valves wide open, including case balance valves, and branch (system)
balance valves.
3. Operate pump at 60 hz(or at max amps) (check pump for over-amp).
4. Ensure all air is bled from system. Operate pumps for a minimum of 96 hours before
attempting to balance, bleeding and refilling as required to completely fill system and
eliminate air.
5. Set glycol temp to 35 deg F.
6. Read all branch (system) valves. (if pressure drop is below 1 foot of head loss, close
valve to achieve 1 foot.drop)
7. Proportion all balance valves to lowest percentage flow valve. (lowest valve to remain
100%open)
8. Adjust pump speed to achieve 95 percent of design flow at lowest valve. (Valve that is
100%open.)
9. Read and record DP at both DP sensors. (This becomes the DP set point, the pumps
modulate to the lowest of the two sensors relative to set point.)
10. Read all balance valves 1 final time. Flows to be within 90% to 100% of design flow. If
outside the range,repeat procedure.
11. Measure pump flow rate and make final measurements and recordings of pump
amperage, voltage, rpm, pump heads, and systems' pressures and temperatures including
outdoor-air temperature.
12. Measure and record the differential-pressure control valve settings existing at the
conclusions of balancing.
S. Temperature/Pressure Recordings:
1. Following final control calibration, and after the system has established operational
equilibrium, the contractor is required to obtain an accurate twenty-four (24) hour
REFRIGERATION INSTALLATION 236395 -26
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
temperature recording chart of each system, indicating the case number and location of
probe.
2. In addition,a twenty-four(24)hour pressure recording of both the discharge and suction
pressure shall be obtained for each system. The recordings shall be submitted to the
Engineer within five(5)days after the store opening for approval.
T. Start-up Requirements for Self-Contained Equipment:
1. This Contractor shall check all self-contained refrigeration equipment for proper
operation and correct temperature settings with exception to the vendor ice machine.
Fixtures are to be set in place by the Contractor and the electrical connection by others.
2. Contractor to review Check Fixture Plan Layout and any other Addenda for the locations
of all self-contained equipment. Follow manufacturer's specifications for start-up and
checking.Confirm refrigerant level,compressor operation,and set all operating controls.
2.4 WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS
A. Warranty Period: The Warranty Period shall be for one calendar year following the Whole
Foods store Grand Opening date. If special jobsite circumstances occur, the Warranty Period
will be agreed upon and documented in writing by Whole Foods, only if requested by
Refrigeration contractor within seven days of Grand Opening.
B. The Refrigeration Contractor shall guarantee each piece of equipment supplied by him to meet
the capacity and duty requirements herein specified.The adequate and satisfactory performance
of the equipment herein specified shall be the responsibility of the Refrigeration Contractor.
C. The Refrigeration Contractor shall assign and furnish to Whole Foods a copy of all"warranties"
for equipment or manufactured components supplied on the project. It is the responsibility of
the Refrigeration Contractor to process all "warranty" claims that occur during the warranty
period. Terms and Conditions stated on manufacturer's warranties shall apply to Whole Foods.
D. The Refrigeration Contractor shall warranty all of his work to include labor, materials and
incidental expense,to be free from defects in workmanship and materials for a period of(1)one
year from date of store Grand Opening or final acceptance of refrigeration system installation
by Whole Foods, whichever is later. The Refrigeration Contractor shall replace or repair any
device, equipment or piping in which defects develop within that (1) one— year period. The
Refrigeration Contractor shall make repairs, adjustments or corrections to the system to
maintain case temperatures as called for on the refrigeration schedule without any cost to Whole
Foods for the complete term of the Warranty period.
E. In the event of negligence on the part of the Refrigeration Contractor in failing to promptly
respond to service calls within (2) two hours of notification from Whole Foods or Designated
Whole Foods Representative and as a result of such negligence Whole Foods suffers food or
other loss, the Contractor shall be held accountable and liable for such loss. The Contractor
shall reimburse Whole Foods for such loss plus an additional 10%.
F. The Refrigeration Contractor shall be responsible for any refrigerant and fluid loss during the
first year Warranty period.
REFRIGERATION INSTALLATION 236395-27
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
G. The Contractor shall maintain a log of all service performed on the refrigeration rack to include
inspections and service. The logbook is to be kept at the store in a location known by the Store
Team Leader and be available to Whole Foods at all times for review.
H. All equipment, controls or accessories furnished by Whole Foods are purchased with
Manufacturer(1) one-year parts and labor Warranty. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility
to obtain from the Manufacturer any replacement parts and labor reimbursements without any
cost to Whole Foods. The Contractor must notify Whole Foods or Designated Representative in
writing within(3)working days of each such occurrence.
I. In addition to all remote cases listed on the Refrigeration Schedule, all self-contained
refrigerated cases on the Final as-built drawings are part of this Contract and are to be included
in the start up and(1)one year Warranty from the Whole Foods store Grand Opening date.
J. In the event the Installing Contractor is sub-contracting the Warranty work,a competent service
representative of the sub-contractor must be present during the following time frames. The
entire refrigeration equipment start-up period, the entire week prior to store opening, two days
after store opening as well as the Commissioning Meeting,for a period of not less than eight(8)
hours per day. Sub-contracting of the Warranty work requires prior written approval of Whole
Foods.
K. During the course of the (1) one-year warranty period,the Refrigeration Contractor must make
periodic, scheduled maintenance inspections of all the systems and make any adjustments or
corrections as required to ensure all systems are operating to Manufacturer specifications as
well as Whole Foods case temperature requirements.
L. All work performed by the Refrigeration Contractor is to be covered by this warranty.
M. If Whole Foods discovers a defect in material or workmanship during the Warranty period,
upon receipt of notice from Whole Foods, Refrigeration Contractor must, at a minimum, re-
perform, repair or replace any defective work promptly and at no additional cost to Whole
Foods. All costs incidental to re-performance,repair or replacement of the work including,but
not limited to,shipping,removal,re-design,disassembly,reinstallation,reconstruction,retesting
and re-inspection will be borne by Refrigeration Contractor. Contractor further warrants re-
performed, repaired or replaced work for a period of not less than (1) one year from Whole
Foods'acceptance of the same.
N. The Refrigeration Contractor shall provide Whole Foods with copies of all Local, State and
Federal regulations regarding refrigerant loss reporting and record keeping and shall comply
with all during the entire Warranty and Installation period.This information is to be included in
the Commissioning Book. _
O. This Warranty is not sole or exclusive and is in addition to the any other expressed or implied
warranties set forth in this agreement or provided by law.
P. The Refrigeration Contractor's Warranty shall not include repairs or replacement due to damage
by Fire, Earthquakes, Tornado, Lightning, the Elements, Power Failures, Acts of God or
damage caused by misuse of the system by Whole Foods.
Q. Preventive Maintenance Requirements After Grand Opening:
REFRIGERATION INSTALLATION 236395-28
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1. Refrigeration Contractor shall make Preventive Maintenance(PM) inspections according
to the following schedule:
a. PM 1 -Thirty days after equipment start-up.
b. PM 2-Three months after equipment start-up.
c. PM 3-Six months after equipment start-up.
d. PM 4-Eleven months after equipment start-up.
R. The Refrigeration Contractor shall complete a Maintenance Inspection Report for each
scheduled Inspection.Copies are to be given to the Store Team Leader as well as the designated
Whole Foods Representative within(7)seven working days of inspection completion.
S. All filters are to be saved; dated and labeled as to which system they came from along with an
oil sample from that system. Whole Foods Maintenance Department will inspect them prior to
disposal. If any filters or oil samples are found to be excessively dirty at any point in schedule,
they are to be changed weekly along with the system oil until system is clean.
T. Refrigeration Contractor will complete all maintenance work for each inspection as described in
the following Maintenance Checklist.
U. NEW STORE/.REMODEL REFRIGERATION MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
1. PM 1 —30 Day Inspection:
a. All suction/liquid line filter/dryers are to be changed.All filters are to be saved;
dated and labeled as to which system they came from, along with an oil sample
from that system. If any filters or oil samples are contaminated or excessively
dirty,they are to be changed weekly until system is clean.Verify refrigerant levels.
1) All case temperatures are to be checked and recorded.
2) All case anti-sweat/defrost coils are to be checked and recorded.
3) All case condensate drains are to be checked and recorded.
4) All cases are to be checked to ensure all trim,kick plates, and covers are in
place and fastened securely.
b. Rack System—Medium and Low Temperature:
1) Check and record suction temperature and ambient temperature.
2) Check and record suction and discharge pressures.
3) Check and record net oil pressure.Adjust oil float as required.
c. All Compressors:
1) Record serial number.
2) Check and record line voltage.
3) Check and record amperage.
d. Condenser Fan Package:
1) Check and record line voltage.Check and record all fan amps.
2) Check all electrical connections.
REFRIGERATION INSTALLATION 236395 -29
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
3) Check unit for debris, visual inspection of unit — fan blade balance, coils
condition,etc.
e. Walk-in coolers and freezers. Inspect and record all seals and gaskets for air
leakage.Door hardware, filters, and general condition.
f. Perform any and all additional Manufacturer recommended Preventive
Maintenance for all refrigeration equipment. Record all in store log.
g. Leak test all joints and connections.
h. Check and adjust all pipe hangers and strapping as required.
2. PM 2-3 Month inspection:
a. Same as 7 day with the exception of suction / liquid line filter change and oil
sample.
3. PM 3 -6 Month inspection:
a. Same as 7 day inspection plus
b. Clean all condenser coils.
c. Adjust refrigerant charge based on seasonal requirements.
d. Change evaporation coil filters.
4. PM 4- 11 Month inspection:
a. Same as 7 day inspection plus;
b. Clean all condenser coils.
c. Clean all evaporator coils and walk-ins,change filters.
d. Leak test all joints and connections.
V. The Refrigeration Contractor will schedule the last Maintenance Inspection approximately (1)
one month prior to the Warranty expiration date with the Store Director and Whole Foods
Representative. Contractor will certify in writing that the refrigeration systems are free of leaks
and operating at Whole Foods specified temperatures and Manufacturer specifications with
normal control adjustments and that all systems are fully charged and all electrical connections
tight.
W. The Refrigeration Contractor shall submit or decline to submit, in writing, a proposal for a
complete (1) one year Maintenance Agreement approximately (1) one month prior to Warranty
expiration date.
X. A copy of the Contractors warranty will be approved,before contract is signed.
PART 3 -PRODUCTS
3.1 ITEMS FURNISHED BY WHOLE FOODS
A. Compressor racks.
REFRIGERATION INSTALLATION 236395 -30
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
B. Condensers.
C. Pump stations.
D. Refrigerated cases,including self-contained.
E. Walk-in boxes and evaporator coils.
F. Ice Machine.
G. Heat reclaim tanks.
H. BMS controllers.
3.2 RECEIVE,ACCEPT,INSPECT,PROTECT,AND INSTALL WHOLE FOODS-FURNISHED
ITEMS AS INDICATED AND SPECIFIED AND IN ACCORDANCE WITH
MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS.
A. Upon receipt of each shipment,the Refrigeration Contractor shall:
1. Verify freight documents: count all cartons and verify the quantity on the freight bill,
making notations of overages, shortages, or damaged cartons and obtaining the driver's
signature on the freight bill;
2. Locate the packing slip and verify actual quantities, making notations of any
discrepancies;
a. Immediately report all freight damages/damaged goods as follows:
1) Call the Whole Foods (FF&E) Furniture, Fixtures and Equipment Project
Manager as listed on the project's USGN home page.
2) If requested, mail a legible photocopy of all documents pertaining to the
shipment to the Whole Foods FF&E Project Manager.
3) Retain a legible photocopy of all documents pertaining to the shipment and
forward a legible photocopy to the Contractor.
b. Obtain the pink receiver copy of the Whole Foods'purchase order pertaining to the
items received, and compare the pink receiver copy with the packing documents
verifying quantities, model numbers, and all pertinent specifications and making
notations of any discrepancies on the pink receiver copy.
1) Immediately report all purchase order discrepancies, shortages, overages
and back order as:
a) Call the Whole Foods FF&E Project Manager.
b) Mail a legible photocopy of the mark-up pink receiver along with all
original attachments pertaining to the shipment to the Whole Foods
FF&E Project Manager.
REFRIGERATION INSTALLATION 236395-31
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
2) Sign and date the pink receiver copy of the Whole Foods purchase order on
the line provided;
3) Attach the packing list, freight bill, and any other informational papers to
the back of the Purchase Order pink receiver,and;
4) Forward the completed pink receiver copy of the Whole Foods purchase
order and attachments to Whole Foods.
3. The receiver copy of the Whole Foods purchase order identifies the department or area
and states the breakdown of quantities for each location. Shipments must be split by
location and items must be stored with other items for that location in the storage area
selected by the Construction Manager for this purpose.The Refrigeration Contractor shall
submit to the General Contractor accurate receiving logs and locations of all received
items.
4. The Refrigeration Contractor is responsible for protecting Whole Foods furnished items
from damage, including damage from exposure to the elements. The Refrigeration
Contractor shall repair or replace items damaged as a result of his operations.
5. Whole Foods Furnished Contractor-Installed (WFFCI): The Refrigeration Contractor
shall install Whole Foods Furnished Items in strict compliance with manufacturers'
recommendations, Construction Documents, and as required by applicable codes, laws,
rules and regulations.
a. The Refrigeration Contractor is responsible for providing appropriate installation
of equipment, miscellaneous fasteners, adhesives, blocking, and mechanical and
electrical connections required for complete assembly and installation of Whole
Foods furnished items.
b. The Refrigeration Contractor is responsible for providing start-up and testing of
Whole Foods furnished items in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
6. Whole Foods furnished items include, but are not limited to, those specified Section
236390,Pre-Purchase Specifications.
3.3 WHOLE FOODS NEGOTIATED PRODUCTS
A. Whole Foods Negotiated Products: Whole Foods has negotiated with certain suppliers for
purchase of the products as indicated. Refrigeration Contractor shall use those suppliers,
WITHOUT SUBSTITUTION,for all products identified as Whole Foods Negotiated.
B. Refer to the technical sections of the specifications for additional product requirements.
REFRIGERATION INSTALLATION 236395-32
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
PART 4-EXECUTION
4.1 USE OF PREMISES
A. The Refrigeration Contractor shall confine all operations at the site to areas permitted by law,
ordinances, permits and the Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the site
with any materials or equipment.
B. Whole Foods' right to occupy completed portions of the project limits the Refrigeration
Contractor's use of the premises. Such partial occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the
work. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with the Whole Foods operations.
C. The Refrigeration Contractor shall assume full responsibility for protection and safekeeping of
materials and products stored on and off the premises.
D. Protect existing features,utilities,equipment,and improvements not designated for removal and
restore damaged or temporarily relocated utilities and improvements to a condition equal to or
better than existed prior to such damage or temporary relocation.
E. Do not load structures with weight that will endanger or damage them.
F. Members of Refrigeration Contractor's staff will only be permitted to smoke in those areas
where Whole Foods employees are allowed to smoke.
G. The Refrigeration Contractor must maintain safe conditions in all his work areas in order to
protect Whole Foods from liability as a result of personal injury.
H. The Refrigeration Contractor at all times shall keep the premises free from accumulation of
waste materials or rubbish caused by his operations. At the completion of each day, he shall
remove all his waste materials and rubbish from and about the project as well as all his tools,
construction equipment,machinery and surplus materials,and shall clean all glass surfaces and
leave the work"broom clean"or its equivalent. If the Refrigeration Contractor fails to clean up,
Whole Foods may do so and the cost thereof shall be charged to the Refrigeration Contractor.
4.2 SCHEDULE
A. It is imperative that the work covered by this specification shall be completed as soon as
possible. The Contractor shall see that cooperation among his men and all other trades be
maintained. Since some phases of construction work, as described hereinafter, are covered by
separate contracts,cooperation with these other contractors is essential.
B. It is the Refrigeration Contractor's responsibility to fully abide by the project schedule as
developed for each specific phase of the installation and to attend all scheduled job meetings.
C. The Refrigeration Contractor shall keep approximately the same schedule of working hours as
the other Contractors and shall stay on the job continuously from beginning to end except as
agreed with Whole Foods.
REFRIGERATION INSTALLATION 236395-33
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
D. In the case of a store remodel, under no circumstances can the Contractor or any employee
thereof interrupt the normal operation and trading procedures of the particular store without
prior consent of the Store Manager,and the authorized representative in charge of the project.
E. Failure to stay within the General Contractors construction schedule will dictate a re-evaluation
of the Refrigeration Contractor being considered for future store bid lists. Once called by the
GC, the Contractor is to have 24 hours to have personnel on the job. If a Contractor has not
responded in a 48-hour timeframe, Whole Foods reserves the right to replace said Contractor
with a different company.
4.3 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of the
Construction Manager's Project Construction Schedule.
B. Format and Content: Use the Project Construction Schedule as a guide to establish the format
for the Schedule of Values.
1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values:
a. Project name and location.
b. Name of the Construction Manager.
c. Project number.
d. Contractor's name and address.
e. Date of submittal.
2. Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the
following for each item listed:
a. Related Specification Section or Division.
b. Description of Work.
c. Name of subcontractor.
d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator.
e. Name of supplier.
f. Change Orders(numbers)that affect value.
g. Dollar value.
h. Sales tax.
3. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values prior to the next
Applications for Payment when Change Orders result in a change in the Contract Sum.
4. A schedule of values (Application and Certificate for Payment, AIA Documents G702,
G703)allocated to the various portions of the work,prepared in such form and supported
by such data to substantiate its accuracy is to be submitted to the Owner prior to the first
application for payment. This schedule,unless objected to by the Owner,is to be used as
a basis for the Contractor's application for payment.
REFRIGERATION INSTALLATION 236395-34
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
4.4 CHANGES TO SCOPE OF WORK
A. Refer to Division 1 Specification Section 01250 — Contract Modification Procedures for
processing changes to scope of work.
B. No deviations or changes are to be implemented without Whole Foods approval of RFC.
4.5 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS
A. Specifications Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the
2004 version of CSI/CSC's"Master Format"numbering system.
1. Section Identification: The Specifications use section numbers and titles to help cross
referencing in the Contract Documents. Sections in the Project Manual are in numeric
sequence; however, the sequence is incomplete. Consult the table of contents at the
beginning of the Project Manual to determine numbers and names of sections in the
Contract Documents.
- B. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and
the intended meaning of certain terms, words and phrases when used in particular situations.
These conventions are as follows:
1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract
Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate.
Words implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words
shall be interpreted as plural, and plural words shall be interpreted as singular where
applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates.
2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications.
Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor.
Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for
clarity to describe responsibilities that must fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by others
when so noted.
a. The words"shall","shall be" or"shall comply with",depending on the context,are
implied where a colon(:)is used within a sentence or phrase.
4.6 REFRIGERATION FORMS
A. Upon completion of the refrigeration installation and the energy management systems
installation,the Refrigeration Contractor shall provide to Whole Foods the following authorized
forms as detailed in this section. All the noted information must be completed as pertaining to
this particular project. All time required for acquisition and provision of this data shall be
included as part of the Refrigeration Contractor's Contract Fee.
REFRIGERATION INSTALLATION 236395-35
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
4.7 REFRIGERATION INSTALLATION PROPOSAL FORM
In submitting this proposal, the undersigned certifies that he is familiar with the contract requirements,
and has included all items of labor and material necessary for a complete job in accordance with the plans
and specifications.
DESCRIPTION
INSTALLATION: PRICE
Including all labor and material required for a complete installation,as
per the enclosed specifications and project design documents $
Hourly labor rate $
Hourly premium for overtime when authorized to be Reimbursed by Whole Foods $
Mark-up on extra materials supplied outside
Of contract $
First Year Service $
Alternate pricing for using other than Mueller"Nitrogenized"®Piping $
Submitted by Date
(Contracting Firm)
To: Whole Foods
Having examined and studied the Project Manual dated , the Instructions to Bidders,
and the other contract documents for:
Whole Foods-
and having inspected the site and noted all conditions governing construction of the Projects:
Bid Package: Description:
We hereby propose to furnish all labor,materials and equipment and perform work
described above,and within the design documents for the submitted sum(s),which include
all applicable taxes.
Acknowledge receipt of all Addenda&Clarifications below.
OFFICERS SIGNATURE:
TITLE: DATE:
Names and Titles of Officers Authorized to Sign Contracts:
REFRIGERATION INSTALLATION 236395 -36
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
Refrigeration Equipment Setup Verification
Store Name:
Address/City/State:
Refrigeration System# :
Pressure/Vacuum Check*
This system has been successfully evacuated per Specifications.
The initial evacuation was to microns.
The second evacuation was to microns.
The final evacuation was to microns.
*Pressure and vacuum test results are due(1)to(7)days after tests are performed,and are
required to be documented on Whole Foods'USGN.
Refrigerant Charge Information
This system contains R- refrigerant. _
The total and final refrigerant charge of this system is pounds.
The following are the refrigerant charge amounts installed during start-up of this unit:
Date: pounds
Date: pounds
Date: pounds
Date: — — pounds
Date: pounds
This system contains(choose one)POE / AB / Mineral oil.
The total amount oil in this system is gallons.Oil Viscosity:
The system final operating high side(including condenser and heat reclaim piping)field pressure
reading was PSI @ ambient temp: °F.
The system final operating low side field pressure reading was PSI.
All rack circuit suction and liquid piping and valves,as well as the high side piping and valves
have been leaked checked and verified the entire equipment is refrigerant leak
free.[ :initial here]
Refrigeration System#:
Pressure/Vacuum Check*
This system has been successfully evacuated per Specifications.
The initial evacuation was to microns.
The second evacuation was to microns.
The final evacuation was to microns.
* Pressure and vacuum test results are due(1)to(7)days after tests are performed,and are
required to be documented on Whole Foods'USGN.
Refrigerant Charge Information
This system contains R- refrigerant.
REFRIGERATION INSTALLATION 236395 -37
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
Refrigeration System#: (CONTINUED)
The total and fmal refrigerant charge of this system is pounds.
The following are the refrigerant charge amounts installed during start-up of this unit:
Date: pounds
Date: pounds
Date: pounds
Date: pounds
Date: pounds
This system contains(choose one)POE / AB / Mineral oil.
The total amount oil in this system is gallons.Oil Viscosity:
The system final operating high side(including condenser and heat reclaim piping)field pressure
reading was PSI @ ambient temp: °F.
The system final operating low side field pressure reading was PSI.
All rack circuit suction and liquid piping and valves,as well as the high side piping and valves
have been leaked checked and verified the entire equipment is refrigerant leak
free.[ :initial here]
Refrigeration System#:
Pressure/Vacuum Check*
This system has been successfully evacuated per Specifications.
The initial evacuation was to _ microns.
The second evacuation was to microns.
The final evacuation was to microns.
*Pressure and vacuum test results are due(1)to(7)days after tests are performed,and are
required to be documented on Whole Foods'USGN.
Refrigerant Charge Information
This system contains R- refrigerant.
The total and final refrigerant charge of this system is -- - pounds.
The following are the refrigerant charge amounts installed during start-up of this unit:
Date: pounds
Date: - pounds
Date: pounds
Date: pounds
Date: pounds
This system contains(choose one)POE / AB / Mineral oil.
The total amount oil in this system is - gallons.Oil Viscosity:
The system final operating high side(including condenser and heat reclaim piping)field pressure
reading was PSI @ ambient temp: °F.
The system final operating low side field pressure reading was PSI.
All rack circuit suction and liquid piping and valves,as well as the high side piping and valves
have been leaked checked and verified the entire equipment is refrigerant leak
free.[ :initial here]
REFRIGERATION INSTALLATION 236395 -38
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85% PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
Refrigeration System#:
Pressure/Vacuum Check*
This system has been successfully evacuated per Specifications.
The initial evacuation was to microns.
The second evacuation was to microns.
The final evacuation was to microns.
*Pressure and vacuum test results are due(1)to(7)days after tests are performed,and are
required to be documented on Whole Foods'USGN.
Refrigerant Charge Information
This system contains R- refrigerant.
The total and final refrigerant charge of this system is pounds.
The following are the refrigerant charge amounts installed during start-up of this unit:
Date: pounds
Date: pounds
Date: pounds
Date: pounds
Date: pounds
This system contains(choose one)POE / AB / Mineral oil.
The total amount oil in this system is_ gallons.Oil Viscosity:
The system final operating high side(including condenser and heat reclaim piping)field pressure
reading was PSI @ ambient temp: °F.
The system final operating low side field pressure reading was PSI.
All rack circuit suction and liquid piping and valves,as well as the high side piping and valves
have been leaked checked and verified the entire equipment is refrigerant leak
free.] :initial here]
Person providing reporting and verifications(print name): .
I certify that all test and procedures were performed and the noted pressure readings are accurate:
Signed:
State License or Registration Number:
Installing Company Name: Phone Number:
Street Address:
City/State:
NOTE:THIS FORM MUST BE COMPLETED IN FULL AND PROVIDED WITH AND ATTACHED
TO THE COMPLETED REFRIGERATION PIPING TEST/EVACUATION VERIFICATION FORM
AND THE REFRIGERATION START UP CHECKLIST. THESE COMPLETED FORMS ARE TO BE
PROVIDED TO THE ENGINEER AND WHOLE FOODS ON THE DAY OF EMS COMMISSIONING
(TYPICALLY(1)TO(5)DAYS AFTER GRAND OPENING)AND ARE TO BE POSTED ON
WHOLE FOODS' USGN.
REFRIGERATION INSTALLATION 236395-39
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
Refrigeration Piping Test/Evacuation Verification
Store:_ . Address/City/State:
System:
Refrigeration Holding Pressure and Microns Initials of
Circuit# Duration(min 12 hrs) (final) Certifier
Person providing reporting and verifications(print name):
I certify that all test and procedures were performed and the noted pressure readings are accurate:
Signed:
State License or Registration Number:
Installing Company Name: Phone Number:
Street Address:
City/State:
NOTE:THIS FORM MUST BE COMPLETED IN FULL FOR EACH SYSTEM AND BE
ATTACHED TO THE COMPLETED REFRIGERATION EQUIPMENT SET-UP
VERIFICATION FORM AND REFRIGERATION START-UP CHECKLIST. ALL FORMS
ARE TO BE PROVIDED TO ENGINEER AND WHOLE FOODS.
REFRIGERATION INSTALLATION 236395-40
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
Refrigeration Start-up Checklist
Store: - . Address/City/State: -
System# :
Refrig. Case/Coil Circ. Super- Fluid Defrost Defrost
Circuit#. Discharge Temp. Heat Flow Termin. Time(min.)
Air Temp. Set-point Degrees(F) (gpm) Checked &Frequency
(F)
Person providing reporting and verifications(print name):
I certify that all test and procedures were performed and the noted pressure readings are accurate:
Signed: __ _
State License or Registration Number:
Installing Company Name: Phone Number:
Street Address:
City/State: -
NOT E:THIS FORM MUST BE COMPLETED IN FULL FOR EACH SYSTEM AND BE ATTACHED
TO THE COMPLETED REFRIGERATION EQUIPMENT SET-UP VERIFICATION FORM
AND REFRIGERATION PIPING TEST/EVACUATION VERIFICATION FORM. ALL
FORMS ARE TO BE PROVIDED TO ENGINEER AND WHOLE FOODS.*
*ACCEPTABLE ALTERNATE METHOD OF DATA SUBMISSION IS TO DOWNLOAD DATA
FROM CPC ULTRASITE SOFTWARE IN LIEU OF THIS SPECIFIC FORM
REFRIGERATION INSTALLATION 236395 -41
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
Refrigeration Defrost Schedule
ALL DATA TO BE TYPED WITH UPPER CASE CHARACTERS.
Whole Foods Store City/State: System# :
Refrig. Description of Defrost Quantity Failsafe time
Circuit# Case model or Walk-in box type: of (min.)setting
(i.e. : A-1) HG,EL, defrosts per defrost
OT,WF per day occurrence
I certify that all data on this form is accurate and in agreement with the refrigeration installation.
Print Name:.
State License or Registration Number:.
Installing Company Name and phone number.
Street Address:.
City/State:.
Date:
NOTE: THIS FORM MUST BE ELECTRONICALLY FILLED OUT BY THE REFRIGERATION
INSTALLER. REFER TO THE MASTER DOCUMENT CENTER IN USGN FOR FORM.
THE G.C. IS TO PROVIDE(12)LAMINATED COPIES TO THE STORE AT OPS
TURNOVER.ADDITIONALLY,ALL FORMS ARE TO BE POSTED AT THE
COMPRESSOR UNIT.*
*ACCEPTABLE ALTERNATE METHOD OF DATA SUBMISSION IS TO DOWNLOAD DATA
FROM CPC ULTRASITE SOFTWARE IN LIEU OF THIS SPECIFIC FORM
REFRIGERATION INSTALLATION 236395-42
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
EMS Equipment Setup Verification
Store Name:
Address/City/State:
Refriteration Controller:
Compressor RACK#: Condenser#:
Controller ID#: Controller model:
All control boards,controllers and enclosures properly labeled: Y N
exceptions:
All sensors(factory and field installed)tested and verified: Y N
exceptions:
Receiver liquid level probe calibrated: Y N
exceptions:
Pressure transducers operation verified:
exceptions:
All control boards set points,setup and programming complete: Y N
exceptions:
All controllers,bds.and accessory equipment installed per Controller Manufacturer's
specifications: Y N
exceptions:
All remote communications verified: Y N
exceptions:
All alarms properly reporting to auto dialer,remote alarm panel and properly performing
emergency
shutdown?: Y N
exceptions:
All watchdog circuitry operation simulated,tested and verified Y N
exceptions:
Person providing reporting and verifications(print name):
I certify that all test and procedures for the EMS equipment installation were performed and that all EMS
equipment is operating,controlling and monitoring as specified:
Signed:
Installing Company Name: Phone Number:
Street Address:
City/State:
NOTE:THIS FORM MUST BE COMPLETED IN FULL AND PROVIDED TO THE ENGINEER AND
WHOLE FOODS.
REFRIGERATION INSTALLATION 236395 -43
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
HVAC/Building Controller:
Controller ID#: Controller model:
All control boards and controllers properly labeled: Y N
exceptions:
All sensors(factory and field installed)tested and verified: Y N
exceptions:
Pressure transducers operation verified: Y N
exceptions:
All control boards set points,setup and programming complete: Y N
exceptions:
All controllers,bds. and accessory equipment installed per Controller Manufacturer's
specifications: Y N
exceptions:
All remote communications verified: Y N
exceptions:
All lighting override control points verified: Y N
exceptions:
All alarms properly reporting to auto dialer and remote alarm panel?: Y N
exceptions:
Person providing reporting and verifications(print name): .
I certify that all test and procedures for the EMS equipment installation were performed and that all EMS
equipment is operating,controlling and monitoring as specified:
Signed: .
Installing Company Name: Phone Number:
Street Address: .
City/ State: , .
NOTE: THIS FORM MUST BE COMPLETED IN FULL AND PROVIDED TO THE ENGINEER AND
WHOLE FOODS .
REFRIGERATION INSTALLATION 236395 -44
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85% PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
Case fixture anti-condensate heater controller:
Controller ID#: Controller model:
All control boards and controllers properly labeled: Y N
exceptions:
All sensors tested and verified: Y N
exceptions:
All control boards set points,setup and programming complete: Y N
exceptions:
All controllers,bds.and accessory equipment installed per Controller Manufacturer's
specifications: Y N
exceptions:
All remote communications verified: Y N
exceptions:
Person providing reporting and verifications(print name):
I certify that all test and procedures for the EMS equipment installation were performed and that all EMS
equipment is operating,controlling and monitoring as specified:
Signed:
Installing Company Name: Phone Number:
Street Address:
City/State:
NOTE:THIS FORM MUST BE COMPLETED IN FULL AND PROVIDED TO THE ENGINEER AND
WHOLE FOODS .
REFRIGERATION INSTALLATION 236395 -45
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
Refrigerant and CO2 Leak Detection:
Controller ID#: Controller model:
All control boards,controllers and enclosures properly labeled: Y N
exceptions:
All filters tested and verified: Y N
exceptions:
All sensing,purge and exhaust tubing installed: Y N
exceptions:
All control boards set points,setup and programming complete: Y N
exceptions:
All controllers,bds. and accessory equipment installed per Controller Manufacturer's
specifications: Y N
exceptions:
All remote communications verified,including fire alarm connection Y N
exceptions:
All leak detection alarms properly reporting to auto dial,remote alarm panel and properly
performing emergency shut down?: Y N
exceptions:
Person providing reporting and verifications(print name):
I certify that all test and procedures for the EMS equipment installation were performed and that all EMS
equipment is operating,controlling and monitoring as specified:
Signed:
Installing Company Name: Phone Number:
Street Address:
City/State: ,
NOTE:THIS FORM MUST BE COMPLETED IN FULL AND PROVIDED TO THE ENGINEER AND
WHOLE FOODS
REFRIGERATION INSTALLATION 236395 -46
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
Exhibit`A'
Refrigeration Policy
Whole Foods Company
The basis of this policy is"to reduce our negative impact on the environment" as part of our commitment
to our local and global communities. Refrigerants are necessary for us to maintain the highest product
quality possible. However, refrigerants can present environmental consequences if they are not
maintained properly.
There are three major categories of refrigerants in use today in Whole Foods systems. Two,
Chlorofluorocarbons (CFC) and Hydrochlorfluorocarbons (HCFC) are ozone depleters that have
termination dates set by the US EPA (2010 for CFC and 2020 for HCFC). The third category is Hydro
Fluorocarbons (HFC), which in many cases are being used to replace the CFC and HCFC compounds.
The HFC family of refrigerants are global warmers and they present their own set of issues. Despite their
negative impact,it is important to note that none of the refrigerants have any detrimental effects, if they
are contained in the system or collected for proper disposal or reclamation. This distinction is key to this
policy as well as EPA regulations that have been set forth.
General Policy
➢ A complete inventory of all company owned commercial refrigeration equipment is to be initiated
and maintained identifying the key components and the type of refrigerant in the system, the size
of the charge, other pertinent information and the service company charged with their care. (see
attached form)
➢ A maintenance log will be maintained tracking the use and losses of refrigerant for all systems.
The repair of the leak must be completed within 30 days and the service record filed and
maintained. If additional equipment or equipment replacement is required the thirty-day
requirement can be extended (one year without EPA notification) but the emission cannot
continue. The log and record of a repair is to be maintained for a period of three years. (see
attached form)
➢ Only authorized individuals (licensed by the EPA) are permitted to repair refrigeration
equipment. (see license example)
➢ All refrigerants, including that in equipment that is removed, disposed of or recycled, must be
disposed of in the method prescribed by the EPA.
➢ A copy of the above record of leaks and their repairs should be forwarded to Corporate
Headquarters,attention to the Director of Maintenance and Energy.
> Effective immediately equipment using CFC's(R-12 and R-502)will not be installed in any store
without the approval of the Senior Director of Facilities and Construction.
> As of January 1, 2009, all equipment still using CFC's will be scheduled for modification or
replacement. The company must be CFC free no later than December 31, 2009. Based on the
increasing price of R-12 and R-502,store directors may want to convert sooner,if the opportunity
presents itself.A policy regarding HCFC equipment will be initiated at the appropriate time.
➢ All new refrigeration equipment, not installed on an existing system will use an EPA approved
HFC gas,including but not limited to R-404A,R-410,R-134A or R-507.
The attached Refrigeration Policy(Exhibit `A')was written by Whole Foods and remains their Company
Policy. Review its contents,making certain all direction is clear as pertaining to refrigerants.
REFRIGERATION INSTALLATION 236395 -47
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
Exhibit`B'
WORK AUTHORIZATION PROCEDURES FOR OEM WARRANTY
1. All warranty work must be approved in advance,as long as the OEM can be reached(this refers to
mainly emergency service that affects loss of product).If work is approved,you will be issued a
work authorization number. All invoices submitted without a work authorization are subject to
denial. The following information is required for the issuance of a work authorization:
Store name
Store address
Model number
Serial number
Complete description of problem and correction
A"Not to exceed"estimate for repairs
2. In case of after hour's emergency,the OEM Technical Support Department shall provide 24/7
accessible phone number for approved repairs.Phone#
3. All invoices containing warranty parts not obtained from the OEM's Service Parts Department
must be accompanied by the wholesaler's invoice for reimbursement or will be replaced through
the OEM's Service Parts Department.All defective parts must be returned to the OEM if so
requested.
4. Labor to change DOA compressors to be paid with a teardown report from the compressor
manufacturer,attached with the invoice. (Note: Compressor must be factory defective before
labor will be paid).
5. All model and serial numbers must be included on your invoice, (for all deemed equipment
serviced). For compressor Warranty,the model and serial number of the unit the compressor was
located in,the model and serial number of the compressors—both old and new—must be
included.
6. Payment will be made from original invoices only. Copies will not be considered. All invoices
must be billed to the OEM.OEM will not pay a third party invoice.
7. If the Refrigeration Contractor receives a letter requesting more information,i.e.model,serial
number,etc,he shall be required to respond immediately. If a response is not received
immediately,the invoice will be considered denied.
8. Typically,all invoices without a work authorization will automatically be denied.
9. All invoices must be sent to OEM.
10. Labor to replace parts damaged in transit must be noted on the shipping bill before any labor
charges will be considered for payment.
END OF SECTION 236395
REFRIGERATION INSTALLATION 236395-48
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 237400-PACKAGED OUTDOOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the cooling and heating packaged outdoor HVAC equipment:
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical data for each model indicated, including rated
capacities, dimensions, required clearances, characteristics, furnished specialties, and
accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions,weights,loads,required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection. Prepare the following by or under the supervision of a qualified professional
engineer:
1. Wiring Diagrams: Power,signal,and control wiring.
C. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that packaged outdoor
HVAC equipments, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in
Division 23 Section"Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls." Include the following:
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of
assembled components or on calculation.
a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of
any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."
b. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of
any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the
unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate
and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based
and their installation requirements.
D. Field quality-control test reports.
PACKAGED OUTDOOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 237400- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For packaged outdoor HVAC equipment to include in
emergency,operation,and maintenance manuals.
F. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of packaged
outdoor HVAC equipment and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01
Section"Product Requirements."
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
C. ARI Certification: Units shall be ARI certified and listed.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items
are specified in Division 07 Section"Roof Accessories."
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace
components of packaged outdoor HVAC equipment that fail in materials or workmanship
within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period for Compressors: Manufacturer's standard,but not less than five years
from date of Substantial Completion.
2. Warranty Period for Heat Exchangers: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than 10
years from date of Substantial Completion.
3. Warranty Period for Solid-State Ignition Modules: Manufacturer's standard,but not less
than three years from date of Substantial Completion.
4. Warranty Period for Control Boards: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than three
years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 PACKAGED OUTDOOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
A. Manufacturers:
1. AAON,Inc.
2. Carrier Corp.
3. Engineered Air.
PACKAGED OUTDOOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 237400-2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
4. Lennox Industries Inc.
5. McQuay International.
6. Trane Company(The);North American Commercial Group.
7. YORK International Corporation.
B. Description: Factory assembled and tested; designed for exterior installation; consisting of
compressor, indoor and outside refrigerant coils, indoor fan and outside coil fan, refrigeration
and temperature controls,filters,and dampers.
C. Casing: Galvanized-steel construction with enamel paint finish, removable panels or access
doors with neoprene gaskets for inspection and access to internal parts,minimum 1/2-inch thick
thermal insulation, knockouts for electrical and piping connections, exterior condensate drain
connection,and lifting lugs.
D. Indoor Fan: Forward curved,centrifugal, directly driven by multispeed or belt driven by single-
speed motor.
E. Outside Coil Fan: Propeller type,directly driven by motor.
F. Refrigerant Coils: Aluminum-plate fin and seamless copper tube in steel casing with
equalizing-type vertical distributor.
G. Compressor: Hermetic reciprocating or scroll compressor with integral vibration isolators,
internal overcurrent and overtemperature protection and internal pressure relief.
H. Refrigeration System:
1. Compressor.
2. Outside coil and fan.
3. Indoor coil and fan.
4. Expansion valve with replaceable thermostatic element.
5. Refrigerant dryer.
6. High-pressure switch.
7. Low-pressure switch.
8. Thermostat for coil freeze-up protection during low-ambient temperature operation or
loss of air.
9. Low-ambient switch.
10. Brass service valves installed in discharge and liquid lines.
11. Charge of refrigerant.
12. Timed Off Control: Automatic-reset control shuts compressor off after five minutes.
13. Refrigerant Circuits: Interlaced refrigerant-coil circuiting with circuit for each
compressor.
14. Capacity Control for larger than 15 Ton Units: Hot-gas bypass valve and piping on one
compressor.
15. Compressor Motor Overload Protection: Manual reset.
16. Antirecycling Timing Device: Prevents compressor restart for five minutes after
shutdown.
17. Adjustable, Low-Ambient, Head-Pressure Control: Designed to operate at temperatures
as low as 0 deg F by cycling outside coil fans and controlling speed of last fan of each
circuit.
PACKAGED OUTDOOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 237400- 3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
18. Oil-Pressure Switch: Designed to shut down compressors on low oil pressure.
I. Filters: 2 inch or 1 inch thick,pleated,throwaway filters in filter rack.
J. Heat Exchanger: Stainless-steel construction for natural-gas-fired burners with the following
controls:
1. Redundant single or dual gas valve with manual shutoff.
2. Direct-spark pilot ignition.
3. Electronic flame sensor.
4. Induced-draft blower.
5. Flame rollout switch.
K. Economizer: Return-and outside-air dampers with neoprene seals,outside-air filter,and hood.
1. Damper Motor: Fully modulating spring return with adjustable minimum position.
2. Control: Electronic-control system uses outside-air temperature to adjust mixing
dampers.
3. Relief Damper: Gravity actuated with bird screen and hood.
L. Condenser Coil Hail Guards: Factory installed vinyl coated wire mesh guards.
M. Power Connection: Provide for single connection of power to unit with unit-mounted
disconnect switch accessible from outside unit and control-circuit transformer with built-in
circuit breaker.
N. Unit Controls: Solid-state control board and components contain at least the following features:
1. Indoor fan on/off delay.
2. Default control to ensure proper operation after power interruption.
3. Service relay output.
4. Unit diagnostics and diagnostic code storage.
5. Field-adjustable control parameters.
6. Defrost control.
7. Economizer control.
8. Gas valve delay between first-and second-stage firing.
9. Indoor-air quality control with carbon dioxide sensor.
10. Low-ambient control,allowing operation down to 0 deg F.
11. Minimum run time.
12. Return-air temperature limit.
13. Smoke alarm with smoke detector installed in return air.
14. Low-refrigerant pressure control.
O. Direct Digital Controls: Install stand-alone control module providing link between unit controls
and DDC system. Control module shall be compatible with temperature-control system
specified in Division 23 Section"HVAC Instrumentation and Controls."
P. Optional Accessories:
1. Cold-Weather Kit: Electric heater maintains temperature in gas burner compartment.
PACKAGED OUTDOOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 237400-4
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
2. Service Outlets: Two, 115-V,ground-fault,circuit-interrupter type.
3. Condensate drain trap.
4. Coil hail guards painted to match casing.
Q. Curb Adapter (Provide if alternate manufacturer, than what is scheduled, is supplied): Steel
with corrosion-protection coating, gasketing, internally insulated, built to match both
manufacturers'specifications.
2.2 MOTORS
A. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section"Motors."
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install units level and plumb,maintaining manufacturer's recommended clearances.
B. Curb Adapter(If alternate manufacturer,than what is scheduled,is supplied): Install roof curb
adapter on existing roof curb, level and secure, according to manufacturer's installation
instructions. Install and secure packaged outdoor HVAC equipment on curb adapters and
secure per ARI Guideline B.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping,fittings,and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.
1. Gas Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 23 Sections regarding fuel
gas piping. Connect gas piping to burner, full size of gas train inlet, and connect with
union and shutoff valve with sufficient clearance for burner removal and service.
C. Duct installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate
the general arrangement of ducts. The following are specific connection requirements:
1. Install ducts to termination in roof curb.
2. Remove roof decking only as required for passage of ducts. Do not cut out decking
under entire roof curb.
3. Connect supply ducts to rooftop unit with flexible duct connectors specified in Division
23 Section"Air Duct Accessories."
D. Electrical System Connections: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 26 Sections
for power wiring,switches,and motor controls.
PACKAGED OUTDOOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 237400-5
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85% PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
E. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
F. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-
tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated,use those specified in UL
486A and UL 486B.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following field quality-control tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. After installing packaged outdoor HVAC equipment and after electrical circuitry has
been energized,test units for compliance with requirements.
2. Inspect for and remove shipping bolts,blocks,and tie-down straps.
3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm
proper motor rotation and unit operation.
4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
B. Remove malfunctioning units,replace with new units,and retest as specified above.
3.4 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative,provided by equipment supplier,to perform
startup service. Contractor to schedule start-up following completion of RTU installation.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust initial temperature and humidity set points.
B. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.
END OF SECTION 237400
PACKAGED OUTDOOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 237400-6
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 237433 -DEDICATED OUTDOOR-AIR UNITS
PART I -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes factory-packaged units capable of supplying up to 100 percent outdoor air and
providing heating only and cooling and heating.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans,elevations,sections,and attachment details.
C. Startup service reports.
D. Sample warranty.
1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and maintenance data.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to replace components of units that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period for Compressors: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
2. Warranty Period for Heat Exchangers: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements. Units supplying cooking hoods shall
match its manufacturer shall match that of the cooking hood manufacturer selected. Provide
product by one of the following for the sales floor unit:
1. AAON.
2. Addison.
3. Captive-Aire Systems.
4. Desert Aire.
DEDICATED OUTDOOR-AIR UNITS 237433 - 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
5. Engineered Air.
6. Greenheck.
7. LCSystems.
8. Munters Corporation,Dehumidification Division;Des Champs Products.
9. Thomas&Betts Corporation;Reznor HVAC Division.
10. Trane.
2.2 CABINET
A. Construction:double wall.
B. Exterior Casing Material:Galvanized steel with paint finish.
C. Interior Casing Material: Galvanized steel.
D. Lifting and Handling Provisions:Factory-installed shipping skids and lifting lugs.
E. Base Rails:Galvanized-steel rails for mounting on roof curb or pad as indicated.
F. Access for Inspection, Cleaning, and Maintenance: Comply with requirements in
ASHRAE 62.1.
1. Service Doors: Hinged access doors with gaskets. Material and construction of doors
shall match material and construction of cabinet in which doors are installed.
G. Cabinet Insulation:
1. Type:Fibrous-glass duct lining complying with ASTM C 1071,Type II.
2. Thickness: 1 inch.
3. Insulation Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916,-'Type I.
4. Mechanical Fasteners: Suitable for adhesive,mechanical,or welding attachment to casing
without damaging liner and without causing air leakage when applied as recommended
by manufacturer.
H. Surfaces in Contact with Airstream: Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1 for resistance
to mold and erosion.
2.3 Curb Adapter (Provide if alternate manufacturer, than what is scheduled, is supplied): Steel
with corrosion-protection coating, gasketing, internally insulated, built to match both
manufacturers'specifications.
A. Forward-Curved Fan Type:Centrifugal;statically and dynamically balanced.
1. Fan Wheel Material:Galvanized steel,mounted on solid-steel shaft.
2. Bearings: Self-aligning, permanently lubricated ball bearings or pillow-block bearings
rated L50 for 200,000 hours and having external grease fittings.
B. Motors:
DEDICATED OUTDOOR-AIR UNITS 237433-2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, and efficiency
requirements for motors specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for
HVAC Equipment."
2. Enclosure:Open dripproof.
3. Efficiency: Premium efficient.
C. Mounting: Fan wheel, motor, and drives shall be mounted to fan casing with restrained,
elastomeric or spring isolators.
2.4 COOLING COILS
A. Capacity Ratings:Comply with ASHRAE 33 and ARI 410.
B. Coil Casing Material: Manufacturer's standard material.
C. Tube Material: Copper.
D. Fin Material:Aluminum or copper.
E. Fin and Tube Joints: Mechanical bond.
F. Leak Test:Coils shall be leak tested with air underwater.
G. Refrigerant Coil Suction and Distributor Header Materials: Seamless copper tube with brazed
joints.
2.5 REFRIGERATION SYSTEM
A. Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 15,"Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems."
B. Refrigerant Charge:Factory charged with refrigerant and filled with oil.
C. Compressors: Reciprocating or scroll compressors with integral vibration isolators, internal
overcurrent and overtemperature protection,internal pressure relief,and crankcase heater.
D. Refrigerant:R-410A.
1. Classified as Safety Group Al according to ASHRAE 34.
2. Provide unit with operating charge of refrigerant.
E. Refrigeration System Specialties:
1. Expansion valve with replaceable thermostatic element.
2. Refrigerant dryer.
3. High-pressure switch.
4. Low-pressure switch.
5. Thermostat for coil freeze-up protection during low ambient temperature operation or
loss of air.
6. Brass service valves installed in discharge and liquid lines.
DEDICATED OUTDOOR-AIR UNITS 237433-3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
F. Capacity Control:
1. Hot-gas bypass refrigerant control for capacity control with continuous dehumidification
on a single compressor.
G. Refrigerant Condenser Coils:
1. Capacity Ratings: Complying with ASHRAE 33 and ARI 410 and coil bearing the ARI
label.
2. Tube Material:Copper.
3. Fin Material: Aluminum.
4. Fin and Tube Joint: Mechanical bond.
5. Leak Test: Coils shall be leak tested with air underwater.
6. Coating: Phenolic epoxy corrosion-protection coating after assembly.
H. Condenser Hot Gas Reheat coil:
1. Capacity Ratings: Complying with ASHRAE 33 and ARI 410 and coil bearing the ARI
label.
2. Tube Material: Copper.
3. Fin Material:Aluminum.
4. Fin and Tube Joint: Mechanical bond.
5. Leak Test: Coils shall be leak tested with air underwater.
6. Coating: Phenolic epoxy corrosion-protection coating after assembly.
I. Condenser Fan Assembly:
1. Fans: Direct-drive propeller type with statically and dynamically balanced fan blades.
2. Fan Motors:
a. Comply with NEMA designation,temperature rating, service factor, and efficiency
requirements for motors specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor
Requirements for HVAC Equipment."
b. Motor Enclosure: Totally enclosed non-ventilating (TENV) or totally enclosed air
over(TEAO)enclosure.
c. Motor Bearings: Permanently lubricated bearings.
d. Built-in overcurrent and thermal-overload protection.
e. Efficiency: Premium efficient.
3. Fan Safety Guards: Steel with corrosion-resistant coating.
J. Safety Controls:
1. Compressor motor and condenser coil fan motor low ambient lockout.
2. Overcurrent protection for compressor motor.
DEDICATED OUTDOOR-AIR UNITS 237433 -4
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
2.6 DIRECT-FIRED GAS BURNER
A. Description: Factory assembled, piped, and wired; and complying with ANSI Z21.47, "Gas-
Fired Central Furnaces,"and with NFPA 54,"National Fuel Gas Code."
1. CSA Approval: Designed and certified by and bearing label of CSA.
2. Burners: Aluminized steel with stainless-steel inserts.
a. Gas Control Valve:Modulating.
b. Fuel:Natural gas.
c. Minimum Combustion Efficiency: 80 percent.
d. Ignition: Electronically controlled electric spark with flame sensor.
B. Safety Controls:
1. Vent Flow Verification:Flame rollout switch.
2. Control Transformer:24-V ac.
3. High Limit:Thermal switch or fuse to stop burner.
4. Gas Train: Regulated, redundant, 24-V ac gas valve assembly containing pilot solenoid
valve, electronic-modulating temperature control valve, pilot filter, pressure regulator,
pilot shutoff,and manual shutoff all in one body.
5. Purge-period timer shall automatically delay burner ignition and bypass low-limit
control.
6. Gas Manifold: Safety switches and controls complying with ANSI standards.
7. Airflow Proving Switch: Differential pressure switch senses correct airflow before
energizing pilot.
8. Automatic-Reset, High-Limit Control Device: Stops burner and closes main gas valve if
high-limit temperature is exceeded.
9. Safety Lockout Switch: Locks out ignition sequence if burner fails to light after three
tries.Controls are reset manually by turning the unit off and on.
2.7 OUTDOOR-AIR INTAKE HOOD
A. Type: Manufacturer's standard hood or louver.
B. Materials:Match cabinet.
C. Bird Screen: Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.
D. Configuration:Designed to inhibit wind-driven rain and snow from entering unit.
2.8 FILTERS
A. Disposable Panel Filters:
1. Comply with NFPA 90A.
2. Factory-fabricated,viscous-coated,flat-panel type.
3. Thickness: 2 inches.
DEDICATED OUTDOOR-AIR UNITS 237433-5
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
4. Minimum Merv:8,according to ASHRAE 52.2.
B. Mounting Frames:
1. Panel filters arranged for flat or angular orientation, with access doors on both sides of
unit.Filters shall be removable from one side or from access plenum.
2.9 CONTROLS
A. Control Wiring: Factory wire connection for controls'power supply.
B. Control Devices: Sensors, transmitters, relays, switches, detectors, operators, actuators, and
valves shall be manufacturer's standard items to accomplish indicated control functions.
C. Unit-Mounted Status Panel:
1. Cooling/Off/Heating Controls:Control operational mode.
2. Damper Position: Indicate position of outdoor-air dampers in terms of percentage of
outdoor air.
3. Status Lights:
a. Filter dirty.
b. Fan operating.
c. Cooling operating.
d. Heating operating.
e. Dehumidification operating.
D. Control Dampers:
1. Damper Location: Factory installed inside unit for ease of blade axle and bushing service.
Arrange dampers located in a mixing box to achieve convergent airflow to minimize
stratification.
2. Damper Leakage: Comply with requirements in AMCA 500-D. Leakage shall not exceed
6.5 cfm per sq. ft. at a static-pressure differential of 4.0 inches water column when a
torque of 5 inch pounds per sq.ft.is applied to the damper jackshaft.
3. Damper Rating:Rated for close-off pressure equal to the fan shutoff pressure.
4. Damper Label: Bear the AMCA seal for both air leakage and performance.
5. Blade Configuration: Unless otherwise indicated, use parallel blade configuration for
two-position control and equipment isolation service and use modulating control when
mixing two airstreams.For other applications,use an opposed-blade configuration.
6. Damper Frame Material: Extruded aluminum,galvanized steel or stainless steel.
7. Blade Type: Single-thickness metal reinforced with multiple V-grooves or hollow-shaped
airfoil.
8. Blade Material: Extruded aluminum,galvanized steel or stainless steel.
9. Maximum Blade Width:6 inches.
10. Maximum Blade Length:48 inches.
11. Blade Seals: Replaceable,continuous perimeter vinyl seals and jambs with stainless-steel
compression-type seals.
12. Bearings:Thrust bearings for vertical blade axles.
DEDICATED OUTDOOR-AIR UNITS 237433-6
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
E. Damper Operators:
1. Factory-installed electric operator for each damper assembly with one operator for each
damper assembly mounted to the damper frame.
2. Operator capable of shutoff against fan pressure and able to operate the damper with
sufficient reserve power to achieve smooth modulating action and proper speed of
response at the velocity and pressure conditions to which the damper is subjected.
3. Maximum Operating Time: Open or close damper 90 degrees in 60 seconds.
4. Adjustable Stops: For both maximum and minimum positions.
5. Position Indicator and Graduated Scale: Factory installed on each actuator with words
"OPEN"and"CLOSED,"or similar identification,at travel limits.
6. Spring-return operator to fail-safe;either closed or open as required by application.
7. Operator Type: Direct coupled,designed for minimum 60,000 full-stroke cycles at rated
torque.
8. Position feedback Signal:For remote monitoring of damper position.
9. Coupling: V-bolt and V-shaped,toothed cradle.
10. Circuitry:Electronic overload or digital rotation-sensing circuitry.
F. Refrigeration System Controls:
1. Unit-mounted enthalpy controller shall lock out refrigerant system when temperature is
less than 70 deg F.
G. Furnace Controls:
1. Factory-mounted sensor in supply outlet with sensor adjustment located in control panel
to modulate gas furnace burner to maintain space temperature.
2. Electromechanical or Electronic Burner Control: 20 to 100 percent modulation of the
firing rate; 10 to 100 percent with dual-furnace units.
H. PLC Temperature Control: Standalone control module for link between unit controls and DDC-
temperature-control system. Control module shall be compatible with control system specified
in Section 230900"Instrumentation and Control for HVAC." Links shall include the following:
1. Start/stop interface relay, and relay to notify DDC temperature-control system alarm
condition.
2.10 ACCESSORIES
A. Duplex Receptacle: Factory mounted in unit, with 20 amp 120 V GFI duplex receptacles and
weatherproof cover.
DEDICATED OUTDOOR-AIR UNITS 237433-7
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's rigging and installation instructions for unloading units and
moving to final locations.
B. Roof Curb Adapter(Provide if alternate manufacturer, than specified, is supplied): Install curb
adapter on roof curb and secure per manufacturer's recommendations.
C. Comply with requirements for gas-fired furnace installation in NFPA 54, "National Fuel Gas
Code."
D. Install separate devices furnished by manufacturer and not factory installed.
E. Install new filters at completion of equipment installation and before testing, adjusting, and
balancing.
F. Install drain pipes from unit drain pans to sanitary drain.
1. Drain Piping: Drawn-temper copper water tubing complying with ASTM B 88, Type L,
with soldered joints.
2. Drain Piping: Schedule 40 PVC pipe complying with ASTM D 1785, with solvent-
welded fittings.
a. PVC solvent cement shall have a VOC content of 510 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59,Subpart D(EPA Method 24).
b. Adhesive primer shall have a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59,Subpart D(EPA Method 24).
c. Solvent cement and adhesive primer shall comply with the testing and product
requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice
for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-
Scale Environmental Chambers."
3. Pipe Size: Same size as condensate drain pan connection.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Where installing piping adjacent to units,allow space for service and maintenance.
B. Gas Piping Connections:
1. Comply with requirements in Section 231123 "Facility Natural-Gas Piping."
2. Connect gas piping to furnace, full size of gas train inlet, and connect with union and
shutoff valve with sufficient clearance for burner removal and service.
3. Install AGA-approved flexible connectors.
C. Duct Connections:
DEDICATED OUTDOOR-AIR UNITS 237433 -8
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1. Comply with requirements in Section 233113"Metal Ducts."
2. Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts.
3. Connect ducts to units with flexible duct connectors. Comply with requirements for
flexible duct connectors in Section 233300"Air Duct Accessories."
D. Electrical Connections: Comply with requirements for power wiring, switches, and motor
controls in electrical Sections.
1. Install electrical devices furnished by unit manufacturer but not factory mounted.
3.3 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Perform startup service.
1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Inspect units for visible damage to furnace combustion chamber.
3. Perform the following operations for both minimum and maximum firing and adjust
burner for peak efficiency:
a. Measure gas pressure at manifold.
b. Measure combustion-air temperature at inlet to combustion chamber.
c. Measure flue-gas temperature at furnace discharge.
d. Perform flue-gas analysis. Measure and record flue-gas carbon dioxide and oxygen
concentration.
e. Measure supply-air temperature and volume when burner is at maximum firing
rate and when burner is off.Calculate useful heat to supply air.
4. Inspect units for visible damage to refrigerant compressor, condenser and evaporator
coils,and fans.
5. Start refrigeration system when outdoor-air temperature is within normal operating limits
and measure and record the following:
a. Cooling coil leaving-air,dry-and wet-bulb temperatures.
b. Cooling coil entering-air,dry-and wet-bulb temperatures.
c. Condenser coil entering-air dry-bulb temperature.
d. Condenser coil leaving-air dry-bulb temperature.
6. Simulate maximum cooling demand and inspect the following:
a. Compressor refrigerant suction and hot-gas pressures.
b. Short-circuiting of air through outside coil or from outside coil to outdoor-air
intake.
7. Inspect casing insulation for integrity,moisture content,and adhesion.
8. Verify that clearances have been provided for servicing.
9. Verify that controls are connected and operable.
10. Verify that filters are installed.
11. Clean coils and inspect for construction debris.
12. Clean furnace flue and inspect for construction debris.
DEDICATED OUTDOOR-AIR UNITS 237433-9
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
13. Inspect operation of power vents.
14. Purge gas line.
15. Inspect and adjust vibration isolators and seismic restraints.
16. Verify bearing lubrication.
17. Clean fans and inspect fan-wheel rotation for movement in correct direction without
vibration and binding.
18. Adjust fan belts to proper alignment and tension.
19. Start unit.
20. Inspect and record performance of interlocks and protective devices including response to
smoke detectors by fan controls and fire alarm.
21. Operate unit for run-in period.
22. Calibrate controls.
23. Adjust and inspect high-temperature limits.
24. Inspect outdoor-air dampers for proper stroke.
25. Verify operational sequence of controls.
26. Measure and record the following airflows.Plot fan volumes on fan curve.
a. Supply-air volume.
b. Outdoor-air flow.
B. After startup,change filters,verify bearing lubrication,and adjust belt tension.
C. Remove and replace components that do not properly operate and repeat startup procedures as
specified above.
D. Prepare written report of the results of startup services.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust initial temperature and humidity set points.
B. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.
END OF SECTION 237433
DEDICATED OUTDOOR-AIR UNITS 237433- 10
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 238126-SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS
PART I -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes split-system air-conditioning and heat pump units consisting of separate
evaporator-fan and compressor-condenser components. Units are designed for exposed or
concealed mounting,and may be connected to ducts.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each type of
product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power,signal,and control wiring.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For split-system air-conditioning units to include in
operation and maintenance manuals.
D. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases for units. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place
Concrete."
B. Coordinate size, location, and connection details with roof curbs,equipment supports, and roof
penetrations specified in Division 07 Section"Roof Accessories."
SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS 238126- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1.6 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other
rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in
addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements
of the Contract Documents.
B. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of split-system air-conditioning units that fail in materials or workmanship
within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period-Compressors: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Carrier Air Conditioning;Div.of Carrier Corporation.
2. Friedrich Air Conditioning Company.
3. Koldwave,Inc.
4. Lennox Industries Inc.
5. Mitsubishi Electronics America,Inc.;HVAC Division.
6. Trane Company(The); Unitary Products Group.
7. York International Corp.
2.2 WALL EVAPORATOR-FAN COMPONENTS
A. Cabinet: Enameled steel with removable panels on front and ends in color selected by
Architect,and discharge drain pans with drain connection.
B. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with
ARI 210/240,and with thermal-expansion valve.
C. Fan: Direct drive,centrifugal fan.
D. Fan Motors:
1. Special Motor Features: Multitapped, multispeed with internal thermal protection and
permanent lubrication.
E. Filters: Permanent,cleanable.
SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS 238126-2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
2.3 AIR-COOLED,COMPRESSOR-CONDENSER COMPONENTS
A. Casing: Steel, finished with baked enamel with removable panels for access to controls, weep
holes for water drainage,and mounting holes in base. Provide brass service valves,fittings,and
gage ports on exterior of casing.
B. Compressor: Hermetically sealed with crankcase heater and mounted on vibration isolation.
Compressor motor shall have thermal- and current-sensitive overload devices, start capacitor,
relay,and contactor.
1. Compressor Type: Scroll.
2. Two-speed compressor motor with manual-reset high-pressure switch and automatic-
reset low-pressure switch.
C. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with ARI
210/240,and with liquid subcooler.
D. Heat Pump Components: Reversing valve and low-temperature air cut-off thermostat.
E. Fan: Aluminum-propeller type,directly connected to motor. -
F. Motor: Permanently lubricated,with integral thermal-overload protection.
G. Low Ambient Kit: Permits operation down to 32 deg F.
H. Mounting Base: Polyethylene.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Thermostat: Wireless infrared functioning to remotely control compressor and evaporator fan,
with the following features:
1. Compressor time delay.
2. 24-hour time control of system stop and start.
3. Liquid-crystal display indicating temperature, set-point temperature, time setting,
operating mode,and fan speed.
4. Fan-speed selection,including auto setting.
B. Automatic-reset timer to prevent rapid cycling of compressor.
C. Refrigerant Line Kits: Soft-annealed copper suction and liquid lines factory cleaned, dried, —
pressurized,and sealed;factory-insulated suction line with flared fittings at both ends.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install units level and plumb.
SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS 238126-3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85% PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
B. Install evaporator-fan components using manufacturer's standard mounting devices securely
fastened to building structure.
C. Install roof-mounting compressor-condenser components on equipment supports specified in
Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories." Anchor units to supports with removable, cadmium-
plated fasteners.
D. Install and connect precharged refrigerant tubing to component's quick-connect fittings. Install
tubing to allow access to unit.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other related Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping,fittings,and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to unit to allow service and maintenance.
C. Unless otherwise indicated, connect piping with unions and shutoff valves to allow units to be
disconnected without draining piping. Refer to piping system Sections for specific valve and
specialty arrangements.
D. Ground equipment.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect,
test,and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections,
and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.
END OF SECTION 238126
SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS 238126-4
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 238315 -QUARTZ ELECTRIC INFRARED HEATERS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes suspended quartz electric infrared heaters listed for totally exposed
(outdoor)and indoor spot heating applications.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and
accessories.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 QUARTZ ELECTRIC INFRARED HEATERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Solaira,Inforesight Consumer Products,Inc.
B. Housing: 1.5 mm 6063 aircraft aluminum, epoxy powder coated listed for indoor and outdoor
use. Wall or ceiling hung.
C. Reflectors and End Caps: 0.8 mm anodized aluminum,99.9 percent reflectivity.
D. Elements: Quartz tubes. Tubular quartz with tungsten coil, glare reducing, thermal shock
resistant for outdoor use.
E. Electrical Enclosure: Waterproof attached to fixture.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install infrared heaters level. Adjust horizontal tilt to center reflector pattern at work areas.
QUARTZ ELECTRIC INFRARED HEATERS 238315- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following field tests and inspections.
1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm
proper unit operation.
2. Operate electric heating elements through full range to verify proper operation and
electrical connections.
3. Test and adjust controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
B. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
END OF SECTION 238315
QUARTZ ELECTRIC INFRARED HEATERS 238315-2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 260500-COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
PART I -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Electrical equipment coordination and installation.
2. Sleeves for raceways and cables.
3. Sleeve seals.
4. Grout.
5. Common electrical installation requirements.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
B. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate arrangement,mounting,and support of electrical equipment:
1. To allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights that reduce
headroom are indicated.
2. To provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum interference to other
installations.
3. To allow right of way for piping and conduit installed at required slope.
4. So connecting raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways will be clear of
obstructions and of the working and access space of other equipment.
B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete,
masonry walls,and other structural components as they are constructed.
C. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are behind finished
surfaces or otherwise concealed. Provide access doors and panels as required to meet N.E.C.
requirements.
D. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 260500- I
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS AND CABLES
A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M,Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel,plain
ends.
2.2 GROUT
A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic
aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for
application and a 30-minute working time.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 - COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1.
B. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit
for wall-mounting items.
C. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated,
arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom
consistent with these requirements.
D. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components
of both electrical equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to
facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity.
E. Right of Way: Give to piping systems installed at a required slope.
3.2 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A. Electrical penetrations occur when raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, or busways
penetrate concrete slabs,concrete or masonry walls,or fire-rated floor and wall assemblies.
B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed
openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.
C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.
D. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies
unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor
or wall.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 260500-2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
E. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls.
F. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level.
G. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or cable,
unless indicated otherwise.
H. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry
1. Promptly pack grout solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed
surfaces smooth;protect grout while curing.
I. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve
and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.
Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section"Joint Sealants."
J. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions,ceilings,
and floors at raceway and cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal raceway and cable
penetration sleeves with firestop materials.
K. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible
boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.
L. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and
mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe
and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
M. Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow
for 1-inch annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing mechanical
sleeve seals.
3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION
A. Install to seal exterior wall penetrations.
B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable
material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve
seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against
pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
3.4 FIRESTOPPING
A. Apply firestopping to penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies for electrical
installations to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly.
END OF SECTION 260500
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 260500-3
I
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 260519-LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less.
2. Connectors,splices,and terminations rated 600 V and less.
3. Sleeves and sleeve seals for cables.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
B. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they
are constructed.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following:
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85% PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1. Alcan Products Corporation;Alcan Cable Division.
2. American Insulated Wire Corp.;a Leviton Company.
3. General Cable Corporation.
4. Senator Wire&Cable Company.
5. Southwire Company.
B. Aluminum and Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70.
C. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for Types THW, THHN-THWN, XHHW
and SO.
D. Multiconductor Cable: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for metal-clad cable, Type MC and Type
SO with ground wire.
2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following:
1. AFC Cable Systems,Inc.
2. Hubbell Power Systems,Inc.
3. O-Z/Gedney;EGS Electrical Group LLC.
4. 3M;Electrical Products Division.
5. Tyco Electronics Corp.
B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size,ampacity rating,material, type,
and class for application and service indicated.
2.3 SLEEVES FOR CABLES
A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M,Type E,Grade B, Schedule 40,galvanized steel,plain
ends.
B. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe,
with plain ends and integral waterstop,unless otherwise indicated.
C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel with minimum 0.052-or 0.138-inch
thickness as indicated and of length to suit application.
D. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping
specified in Division 07 Section"Penetration Firestopping."
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS
A. Feeders: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller;stranded for No.8 AWG and larger.
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519-2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and
larger.
3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND
WIRING METHODS
A. Service Entrance: Type THHN-THWN,single conductors in raceway.
B. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway, or metal-clad cable,
Type MC where indicated on Drawings.
C. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN,
single conductors in raceway,or Type MC where indicated on Drawings.
D. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN-
THWN,single conductors in raceway.
E. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN,single conductors in
raceway. -
F. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-THWN, single
conductors in raceway,or metal-clad cable,Type MC.
G. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground:
Type THHN-THWN,single conductors in raceway.
H. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord with stainless-
steel,wire-mesh,strain relief device at terminations to suit application.
I. Class 1 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN,in raceway.
J. Class 2 Control Circuits: Power-limited cable,concealed in building finishes.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Conceal cables in finished walls,ceilings,and floors,unless otherwise indicated.
B. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used
must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended
maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.
C. Use pulling means,including fish tape,cable,rope,and basket-weave wire/cable grips,that will
not damage cables or raceway.
D. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members,and
follow surface contours where possible.
E. Support cables according to Division 26 Section"Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519-3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
F. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 26 Section "Identification
for Electrical Systems."
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-
tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
UL 486A and UL 486B.
B. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent
or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.
C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet,with at least 6 inches of slack.
3.5 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping
specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed
openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.
C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.
D. Rectangular Sleeve Minimum Metal Thickness:
1. For sleeve rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and no side greater than 16 inches,
thickness shall be 0.052 inch.
2. For sleeve rectangle perimeter equal to, or greater than, 50 inches and 1 or more sides
equal to,or greater than, 16 inches,thickness shall be 0.138 inch.
E. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies
unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor
or wall.
F. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both wall surfaces.
G. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level.
H. Site pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and cable unless sleeve
seal is to be installed or unless seismic criteria require different clearance.
1. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry and with
approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies.
J. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve
and cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint according to
Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519-4
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
K. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions,ceilings,
and floors at cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal with firestop materials according to
Division 07 Section"Penetration Firestopping."
L. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual cables with flexible boot-type flashing
units applied in coordination with roofing work.
M. Aboveground Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical
sleeve seals. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for
installing mechanical sleeve seals.
N. Underground Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Size
sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between cable and sleeve for installing
mechanical sleeve seals.
3.6 FIRESTOPPING
A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore
original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Division 07 Section "Penetration -
Firestopping."
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
END OF SECTION 260519
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519-5
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 260526-GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes methods and materials for grounding systems and equipment.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUCTORS
A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by
applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Bare Copper Conductors:
1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3.
2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.
3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33.
4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch in diameter.
5. Bonding Conductor: No.4 or No. 6 AWG,stranded conductor.
6. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors, terminated with copper ferrules; 1-
5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.
7. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors, terminated with
copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.
C. Grounding Bus: Rectangular bars of annealed copper, 1/4 by 2 inches in cross section, unless
otherwise indicated;with insulators.
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
2.2 CONNECTORS
A. Listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction for applications in which used, and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of
conductors and other items connected.
B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, bolted pressure-type,
with at least two bolts.
1. Pipe Connectors: Clamp type,sized for pipe.
C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for
materials being joined and installation conditions.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATIONS
A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for
No.6 AWG and larger,unless otherwise indicated.
B. Isolated Grounding Conductors: Green-colored insulation with continuous yellow stripe. On
feeders with isolated ground, identify grounding conductor where visible to normal inspection,
with alternating bands of green and yellow tape, with at least three bands of green and two
bands of yellow.
C. Conductor Terminations and Connections:
1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors.
2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors,except as otherwise indicated.
3. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.
3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING
A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise
indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may
be subjected to strain,impact,or damage.
B. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance,
except where routed through short lengths of conduit.
1. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install so
vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526-2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
C. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:
1. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water
meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector.
2. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment
shutoff valve.
END OF SECTION 260526
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526-3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 260529-HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.
2. Construction requirements for concrete bases.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.
B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.
C. RMC: Rigid metal conduit.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,
reinforcement,and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 SUPPORT,ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field
assembly.
IHANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Allied Tube&Conduit.
b. Cooper B-Line,Inc.;a division of Cooper Industries.
c. ERICO International Corporation.
d. GS Metals Corp.
e. Thomas&Betts Corporation.
f. Unistrut;Tyco International,Ltd.
g. Wesanco,Inc.
2. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to
MFMA-4.
3. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.
B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.
C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed
for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.
D. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of
threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or
cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number,size,and shape of conductor gripping pieces
as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron.
E. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates,
shapes,and bars;black and galvanized.
F. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or
their supports to building surfaces include the following:
1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement f
concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for
supported loads and building materials where used. t
a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not
limited to,the following:
1) Hilti Inc. _
2) ITW Ramset/Red Head;a division of Illinois Tool Works,Inc.
3) MKT Fastening,LLC.
4) Simpson Strong-Tie Co.,Inc.;Masterset Fastening Systems Unit.
2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in
hardened portland cement concrete with tension,shear,and pullout capacities appropriate
for supported loads and building materials in which used.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529-2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not
limited to,the following:
1) Cooper B-Line,Inc.;a division of Cooper Industries.
2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co.,Inc.
3) Hilti Inc.
4) TTW Ramset/Red Head;a division of Illinois Tool Works,Inc.
5) MKT Fastening,LLC.
3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS
Type 18;complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.
4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for
attached structural element.
5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with
ASTM A 325.
6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.
7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical
equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.
B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for
EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in
diameter.
C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted support
system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding
specified design load limits.
1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with single-bolt conduit clamps using
spring friction action for retention in support channel.
3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this
Article.
B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and
RMC may be supported by openings through structure members,as permitted in NFPA 70.
C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength
will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529-3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported
components plus 200 lb.
D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten 1
electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods i
unless otherwise indicated by code:
1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.
2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.
3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor
fasteners on solid masonry units.
4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.
5. To Steel: Beam clamps(MSS Type 19,21,23,25,or 27)complying with MSS SP-69.
6. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.
7. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,
panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes,
transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate by means
that meet seismic-restraint strength and anchorage requirements.
E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing
bars.
3.3 CONCRETE BASES
II+
A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches larger in both
directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from
edge of the base. l
I
B. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete. Concrete materials, reinforcement, and
placement requirements are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
C. Anchor equipment to concrete base.
1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting
drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be
embedded.
2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.
3.4 PAINTING
A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately
after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply
with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.
1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529-4
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply
galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 260529
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529-5
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 260533-RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes raceways,fittings,boxes,enclosures,and cabinets for electrical wiring.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.
B. ENT: Electrical nonmetallic tubing.
C. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
D. FMC: Flexible metal conduit.
E. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.
F. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.
G. LFNC: Liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit.
H. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.
I. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following:
1. AFC Cable Systems,Inc.
2. Alflex Inc.
3. Allied Tube&Conduit;a Tyco International Ltd.Co.
4. Anamet Electrical,Inc.;Anaconda Metal Hose.
5. Electri-Flex Co.
6. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex.
7. Maverick Tube Corporation.
8. O-Z Gedney;a unit of General Signal.
9. Wheatland Tube Company.
B. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.
C. IMC: ANSI C80.6.
D. EMT: ANSI C80.3.
E. FMC: Zinc-coated steel.
F. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket.
G. Fittings for Conduit (Including all Types and Flexible and Liquidtight), EMT, and Cable:
NEMA FB 1; listed for type and size raceway with which used, and for application and
environment in which installed. -
1. Fittings for EMT: Steel,set-screw or compression type.
2. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness, 0.040 inch, with
overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints.
H. Joint Compound for Rigid Steel Conduit or IMC: Listed for use in cable connector assemblies,
and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded raceway joints from corrosion and
enhance their conductivity.
2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following:
1. AFC Cable Systems,Inc.
2. Anamet Electrical,Inc.;Anaconda Metal Hose.
3. Arnco Corporation.
4. CANTEX Inc.
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533-2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
5. CertainTeed Corp.;Pipe&Plastics Group.
6. Condux International,Inc.
7. E1ecSYS,Inc.
8. Electri-Flex Co.
9. Lamson& Sessions;Carlon Electrical Products.
10. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex.
11. RACO;a Hubbell Company.
12. Thomas&Betts Corporation.
B. RNC: NEMA TC 2,Type EPC-40-PVC,unless otherwise indicated.
C. LFNC: UL 1660.
D. Fittings for RNC: NEMA TC 3;match to conduit or tubing type and material.
E. Fittings for LFNC: UL 514B.
2.3 METAL WIREWAYS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following:
1. Cooper B-Line,Inc.
2. Hoffman.
3. Square D; Schneider Electric.
B. Description: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated, NEMA 250, Type 1, unless otherwise
indicated.
C. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-
down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for
complete system.
D. Wireway Covers: Screw-cover type.
E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.
2.4 BOXES,ENCLOSURES,AND CABINETS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following:
1. Cooper Crouse-Hinds;Div.of Cooper Industries,Inc.
2. EGS/Appleton Electric.
3. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company.
4. Hoffman.
5. Hubbell Incorporated;Killark Electric Manufacturing Co.Division.
6. O-Z/Gedney;a unit of General Signal.
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533-3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
7. RACO;a Hubbell Company.
8. Robroy Industries,Inc.;Enclosure Division.
9. Scott Fetzer Co.;Adalet Division.
10. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company.
11. Thomas&Betts Corporation.
12. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company(The).
13. Woodhead,Daniel Company; Woodhead Industries,Inc. Subsidiary.
B. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
C. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD, with gasketed
cover.
D. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 2.
E. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
F. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1, galvanized,cast iron with gasketed
cover.
G. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch,
unless otherwise indicated.
1. Metal Enclosures: Steel,finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.
H. Cabinets:
1. NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable
front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.
2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge.
3. Key latch to match panelboards.
4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage.
5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION
A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below,unless otherwise indicated:
1. Exposed Conduit: Rigid steel conduit.
2. Concealed Conduit,Aboveground: EMT.
3. Underground Conduit: RNC,Type EPC-80-PVC,direct buried.
4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,
Electric Solenoid,or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC.
5. Boxes and Enclosures,Aboveground: NEMA 250,Type 3R.
B. Comply with the following indoor applications,unless otherwise indicated:
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 -4
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85% PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1. Exposed,Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT.
2. Exposed,Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT.
3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: Rigid steel conduit. Includes
raceways in the following locations:
a. Loading dock.
b. Corridors used for traffic of mechanized carts,forklifts,and pallet-handling units.
4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT.
5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,
Electric Solenoid,or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC,except use LFMC in damp or wet
locations.
6. Damp or Wet Locations: Rigid steel conduit.
7. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4, stainless
steel in damp or wet locations.
C. Minimum Raceway Size: 1/2-inch trade size.
D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.
I. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless
otherwise indicated.
2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with that
material. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing
conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements applicable to products specified in Part 2
except where requirements on Drawings or in this Article are stricter.
B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes.
Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.
C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.
D. Support raceways as specified in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical
Systems."
E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab.
F. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise
indicated.
G. Raceways Embedded in Slabs:
I. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main
reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab
support.
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533-5
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion
fittings.
H. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply
listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound
manufacturer's written instructions.
I. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not
less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire.
J. Install raceway sealing fittings at suitable,approved,and accessible locations and fill them with
listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways,install each fitting in a flush steel box with a
blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway
sealing fittings at the following points:
1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated
spaces.
2. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.
K. Flexible Conduit Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for equipment
subject to vibration,noise transmission,or movement;and for transformers and motors.
1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage.
2. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT
A. Direct-Buried Conduit:
1. Excavate trench:bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Install conduit
in 6 inch sand bed, remainder of backfill may be site material of minus 3/4 inch fill
material.
2. After installing conduit,backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point,and work toward end
of conduit run,leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction
as temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to
provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12
inches of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete
backfilling with normal compaction.
3. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and
at building entrances through the floor.
a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase
coupling with 3 inches of concrete.
4. Warning Planks: Bury warning planks approximately 12 inches above direct-buried
conduits, placing them 24 inches o.c. Align planks along the width and along the
centerline of conduit.
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533-6
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
3.4 FIRESTOPPING
A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore
original fire-resistance rating of assembly.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes,and cabinets are
without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by
manufacturer.
2. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by
manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 260533
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533-7
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 260553-IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
I 1. Identification of power and control cables.
2. Identification for conductors.
3. Warning labels and signs.
4. Instruction signs.
5. Equipment identification labels.
6. Miscellaneous identification products.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with NFPA 70.
B. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.
C. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.
D. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks
used by label printers,shall comply with UL 969.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in
other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's
wiring diagrams,and the Operation and Maintenance Manual;and with those required by codes,
standards,and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project.
B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of
surfaces where devices are to be applied.
C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.
D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 POWER AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of
color field for each raceway and cable size.
B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and
chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend
label.
C. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag,0.010 inch thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie
for attachment to conductor or cable.
1. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag
manufacturer.
D. Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with
diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping
action.
E. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeve, 2
inches long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in
place by gripping action.
2.2 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1
to 2 inches wide.
B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and
chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend
label.
C. Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with
diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping
action.
D. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeve, 2
inches long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in
place by gripping action.
E. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification
legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.
F. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.010 inch thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie
for attachment to conductor or cable.
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 -2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag
manufacturer.
2.3 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS
A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.
B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory-printed,multicolor,pressure-sensitive adhesive labels,
configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment unless otherwise
indicated.
C. Baked-Enamel Warning Signs:
1. Preprinted aluminum signs,punched or drilled for fasteners,with colors,legend,and size
required for application.
2. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting.
3. Nominal size,7 by 10 inches.
D. Metal-Backed,Butyrate Warning Signs: -
1. Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate butyrate signs with 0.0396-
inch galvanized-steel backing;and with colors,legend,and size required for application.
2. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting.
3. Nominal size, 10 by 14 inches.
E. Warning label and sign shall include,but are not limited to,the following legends:
1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD -
EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES."
2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN
FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES."
2.4 INSTRUCTION SIGNS
A. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch thick for signs up to 20
sq.inches and 1/8 inch thick for larger sizes.
1. Engraved legend with black letters on white face.
2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners.
3. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged- for attachment at applicable
equipment.
B. Adhesive Film Label: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process.
Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.
C. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal
transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch. Overlay shall provide a
weatherproof and UV-resistant seal for label.
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553-3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
2.5 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS
A. Adhesive Film Label: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process.
Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.
B. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal
transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch. Overlay shall provide a
weatherproof and UV-resistant seal for label.
C. Self-Adhesive,Engraved,Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed,with white
letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.
D. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting.
White letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.
2.6 CABLE TIES
A. General-Purpose Cable Ties: Fungus inert,self extinguishing,one piece,self locking,Type 6/6
nylon. -
1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch.
2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F,According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi.
3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F.
4. Color: Black except where used for color-coding.
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A. Paint: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for paint materials and
application requirements. Select paint system applicable for surface material and location
(exterior or interior).
B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine
screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.
B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing
without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.
C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.
D. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners
appropriate to the location and substrate.
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 -4
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
E. System Identification Color-Coding Bands for Cables: Each color-coding band shall
completely encircle cable. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact,side by side.
F. Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels and Metal Tags: Secure tight to surface of conductor or
cable at a location with high visibility and accessibility.
G. Cable Ties: For attaching tags. Use general-purpose type.
H. Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for surface
preparation and paint application.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE
A. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and
junction boxes,manholes,and handholes,use color-coding conductor tape to identify the phase.
1. Color-Coding for Phase Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below for
ungrounded feeder and branch-circuit conductors.
a. Color shall be factory applied or field applied for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG,if
authorities having jurisdiction permit.
b. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:
1) Phase A: Black.
2) Phase B: Red.
3) Phase C: Blue.
c. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits:
1) Phase A: Brown.
2) Phase B: Orange.
3) Phase C: Yellow.
d. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a
minimum distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or
taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible
unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.
B. Install instructional sign including the color-code for grounded and ungrounded conductors
using adhesive-film-type labels.
C. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach write-on tags to conductors and list source.
D. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control,
and signal connections.
1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and
pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553-5
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used
by manufacturer for factory-installed connections.
3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings,manufacturer's wiring diagrams,and the
Operation and Maintenance Manual.
E. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Metal-
backed,butyrate warning signs.
1. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145.
2. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background.
3. Apply to exterior of door,cover,or other access.
4. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of
equipment including,but not limited to,the following:
a. Power transfer switches.
b. Controls with external control power connections.
F. Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and
maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs
with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation.
G. Emergency Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs with white legend on a red
background with minimum 3/8-inch-high letters for emergency instructions at equipment used
for power transfer.
H. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label
that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules,and the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control
panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power,
lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is _
provided with its own identification.
1. Labeling Instructions:
a. Indoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless
otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch-high letters on 1-
1/2-inch-high label;where two lines of text are required,use labels 2 inches high.
b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved,laminated acrylic or melamine label.
c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for
viewing from the floor.
d. Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with _
appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of
the enclosure.
2. Equipment to Be Labeled:
a. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by
panelboard manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be engraved, laminated
acrylic or melamine label.
b. Enclosures and electrical cabinets.
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553-6
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
c. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items.
d. Switchgear.
e. Switchboards.
f. Transformers: Label that includes tag designation shown on Drawings for the
transformer,feeder,and panelboards or equipment supplied by the secondary.
g. Motor-control centers.
h. Enclosed switches.
i. Enclosed circuit breakers.
j. Enclosed controllers.
k. Push-button stations.
1. Power transfer equipment.
m. Contactors.
n. Remote-controlled switches,dimmer modules,and control devices.
END OF SECTION 260553
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 -7
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 260573 -OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION AND ARC FLASH
STUDY
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes computer-based, fault-current,overcurrent protective device coordination
studies and Arc Flash Studies. Protective devices shall be set based on results of the protective
device coordination study. Arc Flash labels shall be applied based on results of the Arc Flash
Study.
B. This Section applies to all normal power and emergency power gear.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For computer software program to be used for studies.
B. Product Certificates: For coordination-study and fault-current-study computer software
programs,certifying compliance with IEEE 399.
C. Qualification Data: For coordination-study specialist.
D. Prepare a preliminary report in electronic pdf format of the coordination portion of the study
with the electrical gear shop drawings. Gear shop drawings will not be approved until the
preliminary coordination report has been evaluated with the proposed gear.
E. Prepare a Final Study Report in electronic pdf format with tabs as follows:
1. Title that includes the project description, project location address, date, engineer
responsible for the report and professional stamp and signature.
2. Introduction and general information relative to the study, notation of any unique
information about this project,program used to prepare the study,and general summary.
3. Analysis and Recommendations for the short circuit study, overcurrent study and Arc
Flash Study(if applicable). Recommendations for the coordination study must reference
a TCC curve that graphically displays the overcurrent devices involved with the
recommendation. Each recommendation shall include a short description of reasoning
for the recommendation.
4. Calculations for the Short Circuit Study. Include various scenarios from ATS or other
switching configurations.
OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY 260573 - 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
5. Calculations for the Arc Flash study of each piece of switchgear, switchboard,
panelboard, transformers,enclosed circuit breakers and disconnects based on AIC values
indicated on the construction documents power riser diagram. Arc Flash calculation
results shall indicate the energy in joules/second, flash hazard level, flash hazard
boundary,required PPE and approach boundaries.
6. Time Current Curves displayed in color. The TCC display sheets shall be numbered and
shall be named for ease of finding on the one-line diagram. Example: 1 —L2A to MDP.
7. Overcurrent Device Settings. Display table of overcurrent devices and the settings of
each device that were determined in the coordination study.
8. Resource Data. Include back up data that was gathered and used for the study.
9. One-line diagram from the coordination program used indicating each overcurrent
device.Tag.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Studies shall use computer programs that are distributed nationally and are in wide use.
Software algorithms shall comply with requirements of standards and guides specified in this
Section. Manual calculations are not acceptable.
B. Coordination-Study Specialist Qualifications: An entity experienced in the application of
computer software used for studies, having performed successful studies of similar magnitude
on electrical distribution systems using similar devices.
1. Professional engineer,licensed in the state where Project is located, shall be responsible
for the study. All elements of the study shall be performed under the direct supervision
and control of engineer.
C. Comply with IEEE 242 for short-circuit currents and coordination time intervals.
D. Comply with IEEE 399 for general study procedures.
E. Arc Flash Calculations, Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) specifications and hazard level
designations shall comply with 2011 NFPA 70 and 2009 NFPA 70E.
F. Design of labels and applications of the signs shall comply with ANSI Z535.4 1998.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 COMPUTER SOFTWARE DEVELOPERS
A. Computer Software Developers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
1. SKM Systems Analysis,Inc.
OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY 260573-2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
2.2 COMPUTER SOFTWARE PROGRAM REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with IEEE 399.
B. Analytical features of fault-current-study computer software program shall include
"mandatory,""very desirable,"and"desirable"features as listed in IEEE 399.
C. Computer software program shall be capable of plotting and diagramming time-current-
characteristic curves as part of its output. Computer software program shall report device
settings and ratings of all overcurrent protective devices and shall demonstrate selective
coordination by computer-generated,time-current coordination plots.
1. Optional Features:
a. Arcing faults.
2.3 ARC FLASH LABELS
A. Arc Flash self adhesive labels shall be made of vinyl for each piece of switchgear,switchboard,
panelboard, transformer, enclosed circuit breaker and enclosed disconnect. Each Arc Flash
label shall indicated the following:
1. Arc Flash Energy.
2. Flash Hazard Level.
3. Flash Hazard Boundaries.
4. Approach Boundaries.
5. Required PPE.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine Project overcurrent protective device submittals for compliance with electrical
distribution system coordination requirements and other conditions affecting performance.
Devices to be coordinated are indicated on Drawings.
I. Proceed with coordination study only after relevant equipment submittals have been
assembled. Overcurrent protective devices that have not been submitted and approved
prior to coordination study may not be used in study.
3.2 POWER SYSTEM DATA
A. Gather and tabulate the following input data in the resource section of the Study Report to
support coordination study:
1. Product Data for overcurrent protective devices specified in other Division 26 Sections
and involved in overcurrent protective device coordination studies. Use equipment
OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY 260573-3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
designation tags that are consistent with electrical distribution system diagrams,
overcurrent protective device submittals, input and output data,and recommended device
settings.
2. Data sheets and documented information as follows:
a. Special load considerations,including starting inrush currents and frequent starting
and stopping.
b. Transformer kilovolt amperes, primary and secondary voltages, connection type,
impedance,and X/R ratios,primary protective device,magnetic inrush current and
overload capability.
c. Motor horsepower, full-load current, locked rotor current, code letter designation,
service factor,starting time,type of start,and thermal-damage curve.
d. Generator KVA size,power factor,Voltage and the following parameters:
1) ANSI Per unit source impedances, transient and steady state parameters of
xd,xd',Td",Td',Tdc,Ra(stator resistance). Include X/R ratios.
2) Generator Decrement curve information including Xd" Sat,Xd' Sat and Xd
Sat reactances; Td" and Td' time constants; Ta armature short circuit time
constant.
3) Field current at the given load and field current at no load.
4) Generator decrement curve data sheet and any protective overload curve
data sheets that are part of the supplied protection with the unit.
e. Utility company 3-phase potential bolted contribution with associated X/R ratio,
Utility company Single-Line-to-Ground potential bolted fault contribution and
associated X/R ratio.
f. Ratings,types,and settings of utility company's overcurrent protective devices.
g. Special overcurrent protective device settings or types stipulated by utility
company.
h. Time-current-characteristic curves of all devices indicated to be coordinated.
i. Manufacturer, frame size, interrupting rating in amperes rms symmetrical,ampere
or current sensor rating, long-time adjustment range, short-time adjustment range,
and instantaneous adjustment range for circuit breakers.
j. Manufacturer and type,ampere-tap adjustment range,time-delay adjustment range,
instantaneous attachment adjustment range, and current transformer ratio for
overcurrent relays.
k. Panelboards, switchboards, motor-control center ampacity, and interrupting rating
in amperes rms symmetrical.
1. Circuit-breaker and fuse-current ratings and types.
m. Busway ampacity and impedances.
n. Cables: Indicate conduit material, sizes of conductors, conductor material,
insulation,and actual length.
o. Cables: Indicate conduit material, sizes of conductors, conductor material,
insulation,and actual length.
OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY 260573 -4
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
3.3 FAULT-CURRENT STUDY
A. Calculate the maximum available short-circuit current in amperes rms symmetrical at circuit-
breaker positions of the electrical power distribution system. The calculation shall be for a
Bolted Single-Line-to-Ground Fault and Bolted Three phase fault and shall include possible
motor contributions,transformer phase shift and Generator contributions. For ATS or switching
schemes, determine values with the various schemes. Calculations shall be determined for the
following pieces of equipment:
1. Switchgear and switchboard bus.
2. Medium-voltage controller.
3. Motor-control center.
4. Distribution panelboard.
5. Branch circuit panelboard.
6. Enclosed Circuit breaker or switch.
7. Bus of each Generator.
B. Calculate momentary and interrupting duties on the basis of maximum available fault current.
C.- Calculations to verify interrupting ratings of overcurrent protective devices shall comply with
IEEE 141 (Red Book),IEEE 241 (Gray Book),and IEEE 242(Buff Book).
1. Transformers:
a. ANSI C57.12.22 "Standard for Transformers—Pad-Mounted, Compartmental-
Type, Self-Cooled, Three-Phase Distribution Transformers with High-Voltage
Bushings, 2500 kVA and Smaller: High-Voltage, 34 500 GrdY/19 920 Volts and
Below;Low Voltage,480 Volts and Below."
b. IEEE C57.12.00 "Standard for General Requirements for Liquid-Immersed
Distribution Power and Regulating Transformers."
c. IEEE C57.96 "Guide for Loading Dry-Type Distribution and Power
Transformers."
2. Low-Voltage Circuit Breakers: IEEE 1015 and IEEE C37.20.1.
3. Low-Voltage Fuses: IEEE C37.46.
D. Study Report:
1. Show calculated X/R ratios and equipment interrupting rating (1/2-cycle) fault currents
on electrical distribution system diagram and in report format.
2. Evaluate equipment with the calculated fault currents and report in the
summary/recommendations portion of the Study report. Ensure that short circuit
withstand ratings are equal to or higher than calculated 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault
currents. Evaluate adequacy of the equipment grounding conductors and grounding
electrode conductors at maximum ground fault currents.
OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY 260573-5
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
3.4 COORDINATION STUDY
A. Perform coordination study using approved computer software program. Prepare a written
report using results of fault-current study. Comply with IEEE 399.
1. Calculate the maximum and minimum 1/2-cycle short-circuit currents.
2. Calculate the maximum and minimum interrupting duty (5 cycles to 2 seconds) short-
circuit currents.
3. Calculate the maximum and minimum ground-fault currents.
B. Comply with IEEE 141 (Red Book), IEEE 241 (Gray Book), and IEEE 242 (Buff Book)
recommendations for fault currents and time intervals.
C. Transformer Primary Overcurrent Protective Devices:
1. Device shall not operate in response to the following:
a. Inrush current when first energized.
b. Self-cooled, full-load current or forced-air-cooled, full-load current, whichever is
specified for that transformer.
c. Permissible transformer overloads according to IEEE C57.96 if required by
unusual loading or emergency conditions.
2. Device settings shall protect transformers according to IEEE C57.12.00, for fault
currents.
D. Include the following in the Study Report:
1. Settings Selected for Overcurrent Protective Devices in table format indicated in the
"settings"tab of the study report:
a. Device tag.
b. Relay manufacturer, type, current transformer ratios; and tap, time-dial, and
instantaneous-pickup values.
c. Circuit-breaker manufacturer, type, sensor rating; and long-time, short-time, and
instantaneous settings.
d. Fuse-current rating and type and manufacturer.
e. Ground-fault relay manufacturer,type,pickup and time-delay settings.
2. Coordination Curves in the "Time Current Curves" tab of the report: Prepared to
determine settings of overcurrent protective devices to achieve selective coordination.
Graphically illustrate that adequate time separation exists between devices installed in
series, including power utility company's upstream devices. Prepare separate sets of
curves for the switching schemes and for emergency periods where the power source is
local generation. Show the following information with maximum of 5 devices per Time
current curve display:
a. Device tag that indicates the device label,device model type and device settings.
b. Voltage and current ratio for curves.
c. Damage points for each transformer.
OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY 260573-6
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
d. No damage,melting,and clearing curves for fuses.
e. Clearing curves for breakers.
f. Transformer inrush points.
g. Maximum fault-current cutoff point.
h. Generator decrement curve and overload curve.
i. Arcing Fault for Worst Case Incident Energy.
3. Evaluate coordination of all devices and report in the "Analysis and Recommendations"
tab. Note any items that do not coordinate, resulting recommendations, or other
statements.
3.5 ARC FLASH STUDY
A. Provide Arc Flash calculations for the following pieces of equipment:
1. Switchgear and switchboard bus.
2. Medium-voltage controller.
3. Motor-control center.
4. Distribution panelboard. -
5. Branch circuit panelboard.
6. Enclosed Circuit breaker or switch.
7. Bus of each Generator.
A. For Arc Flash calculations, determine energy in joules/second utilizing AIC values from the
Fault Study and Coordination Study. Calculate the following and include in the "Arc Flash
Study Report"tab:
1. Flash Hazard Level.
2. Flash Hazard Boundaries.
3. Approach Boundaries.
4. Required PPE.
B. Install Self Adhesive Arc Flash labeling for each piece of switchgear,switchboard,panelboard,
transformer,enclosed circuit breakers and disconnects.
3.6 FIELD OVERCURRENT DEVICE SETTINGS
A. After submittal approval and before gear is energized, set adjustable overcurrent devices in
accordance with the"settings"tab of the Study Report.
OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY 260573 -7
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
3.7 TRAINING
A. Training is not included. Owners have the option of providing their own training to Owner's
maintenance personnel about Fault Studies, Coordination and Arc Flash hazards indicated on
equipment; the types of PPE required and qualified verse non-qualified maintenance personnel.
END OF SECTION 260573
OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY 260573-8
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 260943-NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes manually operated lighting controls with relays and control module.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. BACnet: A networking communication protocol that complies with ASHRAE 135.
B. BAS: Building automation system.
C. DALI: Digital addressable lighting interface.
D. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or
for remote-control,signaling and power-limited circuits.
E. Monitoring: Acquisition, processing, communication, and display of equipment status data,
metered electrical parameter values, power quality evaluation data, event and alarm signals,
tabulated reports,and event logs.
F. PC: Personal computer;sometimes plural as"PCs."
G. RS-485: A serial network protocol,similar to RS-232,complying with TIA/EIA-485-A.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For control modules, power distribution components, manual switches and
plates,and conductors and cables.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail assemblies of standard components, custom assembled for specific
application on this Project.
1. Outline Drawings: Indicate dimensions, weights, arrangement of components, and
clearance and access requirements.
2. Block Diagram: Show interconnections between components specified in this Section
and devices furnished with power distribution system components. Indicate data
communication paths and identify networks, data buses, data gateways, concentrators,
NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS 260943- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
and other devices to be used. Describe characteristics of network and other data
communication lines.
3. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Coordinate nomenclature and
presentation with a block diagram.
C. Field quality-control test reports.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting controls to include in emergency,operation,and
maintenance manuals.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain lighting control module and power distribution components through
one source from a single manufacturer.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
C. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate lighting control components to form an integrated interconnection of compatible
components.
1. Match components and interconnections for optimum performance of lighting control
functions.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Intelligent Lighting Controls,Inc.
2. Leviton Mfg.Company Inc.
3. Lighting Control &Design,Inc.
4. Lithonia Lighting;Acuity Lighting Group,Inc.
5. Lutron Electronics Company,Inc.
6. MicroLite Lighting Control Systems.
7. NexLight;Northport Engineering Group.
8. Square D; Schneider Electric.
9. ULTRAWATT Energy Systems,Inc.
10. Watt Stopper(The).
NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS 260943-2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
2.2 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
A. Expandability: System shall be capable of increasing the number of control functions in the
future by 25 percent of current capacity;to include equipment ratings,housing capacities,spare
relays,terminals,number of conductors in control cables,and control software.
B. Performance Requirements: Manual switch operation sends a signal to programmable-system
control module that processes the signal according to its programming and routes an open or
close command to one or more relays in the power-supply circuits to groups of lighting fixtures
or other loads.
2.3 CONTROL MODULE
A. Control Module Description: Comply with UL 916 (CSA C22.2, No.205); microprocessor-
based, solid-state, 365-day timing and control unit. Output circuits shall be switched on or off
by internally programmed time signals or by program-controlled analog or digital signals from
external sources. Output circuits shall be pilot-duty relays compatible with power switching
devices. An integral keypad shall provide local programming and control capability. A key-
locked cover and a programmed security access code shall protect keypad use. An integral
alphanumeric LCD or LED shall display menu-assisted programming and control.
1. System Memory: Nonvolatile. System shall reboot program and reset time automatically
without errors after power outages up to 90 days'duration.
2. Software: Lighting control software shall be capable of linking switch inputs to relay
outputs,retrieving links,viewing relay output status,controlling relay outputs,simulating
switch inputs, setting device addresses, and assigning switch input and relay output
modes.
3. Automatic Time Adjustment: System shall automatically adjust for leap year and
daylight saving time and shall provide weekly routine and annual holiday scheduling.
4: Astronomic Control: Automatic adjustment of dawn and dusk switching.
5. Local Override Capability: Manual, low-voltage control devices shall override
programmed shutdown of lighting and shall override other programmed control for
intervals that may be duration programmed.
6. Automatic battery backup shall provide power to maintain program and system clock
operation for 90 days'minimum duration when power is off.
7. Flick Warning: Programmable momentary turnoff of lights shall warn that programmed
shutoff will occur after a preset interval. Warning shall be repeated after a second preset
interval before end of programmed override period.
2.4 POWER DISTRIBUTION COMPONENTS
A. Modular Relay Panel: Comply with UL 508 (CSA C22.2, No. 14) and UL 916 (CSA C22.2,
No. 205); factory assembled with modular single-pole relays, power supplies, and accessory
components required for specified performance.
1. Cabinet: Steel with hinged,locking door.
a. Barriers separate low-voltage and line-voltage components.
NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS 260943-3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
b. Directory: Mounted on back of door. Identifies each relay as to load groups
controlled and each programmed pilot device if any.
c. Control Power Supply: Transformer and full-wave rectifier with filtered dc output.
2. Single-Pole Relays: Mechanically held unless otherwise indicated; split-coil,
momentary-pulsed type.
a. Low-Voltage Leads: Plug connector to the connector strip in cabinet and pilot
light power where indicated.
b. Rated Capacity(Mounted in Relay Panel): 20 A,277-V ac for ballasts.
c. Endurance: 50,000 cycles at rated capacity.
d. Mounting: Provision for easy removal and installation in relay cabinet.
2.5 MANUAL SWITCHES AND PLATES
A. Push-Button Switches: Modular,momentary-contact,low-voltage type.
1. Match color specified in Division 26 Section"Wiring Devices."
B. Manual, Maintained Contact, Full- or Low-Voltage Switch: Comply with Division 26 Section
"Wiring Devices."
C. Wall Plates: Single and multigang plates as specified in Division 26 Section"Wiring Devices."
2.6 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Power Wiring to Supply Side of Class 2 Power Source: Not smaller than No. 12 AWG,
complying with Division 26 Section"Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
B. Classes 2 and 3 Control Cables: Multiconductor cable with copper conductors not smaller than
No. 18 AWG, complying with Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors
and Cables."
C. Class 1 Control Cables: Multiconductor cable with copper conductors not smaller than No. 14
AWG, complying with Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and
Cables."
D. Digital and Multiplexed Signal Cables: Unshielded, twisted-pair cable with copper conductors,
complying with TIA/EIA-568-B.2, Category Se for horizontal copper cable and with
Division 27 Section"Communications Horizontal Cabling."
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 WIRING INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1.
NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS 260943 -4
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
B. Wiring Method: Install wiring in raceways. Comply with Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage
Electrical Power Conductors and Cables"Minimum conduit size shall be 1/2 inch.
C. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points. Separate
power-limited and non-power-limited conductors according to conductor manufacturer's written
instructions.
D. Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions,unless
otherwise indicated.
E. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in
terminal cabinets,equipment enclosures,and in junction,pull,and outlet boxes.
F. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Division 26 Section
"Identification for Electrical Systems."
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect,test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including
connections,and assist in field testing. Report results in writing.
B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Test for circuit continuity.
2. Verify that the control module features are operational.
3. Check operation of local override controls.
3.3 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain lighting controls. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration
and Training."
END OF SECTION 260943
NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS 260943-5
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 262200-LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following types of thy-type transformers rated 600 V and less, with
capacities up to 1000 kVA:
1. Distribution transformers.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated nameplate data, capacities, weights, dimensions, minimum
clearances, installed devices and features, and performance for each type and size of
transformer indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions,weights,loads,required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Power,signal,and control wiring.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For transformers to include in emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each transformer type through one source from a single
manufacturer.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
C. Comply with IEEE C57.12.91,"Test Code for Dry-Type Distribution and Power Transformers."
LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 262200- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85% PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1.5 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat according to manufacturer's written instructions
within the enclosure of each ventilated-type unit,throughout periods during which equipment is
not energized and when transformer is not in a space that is continuously under normal control
of temperature and humidity.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of wall-mounting and structure-hanging supports with actual transformer
provided.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following:
1. ACME Electric Corporation;Power Distribution Products Division.
2. Challenger Electrical Equipment Corp.;a division of Eaton Corp.
3. Controlled Power Company.
4. Eaton Electrical Inc.;Cutler-Hammer Products.
5. Federal Pacific Transformer Company;Division of Electro-Mechanical Corp.
6. General Electric Company.
7. Hammond Co.;Matra Electric,Inc.
8. Magnetek Power Electronics Group.
9. Micron Industries Corp.
10. Myers Power Products,Inc.
11. Siemens Energy&Automation,Inc.
12. Sola/Hevi-Duty.
13. Square D;Schneider Electric.
2.2 GENERAL TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS
A. Description: Factory-assembled and-tested,air-cooled units for 60-Hz service.
B. Cores: Grain-oriented,non-aging silicon steel.
C. Coils: Continuous windings without splices except for taps.
1. Internal Coil Connections: Brazed or pressure type.
2. Coil Material: Copper.
LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 262200-2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
2.3 DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS
A. Comply with NEMA ST 20,and list and label as complying with UL 1561.
B. Cores: One leg per phase.
C. Enclosure: Ventilated,NEMA 250,Type 2.
1. Core and coil shall be encapsulated within resin compound,sealing out moisture and air.
D. Transformer Enclosure Finish: Comply with NEMA 250.
1. Finish Colon Gray.
E. Taps for Transformers Smaller Than 3 kVA: None.
F. Taps for Transformers 7.5 to 24 kVA: One 5 percent tap above and one 5 percent tap below
normal full capacity.
G. Taps for Transformers 25 kVA and Larger: Two 2.5 percent taps above and four 2.5 percent
taps below normal full capacity.
H. Insulation Class: 220 deg C,UL-component-recognized insulation system with a maximum of
115 deg C rise above 40 deg C ambient temperature.
I. Energy Efficiency for Transformers Rated 15 kVA and Larger:
1. Complying with NEMA TP 1,Class 1 efficiency levels.
2.4 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
A. Nameplates: Engraved, laminated-plastic or metal nameplate for each distribution transformer,
mounted with corrosion-resistant screws. Nameplates and label products are specified in
Division 26 Section"Identification for Electrical Systems."
2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test and inspect transformers according to IEEE C57.12.91.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine conditions for compliance with enclosure- and ambient-temperature requirements for
each transformer.
LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 262200-3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
B. Verify that field measurements are as needed to maintain working clearances required by
NFPA 70 and manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and concrete bases for suitable mounting conditions where
transformers will be installed.
D. Verify that ground connections are in place and requirements in Division 26 Section
"Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems"have been met.
E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tests and Inspections:
1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
Acceptance Testing Specification.
B. Remove and replace units that do not pass tests or inspections and retest as specified above.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Record transformer secondary voltage at each unit for at least 48 hours of typical occupancy
period. Adjust transformer taps to provide optimum voltage conditions at secondary terminals.
Optimum is defined as not exceeding nameplate voltage plus 10 percent and not being lower
than nameplate voltage minus 3 percent at maximum load conditions. Submit recording and tap
settings as test results.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning.
END OF SECTION 262200
LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 262200-4
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 262413-SWITCHBOARDS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Service and distribution switchboards rated 600 V and less.
2. Disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices.
3. Accessory components and features.
4. Identification.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of switchboard, overcurrent protective device, ground-fault
protector, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers'
technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and
finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: For each switchboard and related equipment.
1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required
clearances and service space around equipment. Show tabulations of installed devices,
equipment features,and ratings.
2. Detail enclosure types for types other than NEMA 250,Type 1.
3. Detail bus configuration,current,and voltage ratings.
4. Detail short-circuit current rating of switchboards and overcurrent protective devices.
5. Include descriptive documentation of optional barriers specified for electrical insulation
and isolation.
6. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent
protective devices and auxiliary components. —
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For switchboards and components to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section
"Operation and Maintenance Data,"include the following:
1. Routine maintenance requirements for switchboards and all installed components.
2. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective
devices.
SWITCHBOARDS 262413- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85% PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain switchboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and
accessories from single source from single manufacturer.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency,and marked for intended location and application.
C. Comply with NEMA PB 2.
D. Comply with NFPA 70.
E. Comply with UL 891.
1.5 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Deliver switchboards in sections or lengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery path.
B. Handle and prepare switchboards for installation according to NEMA PB 2.1.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Installation Pathway: Remove and replace access fencing, doors, lift-out panels,and structures
to provide pathway for moving switchboards into place.
B. Environmental Limitations:
1. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise
indicated: -
a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 104 deg F.
b. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.
C. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied
by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after
arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Architect and Owner no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed
interruption of electric service.
2. Indicate method of providing temporary electric service.
3. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Architect's written
permission.
4. Comply with NFPA 70E.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of switchboards and components with other construction that
penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment,
SWITCHBOARDS 262413-2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces.
Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors
and panels.
B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor-
bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in
Division 03.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following:
1. Eaton Electrical Inc.;Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
2. General Electric Company;GE Consumer&Industrial-Electrical Distribution.
3. Siemens Energy&Automation,Inc.
4. Square D;a brand of Schneider Electric.
B. Front-Connected,Front-Accessible Switchboards:
1. Main Devices: Fixed,individually mounted.
2. Branch Devices: Panel mounted.
3. Sections front and rear aligned.
C. Outdoor Enclosures: Type 3R.
1. Finish: Factory-applied finish in manufacturer's standard color; undersurfaces treated
with corrosion-resistant undercoating.
2. Enclosure: Flat roof;bolt-on rear covers for each section,with provisions for padlocking.
3. Manual transfer switch specified in Section 263600 is to be mounted in switchboard
enclosure. Provide separate section as shown on Drawing. All enclosure depths are to be
the same dimension. (Adjust depth to match deepest device requirement.)
D. Buses and Connections: Three phase,four wire unless otherwise indicated.
1. Phase- and Neutral-Bus Material: Hard-drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity, with
tin-plated aluminum or copper feeder circuit-breaker line connections.
2. Phase- and Neutral-Bus Material: Tin-plated, high-strength, electrical-grade aluminum
alloy with tin-plated aluminum circuit-breaker line connections.
3. Phase- and Neutral-Bus Material: Hard-drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity or tin-
plated,high-strength,electrical-grade aluminum alloy.
4. Ground Bus: 1/4-by-2-inch-hard-drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity, equipped
with mechanical connectors for feeder and branch-circuit ground conductors. For
busway feeders, extend insulated equipment grounding cable to busway ground
connection and support cable at intervals in vertical run.
SWITCHBOARDS 262413 -3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
5. Main Phase Buses and Equipment Ground Buses: Uniform capacity for entire length of
switchboard's main and distribution sections.
6. Neutral Buses: 100 percent of the ampacity of phase buses unless otherwise indicated,
equipped with mechanical connectors for outgoing circuit neutral cables. Brace bus
extensions for busway feeder neutral bus.
2.2 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to
meet available fault currents.
1. Electronic trip circuit breakers with rms sensing; field-replaceable rating plug or field-
replicable electronic trip;and the following field-adjustable settings:
a. Instantaneous trip.
b. Long-and short-time time adjustments.
c. Ground-fault pickup level,time delay,and I2t response.
2. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker(MCCB)Features and Accessories:
a. Standard frame sizes,trip ratings,and number of poles.
b. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor
material.
c. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable
pickup and time-delay settings,push-to-test feature,and ground-fault indicator.
2.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for switchboards with
one or more service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Receive,inspect,handle,and store switchboards according to NEMA PB 2.1.
B. Examine switchboards before installation. Reject switchboards that are moisture damaged or
physically damaged.
C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive switchboards for compliance with installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
SWITCHBOARDS 262413 -4
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install switchboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 2.1.
B. Equipment Mounting: Install switchboards on concrete base, 4-inch nominal thickness.
Comply with requirements for concrete base specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place
Concrete."
1. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to switchboards.
C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and
temporary blocking of moving parts from switchboard units and components.
D. Install filler plates in unused spaces of panel-mounted sections.
E. Install overcurrent protective devices.
1. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges.
F. Comply with NECA 1.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning
signs complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section
"Identification for Electrical Systems."
B. Switchboard Nameplates: Label each switchboard compartment with a nameplate complying
with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for
Electrical Systems.-"
C. Device Nameplates: Label each disconnecting and overcurrent protective device and each
control device mounted in compartment doors with a nameplate complying with requirements
for identification specified in Division 26 Section"Identification for Electrical Systems."
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect,
test,and adjust components,assemblies,and equipment installations,including connections.
B. Perform tests and inspections.
1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and
to assist in testing.
C. Acceptance Testing Preparation:
1. Test continuity of each circuit.
SWITCHBOARDS 262413-5
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
D. Tests and Inspections:
1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance;otherwise,replace with new units and retest.
E. Switchboard will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as
recommended by manufacturer.
B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat, to maintain temperature according to
manufacturer's written instructions, until switchboard is ready to be energized and placed into
service.
3.7 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust,operate,and maintain switchboards,overcurrent
protective devices,instrumentation,and accessories.
END OF SECTION 262413
SWITCHBOARDS 262413-6
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 262416-PANELBOARDS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Distribution panelboards.
2. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. SVR: Suppressed voltage rating.
B. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, switching and overcurrent protective device,
transient voltage suppression device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions
and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings,
and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.
1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of
installed devices,equipment features,and ratings.
2. Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250,Type 1.
3. Detail bus configuration,current,and voltage ratings.
4. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices. —
5. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent
protective devices and auxiliary components.
C. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section
"Operation and Maintenance Data,"include the following:
PANELBOARDS 262416- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85% PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective
devices.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and
accessories from single source from single manufacturer.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency,and marked for intended location and application.
C. Comply with NEMA PB 1.
D. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: -
1. Do not deliver or install panelboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight,wet work
in spaces is complete and dry, work above panelboards is complete, and temporary
HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions
at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
2. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise
indicated:
a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 23 deg F to plus 104 deg F.
b. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.
B. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied
by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after
arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Architect and Owner no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed
interruption of electric service.
2. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Architect's written
permission.
3. Comply with NFPA 70E.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that
penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment,
raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces.
Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors
and panels.
PANELBOARDS 262416-2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Keys: Two spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS
A. Enclosures: Flush and surface-mounted cabinets,as listed on Drawing Panel Schedules.
1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location.
a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250,Type 1.
b. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250,Type 3R.
2. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts, match
box dimensions;for flush-mounted fronts,overlap box.
3. Finishes:
a. Panels and Trim: Steel,factory finished immediately after cleaning and pretreating
with manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on fmish consisting of prime coat
and thermosetting topcoat.
b. Back Boxes: Galvanized steel.
4. Directory Card: Inside panelboard door,mounted in transparent card holder.
B. Incoming Mains Location: Top and bottom.
C. Phase,Neutral,and Ground Buses:
1. Material: Tin-plated aluminum.
2. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding
conductors;bonded to box.
D. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.
1. Material: Tin-plated aluminum.
2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type.
3. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Mechanical type.
4. Feed-Through Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for use with conductor material. Locate
at opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device.
E. Future Devices: Mounting brackets,bus connections, filler plates,and necessary appurtenances
required for future installation of devices.
PANELBOARDS 262416-3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
F. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit
current available at terminals.
2.2 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following:
1. Eaton Electrical Inc.;Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer& Industrial -Electrical Distribution.
3. Siemens Energy&Automation,Inc.
4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1,power and feeder distribution type.
C. Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock;keyed alike.
1. For doors more than 36 inches high,provide two latches,keyed alike.
D. Mains: Circuit breaker.
E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller:
Bolt-on circuit breakers.
F. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A:
Bolt-on circuit breakers; plug-in circuit breakers where individual positive-locking device
requires mechanical release for removal.
2.3 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following:
1. Eaton Electrical Inc.;Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer&Industrial -Electrical Distribution.
3. Siemens Energy&Automation, Inc.
4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1,lighting and appliance branch-circuit type.
C. Mains: Circuit breaker or lugs only.
D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without
disturbing adjacent units.
E. Doors: Concealed hinges;secured with flush latch with tumbler lock;keyed alike.
PANELBOARDS 262416-4
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
2.4 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following:
1. Eaton Electrical Inc.;Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
2. General Electric Company;GE Consumer&Industrial-Electrical Distribution.
3. Siemens Energy&Automation,Inc.
4. Square D;a brand of Schneider Electric.
B. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to
meet available fault currents.
1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level
overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable
magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.
2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-
mounted,field-adjustable trip setting.
3. Electronic trip circuit breakers with rms sensing; field-replaceable rating plug or field-
replicable electronic trip.
4. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault
protection(6-mA trip).
5. Ground-Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: Class B ground-fault
protection(30-mA trip).
6. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker(MCCB)Features and Accessories:
a. Standard frame sizes,trip ratings,and number of poles.
b. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor
materials.
c. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching
fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity
discharge(HID)lighting circuits.
d. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable
pickup and time-delay settings,push-to-test feature,and ground-fault indicator.
e. Handle Clamp: Loose attachment, for holding circuit-breaker handle in on
position.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Receive,inspect,handle,and store panelboards according to NEMA PB 1.1.
B. Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged or rusted or have
been subjected to water saturation.
C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
PANELBOARDS 262416-5
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Mount top of trim 90 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.
B. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed
panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box.
C. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed.
D. Install filler plates in unused spaces.
E. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties.
F. Comply with NECA 1.
-3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads; incorporate Owner's final room
designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create
directory;handwritten directories are not acceptable.
B. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements
for identification specified in Division 26 Section"Identification for Electrical Systems."
C. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a
nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section
"Identification for Electrical Systems."
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Acceptance Testing Preparation:
1. Test continuity of each circuit.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance;otherwise,replace with new units and retest.
C. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
PANELBOARDS 262416-6
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust moving parts and operable component to function smoothly, and lubricate as
recommended by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 262416
PANELBOARDS 262416-7
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 262726-WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Receptacles,receptacles with integral GFCI,and associated device plates.
2. Snap switches and wall-box dimmers.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.
C. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor.
D. RFI: Radio-frequency interference.
E. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers'packing
label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate through one
source from a single manufacturer. Insofar as they are available, obtain all wiring devices and
associated wall plates from a single manufacturer and one source.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
WIRING DEVICES 262726- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
C. Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following
manufacturers'names are used in other Part 2 articles:
1. Cooper Wiring Devices;a division of Cooper Industries,Inc.(Cooper).
2. Hubbell Incorporated;Wiring Device-Kellems(Hubbell).
3. Leviton Mfg.Company Inc.(Leviton).
4. Pass&Seymour/Legrand;Wiring Devices&Accessories(Pass& Seymour).
2.2 STRAIGHT BLADE RECEPTACLES
A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6
configuration 5-20R,and UL 498.
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following:
a. Cooper;5351 (single),5352(duplex).
b. Hubbell;HBL5351 (single),CR5352(duplex).
c. Leviton;5891 (single),5352(duplex).
d. Pass&Seymour;5381 (single),5352(duplex).
B. Isolated-Ground Receptacles: Straight blade, heavy-duty grade, duplex receptacle, with
equipment grounding contacts connected only to the green grounding screw terminal of the
device and with inherent electrical isolation from mounting strap.
1. Devices: Listed and labeled as isolated-ground receptacles.
2. Isolation Method: Integral to receptacle construction and not dependent on removable
parts.
2.3 GFCI RECEPTACLES
A. General Description: Straight blade, non-feed-through type. Comply with NEMA WD 1,
NEMA WD 6, UL 498, and UL 943, Class A, and include indicator light that is lighted when
device is tripped.
B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V,20 A:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following:
a. Cooper,GF20.
WIRING DEVICES 262726-2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
b. Pass&Seymour;2084.
2.4 SNAP SWITCHES
A. Comply with NEMA WD 1 and UL 20.
B. Switches, 120/277 V,20 A:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following:
a. Cooper;2221 (single pole),2222(two pole),2223(three way),2224(four way).
b. Hubbell; CS 1221 (single pole), CS 1222 (two pole), CS 1223 (three way), CS 1224
(four way).
c. Leviton; 1221-2(single pole), 1222-2(two pole), 1223-2(three way), 1224-2(four
way).
d. Pass & Seymour; 20AC 1 (single pole), 20AC2 (two pole), 20AC3 (three way),
20AC4(four way).
C. Single-Pole, Double-Throw, Momentary Contact, Center-Off Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A; for
use with mechanically held lighting contactors.
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following:
a. Cooper; 1995.
b. Hubbell;HBL1557.
c. Leviton; 1257.
d. Pass&Seymour; 1251.
2.5 PENDANT CORD/CONNECTOR DEVICES
A. Description: Matching, locking-type plug and receptacle body connector, NEMA WD 6,
Heavy-Duty grade.
1. Body: Nylon with screw-open cable-gripping jaws and provision for attaching external
cable grip.
2. External Cable Grip: Woven wire-mesh type made of high-strength galvanized-steel
wire strand, matched to cable diameter, and with attachment provision designed for
corresponding connector.
2.6 CORD AND PLUG SETS
A. Description: Match voltage and current ratings and number of conductors to requirements of
equipment being connected.
WIRING DEVICES 262726-3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
l'iG,ARD,OREGON
1. Cord: Rubber-insulated, stranded-copper conductors, with Type SOW-A jacket; with
green-insulated grounding conductor and equipment-rating ampacity plus a minimum of
30 percent.
2. Plug: Nylon body and integral cable-clamping jaws. Match cord and receptacle type for
connection.
WALL PLATES
A. Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices.
1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish.
2. Material for Finished Spaces: 0.035-inch-thick,satin finish,stainless steel.
3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel.
4. Material for Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed
and labeled for use in"wet locations."
B. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with type 3R weather-
resistant thermoplastic with lockable cover.
FINISHES
A. Color: Wiring device catalog numbers in Section Text do not designate device color.
1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: White, unless otherwise indicated
or required by NFPA 70 or device listing.
2. Isolates-Ground Devices: Orange.
•
PART 3--EXECUTION
1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1, including the mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise
noted.
B. Coordination with Other Trades:
1. Take steps to insure that devices and their boxes are protected. Do not place wall finish
materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by
riding against outside of the boxes.
2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster,drywall joint compound,mortar,cement,concrete,dust,
paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and
cables.
3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint
unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.
4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation,including painting,is complete.
WIRING DEVICES 262726-4
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
C. Conductors:
1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or terminated on
devices.
2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid
scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.
3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70,
Article 300,without pigtails.
4. Existing Conductors:
a. Cut back and pigtail,or replace all damaged conductors.
b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter.
c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted provided the outlet box is large enough.
D. Device Installation:
1. Replace all devices that have been in temporary use during construction or that show
signs that they were installed before building finishing operations were complete.
2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect
conductors.
3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last
possible moment.
4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length.
5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid
conductor tightly clockwise,2/3 to 3/4 of the way around terminal screw.
6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by the manufacturer.
7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice
No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections.
8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device.
9. When mounting into metal boxes,remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device
mounting screws in yokes,allowing metal-to-metal contact.
E. Receptacle Orientation:
1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles down, and on horizontally mounted
receptacles to the right.
F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount
outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.
G. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension
vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on bottom. Group adjacent switches under
single,multigang wall plates.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tests for Convenience Receptacles:
1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V.
WIRING DEVICES 262726-5
i
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is not acceptable.
3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable.
4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943.
5. Using the test plug,verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted.
6. The tests shall be diagnostic,indicating damaged conductors,high resistance at the circuit
breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar
problems. Correct circuit conditions,remove malfunctioning units and replace with new
ones,and retest as specified above.
END OF SECTION 262726
WIRING DEVICES 262726-6
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 262813-FUSES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Cartridge fuses rated 600-V ac and less for use in control circuits,enclosed switches and
enclosed controllers.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fuses to include in emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and
Maintenance Data,"include the following:
1. Ambient temperature adjustment information.
2. Current-limitation curves for fuses with current-limiting characteristics.
3. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) and current-limitation curves
(instantaneous peak let-through current)for each type and rating of fuse.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain fuses, for use within a specific product or circuit, from single
source from single manufacturer.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency,and marked for intended location and application.
C. Comply with NEMA FU 1 for cartridge fuses.
D. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Where ambient temperature to which fuses are directly exposed is less than 40 deg F or more
than 100 deg F,apply manufacturer's ambient temperature adjustment factors to fuse ratings.
FUSES 262813 - 1
J
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate fuse ratings with utilization equipment nameplate limitations of maximum fuse size
and with system short-circuit current levels.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following:
1. Cooper Bussmann,Inc.
2. Edison Fuse, Inc.
3. Ferraz Shawmut, Inc.
4. Littelfuse, Inc.
2.2 CARTRIDGE FUSES
A. Characteristics: NEMA FU 1, nonrenewable cartridge fuses with voltage ratings consistent
with circuit voltages.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine fuses before installation. Reject fuses that are moisture damaged or physically
damaged.
B. Examine holders to receive fuses for compliance with installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance,such as rejection features.
C. Examine utilization equipment nameplates and installation instructions. Install fuses of sizes
and with characteristics appropriate for each piece of equipment.
D. Evaluate ambient temperatures to determine if fuse rating adjustment factors must be applied to
fuse ratings.
E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install fuses in fusible devices. Arrange fuses so rating information is readable without
removing fuse.
FUSES 262813 -2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Install labels complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section
"Identification for Electrical Systems" and indicating fuse replacement information on inside
door of each fused switch and adjacent to each fuse block,socket,and holder.
END OF SECTION 262813
FUSES 262813-3
J
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 262816-ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Fusible switches.
2. Nonfusible switches.
3. Molded-case circuit breakers(MCCBs).
4. Enclosures.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. NC: Normally closed.
B. NO: Normally open.
C. SPDT: Single pole,double throw.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component
indicated. Include dimensioned elevations,sections,weights,and manufacturers'technical data
on features,performance,electrical characteristics,ratings,accessories,and finishes.
1. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250,Type 1.
2. Current and voltage ratings.
3. Short-circuit current ratings(interrupting and withstand,as appropriate).
B. Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers. Include plans,elevations,sections,
details,and attachments to other work.
1. Wiring Diagrams: For power,signal,and control wiring.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01
Section"Operation and Maintenance Data,"include the following:
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches and circuit
breakers.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency,and marked for intended location and application.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following
conditions unless otherwise indicated:
1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F.
2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches,circuit breakers,and components with equipment
served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances
for equipment access doors and panels.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 FUSIBLE SWITCHES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following:
1. Eaton Electrical Inc.;Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
2. General Electric Company;GE Consumer& Industrial -Electrical Distribution.
3. Siemens Energy&Automation, Inc.
4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
B. Type HD,Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1,
horsepower rated,with clips or bolt pads to accommodate specified fuses, lockable handle with
capability to accept three padlocks,and interlocked with cover in closed position.
C. Accessories:
1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground
conductors.
2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded;
labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816-2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
3. Lugs: Mechanical type,suitable for number,size,and conductor material.
2.2 NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following:
1. Eaton Electrical Inc.;Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
2. General Electric Company;GE Consumer&Industrial-Electrical Distribution.
3. Siemens Energy&Automation,Inc.
4. Square D;a brand of Schneider Electric.
B. Type HD,Heavy Duty,Single Throw,600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1,
horsepower rated,lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks,and interlocked with
cover in closed position.
C. Accessories:
1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground
conductors.
2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded;
labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.
3. Lugs: Mechanical type,suitable for number,size,and conductor material.
2.3 MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following:
1. Eaton Electrical Inc.;Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
2. General Electric Company;GE Consumer&Industrial-Electrical Distribution.
3. Siemens Energy&Automation,Inc.
4. Square D;a brand of Schneider Electric.
B. General Requirements: Comply with UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with
interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents.
C. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads and
instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for
circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.
D. Features and Accessories:
1. Standard frame sizes,trip ratings,and number of poles.
2. Lugs: Mechanical type,suitable for number,size,trip ratings,and conductor material.
3. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent
lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge lighting
circuits.
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816-3
J
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
2.4 ENCLOSURES
A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1,NEMA KS 1,NEMA 250, and UL 50,
to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.
1. Indoor,Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250,Type 1.
2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250,Type 3R.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance
with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless
otherwise indicated.
B. Install fuses in fusible devices.
C. Comply with NECA 1.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section"Identification for Electrical Systems."
1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide
warning signs.
2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Acceptance Testing Preparation:
1. Test continuity of each circuit.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance;otherwise,replace with new units and retest.
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816-4
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
C. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and
inspections.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as
recommended by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 262816
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816-5
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 262913-ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes the following enclosed controllers rated 600 V and less:
1. Full-voltage magnetic.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. CPT: Control power transformer.
B. MCCB: Molded-case circuit breaker.
C. MCP: Motor circuit protector.
D. N.C.: Normally closed.
E. N.O.: Normally open.
F. OCPD: Overcurrent protective device.
G. SCR: Silicon-controlled rectifier.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed controller. Include manufacturer's technical data on
features,performance,electrical characteristics,ratings,and enclosure types and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: For each enclosed controller. Include dimensioned plans,elevations,sections,
details,and required clearances and service spaces around controller enclosures.
1. Show tabulations of the following:
a. Each installed unit's type and details.
b. Factory-installed devices.
c. Nameplate legends.
d. Short-circuit current rating of integrated unit.
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS 262913- 1
1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
e. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual OCPDs in
combination controllers.
2. Wiring Diagrams: For power,signal,and control wiring.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed controllers to include in emergency,operation,
and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section"Operation and
Maintenance Data,"include the following:
1. Routine maintenance requirements for enclosed controllers and installed components.
2. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting circuit breaker and MCP trip
settings.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency,and marked for intended location and application.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
C. IEEE Compliance: Fabricate and test enclosed controllers according to IEEE 344 to withstand
seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical
Systems."
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following
conditions unless otherwise indicated:
1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F.
2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of enclosed controllers with other construction including
conduit,piping, equipment,and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and
required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.
B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor-
bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in
Division 03.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS 262913 -2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1. Fuses for Fused Switches: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and
type,but no fewer than three of each size and type.
2. Control Power Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type,but
no fewer than two of each size and type.
3. Indicating Lights: Two of each type and color installed.
4. Auxiliary Contacts: Furnish one spare for each size and type of magnetic controller
installed.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 FULL-VOLTAGE CONTROLLERS
A. General Requirements for Full-Voltage Controllers: Comply with NEMA ICS 2, general
purpose,Class A.
B. Motor-Starting Switches: "Quick-make, quick-break" toggle or push-button action; marked to
show whether unit is off or on.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Eaton Electrical Inc.;Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
b. General Electric Company;GE Consumer&Industrial-Electrical Distribution.
c. Rockwell Automation,Inc.;Allen-Bradley brand.
d. Siemens Energy&Automation,Inc.
e. Square D;a brand of Schneider Electric.
2. Configuration: Nonreversing.
3. Surface mounting.
4. Red pilot light.
C. Fractional Horsepower Manual Controllers: "Quick-make, quick-break" toggle or push-button
action;marked to show whether unit is off,on,or tripped.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Eaton Electrical Inc.;Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
b. General Electric Company;GE Consumer& Industrial-Electrical Distribution.
c. Rockwell Automation,Inc.;Allen-Bradley brand.
d. Siemens Energy&Automation,Inc.
e. Square D;a brand of Schneider Electric.
2. Overload Relays: Inverse-time-current characteristics; NEMA ICS 2, Class 10 tripping
characteristics; heaters matched to nameplate full-load current of actual protected motor;
external reset push button;bimetallic type.
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS 262913-3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
3. Surface mounting.
D. Combination Magnetic Controller. Factory-assembled combination of magnetic controller,
OCPD,and disconnecting means.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Eaton Electrical Inc.;Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
b. General Electric Company;GE Consumer& Industrial-Electrical Distribution.
c. Rockwell Automation,Inc.;Allen-Bradley brand.
d. Siemens Energy&Automation,Inc.
e. Square D;a brand of Schneider Electric.
2. Fusible Disconnecting Means:
a. NEMA KS 1,heavy-duty,horsepower-rated, fusible switch with clips or bolt pads
to accommodate Class R fuses.
b. Lockable Handle: Accepts three padlocks and interlocks with cover in closed
position.
3. Auxiliary Contacts: N.O./N.C.,arranged to activate before switch blades open.
2.2 ENCLOSURES
A. Enclosed Controllers: NEMA ICS 6, to comply with environmental conditions at installed
location.
1. Dry and Clean Indoor Locations: Type I.
2. Outdoor Locations: Type 3R.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. General Requirements for Control Circuit and Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 5; factory installed in
controller enclosure cover unless otherwise indicated.
1. Push Buttons,Pilot Lights,and Selector Switches: Heavy-duty,type.
a. Push Buttons: Covered types;maintained as indicated.
b. Pilot Lights: LED types;colors as indicated.
c. Selector Switches: Rotary type.
B. N.C.auxiliary contact(s).
C. Control Circuit: 120 V; obtained from integral control power transformer with a control power
transformer of sufficient capacity to operate connected pilot, indicating and control devices,
plus 100 percent spare capacity.
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS 262913-4
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
D. Spare control wiring terminal blocks,quantity as indicated;unwired.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and surfaces to receive enclosed controllers, with Installer present, for
compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Examine enclosed controllers before installation. Reject enclosed controllers that are wet,
moisture damaged,or mold damaged.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Wall-Mounted Controllers: Install enclosed controllers on walls with tops at uniform height
unless otherwise indicated, and by bolting units to wall or mounting on lightweight structural-
steel channels bolted to wall. For controllers not at walls,provide freestanding racks complying
with Division 26 Section"Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."
B. Floor-Mounted Controllers: Install enclosed controllers on 4-inch nominal-thickness concrete
base. Comply with requirements for concrete base specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-
Place Concrete."
1. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and
temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.
D. Install fuses in each fusible-switch enclosed controller.
E. Install fuses in control circuits if not factory installed. Comply with requirements in
Division 26 Section"Fuses."
F. Install heaters in thermal overload relays. Select heaters based on actual nameplate full-load
amperes after motors have been installed.
G. Comply with NECA 1. —
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify enclosed controllers, components, and control wiring. Comply with requirements for
identification specified in Division 26 Section"Identification for Electrical Systems."
1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide
warning signs.
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS 262913-5
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
2. Label each enclosure with engraved nameplate.
3. Label each enclosure-mounted control and pilot device.
3.4 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION
A. Bundle,train,and support wiring in enclosures.
B. Connect selector switches and other automatic-control selection devices where applicable.
1. Connect selector switches with enclosed-controller circuit in both manual and automatic
positions for safety-type control devices such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, high-
temperature cutouts,and motor overload protectors.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Acceptance Testing Preparation:
1. Test continuity of each circuit.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. Inspect controllers, wiring, components, connections, and equipment installation. Test
and adjust controllers,components,and equipment.
2. Test continuity of each circuit.
3. Verify that voltages at controller locations are within plus or minus 10 percent of motor
nameplate rated voltages. If outside this range for any motor, notify Architect before
starting the motor(s).
4. Test each motor for proper phase rotation.
5. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in
NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
6. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance;otherwise,replace with new units and retest.
7. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and
malfunctioning controls and equipment.
C. Enclosed controllers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Set field-adjustable switches, auxiliary relays, time-delay relays, timers, and overload-relay
pickup and trip ranges.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's
written instructions until enclosed controllers are ready to be energized and placed into service.
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS 262913 -6
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
B. Replace controllers whose interiors have been exposed to water or other liquids prior to
Substantial Completion.
3.8 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust,operate,and maintain enclosed controllers.
END OF SECTION 262913
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS 262913 - 7
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 265100-INTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Interior lighting fixtures,lamps,and ballasts.
2. Exit signs.
3. Lighting fixture supports.
4. Retrofit kits for fluorescent lighting fixtures.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 26 Section "Network Lighting Controls" for manual or programmable control
systems with low-voltage control wiring or data communication circuits.
2. Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices" for manual wall-box dimmers for incandescent
lamps.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. BF: Ballast factor.
B. CRI: Color-rendering index.
C. CU: Coefficient of utilization.
D. HID: High-intensity discharge.
E. LER: Luminaire efficacy rating.
F. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided.
G. RCR: Room cavity ratio.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation.
Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:
INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100- 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1. Physical description of lighting fixture including dimensions.
2. Ballast.
3. Energy-efficiency data.
4. Life,output,and energy-efficiency data for lamps.
5. Photometric data, in IESNA format, based on laboratory tests of each lighting fixture
type, outfitted with lamps, ballasts, and accessories identical to those indicated for the
lighting fixture as applied in this Project.
a. Photometric data shall be certified by a manufacturer's laboratory with a current
accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program
(NVLAP)for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.
B. Shop Drawings: Show details of nonstandard or custom lighting fixtures. Indicate dimensions,
weights,methods of field assembly,components, features,and accessories.
I. Wiring Diagrams: Power wiring.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting equipment and fixtures to include in emergency,
operation,and maintenance manuals.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by manufacturers'
laboratories that are accredited under the National Volunteer Laboratory Accreditation Program
for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
C. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other
construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC equipment, fire-
suppression system,and partition assemblies.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion.
INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100-2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In Interior Lighting Fixture Schedule where titles below are column or row headings that
introduce lists,the following requirements apply to product selection:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated on the Luminaire
Schedule in the Contract Documents.
2.2 LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS,GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed fixtures.
B. Incandescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to
NEMA LE 5A.
C. Fluorescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to
NEMA LE 5 and NEMA LE 5A as applicable.
D. HID Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to
NEMA LE 5B.
E. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.
F. Sheet Metal Components: Steel, unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent
warping and sagging.
G. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under
operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to
prevent doors, frames, lenses,diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during
relamping and when secured in operating position.
H. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows,unless otherwise indicated:
1. White Surfaces: 85 percent.
2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent.
3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent.
4. Laminated Silver Metallized Film: 90 percent.-
I. Plastic Diffusers,Covers,and Globes:
1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to
yellowing and other changes due to aging,exposure to heat,and UV radiation.
a. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch minimum unless different thickness is
indicated.
INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100-3
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
b. UV stabilized.
2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass,unless otherwise indicated.
2.3 BALLASTS FOR LINEAR FLUORESCENT LAMPS (ALL BALLASTS TO BE "ADVANCE
BALLASTS")
A. Electronic Ballasts: Comply with ANSI C82.11; instant-start type, unless otherwise indicated,
and designed for type and quantity of lamps served. Ballasts shall be designed for full light
output unless dimmer or bi-level control is indicated.
1. Sound Rating: A.
2. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent.
3. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41,Category A or better.
4. Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher.
5. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less.
6. BF: 0.85 or higher.
7. Power Factor: 0.95 or higher.
B. Electronic Programmed-Start Ballasts for T5 and T5HO Lamps: Comply with ANSI C82.11
and the following:
1. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit for T5 diameter lamps.
2. Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement.
3. Sound Rating: A.
4. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 20 percent.
5. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41,Category A or better.
6. Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher.
7. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less.
8. BF: 0.95 or higher,unless otherwise indicated.
9. Power Factor: 0.95 or higher.
C. Electromagnetic Ballasts: Comply with ANSI C82.1; energy saving, high-power factor,
Class P,and having automatic-reset thermal protection.
1. Ballast Manufacturer Certification: Indicated by label.
D. Single Ballasts for Multiple Lighting Fixtures: Factory-wired with ballast arrangements and
bundled extension wiring to suit final installation conditions without modification or rewiring in
the field.
E. Ballasts for Low-Temperature Environments:
1. Temperatures 0 Deg F and Higher: Electronic type rated for 0 deg F starting and
operating temperature with indicated lamp types.
2. Temperatures Minus 20 Deg F and Higher: Electromagnetic type designed for use with
indicated lamp types.
INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100-4
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
2.4 BALLASTS FOR COMPACT FLUORESCENT LAMPS (ALL BALLASTS TO BE
"ADVANCE BALLASTS")
A. Description: Electronic programmed rapid-start type, complying with ANSI C 82.11,designed
for type and quantity of lamps indicated. Ballast shall be designed for full light output unless
dimmer or bi-level control is indicated:
1. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit.
2. Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement.
3. Sound Rating: A.
4. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 20 percent.
5. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41,Category A or better.
6. Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher.
7. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less.
8. BF: 0.95 or higher,unless otherwise indicated.
9. Power Factor: 0.95 or higher.
10. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR, Chapter 1, Part 18, Subpart C, for limitations on
electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for nonconsumer equipment.
11. Ballast Case Temperature: 75 deg C,maximum.
2.5 BALLASTS FOR HID LAMPS(ALL BALLASTS TO BE"ADVANCE BALLASTS")
A. Electronic Ballast for Metal-Halide Lamps: Include the following features unless otherwise
indicated:
1. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit.
2. Sound Rating: A.
3. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 15 percent.
4. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41,Category A or better.
5. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.5 or less.
6. Power Factor: .90 or higher.
7. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR, Chapter 1, Part 18, Subpart C, for limitations on
electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for nonconsumer equipment.
8. Protection: Class P thermal cutout.
9. Retain subparagraph and associated subparagraphs below for bi-level ballasts.
2.6 EXIT SIGNS
A. Description: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, and lettering size,
comply with authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Internally Lighted Signs:
1. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs,70,000 hours minimum rated lamp life.
INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100-5
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
2.7 FLUORESCENT LAMPS
A. Low-Mercury Lamps: Comply with EPA's toxicity characteristic leaching procedures test;shall
yield less than 0.2 mg of mercury per liter when tested according to NEMA LL 1.
B. T8 rapid-start low-mercury lamps, rated 32 W maximum, nominal length of 48 inches, 2800
initial lumens(minimum),CRI 75 (minimum),color temperature 3500 K,and average rated life
20,000 hours,unless otherwise indicated.
C. T8 rapid-start low-mercury lamps, rated 17 W maximum, nominal length of 24 inches, 1300
initial lumens(minimum),CRI 75(minimum),color temperature 3500 K,and average rated life
of 20,000 hours,unless otherwise indicated.
D. Compact Fluorescent Lamps: 4-Pin, low mercury,CRI 80 (minimum), color temperature
3500 K, average rated life of 10,000 hours at 3 hours operation per start, and suitable for use
with dimming ballasts,unless otherwise indicated.
1. 13 W: T4,double or triple tube,rated 900 initial lumens(minimum).
2. 18 W: T4,double or triple tube,rated 1200 initial lumens(minimum).
3. 26 W: T4,double or triple tube,rated 1800 initial lumens(minimum).
4. 32 W: T4,triple tube,rated 2400 initial lumens(minimum).
5. 42 W: T4,triple tube,rated 3200 initial lumens(minimum).
6. 55 W: T4,triple tube,rated 4300 initial lumens(minimum).
2.8 LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS
A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel-
and angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.
B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish
same as fixture.
C. Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2-inch steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount a single
fixture. Finish same as fixture.
D. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M,Class 3,soft temper,zinc-coated steel, 12 gage.
E. Wires for Humid Spaces: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Composition 302 or 304, annealed stainless
steel, 12 gage.
F. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch minimum diameter,cadmium-plated,threaded steel rod.
G. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with
threaded attachment,cord,and locking-type plug.
INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100-6
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Lighting fixtures: Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls. Install lamps in each
fixture.
B. Support for Lighting Fixtures in or on Grid-Type Suspended Ceilings: Use grid as a support
element.
1. Install a minimum of four ceiling support system rods or wires for each fixture. Locate
not more than 6 inches from lighting fixture corners.
2. Support Clips: Fasten to lighting fixtures and to ceiling grid members at or near each
fixture corner with clips that are UL listed for the application.
3. Fixtures of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Install as indicated on reflected ceiling plans
or center in acoustical panel, and support fixtures independently with at least two 3/4-
inch metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees.
4. Install at least one independent support rod or wire from structure to a tab on lighting
fixture. Wire or rod shall have breaking strength of the weight of fixture at a safety factor
of 3.
C. Suspended Lighting Fixture Support:
1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches,brace to limit swinging.
2. Stem-Mounted,Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers.
3. Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for
suspension for each unit length of fixture chassis,including one at each end.
4. Air craft cable supports for types indicated on Drawings.
D. Adjust aimable lighting fixtures to provide required light intensities.
E. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors
and Cables."
END OF SECTION 265100
INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100-7
1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
SECTION 283111 -DIGITAL,ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Fire-alarm control unit.(Provided in shell package.)
2. Manual fire-alarm boxes.
3. System smoke detectors. _
4. Notification appliances.
5. Remote annunciator.(Provided in shell package.)
6. Addressable interface device.
7. Digital alarm communicator transmitter.(Provided in shell package.)
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. LED: Light-emitting diode.
B. NICET: National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Noncoded,UL-certified addressable system, with multiplexed signal transmission, dedicated to
fire-alarm service only.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. General Submittal Requirements:
1. Submittals shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction prior to submitting them
to Architect.
2. Shop Drawings shall be prepared by persons with the following qualifications:
a. Licensed or certified by authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
DIGITAL,ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - 1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
C. Shop Drawings: For fire-alarm system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
attachments to other work.
1. Comply with recommendations in the "Documentation" Section of the"Fundamentals of
Fire Alarm Systems"Chapter in NFPA 72.
2. Include voltage drop calculations for notification appliance circuits.
3. Include battery-size calculations.
4. Include floor plans to indicate final outlet locations showing address of each addressable
device. Show size and route of cable and conduits.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire-alarm systems and components to include in
emergency, operation,and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01
Section"Operation and Maintenance Data,"include the following:
1. Comply with the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance"
Chapter in NFPA 72.
2. Provide "Record of Completion Documents" according to NFPA 72 article "Permanent
Records"in the"Records" Section of the"Inspection,Testing and Maintenance"Chapter.
3. Record copy of site-specific software.
4. Manufacturer's required maintenance related to system warranty requirements.
5. Abbreviated operating instructions for mounting at fire-alarm control unit.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Installation shall be by personnel certified by NICET as fire-alarm
Level II technician.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency,and marked for intended location and application.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Interruption of Existing Fire-Alarm Service: Do not interrupt fire-alarm service to facilities
occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only
after arranging to provide temporary guard service according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Architect and Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption
of fire-alarm service.
2. Do not proceed with interruption of fire-alarm service without Architect's written
permission.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
DIGITAL,ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 283111 -2
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1. Lamps for Strobe Units: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed, but no fewer
than 1 unit.
2. Keys and Tools: One extra set for access to locked and tamperproofed components.
3. Audible and Visual Notification Appliances: One of each type installed.
4. Fuses: Two of each type installed in the system.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Fire alarm control panel and partial system are existing;match existing system
components.(Notifier.)
2.2 SYSTEMS OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION
A. Fire-alarm signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices:
1. Manual stations.
2. Smoke detectors.
3. Automatic sprinkler system water flow.
B. Fire-alarm signal shall initiate the following actions:
1. Continuously operate alarm notification appliances.
2. Identify alarm at fire-alarm control unit and remote annunciators.
3. Transmit an alarm signal to the remote alarm receiving station.
4. Record events in the system memory.
5. Activate HVAC unit shut downs.
6. Activate emergency shut down of gas and fuel supplies.
C. Supervisory signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions:
1. Valve supervisory switch.
2. Ammonia detection panel.
D. System trouble signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions:
1. Open circuits,shorts,and grounds in designated circuits.
2. Opening, tampering with, or removing alarm-initiating and supervisory signal-initiating
devices.
3. Loss of primary power at fire-alarm control unit.
4. Ground or a single break in fire-alarm control unit internal circuits.
5. Abnormal ac voltage at fire-alarm control unit.
6. Break in standby battery circuitry.
7. Failure of battery charging.
8. Abnormal position of any switch at fire-alarm control unit or annunciator.
DIGITAL,ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 283111 -3
J
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
E. System Trouble and Supervisory Signal Actions: Initiate notification appliance and annunciate
at fire-alarm control unit and remote annunciators.
2.3 FIRE-ALARM CONTROL UNIT(EXISTING -NOTIFIER)
A. General Requirements for Fire-Alarm Control Unit:
1. Field-programmable, microprocessor-based, modular, power-limited design with
electronic modules,complying with UL 864 and listed and labeled by an NRTL.
a. System software and programs shall be held in flash electrically erasable
programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), retaining the information through
failure of primary and secondary power supplies.
b. Include a real-time clock for time annotation of events on the event recorder.
2. Addressable initiation devices that communicate device identity and status.
B. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arranged for interface between human operator at
fire-alarm control unit and addressable system components including annunciation and
supervision. Display alarm, supervisory, and component status messages and the programming
and control menu.
1. Annunciator and Display: Liquid-crystal type,2 lines of 40 characters,minimum.
2. Keypad: Arranged to permit entry and execution of programming, display, and control
commands.
C. Circuits:
I. Initiating Device: NFPA 72,Class A.
a. Initiating Device Circuits: Style D.
b. Install no more than 50 addressable devices on each signaling line circuit.
2. Notification Appliance and Signaling Line Circuits: NFPA 72,Class B.
a. Notification Appliance Circuits: Style W.
b. Signaling Line Circuits: Style 4.
c. Install no more than 50 addressable devices on each signaling line circuit.
D. Transmission to Remote Alarm Receiving Station: Automatically transmit alarm, supervisory,
and trouble signals to a remote alarm station.
E. Secondary Power: 24-V dc supply system with batteries, automatic battery charger, and
automatic transfer switch.
1. Batteries: Sealed lead calcium.
F. Instructions: Typewritten instruction card mounted behind a plastic or glass cover in a
stainless-steel or aluminum frame. Include interpretation and describe appropriate response for
DIGITAL,ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 283111 -4
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
displays and signals. Briefly describe the functional operation of the system under normal,
alarm,and trouble conditions.
2.4 MANUAL FIRE-ALARM BOXES
A. General Requirements for Manual Fire-Mann Boxes: Comply with UL 38. Boxes shall be
finished in red with molded,raised-letter operating instructions in contrasting color; shall show
visible indication of operation; and shall be mounted on recessed outlet box. If indicated as
surface mounted,provide manufacturer's surface back box.
1. Single-action mechanism, pull-lever type; with integral addressable module arranged to
communicate manual-station status(normal,alarm,or trouble)to fire-alarm control unit.
2. Station Reset: Key-or wrench-operated switch.
2.5 SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS
A. General Requirements for System Smoke Detectors:
1. Comply with UL 268;operating at 24-V dc,nominal.
2. Detectors shall be four-wire type.
3. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm,
or trouble)to fire-alarm control unit.
4. Base Mounting: Detector and associated electronic components shall be mounted in a
twist-lock module that connects to a fixed base. Provide terminals in the fixed base for
connection to building wiring.
5. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to
restore them to normal operation.
6. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type indicating detector has operated.
B. Duct Smoke Detectors: Photoelectric type complying with UL 268A.
1. Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control unit and shall be able to
identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting.
2. Weatherproof Duct Housing Enclosure: NEMA 250,Type 4X;NRTL listed for use with
the supplied detector.
3. Sampling Tubes: Design and dimensions are recommended by manufacturer for specific
duct size,air velocity,and installation conditions where applied.
4. Relay Fan Shutdown: Rated to interrupt fan motor-control circuit.
5. Duct Detectors in RTU-1 through RTU-7 are existing. Provide with the unit. Connect to
fire alarm system for shut down and notification.
2.6 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES
A. General Requirements for Notification Appliances: Connected to notification appliance signal
circuits, zoned as indicated, equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for
system connections.
DIGITAL,ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 283111 -5
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
1. Combination Devices: Factory-integrated audible and visible devices in a single-
mounting assembly, equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for
system connections.
B. Horns: Electric-vibrating-polarized type, 24-V dc; with provision for housing the operating
mechanism behind a grille. Comply with UL 464. Horns shall produce a sound-pressure level
of 90 dBA, measured 10 feet from the horn, using the coded signal prescribed in UL 464 test
protocol.
C. Visible Notification Appliances: Xenon strobe lights comply with UL 1971, with clear or
nominal white polycarbonate lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate. The word "FIRE" is
engraved in minimum 1-inch-high letters on the lens.
1. Rated Light Output:
a. 15/30/75/110 cd,selectable in field.
2. Mounting: Wall mounted unless otherwise indicated.
3. For units with guards to prevent physical damage,light output ratings shall be determined
with guards in place.
4. Flashing shall be in a temporal pattern,synchronized with other units.
5. Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals.
6. Mounting Faceplate: Factory finished,white.
2.7 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR-EXISTING
2.8 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICE
A. Description: Microelectronic monitor module, NRTL listed for use in providing a system
address for alarm-initiating devices for wired applications with normally open contacts.
2.9 DIGITAL ALARM COMMUNICATOR TRANSMITTER-EXISTING
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NFPA 72 for installation of fire-alarm equipment.
B. Connecting to Existing Equipment: Verify that existing fire-alarm system is operational before
making changes or connections.
1. Connect new equipment to existing control panel in existing part of the building.
C. Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: 80 inch.
DIGITAL,ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 283111 -6
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
D. Visible Alarm-Indicating Devices: +80 inch.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Make addressable connections with a supervised interface device to the following devices and
systems. Install the interface device less than 3 feet from the device controlled. Make an
addressable confirmation connection when such feedback is available at the device or system
being controlled.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for
identification specified in Division 26 Section"Identification for Electrical Systems."
B. Install framed instructions in a location visible from fire-alarm control unit.
3.4 GROUNDING
A. Ground fire-alarm control unit and associated circuits;comply with IEEE 1100.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field tests shall be witnessed by authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect,
test,and adjust components,assemblies,and equipment installations,including connections.
C. Tests and Inspections:
1. Visual Inspection: Conduct visual inspection prior to testing.
a. Inspection shall be based on completed Record Drawings and system
documentation that is required by NFPA 72 in its "Completion Documents,
Preparation" Table in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire
Alarm Systems"Chapter.
b. Comply with"Visual Inspection Frequencies"Table in the "Inspection" Section of
the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72; retain the
"Initial/Reacceptance"column and list only the installed components.
2. System Testing: Comply with "Test Methods" Table in the "Testing" Section of the
"Inspection,Testing and Maintenance"Chapter in NFPA 72.
3. Test audible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Perform the test using a portable sound-level meter complying with Type 2
requirements in ANSI S1.4.
4. Test visible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
DIGITAL,ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 283111 -7
1
WHOLE FOODS MARKET-GREENWAY TOWN CENTER WFGNW
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 85%PERMIT DOCUMENTS
TIGARD,OREGON
5. Factory-authorized service representative shall prepare the"Fire Alarm System Record of
Completion" in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire Alarm
Systems" Chapter in NFPA 72 and the "Inspection and Testing Form" in the "Records"
Section of the"Inspection,Testing and Maintenance"Chapter in NFPA 72.
D. Reacceptance Testing: Perform reacceptance testing to verify the proper operation of added or
replaced devices and appliances.
E. Fire-alarm system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
F. Prepare test and inspection reports.
G. Maintenance Test and Inspection: Perform tests and inspections listed for weekly, monthly,
quarterly,and semiannual periods. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.
H. Annual Test and Inspection: One year after date of Substantial Completion, test fire-alarm
system complying with visual and testing inspection requirements in NFPA 72. Use forms
developed for initial tests and inspections.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust,operate,and maintain fire-alarm system.
END OF SECTION 283111
DIGITAL,ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 283111 -8